a standard cost a changes in direct proportion to changes in the level of activity b 648636

1. A standard cost (a) changes in direct proportion to changes in the level of activity, (b) is an amount incurred at the actual level of production for the period, or (c) is an amount incurred under normal conditions to provide a product or service.

2. What is a cost variance?

3. The following information is available for York Company.

Actual direct labor hours per unit   

25 hours

Standard direct labor hours per unit 

20 hours

Actual production (units)          

2,500 units

Budgeted production (units)       

3,000 units

Actual rate per hour             

$31.00

Standard rate per hour           

$3.00

The labor efficiency variance is (a) $3,750 U, (b) $3,750 F, or (c) $3,875 U.

if standard costs are recorded in the manufacturing accounts how are recorded varian 648638

1. A company uses a standard cost accounting system. Prepare the journal entry to record these  direct materials variances:

Direct materials cost actually incurred

$73,200

Direct materials quantity variance (favorable)

3,800

Direct materials price variance (unfavorable)

1,300

2. If standard costs are recorded in the manufacturing accounts, how are recorded variances treated at the end of an accounting period?

the following actual financial results are available for may prepare a flexible budg 648644

Santana Company sold 100,000 units of its product in May. For the level of production achieved in May, the budgeted amounts were: sales, $850,000; variable costs, $675,000; and fixed costs, $150,000. The following actual financial results are available for May. Prepare a flexible budget performance report for May.

Sales (100,000 units)         

$837,500

Variable costs               

656,250

Fixed costs                 

150,000

masters company applies overhead using machine hours and reports the following infor 648651

Masters Company applies overhead using machine hours and reports the following information. Compute the total variable overhead cost variance.

Actual machine hours used                     

4,950 hours

Standard machine hours                       

5,000 hours

Actual variable overhead rate per hour           

$4.10

Standard variable overhead rate per hour         

$4.00

compute the variable overhead spending variance and the variable overhead efficiency 648652

1. Masters Company applies overhead using machine hours and reports the following information. Compute the total variable overhead cost variance.

Actual machine hours used                     

4,950 hours

Standard machine hours                       

5,000 hours

Actual variable overhead rate per hour           

$4.10

Standard variable overhead rate per hour         

$4.00

2. Compute the variable overhead spending variance and the variable overhead efficiency variance.

the following information describes a company s usage of direct labor in a recent pe 648657

The following information describes a company’s usage of direct labor in a recent period. Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for the period.

Actual direct labor hours used                      

45,000

Actual direct labor rate per hour                    

$15

Standard direct labor rate per hour                  

$14

Standard direct labor hours for units produced         

47,000

aigne corp reports the following for november compute the controllable overhead vari 648658

1. Funk Co. expects to produce 48,000 units for the year. The company’s flexible budget for 48,000 units of production shows variable overhead costs of $72,000 and fixed overhead costs of $64,000. For the year, the company incurred actual overhead costs of $122,800 while producing 40,000 units. Compute the controllable overhead variance.

2. Aigne Corp. reports the following for November. Compute the controllable overhead variance for November.

Actual total factory overhead incurred                   

$28,175

Standard factory overhead:

 

Variable overhead                                   

$3.10 per unit produced

Fixed overhead

 

($12,000/6,000 predicted units to be produced)        

$2 per unit

Predicted units produced                              

6,000 units

Actual units produced                                 

4,800 units

aigne corp reports the following for november compute the controllable overhead vari 648659

1. Aigne Corp. reports the following for November. Compute the controllable overhead variance for November.

Actual total factory overhead incurred                   

$28,175

Standard factory overhead:

 

Variable overhead                                   

$3.10 per unit produced

Fixed overhead

 

($12,000/6,000 predicted units to be produced)        

$2 per unit

Predicted units produced                              

6,000 units

Actual units produced                                 

4,800 units

2. Compute the volume variance for November.

mesa company s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2011 reveals the 648661

Mesa Company’s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2011 reveals the following. Prepare flexible budgets following the format of Exhibit 24.3 that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 7,500, 10,000, and 12,500 units.

Sales (10,000 units)                  

 

$3,000,000

Cost of goods sold

 

 

Direct materials                  

$320,000

 

Direct labor                      

680,000

 

Production supplies               

264,000

 

Plant manager salary               

60,000

1,324,000

Gross profit                        

 

1,676,000

Selling expenses

 

 

Sales commissions                 

120,000

 

Packaging                        

210,000

 

Advertising                      

100,000

430,000

Administrative expenses

 

 

Administrative salaries             

80,000

 

Depreciation—office equip          

30,000

 

Insurance                        

18,000

 

Office rent                       

24,000

152,000

Income from operations              

 

$1,094,000

prepare a flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budget 648663

Cimarron Company’s fixed budget performance report for July follows. The $630,000 budgeted expenses include $588,000 variable expenses and $42,000 fixed expenses. Actual expenses include $54,000 fixed expenses. Prepare a flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budgeted results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately.

 

Fixed Budget

Actual Results

Variances

Sales (in units)

8,400

10,800

 

Sales (in dollars)

$840,000

$1,080,000

$240,000 F

Total expenses

630,000

756,000

126,000 U

Income from operations

$210,000

$ 324,000

$114,000 F

daytec company s fixed budget performance report for june follows the 440 000 budget 648664

Daytec Company’s fixed budget performance report for June follows. The $440,000 budgeted expenses include $300,000 variable expenses and $140,000 fixed expenses. Actual expenses include $130,000 fixed expenses. Prepare a flexible budget performance report showing any variances between budgeted and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately.

 

Fixed Budget

Actual Results

Variances

Sales (in units)                 

6,000

4,800

 

Sales (in dollars)               

$480,000

$422,400

$57,600 U

Total expenses                

440,000

394,000

46,000 F

Income from operations         

$ 40,000

$ 28,400

$11,600 U

sonic company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product for 2011 648666

Sonic Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product for 2011.

Direct material (20 Ibs. @ $2.50 per Ib.)

$50.00

Direct labor (15 hrs. @ $8.00 per hr.)

120

Factory variable overhead (15 hrs. @ $2.50 per hr.)

37.5

Factory fixed overhead (15 hrs. @ $0.50 per hr.)

7.5

Standard cost

$215.00

The $3.00 ($2.50 + $0.50) total overhead rate per direct labor hour is based on an expected operating level equal to 75% of the factory’s capacity of 50,000 units per month. The following monthly flexible budget information is also available.

 

Operating Levels (% of capacity)

 

70%

75%

80%

Budgeted output (units)

35,000

37,500

40,000

Budgeted labor (standard hours)

525,000

562,500

600,000

Budgeted overhead (dollars)

 

 

 

Variable overhead

$1,312,500

$1,406,250

$1,500,000

Fixed overhead

281,250

281,250

281,250

Total overhead

$1,593,750

$1,687,500

$1,781,250

During the current month, the company operated at 70% of capacity, employees worked 500,000 hours, and the following actual overhead costs were incurred.

Variable overhead costs        

$1,267,500

Fixed overhead costs          

285,000

Total overhead costs           

$1,552,500

(1) Show how the company computed its predetermined overhead application rate per hour for total overhead, variable overhead, and fixed overhead. (2) Compute the variable and fixed overhead variances.

prepare a one page report on the results of your analysis comment on the volume of s 648567

Multiproduct break even analysis is often viewed differently when actually applied in practice. You are to visit a local fast food restaurant and count the number of items on the menu. To apply multiproduct break even analysis to the restaurant, similar menu items must often be fit into groups. A reasonable approach is to classify menu items into approximately five groups. We then estimate average selling price and average variable cost to compute average contribution margin. (Hint: For fast food restaurants, the highest contribution margin is with its beverages, at about 90%.)

Required

1. Prepare a one year multiproduct break even analysis for the restaurant you visit. Begin by establishing groups. Next, estimate each group’s volume and contribution margin. These estimates are necessary to compute each group’s contribution margin. Assume that annual fixed costs in total are $500,000 per year.

2. Prepare a one page report on the results of your analysis. Comment on the volume of sales necessary to break even at a fast food restaurant.

wild wood company s management asks you to prepare its master budget using the follo 648572

Wild Wood Company’s management asks you to prepare its master budget using the following information. The budget is to cover the months of April, May, and June of 2011.

 

WILD WOOD COMPANY
Balance Sheet
March 31, 2011

Assets

 

Cash                  

$50,000

Accounts receivable       

175,000

Inventory              

126,000

Total current assets      

351,000

Equipment, gross        

480,000

Accumulated depreciation 

90,000

Equipment, net          

390,000

Total assets

$741,000

   

Liabilities and Equity

 

Accounts payable          

$156,000

Short term notes payable    

12,000

Total current liabilities      

168,000

Long term note payable     

200,000

Total liabilities             

368,000

Common stock            

235,000

Retained earnings          

138,000

Total stockholders’ equity   

373,000

Total liabilities and equity    

$741,000

 

Additional Information

a. Sales for March total 10,000 units. Each month’s sales are expected to exceed the prior month’s results by 5%. The product’s selling price is $25 per unit.

b. Company policy calls for a given month’s ending inventory to equal 80% of the next month’s expected unit sales. The March 31 inventory is 8,400 units, which complies with the policy. The purchase price is $15 per unit.

c. Sales representatives’ commissions are 12.5% of sales and are paid in the month of the sales. The sales manager’s monthly salary will be $3,500 in April and $4,000 per month thereafter.

d. Monthly general and administrative expenses include $8,000 administrative salaries, $5,000 depreciation, and 0.9% monthly interest on the long term note payable.

e. The company expects 30% of sales to be for cash and the remaining 70% on credit. Receivables are collected in full in the month following the sale (none is collected in the month of the sale).

f. All merchandise purchases are on credit, and no payables arise from any other transactions. One month’s purchases are fully paid in the next month.

 g. The minimum ending cash balance for all months is $50,000. If necessary, the company borrows enough cash using a short term note to reach the minimum. Short term notes require an interest payment of 1% at each month end (before any repayment). If the ending cash balance exceeds the minimum, the excess will be applied to repaying the short term notes payable balance.

h. Dividends of $100,000 are to be declared and paid in May.

i. No cash payments for income taxes are to be made during the second calendar quarter. Income taxes will be assessed at 35% in the quarter.

j. Equipment purchases of $55,000 are scheduled for June.

Required

Prepare the following budgets and other financial information as required:

1. Sales budget, including budgeted sales for July.

2. Purchases budget, the budgeted cost of goods sold for each month and quarter, and the cost of the June 30 budgeted inventory.

3. Selling expense budget.

4. General and administrative expense budget.

5. Expected cash receipts from customers and the expected June 30 balance of accounts receivable.

6. Expected cash payments for purchases and the expected June 30 balance of accounts payable.

7. Cash budget.

8. Budgeted income statement.

9. Budgeted statement of retained earnings.

10. Budgeted balance sheet.

kyoto inc predicts the following sales in units for the coming three months 648589

Kyoto, Inc. predicts the following sales in units for the coming three months:

 

May

June

July

Sales in units

280

300

240

Each month’s ending inventory of finished units should be 60% of the next month’s sales. The April 30 finished goods inventory is 168 units. Compute Kyoto’s budgeted production (in units) for May.

prepare a sales budget for the months of january february and march 648591

Shay, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the quarter ending March 31. It sells a single product for $25 per unit. Budgeted sales for the next four months follow. Prepare a sales budget for the months of January, February, and March.

 

January

February

March

April

Sales in units

1,200

1,000

1,600

1,400

the january 1 balance in accounts receivable is 10 000 prepare a schedule of budgete 648592

1. Shay, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the quarter ending March 31. It sells a single product for $25 per unit. Budgeted sales for the next four months follow. Prepare a sales budget for the months of January, February, and March.

 

January

February

March

April

Sales in units

1,200

1,000

1,600

1,400

2. In addition, sales are 40% cash and 60% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The January 1 balance in accounts receivable is $10,000. Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash receipts for January, February, and March.

company policy is to end each month with merchandise inventory equal to a specified 648595

Formworks Company prepares monthly budgets. The current budget plans for a September ending inventory of 15,000 units. Company policy is to end each month with merchandise inventory equal to a specified percent of budgeted sales for the following month. Budgeted sales and merchandise purchases for the three most recent months follow. (1) Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for the months of July, August, and September. (2) Compute the ratio of ending inventory to the next month’s sales for each budget prepared in part 1. (3) How many units are budgeted for sale in October?

 

Sales (Units)

Purchases (Units)

July              

120,000

138,000

August           

210,000

204,000

September        

180,000

159,000

kasik co budgeted the following cash receipts and cash disbursements for the first t 648596

Kasik Co. budgeted the following cash receipts and cash disbursements for the first three months of next year.

 

Cash Receipts

Cash Disbursements

January          

$500,000

$450,000

February         

300,000

250,000

March           

400,000

500,000

According to a credit agreement with the company’s bank, Kasik promises to have a minimum cash balance of $30,000 at each month end. In return, the bank has agreed that the company can borrow up to $150,000 at an annual interest rate of 12%, paid on the last day of each month. The interest is computed based on the beginning balance of the loan for the month. The company has a cash balance of $30,000 and a loan balance of $60,000 at January 1. Prepare monthly cash budgets for each of the first three months of next year.

sand dollar company purchases all merchandise on credit it recently budgeted the fol 648599

Sand Dollar Company purchases all merchandise on credit. It recently budgeted the following month end accounts payable balances and merchandise inventory balances. Cash payments on accounts payable during each month are expected to be: May, $1,300,000; June, $1,450,000; July, $1,350,000; and August, $1,400,000. Use the available information to compute the budgeted amounts of (1) merchandise purchases for June, July, and August and (2) cost of goods sold for June, July, and August.

 

Accounts Payable

Merchandise Inventory

31 May

$120,000

$250,000

30 Jun

170,000

400,000

31 Jul

200,000

300,000

31 Aug

160,000

330,000

sound check a merchandising company specializing in home computer speakers budgets i 648600

Sound Check, a merchandising company specializing in home computer speakers, budgets its monthly cost of goods sold to equal 70% of sales. Its inventory policy calls for ending inventory in each month to equal 25% of the next month”s budgeted cost of goods sold. All purchases are on credit, and 20% of the purchases in a month is paid for in the same month. Another 50% is paid for during the first month after purchase, and the remaining 30% is paid for in the second month after purchase. The following sales budgets are set: July, $300,000; August, $240,000; September, $270,000; October, $240,000; and November, $210,000. Compute the following: (1) budgeted merchandise purchases for July, August, September, and October; (2) budgeted payments on accounts payable for September and October; and (3) budgeted ending balances of accounts payable for September and October. (Hint: For part 1, refer to Exhibits 23.7 and 23.8 for guidance, but note that budgeted sales are in dollars for this assignment.)

each transmission requires 0 60 pounds of a key raw material nascar company aims to 648602

1. Nascar Company manufactures an innovative automobile transmission for electric cars. Management predicts that ending inventory for the first quarter will be 37,500 units. The following unit sales of the transmissions are expected during the rest of the year: second quarter, 225,000 units; third quarter, 262,500 units; and fourth quarter, 237,500 units. Company policy calls for the ending inventory of a quarter to equal 20% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales. Prepare a production budget for both the second and third quarters that shows the number of transmissions to manufacture.

2. Each transmission requires 0.60 pounds of a key raw material. Nascar Company aims to end each quarter with an ending inventory of direct materials equal to 50% of next quarter’s budgeted materials requirements. Direct materials cost $175 per unit. Prepare a direct materials budget for the second quarter.

prepare a cash budget for october november and december round interest payments to t 648607

Fabrice Corp. requires a minimum $6,000 cash balance. If necessary, loans are taken to meet this requirement at a cost of 1% interest per month (paid monthly). Any excess cash is used to repay loans at monthend. The cash balance on October 1 is $6,000 and the company has an outstanding loan of $2,000. Forecasted cash receipts (other than for loans received) and forecasted cash payments (other than for loan or interest payments) follow. Prepare a cash budget for October, November, and December. Round interest payments to the nearest whole dollar.

 

October

November

December

Cash receipts              

$22,000

$16,000

$20,000

Cash disbursements        

24,000

15,000

16,000

cambridge inc is preparing its master budget for the quarter ended june 30 budgeted 648608

Cambridge, Inc. is preparing its master budget for the quarter ended June 30. Budgeted sales and cash payments for merchandise for the next three months follow:

 

April

May

June

Budgeted sales                    

$32,000

$40,000

$24,000

Budgeted cash payments for

 

 

 

merchandise                    

20,200

16,800

17,200

Sales are 60% cash and 40% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The March 30 balance sheet includes balances of $12,000 in cash, $12,000 in accounts receivable, $11,000 in accounts payable, and a $2,000 balance in loans payable. A minimum cash balance of $12,000 is required. Loans are obtained at the end of any month when a cash shortage occurs. Interest is 1% per month based on the beginning of the month loan balance and is paid at each month end. If an excess balance of cash exists, loans are repaid at the end of the month. Operating expenses are paid in the month incurred and consist of sales commissions (10% of sales), shipping (3% of sales), office salaries ($3,000 per month) and rent ($5,000 per month). Prepare a cash budget for each of the months of April, May, and June (round all dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar).

kool ray is preparing its master budget for the quarter ended september 30 budgeted 648609

Kool Ray is preparing its master budget for the quarter ended September 30. Budgeted sales and cash payments for merchandise for the next three months follow:

 

July

August

September

Budgeted sales                    

$64,000

$80,000

$48,000

Budgeted cash payments for

 

 

 

merchandise                    

40,400

33,600

34,400

Sales are 20% cash and 80% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The June 30 balance sheet includes balances of $12,000 in cash; $45,000 in accounts receivable; $4,500 in accounts payable; and a $2,000 balance in loans payable. A minimum cash balance of $12,000 is required. Loans are obtained at the end of any month when a cash shortage occurs. Interest is 1% per month based on the beginning of the month loan balance and is paid at each month end. If an excess balance of cash exists, loans are repaid at the end of the month. Operating expenses are paid in the month incurred and consist of sales commissions (10% of sales), office salaries ($4,000 per month), and rent ($6,500 per month). (1) Prepare a cash receipts budget for July, August, and September. (2) Prepare a cash budget for each of the months of July, August, and September. (Round all dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.)

The following information is available for Zhao Company:

a. The cash budget for March shows an ending bank loan of $10,000 and an ending cash balance of $48,000. b. The sales budget for March indicates sales of $120,000. Accounts receivable are expected to be 70% of the current month sales.

c. The merchandise purchases budget indicates that $89,000 in merchandise will be purchased on account in March. Purchases on account are paid 100% in the month following the purchase. Ending inventory for March is predicted to be 600 units at a cost of $35 each.

d. The budgeted income statement for March shows net income of $48,000. Depreciation expense of $1,000 and $26,000 in income tax expense were used in computing net income for March. Accrued taxes will be paid in April.

e. The balance sheet for February shows equipment of $84,000 with accumulated depreciation of $30,000, common stock of $25,000, and ending retained earnings of $8,000. There are no changes budgeted in the equipment or common stock accounts.

Prepare a budgeted balance sheet for March.

the company sells a single product at a price of 25 per unit sales in units are fore 648610

Zulu, Inc., is preparing its master budget for the first quarter. The company sells a single product at a price of $25 per unit. Sales (in units) are forecasted at 40,000 for January, 60,000 for February, and 50,000 for March. Cost of goods sold is $14 per unit. Other expense information for the first quarter follows. Prepare a budgeted income statement for this first quarter.

Commissions         

10% of sales

Rent                

$20,000 per month

Advertising          

15% of sales

Office salaries        

$75,000 per month

Depreciation         

$50,000 per month

Interest             

15% annually on a $250,000 note payable

Tax rate             

40%

prepare a direct materials budget for april may and june 648613

1. Rad Co. provides the following sales forecast for the next four months:

 

April

May

June

July

Sales (units)

500

580

530

600

The company wants to end each month with ending finished goods inventory equal to 20% of next month’s sales. Finished goods inventory on April 1 is 174 units. Assume July’s budgeted production is 540 units.

Prepare a production budget for the months of April, May, and June.

2. In addition, assume each finished unit requires five pounds of raw materials and the company wants to end each month with raw materials inventory equal to 30% of next month’s production needs. Beginning raw materials inventory for April was 663 pounds.

Prepare a direct materials budget for April, May, and June.

match the definitions 1 through 9 with the term or phrase a through i 648614

Match the definitions 1 through 9 with the term or phrase a through i.

A. Master budget

B. General and administrative expense budget

C. Budget

D. Safety stock

E. Budgeted income statement

F. Budgeted balance sheet

G. Sales budget

H. Cash budget

I. Merchandise purchases budget

1. A plan that shows the units or costs of merchandise to be purchased by a merchandising company during the budget period.

2. An accounting report that presents predicted amounts of the company’s assets, liabilities, and equity balances at the end of the budget period.

3. A plan showing the units of goods to be sold and the sales to be derived; the usual starting point in the budgeting process.

4. An accounting report that presents predicted amounts of the company’s revenues and expenses for the budgeting period.

5. A quantity of inventory or materials over the minimum to reduce the risk of running short.

6. A comprehensive business plan that includes specific plans for expected sales, the units of product to be produced, the merchandise or materials to be purchased, the expenses to be incurred, the long term assets to be purchased, and the amounts of cash to be borrowed or loans to be repaid, as well as a budgeted income statement and balance sheet.

7. A formal statement of a company’s future plans, usually expressed in monetary terms.

8. A plan that shows predicted operating expenses not included in the selling expenses budget.

9. A plan that shows the expected cash inflows and cash outflows during the budget period, including receipts from any loans needed to maintain a minimum cash balance and repayments of such loans.

participatory budgeting can sometimes lead to negative consequences identify three p 648615

1. Participatory budgeting can sometimes lead to negative consequences. Identify three potential negative outcomes that can arise from participatory budgeting.

2. Kirk Co. CPA is preparing activity based budgets for 2011. The partners expect the firm to generate billable hours for the year as follows:

Data entry         

1,100 hours

Auditing           

2,400 hours

Tax               

2,150 hours

Consulting        

375 hours

The company pays $8 per hour to data entry clerks, $40 per hour to audit personnel, $50 per hour to tax personnel, and $50 per hour to consulting personnel. Prepare a schedule of budgeted labor costs for 2011 using activity based budgeting.

as a result a new policy dictates that ending inventory in any month should equal 40 648616

Pinsetter’s Supply is a merchandiser of three different products. The company’s February 28 inventories are footwear, 15,500 units; sports equipment, 70,000 units; and apparel, 40,000 units. Management believes that excessive inventories have accumulated for all three products. As a result, a new policy dictates that ending inventory in any month should equal 40% of the expected unit sales for the following month. Expected sales in units for March, April, May, and June follow.

 

Budgeted Sales in Units

 

March

April

May

June

Footwear               

10,000

20,000

30,000

33,000

Sports equipment        

66,000

85,000

90,000

80,000

Apparel                

36,000

30,000

30,000

18,000

Required

1. Prepare a merchandise purchases budget (in units) for each product for each of the months of March, April, and May.

2. The purchases budgets in part 1 should reflect fewer purchases of all three products in March compared to those in April and May. What factor caused fewer purchases to be planned? Suggest business conditions that would cause this factor to both occur and impact the company in this way.

abacus company sells its product for 125 per unit its actual and projected sales fol 648617

Abacus Company sells its product for $125 per unit. Its actual and projected sales follow.

 

Units

Dollars

April (actual)             

8,000

$1,000,000

May (actual)              

4,000

500,000

June (budgeted)           

12,000

1,500,000

July (budgeted)            

6,000

750,000

August (budgeted)         

7,600

950,000

All sales are on credit. Recent experience shows that 20% of credit sales is collected in the month of the sale, 30% in the month after the sale, 48% in the second month after the sale, and 2% proves to be uncollectible. The product’s purchase price is $100 per unit. All purchases are payable within 12 days. Thus, 60% of purchases made in a month is paid in that month and the other 40% is paid in the next month. The company has a policy to maintain an ending monthly inventory of 25% of the next month’s unit sales plus a safety stock of 100 units. The April 30 and May 31 actual inventory levels are consistent with this policy. Selling and administrative expenses for the year are $1,200,000 and are paid evenly throughout the year in cash. The company’s minimum cash balance at month end is $60,000. This minimum is maintained, if necessary, by borrowing cash from the bank. If the balance exceeds $60,000, the company repays as much of the loan as it can without going below the minimum. This type of loan carries an annual 9% interest rate. On May 31, the loan balance is $32,000, and the company’s cash balance is $60,000.

Required

1. Prepare a table that shows the computation of cash collections of its credit sales (accounts receivable) in each of the months of June and July.

2. Prepare a table that shows the computation of budgeted ending inventories (in units) for April, May, June, and July.

3. Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for May, June, and July. Report calculations in units and then show the dollar amount of purchases for each month.

4. Prepare a table showing the computation of cash payments on product purchases for June and July.

5. Prepare a cash budget for June and July, including any loan activity and interest expense. Compute the loan balance at the end of each month.

6. Refer to your answer to part 5. Abacus’s cash budget indicates the company will need to borrow more than $40,000 in June and will need to borrow $60,000 in July. Suggest some reasons that knowing this information in May would be helpful to management.

lilliput a one product mail order firm buys its product for 60 per unit and sells it 648618

Lilliput, a one product mail order firm, buys its product for $60 per unit and sells it for $130 per unit. The sales staff receives a 10% commission on the sale of each unit. Its December income statement follows.

LILLIPUT COMPANY

Income Statement

For Month Ended December 31, 2011

Sales                           

$1,300,000

Cost of goods sold               

600,000

Gross profit                     

700,000

Expenses

 

Sales commissions (10%)        

130,000

Advertising                   

200,000

Store rent                    

24,000

Administrative salaries          

40,000

Depreciation                  

50,000

Other expenses               

12,000

Total expenses                 

456,000

Net income                     

$ 244,000

Management expects December’s results to be repeated in January, February, and March of 2012 without any changes in strategy. Management, however, has an alternative plan. It believes that unit sales will increase at a rate of 10% each month for the next three months (beginning with January) if the item’s selling price is reduced to $115 per unit and advertising expenses are increased by 25% and remain at that level for all three months. The cost of its product will remain at $60 per unit, the sales staff will continue to earn a 10% commission, and the remaining expenses will stay the same.

Required

1. Prepare budgeted income statements for each of the months of January, February, and March that show the expected results from implementing the proposed changes. Use a three column format, with one column for each month.

2. Use the budgeted income statements from part 1 to recommend whether management should implement the proposed changes. Explain.

hubert tax service offers tax and consulting services to individuals and small busin 648542

Hubert Tax Service offers tax and consulting services to individuals and small businesses. Data for fees and costs of three types of tax returns follow. Hubert provides services in the ratio of 4:4:2 (easy, moderate, business). Fixed costs total $20,000 for the tax season. Use this information to determine the (1) selling price per composite unit, (2) variable costs per composite unit, (3) breakeven point in composite units, and (4) number of units of each product that will be sold at the break even point. Round answer to part (3) to two decimals.

Type of Return

Fee

Charged

Variable Cost

per Return

Easy (form 1040EZ)          

$ 50

$ 30

Moderate (form 1040)        

125

75

Business                   

275

100

use the information to determine the 1 weightedaverage contribution margin 2 break e 648543

1. Hubert Tax Service offers tax and consulting services to individuals and small businesses. Data for fees and costs of three types of tax returns follow. Hubert provides services in the ratio of 4:4:2 (easy, moderate, business). Fixed costs total $20,000 for the tax season. Use this information to determine the (1) selling price per composite unit, (2) variable costs per composite unit, (3) breakeven point in composite units, and (4) number of units of each product that will be sold at the break even point. Round answer to part (3) to two decimals.

Type of Return

Fee

Charged

Variable Cost

per Return

Easy (form 1040EZ)          

$ 50

$ 30

Moderate (form 1040)        

125

75

Business                   

275

100

2. Use the information to determine the (1) weightedaverage contribution margin, (2) break even point in units, and (3) number of units of each product that will be sold at the break even point. Round answer to part (2) to one decimal.

the following costs result from the production and sale of 4 000 drum sets manufactu 648545

The following costs result from the production and sale of 4,000 drum sets manufactured by Vince Drum Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. The drum sets sell for $250 each. The company has a 25% income tax rate.

Variable production costs

 

Plastic for casing                       

$ 68,000

Wages of assembly workers              

328,000

Drum stands                          

104,000

Variable selling costs

 

Sales commissions                      

60,000

Fixed manufacturing costs

 

Taxes on factory                       

10,000

Factory maintenance                    

20,000

Factory machinery depreciation           

80,000

Fixed selling and administrative costs

 

Lease of equipment for sales staff          

20,000

Accounting staff salaries                 

70,000

Administrative management salaries        

150,000

Required

1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the company.

2. Compute its contribution margin per unit and its contribution margin ratio.

3. Interpret the contribution margin and contribution margin ratio from part 2.

estimate product xt s break even point in terms of a sales units and b sales dollars 648546

Edge Equipment Co. manufactures and markets a number of rope products. Management is considering the future of Product XT, a special rope for hang gliding, that has not been as profitable as planned. Since Product XT is manufactured and marketed independently of the other products, its total costs can be precisely measured. Next year’s plans call for a $150 selling price per 100 yards of XT rope. Its fixed costs for the year are expected to be $200,000, up to a maximum capacity of 550,000 yards of rope. Forecasted variable costs are $100 per 100 yards of XT rope.

Required

1. Estimate Product XT’s break even point in terms of (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars.

2. Prepare a CVP chart for Product XT like that in Exhibit 22.14. Use 5,500 units (550,000 yards/100 yards) as the maximum number of sales units on the horizontal axis of the graph, and $900,000 as the maximum dollar amount on the vertical axis.

3. Prepare a contribution margin income statement showing sales, variable costs, and fixed costs for Product XT at the break even point.

alden co s monthly sales and cost data for its operating activities of the past year 648547

Alden Co.’s monthly sales and cost data for its operating activities of the past year follow. Management wants to use these data to predict future fixed and variable costs.

Month

Sales

Total Cost

Month

Sales

Total Cost

1

$325,000

$162,500

7

$355,000

$242,000

2

170,000

106,250

8

275,000

156,750

3

270,000

210,600

9

75,000

60,000

4

210,000

105,000

10

155,000

135,625

5

295,000

206,500

11

99,000

99,000

6

195,000

117,000

12

105,000

76,650

Required

1. Prepare a scatter diagram for these data with sales volume (in $) plotted on the horizontal axis and total cost plotted on the vertical axis.

2. Estimate both the variable costs per sales dollar and the total monthly fixed costs using the high low method. Draw the total costs line on the scatter diagram in part 1.

3. Use the estimated line of cost behavior and results from part 2 to predict future total costs when sales volume is (a) $380,000 and (b) $420,000.

compute the predicted break even point in dollar sales for year 2012 assuming the ma 648548

Jetson Co. sold 20,000 units of its only product and incurred a $50,000 loss (ignoring taxes) for the current year as shown here. During a planning session for year 2012’s activities, the production manager notes that variable costs can be reduced 50% by installing a machine that automates several operations. To obtain these savings, the company must increase its annual fixed costs by $150,000. The maximum output capacity of the company is 40,000 units per year.

JETSON COMPANY

Contribution Margin Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales                     

$750,000

Variable costs              

600,000

Contribution margin        

150,000

Fixed costs                

200,000

Net loss                  

$ (50,000)

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for year 2011.

2. Compute the predicted break even point in dollar sales for year 2012 assuming the machine is installed and there is no change in the unit sales price.

3. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement for 2012 that shows the expected results with the machine installed. Assume that the unit sales price and the number of units sold will not change, and no income taxes will be due.

4. Compute the sales level required in both dollars and units to earn $140,000 of after tax income in 2012 with the machine installed and no change in the unit sales price. Assume that the income tax rate is 30%.

5. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement that shows the results at the sales level computed in part 4. Assume an income tax rate of 30%.

if sales greatly decrease which product would experience a greater loss explain 648549

Letter Co. produces and sells two products, T and O. It manufactures these products in separate factories and markets them through different channels. They have no shared costs. This year, the company sold 50,000 units of each product. Sales and costs for each product follow.

 

Product T

Product O

Sales                         

$800,000

$800,000

Variable costs                  

560,000

100,000

Contribution margin            

240,000

700,000

Fixed costs                    

100,000

560,000

Income before taxes            

140,000

140,000

Income taxes (32% rate)         

44,800

44,800

Net income                   

$ 95,200

$ 95,200

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for each product.

2. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to decline to 33,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement as just shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32% tax rate). Also, assume that any loss before taxes yields a 32% tax savings.

3. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to increase to 64,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32% tax rate).

4. If sales greatly decrease, which product would experience a greater loss? Explain.

5. Describe some factors that might have created the different cost structures for these two products.

manufacturing and selling the product required 120 000 of fixed manufacturing costs 648550

This year Cairo Company sold 35,000 units of its only product for $16 per unit. Manufacturing and selling the product required $120,000 of fixed manufacturing costs and $180,000 of fixed selling and administrative costs. Its per unit variable costs follow.

Material                                            

$4.00

Direct labor (paid on the basis of completed units)                                        

3.00

Variable overhead costs

0.40

Variable selling and administrative costs                    

0.20

Next year the company will use new material, which will reduce material costs by 60% and direct labor costs by 40% and will not affect product quality or marketability. Management is considering an increase in the unit sales price to reduce the number of units sold because the factory’s output is nearing its annual output capacity of 40,000 units. Two plans are being considered. Under plan 1, the company will keep the price at the current level and sell the same volume as last year. This plan will increase income because of the reduced costs from using the new material. Under plan 2, the company will increase price by 25%. This plan will decrease unit sales volume by 10%. Under both plans 1 and 2, the total fixed costs and the variable costs per unit for overhead and for selling and administrative costs will remain the same.

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for both (a) plan 1 and (b) plan 2.

2. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement with two columns showing the expected results of plan 1 and plan 2. The statements should report sales, total variable costs, contribution margin, total fixed costs, income before taxes, income taxes (30% rate), and net income.

if the company continues to use the old material determine its break even point in b 648551

National Co. manufactures and sells three products: red, white, and blue. Their unit sales prices are red, $55; white, $85; and blue, $110. The per unit variable costs to manufacture and sell these products are red, $40; white, $60; and blue, $80. Their sales mix is reflected in a ratio of 5:4:2 (red:white:blue). Annual fixed costs shared by all three products are $150,000. One type of raw material has been used to manufacture all three products. The company has developed a new material of equal quality for less cost. The new material would reduce variable costs per unit as follows: red, by $10; white, by $20; and blue, by $10. However, the new material requires new equipment, which will increase annual fixed costs by $20,000. (Round answers to whole composite units.)

Required

1. If the company continues to use the old material, determine its break even point in both sales units and sales dollars of each individual product.

2. If the company uses the new material, determine its new break even point in both sales units and sales dollars of each individual product.

3. What insight does this analysis offer management for long term planning?

the following costs result from the production and sale of 480 000 cd sets manufactu 648552

The following costs result from the production and sale of 480,000 CD sets manufactured by Trace Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. The CD sets sell for $4.50 each. The company has a 25% income tax rate.

Variable manufacturing costs

 

Plastic for CD sets                      

$ 43,200

Wages of assembly workers               

600,000

Labeling                               

86,400

Variable selling costs

 

Sales commissions                       

48,000

Fixed manufacturing costs

 

Rent on factory                         

100,000

Factory cleaning service                  

75,000

Factory machinery depreciation             

125,000

Fixed selling and administrative costs

 

Lease of office equipment                 

120,000

Systems staff salaries                     

600,000

Administrative management salaries         

300,000

Required

1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the company.

2. Compute its contribution margin per unit and its contribution margin ratio.

3. Interpret the contribution margin and contribution margin ratio from part 2.

prepare a contribution margin income statement showing sales variable costs and fixe 648553

Jammin Co. manufactures and markets several products. Management is considering the future of one product, electronic keyboards, that has not been as profitable as planned. Since this product is manufactured and marketed independently of the other products, its total costs can be precisely measured. Next year’s plans call for a $225 selling price per unit. The fixed costs for the year are expected to be $30,000, up to a maximum capacity of 700 units. Forecasted variable costs are $150 per unit.

Required

1. Estimate the keyboards’ break even point in terms of (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars.

2. Prepare a CVP chart for keyboards like that in Exhibit 22.14. Use 700 keyboards as the maximum number of sales units on the horizontal axis of the graph, and $180,000 as the maximum dollar amount on the vertical axis.

3. Prepare a contribution margin income statement showing sales, variable costs, and fixed costs for keyboards at the break even point.

koto co s monthly sales and costs data for its operating activities of the past year 648554

Koto Co.’s monthly sales and costs data for its operating activities of the past year follow. Management wants to use these data to predict future fixed and variable costs.

Month

Sales

Total Cost

Month

Sales

Total Cost

1

$390

$194

7

$290

$186

2

250

174

8

370

210

3

210

146

9

270

170

4

310

178

10

170

116

5

190

162

11

350

190

6

430

220

12

230

158

Required

1. Prepare a scatter diagram for these data with sales volume (in $) plotted on the horizontal axis and total costs plotted on the vertical axis.

2. Estimate both the variable costs per sales dollar and the total monthly fixed costs using the high low method. Draw the total costs line on the scatter diagram in part 1.

3. Use the estimated line of cost behavior and results from part 2 to predict future total costs when sales volume is (a) $150 and (b) $250.

prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement that shows the results at 648555

Caruso Co. sold 40,000 units of its only product and incurred a $100,000 loss (ignoring taxes) for the current year as shown here. During a planning session for year 2012’s activities, the production manager notes that variable costs can be reduced 50% by installing a machine that automates several operations. To obtain these savings, the company must increase its annual fixed costs by $300,000. The maximum output capacity of the company is 80,000 units per year.

CARUSO COMPANY

Contribution Margin Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales                     

$1,500,000

Variable costs              

1,200,000

Contribution margin        

300,000

Fixed costs                

400,000

Net loss                  

$ (100,000)

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for year 2011.

2. Compute the predicted break even point in dollar sales for year 2012 assuming the machine is installed and no change occurs in the unit sales price. (Round the change in variable costs to a whole number.)

3. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement for 2012 that shows the expected results with the machine installed. Assume that the unit sales price and the number of units sold will not change, and no income taxes will be due.

4. Compute the sales level required in both dollars and units to earn $280,000 of after tax income in 2012 with the machine installed and no change in the unit sales price. Assume that the income tax rate is 30%.

5. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement that shows the results at the sales level computed in part 4. Assume an income tax rate of 30%.

they have no shared costs this year the company sold 120 000 units of each product s 648556

Dominico Co. produces and sells two products, BB and TT. It manufactures these products in separate factories and markets them through different channels. They have no shared costs. This year, the company sold 120,000 units of each product. Sales and costs for each product follow.

 

Product BB

Product TT

Sales                         

$3,000,000

$3,000,000

Variable costs                  

1,800,000

600,000

Contribution margin            

1,200,000

2,400,000

Fixed costs                    

600,000

1,800,000

Income before taxes            

600,000

600,000

Income taxes (35% rate)         

210,000

210,000

Net income                   

$ 390,000

$ 390,000

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales for each product.

2. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to decline to 104,000 units next year with no change in the unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement as shown here with columns for each of the two products (assume a 35% tax rate, and that any loss before taxes yields a 35% tax savings).

3. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to increase to 190,000 units next year with no change in the unit sales prices. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement as shown here with columns for each of the two products (assume a 35% tax rate).

4. If sales greatly increase, which product would experience a greater increase in profit? Explain.

5. Describe some factors that might have created the different cost structures for these two products.

the company buys its product in bulk and repackages it for resale at the price of 25 648557

This year Jostens Company earned a disappointing 4.2% after tax return on sales (Net income/Sales) from marketing 100,000 units of its only product. The company buys its product in bulk and repackages it for resale at the price of $25 per unit. Jostens incurred the following costs this year.

Total variable unit costs              

$1,000,000

Total variable packaging costs         

$ 100,000

Fixed costs                        

$1,250,000

Income tax rate                    

30%

The marketing manager claims that next year’s results will be the same as this year’s unless some changes are made. The manager predicts the company can increase the number of units sold by 80% if it reduces the selling price by 20% and upgrades the packaging. This change would increase variable packaging costs by 25%. Increased sales would allow the company to take advantage of a 20% quantity purchase discount on the cost of the bulk product. Neither the packaging change nor the volume discount would affect fixed costs, which provide an annual output capacity of 200,000 units.

Required

1. Compute the break even point in dollar sales under the (a) existing business strategy and (b) new strategy that alters both unit sales price and variable costs.

2. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement with two columns showing the expected results of (a) the existing strategy and (b) changing to the new strategy. The statements should report sales, total variable costs (unit and packaging), contribution margin, fixed costs, income before taxes, income taxes, and net income. Also determine the after tax return on sales for these two strategies.

what insight does this analysis offer management for long term planning 648558

Texon Co. manufactures and sells three products: product 1, product 2, and product 3. Their unit sales prices are product 1, $40; product 2, $30; and product 3, $14. The per unit variable costs to manufacture and sell these products are product 1, $30; product 2, $20; and product 3, $8. Their sales mix is reflected in a ratio of 6 : 3: 5. Annual fixed costs shared by all three products are $200,000. One type of raw material has been used to manufacture products 1 and 2. The company has developed a new material of equal quality for less cost. The new material would reduce variable costs per unit as follows: product 1 by $10, and product 2, by $5. However, the new material requires new equipment, which will increase annual fixed costs by $50,000.

Required

1. If the company continues to use the old material, determine its break even point in both sales units and sales dollars of each individual product.

2. If the company uses the new material, determine its new break even point in both sales units and sales dollars of each individual product.

3. What insight does this analysis offer management for long term planning?

identify several of the variable mixed and fixed costs that the blackberry services 648560

Research In Motion offers services to Blackberry customers that allows them subscription access for wireless connectivity via a mobile carrier. As you complete the following requirements, assume that the Blackberry services department uses many of Research In Motion’s existing resources such as its software, phone systems, account databases and buildings.

Required

1. Identify several of the variable, mixed, and fixed costs that the Blackberry services department is likely to incur in carrying out its services.

2. Assume that Blackberry services revenues are expected to grow by 25% in the next year. How do you expect the costs identified in part 1 to change, if at all?

3. Based on your answer to part 2, can Research In Motion use the contribution margin ratio to predict how income will change in response to increases in Blackberry services revenues?

both research in motion and apple sell numerous hand held consumer products and each 648561

Both Research In Motion and Apple sell numerous hand held consumer products, and each of these companies has a different product mix.

Required

1. Assume the following data are available for both companies. Compute each company’s break even point in unit sales. (Each company sells many hand held consumer products at many different selling prices, and each has its own variable costs. This assignment assumes an average selling price per unit and an average cost per item.)

 

Research In Motion

Apple

Average selling price per item sold          

$350

$280

Average variable cost per item sold         

$140

$110

Total fixed costs                         

$14,980 million

$12,580 million

2. If unit sales were to decline, which company would experience the larger decline in operating profit? Explain.

write a one page memorandum to the mechanics and owners that describes the direct la 648562

Labor costs of an auto repair mechanic are seldom based on actual hours worked. Instead, the amount paid a mechanic is based on an industry average of time estimated to complete a repair job. The repair shop bills the customer for the industry average amount of time at the repair center’s billable cost per hour. This means a customer can pay, for example, $120 for two hours of work on a car when the actual time worked was only one hour. Many experienced mechanics can complete repair jobs faster than the industry average. The average data are compiled by engineering studies and surveys conducted in the auto repair business. Assume that you are asked to complete such a survey for a repair center. The survey calls for objective input, and many questions require detailed cost data and analysis. The mechanics and owners know you have the survey and encourage you to complete it in a way that increases the average billable hours for repair work.

Required

Write a one page memorandum to the mechanics and owners that describes the direct labor analysis you will undertake in completing this survey.

your team is to prepare two separate lists of questions that enable you to complete 648565

A local movie theater owner explains to you that ticket sales on weekends and evenings are strong, but attendance during the weekdays, Monday through Thursday, is poor. The owner proposes to offer a contract to the local grade school to show educational materials at the theater for a set charge per student during school hours. The owner asks your help to prepare a CVP analysis listing the cost and sales projections for the proposal. The owner must propose to the school’s administration a charge per child. At a minimum, the charge per child needs to be sufficient for the theater to break even.

Required

Your team is to prepare two separate lists of questions that enable you to complete a reliable CVP analysis of this situation. One list is to be answered by the school’s administration, the other by the owner of the movie theater.

the following net income calculation is on the denver store manager s performance re 648505

Home Station is a national home improvement chain with more than 100 stores throughout the country. The manager of each store receives a salary plus a bonus equal to a percent of the store’s net income for the reporting period. The following net income calculation is on the Denver store manager’s performance report for the recent monthly period.

Sales                        

$2,500,000

Cost of goods sold            

800,000

Wages expense               

500,000

Utilities expense              

200,000

Home office expense          

75,000

Net income                  

$ 925,000

Manager’s bonus (05%)        

$ 4,625

In previous periods, the bonus had also been 0.5%, but the performance report had not included any charges for the home office expense, which is now assigned to each store as a percent of its sales.

Required

Assume that you are the national office manager. Write a one half page memorandum to your store managers explaining why home office expense is in the new performance report.

which product line s net sales grew the fastest 648510

Selected product data from Nokia follow.

 

Net Sales

 

Operating Income

 

Product Segment for

Year Ended (EURm)

 

December 31, 2009

 

December 31, 2008

 

December 31, 2009

 

December 31, 2008

 

Devices & Services             

€27,841

€35,084

€3,314

€5,816

NAVTEQ                     

579

318

(344)

(153)

Nokia Siemens Networks        

12,564

15,308

(1,639)

(301)

Required

1. Compute the percentage growth in net sales for each product line from fiscal year 2008 to 2009. Round percents to one decimal.

2. Which product line’s net sales grew the fastest?

3. Which segment was the most profitable?

4. How can Nokia’s managers use this information?

the following information is available for a company s maintenance cost over the las 648523

The following information is available for a company’s maintenance cost over the last seven months. Using the high low method, estimate both the fixed and variable components of its maintenance cost.

Month

Maintenance Hours

Maintenance Cost

June             

20

$6,020

July              

48

8,100

August           

24

5,100

September        

38

7,000

October          

42

6,900

November        

36

6,900

December        

12

3,600

mcu phone company sells its cordless phone for 300 per unit fixed costs total 540 00 648524

1. Compute and interpret the contribution margin ratio using the following data: sales, $150,000; total variable cost, $90,000.

2. MCU Phone Company sells its cordless phone for $300 per unit. Fixed costs total $540,000, and variable costs are $120 per unit. Determine the (1) contribution margin per unit and (2) break even point in units.

3. MCU Phone Company sells its cordless phone for $300 per unit. Fixed costs total $540,000, and variable costs are $120 per unit. Determine the (1) contribution margin per unit and (2) break even point in units.

4. How will the break even point in units change in response to each of the following independent changes in selling price per unit, variable cost per unit, or total fixed costs? Use I for increase and D for decrease. (It is not necessary to compute new break even points.)

Change

Break even in Units Will

1Total fixed cost to $520,000         

__________

2Variable cost to $134 per unit       

__________

3 Selling price per unit to $290       

__________

4Variable cost to $100 per unit       

__________

5Total fixed cost to $544,000        

__________

6 Selling price per unit to $320       

__________

a recent income statement for volkswagen reports the following in millions assume 70 648528

A recent income statement for Volkswagen reports the following (in € millions). Assume 70 percent of the cost of sales and 70 percent of the selling and administrative costs are variable costs, and the remaining 30 percent of each is fixed. Compute the contribution margin (in € millions). (Round computations using percentages to the nearest whole euro.)

Sales                                 

€105,187

Cost of sales                          

91,608

Selling and administrative expenses        

13,276

draw an estimated line of cost behavior and determine whether the cost appears to be 648529

A company reports the following information about its sales and its cost of sales. Each unit of its product sells for $500. Use these data to prepare a scatter diagram. Draw an estimated line of cost behavior and determine whether the cost appears to be variable, fixed, or mixed.

Period

Sales

Cost of Sales

Period

Sales

Cost of Sales

1

$15,000

$10,100

4

7,500

5,500

2

11,500

7,500

5

9,000

6,000

3

10,500

7,000

6

12,500

9,500

the left column lists several cost classifications the right column presents short d 648531

The left column lists several cost classifications. The right column presents short definitions of those costs.

In the blank space beside each of the numbers in the right column, write the letter of the cost best described by the definition.

A. Curvilinear cost

B. Step wise cost

C. Fixed cost

D. Mixed cost

E. Variable cost

F. Total cost

1. This cost increases in direct proportion to increases in volume; its amount is constant for each unit produced.

2. This cost remains constant over a limited range of volume; when it reaches the end of its limited range, it changes by a lump sum and remains at that level until it exceeds another limited range.

3. This cost has a component that remains the same over all volume levels and another component that increases in direct proportion to increases in volume.

4. This cost increases when volume increases, but the increase is not constant for each unit produced.

5. This cost remains constant over all volume levels within the productive capacity for the planning period.

6. This cost is the combined amount of all the other costs.

following are five series of costs a through e measured at various volume levels exa 648532

Following are five series of costs A through E measured at various volume levels. Examine each series and identify which is fixed, variable, mixed, step wise, or curvilinear.

Volume (Units)

Series A

Series B

Series C

Series D

Series E

0

$0

$2,500

$0

$2,000

$4,000

200

3,600

3,100

6,000

2,000

4,000

400

7,200

3,700

6,600

4,000

4,000

600

10,800

4,300

7,200

4,000

4,000

800

14,400

4,900

8,200

6,000

4,000

1,000

18,000

5,500

9,600

6,000

4,000

1,200

21,600

6,100

13,500

8,000

4,000

use the following information about sales and costs to prepare a scatter diagram dra 648533

1. Orlando Company management predicts that it will incur fixed costs of $250,000 and earn pretax income of $350,000 in the next period. Its expected contribution margin ratio is 60%. Use this information to compute the amounts of (1) total dollar sales and (2) total variable costs.

2. Use the following information about sales and costs to prepare a scatter diagram. Draw a cost line that reflects the behavior displayed by this cost. Determine whether the cost is variable, step wise, fixed, mixed, or curvilinear.

Period

Sales

Costs

Period

Sales

Costs

1

$760

$590

9

$580

$390

2

800

560

10

320

240

3

200

230

11

240

230

4

400

400

12

720

550

5

480

390

13

280

260

6

620

550

14

440

410

7

680

590

15

380

260

8

540

430

 

 

 

felix co reports the following information about its sales and cost of sales draw an 648534

Felix & Co. reports the following information about its sales and cost of sales. Draw an estimated line of Vcost behavior using a scatter diagram, and compute fixed costs and variable costs per unit sold. Then use the high low method to estimate the fixed and variable components of the cost of sales.

Period

Units

Sold

Cost of

Sales

Period

Units

Sold

Cost of

Sales

1

0

$2,500

6

2,000

5,500

2

400

3,100

7

2,400

6,100

3

800

3,700

8

2,800

6,700

4

1,200

4,300

9

3,200

7,300

5

1,600

4,900

10

3,600

7,900

use spreadsheet software to use ordinary least squares regression to estimate the co 648535

1. Felix & Co. reports the following information about its sales and cost of sales. Draw an estimated line of Vcost behavior using a scatter diagram, and compute fixed costs and variable costs per unit sold. Then use the high low method to estimate the fixed and variable components of the cost of sales.

Period

Units

Sold

Cost of

Sales

Period

Units

Sold

Cost of

Sales

1

0

$2,500

6

2,000

5,500

2

400

3,100

7

2,400

6,100

3

800

3,700

8

2,800

6,700

4

1,200

4,300

9

3,200

7,300

5

1,600

4,900

10

3,600

7,900

2.Use spreadsheet software to use ordinary least squares regression to estimate the cost equation, including fixed and variable cost amounts.

time to see company began operations in january 2011 with two operating selling depa 648493

Time To See Company began operations in January 2011 with two operating (selling) departments and one service (office) department. Its departmental income statements follow.

TIME TO SEE COMPANY

Departmental Income Statements

For Year Ended December 31,2011

 

Clock

Mirror

Combined

Sales                                     

$122,500

$52,500

$175,000

Cost of goods sold                         

60,000

32,000

92,000

Gross profit                               

62,500

20,500

83,000

Direct expenses

 

 

 

Sales salaries                            

20,000

7,000

27,000

Advertising                             

1,200

500

1,700

Store supplies used                       

900

400

1,300

Depreciation—Equipment                  

1,500

300

1,800 31,800

Total direct expenses                      

23,600

8,200

Allocated expenses

 

 

 

Rent expense                            

7,020

3,780

10,800

Utilities expense                         

2,600

1,400

4,000

Share of office department expenses         

10,500

4,500

15,000

Total allocated expenses                   

20,120

9,680

29,800

Total expenses                             

43,720

17,880

61,600

Net income                               

$ 18,780

$ 2,620

$ 21,400

Time To See plans to open a third department in January 2012 that will sell paintings. Management predicts that the new department will generate $35,000 in sales with a 55% gross profit margin and will require the following direct expenses: sales salaries, $8,000; advertising, $800; store supplies, $500; and equipment depreciation, $200. It will fit the new department into the current rented space by taking some square footage from the other two departments. When opened the new painting department will fill onefifth of the space presently used by the clock department and one sixth used by the mirror department. Management does not predict any increase in utilities costs, which are allocated to the departments in proportion to occupied space (or rent expense). The company allocates office department expenses to the operating departments in proportion to their sales. It expects the painting department to increase total office department expenses by $7,000. Since the painting department will bring new customers into the store, management expects sales in both the clock and mirror departments to increase by 7%. No changes for those departments’ gross profit percents or their direct expenses are expected except for store supplies used, which will increase in proportion to sales.

Required

Prepare departmental income statements that show the company’s predicted results of operations for calendar year 2012 for the three operating (selling) departments and their combined totals. (Round percents to the nearest one tenth and dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.)

did the plant manager or the operating department managers better manage costs expla 648494

Becky Hoefer, the plant manager of Travel Far’s Indiana plant, is responsible for all of that plant’s costs other than her own salary. The plant has two operating departments and one service department. The camper and trailer operating departments manufacture different products and have their own managers. The office department, which Hoefer also manages, provides services equally to the two operating departments. A budget is prepared for each operating department and the office department. The company’s responsibility accounting system must assemble information to present budgeted and actual costs in performance reports for each operating department manager and the plant manager. Each performance report includes only those costs that a particular operating department manager can control: raw materials, wages, supplies used, and equipment depreciation. The plant manager is responsible for the department managers’ salaries, utilities, building rent, office salaries other than her own, and other office costs plus all costs controlled by the two operating department managers. The annual departmental budgets and actual costs for the two operating departments follow.

 

Budget

Actual

 

Campers

Trailers

Combined

Campers

Trailers

Combined

Raw materials             

$160,000

$250,000

$ 410,000

$159,400

$246,500

$ 405,900

Employee wages           

99,000

191,000

290,000

102,300

193,700

296,000

Dept manager salary       

40,000

44,000

84,000

41,000

47,000

88,000

Supplies used              

34,000

83,000

117,000

31,900

84,600

116,500

Depreciation—Equip       

58,000

110,000

168,000

58,000

110,000

168,000

Utilities                   

2,800

4,200

7,000

2,700

3,800

6,500

Building rent              

5,000

8,000

13,000

4,800

7,200

12,000

Office department costs     

56,000

56,000

112,000

54,450

54,450

108,900

Totals                    

$454,800

$746,200

$1,201,000

$454,550

$747,250

$1,201,800

The office department’s annual budget and its actual costs follow.

 

Budget

Actual

Plant manager salary         

$ 60,000

$ 62,000

Other office salaries         

30,000

27,700

Other office costs           

22,000

19,200

Totals                      

$112,000

$108,900

Required

1. Prepare responsibility accounting performance reports like those in Exhibit 21.28 that list costs controlled by the following:

a. Manager of the camper department.

b. Manager of the trailer department.

c. Manager of the Indiana plant.

In each report, include the budgeted and actual costs and show the amount that each actual cost is over or under the budgeted amount.

2. Did the plant manager or the operating department managers better manage costs? Explain.

do you think delivery costs fit the definition of a joint cost explain 648495

Bloom Orchards produced a good crop of peaches this year. After preparing the following income statement, the company believes it should have given its No. 3 peaches to charity and saved its efforts.

BLOOM ORCHARDS

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

 

No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

Combined

Sales (by grade)

 

 

 

 

No 1: 300,000 Ibs @ $150/lb                

$450,000

 

 

 

No 2: 300,000 Ibs @ $100/lb                

 

$300,000

 

 

No 3: 750,000 Ibs @ $020/lb                

 

 

$ 150,000

 

Total sales                                 

 

 

 

$900,000

Costs

 

 

 

 

Tree pruning and care @ $020/Ib             

60,000

60,000

150,000

270,000

Picking, sorting, and grading @ $012/Ib         

36,000

36,000

90,000

162,000

Delivery costs $003/lb                       

9,000

9,000

22,500

40,500

Total costs                                

105,000

105,000

262,500

472,500

Net income (loss)                            

$345,000

$195,000

$(112,500)

$427,500

In preparing this statement, the company allocated joint costs among the grades on a physical basis as an equal amount per pound. The company’s delivery cost records show that $30,000 of the $40,500 relates to crating the No. 1 and No. 2 peaches and hauling them to the buyer. The remaining $10,500 of delivery costs is for crating the No. 3 peaches and hauling them to the cannery.

Required

1. Prepare reports showing cost allocations on a sales value basis to the three grades of peaches. Separate the delivery costs into the amounts directly identifiable with each grade. Then allocate any shared delivery costs on the basis of the relative sales value of each grade.

2. Using your answers to part 1, prepare an income statement using the joint costs allocated on a sales value basis.

3. Do you think delivery costs fit the definition of a joint cost? Explain.

the departmental accounting system has a single account building occupancy cost in i 648496

Dixon’s has several departments that occupy all floors of a two story building that includes a basement floor. Dixon rented this building under a long term lease negotiated when rental rates were low. The departmental accounting system has a single account, Building Occupancy Cost, in its ledger. The types and amounts of occupancy costs recorded in this account for the current period follow.

Building rent               

$300,000

Lighting expense            

24,000

Cleaning expense           

16,000

Total occupancy cost        

$340,000

The building has 7,500 square feet on each of the upper two floors but only 5,000 square feet in the basement. In prior periods, the accounting manager merely divided the $340,000 occupancy cost by 20,000 square feet to find an average cost of $17 per square foot and then charged each department a building occupancy cost equal to this rate times the number of square feet that it occupies. Alex Ferrero manages a department that occupies 2,000 square feet of basement floor space. In discussing the departmental reports with other managers, she questions whether using the same rate per square foot for all departments makes sense because different floor space has different values. Ferrero checked a recent real estate report of average local rental costs for similar space that shows first floor space worth $40 per square foot, second floor space worth $20 per square foot, and basement space worth $10 per square foot (excluding costs for lighting and cleaning). Required

1. Allocate occupancy costs to Ferrero’s department using the current allocation method.

2. Allocate the building rent cost to Ferrero’s department in proportion to the relative market value of the floor space. Allocate to Ferrero’s department the lighting and heating costs in proportion to the square feet occupied (ignoring floor space market values). Then, compute the total occupancy cost allocated to Ferrero’s department.

3. Which allocation method would you prefer if you were a manager of a basement department?

the company s three cost centers and their cost drivers follow 648497

Prairie Landscaping has enjoyed profits for many years, but new competition has cut service revenue by as much as 30%. As a result, the company wants to better understand its costs. It decides to prepare an activity based cost analysis, including an estimate of the average cost of both general landscaping services and custom design landscaping services. The company’s three cost centers and their cost drivers follow.

Cost Center

Cost

Cost Driver

Driver Quantity

Professional salaries        

$500,000

Professional hours

10,000

Customer supplies         

125,000

Number of customers

500

Building cost              

150,000

Square feet

1,500

The two main landscaping units and their related data follow.

Service

Hours

Square Feet*

Customers

General landscaping               

2,500

500

400

Custom design landscaping         

7,500

1,000

100

Required

1. Compute the cost per cost driver for each of the three cost centers.

2. Use the results from part 1 to allocate costs from each of the three cost centers to both the general landscaping and the custom design landscaping units. Compute total cost and average cost per customer for both the general landscaping and the custom design landscaping units.

3. Without providing computations, would the average cost of general landscaping be higher or lower if all center costs were allocated based on the number of customers? Explain.

the april departmental budgets and actual costs for the two operating departments fo 648499

Aaron Braun, the plant manager of SOS Co.’s Chicago plant, is responsible for all of that plant’s costs other than his own salary. The plant has two operating departments and one service department. The refrigerator and dishwasher operating departments manufacture different products and have their own managers. The office department, which Braun also manages, provides services equally to the two operating departments. A monthly budget is prepared for each operating department and the office department. The company’s responsibility accounting system must assemble information to present budgeted and actual costs in performance reports for each operating department manager and the plant manager. Each performance report includes only those costs that a particular operating department manager can control: raw materials, wages, supplies used, and equipment depreciation. The plant manager is responsible for the department managers’ salaries, utilities, building rent, office salaries other than his own, and other office costs plus all costs controlled by the two operating department managers. The April departmental budgets and actual costs for the two operating departments follow.

   

Budget

   

Actual

 
 

Refrigerators

Dishwashers

Combined

Refrigerators

Dishwashers

Combined

 Raw materials                  

 $400,000 

 $200,000 

 $ 600,000 

 $375,000 

 $200,000 

 $ 575,000 

 Employee wages                

 172,000 

 80,000 

 252,000 

 174,700 

 76,800 

 251,500 

 Dept manager salary            

 55,000 

 49,000 

 104,000 

 55,000 

 46,500 

 101,500 

 Supplies used                   

 15,000 

 9,000 

 24,000 

 14,000 

 10,000 

 24,000 

 Depreciation—Equip            

 53,000 

 37,000 

 90,000 

 53,000 

 37,000 

 90,000 

 Utilities                        

 30,000 

 18,000 

 48,000 

 34,500 

 20,700 

 55,200 

 Building rent                   

 63,000 

 17,000 

 80,000  

 61,000 

 15,000 

 76,000 

 Office department costs          

 70,500 

 70,500 

 141,000 

 75,000 

 75,000 

 150,000 

 Totals                         

 $858,500 

 $480,500 

 $1,339,000 

 $842,200 

 $481,000 

 $1,323,200 

 

 

Budget

 

Actual

 

Plant manager salary         

$ 80,000

$ 85,000

Other office salaries         

40,000

35,200

Other office costs           

21,000

29,800

Totals                     

$141,000

$150,000

Required

1. Prepare responsibility accounting performance reports like those in Exhibit 21.28 that list costs controlled by the following:

a. Manager of the refrigerator department.

b. Manager of the dishwasher department.

c. Manager of the Chicago plant.

In each report, include the budgeted and actual costs for the month and show the amount by which each actual cost is over or under the budgeted amount.

2. Did the plant manager or the operating department managers better manage costs? Explain.

prepare reports showing cost allocations on a sales value basis to the three grades 648500

Sarah and Stew Salsa own and operate a tomato grove. After preparing the following income statement, Sarah believes they should have offered the No. 3 tomatoes to the public for free and saved themselves time and money.

SARAH AND STEW SALSA

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

 

 

No. 1

 

No. 2

 

No. 3

 

Combined

 

Sales (by grade)

 

 

 

 

No 1: 400,000 Ibs @ $150/lb                             

$600,000

 

 

 

No 2: 300,000 Ibs @ $100/lb                             

 

$300,000

 

 

No 3: 100,000 Ibs @ $030/lb                             

 

 

$ 30,000

 

Total sales                                              

 

 

 

$930,000

Costs

 

 

 

 

Land preparation, seeding, and cultivating @ $050/Ib         

200,000

150,000

50,000

400,000

Harvesting, sorting, and grading @ $002/Ib                   

8,000

6,000

2,000

16,000

Delivery costs @ $001/lb                                

4,000

3,000

1,000

8,000

Total costs                                             

212,000

159,000

53,000

424,000

Net income (loss)                                         

$388,000

$141,000

$(23,000)

$506,000

In preparing this statement, Sarah and Stew allocated joint costs among the grades on a physical basis as an equal amount per pound. Also, their delivery cost records show that $7,000 of the $8,000 relates to crating the No. 1 and No. 2 tomatoes and hauling them to the buyer. The remaining $1,000 of delivery costs is for crating the No. 3 tomatoes and hauling them to the cannery.

Required

1. Prepare reports showing cost allocations on a sales value basis to the three grades of tomatoes. Separate the delivery costs into the amounts directly identifiable with each grade. Then allocate any shared delivery costs on the basis of the relative sales value of each grade. (Round percents to the nearest onetenth and dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. Using your answers to part 1, prepare an income statement using the joint costs allocated on a sales value basis.

3. Do you think delivery costs fit the definition of a joint cost? Explain.

if research in motion wishes to evaluate each of its product lines how can it alloca 648502

Review Research In Motion’s income statement in Appendix A and identify its revenues for the years ended February 27, 2010, February 28, 2009, and March 1, 2008. For the year ended February 27, 2010, Research In Motion reports the following product revenue mix. (Assume that its product revenue mix is the same for each of the three years reported when answering the requirements.)

Devices

Service

Software

Other

81%

14%

2%

3%

Required

1. Compute the amount of revenue from each of its product lines for the years ended February 27, 2010, February 28, 2009, and March 1, 2008.

2. If Research In Motion wishes to evaluate each of its product lines, how can it allocate its operating expenses to each of them to determine each product line’s profitability?

3. Access Research In Motion’s annual report for a fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010, from its the SEC’s EDGAR database. Compute its revenues for its product lines for the most recent year(s). Compare those results to those from part 1. How has its product mix changed?

what is senior security s ethical responsibility in offering professional services 648504

Senior Security Co. offers a range of security services for senior citizens. Each type of service is considered within a separate department. Mary Pincus, the overall manager, is compensated partly on the basis of departmental performance by staying within the quarterly cost budget. She often revises operations to make sure departments stay within budget. Says Pincus, “I will not go over budget even if it means slightly compromising the level and quality of service. These are minor compromises that don’t significantly affect my clients, at least in the short term.”

Required

1. Is there an ethical concern in this situation? If so, which parties are affected? Explain.

2. Can Mary Pincus take action to eliminate or reduce any ethical concerns? Explain.

3. What is Senior Security’s ethical responsibility in offering professional services?

the following is taken from maxwell co s internal records of its factory with two op 648466

The following is taken from Maxwell Co.’s internal records of its factory with two operating departments. The cost driver for indirect labor and supplies is direct labor costs, and the cost driver for the remaining overhead items is number of hours of machine use. Compute the total amount of overhead cost allocated to Operating Department 1 using activity based costing.

 

Direct Labor

Machine Use Hours

Operating department 1

$10,400

2,200

Operating department 2

9,600

3,000

Totals             

$20,000

5,200

     

Factory overhead costs

 

 

Rent and utilities          

 

$ 7,100

Indirect labor             

 

3,700

General office expense     

 

2,700

Depreciation — Equipment  

 

4,500

Supplies                 

 

300

Total factory overhead     

 

$18,300

which department contributes the largest dollar amount to total overhead which contr 648467

Use the information in the following table to compute each department’s contribution to overhead (both in dollars and as a percent). Which department contributes the largest dollar amount to total overhead? Which contributes the highest percent (as a percent of sales)? Round percents to one decimal.

Sales                          

$53,000

$170,000

$84,000

Cost of goods sold              

34,185

103,700

49,560

 

 

 

Gross profit                    

18,815

66,300

34,440

Total direct expenses            

6,360

37,060

8,736

 

 

 

Contribution to overhead                   

$

$

$

Contribution percent

%

%

%

compute return on assets for each of these best buy divisions each is an investment 648468

Compute return on assets for each of these Best Buy divisions (each is an investment center). Comment on the relative performance of each investment center. Round percents to one decimal.

Investment Center

Net Income

Average Assets

Return on Assets

Cameras and camcorders

$4,500,000

$20,000,000

Phones and communications

1,500,000

12,500,000

Computers and accessories

800,000

10,000,000

compute return on assets for each of these best buy divisions each is an investment 648469

1. Compute return on assets for each of these Best Buy divisions (each is an investment center). Comment on the relative performance of each investment center. Round percents to one decimal.

Investment Center

Net Income

Average Assets

Return on Assets

Cameras and camcorders

$4,500,000

$20,000,000

Phones and communications

1,500,000

12,500,000

Computers and accessories

800,000

10,000,000

2 .Assume a target income of 12% of average invested assets. Compute residual income for each of Best Buy’s divisions.

walt disney reports the following information for its two parks and resorts division 648472

Walt Disney reports the following information for its two Parks and Resorts divisions.

 

East Coast

West Coast

 

Current year

Prior year

Current year

Prior year

Hotel occupancy rates

89%

86%

92%

93%

Assume Walt Disney uses a balanced scorecard and sets a target of 90% occupancy in its resorts. Using Exhibit 21.26 as a guide, show how the company’s performance on hotel occupancy would appear on a balanced scorecard report.

auto market pays 128 000 rent each year for its two story building the space in this 648475

Auto Market pays $128,000 rent each year for its two story building. The space in this building is occupied by five departments as specified here.

Paint department            

1,200 square feet of first floor space

Engine department           

3,600 square feet of first floor space

Window department         

1,920 square feet of second floor space

Electrical department         

1,056 square feet of second floor space

Accessory department        

1,824 square feet of second floor space

The company allocates 65% of total rent expense to the first floor and 35% to the second floor, and then allocates rent expense for each floor to the departments occupying that floor on the basis of space occupied. Determine the rent expense to be allocated to each department. (Round percents to the nearest one tenth and dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. For a recent year L’Oreal reported operating profit of €3,110 (in millions) for its Cosmetics division. Total assets were €11,314 at the beginning of the year and €12,988 (in millions) at the end of the year. Compute return on investment for the year. State your answer as a percent, rounded to one decimal.

prepare a summary table that reports the indirect expenses assigned to each of the f 648476

Won Han Co. has four departments: materials, personnel, manufacturing, and packaging. In a recent month, the four departments incurred three shared indirect expenses. The amounts of these indirect expenses and the bases used to allocate them follow.

Indirect Expense

Cost

Allocation Base

Supervision              

$ 75,000

Number of employees

Utilities                 

60,000

Square feet occupied

Insurance                

16,500

Value of assets in use

Total                    

$151,500

 

Departmental data for the company’s recent reporting period follow.

Department

Employees

Square Feet

Asset Values

Materials            

18

27,000

$ 6,000

Personnel            

6

4,500

1,200

Manufacturing        

66

45,000

37,800

Packaging            

30

13,500

15,000

Total               

120

90,000

$60,000

(1) Use this information to allocate each of the three indirect expenses across the four departments.

(2) Prepare a summary table that reports the indirect expenses assigned to each of the four departments.

pane company produces two types of glass shelving rounded edge and squared edge on t 648477

Pane Company produces two types of glass shelving, rounded edge and squared edge, on the same  production line. For the current period, the company reports the following data.

 

Rounded Edge

Squared Edge

Total

Direct materials                           

$ 9,500

$21,600

$ 31,100

Direct labor                              

6,100

11,900

18,000

Overhead (300% of direct labor cost)         

18,300

35,700

54,000

Total cost                                

$33,900

$69,200

$103,100

Quantity produced                        

10,500 ft.

14,100 ft.

 

Average cost per ft.                      

$ 3.23

$ 4.91

 

Pane’s controller wishes to apply activity based costing (ABC) to allocate the $54,000 of overhead costs incurred by the two product lines to see whether cost per foot would change markedly from that reported above. She has collected the following information.

Overhead Cost Category (Activity Cost Pool)

Cost

Supervision                                           

$ 2,160

Depreciation of machinery                             

28,840

Assembly line preparation                              

23,000

Total overhead                                       

$54,000

She has also collected the following information about the cost drivers for each category (cost pool) and the amount of each driver used by the two product lines.

   

Usage

Overhead Cost Category
(Activity Cost Pool)

Driver

Rounded Edge

Squared Edge

Total

Supervision       

Direct labor cost($)

$6,100

$11,900

$18,000

Depreciation of machinery

Machine hours

300 hours

700 hours

1,000 hours

Assembly line preparation

Setups (number)

31 times

94 times

125 times

Use this information to (1) assign these three overhead cost pools to each of the two products using ABC, (2) determine average cost per foot for each of the two products using ABC, and (3) compare the average cost per foot under ABC with the average cost per foot under the current method for each product. For part 3, explain why a difference between the two cost allocation methods exists.

below are departmental income statements for a guitar manufacturer the manufacturer 648478

Below are departmental income statements for a guitar manufacturer. The manufacturer is considering dropping its electric guitar department since it has a net loss. The company classifies advertising, rent, and utilities expenses as indirect. (1) Prepare a departmental contribution report that shows each department’s contribution to overhead. (2) Based on contribution to overhead, should the electric guitar department be eliminated?

BEST GUITAR

Departmental Income Statements

For Year Ended December 31,2011

 

Acoustic

Electric

Sales                                

$101,500

$85,000

Cost of goods sold                    

45,675

46,750

Gross profit                          

55,825

38,250

Operating expenses

 

 

Advertising expense                  

5,075

4,250

Depreciation expense equipment       

10,150

8,500

Salaries expense                     

20,300

17,000

Supplies expense                    

2,030

1,700

Rent expense                       

7,105

5,950

Utilities expense                     

3,045

2,550

Total operating expenses                

47,705

39,950

Net income (loss)                   

$ 8,120

($1,700)

 

during 2011 the departments had the following direct expenses and occupied the follo 648479

Overroad Cycle Shop has two service departments (advertising and administration) and two operating departments (cycles and clothing). During 2011, the departments had the following direct expenses and occupied the following amount of floor space.

Department

Direct Expenses

Square Feet

Advertising          

$ 16,000

1,088

Administrative        

18,500

1,152

Cycles              

101,600

6,336

Clothing             

11,900

4,224

The advertising department developed and distributed 100 advertisements during the year. Of these, 76 promoted cycles and 24 promoted clothing. The store sold $300,000 of merchandise during the year. Of this amount, $225,000 is from the cycles department, and $75,000 is from the clothing department. The utilities expense of $64,000 is an indirect expense to all departments. Prepare a departmental expense allocation spreadsheet for Overroad Cycle Shop. The spreadsheet should assign (1) direct expenses to each of the four departments, (2) the $64,000 of utilities expense to the four departments on the basis of floor space occupied, (3) the advertising department’s expenses to the two operating departments on the basis of the number of ads placed that promoted a department’s products, and (4) the administrative department’s expenses to the two operating departments based on the amount of sales. Provide supporting computations for the expense allocations.

complete the spreadsheet by allocating the expenses of the two service departments a 648480

The following is a partially completed lower section of a departmental expense allocation spreadsheet for Bookworm Bookstore. It reports the total amounts of direct and indirect expenses allocated to its five departments. Complete the spreadsheet by allocating the expenses of the two service departments (advertising and purchasing) to the three operating departments.

 

 

 

Allocation of Expenses to Departments

 

Allocation

Base

Expense

Account

Balance

Advertising

Dept.

Purchasing

Dept.

Books

Dept.

Magazines

Dept.

Newspapers

Dept.

Total department expenses

 

$654,000

$22,000

$30,000

$425,000

$86,000

$91,000

Service department expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Advertising department Sales

 

 

?

 

?

?

?

Purchasing department Purch. Orders

 

 

 

?

?

?

?

Total expenses allocated to

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating departments

 

?

$0

$0

?

?

?

Advertising and purchasing department expenses are allocated to operating departments on the basis of dollar sales and purchase orders, respectively. Information about the allocation bases for the three operating departments follows.

Department

Sales

Purchase Orders

Books               

$448,000

424

Magazines            

144,000

312

Newspapers          

208,000

264

Total               

$800,000

1,000

 

the diary showed the following hours and activities spent in the two departments all 648481

Monica Gellar works in both the jewelry department and the hosiery department of a retail store. Gellar assists customers in both departments and arranges and stocks merchandise in both departments. The store allocates Gellar’s $30,000 annual wages between the two departments based on a sample of the time worked in the two departments. The sample is obtained from a diary of hours worked that Gellar kept in a randomly chosen two week period. The diary showed the following hours and activities spent in the two departments. Allocate Gellar’s annual wages between the two departments. (Round percents to one decimal.)

Selling in jewelry department                                                  

64 hours

Arranging and stocking merchandise in jewelry department                         

6 hours

Selling in hosiery department                                                 

14 hours

Arranging and stocking merchandise in hosiery department                        

12 hours

Idle time spent waiting for a customer to enter one of the selling departments        

4 hours

 

bob daniels manages an auto dealership s service department the recent month s incom 648482

Bob Daniels manages an auto dealership’s service department. The recent month’s income statement for his department follows. (1) Analyze the items on the income statement and identify those that definitely should be included on a performance report used to evaluate Daniels’s performance. List them and explain why you chose them. (2) List and explain the items that should definitely be excluded. (3) List the items that are not definitely included or excluded and explain why they fall into that category.

Revenues

 

 

Sales of parts                             

$ 144,000

 

Sales of services                           

210,000

$354,000

Costs and expenses

 

 

Cost of parts sold                         

60,000

 

Building depreciation                       

18,600

 

Income taxes allocated to department         

17,400

 

Interest on long term debt                  

15,000

 

Manager’s salary                           

24,000

 

Payroll taxes                              

16,200

 

Supplies                                 

31,800

 

Utilities                                  

8,800

 

Wages (hourly)                            

32,000

 

Total costs and expenses                    

 

223,800

Departmental net income                      

 

$130,200

comart a retailer of consumer goods provides the following information on two of its 648484

Comart, a retailer of consumer goods, provides the following information on two of its departments (each considered an investment center).

Investment Center

Sales

Net

Income

Average

Invested Assets

Electronics                  

$20,000,000

$1,500,000

$ 7,500,000

Sporting goods               

16,000,000

1,600,000

10,000,000

(1) Compute return on investment for each department. Using return on investment, which department is most efficient at using assets to generate returns for the company? (2) Assume a target income level of 12% of average invested assets. Compute residual income for each department. Which department generated the most residual income for the company? (3) Assume the Electronics department is presented with a new investment opportunity that will yield a 15% return on assets. Should the new investment opportunity be accepted? Explain.

which department generates the most net income per dollar of sales which department 648485

Comart, a retailer of consumer goods, provides the following information on two of its departments (each considered an investment center).

Investment Center

Sales

Net

Income

Average

Invested Assets

Electronics                  

$20,000,000

$1,500,000

$ 7,500,000

Sporting goods               

16,000,000

1,600,000

10,000,000

(1) Compute return on investment for each department. Using return on investment, which department is most efficient at using assets to generate returns for the company? (2) Assume a target income level of 12% of average invested assets. Compute residual income for each department. Which department generated the most residual income for the company? (3) Assume the Electronics department is presented with a new investment opportunity that will yield a 15% return on assets. Should the new investment opportunity be accepted? Explain.

2. Compute profit margin and investment turnover for each department. Which department generates the most net income per dollar of sales? Which department is most efficient at generating sales from average invested assets?

mid coast airlines uses the following performance measures classify each of the perf 648486

Mid Coast Airlines uses the following performance measures. Classify each of the performance measures below into the most likely balanced scorecard perspective it relates to. Label your answers using C (customer), P (internal process), I (innovation and growth), or F (financial).

1. Flight attendant training sessions attended

2. Customer complaints

3. Percentage of on time departures

4. Market value

5. Percentage of ground crew trained

6. Return on investment

7. On time flight percentage

8. Accidents or safety incidents per mile flown

9. Number of reports of mishandled or lost baggage

10. Cash flow from operations

11. Time airplane is on ground between flights

12. Airplane miles per gallon of fuel

13. Revenue per seat

14. Cost of leasing airplanes

the trailer department of soni bicycles makes bike trailers that attach to bicycles 648487

The Trailer department of Soni Bicycles makes bike trailers that attach to bicycles and can carry children or cargo. The trailers have a retail price of $100 each. Each trailer incurs $40 of variable manufacturing costs. The Trailer department has capacity for 40,000 trailers per year, and incurs fixed costs of $800,000 per year. Required

1. Assume the Assembly division of Soni Bicycles wants to buy 10,000 trailers per year from the Trailer division. If the Trailer division can sell all of the trailers it manufactures to outside customers, what price should be used on transfers between Soni Bicycle’s divisions? Explain.

2. Assume the Trailer division currently only sells 20,000 trailers to outside customers, and the Assembly division wants to buy 10,000 trailers per year from the Trailer division. What is the range of acceptable prices that could be used on transfers between Soni Bicycle’s divisions? Explain.

3. Assume transfer prices of either $40 per trailer or $70 per trailer are being considered. Comment on the preferred transfer prices from the perspectives of the Trailer division manager, the Assembly division manager, and the top management of Soni Bicycles.

l oreal reports the following for a recent year for the major divisions in its cosme 648490

L’Oreal reports the following for a recent year for the major divisions in its Cosmetics branch.

(€ millions)

Sales

Income

Total Assets
End of Year

Total Assets
Beginning of Year

Professional products

€ 2,472

€ 519

€ 2,516

€ 2,440

Consumer products

8,355

1,578

5,496

5,361

Luxury products

4,170

766

4,059

2,695

Active cosmetics

1,289

259

817

818

Total

€16,286

€3,122

€12,888

€11,314

1. Compute profit margin for each division. State your answers as percents, rounded to two decimal places. Which L’Oreal division has the highest profit margin?

2. Compute investment turnover for each division. Round your answers to two decimal places. Which L’Oreal division has the best investment turnover?

the types and amounts of occupancy costs recorded in this account for the current pe 648491

City Bank has several departments that occupy both floors of a two story building. The depart mental accounting system has a single account, Building Occupancy Cost, in its ledger. The types and amounts of occupancy costs recorded in this account for the current period follow.

Depreciation—Building             

$18,000

Interest—Building mortgage         

27,000

Taxes—Building and land           

8,000

Gas (heating) expense              

2,500

Lighting expense                  

3,000

Maintenance expense              

5,500

Total occupancy cost              

$64,000

The building has 4,000 square feet on each floor. In prior periods, the accounting manager merely divided the $64,000 occupancy cost by 8,000 square feet to find an average cost of $8 per square foot and then charged each department a building occupancy cost equal to this rate times the number of square feet that it occupied. Laura Diaz manages a first floor department that occupies 1,000 square feet, and Lauren Wright manages a second floor department that occupies 1,800 square feet of floor space. In discussing the departmental reports, the second floor manager questions whether using the same rate per square foot for all departments makes sense because the first floor space is more valuable. This manager also references a recent real estate study of average local rental costs for similar space that shows first floor space worth $30 per square foot and second floor space worth $20 per square foot (excluding costs for heating, lighting, and maintenance). Required

1. Allocate occupancy costs to the Diaz and Wright departments using the current allocation method.

2. Allocate the depreciation, interest, and taxes occupancy costs to the Diaz and Wright departments in proportion to the relative market values of the floor space. Allocate the heating, lighting, and maintenance costs to the Diaz and Wright departments in proportion to the square feet occupied (ignoring floor space market values).

3. Which allocation method would you prefer if you were a manager of a second floor department? Explain.

without providing computations would the average cost of general surgery be higher o 648492

We Care is an outpatient surgical clinic that was profitable for many years, but Medicare has cut its reimbursements by as much as 50%. As a result, the clinic wants to better understand its costs. It decides to prepare an activity based cost analysis, including an estimate of the average cost of both general surgery and orthopedic surgery. The clinic’s three cost centers and their cost drivers follow.

Cost Center

Cost

Cost Driver

Driver Quantity

Professional salaries                

$1,500,000

Professional hours

10,000

Patient services and supplies         

25,000

Number of patients

500

Building cost                     

150,000

Square feet

1,500

The two main surgical units and their related data follow.

Service

Hours

Square Feet*

Patients

General surgery            

2,500

500

400

Orthopedic surgery        

7,500

1,000

100

Required

1. Compute the cost per cost driver for each of the three cost centers.

2. Use the results from part 1 to allocate costs from each of the three cost centers to both the general surgery and the orthopedic surgery units. Compute total cost and average cost per patient for both the general surgery and the orthopedic surgery units.

3. Without providing computations, would the average cost of general surgery be higher or lower if all center costs were allocated based on the number of patients? Explain.

the production department in a process manufacturing system completed 191 500 units 648427

The production department in a process manufacturing system completed 191,500 units of product and transferred them to finished goods during a recent period. Of these units, 31,500 were in process at the beginning of the period. The other 160,000 units were started and completed during the period. At periodend, 29,500 units were in process. Compute the department’s equivalent units of production with respect to direct materials under each of three separate assumptions:

1. All direct materials are added to products when processing begins.

2. Direct materials are added to products evenly throughout the process. Beginning goods in process inventory was 40% complete, and ending goods in process inventory was 75% complete.

3. One half of direct materials is added to products when the process begins and the other half is added when the process is 75% complete as to direct labor. Beginning goods in process inventory is 40% complete as to direct labor, and ending goods in process inventory is 60% complete as to direct labor.

its production output is sent to its warehouse for shipping prepare its process cost 648428

The following partially completed process cost summary describes the May production activities of Raman Company. Its production output is sent to its warehouse for shipping. Prepare its process cost summary using the weighted average method.

 

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

Equivalent Units of Production

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Units transferred out

 

128,000

128,000

128,000

Units of ending goods in process

 

10,000

6,000

6,000

Equivalent units of production

 

138,000

134,000

134,000

 

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

Costs per EUP

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Costs of beginning goods in process

 

$ 37,100

$ 1,520

$ 3,040

Costs incurred this period

 

715,000

125,780

251,560

Total costs

 

$752,100

$127,300

$254,600

Units in beginning goods in process

 

 

 

8,000

Units started this period

 

 

 

130,000

Units completed and transferred out

 

 

 

128,000

Units in ending goods in process

 

 

 

10,000

edison company manufactures wool blankets and accounts for product costs using proce 648431

Edison Company manufactures wool blankets and accounts for product costs using process costing. The following information is available regarding its May inventories.

 

Beginning

Inventory

Ending

Inventory

Raw materials inventory            

$ 28,000

$ 25,500

Goods in process inventory         

220,750

252,000

Finished goods inventory           

319,000

277,000

The following additional information describes the company’s production activities for May.

Raw materials purchases (on credit)                   

$ 135,000

Factory payroll cost (paid in cash)                     

791,500

Other overhead cost (Other Accounts credited)         

43,000

Materials used

 

Direct                                         

$ 93,500

Indirect                                        

31,000

Labor used

 

Direct                                         

$ 352,000

Indirect                                         

439,500

Overhead rate as a percent of direct labor              

110%

Sales (on credit)                                   

$1,500,000

Required

1. Compute the cost of (a) products transferred from production to finished goods, and (b) goods sold.

2. Prepare summary journal entries dated May 31 to record the following production activities during May: (a) raw materials purchases, (b) direct materials usage, (c) indirect materials usage, (d) payroll costs, (e) direct labor costs, (f) indirect labor costs, (g) other overhead costs, (h) overhead applied, (i) goods transferred from production to finished goods, and (j) sale of finished goods.

determine the equivalent units of production with respect to a direct labor and b di 648432

Fairfax Company uses weighted average process costing to account for its production costs. Direct labor is added evenly throughout the process. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. During September, the company transferred 735,000 units of product to finished goods. At the end of September, the goods in process inventory consists of 207,000 units that are 90% complete with respect to labor. Beginning inventory had $244,920 of direct materials and $69,098 of direct labor cost. The direct labor cost added in September is $1,312,852, and the direct materials cost added is $1,639,080.

Required

1. Determine the equivalent units of production with respect to (a) direct labor and (b) direct materials.

2. Compute both the direct labor cost and the direct materials cost per equivalent unit.

3. Compute both direct labor cost and direct materials cost assigned to (a) units completed and transferred out, and (b) ending goods in process inventory.

4. The company sells and ships all units to customers as soon as they are completed. Assume that an error is made in determining the percentage of completion for units in ending inventory. Instead of being 90% complete with respect to labor, they are actually 65% complete. Write a one page memo to the plant manager describing how this error affects its September financial statements.

easton co produces its product through a single processing department direct materia 648434

Easton Co. produces its product through a single processing department. Direct materials are added at the start of production, and direct labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. The company uses monthly reporting periods for its weighted average process cost accounting system. Its Goods in Process Inventory account follows after entries for direct materials, direct labor, and overhead costs for October.

   

Goods in Process Inventory

Acct. No. 133

Date

 

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

Oct.

1

Balance

   

348,638

 

31

Direct materials

104,090

 

452,728

 

31

Direct labor

416,360

 

869,088

 

31

Applied overhead

244,920

 

1,114,008

Its beginning goods in process consisted of $60,830 of direct materials, $176,820 of direct labor, and $110,988 of factory overhead. During October, the company started 280,000 units and transferred 306,000 units to finished goods. At the end of the month, the goods in process inventory consisted of 41,200 units that were 80% complete with respect to direct labor and factory overhead.

Required

1. Prepare the company’s process cost summary for October using the weighted average method.

2. Prepare the journal entry dated October 31 to transfer the cost of the completed units to finished goods inventory.

 

prepare the journal entry dated october 31 to transfer the cost of completed units t 648436

Ogden Co. manufactures a single product in one department. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process. Direct labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. The company uses monthly reporting periods for its weighted average process cost accounting. During October, the company completed and transferred 22,200 units of product to finished goods inventory. Its 3,000 units of beginning goods in process consisted of $9,900 of direct materials, $61,650 of direct labor, and $49,320 of factory overhead. It has 2,400 units (100% complete with respect to direct materials and 80% complete with respect to direct labor and overhead) in process at month end. After entries to record direct materials, direct labor, and overhead for October, the company’s Goods in Process Inventory account follows.

   

Goods in Process Inventory

Acct. No. 133

Date

 

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

Oct.

1

Balance

   

120,870

 

31

Direct materials

248,400

 

369,270

 

31

Direct labor

601,650

 

970,920

 

31

Applied overhead

481,320

 

1,452,240

2. Assume that Ogden uses the FIFO method to account for its process costing system. The following additional information is available:

? Beginning goods in process consisted of 3,000 units that were 100% complete with respect to direct materials and 40% complete with respect to direct labor and overhead.

? Of the 22,200 units completed, 3,000 were from beginning goods in process. The remaining 19,200 were units started and completed during October.

Required

1. Prepare the company’s process cost summary for October using FIFO.

2. Prepare the journal entry dated October 31 to transfer the cost of completed units to finished goods inventory.

tarick toys company manufactures video game consoles and accounts for product costs 648437

Tarick Toys Company manufactures video game consoles and accounts for product costs using process costing. The following information is available regarding its June inventories.

 

Beginning

Inventory

Ending

Inventory

Raw materials inventory             

$ 54,000

$ 82,500

Goods in process inventory         

117,000

187,500

Finished goods inventory           

120,000

148,500

The following additional information describes the company’s production activities for June.

Raw materials purchases (on credit)                   

$150,000

Factory payroll cost (paid in cash)                     

300,000

Other overhead cost (Other Accounts credited)         

127,875

Materials used

 

Direct                                         

$ 90,000

Indirect                                        

31,500

Labor used

 

Direct                                         

$262,500

Indirect                                        

37,500

Overhead rate as a percent of direct labor              

75%

Sales (on credit)                                   

$750,000

Required

1. Compute the cost of (a) products transferred from production to finished goods, and (b) goods sold.

2. Prepare journal entries dated June 30 to record the following production activities during June: (a) raw materials purchases, (b) direct materials usage, (c) indirect materials usage, (d) payroll costs, (e) direct labor costs, (f) indirect labor costs, (g) other overhead costs, (h) overhead applied, (i) goods transferred from production to finished goods, and (j) sale of finished goods.

compute both the direct labor cost and the direct materials cost per equivalent unit 648438

Eden Company uses process costing to account for its production costs. Direct labor is added evenly throughout the process. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. During April, the production department transferred 40,000 units of product to finished goods. Beginning goods in process had $116,000 of direct materials and $172,800 of direct labor cost. At the end of April, the goods in process inventory consists of 4,000 units that are 25% complete with respect to labor. The direct materials cost added in April is $1,424,000, and direct labor cost added is $3,960,000.

Required

1. Determine the equivalent units of production with respect to (a) direct labor and (b) direct materials.

2. Compute both the direct labor cost and the direct materials cost per equivalent unit.

3. Compute both direct labor cost and direct materials cost assigned to (a) units completed and transferred out, and (b) ending goods in process inventory.

4. The company sells and ships all units to customers as soon as they are completed. Assume that an error is made in determining the percentage of completion for units in ending inventory. Instead of being 30% complete with respect to labor, they are actually 75% complete. Write a one page memo to the plant manager describing how this error affects its April financial statements.

ying company produces large quantities of a standardized product the following infor 648439

Ying Company produces large quantities of a standardized product. The following information is available for its production activities for March.

Raw materials

 

Factory overhead incurred

 

Beginning inventory                  

$ 16,000

Indirect materials used           

$20,280

Raw materials purchased (on credit)    

110,560

Indirect labor used              

18,160

Direct materials used                

(98,560)

Other overhead costs            

17,216

Indirect materials used               

(20,280)

Total factory overhead incurred    

$55,656

Ending inventory                    

$ 7,720 $

Factory overhead applied (90% of direct labor cost)     

 

Factory payroll

 

 

 

Direct labor used                   

61,840

 

 

Indirect labor used                  

18,160

Total factory overhead applied 

$55,656

Total payroll cost (paid in cash)        

$ 80,000

 

 

Additional information about units and costs of production activities follows.

Units

 

Costs

 

 

Beginning goods in process inventory          

8,000

Beginning goods in process inventory

 

 

Started                                  

24,000

Direct materials                    

$2,240

 

Ending goods in process inventory            

6,000

Direct labor                      

1,410

 

 

 

Factory overhead                  

1,269

$ 4,919

Status of ending goods in process inventory

 

Direct materials added                 

 

98,560

Materials—Percent complete              

100%

Direct labor added                   

 

61,840

Labor and overhead—Percent complete     

25%

Overhead applied (90% of direct labor)   

 

55,656

 

 

Total costs                          

 

$220,975

 

 

Ending goods in process inventory      

 

$ 25,455

During March, 45,000 units of finished goods are sold for $25 cash each. Cost information regarding finished goods follows.

Beginning finished goods inventory           

$ 74,200

Cost transferred in from production         

195,520

Cost of goods sold                       

(225,000)

Ending finished goods inventory             

$ 44,720

Required

1. Prepare journal entries dated March 31 to record the following March activities: (a) purchase of raw materials, (b) direct materials usage, (c) indirect materials usage, (d) factory payroll costs, (e) direct labor costs used in production, (f) indirect labor costs, (g) other overhead costs—credit Other Accounts, (h) overhead applied, (i) goods transferred to finished goods, and (j) sale of finished goods.

2. Prepare a process cost summary report for this company, showing costs charged to production, unit cost information, equivalent units of production, cost per EUP, and its cost assignment and reconciliation.

3. This company provides incentives to its department managers by paying monthly bonuses based on their success in controlling costs per equivalent unit of production. Assume that production overestimates the percentage of completion for units in ending inventory with the result that its equivalent units of production in ending inventory for March are overstated. What impact does this error have on bonuses paid to the managers of the production department? What impact, if any, does this error have on these managers’ April bonuses?

prepare the journal entry dated november 30 to transfer the cost of the completed un 648440

Basilex Company produces its product through a single processing department. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Direct labor and overhead are added to the product evenly throughout the process. The company uses monthly reporting periods for its weighted average process cost accounting. Its Goods in Process Inventory account follows after entries for direct materials, direct labor, and overhead costs for November.

   

Goods in Process Inventory

Acct. No. 133

Date

 

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

Nov.

1

Balance

   

10,650

 

30

Direct materials

58,200

 

68,850

 

30

Direct labor

213,400

 

282,250

 

30

Applied overhead

320,100

 

602,350

The 7,500 units of beginning goods in process consisted of $3,400 of direct materials, $2,900 of direct labor, and $4,350 of factory overhead. During November, the company finished and transferred 100,000 units of its product to finished goods. At the end of the month, the goods in process inventory consisted of 12,000 units that were 100% complete with respect to direct materials and 25% complete with respect to direct labor and factory overhead.

Required

1. Prepare the company’s process cost summary for November using the weighted average method.

2. Prepare the journal entry dated November 30 to transfer the cost of the completed units to finished goods inventory.

prepare the company s process cost summary for march using the weighted average meth 648441

Oakley International Co. manufactures a single product in one department. Direct labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. Direct materials are added as needed. The company uses monthly reporting periods for its weighted average process cost accounting. During March, Oakley completed and transferred 220,000 units of product to finished goods inventory. Its 10,000 units of beginning goods in process consisted of $16,800 of direct materials, $27,920 of direct labor, and $69,800 of factory overhead. 40,000 units (50% complete with respect to direct materials and 30% complete with respect to direct labor and overhead) are in process at month end. After entries for direct materials, direct labor, and overhead for March, the company’s Goods in Process Inventory account follows.

   

Goods in Process Inventory

Acct. No. 133

Date

 

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

Mar.

1

Balance

   

114,520

 

31

Direct materials

223,200

 

337,720

 

31

Direct labor

352,560

 

690,280

 

31

Applied overhead

881,400

 

1,571,680

Required

1. Prepare the company’s process cost summary for March using the weighted average method.

2. Prepare the journal entry dated March 31 to transfer the cost of completed units to finished goods inventory.

3. The cost accounting process depends on several estimates.

a. Identify two major estimates that affect the cost per equivalent unit.

b. In what direction might you anticipate a bias from management for each estimate in part 3a (assume that management compensation is based on maintaining low inventory amounts)? Explain your answer.

prepare the company s process cost summary for march using fifo round cost per eup t 648442

Oakley International Co. manufactures a single product in one department. Direct labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. Direct materials are added as needed. The company uses monthly reporting periods for its weighted average process cost accounting. During March, Oakley completed and transferred 220,000 units of product to finished goods inventory. Its 10,000 units of beginning goods in process consisted of $16,800 of direct materials, $27,920 of direct labor, and $69,800 of factory overhead. 40,000 units (50% complete with respect to direct materials and 30% complete with respect to direct labor and overhead) are in process at month end. After entries for direct materials, direct labor, and overhead for March, the company’s Goods in Process Inventory account follows.

   

Goods in Process Inventory

Acct. No. 133

Date

 

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

Mar.

1

Balance

   

114,520

 

31

Direct materials

223,200

 

337,720

 

31

Direct labor

352,560

 

690,280

 

31

Applied overhead

881,400

 

1,571,680

Assume that Oakley International uses the FIFO method to account for its process costing system. The following additional information is available.

? Beginning goods in process consists of 10,000 units that were 75% complete with respect to direct materials and 60% complete with respect to direct labor and overhead.

? Of the 220,000 units completed, 10,000 were from beginning goods in process; the remaining 210,000 were units started and completed during March.

Required

1. Prepare the company’s process cost summary for March using FIFO. Round cost per EUP to one tenth of a cent.

2. Prepare the journal entry dated March 31 to transfer the cost of completed units to finished goods inventory

what effect does this cost accounting policy for its cost of goods sold have on rese 648445

Research In Motion reports in notes to its financial statements that, in addition to its merchandise sold, it includes the following costs (among others) in cost of goods sold: customer shipping and handling expenses, warranty expenses, and depreciation expense on assets used in manufacturing.

Required

1. Why do you believe Research In Motion includes these costs in its cost of goods sold?

2. What effect does this cost accounting policy for its cost of goods sold have on Research In Motion’s financial statements and any analysis of these statements? Explain.

3. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for the fiscal years after February 27, 2010, from it’s the SEC’s EDGAR. Review its footnote relating to Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates. Has Research In Motion changed its policy with respect to what costs are included in the cost of goods sold? Explain.

comment on the similarities or differences in the ratio results across both years am 648446

Manufacturers such as Research In Motion, Apple, and Palm usually work to maintain a high quality and low cost operation. One ratio routinely computed for this assessment is the cost of goods sold divided by total expenses. A decline in this ratio can mean that the company is spending too much on selling and administrative activities. An increase in this ratio beyond a reasonable level can mean that the company is not spending enough on selling activities. (Assume for this analysis that total expenses equal the cost of goods sold plus selling, general, and administrative expenses.)

Required

1. For Research In Motion, Apple, and Palm refer to Appendix A and compute the ratios of cost of goods sold to total expenses for their two most recent fiscal years. (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal.)

2. Comment on the similarities or differences in the ratio results across both years among the companies.

the memorandum should specify an industry a product and one selected process and sho 648447

Many accounting and accounting related professionals are skilled in financial analysis, but most are not skilled in manufacturing. This is especially the case for process manufacturing environments (for example, a bottling plant or chemical factory). To provide professional accounting and financial services, one must understand the industry, product, and processes. We have an ethical responsibility to develop this understanding before offering services to clients in these areas.

Required

Write a one page action plan, in memorandum format, discussing how you would obtain an understanding of key business processes of a company that hires you to provide financial services. The memorandum should specify an industry, a product, and one selected process and should draw on at least one reference, such as a professional journal or industry magazine.

if at any point a team member is uncertain about an answer the team member may pass 648450

The purpose of this team activity is to ensure that each team member understands process operations and the related accounting entries. Find the activities and flows identified in Exhibit 20.4 with numbers 1 – 10. Pick a member of the team to start by describing activity number 1 in this exhibit, then verbalizing the related journal entry, and describing how the amounts in the entry are computed. The other members of the team are to agree or disagree; discussion is to continue until all members express understanding. Rotate to the next numbered activity and next team member until all activities and entries have been discussed. If at any point a team member is uncertain about an answer, the team member may pass and get back in the rotation when he or she can contribute to the team”s discussion.

at the bottom of your list outline how overhead should be assigned to your identifie 648452

In process costing, the process is analyzed first and then a unit measure is computed in the form of equivalent units for direct materials, direct labor, overhead, and all three combined. The same analysis applies to both manufacturing and service processes.

Required

Visit your local U.S. Mail center. Look into the back room, and you will see several ongoing processes. Select one process, such as sorting, and list the costs associated with this process. Your list should include materials, labor, and overhead; be specific. Classify each cost as fixed or variable. At the bottom of your list, outline how overhead should be assigned to your identified process. The following format (with an example) is suggested.

Cost Description

Direct
Material

Direct
Labor

Overhead

Variable
Cost

Fixed
Cost

Manual sorting

 

X

 

X

 

Overhead allocation suggestions:

 

 

 

   

nokia research in motion apple and palm are competitors in the global marketplace se 648453

Nokia, Research In Motion, Apple, and Palm are competitors in the global marketplace. Selected data for Nokia follow.

(millions of euros)

Current Year

Prior Year

Cost of goods sold

€27,720

€33,337

General, selling,
and administrative

 

 

 

 

expenses

5,078

5,664

Total expenses

€32,798

€39,001

Required

1. Review the discussion of the importance of the cost of goods sold divided by total expenses ratio in BTN 20 2. Compute the cost of goods sold to total expenses ratio for Nokia for the two years of data provided. (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal.)

2. Comment on the similarities or differences in the ratio results calculated in part 1 and in BTN 20 2 across years and companies. (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal.)

prepare a departmental income statement reporting net income for each operating depa 648458

Management requests departmental income statements for Hacker’s Haven, a computer store that has five departments. Three are operating departments (hardware, software, and repairs) and two are service departments (general office and purchasing).

 

General

Office

Purchasing

Hardware

Software

Repairs

Sales                     

$960,000

$600,000

$840,000

Cost of goods sold        

500,000

300,000

200,000

Direct expenses

 

 

 

 

 

Payroll                

$60,000

$45,000

80,000

25,000

325,000

Depreciation           

6,000

7,200

33,000

4,200

9,600

Supplies               

15,000

10,000

10,000

2,000

25,000

The departments incur several indirect expenses. To prepare departmental income statements, the indirect expenses must be allocated across the five departments. Then the expenses of the two service departments must be allocated to the three operating departments. Total cost amounts and the allocation bases for each indirect expense follow.

Indirect Expense

Total Cost

Allocation Basis

Rent                      

$150,000

Square footage occupied

Utilities                   

50,000

Square footage occupied

Advertising                

125,000

Dollars of sales

Insurance                  

30,000

Value of assets insured

Service departments

 

 

General office            

?

Number of employees

Purchasing               

?

Dollars of cost of goods sold

The following additional information is needed for indirect expense allocations.

Department

Square

Feet

Sales

Insured

Assets

Employees

Cost of

Goods Sold

General office        

500

 

$ 60,000

 

 

Purchasing           

500

 

72,000

 

 

Hardware            

4,000

$ 960,000

330,000

5

$ 500,000

Software             

3,000

600,000

42,000

5

300,000

Repairs              

2,000

840,000

96,000

10

200,000

Totals                

10,000

$2,400,000

$600,000

20

$1,000,000

Required

1. Prepare a departmental expense allocation spreadsheet for Hacker’s Haven.

2. Prepare a departmental income statement reporting net income for each operating department and for all operating departments combined.

in each blank next to the following terms place the identifying letter of its best d 648464

In each blank next to the following terms, place the identifying letter of its best description.

1. Operating department

2. Profit center

3. Responsibility accounting system

4. Cost center

5. Investment center

6. Departmental accounting system

7. Service department

A. Holds manager responsible for revenues, costs, and investments.

B. Does not directly manufacture products but contributes to profitability of the entire company.

C. Incurs costs and also generates revenues.

D. Provides information used to evaluate the performance of a department.

E. Incurs costs without directly yielding revenues.

F. Provides information used to evaluate the performance of a department manager.

G. Engages directly in manufacturing or in making sales directly to customers.

the over or underapplied overhead is closed to cost of goods sold discuss how this a 648386

Winfrey Co.’s March 31 inventory of raw materials is $150,000. Raw materials purchases in April are $400,000, and factory payroll cost in April is $220,000. Overhead costs incurred in April are: indirect materials, $30,000; indirect labor, $14,000; factory rent, $20,000; factory utilities, $12,000; and fac tory equipment depreciation, $30,000. The predetermined overhead rate is 50% of direct labor cost. Job 306 is sold for $380,000 cash in April. Costs of the three jobs worked on in April follow.

 

Job 306

Job 307

Job 308

Balances on March 31

 

 

 

Direct materials

$14,000

$18,000

 

Direct labor

18,000

16,000

 

Applied overhead

9,000

8,000

 

Costs during April

 

   

Direct materials

100,000

170,000

$80,000

Direct labor

30,000

56,000

120,000

Applied overhead

?

?

?

Status on April 30

Finished (sold)

Finished (unsold)

In process

Required

1. Determine the total of each production cost incurred for April (direct labor, direct materials, and applied overhead), and the total cost assigned to each job (including the balances from March 31).

2. Prepare journal entries for the month of April to record the following.

a. Materials purchases (on credit), factory payroll (paid in cash), and actual overhead costs including indirect materials and indirect labor. (Factory rent and utilities are paid in cash.)

b. Assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead costs to the Goods in Process Inventory.

c. Transfer of Jobs 306 and 307 to the Finished Goods Inventory.

d. Cost of goods sold for Job 306.

e. Revenue from the sale of Job 306.

f. Assignment of any underapplied or overapplied overhead to the Cost of Goods Sold account. (The amount is not material.)

3. Prepare a manufacturing statement for April (use a single line presentation for direct materials and show the details of overhead cost).

4. Compute gross profit for April. Show how to present the inventories on the April 30 balance sheet.

5. The over or underapplied overhead is closed to Cost of Goods Sold. Discuss how this adjustment impacts business decision making regarding individual jobs or batches of jobs.

thai bay s computer system generated the following trial balance on december 31 2011 648387

Thai Bay’s computer system generated the following trial balance on December 31, 2011. The company’s manager knows something is wrong with the trial balance because it does not show any balance for Goods in Process Inventory but does show balances for the Factory Payroll and Factory Overhead accounts.

 

Debit

Credit

Cash               

$48,000

 

Accounts receivable   

42,000

 

Raw materials inventory

26,000

 

Goods in process inventory

0

 

Finished goods inventory

9,000

 

Prepaid rent         

3,000

 

Accounts payable     

 

$10,500

Notes payable        

 

13,500

Common stock       

 

30,000

Retained earnings     

 

87,000

 Sales                

 

180,000

Cost of goods sold    

105,000

 

Factory payroll       

16,000

 

Factory overhead     

27,000

 

Operating expenses   

45,000

 

Totals               

$321,000

$321,000

After examining various files, the manager identifies the following six source documents that need to be processed to bring the accounting records up to date.

Materials requisition 21 3010:

$4,600 direct materials to Job 402

Materials requisition 21 3011:

$7,600 direct materials to Job 404

Materials requisition 21 3012:

$2,100 indirect materials

Labor time ticket 6052:

$5,000 direct labor to Job 402

Labor time ticket 6053:

$8,000 direct labor to Job 404

Labor time ticket 6054:

$3,000 indirect labor

Jobs 402 and 404 are the only units in process at year end. The predetermined overhead rate is 200% of direct labor cost.

Required

1. Use information on the six source documents to prepare journal entries to assign the following costs.

a. Direct materials costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

b. Direct labor costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

c. Overhead costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

d. Indirect materials costs to the Factory Overhead account.

e. Indirect labor costs to the Factory Overhead account.

2. Determine the revised balance of the Factory Overhead account after making the entries in part 1. Determine whether there is any under or overapplied overhead for the year. Prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold, assuming the amount is not material.

3. Prepare a revised trial balance.

4. Prepare an income statement for year 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

5. Assume that the $2,100 on materials requisition 21 3012 should have been direct materials charged to Job 404. Without providing specific calculations, describe the impact of this error on the income statement for 2011 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

westin watercraft s predetermined overhead rate for year 2011 is 200 of direct labor 648388

Westin Watercraft’s predetermined overhead rate for year 2011 is 200% of direct labor. Information on the company’s production activities during May 2011 follows.

a. Purchased raw materials on credit, $125,000.

b. Paid $84,000 cash for factory wages.

c. Paid $11,000 cash to a computer consultant to reprogram factory equipment.

d. Materials requisitions record use of the following materials for the month.

Job 136                    

$30,000

Job 137                    

20,000

Job 138                    

12,000

Job 139                    

14,000

Job 140                    

4,000

Total direct materials         

80,000

Indirect materials            

12,000

Total materials used          

$92,000

e. Time tickets record use of the following labor for the month.

Job 136                

$ 8,000

Job 137                

7,000

Job 138                

25,000

Job 139                 

26,000

Job 140                

2,000

Total direct labor        

68,000

Indirect labor            

16,000

Total                   

$84,000

f. Applied overhead to Jobs 136, 138, and 139.

g. Transferred Jobs 136, 138, and 139 to Finished Goods.

h. Sold Jobs 136 and 138 on credit at a total price of $340,000.

i. The company incurred the following overhead costs during the month (credit Prepaid Insurance for expired factory insurance).

Depreciation of factory building           

$37,000

Depreciation of factory equipment        

21,000

Expired factory insurance                

7,000

Accrued property taxes payable           

31,000

j. Applied overhead at month end to the Goods in Process (Jobs 137 and 140) using the predetermined overhead rate of 200% of direct labor cost.

Required

1. Prepare a job cost sheet for each job worked on during the month. Use the following simplified form.

Job No.

Materials 

$

Labor    

Overhead

Total cost

$

2. Prepare journal entries to record the events and transactions a through j.

3. Set up T accounts for each of the following general ledger accounts, each of which started the month with a zero balance: Raw Materials Inventory; Goods in Process Inventory; Finished Goods Inventory; Factory Payroll; Factory Overhead; Cost of Goods Sold. Then post the journal entries to these T accounts and determine the balance of each account.

4. Prepare a report showing the total cost of each job in process and prove that the sum of their costs equals the Goods in Process Inventory account balance. Prepare similar reports for Finished Goods Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold.

assuming that any over or underapplied overhead is not material prepare the adjustin 648389

In December 2010, Gomez Company’s manager estimated next year’s total direct labor cost assuming 50 persons working an average of 2,000 hours each at an average wage rate of $15 per hour. The manager also estimated the following manufacturing overhead costs for year 2011.

Indirect labor                             

$159,600

Factory supervision                        

120,000

Rent on factory building                    

70,000

Factory utilities                           

44,000

Factory insurance expired                   

34,000

Depreciation—Factory equipment            

240,000

Repairs expense—Factory equipment          

30,000

Factory supplies used                      

34,400

Miscellaneous production costs              

18,000

Total estimated overhead costs              

$750,000

At the end of 2011, records show the company incurred $725,000 of actual overhead costs. It completed and sold five jobs with the following direct labor costs: Job 201, $354,000; Job 202, $330,000; Job 203, $175,000; Job 204, $420,000; and Job 205, $184,000. In addition, Job 206 is in process at the end of 2011 and had been charged $10,000 for direct labor. No jobs were in process at the end of 2010. The company’s predetermined overhead rate is based on direct labor cost.

Required

1. Determine the following.

a. Predetermined overhead rate for year 2011.

b. Total overhead cost applied to each of the six jobs during year 2011.

c. Over or underapplied overhead at year end 2011.

2. Assuming that any over or underapplied overhead is not material, prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of year 2011.

follow the instructions in this list of activities and complete the sheets provided 648390

Sagrillo Company manufactures variations of its product, a technopress, in response to custom orders from its customers. On May 1, the company had no inventories of goods in process or finished goods but held the following raw materials.

Material M        

120 units @ $200 = $24,000

Material R        

80 units @ 160 = 12,800

Paint             

44 units @ 72 = 3,168

Total cost         

$39,968

On May 4, the company began working on two technopresses: Job 102 for Global Company and Job 103 for Rolf Company.

Required

Follow the instructions in this list of activities and complete the sheets provided in the working papers.

a. Purchased raw materials on credit and recorded the following information from receiving reports and invoices.

Receiving Report No. 426, Material M, 150 units at $200 each.

Receiving Report No. 427, Material R, 70 units at $160 each.

Instructions: Record these purchases with a single journal entry and post it to general ledger T accounts, using the transaction letter a to identify the entry. Enter the receiving report information on the materials ledger cards.

b. Requisitioned the following raw materials for production.

Requisition No. 35, for Job 102, 80 units of Material M.

Requisition No. 36, for Job 102, 60 units of Material R.

Requisition No. 37, for Job 103, 40 units of Material M.

Requisition No. 38, for Job 103, 30 units of Material R.

Requisition No. 39, for 12 units of paint.

Instructions: Enter amounts for direct materials requisitions on the materials ledger cards and the job cost sheets. Enter the indirect material amount on the materials ledger card and record a debit to the Indirect Materials account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger. Do not record a journal entry at this time.

c. Received the following employee time tickets for work in May.

Time tickets Nos. 1 to 10 for direct labor on Job 102, $40,000.

Time tickets Nos. 11 to 30 for direct labor on Job 103, $32,000.

Time tickets Nos. 31 to 36 for equipment repairs, $12,000.

Instructions: Record direct labor from the time tickets on the job cost sheets and then debit indirect labor to the Indirect Labor account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger. Do not record a journal entry at this time.

d. Paid cash for the following items during the month: factory payroll, $84,000, and miscellaneous overhead items, $36,000.

Instructions: Record these payments with journal entries and then post them to the general ledger accounts. Also record a debit in the Miscellaneous Overhead account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger.

e. Finished Job 102 and transferred it to the warehouse. The company assigns overhead to each job with a predetermined overhead rate equal to 70% of direct labor cost.

Instructions: Enter the allocated overhead on the cost sheet for Job 102, fill in the cost summary section of the cost sheet, and then mark the cost sheet “Finished.” Prepare a journal entry to record the job’s completion and its transfer to Finished Goods and then post it to the general ledger accounts.

f. Delivered Job 102 and accepted the customer’s promise to pay $290,000 within 30 days.

Instructions: Prepare journal entries to record the sale of Job 102 and the cost of goods sold. Post them to the general ledger accounts.

g. Applied overhead to Job 103 based on the job’s direct labor to date.

Instructions: Enter overhead on the job cost sheet but do not make a journal entry at this time.

h. Recorded the total direct and indirect materials costs as reported on all the requisitions for the month.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record these costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

i. Recorded the total direct and indirect labor costs as reported on all time tickets for the month.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record these costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

j. Recorded the total overhead costs applied to jobs.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record the allocation of these overhead costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

metro s computer system generated the following trial balance on december 31 2011 648392

Metro’s computer system generated the following trial balance on December 31, 2011. The company’s manager knows that the trial balance is wrong because it does not show any balance for Goods in Process Inventory but does show balances for the Factory Payroll and Factory Overhead accounts.

 

Debit

Credit

Cash                  

$40,000

 

Accounts receivable    

80,000

 

Raw materials inventory 

24,000

 

Goods in process inventory

0

 

Finished goods inventory

50,000

 

Prepaid rent          

4,000

 

Accounts payable      

 

$16,000

Notes payable         

 

30,000

Common stock        

 

60,000

Retained earnings      

 

33,800

Sales                 

 

250,000

Cost of goods sold     

140,000

 

Factory payroll        

20,000

 

Factory overhead      

9,800

 

Operating expenses    

22,000

 

Totals                 

$389,800

$389,800

After examining various files, the manager identifies the following six source documents that need to be processed to bring the accounting records up to date.

Materials requisition 94 231:

$ 5,000 direct materials to Job 603

Materials requisition 94 232:

$ 8,000 direct materials to Job 604

Materials requisition 94 233:

$ 1,500 indirect materials

Labor time ticket 765:

$ 6,000 direct labor to Job 603

Labor time ticket 766:

$12,000 direct labor to Job 604

Labor time ticket 777:

$ 2,000 indirect labor

Jobs 603 and 604 are the only units in process at year end. The predetermined overhead rate is 80% of direct labor cost.

Required

1. Use information on the six source documents to prepare journal entries to assign the following costs.

a. Direct materials costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

b. Direct labor costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

c. Overhead costs to Goods in Process Inventory.

d. Indirect materials costs to the Factory Overhead account.

e. Indirect labor costs to the Factory Overhead account.

2. Determine the revised balance of the Factory Overhead account after making the entries in part 1. Determine whether there is under or overapplied overhead for the year. Prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold, assuming the amount is not material.

3. Prepare a revised trial balance.

4. Prepare an income statement for year 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

5. Assume that the $1,500 indirect materials on materials requisition 94 233 should have been direct materials charged to Job 604. Without providing specific calculations, describe the impact of this error on the income statement for 2011 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

troupe company s predetermined overhead rate is 90 of direct labor information on th 648393

Troupe Company’s predetermined overhead rate is 90% of direct labor. Information on the company’s production activities during September 2011 follows.

a. Purchased raw materials on credit, $57,000.

b. Paid $99,750 cash for factory wages.

c. Paid $11,250 cash for miscellaneous factory overhead costs.

d. Materials requisitions record use of the following materials for the month.

Job 487                    

$13,500

Job 488                    

9,000

Job 489                    

12,000

Job 490                     

10,500

Job 491                    

1,500

Total direct materials         

46,500

Indirect materials            

3,750

Total materials used          

$50,250

e. Time tickets record use of the following labor for the month.

Job 487                  

$16,500

Job 488                 

19,500

Job 489                 

25,500

Job 490                 

18,000

Job 491                 

7,500

Total direct labor         

87,000

Indirect labor            

12,750

Total                    

$99,750

f. Allocated overhead to Jobs 487, 489, and 490.

g. Transferred Jobs 487, 489, and 490 to Finished Goods.

h. Sold Jobs 487 and 489 on credit for a total price of $225,000.

i. The company incurred the following overhead costs during the month (credit Prepaid Insurance for expired factory insurance).

Depreciation of factory building           

$24,750

Depreciation of factory equipment        

18,750

Expired factory insurance                

2,250

Accrued property taxes payable            

5,250

j. Applied overhead at month end to the Goods in Process (Jobs 488 and 491) using the predetermined overhead rate of 90% of direct labor cost.

Required

1. Prepare a job cost sheet for each job worked on in the month. Use the following simplified form.

Job No.

Materials     

 

Labor        

 

Overhead    

 

Total cost    

 

2. Prepare journal entries to record the events and transactions a through j.

3. Set up T accounts for each of the following general ledger accounts, each of which started the month with a zero balance: Raw Materials Inventory, Goods in Process Inventory, Finished Goods Inventory, Factory Payroll, Factory Overhead, Cost of Goods Sold. Then post the journal entries to these T accounts and determine the balance of each account.

4. Prepare a report showing the total cost of each job in process and prove that the sum of their costs equals the Goods in Process Inventory account balance. Prepare similar reports for Finished Goods Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold.

the manager also estimated the following manufacturing overhead costs for year 2011 648394

In December 2010, Monk Company’s manager estimated next year’s total direct labor cost assuming 40 persons working an average of 1,500 hours each at an average wage rate of $50 per hour. The manager also estimated the following manufacturing overhead costs for year 2011.

Indirect labor                             

$ 540,000

Factory supervision                        

450,000

Rent on factory building                    

360,000

Factory utilities                           

200,000

Factory insurance expired                  

60,000

Depreciation—Factory equipment           

300,000

Repairs expense—Factory equipment         

180,000

Factory supplies used                      

110,000

Miscellaneous production costs              

200,000

Total estimated overhead costs              

$2,400,000

At the end of 2011, records show the company incurred $2,200,000 of actual overhead costs. It completed and sold five jobs with the following direct labor costs: Job 625, $300,000; Job 626, $225,000; Job 627, $975,000; Job 628, $240,000; and Job 629, $375,000. In addition, Job 630 is in process at the end of 2011 and had been charged $75,000 for direct labor. No jobs were in process at the end of 2010. The company’s predetermined overhead rate is based on direct labor cost.

Required

1. Determine the following.

a. Predetermined overhead rate for year 2011.

b. Total overhead cost applied to each of the six jobs during year 2011.

c. Over or underapplied overhead at year end 2011.

2. Assuming that any over or underapplied overhead is not material, prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of year 2011.

sim company produces variations of its product a megatron in response to custom orde 648395

Sim Company produces variations of its product, a megatron, in response to custom orders from its customers. On June 1, the company had no inventories of goods in process or finished goods but held the following raw materials.

Material M        

150 units @ $40 = $6,000

Material R        

50 units @ 160 = 8,000

Paint             

20 units @ 20 = 400

Total cost         

$14,400

On June 3, the company began working on two megatrons: Job 450 for Olivas Company and Job 451 for Ireland, Inc.

Required

Follow instructions in this list of activities and complete the sheets provided in the working papers.

a. Purchased raw materials on credit and recorded the following information from receiving reports and invoices.

Receiving Report No. 20, Material M, 150 units at $40 each.

Receiving Report No. 21, Material R, 200 units at $160 each.

Instructions: Record these purchases with a single journal entry and post it to general ledger T accounts, using the transaction letter a to identify the entry. Enter the receiving report information on the materials ledger cards.

b. Requisitioned the following raw materials for production.

Requisition No. 223, for Job 450, 60 units of Material M.

Requisition No. 224, for Job 450, 100 units of Material R.

Requisition No. 225, for Job 451, 30 units of Material M.

Requisition No. 226, for Job 451, 75 units of Material R.

Requisition No. 227, for 10 units of paint.

Instructions: Enter amounts for direct materials requisitions on the materials ledger cards and the job cost sheets. Enter the indirect material amount on the materials ledger card and record a debit to the Indirect Materials account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger. Do not record a journal entry at this time.

c. Received the following employee time tickets for work in June.

Time tickets Nos. 1 to 10 for direct labor on Job 450, $24,000.

Time tickets Nos. 11 to 20 for direct labor on Job 451, $20,000.

Time tickets Nos. 21 to 24 for equipment repairs, $4,000.

Instructions: Record direct labor from the time tickets on the job cost sheets and then debit indirect labor to the Indirect Labor account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger. Do not record a journal entry at this time.

d. Paid cash for the following items during the month: factory payroll, $48,000, and miscellaneous overhead items, $47,000.

Instructions: Record these payments with journal entries and post them to the general ledger accounts.

Also record a debit in the Miscellaneous Overhead account in the subsidiary factory overhead ledger.

e. Finished Job 450 and transferred it to the warehouse. The company assigns overhead to each job with a predetermined overhead rate equal to 120% of direct labor cost.

Instructions: Enter the allocated overhead on the cost sheet for Job 450, fill in the cost summary section of the cost sheet, and then mark the cost sheet “Finished.” Prepare a journal entry to record the job’s completion and its transfer to Finished Goods and then post it to the general ledger accounts.

f. Delivered Job 450 and accepted the customer’s promise to pay $130,000 within 30 days.

Instructions: Prepare journal entries to record the sale of Job 450 and the cost of goods sold. Post them to the general ledger accounts.

g. Applied overhead cost to Job 451 based on the job’s direct labor used to date.

Instructions: Enter overhead on the job cost sheet but do not make a journal entry at this time.

h. Recorded the total direct and indirect materials costs as reported on all the requisitions for the month.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record these costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

i. Recorded the total direct and indirect labor costs as reported on all time tickets for the month.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record these costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

j. Recorded the total overhead costs applied to jobs.

Instructions: Prepare a journal entry to record the allocation of these overhead costs and post it to general ledger accounts.

what is the cost of the raw materials used in june for each of the three jobs and in 648396

The computer workstation furniture manufacturing that Santana Rey started in January is progressing well. As of the end of June, Business Solutions’ job cost sheets show the following total costs accumulated on three furniture jobs.

 

Job 6.02

Job 6.03

Job 6.04

Direct materials         

$1,500

$3,300

$2,700

Direct labor            

800

1,420

2,100

Overhead              

400

710

1,050

Job 6.02 was started in production in May, and these costs were assigned to it in May: direct materials, $600; direct labor, $180; and overhead, $90. Jobs 6.03 and 6.04 were started in June. Overhead cost is applied with a predetermined rate based on direct labor costs. Jobs 6.02 and 6.03 are finished in June, and Job 6.04 is expected to be finished in July. No raw materials are used indirectly in June. (Assume this company’s predetermined overhead rate did not change over these months).

Required

1. What is the cost of the raw materials used in June for each of the three jobs and in total?

2. How much total direct labor cost is incurred in June?

3. What predetermined overhead rate is used in June?

4. How much cost is transferred to finished goods inventory in June?

would the move to a jit system have a one time or recurring impact on operating cash 648398

Retailers as well as manufacturers can apply just in time (JIT) to their inventory management. Both Research In Motion and Apple want to know the impact of a JIT inventory system for their operating cash flows. Review each company’s statement of cash flows in Appendix A to answer the following. (For RIM, also review Note 16.)

Required

1. Identify the impact on operating cash flows (increase or decrease) for changes in inventory levels (increase or decrease) for both companies for each of the three most recent years.

2. What impact would a JIT inventory system have on both RIM’s and Apple’s operating income? Link the answer to your response for part 1.

3. Would the move to a JIT system have a one time or recurring impact on operating cash flow?

an accounting professional requires at least two skill sets the first is to be techn 648399

An accounting professional requires at least two skill sets. The first is to be technically competent. Knowing how to capture, manage, and report information is a necessary skill. Second, the ability to assess manager and employee actions and biases for accounting analysis is another skill. For instance, knowing how a person is compensated helps anticipate information biases. Draw on these skills and write a one half page memo to the financial officer on the following practice of allocating overhead. Background: Assume that your company sells portable housing to both general contractors and the government. It sells jobs to contractors on a bid basis. A contractor asks for three bids from different manufacturers. The combination of low bid and high quality wins the job. However, jobs sold to the government are bid on a costplus basis. This means price is determined by adding all costs plus a profit based on cost at a specified percent, such as 10%. You observe that the amount of overhead allocated to government jobs is higher than that allocated to contract jobs. These allocations concern you and motivate your memo.

for the basic cost categories of direct labor and overhead provide examples of the t 648402

1. Consider the activities undertaken by a medical clinic in your area.

Required

a. Do you consider a job order cost accounting system appropriate for the clinic?

b. Identify as many factors as possible to lead you to conclude that it uses a job order system.

2. Refer to the chapter opener regarding John Hewitt and his company, Liberty Tax Service. All successful businesses track their costs, and it is especially important for start up businesses to monitor and control costs.

Required

a. Assume that Liberty Tax Service uses a job order costing system. For the basic cost category of direct materials, explain how a job cost sheet for Liberty Tax Service would differ from a job cost sheet for a manufacturing company.

b. For the basic cost categories of direct labor and overhead, provide examples of the types of costs that would fall into each category for Liberty Tax Service.

would a move to a jit system likely impact nokia more than it would palm explain 648404

Nokia and Palm are competitors in the global marketplace. Access Nokia’s annual report for the year ended December 31, 2009. The following information is available for Nokia.

(Euro millions)

Current Year

One Year Prior

Two Years Prior

Inventories

€ 1,865

€ 2,533

€ 2,876

Required

1. Determine the change in Nokia’s inventories for the last two years. Then identify the impact on net resources generated by operating activities (increase or decrease) for changes in inventory levels (increase or decrease) for Nokia for the last two years.

2. Would a move to a JIT system likely impact Nokia more than it would Palm? Explain.

compute the total equivalent units of production with respect to labor for june usin 648416

The following refers to units processed in Heath Printing’s binding department in June. Compute the total equivalent units of production with respect to labor for June using the weighted average inventory method.

 

Units of Product

Percent of Labor Added

Beginning goods in process            

150,000

85%

Goods started                       

310,000

100

Goods completed                   

340,000

100

Ending goods in process              

120,000

25

explain how a car maintenance and repair garage might use a hybrid costing system 648417

1.The cost of beginning inventory plus the costs added during the period should equal the cost of units _____________________ plus the cost of _____________________.

2. Explain how a car maintenance and repair garage might use a hybrid costing system.

3. The following refers to units processed in Heath Printing’s binding department in June. Compute the total equivalent units of production with respect to labor for June using the weighted average inventory method.

 

Units of Product

Percent of Labor Added

Beginning goods in process            

150,000

85%

Goods started                      

310,000

100

Goods completed                   

340,000

100

Ending goods in process              

120,000

25

4. Compute the total equivalent units of production with respect to labor for June using the FIFO inventory method.

match each of the following items a through g with the best numbered description of 648420

Match each of the following items A through G with the best numbered description of its purpose.

A. Process cost summary

B. Equivalent units of production

C. Goods in Process Inventory account

D. Raw Materials Inventory account

E. Materials requisition

F. Finished Goods Inventory account

G. Factory Overhead account

1. Holds costs of materials until they are used in production or as factory overhead.

2. Holds costs of indirect materials, indirect labor, and similar costs until assigned to production.

3. Holds costs of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead until products are transferred from production to finished goods (or another department).

4. Standardizes partially completed units into equivalent completed units.

5. Holds costs of finished products until sold to customers.

6. Describes the activity and output of a production department for a period.

7. Notifies the materials manager to send materials to a production department.

lowes lumber produces bagged bark for use in landscaping production involves packagi 648423

Prepare journal entries to record the following production activities.

a. Transferred completed products with a cost of $137,000 to finished goods inventory.

b. Sold $450,000 of products on credit. Their cost is $150,000.

2. Lowes Lumber produces bagged bark for use in landscaping. Production involves packaging bark chips in plastic bags in a bagging department. The following information describes production operations for October.

 

Bagging
Department

Direct materials used

$230,000

Direct labor used

$38,000

Predetermined overhead rate (based on direct labor)

120%

Goods transferred from bagging to finished goods

$(203,500)

The company’s revenue for the month totaled $450,000 from credit sales, and its cost of goods sold for the month is $250,000. Prepare summary journal entries dated October 31 to record its October production activities for (1) direct material usage, (2) direct labor usage, (3) overhead allocation, (4) goods transfer from production to finished goods, and (5) sales.

during april the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a 648425

During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April’s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

1. Compute the number of units transferred to finished goods.

2. Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the weighted average method.

compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor 648426

1. During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April’s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

a. Compute the number of units transferred to finished goods.

b. Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the weighted average method.

2. Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the FIFO method.

the purchasing manager asks you about preparing an estimate of the related costs for 648341

Refer to Decision Maker, Purchase Manager, in this chapter. Assume that you are the motorcycle manufacturer’s managerial accountant. The purchasing manager asks you about preparing an estimate of the related costs for buying motorcycle seats from supplier (B). She tells you this estimate is needed because unless dollar estimates are attached to nonfinancial factors such as lost production time, her supervisor will not give it full attention. The manager also shows you the following information.

? Production output is 2,000 motorcycles per year based on 250 production days a year.

? Production time per day is 8 hours at a cost of $500 per hour to run the production line.

? Lost production time due to poor quality is 1%.

? Satisfied customers purchase, on average, three motorcycles during a lifetime.

? Satisfied customers recommend the product, on average, to 10 other people.

? Marketing predicts that using seat (B) will result in 8 lost customers per year from repeat business and referrals.

? Average gross profit per motorcycle is $4,000.

Required

Estimate the costs (including opportunity costs) of buying motorcycle seats from supplier (B). This problem requires that you think creatively and make reasonable estimates; thus there could be more than one correct answer.

shown here are annual financial data at december 31 2011 taken from two different co 648343

Shown here are annual financial data at December 31, 2011, taken from two different companies.

 

Cardinal Drug

Nandina

 

(Retail)

(Manufacturing)

Beginning inventory

 

 

Merchandise                   

$ 50,000

 

Finished goods                 

 

$200,000

Cost of purchases                 

350,000

 

Cost of goods manufactured        

 

686,000

Ending inventory

 

 

Merchandise                    

25,000

 

Finished goods                 

 

300,000

Required

1. Compute the cost of goods sold section of the income statement at December 31, 2011, for each company.

Include the proper title and format in the solution.

2. Write a half page memorandum to your instructor (a) identifying the inventory accounts and (b) identifying where each is reported on the income statement and balance sheet for both companies.

the following calendar year end information is taken from the december 31 2011 adjus 648345

The following calendar year end information is taken from the December 31, 2011, adjusted trial balance and other records of Firethorn Furniture.

Advertising expense                           

$ 22,250

Direct labor                                   

$ 564,500

Depreciation expense—Office equipment          

10,440

Income taxes expense                         

138,700

Depreciation expense—Selling equipment         

12,125

Indirect labor                                 

61,000

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment        

37,400

Miscellaneous production costs                  

10,440

Factory supervision                           

123,500

Office salaries expense                         

72,875

Factory supplies used                           

8,060

Raw materials purchases                        

896,375

Factory utilities                               

39,500

Rent expense—Office space                    

25,625

Inventories

 

Rent expense—Selling space                    

29,000

Raw materials, December 31, 2010             

42,375

Rent expense—Factory building                 

95,500

Raw materials, December 31, 2011             

72,430

Maintenance expense—Factory equipment        

32,375

Goods in process, December 31, 2010          

14,500

Sales                                        

5,002,000

Goods in process, December 31, 2011          

16,100

Sales discounts                               

59,375

Finished goods, December 31, 2010             

179,200

Sales salaries expense                          

297,300

Finished goods, December 31, 2011             

143,750

 

 

Required

1. Prepare the company’s 2011 manufacturing statement.

2. Prepare the company’s 2011 income statement that reports separate categories for (a) selling expenses and (b) general and administrative expenses.

3. Compute the (a) inventory turnover, defined as cost of goods sold divided by average inventory, and (b) days’ sales in inventory, defined as 365 times ending inventory divided by cost of goods sold, for both its raw materials inventory and its finished goods inventory. (To compute turnover and days’ sales in inventory for raw materials, use raw materials used rather than cost of goods sold.) Discuss some possible reasons for differences between these ratios for the two types of inventories. Round answers to one decimal place.

quick dry ink produces ink jet printers for personal computers it received an order 648346

Quick Dry Ink produces ink jet printers for personal computers. It received an order for 600 printers from a customer. The following information is available for this order.

Process time

16.0 hours

Inspection time

3.4 hours

Move time

9.0 hours

Wait time

21.6 hours

Required

1. Compute the company’s manufacturing cycle time.

2. Compute the company’s manufacturing cycle efficiency. Interpret your answer.

3. Assume that Quick Dry Ink wishes to increase its manufacturing cycle efficiency to 0.80. What are some ways that it can accomplish this?

classify the following manufacturing costs of business solutions by behavior and tra 648347

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to diversify her business by also manufacturing computer workstation furniture.

Required

1. Classify the following manufacturing costs of Business Solutions by behavior and traceability.

 

Cost by Behavior

Cost by Traceability

Product Costs

Variable

Fixed

Direct

Indirect

1. Monthly flat fee to clean workshop         

____

____

____

____

2. Laminate coverings for desktops           

____

____

____

____

3. Taxes on assembly workshop             

____

____

____

____

4. Glue to assemble workstation

 

 

 

 

component parts                     

____

____

____

____

5. Wages of desk assembler                

____

____

____

____

6. Electricity for workshop                 

____

____

____

____

7. Depreciation on tools                   

____

____

____

____

2. Prepare a manufacturing statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012. Assume the following manufacturing costs:

Direct materials: $2,200

Factory overhead: $490

Direct labor: $900

Beginning goods in process: none (December 31, 2011)

Ending goods in process: $540 (January 31, 2012)

Beginning finished goods inventory: none (December 31, 2011)

Ending finished goods inventory: $350 (January 31, 2012)

3. Prepare the cost of goods sold section of a partial income statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012.

what is the management accountant s role in determining those estimates 648348

Managerial accounting is more than recording, maintaining, and reporting financial results. Managerial accountants must provide managers with both financial and nonfinancial information including estimates, projections, and forecasts. There are many accounting estimates that management accountants must make, and Research In Motion must notify shareholders of these estimates.

Required

1. Access and read Research In Motion’s “Use of Estimates” section of the “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” footnote to its financial statements, from Appendix A. What are some of the accounting estimates that Research In Motion made in preparing its financial statements? What are some of the effects if the company’s actual results differ from its estimates?

2. What is the management accountant’s role in determining those estimates?

3. Access Research In Motion’s annual report for a fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010, from either its the SEC’s EDGAR database. Answer the questions in parts (1) and (2) after reading the current “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies”. Identify any major changes.

how should you respond to this request by the chief financial officer 648350

Assume that you are the managerial accountant at Infostore, a manufacturer of hard drives, CDs, and DVDs. Its reporting year end is December 31. The chief financial officer is concerned about having enough cash to pay the expected income tax bill because of poor cash flow management. On November 15, the purchasing department purchased excess inventory of CD raw materials in anticipation of rapid growth of this product beginning in January. To decrease the company’s tax liability, the chief financial officer tells you to record the purchase of this inventory as part of supplies and expense it in the current year; this would decrease the company’s tax liability by increasing expenses.

Required

1. In which account should the purchase of CD raw materials be recorded?

2. How should you respond to this request by the chief financial officer?

what four overarching ethical principles underlie the ima s statement 648351

1. Write a one page memorandum to a prospective college student about salary expectations for graduates in business. Compare and contrast the expected salaries for accounting (including different subfields such as public, corporate, tax, audit, and so forth), marketing, management, and finance majors. Prepare a graph showing average starting salaries (and those for experienced professionals in those fields if available). To get this information, stop by your school’s career services office; libraries also have this information.

2. Managerial accounting professionals follow a code of ethics. As a member of the Institute of Management Accountants, the managerial accountant must comply with Standards of Ethical Conduct.

Required

1. Identify, print, and read the Statement of Ethical Professional Practice posted.

(Search using “ethical professional practice.”)

2. What four overarching ethical principles underlie the IMA’s statement?

3. Describe the courses of action the IMA recommends in resolving ethical conflicts.

the following calendar year information is taken from the december 31 2011 adjusted 648352

The following calendar year information is taken from the December 31, 2011, adjusted trial balance and other records of Azalea Company.

Advertising expense                            

$ 19,125

Direct labor                                  

$ 650,750

Depreciation expense—Office equipment           

8,750

Indirect labor                                 

60,000

Depreciation expense—Selling equipment          

10,000

Miscellaneous production costs

8,500

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment         

32,500

Office salaries expense

100,875

Factory supervision                             

122,500

Raw materials purchases

872,500

Factory supplies used                           

15,750

Rent expense—Office space

21,125

Factory utilities                                

36,250

Rent expense—Selling space

25,750

Inventories

 

Rent expense—Factory building

79,750

Raw materials, December 31, 2010              

177,500

Maintenance expense—Factory equipment

27,875

Raw materials, December 31, 2011               

168,125

Sales

3,275,000

Goods in process, December 31, 2010           

15,875

Sales discounts

57,500

Goods in process, December 31, 2011            

14,000

Sales salaries expense

286,250

Finished goods, December 31, 2010              

164,375

 

 

Finished goods, December 31, 2011              

129,000

 

 

Required

1. Each team member is to be responsible for computing one of the following amounts. You are not to duplicate your teammates’ work. Get any necessary amounts from teammates. Each member is to explain the computation to the team in preparation for reporting to class.

a. Materials used.

b. Factory overhead.

c. Total manufacturing costs.

d. Total cost of goods in process.

e. Cost of goods manufactured.

2. Check your cost of goods manufactured with the instructor. If it is correct, proceed to part (3).

3. Each team member is to be responsible for computing one of the following amounts. You are not to duplicate your teammates’ work. Get any necessary amounts from teammates. Each member is to explain the computation to the team in preparation for reporting to class.

a. Net sales.

b. Cost of goods sold.

c. Gross profit.

d. Total operating expenses.

e. Net income or loss before taxes.

the left column lists the titles of documents and accounts used in job order cost ac 648372

The left column lists the titles of documents and accounts used in job order cost accounting. The right column presents short descriptions of the purposes of the documents. Match each document in the left column to its numbered description in the right column.

A. Factory Payroll account

B. Materials ledger card

C. Time ticket

D. Voucher

E. Materials requisition

F. Factory Overhead account

G. Clock card

1. Communicates the need for materials to complete a job.

2. Shows only total time an employee works each day.

3. Shows amount approved for payment of an overhead or other cost.

4. Shows amount of time an employee works on a job.

5. Temporarily accumulates the cost of incurred overhead until the cost is assigned to specific jobs.

6. Temporarily accumulates incurred labor costs until they are assigned to specific jobs or to overhead.

7. Perpetual inventory record of raw materials received, used, and available for use.

the following information is from the materials requisitions and time tickets for jo 648373

The following information is from the materials requisitions and time tickets for Job 9 1005 completed by Wright Boats. The requisitions are identified by code numbers starting with the letter Q and the time tickets start with W. At the start of the year, management estimated that overhead cost would equal 140% of direct labor cost for each job. Determine the total cost on the job cost sheet for Job 9 1005.

Date

Document

Amount

7/1/2011

Q 4698

$1,350

7/1/2011

W 3393

700

7/5/2011

Q 4725

1,100

7/5/2011

W 3479

550

7/10/2011

W 3559

400

as of the end of june the job cost sheets at racing wheels inc show the following to 648374

As of the end of June, the job cost sheets at Racing Wheels, Inc., show the following total costs accumulated on three custom jobs.

 

Job 102

Job 103

Job 104

Direct materials

$30,000

$66,000

$54,000

Direct labor

16,000

28,400

42,000

Overhead

8,000

14,200

21,000

Job 102 was started in production in May and the following costs were assigned to it in May: direct materials, $12,000; direct labor, $3,600; and overhead, $1,800. Jobs 103 and 104 are started in June. Overhead cost is applied with a predetermined rate based on direct labor cost. Jobs 102 and 103 are finished in June, and Job 104 is expected to be finished in July. No raw materials are used indirectly in June. Using this information, answer the following questions. (Assume this company’s predetermined overhead rate did not change across these months).

1. What is the cost of the raw materials requisitioned in June for each of the three jobs?

2. How much direct labor cost is incurred during June for each of the three jobs?

3. What predetermined overhead rate is used during June?

4. How much total cost is transferred to finished goods during June?

use the information on the following job cost sheet to determine the total cost of t 648375

In December 2010, Kent Computer’s management establishes the year 2011 predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost. The information used in setting this rate includes estimates that the company will incur $756,000 of overhead costs and $540,000 of direct labor cost in year 2011. During March 2011, Kent began and completed Job No. 13 56.

1. What is the predetermined overhead rate for year 2011?

2. Use the information on the following job cost sheet to determine the total cost of the job.

JOB COST SHEET

Customer’s Name

Keiser Co.

Job No.

13 56

Job Description

5 color monitors—21 inch

 

 

 

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Overhead
Costs Applied

Date

Requisition No.

Amount

Time Ticket No.

Amount

Rate

Amount

Mar. 8

4 129

$5,000

T 306

$640

   

Mar. 11

4 142

7,050

T 432

1,280

   

Mar. 18

4 167

3,550

T 456

1,280

   

Totals

           

lopez company uses a job order cost accounting system that charges overhead to jobs 648376

Lopez Company uses a job order cost accounting system that charges overhead to jobs on the basis of direct material cost. At year end, the Goods in Process Inventory account shows the following.

Date

Explanation

Debit

Credit

Balance

2011

       

Dec. 31

Direct materials cost

1,500,000

 

1,500,000

31

Direct labor cost

240,000

 

1,740,000

31

Overhead costs

450,000

 

2,190,000

31

To finished goods

 

2,100,000

90,000

           

1. Determine the overhead rate used (based on direct material cost).

2. Only one job remained in the goods in process inventory at December 31, 2011. Its direct materials cost is $30,000. How much direct labor cost and overhead cost are assigned to it?

the following information is available for lock down company which produces special 648377

1. The following information is available for Lock Down Company, which produces special order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

 

April 30

May 31

Inventories

 

 

Raw materials

$40,000

$ 50,000

Goods in process

9,600

19,500

Finished goods

60,000

33,200

Activities and information for May

 

 

Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

 

189,000

Factory payroll (paid with cash)

 

400,000

Factory overhead

 

 

Indirect materials

 

12,000

Indirect labor

 

75,000

Other overhead costs

 

100,500

Sales (received in cash)

 

1,200,000

Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

 

65%

Compute the following amounts for the month of May.

a. Cost of direct materials used.

b. Cost of direct labor used.

c. Cost of goods manufactured.

d. Cost of goods sold.*

e. Gross profit.

f. Over applied or under applied overhead.

2. Use information in above table to prepare journal entries for the following events for the month of May.

a. Raw materials purchases for cash.

b. Direct materials usage.

c. Indirect materials usage.

in december 2010 ultravision established its predetermined overhead rate for movies 648380

In December 2010, Ultravision established its predetermined overhead rate for movies produced during year 2011 by using the following cost predictions: overhead costs, $1,800,000, and direct labor costs, $450,000. At year end 2011, the company’s records show that actual overhead costs for the year are $1,770,000. Actual direct labor cost had been assigned to jobs as follows.

Movies completed and released

$400,000

Movies still in production

45,000

Total actual direct labor cost

$445,000

1. Determine the predetermined overhead rate for year 2011.

2. Set up a T account for overhead and enter the overhead costs incurred and the amounts applied to movies during the year using the predetermined overhead rate.

3. Determine whether overhead is overapplied or underapplied (and the amount) during the year.

4. Prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.

prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to cost of 648381

In December 2010, Perez Company established its predetermined overhead rate for jobs produced during year 2011 by using the following cost predictions: overhead costs, $600,000, and direct labor costs, $500,000. At year end 2011, the company’s records show that actual overhead costs for the year are $680,000. Actual direct labor cost had been assigned to jobs as follows.

Jobs completed and sold

$420,000

Jobs in finished goods inventory

84,000

Jobs in goods in process inventory

56,000

Total actual direct labor cost

$560,000

1. Determine the predetermined overhead rate for year 2011.

2. Set up a T account for Factory Overhead and enter the overhead costs incurred and the amounts applied to jobs during the year using the predetermined overhead rate.

3. Determine whether overhead is overapplied or underapplied (and the amount) during the year.

4. Prepare the adjusting entry to allocate any over or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.

compute cost of goods sold for the year assume no beginning inventories and no under 648383

Vegas Company’s ending Goods in Process Inventory account consists of 4,500 units of partially completed product, and its Finished Goods Inventory account consists of 11,700 units of product. The factory manager determines that Goods in Process Inventory includes direct materials cost of $10 per unit and direct labor cost of $7 per unit. Finished goods are estimated to have $12 of direct materials cost per unit and $9 of direct labor cost per unit. The company established the predetermined overhead rate using the following predictions: estimated direct labor cost, $300,000, and estimated factory overhead, $360,000. The company allocates factory overhead to its goods in process and finished goods inventories based on direct labor cost. During the period, the company incurred these costs: direct materials, $460,000; direct labor, $277,000; and factory overhead applied, $332,400.

1. Determine the predetermined overhead rate.

2. Compute the total cost of the two ending inventories.

3. Compute cost of goods sold for the year (assume no beginning inventories and no underapplied or overapplied overhead).

what is friesen s estimated cost of the architectural job 648384

Multiplex Corporation has requested bids from several architects to design its new corporate headquarters. Friesen Architects is one of the firms bidding on the job. Friesen estimates that the job will require the following direct labor.

Labor

Estimated Hours

Hourly Rate

Architects

200

$300

Staff

400

75

Clerical

700

20

Friesen applies overhead to jobs at 160% of direct labor cost. Friesen would like to earn at least $80,000 profit on the architectural job. Based on past experience and market research, it estimates that the competition will bid between $325,000 and $400,000 for the job.

1. What is Friesen’s estimated cost of the architectural job?

2. What bid would you suggest that Friesen submit?

as baldwin company controller you are responsible for informing the board of directo 648291

As Baldwin Company controller, you are responsible for informing the board of directors about its financial activities. At the board meeting, you present the following information.

 

2011

2010

2009

Sales trend percent

147.00%

135.00%

100.00%

Selling expenses to sales

10.10%

14.00%

15.60%

Sales to plant assets ratio

3.8 to 1

3.6 to 1

3.3 to 1

Current ratio

2.9 to 1

2.7 to 1

2.4 to 1

Acid test ratio

1.1 to 1

1.4 to 1

1.5 to 1

Inventory turnover

7.8 times

9.0 times

10.2 times

Accounts receivable turnover

7.0 times

7.7 times

8.5 times

Total asset turnover

2.9 times

2.9 times

3.3 times

Return on total assets

10.40%

11.00%

13.20%

Return on stockholders’ equity

10.70%

11.50%

14.10%

Profit margin ratio

3.60%

3.80%

4.00%

After the meeting, the company’s CEO holds a press conference with analysts in which she mentions the following ratios.

 

2011

2010

2009

Sales trend percent              

147.0%

135.0%

100.0%

Selling expenses to sales           

10.1%

14.0%

15.6%

Sales to plant assets ratio         

3.8 to 1

3.6 to 1

3.3 to 1

Current ratio                  

2.9 to 1

2.7 to 1

2.4 to 1

Required

1. Why do you think the CEO decided to report 4 ratios instead of the 11 prepared?

2. Comment on the possible consequences of the CEO’s reporting of the ratios selected.

is the company collecting its accounts receivable more rapidly explain 648295

Assume that David and Tom Gardner of The Motley Fool have impressed you since you first heard of their rather improbable rise to prominence in financial circles. You learn of a staff opening at The Motley Fool and decide to apply for it. Your resume is successfully screened from the thousands received and you advance to the interview process. You learn that the interview consists of analyzing the following financial facts and answering analysis questions. (Note: The data are taken from a small merchandiser in outdoor recreational equipment.)

 

2010

2009

2008

Sales trend percents

137.00%

125.00%

100.00%

Selling expenses to sales

9.80%

13.70%

15.30%

Sales to plant assets ratio

3.5 to 1

3.3 to 1

3.0 to 1

Current ratio

2.6 to 1

2.4 to 1

2.1 to 1

Acid test ratio

0.8 to 1

1.1 to 1

1.2 to 1

Merchandise inventory turnover

7.5 times

8.7 times

9.9 times

Accounts receivable turnover

6.7 times

7.4 times

8.2 times

Total asset turnover

2.6 times

2.6 times

3.0 times

Return on total assets

8.80%

9.40%

11.10%

Return on equity

9.75%

11.50%

12.25%

Profit margin ratio

3.30%

3.50%

3.70%

Required

Use these data to answer each of the following questions with explanations.

1. Is it becoming easier for the company to meet its current liabilities on time and to take advantage of any available cash discounts? Explain.

2. Is the company collecting its accounts receivable more rapidly? Explain.

3. Is the company’s investment in accounts receivable decreasing? Explain.

4. Is the company’s investment in plant assets increasing? Explain.

5. Is the owner’s investment becoming more profitable? Explain.

6. Did the dollar amount of selling expenses decrease during the three year period? Explain.

understanding the classification and assignment of costs is important consider a com 648298

Understanding the classification and assignment of costs is important. Consider a company that manufactures computer chips. It incurs the following costs in manufacturing chips and in operating the company.

1. Plastic board used to mount the chip, $3.50 each.

2. Assembly worker pay of $15 per hour to attach chips to plastic board.

3. Salary for factory maintenance workers who maintain factory equipment.

4. Factory supervisor pay of $55,000 per year to supervise employees.

5. Real estate taxes paid on the factory, $14,500.

6. Real estate taxes paid on the company office, $6,000.

7. Depreciation costs on machinery used by workers, $30,000.

8. Salary paid to the chief financial officer, $95,000.

9. Advertising costs of $7,800 paid to promote products.

10. Salespersons’ commissions of $0.50 for each assembled chip sold.

11. Management has the option to rent the manufacturing plant to six local hospitals to store medical records instead of producing and assembling chips.

Classify each cost in the following table according to the categories listed in the table header. A cost can be classified under more than one category. For example, the plastic board used to mount chips is classified as a direct material product cost and as a direct unit cost.

 

Period Costs

Product Costs

Unit Cost
Classification

Sunk
Cost

Opportunity
Cost

Cost

Selling and
Administrative

Direct
Material
(Prime
Cost)

Direct
Labor
(Prime and
Conversion)

Factory
Overhead
(Conversion
Cost)

Direct

Indirect

   

1. Plastic board used
to mount the chip,
$3.50 each

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

       

the following account balances and other information are from sunn corporation s acc 648300

The following account balances and other information are from SUNN Corporation’s accounting records for year end December 31, 2011. Use this information to prepare (1) a table listing factory overhead costs, (2) a manufacturing statement (show only the total factory overhead cost), and (3) an income statement.

Advertising expense                   

$85,000

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2010

$8,000

Amortization expense — Factory Patents  

16,000

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2011

9,000

Bad debts expense                    

28,000

Income taxes                        

53,400

Depreciation expense — Office equipment 

37,000

Indirect labor                        

26,000

Depreciation expense — Factory building  

133,000

Interest expense                     

25,000

Depreciation expense — Factory equipment

78,000

Miscellaneous expense                

55,000

Direct labor                          

250,000

Property taxes on factory equipment    

14,000

Factory insurance expired              

62,000

Raw materials inventory, Dec 31, 2010   

60,000

Factory supervision                    

74,000

Raw materials inventory, Dec 31, 2011   

78,000

Factory supplies used                  

21,000

Raw materials purchases               

313,000

Factory utilities                       

115,000

Repairs expense — Factory equipment    

31,000

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2010    

15,000

Salaries expense                     

150,000

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2011    

12,500

Sales                               

1,630,000

compute cost of goods sold for year 2011 using the following information 648314

Compute cost of goods sold for year 2011 using the following information.

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2010            

$321,500

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2010         

74,550

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2011         

81,200

Cost of goods manufactured, year 2011           

972,345

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2011            

297,200

prepare the 2011 manufacturing statement for carmichael company using the following 648315

Prepare the 2011 manufacturing statement for Carmichael Company using the following information.

Direct materials                     

$192,500

Direct labor                         

65,150

Factory overhead costs               

26,000

Goods in process, Dec 31, 2010        

159,600

Goods in process, Dec 31, 2011         

144,750

compute and interpret a manufacturing cycle time and b manufacturing cycle efficienc 648316

1. Compute and interpret (a) manufacturing cycle time and (b) manufacturing cycle efficiency using the following information from a manufacturing company.

Process time

15 minutes

Inspection time

2 minutes

Move time

6.4 minutes

Wait time

36.6 minutes

2. Nestlé reports beginning raw materials inventory of 3,590 and ending raw materials inventory of 3,708 (both numbers in millions of Swiss francs). If Nestlé purchased 12,000 (in millions of Swiss francs) of raw materials during the year, what is the amount of raw materials it used during the year?

indicate in the following chart the most likely source of information for each busin 648317

Both managerial accounting and financial accounting provide useful information to decision makers. Indicate in the following chart the most likely source of information for each business decision (a decision can require major input from both sources, in which case both can be marked).

 

Primary Information Source

Business Decision

Managerial

Financial

1. Plan the budget for next quarter

____

____

2. Measure profitability of all individual stores

____

____

3. Prepare financial reports according to GAAP

____

____

4. Determine location and size for a new plant

____

____

5. Determine amount of dividends to pay stockholders 

____

____

6. Evaluate a purchasing department’s performance

____

____

7. Report financial performance to board of directors

____

____

8. Estimate product cost for a new line of shoes

____

____

in the following chart compare financial accounting and managerial accounting by des 648318

In the following chart, compare financial accounting and managerial accounting by describing how each differs for the items listed. Be specific in your responses.

 

Financial Accounting

Managerial Accounting

1. Nature of information

 

 

2. Flexibility of practice

 

 

3. Focus of information

 

 

4. Time dimension

 

 

5. Users and decision makers

 

 

6. Timeliness of information

 

 

7. Purpose of information

 

 

georgia pacific a manufacturer incurs the following costs 648320

Georgia Pacific, a manufacturer, incurs the following costs. (1) Classify each cost as either a product or a period cost. If a product cost, identify it as a prime and/or conversion cost. (2) Classify each product cost as either a direct cost or an indirect cost using the product as the cost object.

 

Product Cost

     

Cost

Prime

Conversion

Period
Cost

Direct
Cost

Indirect
Cost

1. Office supplies used                   

____

____

____

____

____

2. Bad debts expense                    

____

____

____

____

____

3. Small tools used                      

____

____

____

____

____

4. Factory utilities                       

____

____

____

____

____

5. Advertising                           

____

____

____

____

____

6. Amortization of patents on factory machine

____

____

____

____

____

7. Payroll taxes for production supervisor   

____

____

____

____

____

8. Accident insurance on factory workers   

____

____

____

____

____

9. Depreciation — Factory building          

____

____

____

____

____

10. State and federal income taxes          

____

____

____

____

____

11. Wages to assembly workers            

____

____

____

____

____

12. Direct materials used                  

____

____

____

____

____

compute cost of goods sold for each of these two companies for the year ended decemb 648323

Compute cost of goods sold for each of these two companies for the year ended December 31, 2011.

 

Century
Merchandising

New Homes
Manufacturing

Beginning inventory

 

 

Merchandise

$250,000

 

Finished goods

 

$500,000

Ending inventory

 

 

Cost of purchases

460,000

 

Cost of goods manufactured

 

886,000

Merchandise

150,000

 

Finished goods

 

144,000

using the following data compute 1 the cost of goods manufactured and 2 the cost of 648324

Using the following data, compute (1) the cost of goods manufactured and (2) the cost of goods sold for both Canyon Company and Rossings Company.

 

Canyon

Company

Rossings

Company

Beginning finished goods inventory          

$14,000

$18,450

Beginning goods in process inventory        

16,500

21,950

Beginning raw materials inventory           

9,250

11,000

Rental cost on factory equipment           

29,000

24,750

Direct labor                             

21,000

37,000

Ending finished goods inventory            

19,650

15,300

Ending goods in process inventory          

24,000

18,000

Ending raw materials inventory             

7,300

9,200

Factory utilities                          

11,000

14,000

Factory supplies used                      

10,200

5,200

General and administrative expenses        

23,000

45,000

Indirect labor                            

3,250

9,660

Repairs—Factory equipment               

6,780

3,500

Raw materials purchases                   

35,000

54,000

Sales salaries                            

52,000

48,000

assume that the income statement shows the calculation of cost of goods sold and the 648325

For each of the following accounts for a manufacturing company, place a ? in the appropriate column indicating that it appears on the balance sheet, the income statement, the manufacturing statement, and/or a detailed listing of factory overhead costs. Assume that the income statement shows the calculation of cost of goods sold and the manufacturing statement shows only the total amount of factory overhead. (An account can appear on more than one report.)

Account

Balance
Sheet

Income
Statement

Manufacturing
Statement

Overhead
Report

Accounts receivable

 

 

   

Computer supplies used in office

 

 

 

 

Beginning finished goods inventory

 

 

 

 

Beginning goods in process inventory

 

 

 

 

Beginning raw materials inventory

 

 

 

 

Cash

       

Depreciation expense—Factory building

 

 

 

 

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment

 

 

       

 

Depreciation expense—Office building

 

 

 

 

Depreciation expense—Office equipment

 

 

 

 

Direct labor

 

     

Ending finished goods inventory

 

 

 

 

Ending goods in process inventory

 

 

 

 

Ending raw materials inventory

 

 

 

 

Factory maintenance wages

 

 

   

Computer supplies used in factory

 

 

 

 

Income taxes

 

     

Insurance on factory building

 

 

   

Rent cost on office building

 

 

   

Office supplies used

 

 

   

Property taxes on factory building

 

 

 

 

Raw materials purchases

 

 

   

Sales

       

given the following selected account balances of randa company prepare its manufactu 648326

Given the following selected account balances of Randa Company, prepare its manufacturing statement for the year ended on December 31, 2011. Include a listing of the individual overhead account balances in this statement.

Sales

$1,252,000

Raw materials inventory, Dec 31, 2010

39,000

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2010

55,900

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2010

64,750

Raw materials purchases

177,600

Direct labor

227,000

Factory computer supplies used

19,840

Indirect labor

49,000

Repairs—Factory equipment

7,250

Rent cost of factory building

59,000

Advertising expense

96,000

General and administrative expenses

131,300

Raw materials inventory, Dec 31, 2011

44,700

Goods in process inventory, Dec 31, 2011

43,500

Finished goods inventory, Dec 31, 2011

69,300

how can managers of this company use the information from this customer satisfaction 648327

Customer orientation means that a company’s managers and employees respond to customers’ changing wants and needs. A manufacturer of metal parts has created a customer satisfaction survey that it asks each of its customers to complete. The survey asks about the following factors: (A) product performance; (B) price; (C) lead time; (D) delivery. Each factor is to be rated as unsatisfactory, marginal, average, satisfactory, or very satisfied.

a. Match the competitive forces 1 through 4 to the factors on the survey. A factor can be matched to more than one competitive force.

Survey Factor Competitive Force

A. Product performance _______ 1. Cost

B. Price _______ 2. Time

C. Lead time _______ 3. Quality

D. Delivery _______ 4. Flexibility of service

b. How can managers of this company use the information from this customer satisfaction survey to better meet competitive forces and satisfy their customers?

listed here are the total costs associated with the 2011 production of 1 000 drum se 648330

Listed here are the total costs associated with the 2011 production of 1,000 drum sets manufactured by Neat Beat. The drum sets sell for $300 each.

 

Cost by Behavior

Cost by Function

Cost

Variable

Fixed

Product

Period

1. Plastic for casing—$12,000                           

$12,000

 

$12,000

 

2. Wages of assembly workers—$60,000                  

 

 

 

 

3. Property taxes on factory—$6,000                    

 

 

 

 

4. Accounting staff salaries—$45,000                     

 

 

 

 

5. Drum stands (1,000 stands outsourced)—$25,000        

 

 

 

 

6. Rent cost of equipment for sales staff—$7,000           

 

 

 

 

7. Upper management salaries—$100,000                 

 

 

 

 

8. Annual flat fee for maintenance service—$9,000          

 

 

 

 

9. Sales commissions—$10 per unit                      

 

 

 

 

10. Machinery depreciation—$10,000                     

 

 

 

 

Required

1. Classify each cost and its amount as (a) either fixed or variable and (b) either product or period. (The first cost is completed as an example.)

2. Compute the manufacturing cost per drum set.

3. Assume that 1,200 drum sets are produced in the next year. What do you predict will be the total cost of plastic for the casings and the per unit cost of the plastic for the casings? Explain.

4. Assume that 1,200 drum sets are produced in the next year. What do you predict will be the total cost of property taxes and the per unit cost of the property taxes? Explain.

refer to decision maker purchase manager in this chapter assume that you are the mot 648332

Refer to Decision Maker, Purchase Manager, in this chapter. Assume that you are the motorcycle manufacturer’s managerial accountant. The purchasing manager asks you about preparing an estimate of the related costs for buying motorcycle seats from supplier (B). She tells you this estimate is needed because unless dollar estimates are attached to nonfinancial factors, such as lost production time, her supervisor will not give it full attention. The manager also shows you the following information.

? Production output is 3,000 motorcycles per year based on 250 production days a year.

? Production time per day is 8 hours at a cost of $2,000 per hour to run the production line.

? Lost production time due to poor quality is 1%.

? Satisfied customers purchase, on average, three motorcycles during a lifetime.

? Satisfied customers recommend the product, on average, to 10 other people.

? Marketing predicts that using seat (B) will result in 10 lost customers per year from repeat business and referrals.

? Average gross profit per motorcycle is $3,000.

Required

Estimate the costs (including opportunity costs) of buying motorcycle seats from supplier (B). This problem requires that you think creatively and make reasonable estimates; thus there could be more than one correct answer.

shown here are annual financial data at december 31 2011 taken from two different co 648334

Shown here are annual financial data at December 31, 2011, taken from two different companies.

 

Pinnacle

Retail

Slope Board

Manufacturing

Beginning inventory

 

 

Merchandise                   

$150,000

 

Finished goods                  

 

$300,000

Cost of purchases                  

250,000

 

Cost of goods manufactured        

 

586,000

Ending inventory

 

 

Merchandise                   

100,000

 

Finished goods                  

 

200,000

Required

1. Compute the cost of goods sold section of the income statement at December 31, 2011, for each company. Include the proper title and format in the solution.

2. Write a half page memorandum to your instructor (a) identifying the inventory accounts and (b) describing where each is reported on the income statement and balance sheet for both companies.

the following calendar year end information is taken from the december 31 2011 adjus 648336

The following calendar year end information is taken from the December 31, 2011, adjusted trial balance and other records of Plaza Company.

Advertising expense                           

$ 30,750

Direct labor                                 

$ 677,480

Depreciation expense—Office equipment         

9,250

Income taxes expense                         

235,725

Depreciation expense—Selling equipment         

10,600

Indirect labor                                

58,875

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment        

35,550

Miscellaneous production costs                   

10,425

Factory supervision                            

104,600

Office salaries expense                         

65,000

Factory supplies used                          

9,350

Raw materials purchases                       

927,000

Factory utilities                               

35,000

Rent expense—Office space                    

24,000

Inventories

 

Rent expense—Selling space                    

28,100

Raw materials, December 31, 2010             

168,850

Rent expense—Factory building                 

78,800

Raw materials, December 31, 2011             

184,000

Maintenance expense—Factory equipment       

37,400

Goods in process, December 31, 2010          

17,700

Sales                                       

4,527,000

Goods in process, December 31, 2011           

21,380

Sales discounts                               

64,500

Finished goods, December 31, 2010             

169,350

Sales salaries expense                          

394,560

Finished goods, December 31, 2011             

138,490

 

 

Required

1. Prepare the company’s 2011 manufacturing statement.

2. Prepare the company’s 2011 income statement that reports separate categories for (a) selling expenses and (b) general and administrative expenses.

3. Compute the (a) inventory turnover, defined as cost of goods sold divided by average inventory, and (b) days’ sales in inventory, defined as 365 times ending inventory divided by cost of goods sold, for both its raw materials inventory and its finished goods inventory. (To compute turnover and days’ sales in inventory for raw materials, use raw materials used rather than cost of goods sold.) Discuss some possible reasons for differences between these ratios for the two types of inventories. Round answers to one decimal place.

assume that white maple wishes to increase its manufacturing cycle efficiency to 0 7 648337

White Maple Company produces maple bookcases to customer order. It received an order from a customer to produce 15,000 bookcases. The following information is available for the production of the bookcases.

Process time

16.0 days

Inspection time 

0.5 days

Move time

5.5 days

Wait time

18.0 days

Required

1. Compute the company’s manufacturing cycle time.

2. Compute the company’s manufacturing cycle efficiency. Interpret your answer.

3. Assume that White Maple wishes to increase its manufacturing cycle efficiency to 0.75. What are some ways that it can accomplish this?

compute the annual dollar changes and percent changes for each of the following acco 648264

1. Compute the annual dollar changes and percent changes for each of the following accounts.

 

2011

2010

Short term investments        

$217,800

$165,000

Accounts receivable           

42,120

48,000

Notes payable                

57,000

0

2. For each ratio listed, identify whether the change in ratio value from 2010 to 2011 is usually regarded as favorable or unfavorable.

Ratio

2011

2010

Ratio

2011

2010

1. Profit margin

8%

6%

5. Accounts receivable turnover

5.4

6.6

2. Debt ratio

45%

40%

6. Basic earnings per share

$1.24

$1.20

3. Gross margin

33%

45%

7. Inventory turnover

3.5

3.3

4. Acid test ratio

0.99

1.10

8. Dividend yield

1%

0.8%

common size and trend percents for aziz company s sales cost of goods sold and expen 648271

Common size and trend percents for Aziz Company’s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses follow.

Determine whether net income increased, decreased, or remained unchanged in this three year period.

 

Common Size Percents

Trend Percents

 

2012

2011

2010

2012

2011

2010

Sales                    

100.0%

100.0%

100.0%

104.4%

103.2%

100.0%

Cost of goods sold        

62.4

60.9

58.1

102.0

108.1

100.0

Total expenses            

14.3

13.8

14.1

105.9

101.0

100.0

express the following comparative income statements in common size percents and asse 648272

Express the following comparative income statements in common size percents and assess whether or not this company’s situation has improved in the most recent year.

GERALDO CORPORATION

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,2011 and 2010

Sales                     

$720,000

$535,000

Cost of goods sold         

475,200

280,340

Gross profit               

244,800

254,660

Operating expenses        

151,200

103,790

Net income               

$ 93,600

$150,870

rolf company and kent company are similar firms that operate in the same industry ke 648273

Rolf Company and Kent Company are similar firms that operate in the same industry. Kent began operations in 2011 and Rolf in 2008. In 2013, both companies pay 7% interest on their debt to creditors. The following additional information is available.

 

Rolf Company

Kent Company

 

2013

2012

2011

2013

2012

2011

Total asset turnover

3.0

2.7

2.9

1.6

1.4

1.1

Return on total assets

8.9%

9.5%

8.7%

5.8%

5.5%

5.2%

Profit margin ratio

2.3%

2.4%

2.2%

2.7%

2.9%

2.8%

Sales

$400,000

$370,000

$386,000

$200,000

$160,000

$100,000

Write a half page report comparing Rolf and Kent using the available information. Your analysis should include their ability to use assets efficiently to produce profits. Also comment on their success in employing financial leverage in 2013.

sanderson company s year end balance sheets follow express the balance sheets in com 648274

Sanderson Company’s year end balance sheets follow. Express the balance sheets in common size percents. Round amounts to the nearest one tenth of a percent. Analyze and comment on the results.

At December 31

2012

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

 

Cash                                  

$ 30,800

$ 35,625

$ 36,800

Accounts receivable, net                   

88,500

62,500

49,200

Merchandise inventory                    

111,500

82,500

53,000

Prepaid expenses                        

9,700

9,375

4,000

Plant assets, net                          

277,500

255,000

229,500

Total assets                             

$518,000

$445,000

$372,500

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

 

Accounts payable                        

$128,900

$ 75,250

$ 49,250

Long term notes payable secured by

 

 

 

mortgages on plant assets               

97,500

102,500

82,500

Common stock, $10 par value              

162,500

162,500

162,500

Retained earnings                        

129,100

104,750

78,250

Total liabilities and equity                  

$518,000

$445,000

$372,500

indicate where each of the following income related items for this company appears o 648275

In 2011, Jin Merchandising, Inc., sold its interest in a chain of retail outlets, taking the company completely out of the retailing business. The company still operates its wholesale outlets. A listing of the major sections of an income statement follows:

A. Income (loss) from continuing operations

B. Income (loss) from operating, or gain (loss) from disposing, a discontinued segment

C. Extraordinary gain (loss)

Indicate where each of the following income related items for this company appears on its 2011 income statement by writing the letter of the appropriate section in the blank beside each item.

Section

Item

Debit

Credit

1.

Net sales

 

$3,000,000

2.

Gain on state’s condemnation

 

 

 

of company property (net of tax)

 

330,000

3.

Salaries expense

$ 640,000

 

4.

Income taxes expense

117,000

 

5.

Depreciation expense

432,500

 

6.

Gain on sale of retail business

 

 

 

segment (net of tax)

 

875,000

7.

Loss from operating retail business

 

 

 

segment (net of tax)

544,000

 

8.

Cost of goods sold

1,580,000

 

compute nintendo s current ratio net profit margin and sales to total assets using t 648276

Nintendo Company, Ltd., reports the following financial information as of, or for the year ended, March 31, 2008. Nintendo reports its financial statements in both Japanese yen and U.S. dollars as shown (amounts in millions).

Current assets

¥1,646,834

$16,468.348

Total assets

1,802,490

18,024.903

Current liabilities

567,222

5,672.229

Net sales

1,672,423

16,724.230

Net income

257,342

2,573.426

1. Compute Nintendo’s current ratio, net profit margin, and sales to total assets using the financial information reported in (a) yen and (b) dollars.

2. What can we conclude from a review of the results for part 1?

selected comparative financial statements of bennington company follow 648277

Selected comparative financial statements of Bennington Company follow.

BENNINGTON COMPANY

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,2012,2011,and 2010

 

2012

2011

2010

Sales                         

$444,000

$340,000

$236,000

Cost of goods sold             

267,288

212,500

151,040

Gross profit                   

176,712

127,500

84,960

Selling expenses               

62,694

46,920

31,152

Administrative expenses         

40,137

29,920

19,470

Total expenses                

102,831

76,840

50,622

Income before taxes            

73,881

50,660

34,338

Income taxes                  

13,764

10,370

6,962

Net income                    

$ 60,117

$ 40,290

$ 27,376

 

BENNINGTON COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2012,2011 and 2010

 

2012

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

 

Current assets                  

$ 48,480

$ 37,924

$ 50,648

Long term investments           

0

500

3,720

Plant assets, net                 

90,000

96,000

57,000

Total assets                    

$138,480

$134,424

$111,368

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

 

Current liabilities               

$ 20,200

$ 19,960

$ 19,480

Common stock                 

72,000

72,000

54,000

Other paid in capital             

9,000

9,000

6,000

Retained earnings               

37,280

33,464

31,888

Total liabilities and equity         

$138,480

$134,424

$111,368

Required

1. Compute each year’s current ratio. (Round ratio amounts to one decimal.)

2. Express the income statement data in common size percents. (Round percents to two decimals.)

3. Express the balance sheet data in trend percents with 2010 as the base year. (Round percents to two decimals.)

4. Comment on any significant relations revealed by the ratios and percents computed.

selected comparative financial statements of sugo company follow 648278

Selected comparative financial statements of Sugo Company follow.

SUGO COMPANY

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,2012 2006

($ thousands)

2012

2011

2010

2009

2008

2007

2006

Sales                     

$1,594

$1,396

$1,270

$1,164

$1,086

$1,010

$828

Cost of goods sold         

1,146

932

802

702

652

610

486

Gross profit               

448

464

468

462

434

400

342

Operating expenses        

340

266

244

180

156

154

128

Net income               

$ 108

$ 198

$ 224

$ 282

$ 278

$ 246

$214

 

SUGO COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2012 2006

($ thousands)

2012

2011

2010

2009

2008

2007

2006

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash                         

$ 68

$ 88

$ 92

$ 94

$ 98

$ 96

$ 99

Accounts receivable, net         

480

504

456

350

308

292

206

Merchandise inventory          

1,738

1,264

1,104

932

836

710

515

Other current assets            

46

42

24

44

38

38

19

Long term investments          

0

0

0

136

136

136

136

Plant assets, net                

2,120

2,114

1,852

1,044

1,078

960

825

Total assets                    

$4,452

$4,012

$3,528

$2,600

$2,494

$2,232

$1,800

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current liabilities               

$1,120

$ 942

$ 618

$ 514

$ 446

$ 422

$ 272

Long term liabilities             

1,194

1,040

1,012

470

480

520

390

Common stock                

1,000

1,000

1,000

840

840

640

640

Other paid in capital            

250

250

250

180

180

160

160

Retained earnings          

888

780

648

596

548

490

338

Total liabilities and equity         

 $4,452

$4,012

$3,528

 $2,600

 $2,494

 $2,232

 $1,800

Required

1. Compute trend percents for all components of both statements using 2006 as the base year. (Round percents to one decimal.)

2. Analyze and comment on the financial statements and trend percents from part 1.

prepare a table showing park s 1 current ratio 2 acid test ratio and 3 working capit 648279

Park Corporation began the month of May with $650,000 of current assets, a current ratio of 2.50:1, and an acid test ratio of 1.10:1. During the month, it completed the following transactions (the company uses a perpetual inventory system).

May 2 Purchased $75,000 of merchandise inventory on credit.

8 Sold merchandise inventory that cost $58,000 for $103,000 cash.

10 Collected $19,000 cash on an account receivable.

15 Paid $21,000 cash to settle an account payable.

17 Wrote off a $3,000 bad debt against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account.

22 Declared a $1 per share cash dividend on its 40,000 shares of outstanding common stock.

26 Paid the dividend declared on May 22.

27 Borrowed $75,000 cash by giving the bank a 30 day, 10% note.

28 Borrowed $90,000 cash by signing a long term secured note.

29 Used the $165,000 cash proceeds from the notes to buy new machinery.

Required

Prepare a table showing Park’s (1) current ratio, (2) acid test ratio, and (3) working capital, after each transaction. Round ratios to two decimals.

selected year end financial statements of mccord corporation follow 648280

Selected year end financial statements of McCord Corporation follow. (All sales were on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2010, were inventory, $32,400; total assets, $182,400; common stock, $90,000; and retained earnings, $31,300.)

McCORD CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales                      

$348,600

Cost of goods sold          

229,150

Gross profit                

119,450

Operating expenses         

52,500

Interest expense            

3,100

Income before taxes         

63,850

Income taxes               

15,800

Net income                

$ 48,050

 

McCORD CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011

Assets

 

Liabilities and Equity

Cash                  

$9,000

Accounts payable       

$16,500

Short term investments   

7,400

Accrued wages payable   

2,200

Accounts receivable, net   

28,200

Income taxes payable    

2,300

Notes receivable (trade)*  

3,500

Long term note payable, secured

 

Merchandise inventory    

31,150

by mortgage on plant assets

62,400

Prepaid expenses        

1,650

Common stock         

90,000

Plant assets, net          

152,300

Retained earnings       

59,800

Total assets             

$233,200

Total liabilities and equity 

$233,200

Required

Compute the following:

(1) current ratio,

(2) acid test ratio,

(3) days’ sales uncollected,

(4) inventory turnover,

(5) days’ sales in inventory,

(6) debt to equity ratio,

(7) times interest earned,

(8) profit margin ratio,

(9) total asset turnover,

(10) return on total assets,

(11) return on common stockholders’ equity.

summary information from the financial statements of two companies competing in the 648281

Summary information from the financial statements of two companies competing in the same industry follows.

 

Ryan Company

Priest

Company

 

Ryan

Company

Priest

Company

Data from the current year end balance sheets

 

 

Data from the current year’s income statement

 

 

Assets

 

 

Sales                                

$660,000

$780,200

Cash                               

$ 18,500

$ 33,000

Cost of goods sold                     

485,100

532,500

Accounts receivable, net               

36,400

56,400

Interest expense                      

6,900

11,000

Current notes receivable (trade)

8,100

6,200

Income tax expense                   

12,800

19,300

       

83,440

131,500

Net income                          

67,770

105,000

Merchandise inventory                

4,000

5,950

Basic earnings per share               

1.94

2.56

Prepaid expenses                     

284,000

303,400

 

 

 

Plant assets, net                       

$434,440

$536,450

 

 

 

Total assets                         

 

 

Beginning of year balance sheet data

 

 

 

 

 

Accounts receivable, net                

$ 28,800

$ 53,200

Liabilities and Equity

$ 60,340

$ 92,300

Current notes receivable (trade)         

0

0

Current liabilities                     

79,800

100,000

Merchandise inventory                 

54,600

106,400

Long term notes payable               

175,000

205,000

Total assets                          

388,000

372,500

Common stock, $5 par value           

119,300

139,150

Common stock, $5 par value            

175,000

205,000

Retained earnings                    

$434,440

$536,450

Retained earnings                     

94,300

90,600

Required

1. For both companies compute the (a) current ratio, (b) acid test ratio, (c) accounts (including notes) receivable turnover, (d) inventory turnover, (e) days’ sales in inventory, and ( f ) days’ sales uncollected. Identify the company you consider to be the better short term credit risk and explain why.

2. For both companies compute the (a) profit margin ratio, (b) total asset turnover, (c) return on total assets, and (d) return on common stockholders’ equity. Assuming that each company paid cash dividends of $1.50 per share and each company’s stock can be purchased at $25 per share, compute their (e) price earnings ratios and ( f ) dividend yields. Identify which company’s stock you would recommend as the better investment and explain why.

selected account balances from the adjusted trial balance for zen corporation as of 648282

Selected account balances from the adjusted trial balance for Zen Corporation as of its calendar year end December 31, 2011, follow.

 

Debit

Credit

a. Income taxes expense                                                    

$ ?

 

b. Correction of overstatement of prior year’s sales (pretax)                      

17,000

 

c. Loss on sale of machinery                                               

26,850

 

d. Loss from settlement of lawsuit                                            

24,750

 

e. Other operating expenses                                                

107,400

 

f. Accumulated depreciation—Machinery                                      

 

$ 72,600

g. Gain from settlement of lawsuit                                            

 

45,000

h. Accumulated depreciation—Buildings                                       

 

175,500

i. Loss from operating a discontinued segment (pretax)                          

19,250

 

j. Gain on insurance recovery of tornado damage (pretax and extraordinary)        

 

30,120

k. Net sales                                                              

 

999,500

l. Depreciation expense—Buildings                                           

53,000

 

m. Depreciation expense—Machinery                                          

35,000

 

n. Gain on sale of discontinued segment’s assets (pretax)                         

 

35,000

o. Accounts payable                                                       

 

45,000

p. Interest revenue                                                         

 

15,000

q. Cost of goods sold                                                      

483,500

 

Required

Answer each of the following questions by providing supporting computations.

1. Assume that the company’s income tax rate is 30% for all items. Identify the tax effects and after tax amounts of the four items labeled pretax.

2. What is the amount of income from continuing operations before income taxes? What is the amount of the income taxes expense? What is the amount of income from continuing operations?

3. What is the total amount of after tax income (loss) associated with the discontinued segment?

4. What is the amount of income (loss) before the extraordinary items?

5. What is the amount of net income for the year?

express the balance sheet data in trend percents with 2010 as the base year 648283

Selected comparative financial statement information of Sawgrass Corporation follows.

SAWGRASS CORPORATION

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,2012,2011 and 2010

($ thousands)

2012

2011

2010

Sales                         

$199,800

$167,000

$144,800

Cost of goods sold             

109,890

87,175

67,200

Gross profit                   

89,910

79,825

77,600

Selling expenses               

23,680

20,790

19,000

Administrative expenses         

17,760

15,610

16,700

Total expenses                

41,440

36,400

35,700

Income before taxes            

48,470

43,425

41,900

Income taxes                  

5,050

4,910

4,300

Net income                   

$ 43,420

$ 38,515

$ 37,600

 

SAWGRASS CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2012,2011 and 2010

($ thousands)

2012

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

 

Current assets                  

$ 55,860

$ 33,660

$ 37,300

Long term investments           

0

2,700

11,600

Plant assets, net                 

113,810

114,660

80,000

Total assets                    

$169,670

$151,020

$128,900

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

 

Current liabilities               

$ 23,370

$ 20,180

$ 17,500

Common stock                 

47,500

47,500

38,000

Other paid in capital              

14,850

14,850

12,300

Retained earnings               

83,950

68,490

61,100

Total liabilities and equity         

$169,670

$151,020

$128,900

Required

1. Compute each year’s current ratio. (Round ratio amounts to one decimal.)

2. Express the income statement data in common size percents. (Round percents to two decimals.)

3. Express the balance sheet data in trend percents with 2010 as the base year. (Round percents to two decimals.)

4. Comment on any significant relations revealed by the ratios and percents computed.

prepare a table showing the company s 1 current ratio 2 acid test ratio and 3 workin 648285

Ready Corporation began the month of June with $280,000 of current assets, a current ratio of 2.8:1, and an acid test ratio of 1.2:1. During the month, it completed the following transactions (the company uses a perpetual inventory system).

June 1 Sold merchandise inventory that cost $62,000 for $101,000 cash.

3 Collected $78,000 cash on an account receivable.

5 Purchased $130,000 of merchandise inventory on credit.

7 Borrowed $90,000 cash by giving the bank a 60 day, 10% note.

10 Borrowed $180,000 cash by signing a long term secured note.

12 Purchased machinery for $280,000 cash.

15 Declared a $1 per share cash dividend on its 60,000 shares of outstanding common stock.

19 Wrote off a $7,000 bad debt against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account.

22 Paid $11,000 cash to settle an account payable.

30 Paid the dividend declared on June 15.

Required

Prepare a table showing the company’s (1) current ratio, (2) acid test ratio, and (3) working capital after each transaction. Round ratios to two decimals.

all sales were on credit selected balance sheet amounts at december 31 2010 were inv 648286

Selected year end financial statements of Overland Corporation follow. (All sales were on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2010, were inventory, $16,400; total assets, $95,900; common stock, $41,500; and retained earnings, $19,800.)

OVERLAND CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales                      

$215,500

Cost of goods sold          

136,100

Gross profit                

79,400

Operating expenses         

50,200

Interest expense            

1,200

Income before taxes         

28,000

Income taxes               

2,200

Net income                

$ 25,800

 

OVERLAND CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011

Assets

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

Cash                

$5,100

Accounts payable          

$10,500

Short term investments 

5,900

Accrued wages payable     

2,300

Accounts receivable, net 

11,100

Income taxes payable      

1,600

Notes receivable (trade)*

2,000

Long term note payable, secured

 

Merchandise inventory  

12,500

by mortgage on plant assets

25,000

Prepaid expenses      

1,000

Common stock, $5 par value

41,000

Plant assets, net        

72,900

Retained earnings          

$30,100

Total assets           

$110,500

Total liabilities and equity   

$110,500

Required

Compute the following: (1) current ratio, (2) acid test ratio, (3) days’ sales uncollected, (4) inventory turnover, (5) days’ sales in inventory, (6) debt to equity ratio, (7) times interest earned, (8) profit margin ratio, (9) total asset turnover, (10) return on total assets, and (11) return on common stockholders’ equity.

summary information from the financial statements of two companies competing in the 648287

Summary information from the financial statements of two companies competing in the same industry follows.

 

Loud

Company

 

Clear

Company

 

 

Loud

Company

 

Clear

Company

 

Data from the current year end balance sheets

Data from the current year’s income statement

Assets

 

 

Sales                                

$395,600

$669,500

Cash                               

$ 22,000

$ 38,500

Cost of goods sold                    

292,600

482,000

Accounts receivable, net               

79,100

72,500

Interest expense                      

7,900

12,400

Current notes receivable (trade)

 

13,600

11,000

Income tax expense                   

7,700

14,300

Merchandise inventory                

88,800

84,000

Net income                          

35,850

63,700

Prepaid expenses                     

11,700

12,100

Basic earnings per share                

1.33

2.23

Plant assets, net                      

178,900

254,300

 

 

 

Total assets                         

$394,100

$472,400

 

 

 

 

 

 

Beginning of year balance sheet data

 

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts receivable, net                

$ 74,200

$ 75,300

Current liabilities                     

$ 92,500

$ 99,000

Current notes receivable (trade)         

0

0

Long term notes payable               

95,000

95,300

Merchandise inventory                  

107,100

82,500

Common stock, $5 par value           

135,000

143,000

Total assets                          

385,400

445,000

Retained earnings                    

71,600

135,100

Common stock, $5 par value            

135,000

143,000

Total liabilities and equity              

$394,100

$472,400

Retained earnings                     

51,100

111,700

               

Required

1. For both companies compute the (a) current ratio, (b) acid test ratio, (c) accounts (including notes) receivable turnover, (d) inventory turnover, (e) days’ sales in inventory, and ( f ) days’ sales uncollected.

Identify the company you consider to be the better short term credit risk and explain why.

2. For both companies compute the (a) profit margin ratio, (b) total asset turnover, (c) return on total assets, and (d) return on common stockholders’ equity. Assuming that each company paid cash dividends of $3.00 per share and each company’s stock can be purchased at $25 per share, compute their (e) price earnings ratios and ( f ) dividend yields. Identify which company’s stock you would recommend as the better investment and explain why.

selected account balances from the adjusted trial balance for halogen corp as of its 648288

Selected account balances from the adjusted trial balance for Halogen Corp. as of its calendar year end December 31, 2011, follow.

 

Debit

Credit

a. Other operating expenses

$ 338,000

 

b. Depreciation expense—Buildings

110,000

 

c. Loss from settlement of lawsuit 

46,000

 

d. Income taxes expense

?

 

e. Loss on hurricane damage (pretax and extraordinary) 

74,000

 

f. Accumulated depreciation—Buildings

 

$ 230,000

g. Accumulated depreciation—Equipment 

 

410,000

h. Interest revenue 

 

30,000

i. Net sales

 

2,650,000

j. Gain from settlement of lawsuit 

 

78,000

k. Loss on sale of building

34,000

 

l. Loss from operating a discontinued segment (pretax)

130,000

 

m. Accounts payable 

 

142,000

n. Correction of overstatement of prior year’s expense (pretax) 

 

58,000

o. Cost of goods sold

1,050,000

 

p. Loss on sale of discontinued segment’s assets (pretax)

190,000

 

q. Depreciation expense—Equipment

166,000

 

Required

Answer each of the following questions by providing supporting computations.

1. Assume that the company’s income tax rate is 25% for all items. Identify the tax effects and after tax amounts of the four items labeled pretax.

2. What is the amount of income from continuing operations before income taxes? What is the amount of income taxes expense? What is the amount of income from continuing operations?

3. What is the total amount of after tax income (loss) associated with the discontinued segment?

4. What is the amount of income (loss) before the extraordinary items?

5. What is the amount of net income for the year?

compute the gross margin ratio both with and without services revenue and net profit 648289

Use the following selected data from Business Solutions’ income statement for the three months ended March 31, 2012, and from its March 31, 2012, balance sheet to complete the requirements below: computer services revenue, $25,307; net sales (of goods), $18,693; total sales and revenue, $44,000; cost of goods sold, $14,052; net income, $18,833; quick assets, $90,924; current assets, $95,568; total assets, $120,268; current liabilities, $875; total liabilities, $875; and total equity, $119,393.

Required

1. Compute the gross margin ratio (both with and without services revenue) and net profit margin ratio.

2. Compute the current ratio and acid test ratio.

3. Compute the debt ratio and equity ratio.

4. What percent of its assets are current? What percent are long term?

compute common size percents for fiscal years 2009 and 2010 for the following catego 648290

Refer to Research In Motion financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.

1. Using fiscal 2008 as the base year, compute trend percents for fiscal years 2008, 2009, and 2010 for revenues, cost of sales, operating expenses, income taxes, and net income. (Round percents to one decimal.)

2. Compute common size percents for fiscal years 2009 and 2010 for the following categories of assets: (a) total current assets, (b) property and equipment, net, and (c) intangible assets. (Round to the nearest tenth of a percent.)

3. Comment on any notable changes across the years for the income statement trends computed in part 1 and the balance sheet percents computed in part 2.

4. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010, from its the SEC database. Update your work for parts 1, 2, and 3 using the new information accessed.

prepare a complete statement of cash flows report its operating activities according 648227

Kazaam Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other Expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expenses. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

KAZAAM COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                               

$ 53,875

$ 76,625

Accounts receivable                   

65,000

49,625

Merchandise inventory                 

273,750

252,500

Prepaid expenses                     

5,375

6,250

Equipment                           

159,500

110,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(34,625)

(44,000)

Total assets                          

$522,875

$451,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                     

$ 88,125

$116,625

Short term notes payable               

10,000

6,250

Long term notes payable               

93,750

53,750

Common stock, $5 par value            

168,750

156,250

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock                

32,500

0

Retained earnings                     

129,750

118,125

Total liabilities and equity               

$522,875

$451,000

 

KAZAAM COMPANY

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales                            

 

$496,250

Cost of goods sold                

 

250,000

Gross profit                      

 

246,250

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense            

$ 18,750

 

Other expenses                 

136,500

155,250

Other gains (losses)

 

 

Loss on sale of equipment        

 

5,125

Income before taxes               

 

85,875

Income taxes expense             

 

12,125

Net income                      

 

$ 73,750

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. The loss on the cash sale of equipment was $5,125 (details in b).

b. Sold equipment costing $46,875, with accumulated depreciation of $28,125, for $13,625 cash.

c. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

d. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

e. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

f. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.

2. Refer to Kazaam Company’s financial statements and related information in Problem 16 1A.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its operating activities according to the direct method.

Disclose any noncash investing and financing activities in a note.

identify the debits and credits in the analysis of changes columns with letters that 648228

Kazaam Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other Expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expenses. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

KAZAAM COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                               

$ 53,875

$ 76,625

Accounts receivable                   

65,000

49,625

Merchandise inventory                 

273,750

252,500

Prepaid expenses                     

5,375

6,250

Equipment                           

159,500

110,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(34,625)

(44,000)

Total assets                          

$522,875

$451,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                     

$ 88,125

$116,625

Short term notes payable               

10,000

6,250

Long term notes payable               

93,750

53,750

Common stock, $5 par value            

168,750

156,250

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock                

32,500

0

Retained earnings                     

129,750

118,125

Total liabilities and equity               

$522,875

$451,000

 

KAZAAM COMPANY

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales                            

 

$496,250

Cost of goods sold                

 

250,000

Gross profit                      

 

246,250

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense            

$ 18,750

 

Other expenses                 

136,500

155,250

Other gains (losses)

 

 

Loss on sale of equipment        

 

5,125

Income before taxes               

 

85,875

Income taxes expense             

 

12,125

Net income                      

 

$ 73,750

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. The loss on the cash sale of equipment was $5,125 (details in b).

b. Sold equipment costing $46,875, with accumulated depreciation of $28,125, for $13,625 cash.

c. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

d. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

e. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

f. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.

2. Refer to the information reported about Kazaam Company in Problem 16 1A.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows using a spreadsheet as in Exhibit 16A.1; report its operating activities using the indirect method. Identify the debits and credits in the Analysis of Changes columns with letters that correspond to the following list of transactions and events.

a. Net income was $73,750.

b. Accounts receivable increased.

c. Merchandise inventory increased.

d. Prepaid expenses decreased.

e. Accounts payable decreased.

f. Depreciation expense was $18,750.

g. Sold equipment costing $46,875, with accumulated depreciation of $28,125, for $13,625 cash. This yielded a loss of $5,125.

h. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and (i.) by signing a long term note payable for the balance.

j. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

k. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

l. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

m. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.

prepare a complete statement of cash flows report its cash inflows and cash outflows 648230

Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are all cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

GALLEY CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                                

$ 174,000

$117,000

Accounts receivable                     

93,000

81,000

Merchandise inventory                  

609,000

534,000

Equipment                            

333,000

297,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(156,000)

(102,000)

Total assets                           

$1,053,000

$927,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                      

$ 69,000

$ 96,000

Income taxes payable                   

27,000

24,000

Common stock, $2 par value             

582,000

558,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par value, common stock            

198,000

162,000

Retained earnings                      

177,000

87,000

Total liabilities and equity                

$1,053,000

$927,000

 

GALLEY CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales            

 

$1,992,000

Cost of goods sold

 

1,194,000

Gross profit      

 

798,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$54,000

 

Other expenses 

501,000

555,000

Income before taxes

 

243,000

Income taxes expense

 

42,000

Net income       

 

$201,000

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $36,000 cash.

b. Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $111,000 in cash dividends.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its cash inflows and cash outflows from operating activities according to the indirect method.

the company s balance sheets and income statement follow 648231

1. Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (a) all sales are credit sales, (b) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (c) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (d) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (e) Other Expenses are all cash expenses, and (f) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

GALLEY CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                                

$ 174,000

$117,000

Accounts receivable                     

93,000

81,000

Merchandise inventory                  

609,000

534,000

Equipment                            

333,000

297,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(156,000)

(102,000)

Total assets                           

$1,053,000

$927,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                      

$ 69,000

$ 96,000

Income taxes payable                   

27,000

24,000

Common stock, $2 par value             

582,000

558,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par value, common stock            

198,000

162,000

Retained earnings                      

177,000

87,000

Total liabilities and equity                

$1,053,000

$927,000

 

GALLEY CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales            

 

$1,992,000

Cost of goods sold

 

1,194,000

Gross profit      

 

798,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$54,000

 

Other expenses 

501,000

555,000

Income before taxes

 

243,000

Income taxes expense

 

42,000

Net income       

 

$201,000

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $36,000 cash.

b. Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $111,000 in cash dividends.

2. Refer to Galley Corporation’s financial statements and related information in Problem 16 4A.
Required
Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its cash flows from operating activities according to the
direct method.

identify the debits and credits in the analysis of changes columns with letters that 648232

1. Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are all cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

GALLEY CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                                

$ 174,000

$117,000

Accounts receivable                    

93,000

81,000

Merchandise inventory                  

609,000

534,000

Equipment                             

333,000

297,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(156,000)

(102,000)

Total assets                           

$1,053,000

$927,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                      

$ 69,000

$ 96,000

Income taxes payable                   

27,000

24,000

Common stock, $2 par value             

582,000

558,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par value, common stock            

198,000

162,000

Retained earnings                      

177,000

87,000

Total liabilities and equity                

$1,053,000

$927,000

 

GALLEY CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales            

 

$1,992,000

Cost of goods sold

 

1,194,000

Gross profit      

 

798,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$54,000

 

Other expenses 

501,000

555,000

Income before taxes

 

243,000

Income taxes expense

 

42,000

Net income      

 

$201,000

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $36,000 cash.

b. Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $111,000 in cash dividends.

2. Refer to the information reported about Galley Corporation in Problem 16 4A.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows using a spreadsheet as in Exhibit 16A.1; report operating activities under the indirect method. Identify the debits and credits in the Analysis of Changes columns with letters that correspond to the following list of transactions and events.

a. Net income was $201,000.

b. Accounts receivable increased.

c. Merchandise inventory increased.

d. Accounts payable decreased.

e. Income taxes payable increased.

f. Depreciation expense was $54,000.

g. Purchased equipment for $36,000 cash.

h. Issued 12,000 shares at $5 cash per share.

i. Declared and paid $111,000 of cash dividends.

rapture company s 2011 income statement and selected balance sheet data at december 648233

Rapture Company’s 2011 income statement and selected balance sheet data at December 31, 2010 and 2011, follow ($ thousands).

RAPTURE COMPANY

Selected Balance Sheet Accounts

At December 31

2011

2010

Accounts receivable

$380

$390

Inventory

99

77

Accounts payable

120

130

Salaries payable

44

35

Utilities payable

11

8

Prepaid insurance

13

14

Prepaid rent

11

9

 

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales revenue

$58,600

Expenses

 

Cost of goods sold

21,000

Depreciation expense

6,000

Salaries expense

11,000

Rent expense

2,500

Insurance expense

1,900

Interest expense

1,800

Utilities expense

1,400

Net income

$13,000

Required

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section only of the company’s 2011 statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

purchased equipment costing 113 250 by paying 38 250 cash and signing a long term no 648236

Kite Corporation, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other Expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expenses. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

KITE CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$136,500

$ 71,550

Accounts receivable

74,100

90,750

Merchandise inventory

454,500

490,200

Prepaid expenses

17,100

19,200

Equipment

278,250

216,000

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(108,750)

(93,000)

Total assets

$851,700

$794,700

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$117,450

$123,450

Short term notes payable

17,250

11,250

Long term notes payable

112,500

82,500

Common stock, $5 par

465,000

450,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock

18,000

0

Retained earnings

121,500

127,500

Total liabilities and equity

$851,700

$794,700

 

KITE CORPORATION
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

 

$1,083,000

Cost of goods sold

 

585,000

Gross profit

 

498,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$36,600

 

Other expenses

392,850

 

Total operating expenses

 

429,450

 

 

68,550

Other gains (losses)

 

 

Loss on sale of equipment

 

2,100

Income before taxes

 

66,450

Income taxes expense

 

9,450

Net income

 

$57,000

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. The loss on the cash sale of equipment was $2,100 (details in b).

b. Sold equipment costing $51,000, with accumulated depreciation of $20,850, for $28,050 cash.

c. Purchased equipment costing $113,250 by paying $38,250 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

d. Borrowed $6,000 cash by signing a short term note payable.

e. Paid $45,000 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

f. Issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $11 cash per share.

g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $63,000.

Refer to Kite Corporation’s financial statements and related information in Problem 16 1B.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its operating activities according to the direct method.

Disclose any noncash investing and financing activities in a note.

 

taurasi company a merchandiser recently completed its 2011 operations 648238

Taurasi Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

TAURASI COMAPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 53,925

$ 31,800

Accounts receivable

19,425

23,250

Merchandise inventory

175,350

139,875

Equipment

105,450

76,500

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(48,300)

(30,600)

Total assets

$305,850

$240,825

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 38,475

$ 35,625

Income taxes payable

4,500

6,750

Common stock, $2 par value

165,000

150,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock

42,000

15,000

Retained earnings

55,875

33,450

Total liabilities and equity

$305,850

$240,825

 

TAURASI COMPANY
Income Statement
 For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

 

$609,750

Cost of goods sold

 

279,000

Gross profit

 

330,750

Operating expenses

$17,700

 

Depreciation expense

179,775

 

Other expenses

 

197,475

Income before taxes

 

133,275

Income taxes expense

 

44,850

Net income

 

$88,425

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $28,950 cash.

b. Issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $14 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $66,000 of cash dividends.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its cash inflows and cash outflows from operating activities according to the indirect method.

refer to taurasi company s financial statements and related information in problem 1 648239

Taurasi Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

TAURASI COMAPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 53,925

$ 31,800

Accounts receivable

19,425

23,250

Merchandise inventory

175,350

139,875

Equipment

105,450

76,500

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(48,300)

(30,600)

Total assets

$305,850

$240,825

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 38,475

$ 35,625

Income taxes payable

4,500

6,750

Common stock, $2 par value

165,000

150,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock

42,000

15,000

Retained earnings

55,875

33,450

Total liabilities and equity

$305,850

$240,825

 

TAURASI COMPANY
Income Statement
 For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

 

$609,750

Cost of goods sold

 

279,000

Gross profit

 

330,750

Operating expenses

$17,700

 

Depreciation expense

179,775

 

Other expenses

 

197,475

Income before taxes

 

133,275

Income taxes expense

 

44,850

Net income

 

$88,425

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $28,950 cash.

b. Issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $14 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $66,000 of cash dividends.

Refer to Taurasi Company’s financial statements and related information in Problem 16 4B.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its cash flows from operating activities according to the direct method.

 

additional information on year 2011 transactions 648240

Taurasi Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other Expenses are cash expenses, and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

TAURASI COMAPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 53,925

$ 31,800

Accounts receivable

19,425

23,250

Merchandise inventory

175,350

139,875

Equipment

105,450

76,500

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(48,300)

(30,600)

Total assets

$305,850

$240,825

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 38,475

$ 35,625

Income taxes payable

4,500

6,750

Common stock, $2 par value

165,000

150,000

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock

42,000

15,000

Retained earnings

55,875

33,450

Total liabilities and equity

$305,850

$240,825

 

TAURASI COMPANY
Income Statement
 For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

 

$609,750

Cost of goods sold

 

279,000

Gross profit

 

330,750

Operating expenses

$17,700

 

Depreciation expense

179,775

 

Other expenses

 

197,475

Income before taxes

 

133,275

Income taxes expense

 

44,850

Net income

 

$88,425

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. Purchased equipment for $28,950 cash.

b. Issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $14 cash per share.

c. Declared and paid $66,000 of cash dividends.

Refer to the information reported about Taurasi Company in Problem 16 4B.

Required

Prepare a complete statement of cash flows using a spreadsheet as in Exhibit 16A.1; report operating activities under the indirect method. Identify the debits and credits in the Analysis of Changes columns with letters that correspond to the following list of transactions and events.

a. Net income was $88,425.

b. Accounts receivable decreased.

c. Merchandise inventory increased.

d. Accounts payable increased.

e. Income taxes payable decreased.

f. Depreciation expense was $17,700.

g. Purchased equipment for $28,950 cash.

h. Issued 3,000 shares at $14 cash per share.

i. Declared and paid $66,000 of cash dividends.

 

tyra company s 2011 income statement and selected balance sheet data at december 31 648241

Tyra Company’s 2011 income statement and selected balance sheet data at December 31, 2010 and 2011, follow ($ thousands).

TYRA COMPANY

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales revenue                   

$412,000

Expenses

 

Cost of goods sold           

244,000

Depreciation expense         

64,000

Salaries expense             

30,000

Rent expense               

20,000

Insurance expense           

5,200

Interest expense              

4,800

Utilities expense             

4,000

Net income                   

$ 40,000

 

TYRA COMPANY

Selected Balance Sheet Accounts

At December 31

2011

2010

Accounts receivable        

$820

$700

Inventory                 

272

296

Accounts payable          

480

520

Salaries payable            

280

220

Utilities payable            

40

0

Prepaid insurance          

28

36

Prepaid rent              

40

60

Required

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section only of the company’s 2011 statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

santana rey owner of business solutions decides to prepare a statement of cash flows 648243

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to prepare a statement of cash flows for her business. (Although the serial problem allowed for various ownership changes in earlier chapters, we will prepare the statement of cash flows using the following financial data.)

BUSINESS SOLUTIONS

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and March 31,2012

 

2012

2011

 

 

 

Assets

 

 

Cash                                  

$ 68,057

$48,372

Accounts receivable                      

22,867

5,668

Merchandise inventory                    

704

0

Computer supplies                        

2,005

580

Prepaid insurance                        

1,110

1,665

Prepaid rent                            

825

825

Office equipment                        

8,000

8,000

Accumulated depreciation—Office

 

 

equipment                             

(800)

(400)

Computer equipment                     

20,000

20,000

Accumulated depreciation—

 

 

Computer equipment                   

(2,500)

(1,250)

Total assets                             

$120,268

$83,460

 

 

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                        

$ 0

$ 1,100

Wages payable                           

875

500

Unearned computer service revenue         

0

1,500

Common stock                          

98,000

73,000

 

 

 

Retained earnings                         

21,393

7,360

Total liabilities and equity                  

$120,268

$83,460

 

BUSINESS SOLUTIONS
Income Statement
For Three Months Ended March 31, 2012

Computer services revenue   

 

$25,307

Net sales                  

 

18,693

Total revenue               

 

44,000

Cost of goods sold          

$14,052

 

Depreciation expense —

                   

 

Office equipment         

400

 

Depreciation expense —

 

 

Computer equipment      

1,250

 

Wages expense             

3,250

 

Insurance expense          

555

 

Rent expense              

2,475

 

Computer supplies expense   

1,305

 

Advertising expense         

600

 

Mileage expense            

320

 

Repairs expense — Computer 

960

 

Total expenses             

 

25,167

Net income                

 

$18,833

Required

Prepare a statement of cash flows for Business Solutions using the indirect method for the three months ended March 31, 2012. Recall that the owner Santana Rey contributed $25,000 to the business in exchange for additional stock in the first quarter of 2012 and has received $4,800 in cash dividends.

is research in motion s statement of cash flows prepared under the direct method or 648244

Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.

1. Is Research In Motion’s statement of cash flows prepared under the direct method or the indirect method? How do you know?

2. For each fiscal year 2010, 2009, and 2008, is the amount of cash provided by operating activities more or less than the cash paid for dividends?

3. What is the largest amount in reconciling the difference between net income and cash flow from operating activities in 2010? In 2009? In 2008?

4. Identify the largest cash inflow and outflow for investing and for financing activities in 2010 and in 2009.

5. Obtain Research In Motion’s financial statements for a fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010, from either the SEC’s database. Since February 27, 2010, what are Research In Motion’s largest cash outflows and cash inflows in the investing and in the financing sections of its statement of cash flows?

identify two business actions gish might take to improve cash flows from operations 648245

Lisa Gish is preparing for a meeting with her banker. Her business is finishing its fourth year of operations. In the first year, it had negative cash flows from operations. In the second and third years, cash flows from operations were positive. However, inventory costs rose significantly in year 4, and cash flows from operations will probably be down 25%. Gish wants to secure a line of credit from her banker as a financing buffer. From experience, she knows the banker will scrutinize operating cash flows for years 1 through 4 and will want a projected number for year 5. Gish knows that a steady progression upward in operating cash flows for years 1 through 4 will help her case. She decides to use her discretion as owner and considers several business actions that will turn her operating cash flow in year 4 from a decrease to an increase.

Required

1. Identify two business actions Gish might take to improve cash flows from operations.

2. Comment on the ethics and possible consequences of Gish’s decision to pursue these actions.

speculate as to why the first section is so confusing and how it might be rectified 648246

Your friend, Jessica Willard, recently completed the second year of her business and just received annual financial statements from her accountant. Willard finds the income statement and balance sheet informative but does not understand the statement of cash flows. She says the first section is especially confusing because it contains a lot of additions and subtractions that do not make sense to her. Willard adds, “The income statement tells me the business is more profitable than last year and that’s most important. If I want to know how cash changes, I can look at comparative balance sheets.”

Required

Write a half page memorandum to your friend explaining the purpose of the statement of cash flows. Speculate as to why the first section is so confusing and how it might be rectified.

what types of analyses are often made from this statement s information 648247

Team members are to coordinate and independently answer one question within each of the following three sections. Team members should then report to the team and confirm or correct teammates’ answers.

1. Answer one of the following questions about the statement of cash flows.

a. What are this statement’s reporting objectives?

b. What two methods are used to prepare it? Identify similarities and differences between them.

c. What steps are followed to prepare the statement?

d. What types of analyses are often made from this statement’s information?

2. Identify and explain the adjustment from net income to obtain cash flows from operating activities using the indirect method for one of the following items.

a. Noncash operating revenues and expenses.

b. Nonoperating gains and losses.

c. Increases and decreases in noncash current assets.

d. Increases and decreases in current liabilities.

3. Identify and explain the formula for computing cash flows from operating activities using the direct method for one of the following items.

a. Cash receipts from sales to customers.

b. Cash paid for merchandise inventory.

c. Cash paid for wages and operating expenses.

d. Cash paid for interest and taxes.

mountain high s net cash outflow for its second year is 5 000 a summarized version o 648249

Jenna and Matt Wilder are completing their second year operating Mountain High, a downhill ski area and resort. Mountain High reports a net loss of $(10,000) for its second year, which includes an $85,000 extraordinary loss from fire. This past year also involved major purchases of plant assets for renovation and expansion, yielding a year end total asset amount of $800,000. Mountain High’s net cash outflow for its second year is $(5,000); a summarized version of its statement of cash flows follows:

Net cash flow provided by operating activities         

$295,000

Net cash flow used by investing activities              

(310,000)

Net cash flow provided by financing activities          

10,000

Required

Write a one page memorandum to the Wilders evaluating Mountain High’s current performance and assessing its future. Give special emphasis to cash flow data and their interpretation.

key comparative information for nokia which is a leading global manufacturer of mobi 648251

Key comparative information for Nokia, which is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services, follows (in EUR).

(Euro millions)

Current Year

1 Year Prior

2 Year Prior

Operating cash flows

3,247

3,197

7,882

Total assets

35,738

39,582

37,599

Required

1. Compute the recent two years’ cash flow on total assets ratio for Nokia.

2. How does Nokia’s ratio compare to Research In Motion’s and Apple’s ratios from BTN 16 2?

use the following financial statements of precision co to complete these requirement 648257

Use the following financial statements of Precision Co. to complete these requirements.

1. Prepare comparative income statements showing the percent increase or decrease for year 2011 in comparison to year 2010.

2. Prepare common size comparative balance sheets for years 2011 and 2010.

3. Compute the following ratios as of December 31, 2011, or for the year ended December 31, 2011, and identify its building block category for financial statement analysis.

a. Current ratio

b. Acid test ratio

c. Accounts receivable turnover

d. Days’ sales uncollected

e. Inventory turnover

f. Debt ratio

g. Debt to equity ratio

h. Times interest earned

i. Profit margin ratio

j. Total asset turnover

k. Return on total assets

l. Return on common stockholders’ equity

PRECISION COMPANY
Comparative Income Statements
 For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Sales                 

$2,486,000

$2,075,000

Cost of goods sold     

1,523,000

1,222,000

Gross profit           

963,000

853,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Advertising expense  

145,000

100,000

Sales salaries expense 

240,000

280,000

Office salaries expense

165,000

200,000

Insurance expense   

100,000

45,000

Supplies expense     

26,000

35,000

Depreciation expense 

85,000

75,000

Miscellaneous expenses

17,000

15,000

Total operating expenses

778,000

750,000

Operating income      

185,000

103,000

Interest expense       

44,000

46,000

Income before taxes    

141,000

57,000

Income taxes          

47,000

19,000

Net income            

$94,000

$38,000

Earnings per share

$0.99

$0.4

 

PRECISION COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

   

Current assets

 

 

Cash            

$79,000

$42,000

Short term investments

65,000

96,000

Accounts receivable, net

120,000

100,000

Merchandise inventory

250,000

265,000

Total current assets 

514,000

503,000

Plant assets

 

 

Store equipment, net

400,000

350,000

Office equipment, net

45,000

50,000

Buildings, net      

625,000

675,000

Land              

100,000

100,000

Total plant assets   

1,170,000

1,175,000

Total assets         

$1,684,000

$1,678,000

     

Liabilities

 

 

Current liabilities

 

 

Accounts payable         

$164,000

$190,000

Short term notes payable  

75,000

90,000

Taxes payable             

26,000

12,000

Total current liabilities     

265,000

292,000

Long term liabilities

 

 

Notes payable (secured by

 

 

mortgage on buildings)  

400,000

420,000

Total liabilities             

665,000

712,000

     

Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Common stock, $5 par value

475,000

475,000

Retained earnings      

544,000

491,000

Total stockholders’ equity

1,019,000

966,000

Total liabilities and equity

$1,684,000

$1,678,000

use that information for tipster corporation to determine the 2010 and 2011 common s 648263

1. Use the following information for Tipster Corporation to determine the 2010 and 2011 trend percents for net sales using 2010 as the base year.

($ thousands)

2011

2010

Net sales     

$201,600

$114,800

Cost of goods sold

109,200

60,200

2. Use the following information for Tipster Corporation to determine the 2010 and 2011 trend percents for net sales using 2010 as the base year.

($ thousands)

2011

2010

Net sales     

$201,600

$114,800

Cost of goods sold

109,200

60,200

Refer to the information in QS 17 3. Use that information for Tipster Corporation to determine the 2010 and 2011 common size percents for cost of goods sold using net sales as the base.

for each of the following separate cases compute cash flows from operations the list 648200

For each of the following separate cases, compute cash flows from operations. The list includes all balance sheet accounts related to operating activities.

 

Case A

Case B

Case C

Net income

$ 20,000

$125,000

$105,000

Depreciation expense

60,000

16,000

48,000

Accounts receivable increase (decrease)

80,000

40,000

(8,000)

Inventory increase (decrease)

(40,000)

(20,000)

21,000

Accounts payable increase (decrease)

28,000

(44,000)

16,000

Accrued liabilities increase (decrease)

(88,000)

10,000

(16,000)

compute cash flows from investing activities using the following company information 648201

1. Compute cash flows from investing activities using the following company information.

Sale of short term investments

$16,000

Cash collections from customers

44,000

Purchase of used equipment

10,000

Depreciation expense

6,000

2. Compute cash flows from financing activities using the following company information.

Additional short term borrowings

$88,000

Purchase of short term investments

25,000

Cash dividends paid

32,000

Interest paid

17,000

use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activiti 648202

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

acquisitions of furniture total 44 000 cash on which no depreciation is necessary be 648203

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

Refer to the data in QS 16 9.

Furniture costing $54,000 is sold at its book value in 2011. Acquisitions of furniture total $44,000 cash, on which no depreciation is necessary because it is acquired at year end. What is the cash inflow related to the sale of furniture?

assume that no additional notes payable are issued in 2011 what cash amount is paid 648204

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

Refer to the data in QS 16 9.

1. Assume that all common stock is issued for cash. What amount of cash dividends is paid during 2011?

2. Assume that no additional notes payable are issued in 2011. What cash amount is paid to reduce the notes payable balance in 2011?

 

how much cash is received from sales to customers for year 2011 648205

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

Refer to the data in QS 16 9.

1. How much cash is received from sales to customers for year 2011?

2. What is the net increase or decrease in cash for year 2011?

 

how much cash is paid to acquire merchandise inventory during year 2011 648206

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

Refer to the data in QS 16 9.

1. How much cash is paid to acquire merchandise inventory during year 2011?

2. How much cash is paid for operating expenses during year 2011?

 

use the direct method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities 648207

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

ORWELL, INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 95,800

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable, net

42,000

52,000

Inventory

86,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

6,400

5,200

Furniture

110,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Furniture

(18,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$323,000

$289,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 16,000

$ 22,000

Wages payable

10,000

6,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

30,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

34,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$323,000

$289,000

 

ORWELL, INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$468,000

Cost of goods sold

 

312,000

Gross profit

 

156,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$38,600

 

Other expenses

57,000

95,600

Income before taxes

 

60,400

Income taxes expense

 

24,600

Net income

 

$ 35,800

Refer to the data in QS 16 9.

Use the direct method to prepare the cash provided or used from operating activities section only of the statement of cash flows for this company.

 

which of the three competitors is in the strongest position as shown by its statemen 648208

Financial data from three competitors in the same industry follow.

1. Which of the three competitors is in the strongest position as shown by its statement of cash flows?

2. Analyze and compare the strength of Z Best’s cash flow on total assets ratio to that of Lopez.

($ thousands)

Z Best

Lopez

Ahmed

Cash provided (used) by operating activities

$80,000

$ 70,000

$ (34,000)

Cash provided (used) by investing activities

 

 

 

Proceeds from sale of operating assets

 

 

36,000

Purchase of operating assets

(38,000)

(35,000)

 

Cash provided (used) by financing activities

 

 

 

Proceeds from issuance of debt

 

 

33,000

Repayment of debt

(7,000)

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash

35,000

$ 35,000

$ 35,000

Average total assets

800,000

$ 650,000

$ 400,000

explain how these noncash balance sheet accounts are used to fully account for cash 648209

1. When a spreadsheet for a statement of cash flows is prepared, all changes in noncash balance sheet accounts are fully explained on the spreadsheet. Explain how these noncash balance sheet accounts are used to fully account for cash flows on a spreadsheet.

2. Use the following financial statements and additional information to (1) prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method, and (2) analyze and briefly discuss the statement prepared in part 1 with special attention to operating activities and to the company’s cash level.

KRUG ING.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2012 and 2011

 

2012

2011

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 26,400

$ 30,550

Accounts receivable, net

14,050

12,150

Inventory

90,100

70,150

Equipment

49,900

44,500

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(22,500)

(18,300)

Total assets

$157,950

$139,050

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 23,350

$ 25,400

Salaries payable

1,050

600

Common stock, no par value

107,000

100,000

Retained earnings

26,550

13,050

Total liabilities and equity

$157,950

$139,050

 

KRUG INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2012

Sales

 

$47,575

Cost of goods sold

 

(17,950)

Gross profit

 

29,625

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$4,200

 

Other expenses

8,550

 

Total operating expense

 

12,750

Income before taxes

 

16,875

Income tax expense

 

3,375

Net income

 

$13,500

Additional Information

a. No dividends are declared or paid in 2012.

b. Issued additional stock for $7,000 cash in 2012.

c. Purchased equipment for cash in 2012; no equipment was sold in 2012.

which method indirect or direct is acceptable for reporting operating cash flows und 648210

Answer each of the following related to international accounting standards.

1. Which method, indirect or direct, is acceptable for reporting operating cash flows under IFRS?

2. For each of the following four cash flows, identify whether it is reported under the operating, investing, or financing section (or some combination) within the indirect format of the statement of cash flows reported under IFRS and under U.S. GAAP.

Cash Flow Source

US GAAP Reporting

IFRS Reporting

aInterest paid

 

 

bDividends paid

 

 

cInterest received

 

 

dDividends received

 

 

assuming that this company uses the indirect method to report cash provided by opera 648212

The following transactions and events occurred during the year. Assuming that this company uses the indirect method to report cash provided by operating activities, indicate where each item would appear on its statement of cash flows by placing an x in the appropriate column.

 

 

Noncash

Not

 

Statement of Cash Flows

Investing

Reported on

 

Operating

Investing

Financing

and Financing

Statement

 

Activities

Activities

Activities

Activities

Or in Notes

aAccounts receivable decreased in the year

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

bPurchased land by issuing common stock

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

cPaid cash to purchase inventory

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

dSold equipment for cash, yielding a loss

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

eAccounts payable decreased in the year

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

fIncome taxes payable increased in the year

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

gDeclared and paid a cash dividend

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

hRecorded depreciation expense

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

iPaid cash to settle long term note payable

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

jPrepaid expenses increased in the year

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

the following transactions and events occurred during the year assuming that this co 648213

The following transactions and events occurred during the year. Assuming that this company uses the direct method to report cash provided by operating activities, indicate where each item would appear on the statement of cash flows by placing an x in the appropriate column.

 

 

Noncash

Not

 

Statement of Cash Flows

Investing

Reported on

 

Operating

Investing

Financing

and Financing

Statement

 

Activities

Activities

Activities

Activities

Or in Notes

a.Accepted six month note receivable in exchange for plant assets

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

b.Recorded depreciation expense

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

c.Paid cash to acquire treasury stock

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

d.Collected cash from sales

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

e.Borrowed cash from bank by

 

 

 

 

 

signing a nine month note payable

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

f.Paid cash to purchase a patent .

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

g.Retired long term notes payable by

 

 

 

 

 

issuing common stock

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

h.Paid cash toward accounts payable

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

i.Sold inventory for cash

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

j.Paid cash dividend that was declared in

 

 

 

 

 

a prior period

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

for each of the following three separate cases use the information provided about th 648215

For each of the following three separate cases, use the information provided about the calendar year 2012 operations of Sahim Company to compute the required cash flow information.

Case A: Compute cash received from customers:

 

Sales

$510,000

Accounts receivable, December 31, 2011

25,200

Accounts receivable, December 31, 2012

34,800

Case B: Compute cash paid for rent:

 

Rent expense

$140,800

Rent payable, December 31, 2011

8,800

Rent payable, December 31, 2012

7,200

Case C: Compute cash paid for merchandise:

 

Cost of goods sold

$528,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31, 2011

159,600

Accounts payable, December 31, 2011

67,800

Merchandise inventory, December 31, 2012

131,400

Accounts payable, December 31, 2012

84,000

use the following financial statements and additional information to 1 prepare a sta 648219

Use the following financial statements and additional information to (1) prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2011, using the indirect method, and (2) compute the company’s cash flow on total assets ratio for its fiscal year 2011.

GECKO INC.

Comparative Balance Sheets

June 30,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 85,800

$ 45,000

Accounts receivable, net

70,000

52,000

Inventory

66,800

96,800

Prepaid expenses

5,400

5,200

Equipment

130,000

120,000

Accumdepreciation—Equipment

(28,000)

(10,000)

Total assets

$330,000

$309,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable

$ 26,000

$ 32,000

Wages payable

7,000

16,000

Income taxes payable

2,400

3,600

Notes payable (long term)

40,000

70,000

Common stock, $5 par value

230,000

180,000

Retained earnings

24,600

7,400

Total liabilities and equity

$330,000

$309,000

 

GECKO INC.

Income Statement

For Year Ended June 30,2011

Sales

 

$668,000

Cost of goods sold

 

412,000

Gross profit

 

256,000

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$58,600

 

Other expenses

67,000

 

Total operating expenses

 

125,600

 

 

130,400

Other gains (losses)

 

 

Gain on sale of equipment

 

2,000

Income before taxes

 

132,400

Income taxes expense

 

45,640

Net income

 

$ 86,760

Additional Information

a. A $30,000 note payable is retired at its $30,000 carrying (book) value in exchange for cash.

b. The only changes affecting retained earnings are net income and cash dividends paid.

c. New equipment is acquired for $58,600 cash.

d. Received cash for the sale of equipment that had cost $48,600, yielding a $2,000 gain.

e. Prepaid Expenses and Wages Payable relate to Other Expenses on the income statement.

f. All purchases and sales of merchandise inventory are on credit.

use the following information about the cash flows of kansas company to prepare a co 648220

Use the following information about the cash flows of Kansas Company to prepare a complete statement of cash flows (direct method) for the year ended December 31, 2011. Use a note disclosure for any noncash investing and financing activities.

Cash and cash equivalents balance, December 31, 2010

$ 25,000

Cash and cash equivalents balance, December 31, 2011

70,000

Cash received as interest

2,500

Cash paid for salaries

72,500

Bonds payable retired by issuing common stock (no gain or loss on retirement)

187,500

Cash paid to retire long term notes payable

125,000

Cash received from sale of equipment

61,250

Cash received in exchange for six month note payable

25,000

Land purchased by issuing long term note payable

106,250

Cash paid for store equipment

23,750

Cash dividends paid

15,000

Cash paid for other expenses

40,000

Cash received from customers .

485,000

Cash paid for merchandise

252,500

harold company reports the following information for its recent calendar year 648222

Harold Company reports the following information for its recent calendar year.

Sales                            

$70,000

Expenses

 

Cost of goods sold               

40,000

Salaries expense                

12,000

Depreciation expense            

6,000

 

Net income                      

$12,000

 

 

Accounts receivable increase        

$ 9,000

Inventory decrease                

3,000

Salaries payable increase            

800

Required

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for Harold Company using the indirect method.

oregon company disclosed the following information for its recent calendar year 648223

Oregon Company disclosed the following information for its recent calendar year.

Revenues                             

$100,000

Expenses

 

Salaries expense                    

68,000

Utilities expense                    

28,000

Depreciation expense                

29,200

Other expenses                    

6,800

Net loss                              

$ (32,000)

Accounts receivable decrease           

$ 28,000

Purchased a machine                   

20,000

Salaries payable increase                

26,000

Other accrued liabilities decrease        

16,000

Required

1. Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

2. What were the major reasons that this company was able to report a net loss but positive cash flow from operations?

3. Of the potential causes of differences between cash flow from operations and net income, which are the most important to investors?

peugeot s a reports the following financial information for the year ended december 648225

Peugeot S.A. reports the following financial information for the year ended December 31, 2008 (euros in millions). Prepare its statement of cash flows under the indirect method.

Net loss                       

€ 500

Cash from sales of treasury stock and other       

€ 812

Depreciation and amortization     

3,679

Cash paid for dividends                         

361

Gains on disposals and other      

(362)

Cash from disposal of plant assets and intangibles    

88

Net increase in current assets     

(417)

Cash paid for plant assets and intangibles         

(3,331)

Net decrease in current liabilities   

(2,338)

Cash and cash equivalents, December 31, 2007      

5,937

analyze and discuss the statement of cash flows prepared in part 1 giving special at 648226

Kazaam Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other Expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expenses. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

KAZAAM COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Assets

 

 

Cash                               

$ 53,875

$ 76,625

Accounts receivable                   

65,000

49,625

Merchandise inventory                 

273,750

252,500

Prepaid expenses                     

5,375

6,250

Equipment                           

159,500

110,000

Accum depreciation—Equipment         

(34,625)

(44,000)

Total assets                           

$522,875

$451,000

Liabilities and Equity

 

 

Accounts payable                     

$ 88,125

$116,625

Short term notes payable               

10,000

6,250

Long term notes payable               

93,750

53,750

Common stock, $5 par value            

168,750

156,250

Paid in capital in excess

 

 

of par, common stock                

32,500

0

Retained earnings                     

129,750

118,125

Total liabilities and equity               

$522,875

$451,000

 

KAZAAM COMPANY

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales                            

 

$496,250

Cost of goods sold                

 

250,000

Gross profit                      

 

246,250

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense            

$ 18,750

 

Other expenses                 

136,500

155,250

Other gains (losses)

 

 

Loss on sale of equipment        

 

5,125

Income before taxes               

 

85,875

Income taxes expense             

 

12,125

Net income                       

 

$ 73,750

Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

a. The loss on the cash sale of equipment was $5,125 (details in b).

b. Sold equipment costing $46,875, with accumulated depreciation of $28,125, for $13,625 cash.

c. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

d. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

e. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

f. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.

Required

1. Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its operating activities using the indirect method.

Disclose any noncash investing and financing activities in a note.

2. Analyze and discuss the statement of cash flows prepared in part 1, giving special attention to the wisdom of the cash dividend payment.

the year end cost and fair values for its portfolio of these investments follow prep 648157

Ticker Services began operations in 2009 and maintains long term investments in available for sale securities. The year end cost and fair values for its portfolio of these investments follow. Prepare journal entries to record each year end fair value adjustment for these securities.

 

Cost

Fair Value

December 31, 2009

$374,000

$362,560

December 31, 2010

426,900

453,200

December 31, 2011

580,700

686,450

December 31, 2012

875,500

778,800

information regarding central company s individual investments in securities during 648158

Information regarding Central Company’s individual investments in securities during its calendar year 2011, along with the December 31, 2011, fair values, follows.

a. Investment in Beeman Company bonds: $418,500 cost, $455,000 fair value. Central intends to hold these bonds until they mature in 2016.

b. Investment in Baybridge common stock: 29,500 shares; $332,450 cost; $361,375 fair value. Central owns 32% of Baybridge’s voting stock and has a significant influence over Baybridge.

c. Investment in Carroll common stock: 12,000 shares; $169,750 cost; $183,000 fair value. This investment amounts to 3% of Carroll’s outstanding shares, and Central’s goal with this investment is to earn dividends over the next few years.

d. Investment in Newtech common stock: 3,500 shares; $95,300 cost; $93,625 fair value. Central’s goal with this investment is to reap an increase in fair value of the stock over the next three to five years. Newtech has 30,000 common shares outstanding.

e. Investment in Flock common stock: 16,300 shares; $102,860 cost; $109,210 fair value. This stock is marketable and is held as an investment of cash available for operations.

Required

1. Identify whether each investment should be classified as a short term or long term investment. For each long term investment, indicate in which of the long term investment classifications it should be placed.

2. Prepare a journal entry dated December 31, 2011, to record the fair value adjustment of the long term investments in available for sale securities. Central had no long term investments prior to year 2011.

the following information is available from the financial statements of wright indus 648160

The following information is available from the financial statements of Wright Industries. Compute Wright’s return on total assets for 2011 and 2012. (Round returns to one tenth of a percent.) Comment on the company’s efficiency in using its assets in 2011 and 2012.

 

2010

2011

2012

Total assets, December 31

$190,000

$320,000

$750,000

Net income

28,200

36,400

58,300

the exchange rates for pesos during the time the receivable is outstanding follow 648162

On May 8, 2011, Jett Company (a U.S. company) made a credit sale to Lopez (a Mexican company). The terms of the sale required Lopez to pay 800,000 pesos on February 10, 2012. Jett prepares quarterly financial statements on March 31, June 30, September 30, and December 31. The exchange rates for pesos during the time the receivable is outstanding follow.

8 May 11

$0.1984

30 Jun 11

0.2013

30 Sep 11

0.2029

31 Dec 11

0.1996

10 Feb 12

0.2047

Compute the foreign exchange gain or loss that Jett should report on each of its quarterly income statements for the last three quarters of 2011 and the first quarter of 2012. Also compute the amount reported on Jett’s balance sheets at the end of each of its last three quarters of 2011.

perry company had no short term investments prior to year 2011 it had the following 648165

Perry Company had no short term investments prior to year 2011. It had the following transactions involving short term investments in available for sale securities during 2011.

Apr. 16 Purchased 8,000 shares of Gem Co. stock at $24.25 per share plus a $360 brokerage fee.

May 1 Paid $200,000 to buy 90 day U.S. Treasury bills (debt securities): $200,000 principal amount,

6% interest, securities dated May 1.

July 7 Purchased 4,000 shares of PepsiCo stock at $49.25 per share plus a $350 brokerage fee.

20 Purchased 2,000 shares of Xerox stock at $16.75 per share plus a $410 brokerage fee.

Aug. 3 Received a check for principal and accrued interest on the U.S. Treasury bills that matured on

July 29.

15 Received an $0.85 per share cash dividend on the Gem Co. stock.

28 Sold 4,000 shares of Gem Co. stock at $30 per share less a $450 brokerage fee.

Oct. 1 Received a $1.90 per share cash dividend on the PepsiCo shares.

Dec. 15 Received a $1.05 per share cash dividend on the remaining Gem Co. shares.

31 Received a $1.30 per share cash dividend on the PepsiCo shares.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events.

2. Prepare a table to compare the year end cost and fair values of Perry’s short term investments in available for sale securities. The year end fair values per share are: Gem Co., $26.50; PepsiCo, $46.50; and Xerox, $13.75.

3. Prepare an adjusting entry, if necessary, to record the year end fair value adjustment for the portfolio of short term investments in available for sale securities.

4. Explain the balance sheet presentation of the fair value adjustment for Perry’s short term investments.

5. How do these short term investments affect Perry’s (a) income statement for year 2011 and (b) the equity section of its balance sheet at year end 2011?

shaq security which began operations in 2011 invests in long term available for sale 648166

Shaq Security, which began operations in 2011, invests in long term available for sale securities.

Following is a series of transactions and events determining its long term investment activity.

2011

Jan. 20 Purchased 900 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $18.75 per share plus a $590 commission.

Feb. 9 Purchased 2,200 shares of Sony at $46.88 per share plus a $2,578 commission.

June 12 Purchased 500 shares of Mattel at $55.50 per share plus an $832 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are Johnson & Johnson, $20.38; Mattel, $57.25; Sony, $39.

2012

Apr. 15 Sold 900 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $21.75 per share less a $685 commission.

July 5 Sold 500 shares of Mattel at $49.13 per share less a $491 commission.

July 22 Purchased 1,600 shares of Sara Lee at $36.25 per share plus a $1,740 commission.

Aug. 19 Purchased 1,800 shares of Eastman Kodak at $28 per share plus a $1,260 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Kodak, $31.75; Sara Lee, $30.00; Sony, $36.50.

2013

Feb. 27 Purchased 3,400 shares of Microsoft at $23.63 per share plus a $1,606 commission.

June 21 Sold 2,200 shares of Sony at $40.00 per share less a $2,640 commission.

June 30 Purchased 1,200 shares of Black & Decker at $47.50 per share plus a $1,995 commission.

Aug. 3 Sold 1,600 shares of Sara Lee at $31.25 per share less a $1,750 commission.

Nov. 1 Sold 1,800 shares of Eastman Kodak at $42.75 per share less a $2,309 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Black & Decker, $56.50; Microsoft, $28.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events and any year end fair value adjustments to the portfolio of long term available for sale securities.

2. Prepare a table that summarizes the (a) total cost, (b) total fair value adjustment, and (c) total fair value of the portfolio of long term available for sale securities at each year end.

3. Prepare a table that summarizes (a) the realized gains and losses and (b) the unrealized gains or losses for the portfolio of long term available for sale securities at each year end.

pillar steel co which began operations on january 4 2011 had the following subsequen 648168

Pillar Steel Co., which began operations on January 4, 2011, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long term investments.

2011

Jan. 5 Pillar purchased 30,000 shares (20% of total) of Kildaire’s common stock for $780,000.

Oct. 23 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $1.60 per share.

Dec. 31 Kildaire’s net income for 2011 is $582,000, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $27.75 per share.

2012

Oct. 15 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $1.30 per share.

Dec. 31 Kildaire’s net income for 2012 is $738,000, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $30.45 per share.

2013

Jan. 2 Pillar sold all of its investment in Kildaire for $947,000 cash.

Part 1

Assume that Pillar has a significant influence over Kildaire with its 20% share of stock.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Pillar.

2. Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Pillar’s investment in Kildaire common stock as reflected in the investment account on January 1, 2013.

3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Pillar’s equity from January 5, 2011, through January 2, 2013, resulting from its investment in Kildaire.

roundtree company a u s corporation with customers in several foreign countries had 648170

Roundtree Company, a U.S. corporation with customers in several foreign countries, had the following selected transactions for 2011 and 2012.

2011

Apr. 8 Sold merchandise to Salinas & Sons of Mexico for $7,938 cash. The exchange rate for pesos is $0.1323 on this day.

July 21 Sold merchandise on credit to Sumito Corp. in Japan. The price of 1.5 million yen is to be paid

120 days from the date of sale. The exchange rate for yen is $0.0096 on this day.

Oct. 14 Sold merchandise for 19,000 pounds to Smithers Ltd. of Great Britain, payment in full to be received in 90 days. The exchange rate for pounds is $1.5181 on this day.

Nov. 18 Received Sumito’s payment in yen for its July 21 purchase and immediately exchanged the yen for dollars. The exchange rate for yen is $0.0091 on this day.

Dec. 20 Sold merchandise for 17,000 ringgits to Hamid Albar of Malaysia, payment in full to be received in 30 days. On this day, the exchange rate for ringgits is $0.6852.

Dec. 31 Recorded adjusting entries to recognize exchange gains or losses on Roundtree’s annual financial statements. Rates for exchanging foreign currencies on this day follow.

Pesos (Mexico)

$0.1335

Yen (Japan)

0.0095

Pounds (Britain)

1.5235

Ringgits (Malaysia)

0.6807

2012

Jan. 12 Received full payment in pounds from Smithers for the October 14 sale and immediately exchanged the pounds for dollars. The exchange rate for pounds is $1.5314 on this day.

Jan. 19 Received Hamid Albar’s full payment in ringgits for the December 20 sale and immediately exchanged the ringgits for dollars. The exchange rate for ringgits is $0.6771 on this day.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries for the Roundtree transactions and adjusting entries (round amounts to the nearest dollar).

2. Compute the foreign exchange gain or loss to be reported on Roundtree’s 2011 income statement.

3. What actions might Roundtree consider to reduce its risk of foreign exchange gains or losses?

deal company which began operations in 2011 invests its idle cash in trading securit 648171

Deal Company, which began operations in 2011, invests its idle cash in trading securities. The following transactions relate to its short term investments in its trading securities.

2011

Mar. 10 Purchased 1,200 shares of AOL at $59.15 per share plus a $773 commission.

May 7 Purchased 2,500 shares of MTV at $36.25 per share plus a $1,428 commission.

Sept. 1 Purchased 600 shares of UPS at $57.25 per share plus a $625 commission.

2012

Apr. 26 Sold 2,500 shares of MTV at $34.50 per share less a $1,025 commission.

Apr. 27 Sold 600 shares of UPS at $60.50 per share less an $894 commission.

June 2 Purchased 1,800 shares of SPW at $172 per share plus a $1,625 commission.

June 14 Purchased 450 shares of Walmart at $50.25 per share plus a $541.50 commission.

2013

Jan. 28 Purchased 1,000 shares of PepsiCo at $43 per share plus a $1,445 commission.

Jan. 31 Sold 1,800 shares of SPW at $168 per share less a $1,020 commission.

Aug. 22 Sold 1,200 shares of AOL at $56.75 per share less a $1,240 commission.

Sept. 3 Purchased 750 shares of Vodaphone at $40.50 per share plus an $840 commission.

Oct. 9 Sold 450 shares of Walmart at $53.75 per share less a $610.50 commission.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these short term investment activities for the years shown. (Ignore any year end adjusting entries.)

2. On December 31, 2013, prepare the adjusting entry to record any necessary fair value adjustment for the portfolio of trading securities when PepsiCo’s share price is $41 and Vodaphone’s share price is $37. (Assume the Fair Value Adjustment—Trading account had an unadjusted balance of zero.)

day systems had no short term investments prior to 2011 it had the following transac 648172

Day Systems had no short term investments prior to 2011. It had the following transactions involving short term investments in available for sale securities during 2011.

Feb. 6 Purchased 1,700 shares of Nokia stock at $41.25 per share plus a $1,500 brokerage fee.

15 Paid $10,000 to buy six month U.S. Treasury bills (debt securities): $10,000 principal amount,

6% interest, securities dated February 15.

Apr. 7 Purchased 600 shares of Dell Co. stock at $39.50 per share plus a $627 brokerage fee.

June 2 Purchased 1,250 shares of Merck stock at $72.50 per share plus a $1,945 brokerage fee.

30 Received a $0.19 per share cash dividend on the Nokia shares.

Aug. 11 Sold 425 shares of Nokia stock at $46 per share less a $525 brokerage fee.

16 Received a check for principal and accrued interest on the U.S. Treasury bills purchased

February 15.

24 Received a $0.10 per share cash dividend on the Dell shares.

Nov. 9 Received a $0.20 per share cash dividend on the remaining Nokia shares.

Dec. 18 Received a $0.15 per share cash dividend on the Dell shares.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events.

2. Prepare a table to compare the year end cost and fair values of the short term investments in available for sale securities. The year end fair values per share are: Nokia, $40.25; Dell, $41; and Merck, $59.

3. Prepare an adjusting entry, if necessary, to record the year end fair value adjustment for the portfolio of short term investments in available for sale securities.

4. Explain the balance sheet presentation of the fair value adjustment to Day’s short term investments.

5. How do these short term investments affect (a) its income statement for year 2011 and (b) the equity section of its balance sheet at the 2011 year end?

following is a series of transactions and events involving its long term investment 648173

Venice Enterprises, which began operations in 2011, invests in long term available for sale securities.

Following is a series of transactions and events involving its long term investment activity.

2011

Mar. 10 Purchased 2,400 shares of Apple at $33.25 per share plus $1,995 commission.

Apr. 7 Purchased 5,000 shares of Ford at $17.50 per share plus $2,625 commission.

Sept. 1 Purchased 1,200 shares of Polaroid at $49.00 per share plus $1,176 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Apple, $35.50; Ford, $17.00; Polaroid, $51.75.

2012

Apr. 26 Sold 5,000 shares of Ford at $16.38 per share less a $2,237 commission.

June 2 Purchased 3,600 shares of Duracell at $18.88 per share plus a $2,312 commission.

June 14 Purchased 900 shares of Sears at $24.50 per share plus a $541 commission.

Nov. 27 Sold 1,200 shares of Polaroid at $52 per share less a $1,672 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Apple, $35.50; Duracell, $18.00; Sears, $26.00.

2013

Jan. 28 Purchased 2,000 shares of Coca Cola Co. at $41 per share plus a $3,280 commission.

Aug. 22 Sold 2,400 shares of Apple at $29.75 per share less a $2,339 commission.

Sept. 3 Purchased 1,500 shares of Motorola at $29 per share plus a $870 commission.

Oct. 9 Sold 900 shares of Sears at $27.50 per share less a $619 commission.

Oct. 31 Sold 3,600 shares of Duracell at $16.00 per share less a $1,496 commission.

Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Coca Cola, $46.00; Motorola, $22.00.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events and any year end fair value adjustments to the portfolio of long term available for sale securities.

2. Prepare a table that summarizes the (a) total cost, (b) total fair value adjustment, and (c) total fair value for the portfolio of long term available for sale securities at each year end.

3. Prepare a table that summarizes (a) the realized gains and losses and (b) the unrealized gains or losses for the portfolio of long term available for sale securities at each year end.

capollo s long term available for sale portfolio at december 31 2010 consists of the 648174

Capollo’s long term available for sale portfolio at December 31, 2010, consists of the following.

Available for Sale Securities

Cost

Fair Value

45,000 shares of Company R common stock

$1,118,250

$1,198,125

17,000 shares of Company S common stock

616,760

586,500

22,000 shares of Company T common stock

294,470

303,600

Capollo enters into the following long term investment transactions during year 2011.

Jan. 13 Sold 4,250 shares of Company S stock for $144,500 less a brokerage fee of $2,390.

Mar. 24 Purchased 31,000 shares of Company U common stock for $565,750 plus a brokerage fee of $9,900. The shares represent a 62% ownership interest in Company U.

Apr. 5 Purchased 85,000 shares of Company V common stock for $267,750 plus a brokerage fee of $4,500. The shares represent a 10% ownership in Company V.

Sept. 2 Sold 22,000 shares of Company T common stock for $313,500 less a brokerage fee of $5,400.

Sept. 27 Purchased 5,000 shares of Company W common stock for $101,000 plus a brokerage fee of $2,100. The shares represent a 25% ownership interest in Company W.

Oct. 30 Purchased 10,000 shares of Company X common stock for $97,500 plus a brokerage fee of $2,340. The shares represent a 13% ownership interest in Company X.

The fair values of its investments at December 31, 2011, are: R, $1,136,250; S, $420,750; U, $545,600; V, $269,875; W, $109,375; and X, $91,250.

Required

1. Determine the amount Capollo should report on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet for its long term investments in available for sale securities.

2. Prepare any necessary December 31, 2011, adjusting entry to record the fair value adjustment of the long term investments in available for sale securities.

3. What amount of gains or losses on transactions relating to long term investments in available for sale securities should Capollo report on its December 31, 2011, income statement?

bengal company which began operations on january 3 2011 had the following subsequent 648175

Bengal Company, which began operations on January 3, 2011, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long term investments.

2011

Jan. 5 Bengal purchased 15,000 shares (25% of total) of Bloch’s common stock for $187,500.

Aug. 1 Bloch declared and paid a cash dividend of $0.95 per share.

Dec. 31 Bloch’s net income for 2011 is $92,000, and the fair value of its stock is $12.90 per share.

2012

Aug. 1 Bloch declared and paid a cash dividend of $1.25 per share.

Dec. 31 Bloch’s net income for 2012 is $76,000, and the fair value of its stock is $13.55 per share.

2013

Jan. 8 Bengal sold all of its investment in Bloch for $204,750 cash.

Part 1

Assume that Bengal has a significant influence over Bloch with its 25% share.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Bengal.

2. Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Bengal’s investment in Bloch common stock as reflected in the investment account on January 7, 2013.

3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Bengal’s equity from January 5, 2011, through January 8, 2013, resulting from its investment in Bloch.

Part 2

Assume that although Bengal owns 25% of Bloch’s outstanding stock, circumstances indicate that it does not have a significant influence over the investee and that it is classified as an available for sale security investment.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Bengal. Also prepare an entry dated January 8, 2013, to remove any balance related to the fair value adjustment.

2. Compute the cost per share of Bengal’s investment in Bloch common stock as reflected in the investment account on January 7, 2013.

3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Bengal’s equity from January 5, 2011, through January 8, 2013, resulting from its investment in Bloch.

datamix a u s corporation with customers in several foreign countries had the follow 648176

Datamix, a U.S. corporation with customers in several foreign countries, had the following selected transactions for 2011 and 2012.

2011

May 26 Sold merchandise for 6.5 million yen to Fuji Company of Japan, payment in full to be received in 60 days. On this day, the exchange rate for yen is $0.0094.

June 1 Sold merchandise to Fordham Ltd. of Great Britain for $72,613 cash. The exchange rate for pounds is $1.5277 on this day.

July 25 Received Fuji’s payment in yen for its May 26 purchase and immediately exchanged the yen for dollars. The exchange rate for yen is $0.0090 on this day.

Oct. 15 Sold merchandise on credit to Martinez Brothers of Mexico. The price of 373,000 pesos is to be paid 90 days from the date of sale. On this day, the exchange rate for pesos is $0.1340.

Dec. 6 Sold merchandise for 242,000 yuans to Chi Ying Company of China, payment in full to be received in 30 days. The exchange rate for yuans is $0.1975 on this day.

Dec. 31 Recorded adjusting entries to recognize exchange gains or losses on Datamix’s annual financial statements. Rates of exchanging foreign currencies on this day follow.

Yen (Japan)

$0.0094

Pounds (Britain)

1.5318

Pesos (Mexico)

0.1560

Yuans (China)

0.2000

2012

Jan. 5 Received Chi Ying’s full payment in yuans for the December 6 sale and immediately exchanged the yuans for dollars. The exchange rate for yuans is $0.2060 on this day.

Jan. 13 Received full payment in pesos from Martinez for the October 15 sale and immediately exchanged the pesos for dollars. The exchange rate for pesos is $0.1420 on this day.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries for the Datamix transactions and adjusting entries.

2. Compute the foreign exchange gain or loss to be reported on Datamix’s 2011 income statement.

3. What actions might Datamix consider to reduce its risk of foreign exchange gains or losses?

draft a one half page memorandum to terrio explaining why the 6 000 loss on sale of 648180

Assume that you are Jackson Company’s accountant. Company owner Abel Terrio has reviewed the 2011 financial statements you prepared and questions the $6,000 loss reported on the sale of its investment in Blackhawk Co. common stock. Jackson acquired 50,000 shares of Blackhawk’s common stock on December 31, 2009, at a cost of $500,000. This stock purchase represented a 40% interest in Blackhawk. The 2010 income statement reported that earnings from all investments were $126,000. On January 3, 2011, Jackson Company sold the Blackhawk stock for $575,000. Blackhawk did not pay any dividends during 2010 but reported a net income of $202,500 for that year. Terrio believes that because the Blackhawk stock purchase price was $500,000 and was sold for $575,000, the 2011 income statement should report a $75,000 gain on the sale.

Required

Draft a one half page memorandum to Terrio explaining why the $6,000 loss on sale of Blackhawk stock is correctly reported.

this expertise will be used to facilitate other teammates understanding of the conce 648182

Each team member is to become an expert on a specific classification of long term investments. This expertise will be used to facilitate other teammates’ understanding of the concepts and procedures relevent to the classification chosen.

1. Each team member must select an area for expertise by choosing one of the following classifications of long term investments.

a. Held to maturity debt securities

b. Available for sale debt and equity securities

c. Equity securities with significant influence

d. Equity securities with controlling influence

2. Learning teams are to disburse and expert teams are to be formed. Expert teams are made up of those who select the same area of expertise. The instructor will identify the location where each expert team will meet.

3. Expert teams will collaborate to develop a presentation based on the following requirements. Students must write the presentation in a format they can show to their learning teams in part (4).

Requirements for Expert Presentation

a. Write a transaction for the acquisition of this type of investment security. The transaction description is to include all necessary data to reflect the chosen classification.

b. Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition.

[Note: The expert team on equity securities with controlling influence will substitute requirements (d ) and (e) with a discussion of the reporting of these investments.]

c. Identify information necessary to complete the end of period adjustment for this investment.

d. Assuming that this is the only investment owned, prepare any necessary year end entries.

e. Present the relevant balance sheet section(s).

4. Re form learning teams. In rotation, experts are to present to their teams the presentations they developed in part 3. Experts are to encourage and respond to questions.

prepare the journal entries to record the payments on march 31 june 30 september 30 648183

Refer to the opening feature in this chapter about Michael Chasen and Matthew Pittinsky and their company, Blackboard. Assume that they must acquire the Japanese rights to certain educational software that will then be produced for sale to U.S. consumers. Assume Blackboard acquires those rights on January 1, 2011, from a Japanese distributor and agrees to pay 12,000,000 yen per year for those rights. Quarterly payments are due March 31, June 30, September 30, and December 31 each year. On January 1, 2011, the yen is worth $0.00891.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to record the rights purchased on January 1, 2011.

2. Prepare the journal entries to record the payments on March 31, June 30, September 30, and December 31, 2011. The value of the yen on those dates follows.

March 31

$0.00893

June 30

0.00901

September 30 

0.00902

December 31

0.00897

3. How can Blackboard protect itself from unanticipated gains and losses from currency translation if all of the payments are specified to be paid in yen?

use the following information to determine this company s cash flows from operating 648197

Use the following information to determine this company’s cash flows from operating activities using the indirect method.

LING COMPANY

Selected Balance Sheet Information

December 31,2011 and 2010

 

2011

2010

Current assets

 

 

Cash

$338,600

$107,200

Accounts receivable

100,000

128,000

Inventory Current liabilities

240,000

216,400

Accounts payable Income taxes payable

121,600 8,200

102,800 8,800

 

LING COMAPANY

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

 

$2,060,000

Cost of goods sold

 

1,326,400

Gross profit

 

733,600

Operating expenses

 

 

Depreciation expense

$144,000

 

Other expenses

486,000

630,000

Income before taxes

 

103,600

Income taxes expense

 

30,800

Net income

 

$ 72,800

the following selected information is from mooney company s comparative balance shee 648198

The following selected information is from Mooney Company’s comparative balance sheets.

At December 31

2011

2010

Furniture

$155,000

$260,000

Accumulated depreciation—Furniture

(74,400)

(121,400)

The income statement reports depreciation expense for the year of $36,000. Also, furniture costing $105,000 was sold for its book value. Compute the cash received from the sale of furniture.

the following selected information is from the teeter company s comparative balance 648199

The following selected information is from the Teeter Company’s comparative balance sheets.

At December 31

2011

2010

Common stock, $10 par value

$310,000

$300,000

Paid in capital in excess of par

1,134,000

684,000

Retained earnings

627,000

575,000

The company’s net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $196,000.

1. Compute the cash received from the sale of its common stock during 2011.

2. Compute the cash paid for dividends during 2011.

how much did the company pay on january 1 2017 to purchase the bonds that it retired 648087

On January 1, 2011, Steadman issues $350,000 of 10%, 15 year bonds at a price of 973⁄4. Six years later, on January 1, 2017, Steadman retires 20% of these bonds by buying them on the open market at 1041⁄2. All interest is accounted for and paid through December 31, 2016, the day before the purchase. The straightline method is used to amortize any bond discount.

1. How much does the company receive when it issues the bonds on January 1, 2011?

2. What is the amount of the discount on the bonds at January 1, 2011?

3. How much amortization of the discount is recorded on the bonds for the entire period from January 1, 2011, through December 31, 2016?

4. What is the carrying (book) value of the bonds as of the close of business on December 31, 2016? What is the carrying value of the 20% soon to be retired bonds on this same date?

5. How much did the company pay on January 1, 2017, to purchase the bonds that it retired?

6. What is the amount of the recorded gain or loss from retiring the bonds?

7. Prepare the journal entry to record the bond retirement at January 1, 2017.

prepare the january 1 2011 journal entry to record the bonds issuance 648098

1. Heathrow issues $2,000,000 of 6%, 15 year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that pay interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds are issued at a price of $1,728,224.

2. Refer to the bond details in Problem 14 2A, except assume that the bonds are issued at a price of $2,447,990.

Required

1. Prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record the bonds’ issuance.

2. For each semiannual period, compute (a) the cash payment, (b) the straight line premium amortization, and (c) the bond interest expense.

3. Determine the total bond interest expense to be recognized over the bonds’ life.

4. Prepare the first two years of an amortization table like Exhibit 14.7 using the straight line method.

5. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

compare your answer with the amount shown on the amortization table as the balance f 648100

1. Saturn issues 6.5%, five year bonds dated January 1, 2011, with a $500,000 par value. The bonds pay interest on June 30 and December 31 and are issued at a price of $510,666. The annual market rate is 6% on the issue date.

2. Refer to the bond details in Problem 14 4A.

Required

a. Compute the total bond interest expense over the bonds’ life.

b. Prepare an effective interest amortization table like the one in Exhibit 14B.2 for the bonds’ life.

c. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

d. Use the market rate at issuance to compute the present value of the remaining cash flows for these bonds as of December 31, 2013. Compare your answer with the amount shown on the amortization table as the balance for that date (from part 2) and explain your findings.

assume the market rate on january 1 2011 is 4 instead of 8 without providing numbers 648101

Patton issues $650,000 of 5%, four year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that pay interest semiannually on

June 30 and December 31. They are issued at $584,361 and their market rate is 8% at the issue date.

Required

1. Prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record the bonds’ issuance.

2. Determine the total bond interest expense to be recognized over the bonds’ life.

3. Prepare a straight line amortization table like the one in Exhibit 14.7 for the bonds’ first two years.

4. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

5. Assume the market rate on January 1, 2011, is 4% instead of 8%. Without providing numbers, describe how this change affects the amounts reported on Patton’s financial statements.

prepare an effective interest amortization table like for the bonds first two years 648103

McFad issues $90,000 of 11%, three year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that pay interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31. They are issued at $92,283. Their market rate is 10% at the issue date.

Required

1. Prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record the bonds’ issuance.

2. Determine the total bond interest expense to be recognized over the bonds’ life.

3. Prepare an effective interest amortization table like  for the bonds’ first two years.

4. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

5. Prepare the journal entry to record the bonds’ retirement on January 1, 2013, at 98.

6. Assume that the market rate on January 1, 2011, is 12% instead of 10%. Without presenting numbers, describe how this change affects the amounts reported on McFad’s financial statements.

comment on your results and discuss the riskiness of each company s financing struct 648105

At the end of the current year, the following information is available for both Kumar Company and Asher Company.

 

Kumar Company

Asher Comapany

Total assets

$2,254,500

$1,123,500

Total liabilities

904,500

598,500

Total equity

1,350,000

525,000

Required

1. Compute the debt to equity ratios for both companies.

2. Comment on your results and discuss the riskiness of each company’s financing structure.

montana company signs a five year capital lease with elway company for office equipm 648106

Montana Company signs a five year capital lease with Elway Company for office equipment. The annual lease payment is $20,000, and the interest rate is 8%.

Required

1. Compute the present value of Montana’s five year lease payments.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record Montana’s capital lease at its inception.

3. Complete a lease payment schedule for the five years of the lease with the following headings. Assume that the beginning balance of the lease liability (present value of lease payments) is $79,854. (Hint: To find the amount allocated to interest in year 1, multiply the interest rate by the beginning of year lease liability. The amount of the annual lease payment not allocated to interest is allocated to principal. Reduce the lease liability  by the amount allocated to principal to update the lease liability at each year end.)

Period
Ending
Date

Beginning
Balance of
Lease
Liability

Interest on
Lease
Liability

Reduction of
Lease
Liability

Cash
Lease
Payment

Ending
Balance of
Lease
Liability

           
           
           

4. Use straight line depreciation and prepare the journal entry to depreciate the leased asset at the end of year 1. Assume zero salvage value and a five year life for the office equipment.

for each semiannual period compute a the cash payment b the straight line premium am 648109

1.Par Four issues $1,700,000 of 10%, 10 year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that pay interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds are issued at a price of $1,505,001.

2. Refer to the bond details in Problem 14 2B, except assume that the bonds are issued at a price of $2,096,466.

Required

a. Prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record the bonds’ issuance.

b. For each semiannual period, compute (a) the cash payment, (b) the straight line premium amortization, and (c) the bond interest expense.

c. Determine the total bond interest expense to be recognized over the bonds’ life.

d. Prepare the first two years of an amortization table like using the straight line method.

e. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

prepare an effective interest amortization table like the one in for the bonds life 648111

1. Zooba Company issues 9%, five year bonds dated January 1, 2011, with a $160,000 par value. The bonds pay interest on June 30 and December 31 and are issued at a price of $166,494. Their annual market rate is 8% on the issue date.

2. Refer to the bond details in Problem 14 4B.

Required

a. Compute the total bond interest expense over the bonds’ life.

b. Prepare an effective interest amortization table like the one in for the bonds’ life.

c. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

4. Use the market rate at issuance to compute the present value of the remaining cash flows for these bonds as of December 31, 2013. Compare your answer with the amount shown on the amortization table as the balance for that date (from part 2) and explain your findings.

prepare the january 1 2011 journal entry to record the bonds issuance 648114

Hutton issues $900,000 of 13%, four year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that pay interest semiannually on

June 30 and December 31. They are issued at $987,217, and their market rate is 10% at the issue date.

Required

1. Prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record the bonds’ issuance.

2. Determine the total bond interest expense to be recognized over the bonds’ life.

3. Prepare an effective interest amortization table like the one in Exhibit 14B.2 for the bonds’ first two years.

4. Prepare the journal entries to record the first two interest payments.

5. Prepare the journal entry to record the bonds’ retirement on January 1, 2013, at 106.

6. Assume that the market rate on January 1, 2011, is 14% instead of 10%. Without presenting numbers, describe how this change affects the amounts reported on Hutton’s financial statements.

preston company signs a five year capital lease with starbuck company for office equ 648117

Preston Company signs a five year capital lease with Starbuck Company for office equipment. The annual lease payment is $10,000, and the interest rate is 10%.

Required

1. Compute the present value of Preston’s lease payments.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record Preston’s capital lease at its inception.

3. Complete a lease payment schedule for the five years of the lease with the following headings. Assume that the beginning balance of the lease liability (present value of lease payments) is $37,908. (Hint: To find the amount allocated to interest in year 1, multiply the interest rate by the beginning ofyear lease liability. The amount of the annual lease payment not allocated to interest is allocated to principal. Reduce the lease liability by the amount allocated to principal to update the lease liability at each year end.)

Period
Ending
Date

Beginning
Balance of
Lease
Liability

Interest on
Lease
Liability

Reduction of
Lease
Liability

Cash
Lease
Payment

Ending
Balance of
Lease
Liability

           
           
           

4. Use straight line depreciation and prepare the journal entry to depreciate the leased asset at the end of year 1. Assume zero salvage value and a five year life for the office equipment.

what are some factors santana rey should consider before borrowing the funds 648118

Santana Rey has consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expansion of her business by obtaining a long term bank loan. Selected account balances at March 31, 2012, for Business Solutions follow.

Total assets

$120,268

Total liabilities

$875

Total equity

$119,393

Required

1. The bank has offered a long term secured note to Business Solutions. The bank’s loan procedures require that a client’s debt to equity ratio not exceed 0.8. As of March 31, 2012, what is the maximum amount that Business Solutions could borrow from this bank (rounded to nearest dollar)?

2. If Business Solutions borrows the maximum amount allowed from the bank, what percentage of assets would be financed (a) by debt and (b) by equity?

3. What are some factors Santana Rey should consider before borrowing the funds?

identify home depot s long term liabilities and the amounts for those liabilities fr 648121

1. Your business associate mentions that she is considering investing in corporate bonds currently selling at a premium. She says that since the bonds are selling at a premium, they are highly valued and her investment will yield more than the going rate of return for the risk involved. Reply with a memorandum to confirm or correct your associate’s interpretation of premium bonds.

2. Access the March 25, 2010, filing of the 10 K report of Home Depot for the year ended

January 31, 2010, Refer to Home Depot’s balance sheet, including its note 4 (on debt).

Required

1. Identify Home Depot’s long term liabilities and the amounts for those liabilities from Home Depot’s balance sheet at January 31, 2010.

2. Review Home Depot’s note 5. The note reports that as of January 31, 2010, it had $2.96 billion of “5.875% Senior Notes; due December 16, 2036; interest payable semiannually on June 16 and December 16.” These notes have a face value of $3.0 billion and were originally issued at $2.958 billion.

a. Why would Home Depot issue $3.0 billion of its notes for only $2.958 billion?

b. How much cash interest must Home Depot pay each June 16 and December 16 on these notes?

break into teams and complete the following requirements related to effective intere 648122

Break into teams and complete the following requirements related to effective interest amortization for a premium bond.

1. Each team member is to independently prepare a blank table with proper headings for amortization of a bond premium. When all have finished, compare tables and ensure that all are in agreement.

2. In rotation, each team member must explain how to complete one line of the bond amortization table, including all computations for his or her line. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.) All members are to fill in their tables during this process. You need not finish the table; stop after all members have explained a line.

3. In rotation, each team member is to identify a separate column of the table and indicate what the final number in that column will be and explain the reasoning.

4. Reach a team consensus as to what the total bond interest expense on this bond issue will be if the bond is not retired before maturity.

5. As a team, prepare a list of similarities and differences between the amortization table just prepared and the amortization table if the bond had been issued at a discount.

warren brown is the founder of cake love assume that his company currently has 250 0 648123

Warren Brown is the founder of Cake Love. Assume that his company currently has $250,000 in equity, and he is considering a $100,000 expansion to meet increased demand. The $100,000 expansion would yield $16,000 in additional annual income before interest expense. Assume that the business currently earns $40,000 annual income before interest expense of $10,000, yielding a return on equity of 12% ($30,000y$250,000). To fund the expansion, he is considering the issuance of a 10 year, $100,000 note with annual interest payments (the principal due at the end of 10 years).

Required

1. Using return on equity as the decision criterion, show computations to support or reject the expansion if interest on the $100,000 note is (a) 10%, (b) 15%, (c) 16%, (d) 17%, and (e) 20%.

2. What general rule do the results in part 1 illustrate?

garden company completes the following selected transactions related to its short te 648127

Garden Company completes the following selected transactions related to its short term investments during 2011.

May 8 Purchased 300 shares of FedEx stock as a short term investment in available for sale securities at $40 per share plus $975 in broker fees.

Sept. 2 Sold 100 shares of its investment in FedEx stock at $47 per share and held the remaining

200 shares; broker’s commission was $225.

Oct. 2 Purchased 400 shares of Ajay stock for $60 per share plus $1,600 in commissions. The stock is held as a short term investment in available for sale securities.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries for the above transactions of Garden Company for 2011.

2. Prepare an adjusting journal entry as of December 31, 2011, if the fair values of the equity securities held by Garden Company are $48 per share for FedEx and $55 per share for Ajay. (Year 2011 is the first year Garden Company acquired short term investments.)

the following transactions relate to brown company s long term investments during 20 648128

The following transactions relate to Brown Company’s long term investments during 2010 and 2011. Brown did not own any long term investments prior to 2010. Show (1) the appropriate journal entries and (2) the relevant portions of each year’s balance sheet and income statement that reflect these transactions for both 2010 and 2011.

2010

Sept. 9 Purchased 1,000 shares of Packard, Inc., common stock for $80,000 cash. These shares represent 30% of Packard’s outstanding shares.

Oct. 2 Purchased 2,000 shares of AT&T common stock for $60,000 cash as a long term investment.

These shares represent less than a 1% ownership in AT&T. 17 Purchased as a long term investment 1,000 shares of Apple Computer common stock for $40,000 cash. These shares are less than 1% of Apple’s outstanding shares.

Nov. 1 Received $5,000 cash dividend from Packard.

30 Received $3,000 cash dividend from AT&T.

Dec. 15 Received $1,400 cash dividend from Apple.

31 Packard’s net income for this year is $70,000.

31 Fair values for the investments in equity securities are Packard, $84,000; AT&T, $48,000; and Apple Computer, $45,000.

31 For preparing financial statements, note the following post closing account balances: Common Stock, $500,000, and Retained Earnings, $350,000.

2011

Jan. 1 Sold Packard, Inc., shares for $108,000 cash.

May 30 Received $3,100 cash dividend from AT&T.

June 15 Received $1,600 cash dividend from Apple.

Aug. 17 Sold the AT&T stock for $52,000 cash.

19 Purchased 2,000 shares of Coca Cola common stock for $50,000 cash as a long term investment.

The stock represents less than a 5% ownership in Coca Cola.

Dec. 15 Received $1,800 cash dividend from Apple.

31 Fair values of the investments in equity securities are Apple, $39,000, and Coca Cola, $48,000.

31 For preparing financial statements, note the following post closing account balances: Common Stock, $500,000, and Retained Earnings, $410,000.

investments for any transactions that you determine are short term 648154

Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions involving both the short term and long term investments of Sophia Corp., all of which occurred during calendar year 2011. Use the account Short Term

Investments for any transactions that you determine are short term.

a. On February 15, paid $150,000 cash to purchase American General’s 120 day short term notes at par, which are dated February 15 and pay 10% interest (classified as held to maturity).

b. On March 22, bought 700 shares of Frain Industries common stock at $25 cash per share plus a $250 brokerage fee (classified as long term available for sale securities).

c. On June 15, received a check from American General in payment of the principal and 120 days’ interest on the notes purchased in transaction a.

d. On July 30, paid $50,000 cash to purchase MP3 Electronics’ 8% notes at par, dated July 30, 2011, and maturing on January 30, 2012 (classified as trading securities).

e. On September 1, received a $0.50 per share cash dividend on the Frain Industries common stock purchased in transaction b.

f. On October 8, sold 350 shares of Frain Industries common stock for $32 cash per share, less a $175 brokerage fee.

g. On October 30, received a check from MP3 Electronics for three months’ interest on the notes purchased in transaction d.

on december 31 2011 manhattan co held the following short term available for sale se 648155

On December 31, 2011, Manhattan Co. held the following short term available for sale securities.

 

Cost

Fair Value

Nintendo Cocommon stock

$68,900

$75,300

Atlantic bonds payable

24,500

22,800

Kellogg Conotes payable

50,000

47,200

McDonald’s Corpcommon stock

91,400

86,600

Manhattan had no short term investments prior to the current period. Prepare the December 31, 2011, yearend adjusting entry to record the fair value adjustment for these securities.

prepare berroa s december 31 2011 adjusting entry to reflect any necessary fair valu 648156

Berroa Co. began operations in 2010. The cost and fair values for its long term investments portfolio in available for sale securities are shown below. Prepare Berroa’s December 31, 2011, adjusting entry to reflect any necessary fair value adjustment for these investments.

 

Cost

Fair Value

December 31, 2010 

$79,483

$72,556

December 31, 2011 

85,120

90,271

razz corporation s common stock is currently selling on a stock exchange at 170 per 648051

Razz Corporation’s common stock is currently selling on a stock exchange at $170 per share, and its current balance sheet shows the following stockholders’ equity section.

Preferred stock—5% cumulative, $___ par value, 1,000 shares authorized, issued, and outstanding

$100,000

Common stock—$___ par value, 4,000 shares authorized, issued, and outstanding

160,000

Retained earnings

300,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$560,000

Required (Round per share amounts to cents.)

1. What is the current market value (price) of this corporation’s common stock?

2. What are the par values of the corporation’s preferred stock and its common stock?

3. If no dividends are in arrears, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock?

4. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock?

5. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears and the preferred stock is callable at $110 per share, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock?

6. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears and the board of directors declares cash dividends of $20,000, what total amount will be paid to the preferred and to the common shareholders? What is the amount of dividends per share for the common stock?

7. What are some factors that can contribute to a difference between the book value of common stock and its market value (price)?

baycore corp reports the following components of stockholders equity on december 31 648053

Baycore Corp. reports the following components of stockholders’ equity on December 31, 2011.

Common stock—$1 par value, 160,000 shares authorized, 100,000 shares issued and outstanding .

$100,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock .

700,000

Retained earnings .

1,080,000

Total stockholders’ equity .

$1,880,000

It completed the following transactions related to stockholders’ equity in year 2012.

Jan. 10 Purchased 20,000 shares of its own stock at $12 cash per share.

Mar. 2 Directors declared a $1.50 per share cash dividend payable on March 31 to the March 15 stockholders of record.

Mar. 31 Paid the dividend declared on March 2.

Nov. 11 Sold 12,000 of its treasury shares at $13 cash per share.

Nov. 25 Sold 8,000 of its treasury shares at $9.50 cash per share.

Dec. 1 Directors declared a $2.50 per share cash dividend payable on January 2 to the December 10 stockholders of record.

Dec. 31 Closed the $536,000 credit balance (from net income) in the Income Summary account to Retained Earnings.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record each of these transactions for 2012.

2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the company’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

at december 31 the end of intertec communication s third quarter the following stock 648054

At December 31, the end of Intertec Communication’s third quarter, the following stockholders’ equity accounts are reported.

Common stock, $10 par value

$480,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

192,000

Retained earnings

800,000

In the fourth quarter, the following entries related to its equity are recorded.

Jan. 17

Retained Earnings

48,000

 

 

Common Dividend Payable

 

48,000

Feb. 5

Common Dividend Payable

48,000

 

 

Cash

 

48,000

Feb. 28

Retained Earnings

126,000

 

 

Common Stock Dividend Distributable

 

60,000

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value,

 

 

 

Common Stock

 

66,000

Mar. 14

Common Stock Dividend Distributable

60,000

 

 

Common Stock, $10 Par Value

 

60,000

Mar. 25

Memo—Change the title of the common stock

 

 

 

account to reflect the new par value of $5

 

 

Mar. 31

Income Summary

360,000

 

 

Retained Earnings

 

360,000

Required

1. Explain the transaction(s) underlying each journal entry.

2. Complete the following table showing the equity account balances at each indicated date (include the balances from December 31).

Common stock

$______

$______

$______

$______

$______

$______

Common stock dividend

 

 

 

 

 

 

distributable

______

______

______

______

______

______

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock

______

______

______

______

______

______

Retained earnings

______

______

______

______

______

______

Total equity

$______

$______

$______

$______

$______

$______

the equity sections from jetta corporation s 2011 and 2012 balance sheets follow 648055

The equity sections from Jetta Corporation’s 2011 and 2012 balance sheets follow.

Stockholders’ Equity (December 31, 2011)

 

Common stock—$20 par value, 15,000 shares authorized,

 

8,500 shares issued and outstanding .

$170,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock .

30,000

Retained earnings .

135,000

Total stockholders’ equity .

$335,000

 

Stockholders’ Equity (December 31, 2012)

 

Common stock—$20 par value, 15,000 shares authorized,

 

9,500 shares issued, 500 shares in treasury

$190,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

52,000

Retained earnings ($20,000 restricted by treasury stock)

147,600

 

389,600

Less cost of treasury stock

(20,000)

Total stockholders’ equity

$369,600

The following transactions and events affected its equity during year 2012.

Feb. 15 Declared a $0.40 per share cash dividend, date of record five days later.

Mar. 2 Purchased treasury stock for cash.

May 15 Declared a $0.40 per share cash dividend, date of record five days later.

Aug. 15 Declared a $0.40 per share cash dividend, date of record five days later.

Oct. 4 Declared a 12.5% stock dividend when the stock’s market value is $42 per share.

Oct. 20 Issued the stock dividend that was declared on October 4.

Nov. 15 Declared a $0.40 per share cash dividend, date of record five days later.

Required

1. How many common shares are outstanding on each cash dividend date?

2. What is the total dollar amount for each of the four cash dividends?

3. What is the amount of the capitalization of retained earnings for the stock dividend?

4. What is the per share cost of the treasury stock purchased?

5. How much net income did the company earn during year 2012?

scotch company s common stock is currently selling on a stock exchange at 45 per sha 648056

Scotch Company’s common stock is currently selling on a stock exchange at $45 per share, and its current balance sheet shows the following stockholders’ equity section.

Preferred stock—8% cumulative, $___ par value, 1,500 shares authorized, issued, and outstanding .

$187,500

Common stock—$___ par value, 18,000 shares authorized, issued, and outstanding .

450,000

Retained earnings .

562,500

Total stockholders’ equity .

$1,200,000

Required (Round per share amounts to cents.)

1. What is the current market value (price) of this corporation’s common stock?

2. What are the par values of the corporation’s preferred stock and its common stock?

3. If no dividends are in arrears, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock? (Round per share values to the nearest cent.)

4. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock? (Round per share values to the nearest cent.)

5. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears and the preferred stock is callable at $140 per share, what are the book values per share of the preferred stock and the common stock? (Round per share values to the nearest cent.)

6. If two years’ preferred dividends are in arrears and the board of directors declares cash dividends of $50,000, what total amount will be paid to the preferred and to the common shareholders? What is the amount of dividends per share for the common stock? (Round per share values to the nearest cent.)

7. Discuss why the book value of common stock is not always a good estimate of its market value.

which option do you recommend santana adopt explain 648057

Santana Rey created Business Solutions on October 1, 2011. The company has been successful, and Santana plans to expand her business. She believes that an additional $86,000 is needed and is investigating three funding sources.

a. Santana’s sister Cicely is willing to invest $86,000 in the business as a common shareholder. Since Santana currently has about $129,000 invested in the business, Cicely’s investment will mean that Santana will maintain about 60% ownership, and Cicely will have 40% ownership of Business Solutions.

b. Santana’s uncle Marcello is willing to invest $86,000 in the business as a preferred shareholder. Marcello would purchase 860 shares of $100 par value, 7% preferred stock.

c. Santana’s banker is willing to lend her $86,000 on a 7%, 10 year note payable. She would make monthly payments of $1,000 per month for 10 years.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to reflect the initial $86,000 investment under each of the options (a), (b), and (c).

2. Evaluate the three proposals for expansion, providing the pros and cons of each option.

3. Which option do you recommend Santana adopt? Explain.

how many shares does research in motion hold in treasury stock if any as of february 648058

Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.

1. How many shares of common stock are issued and outstanding at February 27, 2010, and February 28, 2009? How do these numbers compare with the basic weighted average common shares outstanding at February 27, 2010, and February 28, 2009?

2. What is the book value of its entire common stock at February 27, 2010?

3. What is the total amount of cash dividends paid to common stockholders for the years ended February 27, 2010, and February 28, 2009?

4. Identify and compare basic EPS amounts across fiscal years 2010, 2009, and 2008. Identify and comment on any notable changes.

5. How many shares does Research In Motion hold in treasury stock, if any, as of February 27, 2010? As of February 28, 2009?

6. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010, from its the SEC’s EDGAR database. Has the number of common shares outstanding increased since that date? Has the company increased the total amount of cash dividends paid compared to the total amount for fiscal year 2010?

what are gianna s ethical responsibilities if any with respect to the information sh 648059

Gianna Tuck is an accountant for Post Pharmaceuticals. Her duties include tracking research and development spending in the new product development division. Over the course of the past six months, Gianna notices that a great deal of funds have been spent on a particular project for a new drug. She hears “through the grapevine” that the company is about to patent the drug and expects it to be a major advance in antibiotics. Gianna believes that this new drug will greatly improve company performance and will cause the company’s stock to increase in value. Gianna decides to purchase shares of Post in order to benefit from this expected increase.

Required

What are Gianna’s ethical responsibilities, if any, with respect to the information she has learned through her duties as an accountant for Post Pharmaceuticals? What are the implications to her planned purchase of Post shares?

this activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of accounting for treasur 648062

This activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of accounting for treasury stock.

1.Write a brief team statement (a) generalizing what happens to a corporation’s financial position when it engages in a stock “buyback” and (b) identifying reasons why a corporation would engage in this activity.

2. Assume that an entity acquires 100 shares of its $100 par value common stock at a cost of $134 cash per share. Discuss the entry to record this acquisition. Next, assign each team member to prepare one of the following entries (assume each entry applies to all shares): a. Reissue treasury shares at cost. b. Reissue treasury shares at $150 per share.

c. Reissue treasury shares at $120 per share; assume the paid in capital account from treasury shares has a $1,500 balance. d. Reissue treasury shares at $120 per share; assume the paid in capital account from treasury shares has a $1,000 balance. e. Reissue treasury shares at $120 per share; assume the paid in capital account from treasury shares has a zero balance.

3.  In sequence, each member is to present his/her entry to the team and explain the similarities and       differences between that entry and the previous entry.

if the new business is expected to earn 16 800 of after tax net income in the first 648063

Assume that Kelly Giard of Clean Air Lawn Care decides to launch a new retail chain to market electrical mowers. This chain, named Mow Green, requires $500,000 of start up capital. Kelly contributes $375,000 of personal assets in return for 15,000 shares of common stock, but he must raise another $125,000 in cash. There are two alternative plans for raising the additional cash. Plan A is to sell 3,750 shares of common stock to one or more investors for $125,000 cash. Plan B is to sell 1,250 shares of cumulative preferred stock to one or more investors for $125,000 cash (this preferred stock would have a $100 par value, an annual 8% dividend rate, and be issued at par).

1. If the new business is expected to earn $72,000 of after tax net income in the first year, what rate of return on beginning equity will Kelly earn under each alternative plan? Which plan will provide the higher expected return?

2. If the new business is expected to earn $16,800 of after tax net income in the first year, what rate of return on beginning equity will Kelly earn under each alternative plan? Which plan will provide the higher expected return? 3. Analyze and interpret the differences between the results for parts 1 and 2.

compare nokia s dividends per share with its eps is nokia paying out a large or smal 648064

1. Review 30 to 60 minutes of financial news programming on television. Take notes on companies that are catching analysts’ attention. You might hear reference to over and undervaluation of firms and to reports about PE ratios, dividend yields, and earnings per share. Be prepared to give a brief description to the class of your observations.

2. Financial information for Nokia Corporation follows.

Net income (in millions)

€ 260

Cash dividends declared (in millions)

€ 1,481

Cash dividends declared per share

€ 0.40

Number of shares outstanding (in millions)*

3,708

Equity applicable to shares (in millions)

€14,749

Required

1. Compute book value per share for Nokia.

2. Compute earnings per share (EPS) for Nokia.

3. Compare Nokia’s dividends per share with its EPS. Is Nokia paying out a large or small amount of its income as dividends? Explain.

when the contract rate is above the market rate do bonds sell at a premium or a disc 648065

1. A company issues $10,000 of 9%, 5 year bonds dated January 1, 2011, that mature on December 31, 2015, and pay interest semiannually on each June 30 and December 31. Prepare the entry to record this bond issuance and the first semiannual interest payment.

2. How do you compute the amount of interest a bond issuer pays in cash each year?

3. When the contract rate is above the market rate, do bonds sell at a premium or a discount? Do purchasers pay more or less than the par value of the bonds?

4. Are these bonds issued at a discount or a premium? Explain your answer.

5. What is the issuer’s journal entry to record the issuance of these bonds?

6. What is the amount of bond interest expense recorded at the first semiannual period using the straight line method?

7. Are these bonds issued at a discount or a premium? Explain your answer.

8. Using the straight line method to allocate bond interest expense, the issuer records the second interest payment (on December 31, 2011) with a debit to Premium on Bonds Payable in the amount of (a) $7,470, (b) $530, (c) $8,000, or (d) $400.

9. How are these bonds reported in the long term liability section of the issuer’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2011?

10. Six years ago, a company issued $500,000 of 6%, eight year bonds at a price of 95. The current carrying value is $493,750. The company decides to retire 50% of these bonds by buying them on the open market at a price of 1021⁄2. What is the amount of gain or loss on the retirement of these bonds?

11. Which of the following is true for an installment note requiring a series of equal total cash payments? (a) Payments consist of increasing interest and decreasing principal; (b) payments consist of changing amounts of principal but constant interest; or (c) payments consist of decreasing interest and increasing principal.

12. How is the interest portion of an installment note payment computed?

13. When a borrower records an interest payment on an installment note, how are the balance sheet and income statement affected?

14. A company enters into an agreement to make four annual year end payments of $1,000 each, starting one year from now. The annual interest rate is 8%. The present value of these four payments is (a) $2,923, (b) $2,940, or (c) $3,312.

15. Suppose a company has an option to pay either (a) $10,000 after one year or (b) $5,000 after six months and another $5,000 after one year. Which choice has the lower present value?

16. On May 1, a company sells 9% bonds with a $500,000 par value that pay semiannual interest on each January 1 and July 1. The bonds are sold at par plus interest accrued since January 1. The issuer records the first semiannual interest payment on July 1 with (a) a debit to Interest Payable for $15,000, (b) a debit to Bond Interest Expense for $22,500, or (c) a credit to Interest Payable for $7,500.

on january 1 2011 the company obtained the money in two ways 648066

Water Sports Company (WSC) patented and successfully test marketed a new product. To expand its ability to produce and market the new product, WSC needs to raise $800,000 of financing. On January 1, 2011, the company obtained the money in two ways:

a. WSC signed a $400,000, 10% installment note to be repaid with five equal annual installments to be made on December 31 of 2011 through 2015.

b. WSC issued five year bonds with a par value of $400,000. The bonds have a 12% annual contract rate and pay interest on June 30 and December 31. The bonds’ annual market rate is 10% as of January 1, 2011.

Required

1. For the installment note, (a) compute the size of each annual payment, (b) prepare an amortization table such as Exhibit 14.14, and (c) prepare the journal entry for the first payment.

2. For the bonds, (a) compute their issue price; (b) prepare the January 1, 2011, journal entry to record their issuance; (c) prepare an amortization table using the straight line method; (d) prepare the June 30, 2011, journal entry to record the first interest payment; and (e) prepare a journal entry to record retiring the bonds at a $416,000 call price on January 1, 2013.

3. Redo parts 2(c), 2(d), and 2(e) assuming the bonds are amortized using the effective interest method.

bellvue company issues 10 five year bonds on december 31 2010 with a par value of 10 648074

Bellvue Company issues 10%, five year bonds, on December 31, 2010, with a par value of $100,000 and semiannual interest payments. Use the following straight line bond amortization table and prepare journal entries to record (a) the issuance of bonds on December 31, 2010; (b) the first interest payment on June 30, 2011; and (c) the second interest payment on December 31, 2011.

Semiannual Period End

Unamortized Discount

Carrying Value

(0)

12/31/2010

$7,360

$92,640

(1)

6/30/2011

6,624

93,376

(2)

12/31/2011

5,888

94,112

on january 1 2011 the 1 000 000 par value bonds of gruden company with a carrying va 648075

1. On July 1, 2011, Jackson Company exercises a $5,000 call option (plus par value) on its outstanding bonds that have a carrying value of $208,000 and par value of $200,000. The company exercises the call option after the semiannual interest is paid on June 30, 2011. Record the entry to retire the bonds.

2. On January 1, 2011, the $1,000,000 par value bonds of Gruden Company with a carrying value of $1,000,000 are converted to 500,000 shares of $0.50 par value common stock. Record the entry for the conversion of the bonds.

3. Valdez Company borrows $170,000 cash from a bank and in return signs an installment note for five annual payments of equal amount, with the first payment due one year after the note is signed. Use Table B.3 in Appendix B to compute the amount of the annual payment for each of the following annual market rates: (a) 4%, (b) 8%, and (c) 12%.

compute the debt to equity ratio for each of the following companies which company a 648076

1. Compute the debt to equity ratio for each of the following companies. Which company appears to have a riskier financing structure? Explain.

 

Canal Company

Sears Comapany

Total liabilities

$492,000

$ 384,000

Total equity 

656,000

1,200,000

2. Kemper Company plans to issue 6% bonds on January 1, 2011, with a par value of $1,000,000. The company sells $900,000 of the bonds on January 1, 2011. The remaining $100,000 sells at par on March 1, 2011. The bonds pay interest semiannually as of June 30 and December 31. Record the entry for the March 1 cash sale of bonds.

3. Lauren Wright, an employee of ETrain.com, leases a car at O’Hare airport for a three day business trip.

The rental cost is $350. Prepare the entry by ETrain.com to record Lauren’s short term car lease cost.

4. Juicyfruit, Inc., signs a five year lease for office equipment with Office Solutions. The present value of the lease payments is $20,859. Prepare the journal entry that Juicyfruit records at the inception of this capital lease.

 

what is the par value of the 4 625 bond issuance what is its book carrying value 648077

Vodafone Group Plc reports the following information among its bonds payable as of March 31, 2009 (pounds in millions).

Financial Long Term Liabilities Measured at Amortised Cost

(£ millions)

Nominal (par) Value

Carrying Value

Fair Value

4.625% (US dollar 500 million) bond

£350

£392

£315

due July 2018

   

a. What is the par value of the 4.625% bond issuance? What is its book (carrying) value?

b. Was the 4.625% bond sold at a discount or a premium? Explain.

assuming that the 4 625 bonds remain outstanding until maturity at what market price 648078

1. Vodafone Group Plc reports the following information among its bonds payable as of March 31, 2009 (pounds in millions).

Financial Long Term Liabilities Measured at Amortised Cost

(£ millions)

Nominal (par) Value

Carrying Value

Fair Value

4.625% (US dollar 500 million) bond

£350

£392

£315

due July 2018

   

a. What is the par value of the 4.625% bond issuance? What is its book (carrying) value?

b. Was the 4.625% bond sold at a discount or a premium? Explain.

2. Refer to the information in QS 14 14 for Vodafone Group Plc. The following price quotes (from Yahoo! Finance Bond Center) relate to its bonds payable as of late 2009. For example, the price quote indicates that the 4.625% bonds have a market price of 98.0 (98.0% of par value), resulting in a yield to maturity of 4.899%.

Price

Contract Rate (coupon)

Maturity Date

Market Rate (YTM)

98.0

4.63%

15 Jul 18

4.90%

a. Assuming that the 4.625% bonds were originally issued at par value, what does the market price reveal about interest rate changes since bond issuance? (Assume that Vodafone’s credit rating has remained the same.)

b. Does the change in market rates since the issuance of these bonds affect the amount of interest expense reported on Vodafone’s income statement? Explain.

c. How much cash would Vodafone need to pay to repurchase the 4.625% bonds at the quoted market price of 98.0? (Assume no interest is owed when the bonds are repurchased.)

d. Assuming that the 4.625% bonds remain outstanding until maturity, at what market price will the bonds sell on the due date in 2018?

use the following straight line bond amortization table and prepare journal entries 648082

Jobbs Company issues 10%, five year bonds, on December 31, 2010, with a par value of $100,000 and semiannual interest payments. Use the following straight line bond amortization table and prepare journal entries to record

(a) the issuance of bonds on December 31, 2010;

(b) the first interest payment on June 30, 2011;

(c) the second interest payment on December 31, 2011.

Semiannual Period End

Unamortized Premium

Carrying Value

(0)

12/31/2010

$8,111

$108,111

(1)

6/30/2011

7,300

107,300

(2)

12/31/2011

6,489

106,489

matchbox company issues 6 four year bonds on december 31 2011 with a par value of 10 648083

Matchbox Company issues 6%, four year bonds, on December 31, 2011, with a par value of $100,000 and semiannual interest payments. Use the following straight line bond amortization table and prepare journal entries to record

(a) the issuance of bonds on December 31, 2011;

(b) the first interest payment on June 30, 2012;

(c) the second interest payment on December 31, 2012.

Semiannual Period End

Unamortized Premium

Carrying Value

(0)

12/31/2010

$6,733

$93,267

(1)

6/30/2011

5,891

94,109

(2)

12/31/2011

5,049

94,951

this activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of accounting for partner 648007

This activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of accounting for partnerships.

Required

1. Assume that Baker, Warner, and Rice form the BWR Partnership by making capital contributions of $200,000, $300,000, and $500,000, respectively. BWR predicts annual partnership net income of $600,000. The partners are considering various plans for sharing income and loss. Assign a different team member to compute how the projected $600,000 income would be shared under each of the following separate plans:

a. Shared equally.

b. In the ratio of the partners’ initial capital investments.

c. Salary allowances of $50,000 to Baker, $60,000 to Warner, and $70,000 to Rice, with the remaining balance shared equally.

d. Interest allowances of 10% on the partners’ initial capital investments, with the remaining balance shared equally.

2. In sequence, each member is to present his or her income sharing calculations with the team.

3. As a team, identify and discuss at least one other possible way that income could be shared.

barton corporation began operations on january 1 2010 the following transactions rel 648015

Barton Corporation began operations on January 1, 2010. The following transactions relating to stockholders’ equity occurred in the first two years of the company’s operations.

2010

Jan. 1 Authorized the issuance of 2 million shares of $5 par value common stock and 100,000 shares of $100 par value, 10% cumulative, preferred stock.

Jan. 2 Issued 200,000 shares of common stock for $12 cash per share.

Jan. 3 Issued 100,000 shares of common stock in exchange for a building valued at $820,000 and merchandise inventory valued at $380,000.

Jan. 4 Paid $10,000 cash to the company’s founders for organization activities.

Jan. 5 Issued 12,000 shares of preferred stock for $110 cash per share.

2011

June 4 Issued 100,000 shares of common stock for $15 cash per share.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.

2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet as of December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, based on these transactions.

3. Prepare a table showing dividend allocations and dividends per share for 2010 and 2011 assuming Barton declares the following cash dividends: 2010, $50,000, and 2011, $300,000.

4. Prepare the January 2, 2010, journal entry for Barton’s issuance of 200,000 shares of common stock for $12 cash per share assuming

a. Common stock is no par stock without a stated value.

b. Common stock is no par stock with a stated value of $10 per share.

precision company began year 2011 with the following balances in its stockholders eq 648016

Precision Company began year 2011 with the following balances in its stockholders’ equity accounts.

Common stock—$10 par, 500,000 shares authorized, 200,000 shares issued and outstanding

$2,000,000

Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock  

1,000,000

Retained earnings

5,000,000

Total

$8,000,000

All outstanding common stock was issued for $15 per share when the company was created. Prepare journal entries to account for the following transactions during year 2011.

Jan. 10 The board declared a $0.10 cash dividend per share to shareholders of record Jan. 28.

Feb. 15 Paid the cash dividend declared on January 10.

Mar. 31 Declared a 20% stock dividend. The market value of the stock is $18 per share.

May 1 Distributed the stock dividend declared on March 31.

July 1 Purchased 30,000 shares of treasury stock at $20 per share.

Sept. 1 Sold 20,000 treasury shares at $26 cash per share.

Dec. 1 Sold the remaining 10,000 shares of treasury stock at $7 cash per share.

the stockholders equity section of zacman company s balance sheet as of april 1 foll 648026

The stockholders’ equity section of Zacman Company’s balance sheet as of April 1 follows. On April 2, Zacman declares and distributes a 10% stock dividend. The stock’s per share market value on April 2 is $25 (prior to the dividend). Prepare the stockholders’ equity section immediately after the stock dividend.

Common stock—$5 par value, 375,000 shares authorized, 150,000 shares issued and outstanding  

$ 750,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock  

352,500

Retained earnings

633,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$1,735,500

this mistake had a material effect on the amount of income in that year how should t 648027

Answer the following questions related to a company’s activities for the current year:

1. After using an expected useful life of 20 years and no salvage value to depreciate its office equipment over the preceding 15 years, the company decided early this year that the equipment will last only two more years. How should the effects of this decision be reported in the current year financial statements?

2. A review of the notes payable files discovers that two years ago the company reported the entire amount of a payment (principal and interest) on an installment note payable as interest expense. This mistake had a material effect on the amount of income in that year. How should the correction be reported in the current year financial statements?

the stockholders equity section of axel company s balance sheet follows the preferre 648030

The stockholders’ equity section of Axel Company’s balance sheet follows. The preferred stock’s call price is $30. Determine the book value per share of the common stock.

Preferred stock—5% cumulative, $10 par value, 10,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding  

$100,000

Common stock—$5 par value, 100,000 shares authorized, 75,000 shares issued and outstanding .

375,000

Retained earnings  

445,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$920,000

prepare its journal entry using its account titles to record the issuance of capital 648031

Air France KLM reports the following equity information for its fiscal year ended March 31, 2009 (euros in millions). Prepare its journal entry, using its account titles, to record the issuance of capital stock assuming that its entire par value stock was issued on March 31, 2009, for cash.

March 31

2009

Issued capital  

€2,552

Additional paid in capital

765

match each description 1 through 6 with the characteristic of preferred stock that i 648034

1. Soku Company issues 36,000 shares of $9 par value common stock in exchange for land and a building. The land is valued at $225,000 and the building at $360,000. Prepare the journal entry to record issuance of the stock in exchange for the land and building.

2. Match each description 1 through 6 with the characteristic of preferred stock that it best describes by writing the letter of that characteristic in the blank next to each description.

A. Cumulative

B. Noncumulative

C. Convertible

D. Callable

E. Nonparticipating

F. Participating

1. Holders of the stock lose any dividends that are not declared in the current year.

2. The issuing corporation can retire the stock by paying a prespecified price.

3. Holders of the stock can receive dividends exceeding the stated rate under certain conditions.

4. Holders of the stock are not entitled to receive dividends in excess of the stated rate.

5. Holders of this stock can exchange it for shares of common stock.

6. Holders of the stock are entitled to receive current and all past dividends before common stockholders receive any dividends.

explain the difference if any to a stockholder from receiving new shares distributed 648035

On June 30, 2011, Quinn Corporation’s common stock is priced at $31 per share before any stock dividend or split, and the stockholders’ equity section of its balance sheet appears as follows.

Common stock—$10 par value, 60,000 shares authorized, 25,000 shares issued and outstanding

$250,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

100,000

Retained earnings

330,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$680,000

1. Assume that the company declares and immediately distributes a 100% stock dividend. This event is recorded by capitalizing retained earnings equal to the stock’s par value. Answer these questions about stockholders’ equity as it exists after issuing the new shares.

a. What is the retained earnings balance?

b. What is the amount of total stockholders’ equity?

c. How many shares are outstanding?

2. Assume that the company implements a 2 for 1 stock split instead of the stock dividend in part 1.

Answer these questions about stockholders’ equity as it exists after issuing the new shares.

a. What is the retained earnings balance?

b. What is the amount of total stockholders’ equity?

c. How many shares are outstanding?

3. Explain the difference, if any, to a stockholder from receiving new shares distributed under a large stock dividend versus a stock split.

the stockholders equity of whiz com company at the beginning of the day on february 648036

The stockholders’ equity of Whiz.com Company at the beginning of the day on February 5 follows.

Common stock—$25 par value, 150,000 shares authorized, 60,000 shares issued and outstanding  

$1,500,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock  

525,000

Retained earnings

675,000

Total stockholders’ equity  

$2,700,000

On February 5, the directors declare a 20% stock dividend distributable on February 28 to the February 15 stockholders of record. The stock’s market value is $40 per share on February 5 before the stock dividend.

The stock’s market value is $34 per share on February 28.

1. Prepare entries to record both the dividend declaration and its distribution.

2. One stockholder owned 750 shares on February 5 before the dividend. Compute the book value per share and total book value of this stockholder’s shares immediately before and after the stock dividend of February 5.

3. Compute the total market value of the investor’s shares in part 2 as of February 5 and February 28.

determine the amount of dividends paid each year to each of the two classes of stock 648037

Wade’s outstanding stock consists of 40,000 shares of noncumulative 7.5% preferred stock with a $10 par value and also 100,000 shares of common stock with a $1 par value. During its first four years of operation, the corporation declared and paid the following total cash dividends.

2011

$ 10,000

2012

24,000

2013

100,000

2014

 196,000

Determine the amount of dividends paid each year to each of the two classes of stockholders: preferred and common. Also compute the total dividends paid to each class for the four years combined.

on october 10 the stockholders equity of noble systems appears as follows 648038

On October 10, the stockholders’ equity of Noble Systems appears as follows.

Common stock—$10 par value, 36,000 shares authorized, issued, and outstanding                  

$360,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock      

108,000

Retained earnings                                  

432,000

Total stockholders’ equity                           

$900,000

1. Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for Noble Systems.

a. Purchased 4,500 shares of its own common stock at $30 per share on October 11.

b. Sold 1,200 treasury shares on November 1 for $36 cash per share.

c. Sold all remaining treasury shares on November 25 for $25 cash per share.

2. Explain how the company’s equity section changes after the October 11 treasury stock purchase, and prepare the revised equity section of its balance sheet at that date.

the equity section of webster corporation s balance sheet shows the following 648044

The equity section of Webster Corporation’s balance sheet shows the following.

Preferred stock—5% cumulative, $10 par value, $15 call price, 10,000 shares issued and outstanding .

$100,000

Common stock—$10 par value, 55,000 shares issued and outstanding .

550,000

Retained earnings .

267,500

Total stockholders’ equity .

$917,500

Determine the book value per share of the preferred and common stock under two separate situations.

1. No preferred dividends are in arrears.

2. Three years of preferred dividends are in arrears.

unilever group reports the following equity information for the years ended december 648045

Unilever Group reports the following equity information for the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2008 (euros in millions).

December 31

2008

2007

Share capital

€ 484

€ 484

Share premium

121

153

Other reserves

(6,469)

(3,412)

Retained profit

15,812

15,162

Shareholders’ equity

€ 9,948

€12,387

1. For each of the three account titles share capital, share premium, and retained profit, match it with the usual account title applied under U.S. GAAP from the following options:

a. Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

b. Retained earnings

c. Common stock, par value

2. Prepare Unilever’s journal entry, using its account titles, to record the issuance of capital stock assuming that its entire par value stock was issued on December 31, 2007, for cash.

3. What were Unilever’s 2008 dividends assuming that only dividends and income impacted retained profit for 2008 and that its 2008 income totaled €2,692?

kroll corporation reports the following components of stockholders equity on decembe 648046

Kroll Corporation reports the following components of stockholders’ equity on December 31, 2011.

Common stock—$25 par value, 40,000 shares authorized, 30,000 shares issued and outstanding

$ 750,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

50,000

Retained earnings

260,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$1,060,000

In year 2012, the following transactions affected its stockholders’ equity accounts.

Jan. 2 Purchased 2,000 shares of its own stock at $25 cash per share.

Jan. 7 Directors declared a $2 per share cash dividend payable on Feb. 28 to the Feb. 9 stockholders of record.

Feb. 28 Paid the dividend declared on January 7.

July 9 Sold 500 of its treasury shares at $30 cash per share.

Aug. 27 Sold 1,500 of its treasury shares at $23 cash per share.

Sept. 9 Directors declared a $2 per share cash dividend payable on October 22 to the September 23 stockholders of record.

Oct. 22 Paid the dividend declared on September 9.

Dec. 31 Closed the $8,000 credit balance (from net income) in the Income Summary account to Retained Earnings.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record each of these transactions for 2012.

2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the company’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

what is the book value per share of the common stock at year end if total paid in ca 648047

a.

Cash

150,000

 

 

Common Stock, $25 Par Value

 

125,000

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock

 

25,000

b.

Organization Expenses

75,000

 

 

Common Stock, $25 Par Value

 

62,500

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock

 

12,500

c.

Cash

21,500

 

 

Accounts Receivable

7,500

 

 

Building

30,000

 

 

Notes Payable

 

19,000

 

Common Stock, $25 Par Value

 

25,000

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock

 

15,000

    d.

Cash

60,000

 

 

Common Stock, $25 Par Value

 

37,500

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock

 

22,500

Required

1. Explain the transaction(s) underlying each journal entry (a) through (d).

2. How many shares of common stock are outstanding at year end?

3. What is the amount of minimum legal capital (based on par value) at year end?

4. What is the total paid in capital at year end?

5. What is the book value per share of the common stock at year end if total paid in capital plus retained earnings equals $347,500?

context corporation reports the following components of stockholders equity on decem 648048

Context Corporation reports the following components of stockholders’ equity on December 31, 2011.

Common stock—$10 par value, 50,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding

$200,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

30,000

Retained earnings

135,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$365,000

In year 2012, the following transactions affected its stockholders’ equity accounts.

Jan. 1 Purchased 2,000 shares of its own stock at $20 cash per share.

Jan. 5 Directors declared a $2 per share cash dividend payable on Feb. 28 to the Feb. 5 stockholders of record.

Feb. 28 Paid the dividend declared on January 5.

July 6 Sold 750 of its treasury shares at $24 cash per share.

Aug. 22 Sold 1,250 of its treasury shares at $17 cash per share.

Sept. 5 Directors declared a $2 per share cash dividend payable on October 28 to the September 25 stockholders of record.

Oct. 28 Paid the dividend declared on September 5.

Dec. 31 Closed the $194,000 credit balance (from net income) in the Income Summary account to Retained Earnings.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record each of these transactions for 2012.

2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the company’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

at september 30 the end of excel company s third quarter the following stockholders 648049

At September 30, the end of Excel Company’s third quarter, the following stockholders’ equity accounts are reported.

Common stock, $12 par value

$720,000

Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock

180,000

Retained earnings

640,000

In the fourth quarter, the following entries related to its equity are recorded.

Oct. 2

Retained Earnings

120,000

 

 

Common Dividend Payable

 

120,000

Oct. 25

Common Dividend Payable

120,000

 

 

Cash

 

120,000

Oct. 31

Retained Earnings

150,000

 

 

Common Stock Dividend Distributable

 

72,000

 

Paid In Capital in Excess of

 

 

 

Par Value, Common Stock

 

78,000

Nov. 5

Common Stock Dividend Distributable

72,000

 

 

Common Stock, $12 Par Value

 

72,000

Dec. 1

Memo—Change the title of the common stock

 

 

 

account to reflect the new par value of $4

 

 

Dec. 31

Income Summary

420,000

 

 

Retained Earnings

 

420,000

         

Required

1. Explain the transaction(s) underlying each journal entry.

2. Complete the following table showing the equity account balances at each indicated date (include the balances from September 30).

 

Oct. 2

Oct. 25

Oct. 31

Nov. 5

Dec. 1

Dec. 31

Common stock

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

Common stock dividend

 

 

 

 

 

 

distributable

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

Paid in capital in

 

 

 

 

 

 

excess of par, common stock

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

Retained earnings

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

Total equity

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

$_____

goering zarcus and schmit are partners and share income and loss in a 3 2 5 ratio 647994

Part 1. Goering, Zarcus, and Schmit are partners and share income and loss in a 3:2:5 ratio. The partnership’s capital balances are as follows: Goering, $84,000; Zarcus, $69,000; and Schmit, $147,000. Zarcus decides to withdraw from the partnership, and the partners agree to not have the assets revalued upon Zarcus’s retirement. Prepare journal entries to record Zarcus’s February 1 withdrawal from the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Zarcus

(a) sells her interest to Getz for $80,000 after Goering and Schmit approve the entry of Getz as a partner;

(b) gives her interest to a son in law, Swanson, and thereafter Goering and Schmit accept Swanson as a partner;

(c) is paid $69,000 in partnership cash for her equity;

(d) is paid $107,000 in partnership cash for her equity; and (e) is paid $15,000 in partnership cash plus equipment recorded on the partnership books at $35,000 less its accumulated depreciation of $11,600.

Part 2. Assume that Zarcus does not retire from the partnership described in Part 1. Instead, Ford is admitted to the partnership on February 1 with a 25% equity. Prepare journal entries to record Ford’s entry into the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Ford invests

(a) $100,000;

(b) $74,000; and

(c) $131,000.

quick drake and sage share income and loss in a 3 2 1 ratio the partners have decide 647995

Quick, Drake, and Sage share income and loss in a 3:2:1 ratio. The partners have decided to liquidate their partnership. On the day of liquidation their balance sheet appears as follows.

QUICK, DRAKE,AND SAGE

Balance Sheet

May 31

Assets

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

Cash             

$ 90,400

Accounts payable               

$122,750

Inventory          

268,600

Quick, Capital                  

46,500

 

 

Drake, Capital                  

106,250

Total assets        

$359,000

Sage, Capital                    

83,500

 

 

Total liabilities and equity         

 $359,000

Required

Prepare journal entries for (a) the sale of inventory, (b) the allocation of its gain or loss, (c) the payment of liabilities at book value, and (d) the distribution of cash in each of the following separate cases: Inventory is sold for (1) $300,000; (2) $250,000; (3) $160,000 and any partners with capital deficits pay in the amount of their deficits; and (4) $125,000 and the partners have no assets other than those invested in the partnership. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

 

maria karto and j r black are forming a partnership to which karto will devote one t 647997

Maria Karto and J.R. Black are forming a partnership to which Karto will devote one third time and Black will devote full time. They have discussed the following alternative plans for sharing income and loss:

(a) in the ratio of their initial capital investments, which they have agreed will be $52,000 for Karto and $78,000 for Black;

(b) in proportion to the time devoted to the business;

(c) a salary allowance of $2,000 per month to Black and the balance in accordance with the ratio of their initial capital investments; or

(d) a salary allowance of $2,000 per month to Black, 10% interest on their initial capital investments, and the balance shared equally. The partners expect the business to perform as follows: year 1, $18,000 net loss; year 2, $38,000 net income; and year 3, $94,000 net income.

Required

Prepare three tables with the following column headings.

 

Year

Income (Loss)

 

   

Sharing Plan

Calculations

Karto

Black

       
       

Complete the tables, one for each of the first three years, by showing how to allocate partnership income or loss to the partners under each of the four plans being considered. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

assume that gibbs does not retire from the partnership described in part 1 instead b 647999

Part 1. Gibbs, Mier, and Hill are partners and share income and loss in a 5:1:4 ratio. The partnership’s capital balances are as follows: Gibbs, $303,000; Mier, $74,000; and Hill, $223,000. Gibbs decides to withdraw from the partnership, and the partners agree not to have the assets revalued upon Gibbs’s retirement. Prepare journal entries to record Gibbs’s April 30 withdrawal from the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Gibbs (a) sells her interest to Brady for $250,000 after Mier and Hill approve the entry of Brady as a partner; (b) gives her interest to a daughter in law, Cannon, and thereafter Mier and Hill accept Cannon as a partner; (c) is paid $303,000 in partnership cash for her equity; (d) is paid $175,000 in partnership cash for her equity; and (e) is paid $100,000 in partnership cash plus manufacturing equipment recorded on the partnership books at $269,000 less its accumulated depreciation of $168,000.

Part 2. Assume that Gibbs does not retire from the partnership described in Part 1. Instead, Brise is admitted to the partnership on April 30 with a 20% equity. Prepare journal entries to record the entry of Brise under each of the following separate assumptions: Brise invests (a) $150,000; (b) $98,000; and (c) $213,000.

asure ramirez and soney who share income and loss in a 2 1 2 ratio plan to liquidate 648000

Asure, Ramirez, and Soney, who share income and loss in a 2:1:2 ratio, plan to liquidate their partnership. At liquidation, their balance sheet appears as follows.

ASURE, RAMIREZ,AND SONEY

Balance Sheet

January 18

Assets

 

Liabilities and Equity

 

Cash             

$174,300

Accounts payable               

$171,300

Equipment         

308,600

Asure, Capital                  

150,200

 

 

Ramirez, Capital                

97,900

Total assets        

$482,900

Soney, Capital                         

63,500 $482,900

 

 

Total liabilities and equity

 

Required

Prepare journal entries for (a) the sale of equipment, (b) the allocation of its gain or loss, (c) the payment of liabilities at book value, and (d) the distribution of cash in each of the following separate cases: Equipment is sold for (1) $325,000; (2) $265,000; (3) $100,000 and any partners with capital deficits pay in the amount of their deficits; and (4) $75,000 and the partners have no assets other than those invested in the partnership. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

she envisions the new partner taking the lead in generating sales of both services a 648001

At the start of 2012, Santana Rey is considering adding a partner to her business. She envisions the new partner taking the lead in generating sales of both services and merchandise for Business Solutions. S. Rey’s equity in Business Solutions as of January 1, 2012, is reflected in the following capital balance.

S. Rey, Capital  

$80,360

Required

1. S. Rey is evaluating whether the prospective partner should be an equal partner with respect to capital investment and profit sharing (1:1) or whether the agreement should be 4:1 with Rey retaining fourfifths interest with rights to four fifths of the net income or loss. What factors should she consider in deciding which partnership agreement to offer?

2. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) necessary to admit a new partner to Business Solutions through the purchase of a partnership interest for each of the following two separate cases: (a) 1:1 sharing agreement and (b) 4:1 sharing agreement.

3. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) required to admit a new partner if the new partner invests cash of $20,090.

4. After posting the entry in part 3, what would be the new partner’s equity percentage?

compute the income allocation for the current month using clark s proposed agreement 648004

Doctors Maben, Orlando, and Clark have been in a group practice for several years. Maben and Orlando are family practice physicians, and Clark is a general surgeon. Clark receives many referrals for surgery from his family practice partners. Upon the partnership’s original formation, the three doctors agreed to a two part formula to share income. Every month each doctor receives a salary allowance of $3,000. Additional income is divided according to a percent of patient charges the doctors generate for the month. In the current month, Maben generated 10% of the billings, Orlando 30%, and Clark 60%. The group’s income for this month is $50,000. Clark has expressed dissatisfaction with the income sharing formula and asks that income be split entirely on patient charge percents.

Required

1. Compute the income allocation for the current month using the original agreement.

2. Compute the income allocation for the current month using Clark’s proposed agreement.

3. Identify the ethical components of this partnership decision for the doctors.

assume that your team is in business and you must borrow 6 000 cash for short term n 647968

Assume that your team is in business and you must borrow $6,000 cash for short term needs.

You have been shopping banks for a loan, and you have the following two options.

A. Sign a $6,000, 90 day, 10% interest bearing note dated June 1.

B. Sign a $6,000, 120 day, 8% interest bearing note dated June 1.

Required

1. Discuss these two options and determine the best choice. Ensure that all teammates concur with the decision and understand the rationale.

2. Each member of the team is to prepare one of the following journal entries.

a. Option A — at date of issuance.

b. Option B — at date of issuance.

c. Option A — at maturity date.

d. Option B — at maturity date.

3. In rotation, each member is to explain the entry he or she prepared in part 2 to the team. Ensure that all team members concur with and understand the entries.

4. Assume that the funds are borrowed on December 1 (instead of June 1) and your business operates on a calendar year reporting period. Each member of the team is to prepare one of the following entries.

a. Option A — the year end adjustment.

b. Option B — the year end adjustment.

c. Option A — at maturity date.

d. Option B — at maturity date.

5. In rotation, each member is to explain the entry he or she prepared in part 4 to the team. Ensure that all team members concur with and understand the entries.

assume that these young entrepreneurs are considering expanding their business to op 647969

Review the chapter’s opening feature about Matt and Bryan Walls, and their start up company, SnorgTees. Assume that these young entrepreneurs are considering expanding their business to open an outlet in Europe. Assume their current income statement is as follows.

SNORGTEES

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31,2011

Sales

$1,000,000

Cost of goods sold (30%)

300,000

Gross profit

700,000

Operating expenses (25%)        

250,000

Net income                    

$ 450,000

SnorgTees currently has no interest bearing debt. If it expands to open a European location, it will require a $300,000 loan. SnorgTees has found a bank that will loan it the money on a 7% note payable. The company believes that, at least for the first few years, sales at its European location will be $250,000, and that all expenses (including cost of goods sold) will follow the same patterns as its current locations.

Required

1. Prepare an income statement (showing three separate columns for current operations, European, and total) for SnorgTees assuming that it borrows the funds and expands to Europe. Annual revenues for current operations are expected to remain at $1,000,000.

2. Compute SnorgTees’ times interest earned under the expansion assumptions in part 1.

3. Assume sales at its European location are $400,000. Prepare an income statement (with columns for current operations, European, and total) for the company and compute times interest earned.

4. Assume sales at its European location are $100,000. Prepare an income statement (with columns for current operations, European, and total) for the company and compute times interest earned.

5. Comment on your results from parts 1 through 4.

check your phone book or the social security administration website www ssa gov to l 647970

Check your phone book or the Social Security Administration Website (www.ssa.gov) to locate the Social Security office near you. Visit the office to request a personal earnings and estimate form. Fill out the form and mail according to the instructions. You will receive a statement from the Social Security Administration regarding your earnings history and future Social Security benefits you can receive. (Formerly the request could be made online. The online service has been discontinued and is now under review by the Social Security Administration due to security concerns.) It is good to request an earnings and benefit statement every 5 to 10 years to make sure you have received credit for all wages earned and for which you and your employer have paid taxes into the system.

what does the term unlimited liability mean when applied to a general partnership 647971

1. A partnership is terminated in the event

(a) a partnership agreement is not in writing,

(b) a partner dies,

(c) a partner exercises mutual agency.

2. What does the term unlimited liability mean when applied to a general partnership?

3. Which of the following forms of organization do not provide limited liability to all of its owners?

(a) S corporation,

(b) limited liability company,

(c) limited partnership.

4. Denzel and Shantell form a partnership by contributing $70,000 and $35,000, respectively. They agree to an interest allowance equal to 10% of each partner’s capital balance at the beginning of the year, with the remaining income shared equally. Allocate first year income of $40,000 to each partner.

compute the capital account balance of each partner after the liquidation of assets 647981

The Red, White & Blue partnership was begun with investments by the partners as follows: Red, $175,000; White, $220,000; and Blue, $205,000. The operations did not go well, and the partners eventually decided to liquidate the partnership, sharing all losses equally. On August 31, after all assets were converted to cash and all creditors were paid, only $60,000 in partnership cash remained.

1. Compute the capital account balance of each partner after the liquidation of assets and the payment of creditors.

2. Assume that any partner with a deficit agrees to pay cash to the partnership to cover the deficit. Present the journal entries on August 31 to record (a) the cash receipt from the deficient partner(s) and (b) the final disbursement of cash to the partners.

3. Assume that any partner with a deficit is not able to reimburse the partnership. Present journal entries (a) to transfer the deficit of any deficient partners to the other partners and (b) to record the final disbursement of cash to the partners.

ross jenks and keim are recent college graduates in computer science they want to st 647983

For each of the following separate cases, recommend a form of business organization. With each recommendation, explain how business income would be taxed if the owners adopt the form of organization recommended. Also list several advantages that the owners will enjoy from the form of business organization that you recommend.

a. Milan has been out of school for about six years and has become quite knowledgeable about the residential real estate market. He would like to organize a company that buys and sells real estate. Milan believes he has the expertise to manage the company but needs funds to invest in residential property.

b. Dr. Langholz and Dr. Clark are recent graduates from medical residency programs. Both are family practice physicians and would like to open a clinic in an underserved rural area. Although neither has any funds to bring to the new venture, an investor has expressed interest in making a loan to provide start up funds for their practice.

c. Ross, Jenks and Keim are recent college graduates in computer science. They want to start a Website development company. They all have college debts and currently do not own any substantial computer equipment needed to get the company started.

next to the following list of eight characteristics of business organizations enter 647984

1. Next to the following list of eight characteristics of business organizations, enter a brief description of how each characteristic applies to general partnerships.

Characteristic

Application to General Partnerships

1

Ease of formation                     

2

Transferability of ownership             

3

Ability to raise large amounts of capital   

4

Life                                  

5

Owners’ liability                       

6

Legal status                          

7

Tax status of income                  

8

Owners’ authority                     

2. Anita Kroll and Aaron Rogers organize a partnership on January 1. Kroll’s initial net investment is $60,000, consisting of cash ($14,000), equipment ($66,000), and a note payable reflecting a bank loan for the new business ($20,000). Rogers’s initial investment is cash of $25,000. These amounts are the values agreed on by both partners. Prepare journal entries to record (1) Kroll’s investment and (2) Rogers’s investment.

determine the balances of the partners capital accounts as of december 31 2011 647985

On March 1, 2011, Abbey and Dames formed a partnership. Abbey contributed $88,000 cash and Dames contributed land valued at $70,000 and a building valued at $100,000. The partnership also assumed responsibility for Dames’s $80,000 long term note payable associated with the land and building. The partners agreed to share income as follows: Abbey is to receive an annual salary allowance of $30,000, both are to receive an annual interest allowance of 10% of their beginning year capital investment, and any remaining income or loss is to be shared equally. On October 20, 2011, Abbey withdrew $32,000 cash and Dames withdrew $25,000 cash. After the adjusting and closing entries are made to the revenue and expense accounts at December 31, 2011, the Income Summary account had a credit balance of $79,000.

1. Prepare journal entries to record

(a) the partners’ initial capital investments,

(b) their cash withdrawals,

(c) the December 31 closing of both the Withdrawals and Income Summary accounts.

2. Determine the balances of the partners’ capital accounts as of December 31, 2011.

prepare the journal entry to record the admission of ash under each of the following 647987

1. The partners in the Biz Partnership have agreed that partner Mona may sell her $90,000 equity in the partnership to Seal, for which Seal will pay Mona $75,000. Present the partnership’s journal entry to record the sale of Mona’s interest to Seal on September 30.

2. The Treed Partnership has total partners’ equity of $510,000, which is made up of Elm, Capital, $400,000, and Oak, Capital, $110,000. The partners share net income and loss in a ratio of 80% to Elm and 20% to Oak. On November 1, Ash is admitted to the partnership and given a 15% interest in equity and a 15% share in any income and loss. Prepare the journal entry to record the admission of Ash under each of the following separate assumptions: Ash invests cash of (1) $90,000; (2) $125,000; and (3) $60,000.

hunt sports enterprises lp is organized as a limited partnership consisting of two i 647990

Hunt Sports Enterprises LP is organized as a limited partnership consisting of two individual partners: Soccer LP and Football LP. Both partners separately operate a minor league soccer team and a semipro football team. Compute partner return on equity for each limited partnership (and the total) for the year ended June 30, 2011, using the following selected data on partner capital balances from Hunt Sports Enterprises LP.

 

Soccer LP

Football LP

Total

Balance at 6/30/2010         

$378,000

$1,516,000

$1,894,000

Annual net income          

44,268

891,796

936,064

Cash distribution           

(100,000)

(100,000)

Balance at 6/30/2011         

$422,268

$2,307,796

$2,730,064

kim ries tere bax and josh thomas invested 40 000 56 000 and 64 000 respectively in 647991

Kim Ries, Tere Bax, and Josh Thomas invested $40,000, $56,000, and $64,000, respectively, in a partnership.

During its first calendar year, the firm earned $124,500.

Required

Prepare the entry to close the firm’s Income Summary account as of its December 31 year end and to allocate the $124,500 net income to the partners under each of the following separate assumptions: The partners

(1) have no agreement on the method of sharing income and loss;

(2) agreed to share income and loss in the ratio of their beginning capital investments; and

(3) agreed to share income and loss by providing annual salary allowances of $33,000 to Ries, $28,000 to Bax, and $40,000 to Thomas; granting 10% interest on the partners’ beginning capital investments; and sharing the remainder equally.

rex baker and ty farney are forming a partnership to which baker will devote one hal 647992

Rex Baker and Ty Farney are forming a partnership to which Baker will devote one half time and Farney will devote full time. They have discussed the following alternative plans for sharing income and loss:

(a) in the ratio of their initial capital investments, which they have agreed will be $21,000 for Baker and $31,500 for Farney;

(b) in proportion to the time devoted to the business;

(c) a salary allowance of $3,000 per month to Farney and the balance in accordance with the ratio of their initial capital investments; or

(d) a salary allowance of $3,000 per month to Farney, 10% interest on their initial capital investments, and the balance shared equally. The partners expect the business to perform as follows: year 1, $18,000 net loss; year 2, $45,000 net income; and year 3, $75,000 net income.

Required

Prepare three tables with the following column headings.

 

Year

Income (Loss)

 

   

Sharing Plan

Calculations

Baker

Farney

       
       

Complete the tables, one for each of the first three years, by showing how to allocate partnership income or loss to the partners under each of the four plans being considered. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

prepare the december 31 journal entry to close income summary assuming they agree to 647993

Will Beck, Ron Beck, and Barb Beck formed the BBB Partnership by making capital contributions of $183,750, $131,250, and $210,000, respectively. They predict annual partnership net income of $225,000 and are considering the following alternative plans of sharing income and loss:

(a) equally;

(b) in the ratio of their initial capital investments; or

(c) salary allowances of $40,000 to Will, $30,000 to Ron, and $45,000 to Barb; interest allowances of 10% on their initial capital investments; and the balance shared equally.

Required

1. Prepare a table with the following column headings.

Income (Loss)

       

Sharing Plan

Calculations

Will

Ron

Barb

Total

           
           
           

Use the table to show how to distribute net income of $225,000 for the calendar year under each of the alternative plans being considered. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollar.)

2. Prepare a statement of partners’ equity showing the allocation of income to the partners assuming they agree to use plan (c), that income earned is $104,500, and that Will, Ron, and Barb withdraw $17,000, $24,000, and $32,000, respectively, at year end.

3. Prepare the December 31 journal entry to close Income Summary assuming they agree to use plan (c) and that net income is $104,500. Also close the withdrawals accounts.

the following transactions and events took place at kern company during its recent c 647920

The following transactions and events took place at Kern Company during its recent calendar year reporting period (Kern does not use reversing entries).

a. In September 2011, Kern sold $140,000 of merchandise covered by a 180 day warranty. Prior experience shows that costs of the warranty equal 5% of sales. Compute September’s warranty expense and prepare the adjusting journal entry for the warranty liability as recorded at September 30. Also prepare the journal entry on October 8 to record a $300 cash expenditure to provide warranty service on an item sold in September.

b. On October 12, 2011, Kern arranged with a supplier to replace Kern’s overdue $10,000 account payable by paying $2,500 cash and signing a note for the remainder. The note matures in 90 days and has a 12% interest rate. Prepare the entries recorded on October 12, December 31, and January 10, 2012, related to this transaction.

c. In late December, Kern learns it is facing a product liability suit filed by an unhappy customer. Kern’s lawyer advises that although it will probably suffer a loss from the lawsuit, it is not possible to estimate the amount of damages at this time.

d. Sally Bline works for Kern. For the pay period ended November 30, her gross earnings are $3,000. Bline has $800 deducted for federal income taxes and $200 for state income taxes from each paycheck. Additionally, a $35 premium for her health care insurance and a $10 donation for the United Way are deducted. Bline pays FICA Social Security taxes at a rate of 6.2% and FICA Medicare taxes at a rate of 1.45%. She has not earned enough this year to be exempt from any FICA taxes. Journalize the accrual of salaries expense of Bline’s wages by Kern.

e. On November 1, Kern borrows $5,000 cash from a bank in return for a 60 day, 12%, $5,000 note.

Record the note’s issuance on November 1 and its repayment with interest on December 31.

f. Kern has estimated and recorded its quarterly income tax payments. In reviewing its year end tax adjustments, it identifies an additional $5,000 of income tax expense that should be recorded. A portion of this additional expense, $1,000, is deferrable to future years. Record this year end income taxes expense adjusting entry.

g. For this calendar year, Kern’s net income is $1,000,000, its interest expense is $275,000, and its income taxes expense is $225,000. Calculate Kern’s times interest earned ratio.

the payroll records of clix software show the following information about trish farq 647933

The payroll records of Clix Software show the following information about Trish Farqua, an employee, for the weekly pay period ending September 30, 2011. Farqua is single and claims one allowance. Compute her Social Security tax (6.2%), Medicare tax (1.45%), federal income tax withholding, state income tax (1.0%), and net pay for the current pay period. (Use the withholding table in Exhibit 11A.6 and round tax amounts to the nearest cent.)

Total (gross) earnings for current pay period  

$ 735

Cumulative earnings of previous pay periods

9,700

mri company has one employee fica social security taxes are 6 2 of the first 106 800 647940

MRI Company has one employee. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to its employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. For MRI, its FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 2.9% of the first $7,000 paid to its employee. Compute MRI’s amounts for each of these four taxes as applied to the employee’s gross earnings for September under each of three separate situations (a), (b), and (c).

Gross Pay through August

Gross Pay for September

a.

$ 6,400

$ 800

b.

18,200

2,100

c.

100,500

8,000

use the following information from separate companies a through f to compute times i 647944

1. Use the following information from separate companies a through f to compute times interest earned. Which company indicates the strongest ability to pay interest expense as it comes due?

 

Net Income (Loss)

Interest Expense

Income Taxes

a.

$140,000

$48,000

$ 35,000

b.

140,000

15,000

50,000

c.

140,000

8,000

70,000

d.

265,000

12,000

130,000

e.

79,000

12,000

30,000

f.

(4,000)

12,000

0

2. Tony Newbern, an unmarried employee, works 48 hours in the week ended January 12. His pay rate is $12 per hour, and his wages are subject to no deductions other than FICA — Social Security, FICA — Medicare, and federal income taxes. He claims two withholding allowances. Compute his regular pay, overtime pay (for this company, workers earn 150% of their regular rate for hours in excess of 40 per week), and gross pay. Then compute his FICA tax deduction (use 6.2% for the Social Security portion and 1.45% for the Medicare portion), income tax deduction (use the wage bracket withholding table of Exhibit 11A.6), total deductions, and net pay. (Round tax amounts to the nearest cent.)

the following monthly data are taken from nunez company at july 31 647947

The following monthly data are taken from Nunez Company at July 31: Sales salaries, $120,000; Office salaries, $60,000; Federal income taxes withheld, $45,000; State income taxes withheld, $10,000; Social security taxes withheld, $11,160; Medicare taxes withheld, $2,610; Medical insurance premiums, $7,000; Life insurance premiums, $4,000; Union dues deducted, $1,000; and Salaries subject to unemployment taxes, $50,000. The employee pays forty percent of medical and life insurance premiums. Prepare journal entries to record:

(1) accrued payroll, including employee deductions, for July;

(2) cash payment of the net payroll (salaries payable) for July;

(3) accrued employer payroll taxes, and other related employment expenses, for July—assume that FICA taxes are identical to those on employees and that SUTA taxes are 5.4% and FUTA taxes are 0.8%; and

(4) cash payment of all liabilities related to the July payroll.

futa taxes are 0 8 and suta taxes are 5 4 of the first 7 000 paid to each employee c 647948

Madison Company has nine employees. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to each employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 5.4% of the first $7,000 paid to each employee. Cumulative pay for the current year for each of its employees follows.

Employee

Cumulative Pay

Employee

Cumulative Pay

Employee

Cumulative Pay

Steve S

$ 6,000

Christina S

$156,800

Dana W

$116,800

Tim V

60,000

Michelle H

106,800

Stewart M

36,800

Brent G

87,000

Kathleen K

110,000

Sankha B

4,000

a. Prepare a table with the following column headings: Employee; Cumulative Pay; Pay Subject to FICA Social Security Taxes; Pay Subject to FICA Medicare Taxes; Pay Subject to FUTA Taxes; Pay Subject to SUTA Taxes. Compute the amounts in this table for each employee and total the columns.

b. For the company, compute each total for: FICA Social Security taxes, FICA Medicare taxes, FUTA taxes, and SUTA taxes.

prepare the august 31 journal entry to record the accrued biweekly payroll and relat 647949

SP Company has five employees. Employees paid by the hour receive a $10 per hour pay rate for the regular 40 hour work week plus one and one half times the hourly rate for each overtime hour beyond the 40 hours per week. Hourly employees are paid every two weeks, but salaried employees are paid monthly on the last biweekly payday of each month. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to each employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 5.4% of the first $7,000 paid to each employee. The company has a benefits plan that includes medical insurance, life insurance, and retirement funding for employees. Under this plan, employees must contribute 5 percent of their gross income as a payroll withholding, which the company matches with double the amount. Following is the partially completed payroll register for the biweekly period ending August 31, which is the last payday of August.

Employee

Cumulative

 

   

FIT

FUTA

FICA SS_EE

EE Ben_Plan Withholding

EE Ben_Plan Withholding

EMPLOYEE NET PAY

Pay (Excludes

Pay

Pay

Gross

SIT

SUTA

FICA SS_ER

 

 

 

Current Period)

Type

Hours

Pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

Kathleen

$105,000.00

Salary

$7,000.00

$2,000.00

 

 

 

 

 

300.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

Nichole

6,800.00

Salary

500.00

80.00

 

 

 

 

 

20.00

 

 

 

 

 

Anthony

15,000.00

Regular

80

 

110.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overtime

8

 

25.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Zoey

6,500.00

Regular

80

 

100.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overtime

4

 

22.00

 

 

 

 

 

Gracie

5,000.00

Regular

74

740.00

90.00

 

 

 

 

 

Overtime

0

0.00

21.00

 

 

 

 

 

Totals

138,300.00

 

2,380.00

 

 

 

 

 

388.00

 

 

 

 

 

a. Complete this payroll register by filling in all cells for the pay period ended August 31. Hint: See Exhibit 11A.3 for guidance. (Round amounts to cents.)

b. Prepare the August 31 journal entry to record the accrued biweekly payroll and related liabilities for deductions.

c. Prepare the August 31 journal entry to record the employer’s cash payment of the net payroll of part b.

d. Prepare the August 31 journal entry to record the employer’s payroll taxes including the contribution to the benefits plan.

e. Prepare the August 31 journal entry to pay all liabilities (expect net payroll in part c) for this biweekly period.

tytus co entered into the following transactions involving short term liabilities in 647950

Tytus Co. entered into the following transactions involving short term liabilities in 2010 and 2011.

2010

Apr. 20 Purchased $38,500 of merchandise on credit from Frier, terms are 1y10, ny30. Tytus uses the perpetual inventory system.

May 19 Replaced the April 20 account payable to Frier with a 90 day, $30,000 note bearing 9% annual interest along with paying $8,500 in cash.

July 8 Borrowed $60,000 cash from Community Bank by signing a 120 day, 10% interest bearing note with a face value of $60,000.

___?____ Paid the amount due on the note to Frier at the maturity date.

___?____ Paid the amount due on the note to Community Bank at the maturity date.

Nov. 28 Borrowed $21,000 cash from UMB Bank by signing a 60 day, 8% interest bearing note with a face value of $21,000.

Dec. 31 Recorded an adjusting entry for accrued interest on the note to UMB Bank.

2011

___?____ Paid the amount due on the note to UMB Bank at the maturity date.

Required

1. Determine the maturity date for each of the three notes described.

2. Determine the interest due at maturity for each of the three notes. (Assume a 360 day year.)

3. Determine the interest expense to be recorded in the adjusting entry at the end of 2010.

4. Determine the interest expense to be recorded in 2011.

5. Prepare journal entries for all the preceding transactions and events for years 2010 and 2011.

what is the balance of the estimated warranty liability account as of december 31 20 647951

On October 29, 2010, Lue Co. began operations by purchasing razors for resale. Lue uses the perpetual inventory method. The razors have a 90 day warranty that requires the company to replace any nonworking razor. When a razor is returned, the company discards it and mails a new one from Merchandise Inventory to the customer. The company’s cost per new razor is $18 and its retail selling price is $80 in both 2010 and 2011. The manufacturer has advised the company to expect warranty costs to equal 7% of dollar sales. The following transactions and events occurred.

2010

Nov. 11 Sold 75 razors for $6,000 cash.

30 Recognized warranty expense related to November sales with an adjusting entry.

Dec. 9 Replaced 15 razors that were returned under the warranty.

16 Sold 210 razors for $16,800 cash.

29 Replaced 30 razors that were returned under the warranty.

31 Recognized warranty expense related to December sales with an adjusting entry.

2011

Jan. 5 Sold 130 razors for $10,400 cash.

17 Replaced 50 razors that were returned under the warranty.

31 Recognized warranty expense related to January sales with an adjusting entry.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and adjustments for 2010 and 2011.

2. How much warranty expense is reported for November 2010 and for December 2010?

3. How much warranty expense is reported for January 2011?

4. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of December 31, 2010?

5. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of January 31, 2011?

shown here are condensed income statements for two different companies both are orga 647952

Shown here are condensed income statements for two different companies (both are organized as LLCs and pay no income taxes).

Ace Company

Deuce Company

Sales

$500,000

Sales

$500,000

Variable expenses (80%)

400,000

Variable expenses (60%)

300,000

Income before interest

100,000

Income before interest

200,000

Interest expense (fixed)

30,000

Interest expense (fixed)

130,000

Net income

$70,000

Net income

$70,000

Required

1. Compute times interest earned for Ace Company.

2. Compute times interest earned for Deuce Company.

3. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 30%?

4. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 50%?

5. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 80%?

6. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 10%?

7. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 20%?

8. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 40%?

9. Comment on the results from parts 3 through 8 in relation to the fixed cost strategies of the two companies and the ratio values you computed in parts 1 and 2.

the company is preparing its payroll calculations for the week ended august 25 payro 647953

Legal Stars has four employees. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to each employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. Also, its FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 2.15% of the first $7,000 paid to each employee. The company is preparing its payroll calculations for the week ended August 25. Payroll records show the following information for the company’s four employees.

   

Current Week

Name

Gross Pay
through 8/18

Gross Pay

Income Tax Withholding

Dale

$105,300

$2,000

$252

Ted

36,650

900

99

Kate

6,750

450

54

Chas

1,050

400

36

In addition to gross pay, the company must pay one half of the $32 per employee weekly health insurance; each employee pays the remaining one half. The company also contributes an extra 8% of each employee’s gross pay (at no cost to employees) to a pension fund.

Required

Compute the following for the week ended August 25 (round amounts to the nearest cent):

1. Each employee’s FICA withholdings for Social Security.

2. Each employee’s FICA withholdings for Medicare.

3. Employer’s FICA taxes for Social Security.

4. Employer’s FICA taxes for Medicare.

5. Employer’s FUTA taxes.

6. Employer’s SUTA taxes.

7. Each employee’s net (take home) pay.

8. Employer’s total payroll related expense for each employee.

calculate fica social security taxes payable and fica medicare taxes payable prepare 647954

On January 8, the end of the first weekly pay period of the year, Royal Company’s payroll register showed that its employees earned $11,380 of office salaries and $32,920 of sales salaries. Withholdings from the employees’ salaries include FICA Social Security taxes at the rate of 6.2%, FICA Medicare taxes at the rate of 1.45%, $6,340 of federal income taxes, $670 of medical insurance deductions, and $420 of union dues. No employee earned more than $7,000 in this first period.

Required

1. Calculate FICA Social Security taxes payable and FICA Medicare taxes payable. Prepare the journal entry to record Royal Company’s January 8 (employee) payroll expenses and liabilities.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record Royal’s (employer) payroll taxes resulting from the January 8 payroll. Royal’s merit rating reduces its state unemployment tax rate to 4% of the first $7,000 paid each employee. The federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8%.

bargen co entered into the following transactions involving short term liabilities i 647956

Bargen Co. entered into the following transactions involving short term liabilities in 2010 and 2011.

2010

Apr. 22 Purchased $4,000 of merchandise on credit from Quinn Products, terms are 1y10, ny30. Bargen uses the perpetual inventory system.

May 23 Replaced the April 22 account payable to Quinn Products with a 60 day, $3,600 note bearing 15% annual interest along with paying $400 in cash.

July 15 Borrowed $9,000 cash from Blackhawk Bank by signing a 120 day, 10% interest bearing note with a face value of $9,000.

___?_ _ __ Paid the amount due on the note to Quinn Products at maturity.

___?_ _ __ Paid the amount due on the note to Blackhawk Bank at maturity.

Dec. 6 Borrowed $16,000 cash from City Bank by signing a 45 day, 9% interest bearing note with a face value of $16,000.

31 Recorded an adjusting entry for accrued interest on the note to City Bank.

2011

___?_ _ __ Paid the amount due on the note to City Bank at maturity.

Required

1. Determine the maturity date for each of the three notes described.

2. Determine the interest due at maturity for each of the three notes. (Assume a 360 day year.)

3. Determine the interest expense to be recorded in the adjusting entry at the end of 2010.

4. Determine the interest expense to be recorded in 2011.

5. Prepare journal entries for all the preceding transactions and events for years 2010 and 2011.

how much warranty expense is reported for november 2011 and for december 2011 647957

On November 10, 2011, Byung Co. began operations by purchasing coffee grinders for resale. Byung uses the perpetual inventory method. The grinders have a 60 day warranty that requires the company to replace any nonworking grinder. When a grinder is returned, the company discards it and mails a new one from Merchandise Inventory to the customer. The company’s cost per new grinder is $14 and its retail selling price is $35 in both 2011 and 2012. The manufacturer has advised the company to expect warranty costs        to equal 10% of dollar sales. The following transactions and events occurred.

2011

Nov. 16 Sold 50 grinders for $1,750 cash.

30 Recognized warranty expense related to November sales with an adjusting entry.

Dec. 12 Replaced six grinders that were returned under the warranty.

18 Sold 150 grinders for $5,250 cash.

28 Replaced 17 grinders that were returned under the warranty.

31 Recognized warranty expense related to December sales with an adjusting entry.

2012

Jan. 7 Sold 60 grinders for $2,100 cash.

21 Replaced 38 grinders that were returned under the warranty.

31 Recognized warranty expense related to January sales with an adjusting entry.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and adjustments for 2011 and 2012.

2. How much warranty expense is reported for November 2011 and for December 2011?

3. How much warranty expense is reported for January 2012?

4. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of December 31, 2011?

5. What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of January 31, 2012?

comment on the results from parts 3 through 8 in relation to the fixed cost strategi 647958

Shown here are condensed income statements for two different companies (both are organized as LLCs and pay no income taxes).

Virgo Company

Zodiac Company

Sales

$120,000

Sales

$120,000

Variable expenses (50%)

60,000

Variable expenses (75%)

90,000

Income before interest

60,000

Income before interest

30,000

Interest expense (fixed)

45,000

Interest expense (fixed)

15,000

Net income

$15,000

Net income

$15,000

Required

1. Compute times interest earned for Virgo Company.

2. Compute times interest earned for Zodiac Company.

3. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 10%?

4. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 40%?

5. What happens to each company’s net income if sales increase by 90%?

6. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 20%?

7. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 50%?

8. What happens to each company’s net income if sales decrease by 80%?

9. Comment on the results from parts 3 through 8 in relation to the fixed cost strategies of the two companies and the ratio values you computed in parts 1 and 2.

payroll records show the following information for the company s four employees 647959

Sea Biz Co. has four employees. FICA Social Security taxes are 6.2% of the first $106,800 paid to each employee, and FICA Medicare taxes are 1.45% of gross pay. Also, its FUTA taxes are 0.8% and SUTA taxes are 1.75% of the first $7,000 paid to each employee. The company is preparing its payroll calculations for the week ended September 30. Payroll records show the following information for the company’s four employees.

   

Current Week

Name

Gross Pay
through 9/23

Gross Pay

Income Tax Withholding

Alli

$104,300

$2,500

$198

Eve

36,650

1,515

182

Hong

6,650

475

52

Juan

22,200

600

48

In addition to gross pay, the company must pay one half of the $44 per employee weekly health insurance; each employee pays the remaining one half. The company also contributes an extra 5% of each employee’s gross pay (at no cost to employees) to a pension fund.

Required

Compute the following for the week ended September 30 (round amounts to the nearest cent):

1. Each employee’s FICA withholdings for Social Security.

2. Each employee’s FICA withholdings for Medicare.

3. Employer’s FICA taxes for Social Security.

4. Employer’s FICA taxes for Medicare.

5. Employer’s FUTA taxes.

6. Employer’s SUTA taxes.

7. Each employee’s net (take home) pay.

8. Employer’s total payroll related expense for each employee.

calculate fica social security taxes payable and fica medicare taxes payable prepare 647960

Palmer Company’s first weekly pay period of the year ends on January 8. On that date, the column totals in Palmer’s payroll register indicate its sales employees earned $69,490, its office employees earned $42,450, and its delivery employees earned $2,060. The employees are to have withheld from their wages FICA Social Security taxes at the rate of 6.2%, FICA Medicare taxes at the rate of 1.45%, $17,250 of federal income taxes, $2,320 of medical insurance deductions, and $275 of union dues. No employee earned more than $7,000 in the first pay period.

Required

1. Calculate FICA Social Security taxes payable and FICA Medicare taxes payable. Prepare the journal entry to record Palmer Company’s January 8 (employee) payroll expenses and liabilities.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record Palmer’s (employer) payroll taxes resulting from the January 8 payroll. Palmer’s merit rating reduces its state unemployment tax rate to 3.4% of the first $7,000 paid each employee. The federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8%.

jlk uses a payroll bank account and special payroll checks to pay its employees on j 647961

JLK Company has five employees, each of whom earns $1,200 per month and is paid on the last day of each month. All five have been employed continuously at this amount since January 1. JLK uses a payroll bank account and special payroll checks to pay its employees. On June 1, the following accounts and balances exist in its general ledger:

a. FICA—Social Security Taxes Payable, $744; FICA—Medicare Taxes Payable, $174. (The balances of these accounts represent total liabilities for both the employer’s and employees’ FICA taxes for the May payroll only.)

b. Employees’ Federal Income Taxes Payable, $900 (liability for May only).

c. Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable, $96 (liability for April and May together).

d. State Unemployment Taxes Payable, $480 (liability for April and May together).

During June and July, the company had the following payroll transactions.

June 15 Issued check payable to Security Bank, a federal depository bank authorized to accept employers’ payments of FICA taxes and employee income tax withholdings. The $1,818 check is in payment of the May FICA and employee income taxes.

30 Recorded the June payroll and transferred funds from the regular bank account to the payroll bank account. Issued checks payable to each employee in payment of the June payroll. The payroll register shows the following summary totals for the June pay period.

Salaries and Wages

       

Office
Salaries

Shop
Wages

Gross
Pay

FICA
Taxes*

Federal
Income
Taxes

Net
Pay

$2,000

$4,000

$6,000

$372

$900

$4,641

     

$87

   

30 Recorded the employer’s payroll taxes resulting from the June payroll. The company has a merit rating that reduces its state unemployment tax rate to 4.0% of the first $7,000 paid each employee. The federal rate is 0.8%.

July 15 Issued check payable to Security Bank in payment of the June FICA and employee income taxes.

15 Issued check to the State Tax Commission for the April, May and June state unemployment taxes. Mailed the check and the second quarter tax return to the State Tax Commission.

31 Issued check payable to Security Bank in payment of the employer’s FUTA taxes for the first quarter of the year.

31 Mailed Form 941 to the IRS, reporting the FICA taxes and the employees’ federal income tax withholdings for the second quarter.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the transactions and events for both June and July.

review the february 26 and march 25 transactions for business solutions sp 5 from ch 647962

Review the February 26 and March 25 transactions for Business Solutions (SP 5) from Chapter 5.

Required

1. Assume that Lyn Addie is an unmarried employee. Her $1,000 of wages are subject to no deductions other than FICA Social Security taxes, FICA Medicare taxes, and federal income taxes. Her federal income taxes for this pay period total $159. Compute her net pay for the eight days’ work paid on February 26. (Round amounts to the nearest cent.)

2. Record the journal entry to reflect the payroll payment to Lyn Addie as computed in part 1.

3. Record the journal entry to reflect the (employer) payroll tax expenses for the February 26 payroll payment. Assume Lyn Addie has not met earnings limits for FUTA and SUTA—the FUTA rate is 0.8% and the SUTA rate is 4% for Business Solutions. (Round amounts to the nearest cent.)

4. Record the entry(ies) for the merchandise sold on March 25 if a 4% sales tax rate applies.

the following six column table contains the company s unadjusted trial balance as of 647963

Bug Off Exterminators provides pest control services and sells extermination products manufactured by other companies. The following six column table contains the company’s unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011.

BUG OFF EXTERMINATORS
December 31, 2011

 

Unadjusted
Trial Balance

Adjustments

Adjusted
Trial Balance

Cash                             

$17,000

     

Accounts receivable                

4,000

     

Allowance for doubtful accounts       

 

$828

   

Merchandise inventory              

11,700

     

Trucks                           

32,000

     

Accum depreciation—Trucks         

 

0

   

Equipment                        

45,000

     

Accum depreciation—Equipment     

 

12,200

   

Accounts payable                   

 

5,000

   

Estimated warranty liability           

 

1,400

   

Unearned services revenue          

 

0

   

Interest payable                    

 

0

   

Long term notes payable            

 

15,000

   

D Buggs, Capital                   

 

59,700

   

D Buggs, Withdrawals               

10,000

     

Extermination services revenue       

 

60,000

   

Interest revenue                   

 

872

   

Sales (of merchandise)              

 

71,026

   

Cost of goods sold                 

46,300

     

Depreciation expense—Trucks       

0

     

Depreciation expense—Equipment    

0

     

Wages expense                    

35,000

     

Interest expense

0

     

Rent expense

9,000

     

Bad debts expense

0

     

Miscellaneous expense

1,226

     

Repairs expense

8,000

     

Utilities expense

6,800

     

Warranty expense

0

     

Totals       

$226,026

$226,026

   

The following information in a through h applies to the company at the end of the current year.

a. The bank reconciliation as of December 31, 2011, includes the following facts.

Cash balance per bank                           

$15,100

Cash balance per books                          

17,000

Outstanding checks                              

1,800

Deposit in transit                               

2,450

Interest earned (on bank account)                  

52

Bank service charges (miscellaneous expense)        

15

Reported on the bank statement is a canceled check that the company failed to record. (Information from the bank reconciliation allows you to determine the amount of this check, which is a payment on an account payable.)

b. An examination of customers’ accounts shows that accounts totaling $679 should be written off as uncollectible. Using an aging of receivables, the company determines that the ending balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be $700.

c. A truck is purchased and placed in service on January 1, 2011. Its cost is being depreciated with the straight line method using the following facts and estimates.

Original cost                 

$32,000

Expected salvage value        

8,000

Useful life (years)            

4

d. Two items of equipment (a sprayer and an injector) were purchased and put into service in early January 2009. They are being depreciated with the straight line method using these facts and estimates.

Original cost                

$27,000

$18,000

Expected salvage value        

3,000

2,500

Useful life (years)            

8

5

e. On August 1, 2011, the company is paid $3,840 cash in advance to provide monthly service for an apartment complex for one year. The company began providing the services in August. When the cash was received, the full amount was credited to the Extermination Services Revenue account.

f. The company offers a warranty for the services it sells. The expected cost of providing warranty service is 2.5% of the extermination services revenue of $57,760 for 2011. No warranty expense has been recorded for 2011. All costs of servicing warranties in 2011 were properly debited to the Estimated Warranty Liability account.

g. The $15,000 long term note is an 8%, five year, interest bearing note with interest payable annually on December 31. The note was signed with First National Bank on December 31, 2011.

h. The ending inventory of merchandise is counted and determined to have a cost of $11,700. Bug Off uses a perpetual inventory system.

Required

1. Use the preceding information to determine amounts for the following items.

a. Correct (reconciled) ending balance of Cash, and the amount of the omitted check.

b. Adjustment needed to obtain the correct ending balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

c. Depreciation expense for the truck used during year 2011.

d. Depreciation expense for the two items of equipment used during year 2011.

e. The adjusted 2011 ending balances of the Extermination Services Revenue and Unearned Services

Revenue accounts.

f. The adjusted 2011 ending balances of the accounts for Warranty Expense and Estimated Warranty Liability.

g. The adjusted 2011 ending balances of the accounts for Interest Expense and Interest Payable. (Round amounts to nearest whole dollar.)

2. Use the results of part 1 to complete the six column table by first entering the appropriate adjustments for items a through g and then completing the adjusted trial balance columns. (Hint: Item b requires two adjustments.)

3. Prepare journal entries to record the adjustments entered on the six column table. Assume Bug Off’s adjusted balance for Merchandise Inventory matches the year end physical count.

4. Prepare a single step income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (cash withdrawals during 2011 were $10,000), and a classified balance sheet.

on july 14 2011 tulsa company pays 600 000 to acquire a fully equipped factory the p 647860

On July 14, 2011, Tulsa Company pays $600,000 to acquire a fully equipped factory. The purchase involves the following assets and information.

 

Appraised

Salvage

Useful

Depreciation

Asset

Value

Value

Life

Method

Land 

$160,000

 

 

Not depreciated

Land improvements

80,000

$ 0

10 years

Straight line

Building 

320,000

100,000

10 years

Double declining balance

Machinery

240,000

20,000

10,000 units

Units of production*

Total

$800,000

 

 

 

Required

1. Allocate the total $600,000 purchase cost among the separate assets.

2. Compute the 2011 (six months) and 2012 depreciation expense for each asset, and compute the company’s total depreciation expense for both years.

3. On the last day of calendar year 2013, Tulsa discarded machinery that had been on its books for five years. The machinery’s original cost was $12,000 (estimated life of five years) and its salvage value was $2,000. No depreciation had been recorded for the fifth year when the disposal occurred. Journalize the fifth year of depreciation (straight line method) and the asset’s disposal.

4. At the beginning of year 2013, Tulsa purchased a patent for $100,000 cash. The company estimated the patent’s useful life to be 10 years. Journalize the patent acquisition and its amortization for the year 2013.

5. Late in the year 2013, Tulsa acquired an ore deposit for $600,000 cash. It added roads and built mine shafts for an additional cost of $80,000. Salvage value of the mine is estimated to be $20,000. The company estimated 330,000 tons of available ore. In year 2013, Tulsa mined and sold 10,000 tons of ore. Journalize the mine’s acquisition and its first year’s depletion.

6.On the first day of 2013, Tulsa exchanged the machinery that was acquired on July 14, 2011, along with $5,000 cash for machinery with a $210,000 market value. Journalize the exchange of these assets assuming the exchange lacked commercial substance. (Refer to background information in parts 1 and 2.)

the land was appraised at 175 000 the land improvements were appraised at 70 000 and 647861

1. A company paid $326,000 for property that included land, land improvements, and a building. The land was appraised at $175,000, the land improvements were appraised at $70,000, and the building was appraised at $105,000. What is the allocation of property costs to the three assets purchased?

a. Land, $150,000; Land Improvements, $60,000; Building,

$90,000

b. Land, $163,000; Land Improvements, $65,200; Building,

$97,800

c. Land, $150,000; Land Improvements, $61,600; Building,

$92,400

d. Land, $159,000; Land Improvements, $65,200; Building,

$95,400

e. Land, $175,000; Land Improvements, $70,000; Building,

$105,000

2. A company purchased a truck for $35,000 on January 1, 2011. The truck is estimated to have a useful life of four years and an estimated salvage value of $1,000. Assuming that the company uses straight line depreciation, what is the depreciation expense on the truck for the year ended December 31, 2012?

a. $8,750

b. $17,500

c. $8,500

d. $17,000

e. $25,500

3. A company purchased machinery for $10,800,000 on January 1, 2011. The machinery has a useful life of 10 years and an estimated salvage value of $800,000. What is the depreciation expense on the machinery for the year ended December 31, 2012, assuming that the double declining balance method is used?

a. $2,160,000

b. $3,888,000

c. $1,728,000

d. $2,000,000

e. $1,600,000

4. A company sold a machine that originally cost $250,000 for $120,000 when accumulated depreciation on the machine was $100,000. The gain or loss recorded on the sale of this machine is

a. $0 gain or loss.

b. $120,000 gain.

c. $30,000 loss.

d. $30,000 gain.

e. $150,000 loss.

5. A company had average total assets of $500,000, gross sales of $575,000, and net sales of $550,000. The company’s total asset turnover is

a. 1.15

b. 1.10

c. 0.91

d. 0.87

e. 1.05

on january 2 2011 the crossover band acquires sound equipment for concert performanc 647869

1. On January 2, 2011, the Crossover Band acquires sound equipment for concert performances at a cost of $55,900. The band estimates it will use this equipment for four years, during which time it anticipates performing about 120 concerts. It estimates that after four years it can sell the equipment for $1,900. During year 2011, the band performs 40 concerts. Compute the year 2011 depreciation using the straight line method.

2. Refer to the facts in QS 10 3. Assume that the Crossover Band uses straight line depreciation but realizes at the start of the second year that due to concert bookings beyond expectations, this equipment will last only a total of three years. The salvage value remains unchanged. Compute the revised depreciation for both the second and third years.

determine the book value of the building immediately after the repairs are recorded 647882

Passat Company owns a building that appears on its prior year end balance sheet at its original $561,000 cost less $420,750 accumulated depreciation. The building is depreciated on a straight line basis assuming a 20 year life and no salvage value. During the first week in January of the current calendar year, major structural repairs are completed on the building at a $67,200 cost. The repairs extend its useful life for

7 years beyond the 20 years originally estimated.

1. Determine the building’s age (plant asset age) as of the prior year end balance sheet date.

2. Prepare the entry to record the cost of the structural repairs that are paid in cash.

3. Determine the book value of the building immediately after the repairs are recorded.

4. Prepare the entry to record the current calendar year’s depreciation.

defend or refute this statement accelerated depreciation results in payment of less 647893

Xavier Construction negotiates a lump sum purchase of several assets from a company that is going out of business. The purchase is completed on January 1, 2011, at a total cash price of $787,500 for a building, land, land improvements, and four vehicles. The estimated market values of the assets are building, $408,000; land, $289,000; land improvements, $42,500; and four vehicles, $110,500. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required

1. Prepare a table to allocate the lump sum purchase price to the separate assets purchased (round percents to the nearest 1%). Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase.

2. Compute the depreciation expense for year 2011 on the building using the straight line method, assuming a 15 year life and a $25,650 salvage value.

3. Compute the depreciation expense for year 2011 on the land improvements assuming a five year life and double declining balance depreciation.

4. Defend or refute this statement: Accelerated depreciation results in payment of less taxes over the asset’s life.

prepare a single journal entry to record all the incurred costs assuming they are pa 647894

In January 2011, Keona Co. pays $2,800,000 for a tract of land with two buildings on it. It plans to demolish Building 1 and build a new store in its place. Building 2 will be a company office; it is appraised at $641,300, with a useful life of 20 years and an $80,000 salvage value. A lighted parking lot near Building 1 has improvements (Land Improvements 1) valued at $408,100 that are expected to last another 14 years with no salvage value. Without the buildings and improve ments, the tract of land is valued at $1,865,600. The company also incurs the following additional costs:

Cost to demolish Building 1

$ 422,600

Cost of additional land grading

167,200

Cost to construct new building (Building 3), having a useful life of 25 years and a $390,100 salvage value

2,019,000

Cost of new land improvements (Land Improvements 2) near Building 2 having a 20 year useful life and no salvage value

158,000

Required

1. Prepare a table with the following column headings: Land, Building 2, Building 3, Land Improvements 1, and Land Improvements 2. Allocate the costs incurred by Keona to the appropriate columns and total each column (round percents to the nearest 1%).

2. Prepare a single journal entry to record all the incurred costs assuming they are paid in cash on January 1, 2011.

3. Using the straight line method, prepare the December 31 adjusting entries to record depreciation for the 12 months of 2011 when these assets were in use.

clarion contractors completed the following transactions and events involving the pu 647895

Clarion Contractors completed the following transactions and events involving the purchase and operation of equipment in its business.

2010

Jan. 1 Paid $255,440 cash plus $15,200 in sales tax and $2,500 in transportation (FOB shipping point) for a new loader. The loader is estimated to have a four year life and a $34,740 salvage value. Loader costs are recorded in the Equipment account.

Jan. 3 Paid $3,660 to enclose the cab and install air conditioning in the loader to enable operations under harsher conditions. This increased the estimated salvage value of the loader by another $1,110.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the loader.

2011

Jan. 1 Paid $4,500 to overhaul the loader’s engine, which increased the loader’s estimated useful life by two years.

Feb. 17 Paid $920 to repair the loader after the operator backed it into a tree.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the loader.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.

chen company completed the following transactions and events involving its delivery 647896

Chen Company completed the following transactions and events involving its delivery trucks.

2010

Jan. 1 Paid $19,415 cash plus $1,165 in sales tax for a new delivery truck estimated to have a five year life and a $3,000 salvage value. Delivery truck costs are recorded in the Trucks account.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the truck.

2011

Dec. 31 Due to new information obtained earlier in the year, the truck’s estimated useful life was changed from five to four years, and the estimated salvage value was increased to $3,500. Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the truck.

2012

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the truck.

Dec. 31 Sold the truck for $6,200 cash.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.

 

prepare journal entries to record the machine s purchase and the costs to ready and 647897

A machine costing $210,000 with a four year life and an estimated $20,000 salvage value is installed in Calhoon Company’s factory on January 1. The factory manager estimates the machine will produce 475,000 units of product during its life. It actually produces the following units: year 1, 121,400; year 2, 122,400; year 3, 119,600; and year 4, 118,200. The total number of units produced by the end of year 4 exceeds the original estimate — this difference was not predicted. (The machine must not be depreciated below its estimated salvage value.)

Required

Prepare a table with the following column headings and compute depreciation for each year (and total depreciation of all years combined) for the machine under each depreciation method.

Year

Straight Line

Units of Production

Double Declining Balance

         
         
         

Saturn Co. purchases a used machine for $167,000 cash on January 2 and readies it for use the next day atV an $3,420 cost. On January 3, it is installed on a required operating platform costing $1,080, and it is further readied for operations. The company predicts the machine will be used for six years and have a $14,600 salvage value. Depreciation is to be charged on a straight line basis. On December 31, at the end of its fifth year in operations, it is disposed of.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the machine’s purchase and the costs to ready and install it. Cash is paid for all costs incurred.

2. Prepare journal entries to record depreciation of the machine at December 31 of (a) its first year in operations and (b) the year of its disposal.

3. Prepare journal entries to record the machine’s disposal under each of the following separate as sumptions:

(a) it is sold for $13,500 cash;

(b) it is sold for $45,000 cash;

(c) it is destroyed in a fire and the insurance company pays $24,000 cash to settle the loss claim.

describe both the similarities and differences in amortization depletion and depreci 647898

On July 23 of the current year, Dakota Mining Co. pays $4,836,000 for land estimated to contain 7,800,000 tons of recoverable ore. It installs machinery costing $390,000 that has a 10 year life and no salvage value and is capable of mining the ore deposit in eight years. The machinery is paid for on July 25, seven days before mining operations begin. The company removes and sells 400,000 tons of ore during its first five months of operations ending on December 31. Depreciation of the machinery is in proportion to the mine’s depletion as the machinery will be abandoned after the ore is mined.

Required

Prepare entries to record

(a) the purchase of the land,

(b) the cost and installation of machinery,

(c) the first five months’ depletion assuming the land has a net salvage value of zero after the ore is mined, and (d) the first five months’ depreciation on the machinery.

Describe both the similarities and differences in amortization, depletion, and depreciation.

prepare kirk s year end adjusting entries required at december 31 2011 to 647899

On July 1, 2006, Sweet man Company signed a contract to lease space in a building for 15 years. The lease contract calls for annual (prepaid) rental payments of $70,000 on each July 1 throughout the life of the lease and for the lessee to pay for all additions and improvements to the leased property. On June 25, 2011, Sweet man decides to sublease the space to Kirk & Associates for the remaining 10 years of the lease—Kirk pays $185,000 to Sweet man for the right to sublease and it agrees to assume the obligation to pay the $70,000 annual rent to the building owner beginning July 1, 2011. After taking possession of the leased space, Kirk pays for improving the office portion of the leased space at a $129,840 cost. The improvements are paid for by Kirk on July 5, 2011, and are estimated to have a useful life equal to the 16 years remaining in the life of the building.

Required

1. Prepare entries for Kirk to record

(a) its payment to Sweet man for the right to sublease the building space,

(b) its payment of the 2011 annual rent to the building owner,

(c) its payment for the office improvements.

2. Prepare Kirk’s year end adjusting entries required at December 31, 2011, to

(a) amortize the $185,000 cost of the sublease,

(b) amortize the office improvements,

( c) record rent expense.

compute the depreciation expense for year 2011 on the land improvements assuming a 1 647900

Racerback Company negotiates a lump sum purchase of several assets from a contractor who is relocating. The purchase is completed on January 1, 2011, at a total cash price of $1,610,000 for a building, land, land improvements, and six trucks. The estimated market values of the assets are building, $784,800; land, $540,640; land improvements, $226,720; and six trucks, $191,840. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required

1. Prepare a table to allocate the lump sum purchase price to the separate assets purchased (round percents to the nearest 1%). Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase.

2. Compute the depreciation expense for year 2011 on the building using the straight line method, assuming a 12 year life and a $100,500 salvage value.

3. Compute the depreciation expense for year 2011 on the land improvements assuming a 10 year life and double declining balance depreciation.

4. Defend or refute this statement: Accelerated depreciation results in payment of more taxes over the asset’s life.

xpress delivery service completed the following transactions and events involving th 647902

Xpress Delivery Service completed the following transactions and events involving the purchase and operation of equipment for its business.

2010

Jan. 1 Paid $24,950 cash plus $1,950 in sales tax for a new delivery van that was estimated to have a five year life and a $3,400 salvage value. Van costs are recorded in the Equipment account.

Jan. 3 Paid $1,550 to install sorting racks in the van for more accurate and quicker delivery of packages.

This increases the estimated salvage value of the van by another $200.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the van.

2011

Jan. 1 Paid $1,970 to overhaul the van’s engine, which increased the van’s estimated useful life by two years.

May 10 Paid $600 to repair the van after the driver backed it into a loading dock.

Dec. 31 Record annual straight line depreciation on the van. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

Required

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.

field instruments completed the following transactions and events involving its mach 647903

Field Instruments completed the following transactions and events involving its machinery.

2010

Jan. 1 Paid $106,600 cash plus $6,400 in sales tax for a new machine. The machine is estimated to have a six year life and a $9,800 salvage value.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the machinery.

2011

Dec. 31 Due to new information obtained earlier in the year, the machine’s estimated useful life was changed from six to four years, and the estimated salvage value was increased to $13,050. Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the machinery.

2012

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight line depreciation on the machinery.

Dec. 31 Sold the machine for $25,240 cash.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.

depreciation of the machinery is in proportion to the mine s depletion as the machin 647905

On February 19 of the current year, Rock Chalk Co. pays $4,450,000 for land estimated to contain 5 million tons of recoverable ore. It installs machinery costing $200,000 that has a 16 year life and no salvage value and is capable of mining the ore deposit in 12 years. The machinery is paid for on March 21, eleven days before mining operations begin. The company removes and sells 352,000 tons of ore during its first nine months of operations ending on December 31. Depreciation of the machinery is in proportion to the mine’s depletion as the machinery will be abandoned after the ore is mined.

Required

Prepare entries to record

(a) the purchase of the land,

(b) the cost and installation of the machinery,

(c) the first nine months’ depletion assuming the land has a net salvage value of zero after the ore is mined,

(d) the first nine months’ depreciation on the machinery.

Describe both the similarities and differences in amortization, depletion, and depreciation.

prepare moberly s year end adjusting entries required on december 31 2011 to 647906

On January 1, 2004, Liberty Co. entered into a 12 year lease on a building. The lease contract requires (1) annual (prepaid) rental payments of $26,400 each January 1 throughout the life of the lease and (2) for the lessee to pay for all additions and improvements to the leased property. On January 1, 2011, Liberty decides to sublease the space to Moberly Co. for the remaining five years of the lease — Moberly pays $30,000 to Liberty for the right to sublease and agrees to assume the obligation to pay the $26,400 annual rent to the building owner beginning January 1, 2011. After taking possession of the leased space, Moberly pays for improving the office portion of the leased space at an $18,000 cost. The improvements are paid for by Moberly on January 3, 2011, and are estimated to have a useful life equal to the 13 years remaining in the life of the building.

Required

1. Prepare entries for Moberly to record

(a) its payment to Liberty for the right to sublease the building space,

(b) its payment of the 2011 annual rent to the building owner,

(c) its payment for the office improvements.

2. Prepare Moberly’s year end adjusting entries required on December 31, 2011, to

(a) amortize the $30,000 cost of the sublease,

(b) amortize the office improvements,

(b) record rent expense.

selected ledger account balances for business solutions follow 647907

Selected ledger account balances for Business Solutions follow.

 

For Three Months

For Three Months

 

Ended December 31, 2011

Ended December 31, 2011   

Office equipment 

$ 8,000

$ 8,000

Accumulated depreciation— Office equipment.

400

800

Computer equipment

20,000

20,000

Accumulated depreciation— Computer equipment .

1,250

2,500

Total revenue 

31,284

44,000

Total assets

83,460

120,268

Required

1. Assume that Business Solutions does not acquire additional office equipment or computer equipment in 2012. Compute amounts for the year ended December 31, 2012, for Depreciation Expense — Office Equipment and for Depreciation Expense—Computer Equipment (assume use of the straight line method).

2. Given the assumptions in part 1, what is the book value of both the office equipment and the computer equipment as of December 31, 2012?

3. Compute the three month total asset turnover for Business Solutions as of March 31, 2012. Use total revenue for the numerator and average the December 31, 2011, total assets and the March 31, 2012, total assets for the denominator. Interpret its total asset turnover if competitors average 2.5 for annual periods. (Round turnover to two decimals.)

what is the amount of cash provided used by investing activities for property plant 647908

Refer to the financial statements of Research In Motion in Appendix A to answer the following.

1. What percent of the original cost of RIM’s property, plant and equipment remains to be depreciated as of February 27, 2010, and at February 28, 2009? Assume these assets have no salvage value.

2. Over what length(s) of time is RIM depreciating its major categories of property, plant and equipment?

3. What is the change in total property, plant and equipment (before accumulated depreciation) for the year ended February 27, 2010? What is the amount of cash provided (used) by investing activities for property, plant and equipment for the year ended February 27, 2010? What is one possible explanation for the difference between these two amounts?

4. Compute its total asset turnover for the year ended February 27, 2010, and the year ended February 28, 2009. Assume total assets at March 1, 2008, are $5,511 ($ millions).

5. Access RIM’s financial statements for fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010,the SEC’s EDGAR database. Recomputed RIM’s total asset turnover for the additional years’ data you collect. Comment on any differences relative to the turnover computed in part 4.

how will choi s new depreciation rule affect the profit margin of her business 647909

Flo Choi owns a small business and manages its accounting. Her company just finished a year in which a large amount of borrowed funds was invested in a new building addition as well as in equipment and fixture additions. Choi’s banker requires her to submit semiannual financial statements so he can monitor the financial health of her business. He has warned her that if profit margins erode, he might raise the interest rate on the borrowed funds to reflect the increased loan risk from the bank’s point of view. Choi knows profit margin is likely to decline this year. As she prepares year end adjusting entries, she decides to apply the following depreciation rule: All asset additions are considered to be in use on the first day of the following month. (The previous rule assumed assets are in use on the first day of the month nearest to the purchase date.)

Required

1. Identify decisions that managers like Choi must make in applying depreciation methods.

2. Is Choi’s rule an ethical violation, or is it a legitimate decision in computing depreciation?

3. How will Choi’s new depreciation rule affect the profit margin of her business?

locate note 6 to its financial statements what are the three categories of intangibl 647911

Access the Yahoo! (ticker: YHOO) 10 K report for the year ended December 31, 2009, filed on February 26, 2010,

Required

1. What amount of goodwill is reported on Yahoo!’s balance sheet? What percentage of total assets does its goodwill represent? Is goodwill a major asset for Yahoo!? Explain.

2. Locate Note 5 to its financial statements. Identify the change in goodwill from December 31, 2008, to December 31, 2009. Comment on the change in goodwill over this period.

3. Locate Note 6 to its financial statements. What are the three categories of intangible assets that Yahoo! reports at December 31, 2009? What proportion of total assets do the intangibles represent?

4. What does Yahoo! indicate is the life of “Trade names, trademarks, and domain names” according to its Note 6? Comment on the difference between the estimated useful life and the legal life of Yahoo!’s trademark.

jupiter company expects to operate at 90 of productive capacity during may 647823

Jupiter Company expects to operate at 90% of productive capacity during May. The total manufacturing costs for May for the production of 25,000 batteries are budgeted as follows:

Direct materials

$272,000

Direct labor

96,000

Variable factory overhead

32,000

Fixed factory overhead

54,000

Total manufacturing costs

$454,000

The company has an opportunity to submit a bid for 1,000 batteries to be delivered by May 31 to a government agency. If the contract is obtained, it is anticipated that the additional activity will not interfere with normal production during May or increase the selling or administrative expenses. What is the unit cost below which Jupiter Company should not go in bidding on the government contract?

sure grip tire and rubber company has capacity to produce 170 000 tires sure grip pr 647824

Sure Grip Tire and Rubber Company has capacity to produce 170,000 tires. Sure Grip presently produces and sells 130,000 tires for the North American market at a price of $90 per tire. Sure Grip is evaluating a special order from a European automobile company, Continental Motors. Continental is offering to buy 25,000 tires for $60 per tire. Sure Grip’s accounting system indicates that the total cost per tire is as follows:

Direct materials

$26

Direct labor

9

Factory overhead (35% variable)

22

Selling and administrative expenses (40% variable)

18

Total

$75

Sure Grip pays a selling commission equal to 5% of the selling price on North American orders, which is included in the variable portion of the selling and administrative expenses. However, this special order would not have a sales commission. If the order was accepted, the tires would be shipped overseas for an additional shipping cost of $6.00 per tire. In addition, Continental has made the order conditional on receiving European safety certification. Sure Grip estimates that this certification would cost $110,000.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report dated August 4, 2008, for the proposed sale to Continental Motors.

b. What is the minimum price per unit that would be financially acceptable to Sure Grip?

sirrus phone company uses the total cost concept of applying the cost plus approach 647825

Sirrus Phone Company uses the total cost concept of applying the cost plus approach to product pricing. The costs of producing and selling 3,500 units of mobile phones are as follows:

Variable costs:

 

Fixed costs:

 

Direct materials

$130.00 per unit

Factory overhead

$175,000

Direct labor

50.00

Selling and adm. exp.

70,000

Factory overhead

35.00

 

 

Selling and adm. exp.

25.00

 

 

Total

$240.00 per unit

 

 

Sirrus desires a profit equal to a 30% rate of return on invested assets of $350,000.

a. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of mobile phones.

b. Determine the total costs and the cost amount per unit for the production and sale of 3,500 units of mobile phones.

c. Determine the markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places) for mobile phones.

d. Determine the selling price of mobile phones. Round to the nearest dollar.

assume that sirrus phone company uses the variable cost concept of applying the cost 647827

Assume that Sirrus Phone Company uses the variable cost concept of applying the cost plus approach to product pricing. The costs of producing and selling 3,500 units of mobile phones are as follows:

Variable costs:

 

Fixed costs:

 

Direct materials

$130.00 per unit

Factory overhead

$175,000

Direct labor

50.00

Selling and adm. exp.

70,000

Factory overhead

35.00

 

 

Selling and adm. exp.

25.00

 

 

Total

$240.00 per unit

 

 

Sirrus desires a profit equal to a 30% rate of return on invested assets of $350,000.

a. Determine the variable costs and the cost amount per unit for the production and sale of 3,500 units of mobile phones.

b. Determine the markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places) for mobile phones.

c. Determine the selling price of mobile phones. Round to the nearest dollar.

gannett glass company manufactures three types of safety plate glass large medium an 647832

Gannett Glass Company manufactures three types of safety plate glass: large, medium, and small. All three products have high demand. Thus, Gannett Glass is able to sell all the safety glass that it can make. The production process includes an autoclave operation, which is a pressurized heat treatment. The autoclave is a production bottleneck. Total fixed costs are $550,000. In addition, the following information is available about the three products:

 

Large

Medium

Small

Unit selling price

$240

$180

$120

Unit variable cost

126

80

68

Unit contribution margin

$114

$100

$ 52

Autoclave hours per unit

6

10

4

Total process hours per unit

20

16

12

Budgeted units of production

2,500

2,500

2,500

Assume that Gannett Glass wanted to price all products so that they produced the same profit potential as the highest profit product. Thus, determine the prices for each of the products so that they would produce a profit equal to the highest profit product.

life cycle inc manufactures stationary bicycles and rowing machines the products are 647833

Life Cycle Inc. manufactures stationary bicycles and rowing machines. The products are produced in the Fabrication and Assembly production departments. In addition to production activities, several other activities are required to produce the two products. These activities and their associated activity rates are as follows:

Activity

Activity Rate

Fabrication

$26 per machine hour

Assembly

$15 per direct labor hour

Setup

$38 per setup

Inspecting

$25 per inspection

Production scheduling

$12 per production order

Purchasing

$ 5 per purchase order

The activity base usage quantities and units produced for each product were as follows:

 

Stationary Bicycle

Rowing Machine

Machine hours

1,950

975

Direct labor hours

436

162

Setups

48

15

Inspections

725

375

Production orders

68

20

Purchase orders

165

125

Units produced

1,000

1,000

Use the activity rate and usage information to compute the total activity costs and the activity costs per unit for each product.

volt gear industries manufactures two types of electrical power units custom and sta 647834

Volt Gear Industries manufactures two types of electrical power units, custom and standard, which involve four overhead activities—production setup, procurement, quality control, and materials management. An activity analysis of the overhead revealed the following estimated costs and activity bases for these activities:

Activity

Cost

Activity Base

Production setup

$ 48,000

Number of setups

Procurement

118,000

Number of purchase orders

Quality control

160,000

Number of inspections

Materials management

115,000

Number of components

Total

$441,000

 

The activity base usage quantities for each product are as follows:

 

 

Purchase

 

 

 

 

Setups

Orders

Inspections

Components

Unit Volume

Custom

375

900

1,800

300

3,000

Standard

125

100

200

200

3,000

Total

500

1,000

2,000

500

6,000

a. Determine an activity rate for each activity.

b. Assign activity costs to each product, and determine the unit activity cost using the activity rates from part (a).

c. Assume that each product required one direct labor hour per unit. Determine the per unit cost if factory overhead is allocated on the basis of direct labor hours.

d. Explain why the answers in parts (b) and (c) are different.

on july 1 daybreak stores inc is considering leasing a building and purchasing the n 647835

On July 1, Daybreak Stores Inc. is considering leasing a building and purchasing the necessary equipment to operate a retail store. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $280,000 of 5% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 20 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled:

Cost of store equipment

$280,000

Life of store equipment

20 years

Estimated residual value of store equipment

$20,000

Yearly costs to operate the store, excluding

 

depreciation of store equipment

$70,000

Yearly expected revenues—years 1–10

$88,000

Yearly expected revenues—years 11–20

$96,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a report as of July 1, 2008, presenting a differential analysis of the proposed operation of the store for the 20 years as compared with present conditions.

2. Based on the results disclosed by the differential analysis, should the proposal be accepted?

3. If the proposal is accepted, what would be the total estimated income from operations of the store for the 20 years?

quebec printing company is considering replacing a machine that has been used in its 647836

Quebec Printing Company is considering replacing a machine that has been used in its factory for four years. Relevant data associated with the operations of the old machine and the new machine, neither of which has any estimated residual value, are as follows:

Old Machine

Cost of machine, 10 year life

$360,000

Annual depreciation (straight line)

36,000

Annual manufacturing costs, excluding depreciation

325,000

Annual nonmanufacturing operating expenses

215,000

Annual revenue

740,000

Current estimated selling price of machine

210,000

New Machine

Cost of machine, 6 year life

$410,000

Annual depreciation (straight line)

68,333

Estimated annual manufacturing costs, exclusive of depreciation

284,000

Annual nonmanufacturing operating expenses and revenue are not expected to be affected by purchase of the new machine.

Instructions

1. Prepare a differential analysis report as of October 13, 2008, comparing operations utilizing the new machine with operations using the present equipment. The analysis should indicate the total differential income that would result over the 6 year period if the new machine is acquired.

2. List other factors that should be considered before a final decision is reached.

cleopatra cosmetics company is planning a one month campaign for may to promote sale 647837

Cleopatra Cosmetics Company is planning a one month campaign for May to promote sales of one of its two cosmetics products. A total of $110,000 has been budgeted for advertising, contests, redeemable coupons, and other promotional activities. The following data have been assembled for their possible usefulness in deciding which of the products to select for the campaign:

 

Moisturizer

Perfume

Unit selling price

$56

$75

Unit production costs:

 

 

Direct materials

$10

$14

Direct labor

5

8

Variable factory overhead

3

5

Fixed factory overhead

8

8

Total unit production costs

$26

$35

Unit variable selling expenses

12

18

Unit fixed selling expenses

4

2

Total unit costs

$42

$55

Operating income per unit

$14

$20

No increase in facilities would be necessary to produce and sell the increased output. It is anticipated that 10,500 additional units of moisturizer or 8,000 additional units of perfume could be sold without changing the unit selling price of either product.

Instructions

1. Prepare a differential analysis report as of April 15, 2008, presenting the additional revenue and additional costs anticipated from the promotion of moisturizer and perfume.

2. The sales manager had tentatively decided to promote perfume, estimating that operating income would be increased by $50,000 ($20 operating income per unit for 8,000 units, less promotion expenses of $110,000). The manager also believed that the selection of moisturizer would have less of an impact on operating income, $37,000 ($14 operating income per unit for 10,500 units, less promotion expenses of $110,000). State briefly your reasons for supporting or opposing the tentative decision.

plasma labs inc recently began production of a new product flat panel displays which 647839

Plasma Labs Inc. recently began production of a new product, flat panel displays, which required the investment of $3,000,000 in assets. The costs of producing and selling 20,000 units of flat panel displays are estimated as follows:

Variable costs per unit:

 

Fixed costs:

 

Direct materials

$150

Factory overhead

$2,000,000

Direct labor

30

Selling and administrative expenses

1,000,000

Factory overhead

50

 

 

Selling and administrative expenses

20

 

 

Total

$250

 

 

Plasma Labs Inc. is currently considering establishing a selling price for flat panel displays. The president of Plasma Labs has decided to use the cost plus approach to product pricing and has indicated that the displays must earn a 16% rate of return on invested assets.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of flat panel displays.

2. Assuming that the total cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of flat panel displays.

3. Assuming that the product cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and (c) the selling price of flat panel displays (rounded to nearest whole dollar).

4. Assuming that the variable cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of flat panel displays.

5. Comment on any additional considerations that could influence establishing the selling price for flat panel displays.

6. Assume that as of September 1, 2008, 13,000 units of flat panel displays have been produced and sold during the current year. Analysis of the domestic market indicates that 4,400 additional units are expected to be sold during the remainder of the year at the normal product price determined under the total cost concept. On September 3, Plasma Labs Inc. received an offer from Vision Systems Inc. for 2,600 units of flat panel displays at $255 each. Vision Systems Inc. will market the units in Canada under its own brand name, and no selling and administrative expenses associated with the sale will be incurred by Plasma Labs Inc. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic sales of flat panel displays, and the additional units could be produced using existing capacity.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report of the proposed sale to Vision Systems Inc.

b. Based upon the differential analysis report in part (a), should the proposal be accepted?

atlas steel company produces three grades of steel high good and regular grade each 647840

Atlas Steel Company produces three grades of steel: high, good, and regular grade. Each of these products (grades) has high demand in the market, and Atlas is able to sell as much as it can produce of all three. The furnace operation is a bottleneck in the process and is running at 100% of capacity. Atlas wants to improve steel operation profitability. The variable conversion cost is $6 per process hour. The fixed cost is $1,530,000. In addition, the cost analyst was able to determine the following information about the three products:

 

High Grade

Good Grade

Regular Grade

Budgeted units produced

6,000

6,000

6,000

Total process hours per unit

15

15

12

Furnace hours per unit

5

3

2

Unit selling price

$375

$350

$320

Direct materials cost per unit

$160

$140

$130

The furnace operation is part of the total process for each of these three products. Thus, for example, 5 of the 15 hours required to process High Grade steel are associated with the furnace.

Instructions

1. Determine the unit contribution margin for each product.

2. Provide an analysis to determine the relative product profit abilities, assuming that the furnace is a bottleneck.

3. Assume that management wishes to improve profitability by increasing prices on selected products. At what price would High and Good grades need to be offered in order to produce the same relative profitability as Regular Grade steel?

on december 1 open gate distribution company is considering leasing a building and b 647841

On December 1, Open Gate Distribution Company is considering leasing a building and buying the necessary equipment to operate a public warehouse. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $800,000 of 7% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 14 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled:

Cost of equipment

$800,000

Life of equipment

14 years

Estimated residual value of equipment

$170,000

Yearly costs to operate the warehouse, excluding

 

depreciation of equipment

$105,000

Yearly expected revenues—years 1–7

$250,000

Yearly expected revenues—years 8–14

$190,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a report as of December 1, 2008, presenting a differential analysis of the proposed operation of the warehouse for the 14 years as compared with present conditions.

2. Based on the results disclosed by the differential analysis, should the proposal be accepted?

3. If the proposal is accepted, what is the total estimated income from operations of the warehouse for the 14 years?

saginaw tooling company is considering replacing a machine that has been used in its 647842

Saginaw Tooling Company is considering replacing a machine that has been used in its factory for two years. Relevant data associated with the operations of the old machine and the new machine, neither of which has any estimated residual value, are as follows:

Old Machine

 

Cost of machine, 8 year life

$ 96,000

Annual depreciation (straight line)

12,000

Annual manufacturing costs, excluding depreciation

26,000

Annual nonmanufacturing operating expenses

9,500

Annual revenue

45,000

Current estimated selling price of the machine

58,000

New Machine

 

Cost of machine, 6 year life

$126,000

Annual depreciation (straight line)

21,000

Estimated annual manufacturing costs, exclusive of depreciation

9,000

Annual nonmanufacturing operating expenses and revenue are not expected to be affected by purchase of the new machine.

Instructions

1. Prepare a differential analysis report as of March 22, 2008, comparing operations utilizing the new machine with operations using the present equipment. The analysis should indicate the differential income that would result over the 6 year period if the new machine is acquired.

2. List other factors that should be considered before a final decision is reached.

mercury athletic shoe company is planning a one month campaign for april to promote 647843

Mercury Athletic Shoe Company is planning a one month campaign for April to promote sales of one of its two shoe products. A total of $125,000 has been budgeted for advertising, contests, redeemable coupons, and other promotional activities. The following data have been assembled for their possible usefulness in deciding which of the products to select for the campaign.

 

Tennis

Walking

 

Shoe

Shoe

Unit selling price

$112

$98

Unit production costs:

 

 

Direct materials

$ 22

$17

Direct labor

12

10

Variable factory overhead

5

7

Fixed factory overhead

9

12

Total unit production costs

$ 48

$46

Unit variable selling expenses

9

12

Unit fixed selling expenses

12

16

Total unit costs

$ 69

$74

Operating income per unit‘

$ 43

$24

No increase in facilities would be necessary to produce and sell the increased output. It is anticipated that 5,000 additional units of tennis shoes or 7,500 additional units of walking shoes could be sold without changing the unit selling price of either product.

Instructions

1. Prepare a differential analysis report as of March 13, 2008, presenting the additional revenue and additional costs anticipated from the promotion of tennis shoes and walking shoes.

2. The sales manager had tentatively decided to promote tennis shoes, estimating that operating income would be increased by $90,000 ($43 operating income per unit for 5,000 units, less promotion expenses of $125,000). The manager also believed that the selection of walking shoes would increase operating income by $55,000 ($24 operating income per unit for 7,500 units, less promotion expenses of $125,000). State briefly your reasons for supporting or opposing the tentative decision.

stay glow company recently began production of a new product the halogen light which 647845

Stay Glow Company recently began production of a new product, the halogen light, which required the investment of $1,000,000 in assets. The costs of producing and selling 18,000 halogen lights are estimated as follows:

Variable costs per unit:

 

Fixed costs:

 

Direct materials

$23.00

Factory overhead

$216,000

Direct labor

12.00

Selling and administrative expenses

54,000

Factory overhead

5.00

 

 

Selling and administrative expenses

5.00

 

 

Total

$45.00

 

 

Stay Glow Company is currently considering establishing a selling price for the halogen light. The president of Stay Glow Company has decided to use the cost plus approach to product pricing and has indicated that the halogen light must earn a 9% rate of return on invested assets.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of the halogen light.

2. Assuming that the total cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and (c) the selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).

3. Assuming that the product cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of the halogen light.

4. Assuming that the variable cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and (c) the selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).

5. Comment on any additional considerations that could influence establishing the selling price for the halogen light.

6. Assume that as of June 1, 2008, 7,000 units of halogen light have been produced and sold during the current year. Analysis of the domestic market indicates that 9,000 additional units of the halogen light are expected to be sold during the remainder of the year at the normal product price determined under the total cost concept. On June 5, Stay Glow Company received an offer from Night Light Inc. for 2,000 units of the halogen light at $46 each. Night Light Inc. will market the units in Japan under its own brand name, and no selling and administrative expenses associated with the sale will be incurred by Stay Glow Company. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic sales of the halogen light, and the additional units could be produced using existing capacity.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report of the proposed sale to Night Light Inc.

b. Based upon the differential analysis report in part (a), should the proposal be accepted?

gulf coast chemical company produces three products ethylene butane and ester each o 647846

Gulf Coast Chemical Company produces three products: ethylene, butane, and ester. Each of these products has high demand in the market, and Gulf Coast Chemical is able to sell as much as it can produce of all three. The reaction operation is a bottleneck in the process and is running at 100% of capacity. Gulf Coast wants to improve chemical operation profitability. The variable conversion cost is $8 per process hour. The fixed cost is $990,000. In addition, the cost analyst was able to determine the following information about the three products:

 

Ethylene

Butane

Ester

Budgeted units produced

18,000

18,000

18,000

Total process hours per unit

3

3

2

Reactor hours per unit

0.8

0.5

0.4

Unit selling price

$168

$128

$115

Direct materials cost per unit

$110

$75

$85

The reaction operation is part of the total process for each of these three products. Thus, for example, 0.8 of the 3 hours required to process Ethylene are associated with the reactor.

Instructions

1. Determine the unit contribution margin for each product.

2. Provide an analysis to determine the relative product profit abilities, assuming that the reactor is a bottleneck.

3. Assume that management wishes to improve profitability by increasing prices on selected products. At what price would Ethylene and Ester need to be offered in order to produce the same relative profitability as Butane?

if you are not familiar with priceline com inc go to its web site assume that an ind 647849

If you are not familiar with Priceline.com Inc., go to its Web site. Assume that an individual bids $60 on Priceline.com for a room in Dallas, Texas, on August 24. Assume that August 24 is a Saturday, with low expected room demand in Dallas at a Marriott International, Inc., hotel, so there is excess room capacity. The fully allocated cost per room per day is assumed from hotel records as follows:

Housekeeping labor cost*

$30

Hotel depreciation expense

42

Cost of room supplies (soap, paper, etc.)

5

Laundry labor and material cost*

10

Cost of desk staff

5

Utility cost (mostly air conditioning)

3

Total cost per room per day

$95

*Both housekeeping and laundry staff include many part time

workers, so that the workload is variable to demand.

Should Marriott accept the customer bid for a night in Dallas on August 24 at a price of $60?

the president of monarch materials inc todd bentley asked the controller megan mayfi 647850

The president of Monarch Materials Inc., Todd Bentley, asked the controller, Megan Mayfield, to provide an analysis of a make vs. buy decision for material TS 101. The material is presently processed in Monarch’s Roanoke facility. TS 101 is used in processing of final products in the facility. Megan determined the following unit production costs for the material as of March 15, 2008:

Direct materials

$ 7.50

Direct labor

2.70

Variable factory overhead

1.20

Fixed factory overhead

2.00

Total production costs per unit

$13.40

In addition, material TS 101 requires special hazardous material handling. This special handling adds an additional cost of $1.60 for each unit produced.

Material TS 101 can be purchased from an overseas supplier. The supplier does not presently do business with Monarch Materials. This supplier promises monthly delivery of the material at a price of $10.10 per unit, plus transportation cost of $0.40 per unit. In addition, Monarch would need to incur additional administrative costs to satisfy import regulations for hazardous material. These additional administrative costs are estimated to be $0.80 per purchased unit. Each purchased unit would also require special hazardous material handling of $1.60 per unit.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report to support Megan’s recommendation on whether to continue making material TS 101 or whether to purchase the material from the overseas supplier.

b. What additional considerations should Megan address in the recommendation?

the following conversation took place between theo james vice president of marketing 647851

The following conversation took place between Theo James, vice president of marketing, and Lee Corso, controller of Astor Computer Company:

Theo: I am really excited about our new computer coming out. I think it will be a real market success.

Lee: I’m really glad you think so. I know that our price is one variable that will determine if it’s a success. If our price is too high, our competitors will be the ones with the market success.

Theo: Don’t worry about it. We’ll just mark our product cost up by 25% and it will all work out. I know we’ll make money at those markups. By the way, what does the estimated product cost look like?

Lee: Well, there’s the rub. The product cost looks as if it’s going to come in at around $2,400. With a 25% markup, that will give us a selling price of $3,000.

Theo: I see your concern. That’s a little high. Our research indicates that computer prices are dropping by about 20% per year and that this type of computer should be selling for around $2,500 when we release it to the market.

Lee: I’m not sure what to do.

Theo: Let me see if I can help. How much of the $2,400 is fixed cost?

Lee: About $400.

Theo: There you go. The fixed cost is sunk. We don’t need to consider it in our pricing decision. If we reduce the product cost by $400, the new price with a 25% markup would be right at $2,500. Boy, I was really worried for a minute there. I knew something wasn’t right.

a. If you were Lee, how would you respond to Theo’s solution to the pricing problem?

b. How might target costing be used to help solve this pricing dilemma?

as a preliminary to requesting budget estimates of sales costs and expenses for the 647759

As a preliminary to requesting budget estimates of sales, costs, and expenses for the fiscal year beginning January 1, 2009, the following tentative trial balance as of December 31, 2008, is prepared by the Accounting Department of Coconut Grove Soap Co.:

Cash

$ 90,000

 

Accounts Receivable

108,600

 

Finished Goods

72,400

 

Work in Process

27,500

 

 

 

 

Materials

49,700

 

Prepaid Expenses

3,400

 

Plant and Equipment

350,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Plant and Equipment

 

$130,400

Accounts Payable

 

57,000

Common Stock, $10 par

 

185,000

Retained Earnings

 

329,200

 

$701,600

$701,600

Factory output and sales for 2009 are expected to total 215,000 units of product, which are to be sold at $4.60 per unit. The quantities and costs of the inventories at December 31, 2009, are expected to remain unchanged from the balances at the beginning of the year.

Budget estimates of manufacturing costs and operating expenses for the year are summarized as follows:

 

Estimated Costs and Expenses

 

Fixed

Variable

 

(Total for Year)

(Per Unit Sold)

Cost of goods manufactured and sold:

 

 

Direct materials

$0.80

Direct labor

0.45

Factory overhead:

 

 

Depreciation of plant and equipment

$45,000

Other factory overhead

7,000

0.30

Selling expenses:

 

 

Sales salaries and commissions

40,000

0.35

Advertising

55,000

Miscellaneous selling expense

4,500

0.15

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Office and officers salaries

67,100

0.17

Supplies

3,000

0.06

Miscellaneous administrative expense

2,000

0.09

Balances of accounts receivable, prepaid expenses, and accounts payable at the end of the year are not expected to differ significantly from the beginning balances. Federal income tax of $80,000 on 2009 taxable income will be paid during 2009. Regular quarterly cash dividends of $0.80 a share are expected to be declared and paid in March, June, September, and December. It is anticipated that fixed assets will be purchased for $60,000 cash in May.

Instructions

1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for 2009.

2. Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of December 31, 2009, with supporting calculations.

the budget director of kingdom furniture company requests estimates of sales product 647761

The budget director of Kingdom Furniture Company requests estimates of sales, production, and other operating data from the various administrative units every month. Selected information concerning sales and production for May 2008 is summarized as follows:

a. Estimated sales of King and Prince chairs for May by sales territory:

Northern Domestic:

 

King

5,800 units at $650 per unit

Prince

6,700 units at $420 per unit

Southern Domestic:

 

King

3,500 units at $590 per unit

Prince

3,800 units at $480 per unit

International:

 

King

1,200 units at $700 per unit

Prince

1,000 units at $530 per unit

b. Estimated inventories at May 1:

Direct materials:

Finished products:

Fabric

5,000 sq. yds.

King

. . . 920 units

Wood

6,500 lineal ft.

Prince

. . . 260 units

Filler

3,000 cu. ft.

 

 

Springs

7,250 units

 

 

c. Desired inventories at May 31:

Direct materials:

 

Finished products:

 

Fabric

4,400 sq. yds.

King

. . . 800 units

Wood

5,800 lineal ft.

Prince

. . . 400 units

Filler

3,100 cu. ft.

 

 

Springs

7,500 units

 

 

d. Direct materials used in production:

In manufacture of King:

 

Fabric

4.6 sq. yds. per unit of product

Wood

35 lineal ft. per unit of product

Filler

3.8 cu. ft. per unit of product

Springs

14 units per unit of product

In manufacture of Prince:

 

Fabric

3 sq. yds. per unit of product

Wood

25 lineal ft. per unit of product

Filler

3.2 cu. ft. per unit of product

Springs

10 units per unit of product

e. Anticipated purchase price for direct materials:

Fabric

$8.00 per square yard

Filler

$3.50 per cubic foot

Wood

7.00 per lineal foot

Springs

4.50 per unit

f. Direct labor requirements:

King:

 

Framing Department

2.5 hours at $12 per hour

Cutting Department

1.5 hours at $9 per hour

Upholstery Department

2.0 hours at $15 per hour

Prince:

 

Framing Department

1.8 hours at $12 per hour

Cutting Department

0.5 hour at $9 per hour

Upholstery Department

2.3 hours at $15 per hour

Instructions

1. Prepare a sales budget for May.

2. Prepare a production budget for May.

3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for May.

4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for May.

the budget director of safety athletic inc with the assistance of the controller tre 647762

The budget director of Safety Athletic Inc., with the assistance of the controller, treasurer, production manager, and sales manager, has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for January 2008:

a. Estimated sales for January:

Batting helmet

3,500 units at $65 per unit

Football helmet

6,800 units at $130 per unit

b. Estimated inventories at January 1:

Direct materials:

 

Finished products:

 

Plastic

900 lbs.

Batting helmet

270 units at $32 per unit

Foam lining

490 lbs.

Football helmet

400 units at $52 per unit

c. Desired inventories at January 31:

Direct materials:

 

Finished products:

 

Plastic

1,240 lbs.

Batting helmet

240 units at $34 per unit

Foam lining

470 lbs.

Football helmet

360 units at $55 per unit

d. Direct materials used in production:

In manufacture of batting helmet:

 

Plastic

1.20 lbs. per unit of product

Foam lining

0.50 lb. per unit of product

In manufacture of football helmet:

 

Plastic

2.80 lbs. per unit of product

Foam lining

1.40 lbs. per unit of product

e. Anticipated cost of purchases and beginning and ending inventory of direct materials:

Plastic

$7.00 per lb.

Foam lining

$4.00 per lb.

f. Direct labor requirements:

Batting helmet:

 

Molding Department

0.20 hour at $14 per hour

Assembly Department

0.50 hour at $12 per hour

Football helmet:

 

Molding Department

0.30 hour at $14 per hour

Assembly Department

0.65 hour at $12 per hour

g. Estimated factory overhead costs for January:

Indirect factory wages

$105,000

Power and light

$16,000

Depreciation of plant and equipment

30,000

Insurance and property tax

8,700

h. Estimated operating expenses for January:

Sales salaries expense

$265,800

Advertising expense

135,600

Office salaries expense

84,300

Depreciation expense—office equipment

5,200

Telephone expense—selling

3,500

Telephone expense—administrative

700

Travel expense—selling

43,100

Office supplies expense

4,900

Miscellaneous administrative expense

5,200

i. Estimated other income and expense for January:

Interest revenue

$14,500

Interest expense

18,700

j. Estimated tax rate: 30%

Instructions

1. Prepare a sales budget for January.

2. Prepare a production budget for January.

3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for January.

4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for January.

5. Prepare a factory overhead cost budget for January.

6. Prepare a cost of goods sold budget for January. Work in process at the beginning of January is estimated to be $12,500, and work in process at the end of January is desired to be $13,500.

7. Prepare a selling and administrative expenses budget for January.

8. Prepare a budgeted income statement for January.

the controller of swift shoes inc instructs you to prepare a monthly cash budget for 647763

The controller of Swift Shoes Inc. instructs you to prepare a monthly cash budget for the next three months. You are presented with the following budget information:

 

April

May

June

Sales

$100,000

$150,000

$180,000

Manufacturing costs

40,000

50,000

54,000

Selling and administrative expenses

32,000

38,000

45,000

Capital expenditures

30,000

         

The company expects to sell about 10% of its merchandise for cash. Of sales on account, 60% are expected to be collected in full in the month following the sale and the remainder the following month. Depreciation, insurance, and property tax expense represent $18,000 of the estimated monthly manufacturing costs. The annual insurance premium is paid in July, and the annual property taxes are paid in November. Of the remainder of the manufacturing costs, 80% are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance in the following month.

Current assets as of April 1 include cash of $40,000, marketable securities of $65,000, and accounts receivable of $117,800 ($85,000 from March sales and $32,800 from February sales). Sales on account in February and March were $82,000 and $85,000, respectively. Current liabilities as of April 1 include a $50,000, 12%, 90 day note payable due June 20 and $29,000 of accounts payable incurred in March for manufacturing costs. All selling and administrative expenses are paid in cash in the period they are incurred. It is expected that $3,500 in dividends will be received in April. An estimated income tax payment of $34,000 will be made in May. Swift Shoes’ regular quarterly dividend of $8,000 is expected to be declared in May and paid in June. Management desires to maintain a minimum cash balance of $35,000.

Instructions

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget and supporting schedules for April, May, and June 2008.

2. On the basis of the cash budget prepared in part (1), what recommendation should be made to the controller?

as a preliminary to requesting budget estimates of sales costs and expenses for the 647764

As a preliminary to requesting budget estimates of sales, costs, and expenses for the fiscal year beginning January 1, 2009, the following tentative trial balance as of December 31, 2008, is prepared by the Accounting Department of Cornerstone Publishing Co.:

Cash

$ 122,500

 

Accounts Receivable

246,700

 

Finished Goods

157,800

 

Work in Process

37,800

 

Materials

57,800

 

Prepaid Expenses

4,500

 

Plant and Equipment

620,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Plant and Equipment

 

$ 267,000

Accounts Payable

 

184,500

Common Stock, $15 par

 

450,000

Retained Earnings

 

345,600

 

$1,247,100

$1,247,100

Factory output and sales for 2009 are expected to total 30,000 units of product, which are to be sold at $110 per unit. The quantities and costs of the inventories at December 31, 2009, are expected to remain unchanged from the balances at the beginning of the year.

Budget estimates of manufacturing costs and operating expenses for the year are summarized as follows:

 

Estimated Costs and Expenses

 

Fixed

Variable

 

(Total for Year)

(Per Unit Sold)

Cost of goods manufactured and sold:

 

 

Direct materials

$26.00

Direct labor

8.50

Factory overhead:

 

 

Depreciation of plant and equipment

$ 40,000

Other factory overhead

12,000

5.00

Selling expenses:

 

 

Sales salaries and commissions

118,000

14.00

Advertising

114,200

Miscellaneous selling expense

10,500

2.15

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Office and officers salaries

83,600

6.50

Supplies

4,400

1.25

Miscellaneous administrative expense

2,000

1.45

Balances of accounts receivable, prepaid expenses, and accounts payable at the end of the year are not expected to differ significantly from the beginning balances. Federal income tax of $350,000 on 2009 taxable income will be paid during 2009. Regular quarterly cash dividends of $1.75 a share are expected to be declared and paid in March, June, September, and December. It is anticipated that fixed assets will be purchased for $180,000 cash in May.

Instructions

1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for 2009.

2. Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of December 31, 2009, with supporting calculations.

the director of marketing for mobile computer co sheri keller had the following disc 647765

The director of marketing for Mobile Computer Co., Sheri Keller, had the following discussion with the company controller, Isaiah Johnson, on July 26 of the current year:

Sheri: Isaiah, it looks like I’m going to spend much less than indicated on my July budget.

Isaiah: I’m glad to hear it.

Sheri: Well, I’m not so sure it’s good news. I’m concerned that the president will see that I’m under budget and reduce my budget in the future. The only reason that I look good is that we’ve delayed an advertising campaign. Once the campaign hits in September, I’m sure my actual expenditures will go up. You see, we are also having our sales convention in September. Having the advertising campaign and the convention at the same time is going to kill my September numbers.

Isaiah: I don’t think that’s anything to worry about. We all expect some variation in actual spending month to month. What’s really important is staying within the budgeted targets for the year. Does that look as if it’s going to be a problem?

Sheri: I don’t think so, but just the same, I’d like to be on the safe side.

Isaiah: What do you mean?

Sheri: Well, this is what I’d like to do. I want to pay the convention related costs in advance this month. I’ll pay the hotel for room and convention space and purchase the airline tickets in advance. In this way, I can charge all these expenditures to July’s budget. This would cause my actual expenses to come close to budget for July. Moreover, when the big advertising campaign hits in September, I won’t have to worry about expenditures for the convention on my September budget as well. The convention costs will already be paid. Thus, my September expenses should be pretty close to budget.

Isaiah: I can’t tell you when to make your convention purchases, but I’m not too sure that it should be expensed on July’s budget.

Sheri: What’s the problem? It looks like “no harm, no foul” to me. I can’t see that there’s anything wrong with this—it’s just smart management.

How should Isaiah Johnson respond to Sheri Keller’s request to expense the advanced payments for convention related costs against July’s budget?

a bank manager of citizens bank inc uses the managerial accounting system to track t 647767

A bank manager of Citizens Bank Inc. uses the managerial accounting system to track the costs of operating the various departments within the bank. The departments include Cash Management, Trust Commercial Loans, Mortgage Loans, Operations, Credit Card, and Branch Services. The budget and actual results for the Operations Department are as follows:

Resources

Budget

Actual

Salaries

$150,000

$150,000

Benefits

30,000

30,000

Supplies

45,000

42,000

Travel

20,000

30,000

Training

25,000

35,000

Overtime

25,000

20,000

Total

$295,000

$307,000

Excess of actual over budget

$ 12,000

 

a. What information is provided by the budget? Specifically, what questions can the bank manager ask of the Operations Department manager?

b. What information does the budget fail to provide? Specifically, could the budget information be presented differently to provide even more insight for the bank manager?

domino s pizza l l c operates pizza delivery and carryout restaurants the annual rep 647768

Domino’s Pizza L.L.C. operates pizza delivery and carryout restaurants. The annual report describes its business as follows:

We offer a focused menu of high quality, value priced pizza with three types of crust (Hand Tossed, Thin Crust, and Deep Dish), along with buffalo wings, bread sticks, cheesy bread, CinnaStix®, and Coca Cola® products. Our hand tossed pizza is made from fresh dough produced in our regional distribution centers. We prepare every pizza using real cheese, pizza sauce made from fresh tomatoes, and a choice of high quality meat and vegetable toppings in generous portions. Our focused menu and use of premium ingredients enable us to consistently and efficiently produce the highest quality pizza.

Over the 41 years since our founding, we have developed a simple, cost efficient model. We offer a limited menu, our stores are designed for delivery and carry out, and we do not generally offer dine in service. As a result, our stores require relatively small, lower rent locations and limited capital expenditures.

How would a master budget support planning, directing, and control for Domino’s?

at the beginning of the year kevin frey decided to prepare a cash budget for the yea 647769

At the beginning of the year, Kevin Frey decided to prepare a cash budget for the year, based upon anticipated cash receipts and payments. The estimates in the budget represent a “best guess.” The budget is as follows:

Expected annual cash receipts:

 

 

Salary from part time job

$10,500

 

Salary from summer job

5,000

 

Total receipts

 

$15,500

Expected annual cash payments:

 

 

Tuition

$ 5,000

 

Books

400

 

Rent

4,200

 

Food

2,500

 

Utilities

900

 

Entertainment

4,000

 

Total payments

 

17,000

Net change in cash

 

$ (1,500)

1. What does this budget suggest? In what ways is this information useful to Kevin?

2. a. Some items in the budget are more certain than are others. Which items are the most certain? Which items are the most uncertain? What are the implications of these different levels of certainty to Kevin’s planning?

b. Some payment items are more controllable than others. Assuming that Kevin plans to go to school, classify the items as controllable, partially controllable, or not controllable. What are the implications of controllable items to planning?

3. What actions could Kevin take in order to avoid having the anticipated shortfall of $1,500 at the end of the year?

4. What does this budget fail to consider, and what are the implications of these omissions to Kevin’s planning?

inez company recently began production of a new product m which required the investm 647780

Inez Company recently began production of a new product, M, which required the investment of $1,600,000 in assets. The costs of producing and selling 80,000 units of Product M are estimated as follows:

Variable costs:

 

Direct materials

$ 10.00 per unit

Direct labor

6.00

Factory overhead

4.00

Selling and administrative expenses

5.00

Total

$ 25.00 per unit

Fixed costs:

 

Factory overhead

$800,000

Selling and administrative expenses

400,000

Inez Company is currently considering establishing a selling price for Product M. The president of Inez Company has decided to use the cost plus approach to product pricing and has indicated that Product M must earn a 10% rate of return on invested assets.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of Product M.

2. Assuming that the total cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of Product M.

3. Assuming that the product cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of Product M.

4. Assuming that the variable cost concept is used, determine (a) the cost amount per unit, (b) the markup percentage, and (c) the selling price of Product M.

5. Assume that for the current year, the selling price of Product M was $42 per unit. To date, 60,000 units have been produced and sold, and analysis of the domestic market indicates that 15,000 additional units are expected to be sold during the remainder of the year. Recently, Inez Company received an offer from Wong Inc. for 4,000 units of Product M at $28 each. Wong Inc. will market the units in Korea under its own brand name, and no selling and administrative expenses associated with the sale will be incurred by Inez Company. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic sales of Product M, and the additional units could be produced during the current year, using existing capacity. (a) Prepare a differential analysis report of the proposed sale to Wong Inc. (b) Based upon the differential analysis report in part (a), should the proposal be accepted?

mendosa company produces three products all the products use a furnace operation whi 647785

Mendosa Company produces three products. All the products use a furnace operation, which is a production bottleneck. The following information is available:

 

Product 1

Product 2

Product 3

Unit volume—March

1,000

1,500

1,000

Per unit information:

 

 

 

Sales price

$35

$33

$29

Variable cost

15

15

15

Unit contribution margin

$20

$18

$14

Furnace hours

4

3

2

From a profitability perspective, which product should be emphasized in April’s advertising campaign?

A. Product 1

B. Product 2

C. Product 3

D. All three

a condensed income statement by product line for canadian beverage inc indicated the 647812

A condensed income statement by product line for Canadian Beverage Inc. indicated the following for Lemon Mist for the past year:

Sales

$362,000

Cost of goods sold

185,000

Gross profit

$177,000

Operating expenses

215,000

Loss from operations

$ (38,000)

It is estimated that 23% of the cost of goods sold represents fixed factory overhead costs and that 27% of the operating expenses are fixed. Since Lemon Mist is only one of many products, the fixed costs will not be materially affected if the product is discontinued.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report, dated January 3, 2008, for the proposed discontinuance of Lemon Mist.

b. Should Lemon Mist be retained? Explain.

the condensed product line income statement for country ceramics company for the cur 647813

The condensed product line income statement for Country Ceramics Company for the current year is as follows:

Country Ceramics Company

Product Line Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2008

 

Bowls

Plates

Cups

Sales

$132,000

$108,000

$83,000

Cost of goods sold

71,000

55,000

49,000

Gross profit

$ 61,000

$ 53,000

$34,000

Selling and administrative expenses

35,000

24,000

38,000

Income from operations

$ 26,000

$ 29,000

$ (4,000)

         

Fixed costs are 15% of the cost of goods sold and 28% of the selling and administrative expenses. Country Ceramics assumes that fixed costs would not be materially affected if the Cups line were discontinued.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report for all three products for 2008.

b. Should the Cups line be retained? Explain.

the charles schwab corporation is one of the more innovative brokerage and financial 647814

The Charles Schwab Corporation is one of the more innovative brokerage and financial service companies in the United States. The company recently provided information about its major business segments as follows (in millions):

 

Individual

Institutional

 

 

Investor

Investor

U.S. Trust

Revenues

$2,742

$803

$832

Income from operations

758

317

103

Depreciation

145

29

33

a. How do you believe Schwab defines the difference between the “Individual Investor” and “Institutional Investor” segments?

b. Provide a specific example of a variable and fixed cost in the “Individual Investor” segment.

c. Estimate the contribution margin for each segment.

d. If Schwab decided to sell its “Institutional Investor” accounts to another company, estimate how much operating income would decline.

on the basis of the following data the general manager of feet to go inc decided to 647815

On the basis of the following data, the general manager of Feet to Go Inc. decided to discontinue Children’s Shoes because it reduced income from operations by $26,000. What is the flaw in this decision?

Sole Mates Inc.

Product Line Income Statement

For the Year Ended August 31, 2008

 

Children’s

Men’s

Women’s

 

 

Shoes

Shoes

Shoes

Total

Sales

$150,000

$300,000

$500,000

$950,000

Costs of goods sold:

 

 

 

 

Variable costs

$ 90,000

$150,000

$220,000

$460,000

Fixed costs

40,000

60,000

120,000

220,000

Total cost of goods sold

$130,000

$210,000

$340,000

$680,000

Gross profit

$ 20,000

$ 90,000

$160,000

$270,000

Selling and administrative expenses:

 

 

 

 

Variable selling and admin. expenses

$ 30,000

$ 45,000

$ 95,000

$170,000

Fixed selling and admin. expenses

16,000

20,000

25,000

61,000

Total selling and admin. expenses

$ 46,000

$ 65,000

$120,000

$231,000

Income (loss) from operations

$ (26,000)

$ 25,000

$ 40,000

$ 39,000

hart computer company has been purchasing carrying cases for its portable computers 647816

Hart Computer Company has been purchasing carrying cases for its portable computers at a delivered cost of $68 per unit. The company, which is currently operating below full capacity, charges factory overhead to production at the rate of 35% of direct labor cost. The fully absorbed unit costs to produce comparable carrying cases are expected to be:

Direct materials

$25.00

Direct labor

32.00

Factory overhead (35% of direct labor)

11.20

Total cost per unit

$68.20

If Hart Computer Company manufactures the carrying cases, fixed factory overhead costs will not increase and variable factory overhead costs associated with the cases are expected to be 25% of the direct labor costs.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report, dated June 5, 2008, for the make or buy decision.

b. On the basis of the data presented, would it be advisable to make the carrying cases or to continue buying them? Explain.

the association of retired educators are employs five people in its publication depa 647817

The Association of Retired Educators (ARE) employs five people in its Publication Department. These people lay out pages for pamphlets, brochures, and other publications for the ARE membership. The pages are delivered to an outside company for printing. The company is considering an outside publication service for the layout work. The outside service is quoting a price of $18 per layout page. The budget for the Publication Department for 2008 is as follows:

Salaries

$225,000

Benefits

38,000

Supplies

32,000

Office expenses

25,000

Office depreciation

22,000

Computer depreciation

30,000

Total

$372,000

The department expects to lay out 17,500 pages for 2008. The computers used by the department have an estimated salvage value of $5,000. The Publication Department office space would be used for future administrative needs, if the department’s function were purchased from the outside.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report, dated December 15, 2007, for the make or buy decision, considering the 2008 differential revenues and costs.

b. On the basis of your analysis in part (a), should the page layout work be purchased from an outside company?

c. What additional considerations might factor into the decision making?

bay area electronics company assembles circuit boards by using a manually operated m 647819

Bay Area Electronics Company assembles circuit boards by using a manually operated machine to insert electronic components. The original cost of the machine is $140,000, the accumulated depreciation is $110,000, its remaining useful life is 15 years, and its salvage value is negligible. On January 20, 2008, a proposal was made to replace the present manufacturing procedure with a fully automatic machine that will cost $270,000. The automatic machine has an estimated useful life of 15 years and no significant salvage value. For use in evaluating the proposal, the accountant accumulated the following annual data on present and proposed operations:

 

Present

Proposed

 

Operations

Operations

Sales

$275,000

$275,000

Direct materials

$ 80,000

$ 80,000

Direct labor

45,000

Power and maintenance

7,500

32,000

Taxes, insurance, etc.

3,500

8,500

Selling and administrative expenses

80,000

80,000

Total expenses

$216,000

$200,500

a. Prepare a differential analysis report for the proposal to replace the machine. Include in the analysis both the net differential change in costs anticipated over the 15 years and the net annual differential change in costs anticipated.

b. Based only on the data presented, should the proposal be accepted?

c. What are some of the other factors that should be considered before a final decision is made?

golden roast coffee company produces columbian coffee in batches of 7 700 pounds 647821

Golden Roast Coffee Company produces Columbian coffee in batches of 7,700 pounds. The standard quantity of materials required in the process is 7,700 pounds, which cost $5.00 per pound. Columbian coffee can be sold without further processing for $8.90 per pound. Columbian coffee can also be processed further to yield Decaf Columbian, which can be sold for $11.60 per pound. The processing into Decaf Columbian requires additional processing costs of $18,326 per batch. The additional processing will also cause a 6% loss of product due to evaporation.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report for the decision to sell or process further.

b. Should Golden Roast sell Columbian coffee or process further and sell Decaf Columbian?

c. Determine the price of Decaf Columbian that would cause neither an advantage or disadvantage for processing further and selling Decaf Columbian.

workman s denim co has an annual plant capacity of 65 000 units and current producti 647822

Workman’s Denim Co. has an annual plant capacity of 65,000 units, and current production is 45,000 units. Monthly fixed costs are $40,000, and variable costs are $24 per unit. The present selling price is $36 per unit. On January 18, 2008, the company received an offer from Marshall Company for 16,000 units of the product at $31 each. Marshall Company will market the units in a foreign country under its own brand name. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic selling price or quantity of sales of Workman’s Denim Co.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report for the proposed sale to Marshall Company.

b. Briefly explain the reason why accepting this additional business will increase operating income.

c. What is the minimum price per unit that would produce a contribution margin?

the owner of banner tech a printing company is planning direct labor needs for the u 647708

The owner of Banner Tech, a printing company, is planning direct labor needs for the upcoming year. The owner has provided you with the following information for next year’s plans:

 

One

Two

Three

Four

 

 

Color

Color

Color

Color

Total

Number of banners

100

150

200

400

850

Each color on the banner must be printed one at a time. Thus, for example, a four color banner will need to be run through the printing operation four separate times. The total production volume last year was 425 banners, as shown below.

 

One

Two

Three

 

 

Color

Color

Color

Total

Number of banners

100

125

200

425

As you can see, the four color banner is a new product offering for the upcoming year. The owner believes that the expected 425 unit increase in volume from last year means that direct labor expenses should increase by 100% (425/425). What do you think?

selected information concerning sales and production for cabot co for july 2008 are 647714

Selected information concerning sales and production for Cabot Co. for July 2008 are summarized as follows:

a. Estimated sales:

Product K:

40,000 units at $30.00 per unit

Product L:

20,000 units at $65.00 per unit

b. Estimated inventories, July 1, 2008:

Material A:

4,000 lbs.

Product K: 3,000 units at $17 per unit

$ 51,000

Material B:

3,500 lbs.

Product L: 2,700 units at $35 per unit

94,500

 

 

Total

$145,500

There were no work in process inventories estimated for July 1, 2008.

c. Desired inventories at July 31, 2008:

Material A:

3,000 lbs.

Product K: 2,500 units at $17 per unit

$ 42,500

Material B:

2,500 lbs.

Product L: 2,000 units at $35 per unit

70,000

 

 

Total

$112,500

There were no work in process inventories desired for July 31, 2008.

d. Direct materials used in production:

 

Product K

Product L

Material A:

0.7 lb. per unit

3.5 lbs. per unit

Material B:

1.2 lbs. per unit

1.8 lbs. per unit

e. Unit costs for direct materials:

Material A:

$4.00 per lb.

Material B:

$2.00 per lb.

f. Direct labor requirements:

 

Department 1

Department 2

Product K

0.4 hour per unit

0.15 hour per unit

Product L

0.6 hour per unit

0.25 hour per unit

g.

 

Department 1

Department 2

Direct labor rate

$12.00 per hour

$16.00 per hour

h. Estimated factory overhead costs for July:

Indirect factory wages

$200,000

Depreciation of plant and equipment

40,000

Power and light

25,000

Indirect materials

34,000

Total

$299,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a sales budget for July.

2. Prepare a production budget for July.

3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for July.

4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for July.

5. Prepare a cost of goods sold budget for July.

master electronics company uses flexible budgets that are based on the following dat 647736

At the beginning of the 2008 school year, Monroe Baker decided to prepare a cash budget for the months of September, October, November, and December. The budget must plan for enough cash on December 31 to pay the spring semester tuition, which is the same as the fall tuition. The following information relates to the budget:

Cash balance, September 1 (from a summer job)

$6,500

Purchase season football tickets in September

140

Additional entertainment for each month

225

Pay fall semester tuition on September 3

3,500

Pay rent at the beginning of each month

350

Pay for food each month

215

Pay apartment deposit on September 2 (to be returned Dec. 15)

600

Part time job earnings each month (net of taxes)

800

a. Prepare a cash budget for September, October, November, and December.

b. Are the budgets prepared as static budgets or flexible budgets?

c. What are the budget implications for Monroe Baker?

steelcase inc is one of the largest manufacturers of office furniture in the united 647738

Steelcase Inc. is one of the largest manufacturers of office furniture in the United States. In Grand Rapids, Michigan, it produces filing cabinets in two departments: Fabrication and Trim Assembly. Assume the following information for the Fabrication Department:

Steel per filing cabinet

50 pounds

Direct labor per filing cabinet

18 minutes

Supervisor salaries

$130,000 per month

Depreciation

$20,000 per month

Direct labor rate

$16 per hour

Steel cost

$1.25 per pound

Prepare a flexible budget for 12,000, 15,000, and 18,000 filing cabinets for the month of October 2008, similar to Exhibit 5, assuming that inventories are not significant.

melody audio company manufactures two models of speakers dl and xl based on the foll 647739

Melody Audio Company manufactures two models of speakers, DL and XL. Based on the following production and sales data for September 2007, prepare (a) a sales budget and (b) a production budget.

 

DL

XL

Estimated inventory (units), September 1

380

140

Desired inventory (units), September 30

450

110

Expected sales volume (units):

 

 

East Region

4,400

3,200

West Region

2,950

2,100

Unit sales price

$120.00

$170.00

kimble and sanchez cpas offer three types of services to clients auditing tax and sm 647740

Kimble and Sanchez, CPAs, offer three types of services to clients: auditing, tax, and small business accounting. Based on experience and projected growth, the following billable hours have been estimated for the year ending December 31, 2008:

 

Billable Hours

Audit Department:

 

Staff

34,500

Partners

5,200

Tax Department:

 

Staff

27,700

Partners

4,150

Small Business Accounting Department:

 

Staff

22,800

Partners

6,300

The average billing rate for staff is $120 per hour, and the average billing rate for partners is $240 per hour. Prepare a professional fees earned budget for Kimble and Sanchez, CPAs, for the year ending December 31, 2008, using the following column headings and showing the estimated professional fees by type of service rendered:

Billable Hours

Hourly Rate

Total Revenue

roma frozen pizza inc has determined from its production budget the following estima 647741

Roma Frozen Pizza Inc. has determined from its production budget the following estimated production volumes for 12_ and 16_ frozen pizzas for November 2008:

 

Units

 

12” Pizza

16” Pizza

Budgeted production volume

16,400

25,600

There are three direct materials used in producing the two types of pizza. The quantities of direct materials expected to be used for each pizza are as follows:

 

12” Pizza

16” Pizza

Direct materials:

 

 

Dough

1.00 lb. per unit

1.50 lbs. per unit

Tomato

0.60

0.90

Cheese

0.80

1.30

In addition, Roma has determined the following information about each material:

 

Dough

Tomato

Cheese

Estimated inventory, November 1, 2008

675 lbs.

190 lbs.

525 lbs.

Desired inventory, November 30, 2008

480 lbs.

250 lbs.

375 lbs.

Price per pound

$1.20

$2.40

$2.85

Prepare November’s direct materials purchases budget for Roma Frozen Pizza Inc.

coca cola enterprises is the largest bottler of coca cola in north america the compa 647742

Coca Cola Enterprises is the largest bottler of Coca Cola® in North America. The company purchases Coke® and Sprite® concentrate from The Coca Cola Company, dilutes and mixes the concentrate with carbonated water, and then fills the blended beverage into cans or plastic two liter bottles. Assume that the estimated production for Coke and Sprite two liter bottles at the Chattanooga, Tennessee, bottling plant are as follows for the month of June:

Coke

192,000 two liter bottles

Sprite

148,000 two liter bottles

In addition, assume that the concentrate costs $75 per pound for both Coke and Sprite and is used at a rate of 0.2 pound per 100 liters of carbonated water in blending Coke and 0.15 pound per 100 liters of carbonated water in blending Sprite. Assume that two liter bottles cost $0.07 per bottle and carbonated water costs $0.05 per liter.

Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for June 2008, assuming no changes between beginning and ending inventories for all three materials.

anticipated sales for goodstone tire company were 38 000 passenger car tires and 14 647743

Anticipated sales for Goodstone Tire Company were 38,000 passenger car tires and 14,000 truck tires. There were no anticipated beginning finished goods inventories for either product. The planned ending finished goods inventories were 2,750 units for each product. Rubber and steel belts are used in producing passenger car and truck tires according to the following table:

Rubber

30 lbs. per unit

65 lbs. per unit

Steel belts

4 lbs. per unit

9 lbs. per unit

The purchase prices of rubber and steel are $2.90 and $3.50 per pound, respectively. The desired ending inventories of rubber and steel belts are 45,000 and 9,000 pounds, respectively. The estimated beginning inventories for rubber and steel belts are 72,000 and 6,000 pounds, respectively.

The following direct materials purchases budget was prepared for Goodstone Tire Company:

Goodstone Tire Company

 

 

 

Direct Materials Purchases Budget

 

 

 

For the Year Ending December 31, 2008

 

 

 

 

Rubber

Steel Belts

Total

Units required for production:

 

 

 

Passenger tires

1,140,0001 lbs.

152,0003 lbs.

 

Truck tires

910,0002

126,0004

 

Total

2,050,000 lbs.

278,000 lbs.

 

Unit price

_ $2.90

_ $3.50

$6,918,000

Total direct materials purchases

$5,945,000

$973,000

 

 

1. 38,000 tires × 30 lbs. = 1,140,000 lbs.

2. 14,000 tires ×65 lbs. = 910,000 lbs.

3. 38,000 tires × 4 lbs. = 152,000 lbs.

4. 14,000 tires ×9 lbs. = 126,000 lbs.

Correct the direct materials purchases budget for Goodstone Tire Company.

night rest inn inc operates a downtown hotel property that has 240 rooms on average 647745

Night Rest Inn Inc. operates a downtown hotel property that has 240 rooms. On average, 75% of Night Rest’s rooms are occupied on weekdays, and 50% are occupied during the weekend. The manager has asked you to develop a direct labor budget for the housekeeping and restaurant staff for weekdays and weekends. You have determined that the housekeeping staff requires 45 minutes to clean each occupied room. The housekeeping staff is paid $8 per hour. The restaurant has five full time staff (eight hour day) on duty, regardless of occupancy. However, for every 30 occupied rooms, an additional person is brought in to work in the restaurant for the eight hour day. The restaurant staff is paid $7 per hour.

Determine the estimated housekeeping and restaurant direct labor cost for an average weekday and weekend day. Format the budget in two columns, labeled as weekday and weekend day.

levi strauss co manufactures slacks and jeans under a variety of brand names such as 647746

Levi Strauss & Co. manufactures slacks and jeans under a variety of brand names, such as Dockers® and 501 Jeans®. Slacks and jeans are assembled by a variety of different sewing operations. Assume that the sales budget for Dockers and 501 Jeans shows estimated sales of 23,800 and 46,200 pairs, respectively, for March 2008. The finished goods inventory is assumed as follows:

 

Dockers

501 Jeans

March 1 estimated inventory

320

1,230

March 31 desired inventory

520

2,030

Assume the following direct labor data per 10 pairs of Dockers and 501 Jeans for four different sewing operations:

 

Direct Labor per 10 Pairs

 

Dockers

501 Jeans

Inseam

18 minutes

12 minutes

Outerseam

22

15

Pockets

7

9

Zipper

10

6

Total

57 minutes

42 minutes

a. Prepare a production budget for March. Prepare the budget in two columns: Dockers® and 501 Jeans®.

b. Prepare the March direct labor cost budget for the four sewing operations, assuming a $12 wage per hour for the inseam and outerseam sewing operations and a $14 wage per hour for the pocket and zipper sewing operations. Prepare the direct labor cost budget in four columns: inseam, outerseam, pockets, and zipper.

fresh mint candy company budgeted the following costs for anticipated production for 647747

Fresh Mint Candy Company budgeted the following costs for anticipated production for July 2008:

Advertising expenses

$275,000

Production supervisor wages

$125,000

Manufacturing supplies

14,000

Production control salaries

33,000

Power and light

42,000

Executive officer salaries

205,000

Sales commissions

290,000

Materials management salaries

29,000

Factory insurance

23,000

Factory depreciation

17,000

Prepare a factory overhead cost budget, separating variable and fixed costs. Assume that factory insurance and depreciation are the only factory fixed costs.

dover chemical company uses oil to produce two types of plastic products p1 and p2 d 647748

Dover Chemical Company uses oil to produce two types of plastic products, P1 and P2. Dover budgeted 30,000 barrels of oil for purchase in June for $28 per barrel. Direct labor budgeted in the chemical process was $150,000 for June. Factory overhead was budgeted $275,000 during June. The inventories on June 1 were estimated to be:

Oil

$15,300

P1

8,700

P2

9,200

Work in process

11,800

The desired inventories on June 30 were:

Oil

$12,200

P1

8,300

P2

9,500

Work in process

10,700

Use the preceding information to prepare a cost of goods sold budget for June.

happy tails wholesale inc a pet wholesale supplier was organized on march 1 2008 pro 647750

Happy Tails Wholesale Inc., a pet wholesale supplier, was organized on March 1, 2008. Projected sales for each of the first three months of operations are as follows:

March

$450,000

April

520,000

May

560,000

The company expects to sell 10% of its merchandise for cash. Of sales on account, 50% are expected to be collected in the month of the sale, 40% in the month following the sale, and the remainder in the second month following the sale.

Prepare a schedule indicating cash collections from sales for March, April, and May.

office warehouse supplies inc has cash and carry customers and credit customers offi 647751

Office Warehouse Supplies Inc. has “cash and carry” customers and credit customers. Office Warehouse estimates that 40% of monthly sales are to cash customers, while the remaining sales are to credit customers. Of the credit customers, 30% pay their accounts in the month of sale, while the remaining 70% pay their accounts in the month following the month of sale. Projected sales for the first three months of 2008 are as follows:

January

$220,000

February

275,000

March

260,000

The Accounts Receivable balance on December 31, 2007, was $180,000.

Prepare a schedule of cash collections from sales for January, February, and March.

a learning systems inc was organized on may 31 2009 projected selling and administra 647752

A+ Learning Systems Inc. was organized on May 31, 2009. Projected selling and administrative expenses for each of the first three months of operations are as follows:

June

$114,800

July

124,500

August

129,000

Depreciation, insurance, and property taxes represent $20,000 of the estimated monthly expenses. The annual insurance premium was paid on May 31, and property taxes for the year will be paid in December. Three fourths of the remainder of the expenses are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred, with the balance to be paid in the following month.

Prepare a schedule indicating cash payments for selling and administrative expenses for June, July, and August.

total flex physical therapy inc is planning its cash payments for operations for the 647753

Total Flex Physical Therapy Inc. is planning its cash payments for operations for the fourth quarter (October–December), 2009. The Accrued Expenses Payable balance on October 1 is $22,600. The budgeted expenses for the next three months are as follows:

 

October

November

December

Salaries

$ 58,200

$ 63,500

$ 74,500

Utilities

5,300

5,600

7,100

Other operating expenses

44,700

52,800

62,700

Total

$108,200

$121,900

$144,300

Other operating expenses include $10,500 of monthly depreciation expense and $600 of monthly insurance expense that was prepaid for the year on March 1 of the current year. Of the remaining expenses, 80% are paid in the month in which they are incurred, with the remainder paid in the following month. The Accrued Expenses Payable balance on October 1 relates to the expenses incurred in September.

Prepare a schedule of cash payments for operations for October, November, and December.

rembrandt frame company prepared the following sales budget for the current year 647755

Rembrandt Frame Company prepared the following sales budget for the current year:

 

Unit Sales

Unit Selling

 

Product and Area

Volume

Price

Total Sales

8” × 10” Frame:

 

 

 

East

29,000

$14.00

$ 406,000

Central

22,000

14.00

308,000

West

31,500

14.00

441,000

Total

82,500

 

$1,155,000

12” × 16” Frame:

 

 

 

East

16,000

$24.00

$ 384,000

Central

10,500

24.00

252,000

West

15,000

24.00

360,000

Total

41,500

 

$ 996,000

Total revenue from sales

 

 

$2,151,000

At the end of December 2008, the following unit sales data were reported for the year:

 

Unit Sales

 

8” × 10”

12” × 16”

 

Frame

Frame

East

29,725

16,480

Central

22,770

10,710

West

30,240

14,325

For the year ending December 31, 2009, unit sales are expected to follow the patterns established during the year ending December 31, 2008. The unit selling price for the 8 × 10 × frame is expected to change to $12, and the unit selling price for the 12 × 16 × frame is expected to change to $21, effective January 1, 2009.

Instructions

1. Compute the increase or decrease of actual unit sales for the year ended December 31, 2008, over budget. Place your answers in a columnar table with the following format:

 

Unit Sales,

Increase (Decrease)

 

Year Ended 2008

Actual Over Budget

 

Budget

Actual Sales

Amount

Percent

8” × 10” Frame:

 

 

 

 

East

 

 

 

 

Central

 

 

 

 

West

 

 

 

 

12” _ 16” Frame:

 

 

 

 

East

 

 

 

 

Central

 

 

 

 

West

 

 

 

 

2. Assuming that the trend of sales indicated in part (1) is to continue in 2009, compute the unit sales volume to be used for preparing the sales budget for the year ending December 31, 2009. Place your answers in a columnar table similar to that in part (1) above but with the following column heads. Round budgeted units to the nearest unit.

2008

Percentage

2009

Actual

Increase

Budgeted

Units

(Decrease)

Units (rounded)

3. Prepare a sales budget for the year ending December 31, 2009.

the budget director of outdoor chef grill company requests estimates of sales produc 647756

The budget director of Outdoor Chef Grill Company requests estimates of sales, production, and other operating data from the various administrative units every month. Selected information concerning sales and production for October 2008 is summarized as follows:

a. Estimated sales for October by sales territory:

Maine:

 

Backyard Chef

4,500 units at $800 per unit

Master Chef

1,600 units at $1,600 per unit

Vermont:

 

Backyard Chef

3,800 units at $900 per unit

Master Chef

1,700 units at $1,450 per unit

New Hampshire:

 

Backyard Chef

4,200 units at $850 per unit

Master Chef

1,800 units at $1,700 per unit

b. Estimated inventories at October 1:

Direct materials:

 

Finished products:

 

Grates

1,200 units

Backyard Chef

1,600 units

Stainless steel

2,300 lbs.

Master Chef

500 units

Burner subassemblies

650 units

 

 

Shelves

500 units

 

 

c. Desired inventories at October 31:

Direct materials:

 

Finished products:

 

Grates

900 units

Backyard Chef

1,300 units

Stainless steel

2,000 lbs.

Master Chef

600 units

Burner subassemblies

800 units

 

 

Shelves

450 units

 

 

d. Direct materials used in production:

In manufacture of Backyard Chef:

 

Grates

3 units per unit of product

Stainless steel

25 lbs. per unit of product

Burner subassemblies

2 units per unit of product

Shelves

5 units per unit of product

In manufacture of Master Chef:

 

Grates

6 units per unit of product

Stainless steel

50 lbs. per unit of product

Burner subassemblies

4 units per unit of product

Shelves

6 units per unit of product

e. Anticipated purchase price for direct materials:

Grates

$18 per unit

Burner subassemblies

$115 per unit

Stainless steel

$5 per lb.

Shelves

$6 per unit

f. Direct labor requirements:

Backyard Chef:

 

Stamping Department

0.60 hour at $15 per hour

Forming Department

0.80 hour at $12 per hour

Assembly Department

1.50 hours at $9 per hour

Master Chef:

 

Stamping Department

0.80 hour at $15 per hour

Forming Department

1.60 hours at $12 per hour

Assembly Department

2.50 hours at $9 per hour

Instructions

1. Prepare a sales budget for October.

2. Prepare a production budget for October.

3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for October.

4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for Oct

the controller of santa fe housewares inc instructs you to prepare a monthly cash bu 647758

The controller of Santa Fe Housewares Inc. instructs you to prepare a monthly cash budget for the next three months. You are presented with the following budget information:

 

August

September

October

Sales

$630,000

$715,000

$845,000

Manufacturing costs

350,000

360,000

410,000

Selling and administrative expenses

170,000

205,000

235,000

Capital expenditures

 

 

150,000

The company expects to sell about 10% of its merchandise for cash. Of sales on account, 70% are expected to be collected in full in the month following the sale and the remainder the following month. Depreciation, insurance, and property tax expense represent $25,000 of the estimated monthly manufacturing costs. The annual insurance premium is paid in July, and the annual property taxes are paid in November. Of the remainder of the manufacturing costs, 80% are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance in the following month.

Current assets as of August 1 include cash of $50,000, marketable securities of $85,000, and accounts receivable of $635,000 ($500,000 from July sales and $135,000 from June sales). Sales on account for June and July were $450,000 and $500,000, respectively. Current liabilities as of August 1 include a $100,000, 15%, 90 day note payable due October 20 and $65,000 of accounts payable incurred in July for manufacturing costs. All selling and administrative expenses are paid in cash in the period they are incurred. It is expected that $1,800 in dividends will be received in August. An estimated income tax payment of $39,000 will be made in September. Santa Fe’s regular quarterly dividend of $12,000 is expected to be declared in September and paid in October. Management desires to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000.

Instructions

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget and supporting schedules for August, September, and October.

2. On the basis of the cash budget prepared in part (1), what recommendation should be made to the controller?

great plains railroad decided to use the high low method and operating data from the 647675

Great Plains Railroad decided to use the high low method and operating data from the past six months to estimate the fixed and variable components of transportation costs. The activity base used by Great Plains Railroad is a measure of railroad operating activity, termed “gross ton miles,” which is the total number of tons multiplied by the miles moved.

 

Transportation

 

 

Costs

Gross Ton Miles

January

$1,050,000

285,000

February

1,150,000

325,000

March

1,350,000

400,000

April

1,000,000

250,000

May

1,225,000

375,000

June

1,600,000

450,000

Determine the variable cost per gross ton mile and the fixed cost.

for a recent year mcdonald s had the following sales and expenses in millions 647677

For a recent year, McDonald’s had the following sales and expenses (in millions):

Sales

$15,352

Food and packaging

$ 5,204

Payroll

4,040

Occupancy (rent, depreciation, etc.)

1,022

General, selling, and administrative expenses

2,220

 

$12,486

Income from operations

$ 2,866

Assume that the variable costs consist of food and packaging, payroll, and 40% of the general, selling, and administrative expenses.

a. What is McDonald’s contribution margin? Round to the nearest million.

b. What is McDonald’s contribution margin ratio? Round to two decimal places.

c. How much would income from operations increase if same store sales increased by $450 million for the coming year, with no change in the contribution margin ratio or fixed costs?

anheuser busch companies inc reported the following operating information for a rece 647679

Anheuser Busch Companies, Inc., reported the following operating information for a recent year (in millions):

Net sales

$14,935

Cost of goods sold

$ 8,983

Marketing and distribution

2,590

 

$11,573

Income from operations

$ 3,362*

*Before special items

 

In addition, Anheuser Busch sold 136 million barrels of beer during the year. Assume that variable costs were 70% of the cost of goods sold and 45% of marketing and distribution expenses. Assume that the remaining costs are fixed. For the following year, assume that Anheuser Busch expects pricing, variable costs per barrel, and fixed costs to remain constant, except that new distribution and general office facilities are expected to increase fixed costs by $133 million.

Rounding to the nearest cent:

a. Compute the break even sales (barrels) for the current year.

b. Compute the anticipated break even sales (barrels) for the following year.

the america online division of time warner has fueled its growth by using aggressive 647682

The America Online division of Time Warner has fueled its growth by using aggressive promotion strategies. One of these strategies is to send compact disk software to potential customers, offering free AOL service for a period of time. Assume that during a given promotional campaign, AOL mailed 3,200,000 disks to potential customers, offering three months’ free service. In addition, assume the following information:

Cost per disk (including mailing)

$1.50

Number of months an average new customer stays

 

with the service (including the three free months)

30 months

Revenue per month per customer account

$10.00

Variable cost per month per customer account

$1.00

Determine the number of new customer accounts needed to break even on the cost of the promotional campaign. In forming your answer, (1) treat the cost of mailing the disk as a fixed cost, and (2) treat the revenue less variable cost per account for the service period as the unit contribution margin.

sprint nextel is one of the largest digital wireless service providers in the united 647683

Sprint Nextel is one of the largest digital wireless service providers in the United States. In a recent year, it had 39.7 million direct subscribers (accounts) that generated revenue of $14,647 million. Costs and expenses for the year were as follows (in millions):

Cost of revenue

$6,091

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

4,411

Depreciation

2,557

Assume that 70% of the cost of revenue and 40% of the selling, general, and administrative expenses are variable to the number of direct subscribers (accounts).

a. What is Sprint Nextel’s break even number of accounts, using the data and assumptions above? Round units to the nearest million.

b. How much revenue per account would be sufficient for Sprint Nextel to break even if the number of accounts remained constant?

candies inc manufactures and sells two products marshmallow bunnies and jelly beans 647685

Candies Inc. manufactures and sells two products, marshmallow bunnies and jelly beans. The fixed costs are $350,000, and the sales mix is 70% marshmallow bunnies and 30% jelly beans. The unit selling price and the unit variable cost for each product are as follows:

Products

Unit Selling Price

Unit Variable Cost

Marshmallow bunnies

$2.40

$1.00

Jelly beans

1.80

0.90

a. Compute the break even sales (units) for the overall product, E.

b. How many units of each product, marshmallow bunnies and jelly beans, would be sold at the break even point?

fly by night airways provides air transportation services between new york and miami 647686

Fly by Night Airways provides air transportation services between New York and Miami. A single New York to Miami round trip flight has the following operating statistics:

Fuel

$3,540

Flight crew salaries

7,310

Airplane depreciation

2,995

Variable cost per passenger—business class

45

Variable cost per passenger—tourist class

35

Round trip ticket price—business class

350

Round trip ticket price—tourist class

225

It is assumed that the fuel, crew salaries, and airplane depreciation are fixed, regardless of the number of seats sold for the round trip flight.

a. Compute the break even number of seats sold on a single round trip flight for the overall product. Assume that the overall product is 20% business class and 80% tourist class tickets.

b. How many business class and tourist class seats would be sold at the break even point?

at a recent staff meeting the management of hom technology products was considering 647688

At a recent staff meeting, the management of Hom Technology Products was considering discontinuing the Hercules line of laptop computers from the product line. The chief financial analyst reported the following current monthly data for the Hercules:

Units of sales

32,000

Break even units

36,800

Margin of safety in units

4,800

For what reason would you question the validity of these data?

on july 31 2008 the end of the first month of operations martin company prepared the 647691

On July 31, 2008, the end of the first month of operations, Martin Company prepared the following income statement, based on the absorption costing concept:

Sales (14,000 units)

 

$616,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Cost of goods manufactured

$558,750

 

Less ending inventory (1,000 units)

37,250

 

Cost of goods sold

 

521,500

Gross profit

 

$ 94,500

Selling and administrative expenses

 

58,200

Income from operations

 

$ 36,300

Prepare a variable costing income statement, assuming that the fixed manufacturing costs were $28,950 and the variable selling and administrative expenses were $32,000.

new age furniture company manufactures sofas for distribution to several major retai 647693

New Age Furniture Company manufactures sofas for distribution to several major retail chains. The following costs are incurred in the production and sale of sofas:

a. Springs

b. Consulting fee of $25,000 paid to efficiency specialists

c. Sewing supplies

d. Electricity costs of $0.10 per kilowatt hour

e. Fabric for sofa coverings

f. Salary of production vice president

g. Salesperson’s salary, $20,000 plus 5% of the selling price of each sofa sold

h. Janitorial supplies, $15 for each sofa produced

i. Employer’s FICA taxes on controller’s salary of $150,000

j. Rent on experimental equipment, $35 for every sofa produced

k. Wood for framing the sofas

l. Insurance premiums on property, plant, and equipment, $10,000 per year plus $15 per $10,000 of insured value over $15,000,000

m. Hourly wages of sewing machine operators

n. Salary of designers

o. Property taxes on property, plant, and equipment

p. Legal fees paid to attorneys in defense of the company in a patent infringement suit, $15,000 plus $175 per hour

q. Cartons used to ship sofas

r. Rental costs of warehouse, $15,000 per month

s. Straight line depreciation on factory equipment

t. Foam rubber for cushion fillings

Instructions

Classify the preceding costs as either fixed, variable, or mixed. Use the following tabular headings and place an “X” in the appropriate column. Identify each cost by letter in the Cost column.

Cost

Fixed Cost

Variable Cost

Mixed Cost

french broad inc operating at full capacity sold 25 125 units at a price of 75 per u 647694

French Broad Inc., operating at full capacity, sold 25,125 units at a price of $75 per unit during 2008. Its income statement for 2008 is as follows:

Sales

 

$1,884,375

Cost of goods sold

 

1,100,000

Gross profit

 

$ 784,375

Expenses:

 

 

Selling expenses

$125,000

 

Administrative expenses

125,000

 

Total expenses

 

250,000

Income from operations

 

$ 534,375

The division of costs between fixed and variable is as follows:

 

Fixed

Variable

Cost of sales

40%

60%

Selling expenses

50%

50%

Administrative expenses

75%

25%

Management is considering a plant expansion program that will permit an increase of $487,500 in yearly sales. The expansion will increase fixed costs by $135,000, but will not affect the relationship between sales and variable costs.

Instructions

1. Determine for 2008 the total fixed costs and the total variable costs.

2. Determine for 2008 (a) the unit variable cost and (b) the unit contribution margin.

3. Compute the break even sales (units) for 2008.

4. Compute the break even sales (units) under the proposed program.

5. Determine the amount of sales (units) that would be necessary under the proposed program to realize the $534,375 of income from operations that was earned in 2008.

6. Determine the maximum income from operations possible with the expanded plant.

7. If the proposal is accepted and sales remain at the 2008 level, what will the income or loss from operations be for 2009?

8. Based on the data given, would you recommend accepting the proposal? Explain.

last year pocket pc co had sales of 430 000 based on a unit selling price of 215 the 647696

Last year, Pocket PC Co. had sales of $430,000, based on a unit selling price of $215. The variable cost per unit was $155, and fixed costs were $90,000. The maximum sales within Pocket PC’s relevant range are 3,000 units. Pocket PC is considering a proposal to spend an additional $24,000 on billboard advertising during the current year in an attempt to increase sales and utilize unused capacity.

Instructions

1. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for last year. Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

2. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (1), determine (a) the income from operations for last year and (b) the maximum income from operations that could have been realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

3. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for the current year, assuming that a no cancelable contract is signed for the additional billboard advertising. No changes are expected in the selling price or other costs. Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

4. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (3), determine (a) the income from operations if sales total 2,500 units and (b) the maximum income from operations that could be realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

data related to the expected sales of two types of decorative flower pots for boyeva 647697

Data related to the expected sales of two types of decorative flower pots for Boyeva Flower Pots, Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:

Products

Unit Selling Price

Unit Variable Cost

Sales Mix

Decorative Indoor Flower Pot

$ 9.00

$3.60

25%

Rugged Outdoor Flower Pot

12.00

5.40

75%

The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $328,860.

Instructions

1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break even point for the current year.

2. Based on the break even sales (units) in part (1), determine the unit sales of both the Decorative Indoor Flower Pot and Rugged Outdoor Flower Pot for the current year.

3. Assume that the sales mix was 50% Decorative Indoor Flower Pot and 50% Rugged Outdoor Flower Pot. Compare the break even point with that in part (1). Why is it so different?

aspen co expects to maintain the same inventories at the end of 2008 as at the begin 647698

Aspen Co. expects to maintain the same inventories at the end of 2008 as at the beginning of the year. The total of all production costs for the year is therefore assumed to be equal to the cost of goods sold. With this in mind, the various department heads were asked to submit estimates of the costs for their departments during 2008. A summary report of these estimates is as follows:

 

Estimated

Estimated Variable Cost

 

Fixed Cost

(per unit sold)

Production costs:

 

 

Direct materials

$ 8.90

Direct labor

3.80

Factory overhead

$ 80,200

2.10

Selling expenses:

 

 

Sales salaries and commissions

41,200

1.70

Advertising

13,200

Travel

2,700

Miscellaneous selling expense

5,400

1.50

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Office and officers’ salaries

81,500

Supplies

4,700

0.70

Miscellaneous administrative expense

10,500

2.30

Total

$239,400

$21.00

It is expected that 19,000 units will be sold at a price of $35 a unit. Maximum sales within the relevant range are 30,000 units.

Instructions

1. Prepare an estimated income statement for 2008.

2. What is the expected contribution margin ratio?

3. Determine the break even sales in units.

4. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales.

5. What is the expected margin of safety?

6. Determine the operating leverage.

montana jeans inc manufactures blue jeans for distribution to several major retail c 647699

Montana Jeans Inc. manufactures blue jeans for distribution to several major retail chains. The following costs are incurred in the production and sale of blue jeans:

a. Brass buttons

b. Janitorial supplies, $1,000 per month

c. Legal fees paid to attorneys in defense of the company in a patent infringement suit, $30,000 plus $150 per hour

d. Straight line depreciation on sewing machines

e. Salary of production vice president

f. Leather for patches identifying each jean style

g. Salary of designers

h. Supplies

i. Denim fabric

j. Insurance premiums on property, plant, and equipment, $20,000 per year plus $2 per $10,000 of insured value over $7,000,000

k. Hourly wages of machine operators

l. Property taxes on property, plant, and equipment

m. Salesperson’s salary, $15,000 plus 2% of the total sales

n. Rental costs of warehouse, $3,000 per month plus $2 per square foot of storage used

o. Electricity costs of $0.12 per kilowatt hour

p. Rent on experimental equipment, $30,000 per year

q. Thread

r. Blue dye

s. Shipping boxes used to ship orders

t. Consulting fee of $70,000 paid to industry specialist for marketing advice

Instructions

Classify the preceding costs as either fixed, variable, or mixed. Use the following tabular headings and place an “X” in the appropriate column. Identify each cost by letter in the cost column.

Cost

Fixed Cost

Variable Cost

Mixed Cost

castellino company operating at full capacity sold 80 000 units at a price of 70 75 647700

Castellino Company, operating at full capacity, sold 80,000 units at a price of $70.75 per unit during 2008. Its income statement for 2008 is as follows:

Sales

 

$5,660,000

Cost of goods sold

 

2,100,000

Gross profit

 

$3,560,000

Expenses:

 

 

Selling expenses

$1,500,000

 

Administrative expenses

900,000

 

Total expenses

 

2,400,000

Income from operations

 

$1,160,000

The division of costs between fixed and variable is as follows:

 

Fixed

Variable

Cost of sales

50%

50%

Selling expenses

30%

70%

Administrative expenses

60%

40%

Management is considering a plant expansion program that will permit an increase of $884,375 in yearly sales. The expansion will increase fixed costs by $265,000, but will not affect the relationship between sales and variable costs.

Instructions

1. Determine for 2008 the total fixed costs and the total variable costs.

2. Determine for 2008 (a) the unit variable cost and (b) the unit contribution margin.

3. Compute the break even sales (units) for 2008.

4. Compute the break even sales (units) under the proposed program.

5. Determine the amount of sales (units) that would be necessary under the proposed program to realize the $1,160,000 of income from operations that was earned in 2008.

6. Determine the maximum income from operations possible with the expanded plant.

7. If the proposal is accepted and sales remain at the 2008 level, what will the income or loss from operations be for 2009?

8. Based on the data given, would you recommend accepting the proposal? Explain.

last year taylor inc had sales of 100 000 based on a unit selling price of 20 the va 647702

Last year, Taylor Inc. had sales of $100,000, based on a unit selling price of $20. The variable cost per unit was $10, and fixed costs were $50,000. The maximum sales within Taylor’s relevant range are 10,000 units. Taylor is considering a proposal to spend an additional $20,000 on billboard advertising during the current year in an attempt to increase sales and utilize unused capacity.

Instructions

1. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for last year. Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

2. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (1), determine (a) the income from operations for last year and (b) the maximum income from operations that could have been realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

3. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales for the current year, assuming that a no cancelable contract is signed for the additional billboard advertising. No changes are expected in the unit selling price or other costs. Verify your answer, using the break even equation.

4. Using the cost volume profit chart prepared in part (3), determine (a) the income from operations if sales total 8,000 units and (b) the maximum income from operations that could be realized during the year. Verify your answers arithmetically.

data related to the expected sales of lacrosse sticks and hockey sticks for athletic 647703

Data related to the expected sales of lacrosse sticks and hockey sticks for Athletics Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:

Products

Unit Selling Price

Unit Variable Cost

Sales Mix

Lacrosse sticks

$52.00

$28.00

70%

Hockey sticks

64.00

36.00

30%

The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $1,857,240.

Instructions

1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break even point for the current year.

2. Based on the break even sales (units) in part (1), determine the unit sales of both lacrosse sticks and hockey sticks for the current year.

3. Assume that the sales mix was 30% lacrosse sticks and 70% hockey sticks. Compare the break even point with that in part (1). Why is it so different?

loumis home care products inc expects to maintain the same inventories at the end of 647704

Loumis Home Care Products Inc. expects to maintain the same inventories at the end of 2008 as at the beginning of the year. The total of all production costs for the year is therefore assumed to be equal to the cost of goods sold. With this in mind, the various department heads were asked to submit estimates of the costs for their departments during 2008. A summary report of these estimates is as follows:

 

Estimated

Estimated Variable Cost

 

Fixed Cost

(per unit sold)

Production costs:

 

 

Direct materials

$137.70

Direct labor

116.40

Factory overhead

$232,000

27.20

Selling expenses:

 

 

Sales salaries and commissions

356,225

9.15

Advertising

67,500

Travel

42,500

Miscellaneous selling expense

22,250

2.25

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Office and officers’ salaries

235,000

Supplies

15,525

6.30

Miscellaneous administrative expense

19,000

3.50

Total

$990,000

$302.50

It is expected that 5,000 units will be sold at a price of $550 a unit. Maximum sales within the relevant range are 10,000 units.

Instructions

1. Prepare an estimated income statement for 2008.

2. What is the expected contribution margin ratio?

3. Determine the break even sales in units.

4. Construct a cost volume profit chart indicating the break even sales.

5. What is the expected margin of safety?

6. Determine the operating leverage.

paul hambel is a financial consultant to tecau properties inc a real estate syndicat 647705

Paul Hambel is a financial consultant to Tecau Properties Inc., a real estate syndicate. Tecau Properties Inc. finances and develops commercial real estate (office buildings). The completed projects are then sold as limited partnership interests to individual investors. The syndicate makes a profit on the sale of these partnership interests. Paul provides financial information for the offering prospectus, which is a document that provides the financial and legal details of the limited partnership offerings. In one of the projects, the bank has financed the construction of a commercial office building at a rate of 7% for the first four years, after which time the rate jumps to 12% for the remaining 21 years of the mortgage. The interest costs are one of the major ongoing costs of a real estate project. Paul has reported prominently in the prospectus that the break even occupancy for the first four years is 70%. This is the amount of office space that must be leased to cover the interest and general upkeep costs over the first four years. The 70% break even is very low and thus communicates a low risk to potential investors. Paul uses the 70% break even rate as a major marketing tool in selling the limited partnership interests. Buried in the fine print of the prospectus is additional information that would allow an astute investor to determine that the break even occupancy will jump to 90% after the fourth year because of the contracted increase in the mortgage interest rate. Paul believes prospective investors are adequately informed as to the risk of the investment.

Comment on the ethical considerations of this situation.

won ton soup co uses a process cost system to record the costs of processing soup wh 647626

Won Ton Soup Co. uses a process cost system to record the costs of processing soup, which requires a series of three processes. The inventory of Work in Process—Filling on July 1 and debits to the account during July 2008 were as follows:

Bal., 2,000 units, 30% completed:

 

Direct materials (2,000 × $3.20)

$6,400

Conversion (2,000 × 30% × $1.25)

750

 

$7,150

From Cooking Department, 126,000 units

$409,500

Direct labor

93,345

Factory overhead

71,950

During July, 2,000 units in process on July 1 were completed, and of the 126,000 units entering the department, all were completed except 2,500 units that were 90% completed.

Charges to Work in Process—Filling for August were as follows:

From Cooking Department, 138,000 units

$455,400

Direct labor

101,480

Factory overhead

77,578

During August, the units in process at the beginning of the month were completed, and of the 138,000 units entering the department, all were completed except 4,000 units that were 35% completed.

Instructions

1. Enter the balance as of July 1, 2008, in a four column account for Work in Process— Filling. Record the debits and the credits in the account for July. Construct a cost of production report, and present computations for determining (a) equivalent units of production for materials and conversion, (b) equivalent costs per unit, (c) cost of goods finished, differentiating between units started in the prior period and units started and finished in July, and (d) work in process inventory.

2. Provide the same information for August by recording the August transactions in the four column work in process account. Construct a cost of production report, and present the August computations (a through d) listed in part (1).

3. Comment on the change in cost per equivalent unit for June through August for direct materials and conversion costs.

snowflake flour company manufactures flour by a series of three processes beginning 647628

Snowflake Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour.

The balance in the account Work in Process—Sifting Department was as follows on July 1, 2008:

Work in Process—Sifting Department (19,600 units, 75% completed)

$66,000

The following costs were charged to Work in Process—Sifting Department during July:

Direct materials transferred from Milling Department: 426,800 units

$1,435,000

Direct labor

375,925

Factory overhead

118,900

During July, 429,700 units of flour were completed. Work in Process—Sifting Department on July 31 was 16,700 units, 25% completed.

Instructions

Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for July, using the average cost method.

g p soap company manufactures powdered detergent phosphate is placed in process in t 647629

G&P Soap Company manufactures powdered detergent. Phosphate is placed in process in the Making Department, where it is turned into granulars. The output of Making is transferred to the Packing Department, where packaging is added at the beginning of the process. On December 1, G&P Soap Company had the following inventories:

Finished Goods

$14,500

Work in Process—Making

5,670

Work in Process—Packing

7,230

Materials

3,200

Departmental accounts are maintained for factory overhead, which both have zero balances on December 1.

Manufacturing operations for December are summarized as follows:

a.

Materials purchased on account

$167,900

b.

Materials requisitioned for use:

 

 

Phosphate—Making Department

$114,200

 

Packaging—Packing Department

42,500

 

Indirect materials—Making Department

4,100

 

Indirect materials—Packing Department

1,580

c.

Labor used:

 

 

Direct labor—Making Department

$ 79,400

 

Direct labor—Packing Department

53,200

 

Indirect labor—Making Department

15,000

 

Indirect labor—Packing Department

26,900

d.

Depreciation charged on fixed assets:

 

 

Making Department

$14,800

 

Packing Department

11,300

e.

Expired prepaid factory insurance:

 

 

Making Department

$3,000

 

Packing Department

1,200

f.

Applied factory overhead:

 

 

Making Department

$37,500

 

Packing Department

40,100

g.

Production costs transferred from Making Department to Packing Department

$215,800

h.

Production costs transferred from Packing Department to Finished Goods

$351,200

i.

Cost of goods sold during the period

$354,800

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the operations, identifying each entry by letter.

2. Compute the December 31 balances of the inventory accounts.

3. Compute the December 31 balances of the factory overhead accounts.

ozark refining company processes gasoline petroleum is placed in production in the r 647630

Ozark Refining Company processes gasoline. Petroleum is placed in production in the Refining Department and, after processing, is transferred to the Blending Department, where detergents are added. The finished blended gasoline emerges from the Blending Department.

There were no inventories of work in process at the beginning or at the end of December 2008. Finished goods inventory at December 1 was 8,000 barrels of gasoline at a total cost of $296,000.

Transactions related to manufacturing operations for December are summarized as follows:

a. Materials purchased on account, $682,400.

b. Materials requisitioned for use: Refining, $580,200 ($567,800 entered directly into the product); Blending, $98,400 ($92,200 entered directly into the product).

c. Labor costs incurred: Refining, $165,100 ($134,200 entered directly into the product); Blending, $80,200 ($57,800 entered directly into the product).

d. Miscellaneous costs and expenses incurred on account: Refining, $21,100; Blending, $7,000.

e. Expiration of various prepaid expenses: Refining, $5,000; Blending, $3,000.

f. Depreciation charged on plant assets: Refining, $43,500; Blending, $19,200.

g. Factory overhead applied to production, based on processing hours: $111,900 for Refining and $58,100 for Blending.

h. Output of Refining: 28,000 barrels.

i. Output of Blending: 28,000 barrels of gasoline.

j. Sales on account: 30,000 barrels of gasoline at $60 per barrel. Credits to the finished goods account are to be made according to the first in, first out method.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the transactions, identifying each by letter. Include as an explanation for entry (j) the number of barrels and the cost per barrel of gasoline sold.

belgian delight chocolate company processes chocolate into candy bars the process be 647631

Belgian Delight Chocolate Company processes chocolate into candy bars. The process begins by placing direct materials (raw chocolate, milk, and sugar) into the Blending Department. All materials are placed into production at the beginning of the blending process. After blending, the milk chocolate is then transferred to the Molding Department, where the milk chocolate is formed into candy bars. The following is a partial work in process account of the Blending Department at March 31, 2008:

ACCOUNT Work in Process—Blending Department

ACCOUNT NO.

 

 

 

 

Balance

Date

Item

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Mar.

1

Bal., 9,000 units, 20%

 

 

 

 

 

 

completed

 

 

28,260

 

 

31

Direct materials, 300,000 units

870,000

 

898,260

 

 

31

Direct labor

128,450

 

1,026,710

 

 

31

Factory overhead

100,300

 

1,127,010

 

 

31

Goods finished, 305,000 units

 

?

 

 

 

31

Bal. ? units, 45% completed

 

 

?

 

Instructions

1. Prepare a cost of production report, and identify the missing amounts for Work in Process—Blending Department.

2. Assuming that the March 1 Work in Process inventory includes direct materials of $27,000, determine the increase or decrease in the cost per equivalent unit for direct materials and conversion between February and March.

delaware chemical company manufactures specialty chemicals by a series of three proc 647632

Delaware Chemical Company manufactures specialty chemicals by a series of three processes, all materials being introduced in the Distilling Department. From the Distilling Department, the materials pass through the Reaction and Filling departments, emerging as finished chemicals.

The balance in the account Work in Process—Filling was as follows on December 1, 2008:

Work in Process—Filling Department

 

(2,200 units, 10% completed):

 

Direct materials (2,200 × $12.10)

$26,620

Conversion (2,200 × 10% × $8.65)

1,903

 

$28,523

The following costs were charged to Work in Process—Filling during December:

Direct materials transferred from Reaction

 

Department: 44,400 units at $12.20 a unit

$541,680

Direct labor

105,600

Factory overhead

292,425

During December, 44,500 units of specialty chemicals were completed. Work in Process— Filling Department on December 31 was 2,100 units, 70% completed.

Instructions

1. Prepare a cost of production report for the Filling Department for December.

2. Journalize the entries for costs transferred from Reaction to Filling and the cost transferred from filling to finished goods.

3. Determine the increase or decrease in the cost per equivalent unit from November to December for direct materials and conversion costs.

4. Discuss the uses of the cost of production report and the results of part (3).

robusta coffee company roasts and packs coffee beans the process begins in the roast 647634

Robusta Coffee Company roasts and packs coffee beans. The process begins in the Roasting Department. From the Roasting Department, the coffee beans are transferred to the Packing Department. The following is a partial work in process account of the Roasting Department at July 31, 2008:

ACCOUNT Work in Process—Blending Department

ACCOUNT NO.

 

 

 

 

Balance

Date

Item

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

July

1

Bal., 18,000 units, 25%

 

 

 

 

 

 

completed

 

 

18,450

 

 

31

Direct materials, 345,000 units

968,750

 

987,200

 

 

31

Direct labor

229,000

 

1,216,200

 

 

31

Factory overhead

203,600

 

1,419,800

 

 

31

Goods finished, 340,000 units

 

?

?

 

 

31

Bal. ? units, 65% completed

 

 

?

 

Instructions

Prepare a cost of production report, using the average cost method, and identify the missing amounts for Work in Process—Roasting Department.

in papermaking operations for companies such as international paper company wet pulp 647637

In papermaking operations for companies such as International Paper Company, wet pulp is fed into paper machines, which press and dry pulp into a continuous sheet of paper. The paper is formed at very high speeds (60 mph). Once the paper is formed, the paper is rolled onto a reel at the back end of the paper machine. One of the characteristics of papermaking is the creation of “broke” paper. Broke is paper that fails to satisfy quality standards and is therefore rejected for final shipment to customers. Broke is recycled back to the beginning of the process by combining the recycled paper with virgin (new) pulp material. The combination of virgin pulp and recycled broke is sent to the paper machine for papermaking. Broke is fed into this recycle process continuously from all over the facility.

In this industry, it is typical to charge the papermaking operation with the cost of direct materials, which is a mixture of virgin materials and broke. Broke has a much lower cost than does virgin pulp. Therefore, the more broke in the mixture, the lower the average cost of direct materials to the department. Papermaking managers will frequently comment on the importance of broke for keeping their direct materials costs down.

a. How do you react to this accounting procedure?

b. What “hidden costs” are not considered when accounting for broke as described above?

natcan inc manufactures cans for the canned food industry the operations manager of 647638

Natcan Inc. manufactures cans for the canned food industry. The operations manager of a can manufacturing operation wants to conduct a cost study investigating the relationship of tin content in the material (can stock) to the energy cost for enameling the cans. The enameling was necessary to prepare the cans for labeling. A higher percentage of tin content in the can stock increases the cost of material. The operations manager believed there was a relationship between the tin content and energy costs for enameling. During the analysis period, the amount of tin content in the steel can stock was increased for every month, from April to September. The following operating reports were available from the controller:

 

April

May

June

July

August

September

Energy

$ 13,000

$ 28,800

$ 24,200

$ 14,000

$ 16,200

$ 15,000

Materials

12,000

30,000

28,600

18,900

25,200

29,000

Total cost

$ 25,000

$ 58,800

$ 52,800

$ 32,900

$ 41,400

$ 44,000

Units produced

/50,000

/120,000

/110,000

/70,000

/90,000

/100,000

Cost per unit

$ 0.50

$ 0.49

$ 0.48

$ 0.47

$ 0.46

$ 0.44

Differences in materials unit costs were entirely related to the amount of tin content.

Interpret this information and report to the operations manager your recommendations with respect to tin content.

lane anderson plant manager of willow run paper company s papermaking mill was looki 647639

Lane Anderson, plant manager of Willow Run Paper Company’s papermaking mill, was looking over the cost of production reports for July and August for the Papermaking Department. The reports revealed the following:

 

July

August

Pulp and chemicals

$300,000

$307,000

Conversion cost

150,000

153,000

Total cost

$450,000

$460,000

Number of tons

/ 1,250

/ 1,150

Cost per ton

$ 360

$ 400

Lane was concerned about the increased cost per ton from the output of the department. As a result, he asked the plant controller to perform a study to help explain these results. The controller, Sarah Nold, began the analysis by performing some interviews of key plant personnel in order to understand what the problem might be. Excerpts from an interview with Jake Bennick, a paper machine operator, follow:

Jake: We have two papermaking machines in the department. I have no data, but I think paper machine 1 is applying too much pulp, and thus is wasting both conversion and materials resources. We haven’t had repairs on paper machine 1 in a while. Maybe this is the problem.

Sarah: How does too much pulp result in wasted resources?

Jake: Well, you see, if too much pulp is applied, then we will waste pulp material. The customer will not pay for the extra weight. Thus, we just lose that amount of material. Also, when there is too much pulp, the machine must be slowed down in order to complete the drying process. This results in a waste of conversion costs.

Sarah: Do you have any other suspicions?

Jake: Well, as you know, we have two products—green paper and yellow paper. They are identical except for the color. The color is added to the papermaking process in the paper machine. I think that during August these two color papers have been behaving very differently. I don’t have any data, but it just seems as though the amount of waste associated with the green paper has increased.

Sarah: Why is this?

Jake: I understand that there has been a change in specifications for the green paper, starting near the beginning of August. This change could be causing the machines to run poorly when making green paper. If this is the case, the cost per ton would increase for green paper.

Sarah also asked for a computer printout providing greater detail on August’s operating results.

Computer run: 09085

September 9

Requested by: Sarah Nold

Papermaking Department—August detail

Production

 

 

 

 

 

Run

Paper

 

Material

Conversion

 

Number

Machine

Color

Costs

Costs

Tons

1

1

Green

41,800

20,400

160

2

1

Yellow

41,700

21,200

140

3

1

Green

44,600

22,500

150

4

1

Yellow

36,100

18,100

120

5

2

Green

38,300

18,800

160

6

2

Yellow

35,300

16,900

150

7

2

Green

35,600

18,100

130

8

2

Yellow

33,600

17,000

140

 

Total

 

307,000

153,000

1,150

Assuming that you’re Sarah Nold, write a memo to Lane Anderson with a recommendation to management. You should analyze the August data to determine whether the paper machine or the paper color explains the increase in the unit cost from July. Include any supporting schedules that are appropriate.

the following categories represent typical process manufacturing industries 647640

The following categories represent typical process manufacturing industries:

Beverages

Metals

Chemicals

Petroleum refining

Food

Pharmaceuticals

Forest and paper products

Soap and cosmetics

In each category, identify one company (following your instructor’s specific instructions) and determine the following:

1. Typical products manufactured by the selected company, including brand names.

2. Typical raw materials used by the selected company.

3. Types of processes used by the selected company.

Use annual reports, the Internet, or library resources in doing this activity.

brubaker company has fixed costs of 120 000 the unit selling price variable cost per 647666

Brubaker Company has fixed costs of $120,000. The unit selling price, variable cost per unit, and contribution margin per unit for the company’s two products are provided below.

Product

Selling Price

Variable Cost per Unit

Contribution Margin per Unit

Q

$90

$70

$20

Z

75

65

10

The sales mix for products Q and Z is 20% and 80%, respectively. Determine the break even point in units of Q and Z.

following is a list of various costs incurred in producing frozen pizzas with respec 647669

Following is a list of various costs incurred in producing frozen pizzas. With respect to the production and sale of frozen pizzas, classify each cost as either variable, fixed, or mixed.

1. Property insurance premiums, $1,500 per month plus $0.005 for each dollar of property over $3,000,000

2. Packaging

3. Hourly wages of inspectors

4. Pension cost, $0.50 per employee hour on the job

5. Hourly wages of machine operators

6. Rent on warehouse, $5,000 per month plus $5 per square foot of storage used

7. Refrigerant used in refrigeration equipment

8. Pepperoni

9. Dough

10. Tomato paste

11. Property taxes, $50,000 per year on factory building and equipment

12. Electricity costs, $0.08 per kilowatt hour

13. Salary of plant manager

14. Straight line depreciation on the production equipment

15. Janitorial costs, $3,000 per month

for a major university match each cost in the following table with the activity base 647670

For a major university, match each cost in the following table with the activity base most appropriate to it. An activity base may be used more than once, or not used at all.

Cost:

Activity Base:

1.

Financial aid office salaries

a.

Number of enrolled students and alumni

2.

Instructor salaries

b.

Student credit hours

3.

Housing personnel wages

c.

Number of student/athletes

4.

Admissions office salaries

d.

Number of enrollment applications

5.

School supplies

e.

Number of students living on campus

6.

Record office salaries

f.

Number of financial aid applications

from the following list of activity bases for an automobile dealership select the ba 647671

From the following list of activity bases for an automobile dealership, select the base that would be most appropriate for each of these costs: (1) preparation costs (cleaning, oil, and gasoline costs) for each car received, (2) salespersons’ commission of 3% of the sales price for each car sold, and (3) administrative costs for ordering cars.

a.

Dollar amount of cars on hand

e.

Number of cars ordered

b.

Dollar amount of cars received

f.

Number of cars sold

c.

Dollar amount of cars sold

g.

Number of cars on hand

d.

Dollar amount of cars ordered

h.

Number of cars received

laser tex inc manufactures low end computer components within a relevant range of 10 647673

Laser Tex Inc. manufactures low end computer components within a relevant range of 100,000 to 140,000 disks per year. Within this range, the following partially completed manufacturing cost schedule has been prepared:

CDs produced

100,000

120,000

140,000

Total costs:

 

 

 

Total variable costs

$ 40,000

(d)

(j)

Total fixed costs

84,000

(e)

(k)

Total costs

$124,000

(f)

(l)

Cost per unit:

 

 

 

Variable cost per unit

(a)

(g)

(m)

Fixed cost per unit

(b)

(h)

(n)

Total cost per unit

(c)

(i)

(o)

Complete the cost schedule, identifying each cost by the appropriate letter (a) through (o).

w o inc has decided to use the high low method to estimate the total cost and the fi 647674

W & O Inc. has decided to use the high low method to estimate the total cost and the fixed and variable cost components of the total cost. The data for various levels of production are as follows:

Units

 

Produced

Total Costs

10,000

$750,000

22,500

845,000

30,000

950,000

a. Determine the variable cost per unit and the fixed cost.

b. Based on part (a), estimate the total cost for 25,000 units of production.

combes furniture company manufactures furniture combes uses a job order cost system 647603

Combes Furniture Company manufactures furniture. Combes uses a job order cost system. Balances on November 1 from the materials ledger are as follows:

Fabric

$ 33,500

Polyester filling

8,100

Lumber

107,400

Glue

1,600

The materials purchased during November are summarized from the receiving reports as follows:

Fabric

$549,900

Polyester filling

104,200

Lumber

969,500

Glue

14,200

Materials were requisitioned to individual jobs as follows:

 

 

Polyester

 

 

 

 

Fabric

Filling

Lumber

Glue

Total

Job 11

$362,200

$64,500

$611,300

 

$1,038,000

Job 12

121,700

13,900

198,600

 

334,200

Job 13

67,800

10,300

182,400

 

260,500

Factory overhead—indirect

 

 

 

 

 

materials

 

 

 

$11,700

11,700

Total

$551,700

$88,700

$992,300

$11,700

$1,644,400

The glue is not a significant cost, so it is treated as indirect materials (factory overhead).

a. Journalize the entry to record the purchase of materials in November.

b. Journalize the entry to record the requisition of materials in November.

c. Determine the November 30 balances that would be shown in the materials ledger accounts.

a summary of the time tickets for the current month follows 647604

A summary of the time tickets for the current month follows:

Job No.

Amount

Job No.

Amount

101

$1,620

141

$ 1,780

122

1,590

Indirect labor

13,400

133

760

143

3,330

139

5,210

147

1,080

Journalize the entry to record the factory labor costs.

the weekly time tickets indicate the following distribution of labor hours for three 647605

The weekly time tickets indicate the following distribution of labor hours for three direct labor employees:

 

Hours

 

 

 

 

Process

 

Job 111

Job 112

Job 113

Improvement

Johnny Daniels

18

10

5

7

Jack Walker

7

8

23

2

Jim Morgan

8

12

16

4

The direct labor rate earned by the three employees is as follows:

Daniels

$11.40

Walker

13.50

Morgan

11.75

The process improvement category includes training, quality improvement, housekeeping, and other indirect tasks.

a. Journalize the entry to record the factory labor costs for the week.

b. Assume that Jobs 111 and 112 were completed but not sold during the week and that Job 113 remained incomplete at the end of the week. How would the direct labor costs for all three jobs be reflected on the financial statements at the end of the week?

chasse homes inc manufactures mobile homes chasse uses a job order cost system the t 647606

Chasse Homes Inc. manufactures mobile homes. Chasse uses a job order cost system. The time tickets from October jobs are summarized below.

Job 502

$2,352

Job 503

1,440

Job 504

960

Job 505

1,320

Factory supervision

2,760

Factory overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of a predetermined overhead rate of $20 per direct labor hour. The direct labor rate is $12 per hour.

a. Journalize the entry to record the factory labor costs.

b. Journalize the entry to apply factory overhead to production for October.

estimated factory overhead costs direct labor hours and machine hours are as follows 647607

Staten Island Turbine operates two factories. The company applies factory overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours in Factory 1 and on the basis of direct labor hours in Factory 2. Estimated factory overhead costs, direct labor hours, and machine hours are as follows:

 

Factory 1

Factory 2

Estimated factory overhead cost for fiscal

 

 

year beginning May 1

$236,800

$118,300

Estimated direct labor hours for year

 

9,100

Estimated machine hours for year

12,800

 

Actual factory overhead costs for May

$23,200

$11,625

Actual direct labor hours for May

 

885

Actual machine hours for May

1,270

 

a. Determine the factory overhead rate for Factory 1.

b. Determine the factory overhead rate for Factory 2.

c. Journalize the entries to apply factory overhead to production in each factory for May.

d. Determine the balances of the factory accounts for each factory as of May 31, and indicate whether the amounts represent overapplied or underapplied factory overhead.

the engine shop uses a job order cost system to determine the cost of performing eng 647608

The Engine Shop uses a job order cost system to determine the cost of performing engine repair work. Estimated costs and expenses for the coming period are as follows:

Engine parts

$ 650,750

Shop direct labor

520,625

Shop and repair equipment depreciation

12,800

Shop supervisor salaries

93,125

Shop property tax

22,300

Shop supplies

12,650

Advertising expense

18,100

Administrative office salaries

61,600

Administrative office depreciation expense

8,050

Total costs and expenses

$1,400,000

The average shop direct labor rate is $17 per hour.

Determine the predetermined shop overhead rate per direct labor hour.

the following account appears in the ledger after only part of the postings have bee 647610

The following account appears in the ledger after only part of the postings have been completed for January:

 

Work in Process

Balance, January 1

$15,500

Direct materials

86,200

Direct labor

64,300

Factory overhead

93,700

Jobs finished during January are summarized as follows:

Job 320

$57,600

Job 327

$26,100

Job 326

75,400

Job 350

94,800

a. Journalize the entry to record the jobs completed.

b. Determine the cost of the unfinished jobs at January 31.

tobias printing inc began printing operations on july 1 jobs 101 and 102 were comple 647611

Tobias Printing Inc. began printing operations on July 1. Jobs 101 and 102 were completed during the month, and all costs applicable to them were recorded on the related cost sheets. Jobs 103 and 104 are still in process at the end of the month, and all applicable costs except factory overhead have been recorded on the related cost sheets. In addition to the materials and labor charged directly to the jobs, $725 of indirect materials and $6,380 of indirect labor were used during the month. The cost sheets for the four jobs entering production during the month are as follows, in summary form:

Job 101

Job 102

Direct materials

6,800

Direct materials

3,000

Direct labor

1,560

Direct labor

880

Factory overhead

3,900

Factory overhead

2,200

Total

12,260

Total

6,080

Job 103

Job 104

Direct materials

8,700

Direct materials

1,500

Direct labor

1,350

Direct labor

500

Factory overhead

 

Factory overhead

 

Journalize the summary entry to record each of the following operations for July (one entry for each operation):

a. Direct and indirect materials used.

b. Direct and indirect labor used.

c. Factory overhead applied (a single overhead rate is used based on direct labor cost).

d. Completion of Jobs 101 and 102.

the following events took place for wreckin ronnie inc during july 2008 the first mo 647612

The following events took place for Wreckin Ronnie Inc. during July 2008, the first month of operations as a producer of road bikes:

  • Purchased $165,800 of materials.
  • Used $147,600 of direct materials in production.
  • Incurred $96,250 of direct labor wages.
  • Applied factory overhead at a rate of 80% of direct labor cost.
  • Transferred $302,900 of work in process to finished goods.
  • Sold goods with a cost of $301,300.
  • Sold goods for $520,000.
  • Incurred $119,000 of selling expenses.
  • Incurred $52,100 of administrative expenses.

 

a. Prepare the July income statement for Wreckin Ronnie. Assume that Wreckin Ronnie uses the perpetual inventory method.

b. Determine the inventory balances at the end of the first month of operations.

bronx machinery inc is a job shop the management of bronx machinery uses the cost in 647613

Bronx Machinery Inc. is a job shop. The management of Bronx Machinery uses the cost information from the job sheets to assess their cost performance. Information on the total cost, product type, and quantity of items produced is as follows:

Date

Job No.

Quantity

Product

Amount

Jan. 2

101

450

105X

$10,350

Jan. 24

125

1,500

205B

16,500

Feb. 18

144

750

205B

9,000

Mar. 4

162

500

105X

10,000

Mar. 28

173

1,100

120T

6,600

May 20

190

1,250

120T

11,250

June 10

201

450

105X

6,750

Aug. 9

210

1,900

120T

22,800

Sept. 16

215

500

205B

5,500

Nov. 11

227

650

105X

7,800

Dec. 9

238

1,050

120T

16,800

a. Develop a graph for each product (three graphs), with Job No. (in date order) on the horizontal axis and unit cost on the vertical axis. Use this information to determine Bronx Machinery’s cost performance over time for the three products.

b. What additional information would you require to investigate Bronx Machinery’s cost performance more precisely?

sharp trophies inc uses a job order cost system for determining the cost to manufact 647614

Sharp Trophies Inc. uses a job order cost system for determining the cost to manufacture award products (plaques and trophies). Among the company’s products is an engraved plaque that is awarded to participants who complete an executive education program at a local university. The company sells the plaque to the university for $75 each.

Each plaque has a brass plate engraved with the name of the participant. Engraving requires approximately 6 minutes per name. Improperly engraved names must be redone. The plate is screwed to a walnut backboard. This assembly takes approximately 3 minutes per unit. Improper assembly must be redone using a new walnut backboard.

During the first half of the year, the university had two separate executive education classes. The job cost sheets for the two separate jobs indicated the following information:

Job 103

March 4

 

 

 

Cost per Unit

Units

Job Cost

Direct materials:

 

 

 

Wood

$20.00/unit

30 units

$ 600.00

Brass

18.00/unit

30 units

540.00

Engraving labor

40.00/hr.

3 hrs.

120.00

Assembly labor

28.00/hr.

1.5 hrs.

42.00

Factory overhead

30.00/hr.

6 hrs.

180.00

 

 

 

$1,482.00

Plaques shipped

 

 

/ 30

Cost per plaque

 

 

$ 49.40

Job 116

April 15

 

 

 

Cost per Unit

Units

Job Cost

Direct materials:

 

 

 

Wood

$20.00/unit

25 units

$ 500.00

Brass

18.00/unit

25 units

450.00

Engraving labor

40.00/hr.

4 hrs.

160.00

Assembly labor

28.00/hr.

2 hrs.

56.00

Factory overhead

30.00/hr.

4 hrs.

120.00

 

 

 

$1,286.00

Plaques shipped

 

 

/ 20

Cost per plaque

 

 

$ 64.30

a. Why did the cost per plaque increase from $49.40 to $64.30?

b. What improvements would you recommend for Sharp Trophies Inc.?

the consulting firm of reznick and fedder accumulates costs associated with individu 647615

The consulting firm of Reznick and Fedder accumulates costs associated with individual cases, using a job order cost system. The following transactions occurred during May:

May 7

Charged 440 hours of professional (lawyer) time to the Daley Co. breech of

 

contract suit to prepare for the trial, at a rate of $175 per hour.

11.

Reimbursed travel costs to employees for depositions related to the Daley

 

case, $24,000.

22.

Charged 225 hours of professional time for the Daley trial at a rate of $250

 

per hour.

25.

Received invoice from consultants Rucker and Putnam for $47,000 for expert

 

testimony related to the Daley trial.

30.

Applied office overhead at a rate of $45 per professional hour charged to the

 

Daley case.

31

Paid secretarial and administrative salaries of $20,000 for the month.

31

Used office supplies for the month, $6,000.

31

Paid professional salaries of $55,000 for the month.

31

Billed Daley $260,000 for successful defense of the case.

a. Provide the journal entries for each of the above transactions.

b. How much office overhead is over or underapplied?

c. Determine the gross profit on the Daley case, assuming that over or underapplied office overhead is closed annually to cost of services.

tec trends inc provides advertising services for clients across the nation tec trend 647616

Tec Trends Inc. provides advertising services for clients across the nation. Tec Trends is presently working on four projects, each for a different client. Tec Trends accumulates costs for each account (client) on the basis of both direct costs and allocated indirect costs. The direct costs include the charged time of professional personnel and media purchases (air time and ad space). Overhead is allocated to each project as a percentage of media purchases. The predetermined overhead rate is 40% of media purchases. On July 1, the four advertising projects had the following accumulated costs:

 

July 1 Balances

Spitzer Hotel

$120,000

Gonzalez Bank

15,000

Gulliani Beverage

66,000

Koch Rentals

18,000

During July, Tec Trends Inc. incurred the following direct labor and media purchase costs related to preparing advertising for each of the four accounts:

 

Direct Labor

Media Purchases

Spitzer Hotel

$ 42,000

$154,000

Gonzalez Bank

17,000

143,000

Gulliani Beverage

81,000

128,000

Koch Rentals

107,000

83,000

Total

$247,000

$508,000

At the end of July, both the Spitzer Hotel and Gonzalez Bank campaigns were completed. The costs of completed campaigns are debited to the cost of services account.

Journalize the summary entry to record each of the following for the month:

a. Direct labor costs

b. Media purchases

c. Overhead applied

d. Completion of Spitzer Hotel and Gonzalez Bank campaigns

goldberg apparel company uses a job order cost system the following data summarize t 647617

Goldberg Apparel Company uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for March:

a. Materials purchased on account, $233,000.

b. Materials requisitioned, $208,300, of which $5,600 was for general factory use.

c. Factory labor used, $190,500, of which $62,500 was indirect.

d. Other costs incurred on account were for factory overhead, $89,300; selling expenses, $64,000; and administrative expenses, $37,800.

e. Prepaid expenses expired for factory overhead were $7,500; for selling expenses, $1,300; and for administrative expenses, $1,250.

f. Depreciation of factory equipment was $18,900; of office equipment, $14,700; and of store equipment, $2,600.

g. Factory overhead costs applied to jobs, $190,000.

h. Jobs completed, $583,300.

i. Cost of goods sold, $577,700.

Instructions

Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

godwin fixtures co uses a job order cost system the following data summarize the ope 647618

Godwin Fixtures Co. uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for April 2008, the first month of operations:

a. Materials purchased on account, $137,000.

b. Materials requisitioned and factory labor used:

Job

Materials

Factory Labor

No. 601

$18,100

$17,000

No. 602

20,000

25,500

No. 603

13,050

9,700

No. 604

34,500

33,550

No. 605

15,700

14,800

No. 606

17,800

18,300

For general factory use

6,600

47,000

c. Factory overhead costs incurred on account, $4,950.

d. Depreciation of machinery and equipment, $3,700.

e. The factory overhead rate is $53 per machine hour. Machine hours used:

Job

Machine Hours

No. 601

215

No. 602

230

No. 603

175

No. 604

300

No. 605

198

No. 606

225

Total

1,343

f. Jobs completed: 601, 602, 603, and 605.

g. Jobs were shipped and customers were billed as follows: Job 601, $72,750; Job 602, $88,780; Job 605, $74,500.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

2. Post the appropriate entries to T accounts for Work in Process and Finished Goods, using the identifying letters as dates. Insert memorandum account balances as of the end of the month.

3. Prepare a schedule of unfinished jobs to support the balance in the work in process account.

4. Prepare a schedule of completed jobs on hand to support the balance in the finished goods account.

nu life furniture company refinishes and reupholsters furniture nu life uses a job o 647619

Nu Life Furniture Company refinishes and reupholsters furniture. Nu Life uses a job order cost system. When a prospective customer asks for a price quote on a job, the estimated cost data are inserted on an unnumbered job cost sheet. If the offer is accepted, a number is assigned to the job, and the costs incurred are recorded in the usual manner on the job cost sheet. After the job is completed, reasons for the variances between the estimated and actual costs are noted on the sheet. The data are then available to management in evaluating the efficiency of operations and in preparing quotes on future jobs. On July 1, 2008, an estimate of $1,512.64 for reupholstering two chairs and a couch was given to Ed Douthett. The estimate was based on the following data:

Estimated direct materials:

 

17 meters at $23 per meter

$ 391.00

Estimated direct labor:

 

24 hours at $14 per hour

336.00

Estimated factory overhead (65% of direct labor cost)

218.40

Total estimated costs

$ 945.40

Markup (60% of production costs)

567.24

Total estimate

$1,512.64

On July 4, the chairs and couch were picked up from the residence of Ed Douthett, 411 Austin Lane, Alexandria, with a commitment to return them on September 13. The job was completed on September 10.

The related materials requisitions and time tickets are summarized as follows:

Materials Requisition No.

Description

Amount

3480

7 meters at $23

$161

3492

11 meters at $23

253

Time Ticket No.

Description

Amount

H143

13 hours at $14

$182

H151

15 hours at $14

210

Instructions

1. Complete that portion of the job order cost sheet that would be prepared when the estimate is given to the customer.

2. Assign number 00 10 23 to the job, record the costs incurred, and complete the job order cost sheet. Comment on the reasons for the variances between actual costs and estimated costs. For this purpose, assume that two meters of materials were spoiled, the factory overhead rate has been proved to be satisfactory, and an inexperienced employee performed the work.

dupont fishing equipment company manufactures fishing rods in a wide variety of leng 647620

Dupont Fishing Equipment Company manufactures fishing rods in a wide variety of lengths and weights. The following incomplete ledger accounts refer to transactions that are summarized for November:

Materials

Nov. 1

Balance 10,000

 

Nov. 30

Requisitions

(A)

31

Purchases 120,000

 

 

 

 

Work in Process

Nov. 1

Balance

(B)

Nov. 30

Completed jobs

(F)

30

Materials

(C)

 

 

 

30

Direct labor

(D)

 

 

 

30

Factory overhead applied

(E)

 

 

 

Finished Goods

Nov. 1

Balance

0

Nov. 30

Cost of goods sold

(G)

30

Completed jobs

(F)

 

 

 

Wages Payable

 

 

 

Nov. 30

Wages incurred

130,000

Factory Overhead

Nov. 1

Balance

2,500

Nov. 30

Factory overhead applied

(E)

30

Indirect labor

(H)

 

 

 

30

Indirect materials

3,000

 

 

 

30

Other overhead

60,000

 

 

 

In addition, the following information is available:

a. Materials and direct labor were applied to six jobs in November:

 

 

 

Direct

Direct

Job No.

Style

Quantity

Materials

Labor

No. 111

DL 8

70

$ 15,000

$ 12,000

No. 112

DL 18

100

23,000

18,000

No. 113

DL 11

120

27,500

25,000

No. 114

SL 101

100

11,000

12,500

No. 115

SL 110

175

28,000

27,500

No. 116

DL 14

80

15,000

14,500

Total

 

645

$119,500

$109,500

b. Factory overhead is applied to each job at a rate of 75% of direct labor cost.

c. The November 1 Work in Process balance consisted of two jobs, as follows:

 

 

Work in Process,

Job No.

Style

November 1

Job 111

DL 8

$20,000

Job 112

DL 18

30,000

Total

 

$50,000

d. Customer jobs completed and units sold in November were as follows:

 

 

Completed

Units Sold in

Job No.

Style

in November

November

Job 111

DL 8

X

60

Job 112

DL 18

X

100

Job 113

DL 11

X

80

Job 114

SL 101

 

0

Job 115

SL 110

X

150

Job 116

DL 14

 

0

Instructions

1. Determine the missing amounts associated with each letter. Provide supporting calculations by completing a table with the following headings:

 

 

Nov. 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cost of

Job

 

Work in

Direct

Direct

Factory

Total

Unit

Units

Goods

No.

Quantity

Process

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Cost

Cost

Sold

Sold

2. Determine the November 30 balances for each of the inventory accounts and factory overhead.

hillman tool company uses a job order cost system the following data summarize the o 647623

Hillman Tool Company uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for May 2008, the first month of operations:

a. Materials purchased on account, $9,400.

b. Materials requisitioned and factory labor used:

Job

Materials

Factory Labor

No. 101

$ 875

$ 750

No. 102

1,275

985

No. 103

660

500

No. 104

2,200

1,765

No. 105

1,300

1,350

No. 106

925

790

For general factory use

270

1,000

c. Factory overhead costs incurred on account, $405.

d. Depreciation of machinery and equipment, $520.

e. The factory overhead rate is $35 per machine hour. Machine hours used:

 

Machine

Job

Hours

No. 101

6

No. 102

10

No. 103

8

No. 104

25

No. 105

11

No. 106

7

Total

67

f. Jobs completed: 101, 102, 103, and 105.

g. Jobs were shipped and customers were billed as follows: Job 101, $4,350; Job 102, $4,800; Job 103, $2,350.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations.

2. Post the appropriate entries to T accounts for Work in Process and Finished Goods, using the identifying letters as dates. Insert memorandum account balances as of the end of the month.

3. Prepare a schedule of unfinished jobs to support the balance in the work in process account.

4. Prepare a schedule of completed jobs on hand to support the balance in the finished goods account.

asheville furniture company refinishes and reupholsters furniture asheville uses a j 647624

Asheville Furniture Company refinishes and reupholsters furniture. Asheville uses a job order cost system. When a prospective customer asks for a price quote on a job, the estimated cost data are inserted on an unnumbered job cost sheet. If the offer is accepted, a number is assigned to the job, and the costs incurred are recorded in the usual manner on the job cost sheet. After the job is completed, reasons for the variances between the estimated and actual costs are noted on the sheet. The data are then available to management in evaluating the efficiency of operations and in preparing quotes on future jobs. On July 10, 2008, an estimate of $805.20 for reupholstering a chair and couch was given to Ed Stone. The estimate was based on the following data:

Estimated direct materials:

 

12 meters at $20 per meter

$240.00

Estimated direct labor:

 

15 hours at $13 per hour

195

Estimated factory overhead (35% of direct labor cost)

68.25

Total estimated costs

$503.25

Markup (60% of production costs)

301.95

Total estimate

$805.20

On July 16, the chair and couch were picked up from the residence of Ed Stone, 10 Publishers Lane, New York, with a commitment to return it on August 16. The job was completed on August 11.

The related materials requisitions and time tickets are summarized as follows:

Materials Requisition No.

Description

Amount

U642

6 meters at $20

$120

U651

8 meters at $20

160

Time Ticket No.

Description

Amount

1519

10 hours at $12

$120

1520

8 hours at $12

96

Instructions

1. Complete that portion of the job order cost sheet that would be prepared when the estimate is given to the customer.

2. Assign number 00 8 38 to the job, record the costs incurred, and complete the job order cost sheet. Comment on the reasons for the variances between actual costs and estimated costs. For this purpose, assume that two meters of materials were spoiled, the factory overhead rate has been proved to be satisfactory, and an inexperienced employee performed the work.

blanco flour company manufactures flour by a series of three processes beginning wit 647625

Blanco Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning with wheat grain being introduced in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour.

The balance in the account Work in Process—Sifting Department was as follows on May 1, 2008:

Work in Process—Sifting Department (20,000 units, 80% completed):

 

Direct materials (20,000 × $1.37)

$27,400

Conversion (20,000 × 80%× $0.55)

8,800

 

$36,200

The following costs were charged to Work in Process—Sifting Department during May:

Direct materials transferred from Milling Department:

 

560,000 units at $1.40 a unit

$784,000

Direct labor

179,000

Factory overhead

101,200

During May, 568,000 units of flour were completed. Work in Process—Sifting Department on May 31 was 12,000 units, 70% completed.

Instructions

1. Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for May.

2. Journalize the entries for costs transferred from Milling to Sifting and the costs transferred from Sifting to Packaging.

3. Determine the increase or decrease in the cost per equivalent unit from April to May for direct materials and conversion costs.

4. Discuss the uses of the cost of production report and the results of part (3).

partial balance sheet data for ellison company at december 31 2008 are as follows 647553

Partial balance sheet data for Ellison Company at December 31, 2008, are as follows:

Finished goods inventory

$12,500

Prepaid insurance

6,000

Accounts receivable

25,000

Work in process inventory

45,000

Supplies

15,000

Materials inventory

24,000

Cash

32,000

Prepare the Current Assets section of Ellison Company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2008.

the following information is available for applebaum manufacturing company for the m 647556

The following information is available for Applebaum Manufacturing Company for the month ending January 31, 2008:

Cost of direct materials used in production

$165,000

Direct labor

145,000

Work in process inventory, January 1

70,000

Work in process inventory, January 31

125,000

Total factory overhead

65,000

Determine Applebaum’s cost of goods manufactured for the month ended January 31, 2008.

two items are omitted from each of the following three lists of cost of goods sold d 647557

Two items are omitted from each of the following three lists of cost of goods sold data from a manufacturing company income statement. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.

Finished goods inventory, November 1

$ 25,000

$ 40,000

(e)

Cost of goods manufactured

160,000

(c)

350,000

Cost of finished goods available for sale

(a)

$250,000

$400,000

Finished goods inventory, November 30

30,000

60,000

(f)

Cost of goods sold

(b)

(d)

$335,000

cost data for t clark manufacturing company for the month ending april 30 2008 are a 647558

Cost data for T. Clark Manufacturing Company for the month ending April 30, 2008, are as follows:

Inventories

April 1

April 30

Materials

$125,000

$110,000

Work in process

85,000

95,000

Finished goods

65,000

75,000

 

Direct labor

$225,000

Materials purchased during April

240,000

Factory overhead incurred during April:

 

Indirect labor

24,000

Machinery depreciation

14,000

Heat, light, and power

5,000

Supplies

4,000

Property taxes

3,500

Miscellaneous cost

6,500

a. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured statement for April 2008.

b. Determine the cost of goods sold for April 2008.

the following information is available for renteria manufacturing company for the mo 647559

The following information is available for Renteria Manufacturing Company for the month ending March 31, 2008:

Cost of goods manufactured

$265,000

Selling expenses

85,000

Administrative expenses

45,000

Sales

540,000

Finished goods inventory, March 1

60,000

Finished goods inventory, March 31

55,000

For the month ended March 31, 2008, determine Renteria’s (a) cost of goods sold, (b) gross profit, and (c) net income.

the following information is available for the first month of operations of brown co 647560

The following information is available for the first month of operations of Brown Company, a manufacturer of mechanical pencils:

Sales

$600,000

Gross profit

350,000

Cost of goods manufactured

300,000

Indirect labor

130,000

Factory depreciation

20,000

Materials purchased

185,000

Total manufacturing costs for the period

345,000

Materials inventory

25,000

Using the above information, determine the following missing amounts:

a. Cost of goods sold

b. Finished goods inventory

c. Direct materials cost

d. Direct labor cost

e. Work in process inventory

the following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of bo 647561

The following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of boats:

a. Commissions to sales representatives, based upon the number of boats sold.

b. Cost of boat for “grand prize” promotion in local bass tournament.

c. Memberships for key executives in the Bass World Association.

d. Cost of electrical wiring for boats.

e. Cost of normal scrap from defective hulls.

f. Cost of metal hardware for boats, such as ornaments and tie down grasps.

g. Cost of paving the employee parking lot.

h. Hourly wages of assembly line workers.

i. Annual bonus paid to top executives of the company.

j. Straight line depreciation on factory equipment.

k. Wood paneling for use in interior boat trim.

l. Steering wheels.

m. Special advertising campaign in Bass World.

n. Masks for use by sanders in smoothing boat hulls.

o. Power used by sanding equipment.

p. Yearly cost maintenance contract for robotic equipment.

q. Oil to lubricate factory equipment.

r. Canvas top for boats.

s. Executive end of year bonuses.

t. Salary of shop supervisor.

u. Decals for boat hull.

v. Annual fee to pro fisherman Jim Bo Wilks to promote the boats.

w. Paint for boats.

x. Legal department costs for the year.

y. Fiberglass for producing the boat hull.

z. Salary of president of company.

Instructions

Classify each cost as either a product cost or a period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.

 

Product Costs

Period Costs

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

 

 

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Selling

Administrative

Cost

Cost

Cost

Cost

Expense

Expense

the following is a list of costs incurred by several businesses 647562

The following is a list of costs incurred by several businesses:

a. Cost of dyes used by a clothing manufacturer.

b. Salary of the vice president of manufacturing logistics.

c. Wages of a machine operator on the production line.

d. Travel costs of marketing executives to annual sales meeting.

e. Cost of sewing machine needles used by a shirt manufacturer.

f. Depreciation of microcomputers used in the factory to coordinate and monitor the production schedules.

g. Pens, paper, and other supplies used by the Accounting Department in preparing various managerial reports.

h. Electricity used to operate factory machinery.

i. Factory janitorial supplies.

j. Fees paid to lawn service for office grounds upkeep.

k. Wages of computer programmers for production of microcomputer software.

l. Depreciation of copying machines used by the Marketing Department.

m. Telephone charges by president’s office.

n. Cost of plastic for a telephone being manufactured.

o. Oil lubricants for factory plant and equipment.

p. Cost of a 30 second television commercial.

q. Depreciation of robot used to assemble a product.

r. Wages of production quality control personnel.

s. Maintenance and repair costs for factory equipment.

t. Depreciation of tools used in production.

u. Rent for a warehouse used to store finished products.

v. Maintenance costs for factory equipment.

w. Fees charged by collection agency on past due customer accounts.

x. Charitable contribution to United Fund.

Instructions

Classify each of the preceding costs as product costs or period costs. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for preparing your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.

 

Product Costs

Period Costs

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

 

 

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Selling

Administrative

Cost

Cost

Cost

Cost

Expense

Expense

several items are omitted from each of the following income statement and cost of go 647564

Several items are omitted from each of the following income statement and cost of goods manufactured statement data for the month of December 2008:

 

Vinston

Turkun

 

Company

Company

Materials inventory, December 1

$ 25,000

$ 32,000

Materials inventory, December 31

(a)

15,000

Materials purchased

105,000

(a)

Cost of direct materials used in production

120,000

(b)

Direct labor

145,000

95,000

Factory overhead

56,000

42,000

Total manufacturing costs incurred in December

(b)

249,000

Total manufacturing costs

336,000

283,000

Work in process inventory, December 1

45,000

34,000

Work in process inventory, December 31

65,000

(c)

Cost of goods manufactured

(c)

252,000

Finished goods inventory, December 1

84,000

44,000

Finished goods inventory, December 31

74,000

(d)

Sales

425,000

320,000

Cost of goods sold

(d)

254,000

Gross profit

(e)

(e)

Operating expenses

44,000

(f)

Net income

(f)

27,000

Instructions

1. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.

2. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for Vinston Company.

3. Prepare an income statement for Vinston Company.

the following information is available for sano instrument manufacturing company for 647565

The following information is available for Sano Instrument Manufacturing Company for 2008:

Inventories

January 1

December 31

Materials

$ 85,000

$105,000

Work in process

120,000

105,000

Finished goods

125,000

110,000

 

Advertising expense

$ 75,000

Depreciation expense—Office equipment

25,000

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment

16,000

Direct labor

205,000

Heat, light, and power—Factory

6,500

Indirect labor

26,000

Materials purchased during August

135,000

Office salaries expense

85,000

Property taxes—Factory

4,500

Property taxes—Headquarters building

15,000

Rent expense—Factory

7,500

Sales

950,000

Sales salaries expense

150,000

Supplies—Factory

3,500

Miscellaneous cost—Factory

4,500

Instructions

1. Prepare the 2008 statement of cost of goods manufactured.

2. Prepare the 2008 income statement.

the following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of la 647566

The following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of lawn mowers:

a. Payroll taxes on hourly assembly line employees.

b. Filter for spray gun used to paint the lawn mowers.

c. Cost of boxes used in packaging lawn mowers.

d. Premiums on insurance policy for factory buildings.

e. Gasoline engines used for lawn mowers.

f. Salary of factory supervisor.

g. Tires for lawn mowers.

h. Cost of advertising in a national magazine.

i. Plastic for outside housing of lawn mowers.

j. Salary of quality control supervisor who inspects each lawn mower before it is shipped.

k. Steering wheels for lawn mowers.

l. Cash paid to outside firm for janitorial services for factory.

m. Engine oil used in mower engines prior to shipment.

n. Attorney fees for drafting a new lease for headquarters offices.

o. Maintenance costs for new robotic factory equipment, based upon hours of usage.

p. Straight line depreciation on the robotic machinery used to manufacture the lawn mowers.

q. License fees for use of patent for lawn mower blade, based upon the number of lawn mowers produced.

r. Telephone charges for controller’s office.

s. Paint used to coat the lawn mowers.

t. Steel used in producing the lawn mowers.

u. Commissions paid to sales representatives, based upon the number of lawn mowers sold.

v. Electricity used to run the robotic machinery.

w. Factory cafeteria cashier’s wages.

x. Property taxes on the factory building and equipment.

y. Salary of vice president of marketing.

z. Hourly wages of operators of robotic machinery used in production.

Instructions

Classify each cost as either a product cost or a period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.

 

Product Costs

Period Costs

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

 

 

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Selling

Administrative

Cost

Cost

Cost

Cost

Expense

Expense

the following is a list of costs incurred by several businesses 647567

The following is a list of costs incurred by several businesses:

a. Packing supplies for products sold.

b. Tires for an automobile manufacturer.

c. Costs for television advertisement.

d. Disk drives for a microcomputer manufacturer.

e. Executive bonus for vice president of marketing.

f. Seed for grain farmer.

g. Wages of a machine operator on the production line.

h. Wages of controller’s secretary.

i. Factory operating supplies.

j. First aid supplies for factory workers.

k. Depreciation of factory equipment.

l. Salary of quality control supervisor.

m. Sales commissions.

n. Maintenance and repair costs for factory equipment.

o. Cost of hogs for meat processor.

p. Health insurance premiums paid for factory workers.

q. Lumber used by furniture manufacturer.

r. Paper used by commercial printer.

s. Hourly wages of warehouse laborers.

t. Paper used by Computer Department in processing various managerial reports.

u. Costs of operating a research laboratory.

v. Entertainment expenses for sales representatives.

w. Cost of telephone operators for a toll free hotline to help customers operate products.

x. Protective glasses for factory machine operators.

Instructions

Classify each of the preceding costs as product costs or period costs. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for preparing your answer. Place an “X” in the appropriate column.

 

Product Costs

Period Costs

 

Direct

Direct

Factory

 

 

 

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Selling

Administrative

Cost

Cost

Cost

Cost

Expense

Expense

a partial list of heartland hotel s costs is provided below 647568

A partial list of Heartland Hotel’s costs is provided below.

a. Salary of the hotel president.

b. Depreciation of the hotel.

c. Cost of new carpeting.

d. Cost of soaps and shampoos for rooms.

e. Cost of food.

f. Wages of desk clerks.

g. Cost to paint lobby.

h. Cost of advertising in local newspaper.

i. Utility cost.

j. Cost of valet service.

k. General maintenance supplies.

l. Wages of maids.

m. Wages of bellhops.

n. Wages of convention setup employees.

o. Pay for view rental costs (in rooms).

p. Cost of room mini bar supplies.

q. Guest room telephone costs for long distance calls.

r. Wages of kitchen employees.

s. Cost of laundering towels and bedding.

t. Cost to replace lobby furniture.

u. Training for hotel restaurant servers.

v. Cost to mail a customer survey.

w. Champagne for guests.

Instructions

1. What would be Heartland’s most logical definition for the final cost object?

2. Identify how each of the costs is to be classified as either direct or indirect. Define direct costs in terms of a hotel guest as the cost object.

the following information is available for earp corporation for 2008 647570

The following information is available for Earp Corporation for 2008:

Inventories

January 1

December 31

Materials

$125,000

$155,000

Work in process

225,000

210,000

Finished goods

215,000

210,000

 

Advertising expense

$ 105,000

Depreciation expense—Office equipment

15,000

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment

20,000

Direct labor

240,000

Heat, light, and power—Factory

8,000

Indirect labor

28,000

Materials purchased during August

235,000

Office salaries expense

82,000

Property taxes—Factory

6,500

Property taxes—Office building

13,500

Rent expense—Factory

11,000

Sales

1,100,000

Sales salaries expense

135,000

Supplies—Factory

5,500

Miscellaneous cost—Factory

3,400

Instructions

1. Prepare the 2008 statement of cost of goods manufactured.

2. Prepare the 2008 income statement.

farrar manufacturing company allows employees to purchase at cost manufacturing mate 647571

Farrar Manufacturing Company allows employees to purchase, at cost, manufacturing materials, such as metal and lumber, for personal use. To purchase materials for personal use, an employee must complete a materials requisition form, which must then be approved by the employee’s immediate supervisor. Peggy Carron, an assistant cost accountant, charges the employee an amount based on Farrar’s net purchase cost.

Peggy Carron is in the process of replacing a deck on her home and has requisitioned lumber for personal use, which has been approved in accordance with company policy. In computing the cost of the lumber, Peggy reviewed all the purchase invoices for the past year. She then used the lowest price to compute the amount due the company for the lumber.

Discuss whether Peggy behaved in an ethical manner.

on time computer repairs provides computer repair services for the community laurie 647574

On Time Computer Repairs provides computer repair services for the community. Laurie Estes’s computer was not working, and she called On Time for a home repair visit. The On Time technician arrived at 2:00 P.M. to begin work. By 4:00 P.M. the problem was diagnosed as a failed circuit board. Unfortunately, the technician did not have a new circuit board in the truck, since the technician’s previous customer had the same problem, and a board was used on that visit. Replacement boards were available back at the On Time shop. Therefore, the technician drove back to the shop to retrieve a replacement board. From 4:00 to 5:00 P.M., the On Time technician drove the round trip to retrieve the replacement board from the shop.

At 5:00 P.M. the technician was back on the job at Laurie’s home. The replacement procedure is somewhat complex, since a variety of tests must be performed once the board is installed. The job was completed at 6:00 P.M.

Laurie’s repair bill showed the following:

Circuit board

$ 80

Labor charges

190

Total

$270

Laurie was surprised at the size of the bill and asked for some greater detail supporting the calculations. On Time responded with the following explanations.

Cost of materials:

 

Purchase price of circuit board

$60

Markup on purchase price to cover storage and handling

20

Total materials charge

$80

The labor charge per hour is detailed as follows:

2:00–3:00 P.M.

$ 40

3:00–4:00 P.M.

35

4:00–5:00 P.M.

45

5:00–6:00 P.M.

70

Total labor charge

$190

Further explanations in the differences in the hourly rates are as follows:

First hour:

$20

Base labor rate

7

Fringe benefits

8

Overhead (other than storage and handling)

$35

Total base labor rate

 

Additional charge for first hour of any job to cover the

 

cost of vehicle depreciation, fuel, and employee time in

 

transit. A 30 minute transit time is assumed.

5

 

$40

Third hour:

 

Base labor rate

$35

The trip back to the shop includes vehicle depreciation

 

and fuel; therefore, a charge was added to the hourly rate

 

to cover these costs. The round trip took an hour.

10

 

$45

Fourth hour:

 

Base labor rate

$35

Overtime premium for time worked in excess of an eight hour

 

day (starting at 5:00 P.M.) is equal to the base rate.

35

 

$70

1. If you were in Laurie’s position, how would you respond to the bill? Are there parts of the bill that appear incorrect to you? If so, what argument would you employ to convince On Time that the bill is too high?

2. Use the headings below to construct a table. Fill in the table by first listing the costs identified in the activity in the left hand column. For each cost, place a check mark in the appropriate column identifying the correct cost classification. Assume that each service call is a job.

Cost

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Overhead

with a group of students visit a local copy and graphics shop or a pizza restaurant 647576

With a group of students, visit a local copy and graphics shop or a pizza restaurant. As you observe the operation, consider the costs associated with running the business. As a group, identify as many costs as you can and classify them according to the following table headings:

 

Direct

Direct

 

Selling

Cost

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Expenses

derby music company specializes in producing and packaging compact discs cds for the 647580

Derby Music Company specializes in producing and packaging compact discs (CDs) for the music recording industry. Derby uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for March, the first month of operations:

a. Materials purchased on account, $15,500.

b. Materials requisitioned and labor used:

 

 

Factory

 

Materials

Labor

Job No. 100

$2,650

$1,770

Job No. 101

1,240

650

Job No. 102

980

420

Job No. 103

3,420

1,900

Job No. 104

1,000

500

Job No. 105

2,100

1,760

For general factory use

450

650

c. Factory overhead costs incurred on account, $2,700.

d. Depreciation of machinery, $1,750.

e. Factory overhead is applied at a rate of 70% of direct labor cost.

f. Jobs completed: Nos. 100, 101, 102, 104.

g. Jobs 100, 101, and 102 were shipped, and customers were billed for $8,100, $3,800, and $3,500, respectively.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the transactions identified above.

2. Determine the account balances for Work in Process and Finished Goods.

3. Prepare a schedule of unfinished jobs to support the balance in the work in process account.

4. Prepare a schedule of completed jobs on hand to support the balance in the finished goods account.

five selected transactions for the current month are indicated by letters in the fol 647599

Five selected transactions for the current month are indicated by letters in the following T accounts in a job order cost accounting system:

Materials

Work in Process

 

(a)

(a)

(d)

   

(b)

 
   

(c)

 

Wages Payable

Finished Goods

 

(b)

(d)

(e)

Factory Overhead

Cost of Goods Sold

(a)

(c)

(e)

 

(b)

     

Describe each of the five transactions.

the following information is available for the first month of operations of korv inc 647600

The following information is available for the first month of operations of Korv Inc., a manufacturer of art and craft items:

Sales

$775,000

Gross profit

265,000

Indirect labor

63,000

Indirect materials

32,000

Other factory overhead

17,500

Materials purchased

303,000

Total manufacturing costs for the period

620,000

Materials inventory, end of period

35,000

Using the above information, determine the following missing amounts:

a. Cost of goods sold

b. Direct materials cost

c. Direct labor cost

how to get the net income 646840

A company maintains its records using cash basis accounting. During the year, the company received cash from customers, $34,000, and paid cash for taxes, $24,000. At the beginning of the year, customers owe the company $3,000. By the end of the year, customers owe $5,000. At the beginning of the year, the company owes taxes of $4,000. At the end of the year, the company owes taxes of $5,000. What is the accrual basis net income of the company for the current year?

Document Preview:

A company maintains its records using cash basis accounting. During the year, the company received cash from customers, $34,000, and paid cash for taxes, $24,000. At the beginning of the year, customers owe the company $3,000. By the end of the year, customers owe $5,000. At the beginning of the year, the company owes taxes of $4,000. At the end of the year, the company owes taxes of $5,000. What is the accrual basis net income of the company for the current year?

Attachments:

balance scorecard should be used to assess the performance measurement 646845

Balance scorecard should be used to assess the performance measurement. It is being considered as the strategic tool for performance measurement. The various methods are designed and automated tools are used by the managers in order to keep the track of activities taken up by the executives and thus various actions are taken up by the managers in order to monitor the consequences. The balance scorecard provides various information on the vision and mission of the company. Thus the vision and mission of the company will be considered for the preparation of the balance scorecard. It helps in providing the links between human and physical resources, the outcomes and the focus on the strategic priorities of the organization. For designing the balance scorecard, various financial and non financial measures are identified and various targets are attached to the various measures and the performance is measured so as to know that whether the performance is in accordance with the set expectations. The main idea behind designing the expectations is that mangers are given information in regard to the various deviations that are there in the various areas and they are encouraged to improve their performance. Balance scorecard helps in creating a relationship between conventional strategic planning and the various control activities. The various perspectives of the organization are being considered while designing the balance scorecard: 1. Financial perspective 2. Customer perspective 3. Internal business process perspective 4. Learning and growth

Document Preview:

Balance scorecard should be used to assess the performance measurement. It is being considered as the strategic tool for performance measurement. The various methods are designed and automated tools are used by the managers in order to keep the track of activities taken up by the executives and thus various actions are taken up by the managers in order to monitor the consequences. The balance scorecard provides various information on the vision and mission of the company. Thus the vision and mission of the company will be considered for the preparation of the balance scorecard. It helps in providing the links between human and physical resources, the outcomes and the focus on the strategic priorities of the organization. For designing the balance scorecard, various financial and non financial measures are identified and various targets are attached to the various measures and the performance is measured so as to know that whether the performance is in accordance with the set expectations. The main idea behind designing the expectations is that mangers are given information in regard to the various deviations that are there in the various areas and they are encouraged to improve their performance. Balance scorecard helps in creating a relationship between conventional strategic planning and the various control activities. The various perspectives of the organization are being considered while designing the balance scorecard: Financial perspective Customer perspective Internal business process perspective Learning and growth The balance score card of the current period provides information in regard to both the past and future events. The diagram provides the information in regard to designing the innovated balance scorecard. Thus, the balance scorecard dictated management software. But it need to be developed and implemented in strategic manner and thus need to work as a performance measurement tool. Thus the senior managers need to give their advices in relation…

Attachments:

hi would you be able to get the solutions for the 2013 and or 2014 assignment 646866

Hi, would you be able to get the solutions for the 2013 and/or 2014 assignment?

Document Preview:

FMAC 503 Final Individual Assignment July 2014 Guidelines The objective of the final assignment is to communicate your answer in a simple, clear way. Therefore: Show all of your work in a Word document. Fit your work onto 8 ½ x 11 inch pieces of paper. Single space. Use Arial 12 font. Include a brief header containing your name on each page. Do not retype the problem. Do not include a table of contents. Clearly structure your response to correspond to the structure of the assignment (e.g., “Part B, Q. 1”). Use the marking template at the end of the exam to record multiple choice and true/false responses. These questions require only a letter or one word response answer. For example: c true (or just t) Part A – MULTIPLE CHOICE and TRUE/FALSE (1 mark each x 15 questions = 15 marks). Choose the one alternative that best completes the statement or answers the question. The globalization of business activity has resulted in which of the following? Increased corruption and unethical behavior. The FASB and IASB working jointly on a project to converge accounting standards. The requirement that major US companies use International Financial Reporting Standards. All of the above. b and c. The manipulation of the allowance for doubtful accounts by management would be best indicated when a company: lowers its credit standards and the decreases the allowance account. tightens its credit standards and decreases the allowance account. tightens its credit standards and increases the allowance account. lowers its credit standards and increases the allowance account. The best measure for determining how well a firm operates within its industry is gross profit earnings before taxes operating profit net profit Declaring a dividend results in a cash outflow from financing activities. (True/false) Consider the following statements I. The cash conversion cycle of a firm can be improved by decreasing the days inventory held, days payable outstanding, and the average…

Attachments:

identify the three types of unions select one and explain how it is able to increase 646887

1. Identify the three types of unions. Select one and explain how it is able to increase worker wages.

2. What determines the economic rent for land? Explain from a supply and demand perspective.

3. What factors might cause the interest rates to differ? Explain.

4. How will the market demand curve for a public good differ from the market demand curve for a private good?

5. Cite three important reasons why nations trade.

6. Define the four basic types of trade barriers.

7. What are the major components of the current account in the balance of payments? How is the current account balance determined?

8. What are the basic purposes of antitrust policy?

Document Preview:

Microeconomics Name _________________________ 1. Identify the three types of unions. Select one and explain how it is able to increase worker wages. 2. What determines the economic rent for land? Explain from a supply and demand perspective. 3. What factors might cause the interest rates to differ? Explain. 4. How will the market demand curve for a public good differ from the market demand curve for a private good? 5. Cite three important reasons why nations trade. 6. Define the four basic types of trade barriers. 7. What are the major components of the current account in the balance of payments? How is the current account balance determined? 8. What are the basic purposes of antitrust policy?

Attachments:

the taxability of meal vouchers furnished by mercy hospital to its medical staff 646902

Our client, Mercy Hospital (“Mercy”), provides

meal vouchers to its medical employees to enable them to remain on emergency call. The vouchers are redeemable at Mercy’s onsite cafeteria

and at MacDougal’s, a privately owned sandwich shop. MacDougal’s rents business space from the hospital. Although Mercy does

not require its employees to remain on or near its premises during their meal hours, the employees generally do. Elizabeth Fegali, Mercy’s

Chief Administrator, has asked us to research whether the value of the meal vouchers is taxable to the employees.

Issues

[
Identify the issue(s) raised by the facts. Be specific.] The taxability of the meal vouchers depends on three issues: first, whether the meals

are furnished “for the convenience of the employer”; second, whether they are furnished “on the business premises of the employer”;

and third, whether the vouchers are equivalent to cash.

Applicable Law

[
Discuss those legal principles that both strengthen and weaken the client’s case. Because the primary authority for tax law is the IRC,

begin with the IRC.] Section 119 provides that the value of meals is excludible from an employee’s income if the meals are furnished for

the convenience of, and on the business premises of the employer. [
Discuss how administrative and/or judicial authorities expound on

statutory terms.] Under Reg. Sec. 1.119 1, a meal is furnished “for the convenience of the employer” if it is furnished for a “substantial

noncompensatory business reason.” A “substantial noncompensatory business reason” includes the need to have the employee available

for emergency calls during his or her meal period. Under Sec. 119(b)(4), if more than half the employees satisfy the “for the convenience

of the employer” test, all employees will be regarded as satisfying the test. Regulation Sec. 1.119 1 defines “business premises of the

employer” as the place of employment of the employee.

[
When discussing court cases, present case facts in such a way as to enable the reader to draw an analogy with client facts.] A Supreme

Court case,
Kowalski v. CIR, 434 U.S. 77, 77 2 USTC ¶9748, discusses what constitutes “meals” for purposes of Sec. 119. In
Kowalski,

the State of New Jersey furnished cash meal allowances to its state troopers to enable them to eat while on duty. It did not require the

troopers to use the allowances exclusively for meals. Nor did it require them to consume their meals on its business premises. One

trooper, R.J. Kowalski, excluded the value of his allowances from his income. The IRS disputed this treatment, and Kowalski took the

IRS to Court. In Court, Kowalski argued that the allowances were excludible because they were furnished “for the convenience of the

Attachments:

pearl products limited of shenzhen china manufactures and distributes toys throughou 646951

Pearl Products Limited of Shenzhen, China, manufactures and distributes toys throughout South East Asia. Three cubic centimeters (cc) of solvent H300 are required to manufacture each unit of Supermix, one of the company’s products. The company is now planning raw materials needs for the third quarter, the quarter in which peak sales of Supermix occur. To keep production and sales moving smoothly, the company has the following inventory requirements:

a.

The finished goods inventory on hand at the end of each month must be equal to 4,000 units of Supermix plus 25% of the next month’s sales. The finished goods inventory on June 30 is budgeted to be 18,250 units.

b.

The raw materials inventory on hand at the end of each month must be equal to one half of the following month’s production needs for raw materials. The raw materials inventory on June 30 is budgeted to be 76,000 cc of solvent H300.

c. The company maintains no work in process inventories.
A sales budget for Supermix for the last six months of the year follows.
Budgeted Sales
in Units
July 57,000
August 62,000
September 72,000
October 52,000
November 42,000
December 32,000

Prepare a production budget for Supermix for the months July, August, September, and October.
Prepare a direct materials budget showing the quantity of solvent H300 to be purchased for July, August, and September, and for the quarter in total.

imagine that you have recently been appointed as a junior investment analyst at bord 646957

Imagine that you have recently been appointed as a junior investment analyst at Bord, Dulle and Witless a firm of London stockbrokers. You have been asked to produce an analysis of Tesco plc and its market segment. Your report should contain the following elements:? An analysis of the financial status of Tesco plc with comments producing the main financial ratios. (Use comparatives to produce comments, Extract from the financial statements attached)

Tesco plc Financial Statements as at 22 February 2014 (abbreviated)

http://www.tescoplc.com/files/pdf/reports/ar14/download_annual_report.pdf

Income Statement£m

2014

2013

Revenue

63,557

63,406

Cost of Sales

(59,547)

(59,252)

Gross profit

4,010

4,154

Admin expenses

(1,657)

(1,482)

Pofit/(Loss) from Properties

278

(290)

Operating Profit

2,631

2,382

Finance Costs (Interest)

(372)

(325)

Profit before tax

2,259

2,057

Balance Sheet£m

2014

2013

Non current Assets

34,592

37,033

Investments

2,487

631

Current assets:

Inventories (stock)

3,576

3,744

Trade receivables (Debtors)

5,987

5,689

Bank / cash

3,522

3,032

Current Liabilities:

Trade Payables (Creditors)

(10,595)

(11,094)

Short term loans

(10,804)

(7,891)

Long term loans

(14,043)

(14,483)

NET ASSETS

14,722

16,661

Share capital

5,485

5,423

Retained earnings

9,237

11,238

14,722

16,661

https www mycgaonline orgibbcswebdav orgs tx2instructor tx2 646993

https://www.mycgaonline.orgibbcswebdav/orgs/TX2Instructor/TX2_..

Assignment 5

Print

Notes

This assignment is similar in form, length, and difficulty to the actual exam. Please note the following:

¦ Due to its placement in the course, it covers the content of Modules 1 through 9. ¦ The emphasis of each module in this assignment is based on the weightings in the examination blueprint, adjusted for the absence of Module 10 material. • The actual exam will cover all 10 modules, as indicated in the examination blueprint. • The actual exam might contain up to 15 multiple choice questions as opposed to only 10 included in this assignment.

This assignment allows you to gauge your readiness for the actual exam and to better target your exam study, based on the feedback on your performance on this assignment. To derive the most benefit from this assignment, you should complete it under exam conditions within the four hour time limit. Upon completion, review your work against the course material.

• This assignment is based on the Canadian Income Tax Act (ITA) and its Regulations consolidated to July 2013 . • To clarify your answers, you may reference them to the applicable provisions of the ITA and its Regulations (except for Question 1, which is a multiple choice question). • Round all calculations to the nearest dollar. • All calculations must be shown in an orderly manner to obtain full marks.

Question 1 (2? marks)

Select the best answer for each of the following unrelated items. Answer each of these items by giving the number of your choice. Important: Multiple choice questions are to be completed within the Online Learning Environment in your TX2 Assignment Submission section. This portion of the assignment will be automatically graded. Do not include your answers in your Word document as they will not be graded. Marks will not be awarded for explanations.

Multiple choice (2 marks each)

a. A testamentary trust with the son of the taxpayer as the only beneficiary was created on February 1, 2013, as a result of the death of a taxpayer. The beneficiary received the following payments from the trust.

July 20, 2013 $15,000 September 20, 2013 $13,000 January 20, 2014 $ 4,000 February 20, 2014 $ 4,000

What year end should the trust have chosen to allow for maximum tax deferral for the beneficiary?

1 of 7 23/07/2014 10:45 AM

Attachments:

precision manufacturing inc pmi makes two types of industrial component parts the ex 647009

Precision Manufacturing Inc. (PMI) makes two types of industrial component parts—the EX300 and the TX500. An absorption costing income statement for the most recent period is shown below:

Precision Manufacturing Inc.
Income Statement
Sales $ 1,693,400
Cost of goods sold 1,212,924


Gross margin 480,476
Selling and administrative expenses 550,000


Net operating loss $ (69,524)





PMI produced and sold 60,100 units of EX300 at a price of $20 per unit and 12,600 units of TX500 at a price of $39 per unit. The company’s traditional cost system allocates manufacturing overhead to products using a plantwide overhead rate and direct labor dollars as the allocation base.
Additional information relating to the company’s two product lines is shown below:

EX300 TX500 Total
Direct materials $ 400,300 $ 162,500 $ 562,800
Direct labor $ 120,200 $ 42,200 162,400
Manufacturing overhead 487,724


Cost of goods sold $ 1,212,924





The company has created an activity based costing system to evaluate the profitability of its products. PMI’s ABC implementation team concluded that $57,000 and $109,000 of the company’s advertising expenses could be directly traced to EX300 and TX500, respectively. The remainder of the selling and administrative expenses was organization sustaining in nature. The ABC team also distributed the company’s manufacturing overhead to four activities as shown below:

Manufacturing

Activity

Activity Cost Pool (and Activity Measure) Overhead EX300 TX500 Total
Machining (machine hours) $ 202,224 90,400 62,800 153,200
Setups (setup hours) 123,200 78 230 308
Product sustaining (number of products) 101,800 1 1 2
Other (organization sustaining costs) 60,500 NA NA NA


Total manufacturing overhead cost $ 487,724





Required
1.

Compute the product margins for the EX300 and TX500 under the company’s traditional costing system.(Loss amounts should be indicated with a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

fasb and ifrs please visit www sec gov or any other fasb and ifrs related website a 647038

• FASB and IFRS Please visit www.sec.gov or any other FASB and IFRS related website and provide: 1. The current status of the convergence process between FASB (USA) and IASB. 2. The list of countries that have adopted IFRS with their legal systems in those countries as shown below Be sure to label each section clearly. For written answers, please make sure your responses are well written, use APA formatting and have the proper citations (in text citations) and reference page

Document Preview:

• FASB and IFRS Please visit www.sec.gov or any other FASB and IFRS related website and provide: 1. The current status of the convergence process between FASB (USA) and IASB. 2. The list of countries that have adopted IFRS with their legal systems in those countries as shown below Be sure to label each section clearly. For written answers, please make sure your responses are well written, use APA formatting and have the proper citations (in text citations) and reference page

Attachments:

gauntlet company has the following information for january 647520

Gauntlet Company has the following information for January:

Cost of direct materials used in production

$25,000

Direct labor

35,000

Factory overhead

20,000

Work in process inventory, January 1

30,000

Work in process inventory, January 31

25,000

Finished goods inventory, January 1

15,000

Finished goods inventory, January 31

12,000

For January, determine (a) the cost of goods manufactured and (b) the cost of goods sold.

the following is a list of costs that were incurred in producing this textbook 647521

The following is a list of costs that were incurred in producing this textbook:

a. Insurance on the factory building and equipment

b. Salary of the vice president of finance

c. Hourly wages of printing press operators during production

d. Straight line depreciation on the printing presses used to manufacture the text

e. Electricity used to run the presses during the printing of the text

f. Sales commissions paid to textbook representatives for each text sold

g. Paper on which the text is printed

h. Book covers used to bind the pages

i. Straight line depreciation on an office building

j. Salaries of staff used to develop artwork for the text

k. Glue used to bind pages to cover

Instructions

With respect to the manufacture and sale of this text, classify each cost as either a product cost or a period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense.

three phases of the management process are controlling strategies and decision makin 647535

Three phases of the management process are controlling, strategies, and decision making. Match the following descriptions to the proper phase.

Phase of management process

 

Description

Controlling

a.

Inherent in planning, directing, controlling, and improving.

Strategies

b.

Monitoring the operating results of implemented plans and

 

 

comparing the actual results with expected results.

Decision making

c..

Long range courses of action.

nantahala company has the following information for august 647542

Nantahala Company has the following information for August:

Cost of direct materials used in production

$30,000

Direct labor

45,000

Factory overhead

22,000

Work in process inventory, August 1

10,000

Work in process inventory, August 31

8,000

Finished goods inventory, August 1

18,000

Finished goods inventory, August 31

10,000

For August, determine (a) the cost of goods manufactured and (b) the cost of goods sold.

tsali company has the following information for february 647543

Tsali Company has the following information for February:

Cost of direct materials used in production

$18,000

Direct labor

54,000

Factory overhead

36,000

Work in process inventory, February 1

50,000

Work in process inventory, February 28

57,000

Finished goods inventory, February 1

22,000

Finished goods inventory, February 28

26,000

For February, determine (a) the cost of goods manufactured and (b) the cost of goods sold.

for apparel manufacturer ann taylor inc classify each of the following costs as eith 647547

For apparel manufacturer Ann Taylor, Inc., classify each of the following costs as either a product cost or a period cost:

a. Factory janitorial supplies

b. Depreciation on office equipment

c. Advertising expenses

d. Fabric used during production

e. Depreciation on sewing machines

f. Property taxes on factory building and equipment

g. Sales commissions

h. Wages of sewing machine operators

i. Repairs and maintenance costs for sewing machines

j. Salary of production quality control supervisor

k. Factory supervisors’ salaries

l. Oil used to lubricate sewing machines

m. Travel costs of salespersons

n. Corporate controller’s salary

o. Utility costs for office building

p. Research and development costs

q. Salaries of distribution center personnel

from the choices presented in parentheses choose the appropriate term for completing 647548

From the choices presented in parentheses, choose the appropriate term for completing each of the following sentences:

a. Feedback is often used to (improve, direct) operations.

b. A product, sales territory, department, or activity to which costs are traced is called a (direct cost, cost object).

c. Payments of cash or the commitment to pay cash in the future for the purpose of generating revenues are (costs, expenses).

d. The balance sheet of a manufacturer would include an account for (cost of goods sold, work in process inventory).

e. Factory overhead costs combined with direct labor costs are called (prime, conversion) costs.

f. Advertising costs are usually viewed as (period, product) costs.

g. The implementation of automatic, robotic factory equipment normally (increases, decreases) the direct labor component of product costs.

a partial list of the costs for mountain lakes railroad a short hauler of freight is 647550

A partial list of the costs for Mountain Lakes Railroad, a short hauler of freight, is provided below. Classify each cost as either indirect or direct. For purposes of classifying each cost as direct or indirect, use the train as the cost object.

a. Cost to lease (rent) train locomotives.

b. Wages of switch and classification yard personnel

c. Wages of train engineers

d. Cost to lease (rent) railroad cars

e. Maintenance costs of right of way, bridges, and buildings

f. Fuel costs

g. Payroll clerk salaries

h. Safety training costs

i. Salaries of dispatching and communications personnel

j. Costs of accident cleanup

k. Cost of track and bed (ballast) replacement

l. Depreciation of terminal facilities

the following report was prepared for evaluating the performance of the plant manage 647551

The following report was prepared for evaluating the performance of the plant manager of Miss Take Inc. Evaluate and correct this report.

Miss Take Inc.

 

Manufacturing Costs

 

For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2008

 

Direct labor (including $80,000 maintenance salaries)

$ 430,000

Materials used in production (including

 

$40,000 of indirect materials)

680,000

Factory overhead:

 

Supervisor salaries

610,000

Heat, light, and power

140,000

Sales salaries

270,000

Promotional expenses

310,000

Insurance and property taxes—plant

160,000

Insurance and property taxes—corporate offices

210,000

Depreciation—plant and equipment

80,000

Depreciation—corporate offices

100,000

Total

$2,990,000

the following events took place for gantt manufacturing company during march the fir 647552

The following events took place for Gantt Manufacturing Company during March, the first month of its operations as a producer of digital clocks:

a. Purchased $65,000 of materials.

b. Used $50,000 of direct materials in production.

c. Incurred $75,000 of direct labor wages.

d. Incurred $105,000 of factory overhead.

e. Transferred $175,000 of work in process to finished goods.

f. Sold goods with a cost of $140,000.

g. Earned revenues of $310,000.

h. Incurred $80,000 of selling expenses.

i. Incurred $35,000 of administrative expenses.

 

a. Prepare the March income statement for Gantt Manufacturing Company.

b. Determine the inventory balances at the end of the first month of operations.

at december 31 2011 ethan company reports the following results for its calendar yea 646454

At December 31, 2011, Ethan Company reports the following results for its calendar year.

Cash sales

$1,803,750

Credit sales 

3,534,000

In addition, its unadjusted trial balance includes the following items.

Accounts receivable

$1,070,100 debit

Allowance for doubtful accounts

15,750 debit

Required

1. Prepare the adjusting entry for this company to recognize bad debts under each of the following independent assumptions.

a. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of credit sales.

b. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total sales.

c. An aging analysis estimates that 5% of year end accounts receivable are uncollectible.

2. Show how Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1a.

3. Show how Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1c.

estimate the required balance of the allowance for doubtful accounts at december 31 646455

Carmack Company has credit sales of $2.6 million for year 2011. On December 31, 2011, the company’s Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has an unadjusted credit balance of $13,400. Carmack prepares a schedule of its December 31, 2011, accounts receivable by age. On the basis of past experience, it estimates the  percent of receivables in each age category that will become uncollectible. This information is summarized here.

December 31, 2011
Accounts Receivable

Age of
Accounts Receivable

Expected Percent
Uncollectible

$730,000

Not yet due

1.25%

354,000

1 to 30 days past due

2

76,000

31 to 60 days past due

6.5

48,000

61 to 90 days past due

32.75

12,000

Over 90 days past due

68

Required

1. Estimate the required balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2011, using the aging of accounts receivable method.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expense at December 31, 2011.

3. On June 30, 2012, Carmack Company concludes that a customer’s $3,750 receivable (created in 2011) is uncollectible and that the account should be written off. What effect will this action have on Carmack’s 2012 net income? Explain.

the following selected transactions are from ohlde company 646456

The following selected transactions are from Ohlde Company.

2010

Dec. 16 Accepted a $9,600, 60 day, 9% note dated this day in granting Todd Duke a time extension on his past due account receivable.

31 Made an adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on the Duke note.

2011

Feb. 14 Received Duke’s payment of principal and interest on the note dated December 16.

Mar. 2 Accepted an $4,120, 8%, 90 day note dated this day in granting a time extension on the pastdue account receivable from Mare Co.

17 Accepted a $2,400, 30 day, 7% note dated this day in granting Jolene Halaam a time extension on her past due account receivable.

Apr. 16 Halaam dishonored her note when presented for payment.

June 2 Mare Co. refuses to pay the note that was due to Ohlde Co. on May 31. Prepare the journal entry to charge the dishonored note plus accrued interest to Mare Co.’s accounts receivable.

July 17 Received payment from Mare Co. for the maturity value of its dishonored note plus interest for 46 days beyond maturity at 8%.

Aug. 7 Accepted an $5,440, 90 day, 10% note dated this day in granting a time extension on the pastdue account receivable of Birch and Byer Co.

Sept. 3 Accepted a $2,080, 60 day, 10% note dated this day in granting Kevin York a time extension on his past due account receivable.

Nov. 2 Received payment of principal plus interest from York for the September 3 note.

Nov. 5 Received payment of principal plus interest from Birch and Byer for the August 7 note.

Dec. 1 Wrote off the Jolene Halaam account against Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

2. What reporting is necessary when a business pledges receivables as security for a loan and the loan is still outstanding at the end of the period? Explain the reason for this requirement and the accounting principle being satisfied.

able co allows select customers to make purchases on credit its other customers can 646457

Able Co. allows select customers to make purchases on credit. Its other customers can use either of two credit cards: Commerce Bank or Aztec. Commerce Bank deducts a 3% service charge for sales on its credit card and immediately credits the bank account of Able when credit card receipts are deposited. Able deposits the Commerce Bank credit card receipts each business day. When customers use the Aztec card, Able accumulates the receipts for several days and then submits them to Aztec for payment. Aztec deducts a 2% service charge and usually pays within one week of being billed. Able completed the following transactions in August (terms of all credit sales are 2/10, n/30; and all sales are recorded at the gross price).

Aug. 4 Sold $2,780 of merchandise (that had cost $1,750) on credit to Stacy Dalton.

10 Sold $3,248 of merchandise (that had cost $2,456) to customers who used their Commerce Bank credit cards.

11 Sold $1,575 of merchandise (that had cost $1,150) to customers who used their Aztec cards.

14 Received Dalton’s check in full payment for the purchase of August 4.

15 Sold $2,960 of merchandise (that had cost $1,758) to customers who used their Aztec cards.

18 Submitted Aztec card receipts accumulated since August 11 to the credit card company for payment.

22 Wrote off the account of Ness City against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The $398 balance in Ness City’s account stemmed from a credit sale in November of last year.

25 Received the amount due from Aztec.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events. (The company uses the perpetual inventory system. Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

prepare the adjusting entry for klimek co to recognize bad debts under each of the f 646459

At December 31, 2011, Klimek Company reports the following results for the year.

Cash sales 

$1,015,000

Credit sales

1,241,000

In addition, its unadjusted trial balance includes the following items.

Accounts receivable

$475,000 debit

Allowance for doubtful accounts 

5,200 credit

Required

1. Prepare the adjusting entry for Klimek Co. to recognize bad debts under each of the following independent assumptions.

a. Bad debts are estimated to be 2.5% of credit sales.

b. Bad debts are estimated to be 1.5% of total sales.

c. An aging analysis estimates that 6% of year end accounts receivable are uncollectible.

2. Show how Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1a.

3. Show how Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1c.

what effect will this action have on quisp s 2012 net income explain 646460

Quisp Company has credit sales of $3.5 million for year 2011. At December 31, 2011, the company’s Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has an unadjusted debit balance of $4,100. Quisp prepares a schedule of its December 31, 2011, accounts receivable by age. On the basis of past experience, it estimates the percent of receivables in each age category that will become uncollectible. This information is summarized here.

December 31, 2011
Accounts Receivable

Age of
Accounts Receivable

Expected Percent
Uncollectible

$296,400

Not yet due

2.0%

177,800

1 to 30 days past due

4.0

58,000

31 to 60 days past due

8.5

7,600

61 to 90 days past due

39.0

3,700

Over 90 days past due

82.0

Required

1. Compute the required balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2011, using the aging of accounts receivable method.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expense at December 31, 2011.

3. On July 31, 2012, Quisp concludes that a customer’s $2,345 receivable (created in 2011) is uncollectible and that the account should be written off. What effect will this action have on Quisp’s 2012 net income? Explain.

assume that business solutions has total revenues of 44 000 during the first three m 646462

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, realizes that she needs to begin accounting for bad debts expense. Assume that Business Solutions has total revenues of $44,000 during the first three months of 2012, and that the Accounts Receivable balance on March 31, 2012, is $22,867.

Required

1. Prepare the adjusting entry needed for Business Solutions to recognize bad debts expense on March 31, 2012, under each of the following independent assumptions (assume a zero unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at March 31).

a. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total revenues. (Round amounts to the dollar.)

b. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of accounts receivable. (Round amounts to the dollar.)

2. Assume that Business Solutions’ Accounts Receivable balance at June 30, 2012, is $20,250 and that one account of $100 has been written off against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts since March 31, 2012. If S. Rey uses the method prescribed in Part 1b, what adjusting journal entry must be made to recognize bad debts expense on June 30, 2012?

3. Should S. Rey consider adopting the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts expense rather than one of the allowance methods considered in part 1? Explain.

what is the amount of research in motion s accounts receivable as of february 27 201 646463

Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.

1. What is the amount of Research In Motion’s accounts receivable as of February 27, 2010?

2. Compute Research In Motion’s accounts receivable turnover as of February 27, 2010.

3. How long does it take, on average, for the company to collect receivables? Do you believe that customers actually pay the amounts due within this short period? Explain.

4. Research In Motion’s most liquid assets include (a) cash and cash equivalents, (b) short term investments, and (c) receivables. Compute the percentage that these liquid assets make up of current liabilities as of February 27, 2010. Do the same computations for February 28, 2009. Comment on the company’s ability to satisfy its current liabilities as of its 2010 fiscal year end compared to its 2009 fiscal year end.

5. What criteria did Research In Motion use to classify items as cash equivalents?

6. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for fiscal years after February 27, 2010, at  the SEC’s EDGAR database. Recomputed parts 2 and

4 and comment on any changes since February 27, 2010.

which company is more efficient in collecting its accounts receivable explain 646464

Comparative figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow.

 

Research In Motion

Apple

($ millions)

Current
Year

One
Year
Prior

Two
Years
Prior

Current
Year

One
Year
Prior

Two
Years
Prior

Accounts

           

receivable, net

$2,594

$2,112

$1,175

$3,361

$2,422

$1,637

Net sales

14,953

11,065

6,009

42,905

37,491

24,578

Required

1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for Research In Motion and Apple for each of the two most recent years using the data shown.

2. Using results from part 1, compute how many days it takes each company, on average, to collect receivables. Compare the collection periods for RIM and Apple, and suggest at least one explanation for the difference.

3. Which company is more efficient in collecting its accounts receivable? Explain.

what type of internal control s might be useful for this company in overseeing the m 646465

Kelly Steinman is the manager of a medium size company. A few years ago, Steinman persuaded the owner to base a part of her compensation on the net income the company earns each year. Each

December

she estimates year end financial figures in anticipation of the bonus she will receive. If the bonus is not as high as she would like, she offers several recommendations to the accountant for year end adjustments. One of her favorite recommendations is for the controller to reduce the estimate of doubtful accounts.

Required

1. What effect does lowering the estimate for doubtful accounts have on the income statement and balance sheet?

2. Do you believe Steinman’s recommendation to adjust the allowance for doubtful accounts is within her right as manager, or do you believe this action is an ethics violation? Justify your response.

3. What type of internal control(s) might be useful for this company in overseeing the manager’s recommendations for accounting changes?

compute the additional annual net income or loss expected under a plan a and b plan 646469

Bernard McCoy of LaserMonks is introduced in the chapter’s opening feature. Bernard currently sells his products through multiple outlets. Assume that he is considering two new selling options.

Plan A. LaserMonks would begin selling additional products online directly to customers, which are only currently sold directly to outlet stores. These new online customers would use their credit cards. It currently has the capability of selling through its Website with no additional investment in hardware or software. Credit sales are expected to increase by $250,000 per year. Costs associated with this plan are: cost of these sales will be $135,500, credit card fees will be 4.75% of sales, and additional recordkeeping and shipping costs will be 6% of sales. These online sales will reduce the sales to stores by $35,000 because some customers will now purchase items online. Sales to stores have a 25% gross margin percentage.

Plan B. Laser Monks would expand its market to more outlet stores. It would make additional credit sales of $500,000 to those stores. Costs associated with those sales are: cost of sales will be $375,000, additional recordkeeping and shipping will be 4% of sales, and uncollectible accounts will be 6.2% of sales.

Required

1. Compute the additional annual net income or loss expected under (a) Plan A and (b) Plan B.

2. Should Laser Monks pursue either plan? Discuss both the financial and nonfinancial factors relevant to this decision.

how long does it take on average for nokia to collect receivables 646471

Key information from Nokia, which is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services, follows.

EUR millions

Current Year

Prior Year

Accounts receivable, net* 

7,981

9,444

Sales

40,984

50,710

1. Compute the accounts receivable turnover for the current year.

2. How long does it take on average for Nokia to collect receivables?

3. Refer to BTN 9 2. How does Nokia compare to Research In Motion and Apple in terms of its accounts receivable turnover and its collection period?

4. Nokia reports an aging analysis of its receivables, based on due dates, as follows (in EUR millions) as of December 31, 2009. Compute the percent of receivables in each category.

EUR millions

Total Receivables

Current

7,302

Past due 1–30 days

393

Past due 31–180 days

170

More than 180 days

116

1 if the amount extracted from a coal mine was different every year for four years y 646534

Questions
1 to
20: Select the
best
answer
to
each
question_
Note
that
a
question
and its
answers may be
split
across
a
page
break, so
be
sure that you have seen
the
entire
question
and
all
the
answers before choosing an
answer.

1.
If
the amount
extracted
from
a
coal
mine
was
different
every
year
for four
years, you
would

  1. recompute the depletion expense rate per unit each year.
  2. use the same depletion expense rate per unit each year.
  3. credit accumulated depletion coal mine for the same amount each year
  4. debit depletion expense for the same amount each year_

2. Which
of the
following
would
not be a
liability
according
to
FASB’s
definition
of
a
liability?

  1. A note payable with no specified maturity date
  2. The signing of a three year etuployment contract at a fixed annual salary
  3. An obligation that’s estimated in amount
  4. An obligation to provide goods or services in the future
3. A warranty is an example of alan

  1. known
  2. settled
  3. estimated
  4. contingent
liability.

4.
A company
receives
a note payable
for
$3,500
at
9%
for
45
days. How
much
interest
(to
the nearest
cent)
will
the customer
owe
using a
360 clay
year?

  1. $315.00
  2. $35,138
  3. $3938
  4. $38.84

5.
Which
of
the
following
would
not
be
considered
a
contingent liabilit •’

  1. Pending legal action
  2. Mortgage payable
  3. Potential fines from the EPA
  4. C’ostgaing a loan

6. A repair that extends the useful life of an asset would be considered aeon

  1. orarrizry repair.
  2. extraordinary repair_
  3. capital expense.
  4. betterment.

7.
Cash equivalents are

  1. vet’ liquid and carry little risk
  2. very liquid and carry high risk
  3. not liquid and carry little risk
  4. not liquid and carry high. risk

8.
Research and
development
costs (R&D)
are
generally

  1. listed as “long term assets” on the balance sheet.
  2. listed as “current assets” on the balance sheet
  3. listed as ‘other intangibles” on the balance sheet.
  4. expensed and become part of the income statement.

9.
A patent has
amortization
this year of
$2.,300.
The
journal
entry would be

  1. debit Accumulated Amortization Patent, $2,300; credit Patent $2.,300.
  2. debit Amortization Expense Patent, $2,300; credit Patent $2,300.
  3. debit Amortization Expense Patent, $2,300 , credit Accumulated Depreciation Patent, $2,300.
  4. debit Accumulated Amortization Patent $2,300; credit Amortization Expense Patent, $2,3011

10.
A
company
purchased furniture
on
January
1,
2012_ Its cost
was
$15,600,
and it had
a
residual
value
of
$1,600.
Its useful
life
is
determined
to
be
three
years. Using double
declining
balance
depreciation_ the
depreciation
for
2012.
to
the
nearest
dollar
will
be

  1. $5,200.
  2. $9,331
  3. $10,400.
  4. $4,667.

11.
A
$400,000
issue
of
bonds
that sold for $363,000
matures
on
August
1,
2015. The journal entry
to
record
the
payment
of
the
bond on
the
maturity date is

  1. debit cash, $353,000; credit bonds payable, $363,000.
  2. debit cash, $400,000; credit bonds payable, $400.000.
  3. debit bonds payable, $400,000; credit cash, $400.000.
  4. debit bonds payable, $353,0130; credit cash, 5363.000.

12. Jewell Company has current assets of $56,000; long term assets
of
$135,000;
current
liabilities of
$44,000; and
long term liabilities
of $90,000.
Jewell Company’s
debt ratio
is

  1. 1273%.
  2. 78_6%_
  3. 70_2%.

I1.2.393%_

13.
Meranda
Corporation purchases
a
machine for
$125,000. It
has
an estimated
salvage
value of $10,000
and
is
expected
to
produce 50.000
units
in
its lifetime_
During the
first year
of operation,
it
produced
14,500
units_ To the
nearest
dollar, the
depreciation for
the
first
year
under
the units
of
production
method
will
be

  1. $36250_
  2. $31,2.50_
  3. $33,350_
  4. $35.500_

14.
Which
of
the
folio van. g would
indicate
poor
internal control
over accounts
receivable?

  1. The person handling cash receipts passes the receipts to someone who enters them into accounts receivable.
  2. The mailroom employees open the mail and give the cash receipts to another employee.
  3. The same person handling cash receipts also records the accounts receivable transactions.
  4. The person who handles accounts receivable wouldn’t write off accounts as uncollectable.

15.
Which
of
the
following is
not
a
benefit
to extending credit
to
customers?

  1. Increased revenues
  2. Wider range of customers
  3. Bad debt expenses
  4. Increased profits

16.
Ryan
Corporation made
a
basket purchase
of
three
items_
Item
A was
appraised
at
$35,000;
item
B
was
appraised
at $55,000; and
item C
was
appraised at $60,000_ The
purchase
price
was $125,000.
The amount
at which
item
C
should be
recorded (rounded
to
the
nearest dollar)
is

  1. $83,300_
  2. $29,167_
  3. $72,000_
  4. $50.000.

17.
Casey
Company’s
bank statement
shows
a bank balance
of
$43,267_
The
statement shows
a
bank
service charge
of
$50
and a
bank collection
of
$760 in
Casey Company’s behalf Casey’s
book
balance
should
be
adjusted by
a
total
of

  1. 47’60_
  2. 4710_
  3. +$310_
  4. $710.

18. Which of the following marketable securities are reported_ at market value on the balance
sheet
date?

  1. Available for securities
  2. Held to raaiurities securities
  3. Available for sale and trading securities
  4. Trading securities

19. Using
a
360 day year,
the
maturity value of
a
69 day note
for $1,500
at 7%
annual interest is (rounded
to the nearest
cent)

  1. $1,520.13.
  2. $2043_
  3. $1,584,88.
  4. $1,605.00.

20. Taylor
Company has given
you
the
following
information
from
its
a.ging.
of accounts receivable_ The
current
amount
in. the allowance for
doubtfirl accounts
is
a $958
credit

Current $24,400 2% uncollectible
31 60 days 7350 8% uncollectible
6140 days 3,380 15% nnoollectible
91 and up 1220 30% uncollectible

Using tlui MformatiorL
what
is
the
amount
of
the
journal
entry
to
record the allowance for doubtful
accounn?

  1. $541
  2. $2.457
  3. $991
  4. $1.949

Attachments:

brazilia bus tours has incurred the following bus maintenance costs during the recen 646569

Brazilia Bus Tours has incurred the following bus maintenance costs during the recent tourist season. (The realis Brazil’s national monetary unit. On the day of this exercise was written, the realwas equivalent in value to .5092 U.S. dollar.)

Month

Miles Traveled by Tour Buses

Maintenance Cost

November

12,750

17,100 real

December

15,900

17,400

January

19,050

17,550

February

22,500

18,000

March

30,000

18,750

April

12,000

16,500

Question:

Build a spreadsheet.Construct an Excel spreadsheet to solve all of the preceding requirements. Show how the solution will change if the following information changes: in March there were 32,000 miles traveled and the cost was 20,000 real.

Document Preview:

Brazilia Bus Tours has incurred the following bus maintenance costs during the recent tourist season. (The real is Brazil’s national monetary unit. On the day of this exercise was written, the real was equivalent in value to .5092 U.S. dollar.) Month?Miles Traveled by Tour Buses?Maintenance Cost??November?12,750?17,100 real??December?15,900?17,400??January?19,050?17,550??February?22,500?18,000??March?30,000?18,750??April?12,000?16,500?? Question: Build a spreadsheet. Construct an Excel spreadsheet to solve all of the preceding requirements. Show how the solution will change if the following information changes: in March there were 32,000 miles traveled and the cost was 20,000 real.

Attachments:

kate and gino are cousins a few years ago kate completed 646598

Kate and Gino are cousins. A few years ago Kate completed her Master of Professional Accounting degree at Southern Cross University. Since then she has worked as an accountant in an accountant’s office. Recently she was admitted to a professional accounting body. She decided that she would establish her own business specialising in internal control systems. In establishing the business she was assisted by Gino who gave her valuable advice in regard to various computer programmes. He also gave her the names of some people who were familiar with that type of business and also introduced her to business people who could be potential clients. Kate’s business prospered. She decided that in view of her success she would buy a very special expensive foreign car as an indicator of that success. She bought the car and in appreciation of the help given to her by Gino she said to him: ‘I want to give you my old car as a gift for all the help you gave me in getting started in business.’ Gino replied: ‘Thank you, that’s great. I am in some financial difficulty at present and getting your car will be of enormous financial benefit to me’.

Kate then said: ‘In that case I would not mind if you sold my old car. You could then use the cash to help get you over your financial problem. The car is worth about $20,000.’

Gino decided to sell the car in order to get the cash. With the help of Kate he drafted an advertisement for publication in a daily newspaper that read:

Holden X22 car for sale $20,000. Excellent condition. Write, phone or, email. The first person to contact me will get the car.

There followed Gino’s name, address, phone number and email address. The advertisement was published in the daily newspaper on May 1 last.

On that day Marcel posted a letter to Gino saying: ‘I am interested in buying your car. Is it an automatic or manual?’ Gino did not reply to him.

On May 2 Lin posted a letter to Gino: ‘I agree to buy your car for your price of $20,000. When can I pick it up?’ Gino did not reply to her.

On May 3 Singo phoned Gino and said that he agreed to buy the car for the advertised price. Because of the bad phone connection Patrick was unsure of Dennis’ reply.

Also on May 3 Hang sent an email: ‘I really want your car. I enclose a cheque for $2000 as a deposit on the full price of $20,000.’ Gino read the email but did not reply to her.

However, early on May 2 Kate said to Gino ‘I am very sorry but I have decided to keep my Holden car as I think I will need a second car for use in the business. I am very sorry for any trouble I may have caused you.’

Assume the letters were received by Gino two days after being posted.

You are required to:

Advise each of the above parties in relation to any legal rights or obligations they may have based on the above circumstances.

In giving your advice:

a. refer to and rely on the relevant legal principles; and

b. discuss briefly the relevant case law.

Question 2 (12 marks)

Lily recently bought a very large house in the north coast of NSW.She decided to have the gardens landscaped. She checked the newspapers and found an advertisement by a company called Doall Pty Ltd. (D Co) which stated: “Paths, fencing and garden maintenance our specialty. We also can quote for larger jobs. We can do it all. No job is too big for us”. After discussions with D Co Lily entered a contract with the company

They agreed on a price of $85,000. Lily was given a document headed “Memorandum of Terms of Contract”. This document set out the job specifications, price and date of completion. On the reverse side of this document the following clauses were inserted by rubber stamp:

Clause 1: The company accepts no responsibility for personal injury to the customer during performance of the contract.

Clause 2: Liability for any damage to the customer’s home is limited to the sum of $3000 and no liability can be accepted for the loss of, or damage to, the customer’s goods.

Sid, employed by D Co, drove a dumper truck through the wall of Lily’s house. When Lily returned home that night she collided with the dumper truck which Sid had left in the middle of the driveway. Her car was completely wrecked and her arm was broken.

Next day Lily phoned the managing director of the company and demanded that the company pay for the property damage and the personal injury to her. The managing director denied any liability of the company and said:” I am sorry Lily but the contract is quite clear, the company is not liable. Even if the company were liable the maximum amount payable would be $3000”.

Lily is very angry at the company’s response to her demands. She seeks your assistance.

You are required to advise:

a. Lily, and

b. Doall Pty Ltd (D Co)

regarding their possible legal rights and liabilities.

Discuss only the position under the common law.

In your answer refer to relevant legal authority.

Attachments:

excel spreadsheet 646723

The file above contains the templates for two Long term Debt problems from the textbook. Each problem has the given information on its own tab create your answers on two more new tabs. The information and requirements for each problem can also be found in your textbook on pages 588 and 589. The problem does not indicate which amortization method to use, but straight line amortization method is acceptable.

NOTE: Please be sure to USE FORMULAS in all calculations within the cells of the amortization tables and elsewhere as indicated. You may use the fx (insert function) or type out the formulas (example; =cell B8*cell B9), whichever method you are more comfortable using. The practice and use of Excel formulas is extensive in the “real world” thus this set of problems is meant to provide you with practice towards reinforcing that skill.

Document Preview:

On January 1, 2013, Bainbridge Company borrowed $100,000 cash from a bank by issuing a 10 year, 9 percent note. The principal and interest are to be paid by making annual payments in the amount of $15,582. Payments are to be made December 31 of each year beginning December 31, 2013. ATC 10 9 Spreadsheet Assignment Using Excel 1. Set up the spreadsheet as shown below. Notice that Excel can be set up to calculate the loan payment. If you’re unfamiliar with this, see the following Spreadsheet Tips section. The Beginning Principal Balance (B12) and Cash Payment (C12) can be referenced from the Loan Information section. The interest rate used to calculate Interest Expense (D12) can also be referenced from the Loan Information section. 2. Complete the spreadsheet for the 10 periods. b. c. d. 3. In Row 23, calculate totals for cash payments, interest expense, and applied to principal. 4. Consider how the amounts would differ if Bainbridge were to borrow the $100,000 at different interest rates and time periods. The results of the original data (option 1) have been entered in the following schedule. In the spreadsheet, delete 9 percent and 10 from cells B4 and B5, respectively. Enter the data for the second option (8 percent and 10 years) in cells B4 and B5. Enter the recomputed payment and total interest in the schedule for the second option. Continue the same process for options 3 through 9 by deleting the prior rate and number of periods in the spreadsheet and entering in the next option’s data. The number of years scheduled (rows 12 through 21) will have to be shortened for the 7 year options and lengthened for the 13 year options. For this requirement copy the spreadsheet that you created in requirements 1 through 3, three times and only complete Options 3, 5, and 7. I want to be able to see the entire amortization schedule for each option. Additional spreadsheet tips can be found on Page 589 in your textbook. Wise Company was started on January 1, 2013, when it…

Attachments:

objectives determine a firm s financial condition by calculating and benchmarking 646740

Objectives: Determine a firm’s financial condition by calculating and benchmarking specified ratios against other companies in the industry. Use the Internet to gather information on a specified business topic. Produce business letters or memorandums using a word processing application. Develop a spreadsheet report that solves a business problem. Introduction: Company G operates a small chain of wholly owned home centers selling to consumers and contractors. Sales volume varies among the individual stores and ranges between $11 million and $20 million per year.

Document Preview:

Objectives: Determine a firm’s financial condition by calculating and benchmarking specified ratios against other companies in the industry. Use the Internet to gather information on a specified business topic. Produce business letters or memorandums using a word processing application. Develop a spreadsheet report that solves a business problem. Introduction: Company G operates a small chain of wholly owned home centers selling to consumers and contractors. Sales volume varies among the individual stores and ranges between $11 million and $20 million per year. The company is organized as a corporation and does not operate as a sub chapter S corporation. Given: Consolidated financial statements for Company G are shown on the attached “Statement Analysis Template.” • Sales volume shown is net sales. • During Year 12 60% of net sales were on a credit basis. • Inventory is stated at cost on a first in, first out basis. • Depreciation expense totaled $1,875,000 for Year 12 and $1,644,000 for Year 11. • Depreciation expense is not shown as a separate item on the income statements but is included in store operating expense and general and administrative expense. • Depreciable assets are depreciated using the straight line method over the estimated useful life of the assets. ? The market value for the company common stock at the end of Year 11 was $3.50/share and at the end of Year 12 it was $5.75/share. For this task, you will use financial statements and pertinent industry data to interpret Company G’s financial condition. The required ratios have been calculated for Year 11 and are shown on the attached “Statement Analysis Template.” Ratios gathered from financial statements that were submitted to banks and other financing institutions by a large number of home centers are also included on the template. The industry ratios included on the template were generated from statements submitted by stores with annual sales between $10 million and $24 million. As…

downtown theater sales 646823

E_CH08_EXPV2_IRCD_Instructions.docx Photography Specialists Revenue Comparison Project Description: As an accountant for the Photography Specialists of Springfield County, you have been asked to compare revenue totals between the years 2010 and 2011. To complete the project, you will create validation rules and messages, correct errors in the workbooks, create formulas and format data on grouped worksheets, and insert hyperlinks. Additionally, you will create 3 D formulas and link to data in other workbooks.

Document Preview:

E_CH08_EXPV2_IRCD_Instructions.docx Photography Specialists Revenue Comparison Project Description: As an accountant for the Photography Specialists of Springfield County, you have been asked to compare revenue totals between the years 2010 and 2011. To complete the project, you will create validation rules and messages, correct errors in the workbooks, create formulas and format data on grouped worksheets, and insert hyperlinks. Additionally, you will create 3 D formulas and link to data in other workbooks. Instructions: For the purpose of grading the project you are required to perform the following tasks: Step Instructions Points Possible 1 Start Excel. Download, save, and open the Excel workbook named Exploring_e08_Grader_IR.xlsx. Click OK to acknowledge the error. 0 2 On the Services worksheet, create a validation rule for the range B9:E9 so that only whole numbers that are greater than 0 are accepted. Create an input message using the text Sitting Fee as the title and Enter the total revenue generated from sitting fees. (including the period) as the message. Create an error alert using the stop style. Title the error alert Invalid Entry and enter Please enter a whole number. (including the period) as the message. 12 3 Circle the invalid data on the Services worksheet, and then change the invalid entry to 5975. 4 4 Group the Services and Products worksheets together. In cell B10, insert a formula to calculate the total revenue for Quarter 1. Copy the formula across through cell E10. 8 5 With the worksheets grouped together, apply the accounting number format with two decimal places to the range B5:E10. 4 6 With the worksheets still grouped together, indent the text in cell A10 one time. Ungroup the worksheets. 4 7 On the Services worksheet, in cell A12, enter the text 2011 Summary Details. In the same cell, create a hyperlink to the 2011 Summary worksheet. 6 8 Group the Services and Products worksheets. With the Services…

Attachments:

a segmented income statement for the software division with the segments defined as 646832

  1. A segmented income statement for the software division with the segments defined as product lines.
  2. Show computations to determine which product line should be chosen to increase sales according to the data given in the problem. Explain your answer in one or two sentences.
Document Preview:

AC203: Week 6 Segmented Income Statement Project Part 3: Computing Solutions has two divisions. The company’s contribution format income statement, segmented by divisions for 2011 is shown below. Computing Solutions Company Income Statement for 2011 Division Total Company Hardware Software Sales $1,500,000 $900,000 $600,000 Variable expenses 700,000 400,000 300,000 Contribution margin 800,000 500,000 300,000 Traceable fixed expenses: Advertising 300,000 180,000 120,000 Depreciation 140,000 92,000 48,000 Administration 220,000 118,000 102,000 Total 660,000 390,000 270,000 Divisional segment margin 140,000 $110,000 $ 30,000 Common fixed expenses 100,000 Net operating income $ 40,000 Management does not understand why the Software division has such a low segment margin when its sales are only one third less than the Hardware division. Management directed that the Software division be further segmented into product lines. Page 1AC203: Week 6 Segmented Income Statement Following is information on the product lines in the software division: Software Division Product Lines Business Gaming Software Software Sales $200,000 300,000 Traceable fixed expenses: Advertising 30,000 42,000 Depreciation 10,000 24,000 Administration 14,000 21,000 Variable expenses as a percentage of sales 65% 40% Common administrative expenses $ 60,000 An analysis shows that $60,000 of the Software division’s administration expenses are common to the product lines. Page 2

ac203 week 6 capital budgeting page 1 project part 4 646833

AC203: Week 6 Capital Budgeting Page 1 Project Part 4: Computing Solutions hires temporary workers to develop some of their software products. Recently a supercomputer has been launched in the market that enables the programmers to write the programming codes faster. To analyze whether to invest in purchase of the supercomputer, the software development manager had considered the following points: a. Currently, the company is paying an average of $40,000 per year to temporary workers to develop the software. b. The supercomputer would cost $94,500 and would have an estimated useful life of 12 years. c. The company uses straight line depreciation on all the assets and considers the salvage value in depreciation deductions. d. The estimated salvage value of the supercomputer is $4,500. e. Annual out of pocket costs associated with the supercomputer would be: cost of a new computer technician, $14,000; electricity, $1,800; insurance, $200; and a maintenance contract, $3,000.

Document Preview:

AC203: Week 6 Capital Budgeting Project Part 4: Computing Solutions hires temporary workers to develop some of their software products. Recently a supercomputer has been launched in the market that enables the programmers to write the programming codes faster. To analyze whether to invest in purchase of the supercomputer, the software development manager had considered the following points: a. Currently, the company is paying an average of $40,000 per year to temporary workers to develop the software. b. The supercomputer would cost $94,500 and would have an estimated useful life of 12 years. c. The company uses straight line depreciation on all the assets and considers the salvage value in depreciation deductions. d. The estimated salvage value of the supercomputer is $4,500. e. Annual out of pocket costs associated with the supercomputer would be: cost of a new computer technician, $14,000; electricity, $1,800; insurance, $200; and a maintenance contract, $3,000. Page 1

the following information is available to reconcile clark company s book balance of 646404

The following information is available to reconcile Clark Company’s book balance of cash with its bank statement cash balance as of July 31, 2011.

a. On July 31, the company’s Cash account has a $26,193 debit balance, but its July bank statement shows a $28,020 cash balance.

b. Check No. 3031 for $1,380 and Check No. 3040 for $552 were outstanding on the June 30 bank reconciliation. Check No. 3040 is listed with the July canceled checks, but Check No. 3031 is not. Also,

Check No. 3065 for $336 and Check No. 3069 for $2,148, both written in July, are not among the canceled checks on the July 31 statement.

c. In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it is found that Check No. 3056 for July rent was correctly written and drawn for $1,250 but was erroneously entered in the accounting records as $1,230.

d. A credit memorandum enclosed with the July bank statement indicates the bank collected $9,000 cash on a non interest bearing note for Clark, deducted a $45 collection fee, and credited the remainder to its account. Clark had not recorded this event before receiving the statement.

e. A debit memorandum for $805 lists a $795 NSF check plus a $10 NSF charge. The check had been received from a customer, Jim Shaw. Clark has not yet recorded this check as NSF.

f. Enclosed with the July statement is a $15 debit memorandum for bank services. It has not yet been recorded because no previous notification had been received.

g. Clark’s July 31 daily cash receipts of $10,152 were placed in the bank’s night depository on that date, but do not appear on the July 31 bank statement.

Required

1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for this company as of July 31, 2011.

2. Prepare the journal entries necessary to bring the company’s book balance of cash into conformity with the reconciled cash balance as of July 31, 2011.

3. Assume that the July 31, 2011, bank reconciliation for this company is prepared and some items are treated incorrectly. For each of the following errors, explain the effect of the error on (i) the adjusted bank statement cash balance and (ii) the adjusted cash account book balance.

a. The company’s unadjusted cash account balance of $26,193 is listed on the reconciliation as $26,139.

b. The bank’s collection of the $9,000 note less the $45 collection fee is added to the bank statement cash balance on the reconciliation.

the following information is available for its september 30 2011 reconciliation 646405

Els Company most recently reconciled its bank statement and book balances of cash on August 31 and it reported two checks outstanding, No. 5888 for $1,038.05 and No. 5893 for $484.25. The following information is available for its September 30, 2011, reconciliation.

From the September 30 Bank Statement

PREVIOUS BALANCE

TOTAL CHECKS AND DEBITS

TOTAL DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

CURRENT BALANCE

16,800.45

9,620.05

11,182.85

18,363.25

 

CHECKS AND DEBITS

DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

DAILY BALANCE

Date

No.

5 Sep

1,103.75

31 Aug

16,800.45

3 Sep

5888

Date

Amount

Date

Amount

4 Sep

5902

12 Sep

2,226.90

3 Sep

15,762.40

7 Sep

5901

21 Sep

4,093.00

4 Sep

15,030.50

20 Sep

 

30 Sep

22.50 IN

7 Sep

14,310.00

17 Sep

5905

25 Sep

2,351.70

5 Sep

16,134.25

22 Sep

5903

30 Sep

1,385.00 CM

12 Sep

16,536.90

22 Sep

5904

   

17 Sep

15,948.65

28 Sep

5907

   

20 Sep

15,011.65

29 Sep

5909

   

22 Sep

19,104.65

       

25 Sep

18,977.25

       

28 Sep

16,625.55

       

29 Sep

18,763.40

       

30 Sep

16,955.75

       

21 Sep

18,363.25

From Els Company’s Accounting Records

Cash Receipts Deposited

Date

 

Cash
Debit

Sept.

5

 

1,103.75

 

12

 

2,226.90

 

21

 

4,093.00

 

25

 

2,351.70

 

30

 

1,582.75

     

11,358.10

 

Cash Disbursements

Check

 

 

Cash

No.

 

 

Debit

5901

 

 

1,824.25

5902

 

 

731.90

5903

 

 

399.10

5904

   

2,050.00

5905

 

 

937.00

5906

 

 

859.30

5907

 

 

213.85

5908

 

 

276.00

5909

 

 

1,807.65

 

 

 

9,099.05

 

 

 

Cash

 

Acct. No. 101

Date

 

Explanation

PR

Debit

Credit

Balance

Aug.

31

Balance

 

 

 

15,278.15

Sept.

30

Total receipts

R12

11,358.10

 

26,636.25

 

30

Total disbursements

D23

 

9,099.05

17,537.20

Additional Information

Check No. 5904 is correctly drawn for $2,080 to pay for computer equipment; however, the record keeper misread the amount and entered it in the accounting records with a debit to Computer Equipment and a credit to Cash of $2,050. The NSF check shown in the statement was originally received from a customer,

S. Nilson, in payment of her account. Its return has not yet been recorded by the company. The credit memorandum is from the collection of a $1,400 note for Els Company by the bank. The bank deducted a $15 collection fee. The collection and fee are not yet recorded.

Required

1. Prepare the September 30, 2011, bank reconciliation for this company.

2. Prepare the journal entries to adjust the book balance of cash to the reconciled balance.

3. The bank statement reveals that some of the prenumbered checks in the sequence are missing. Describe three situations that could explain this.

recommend what the business should do to ensure adherence to principles of internal 646406

For each of these five separate cases, identify the principle(s) of internal control that is violated. Recommend what the business should do to ensure adherence to principles of internal control.

1. Latoya Tally is the company’s computer specialist and oversees its computerized payroll system. Her boss recently asked her to put password protection on all office computers. Latoya has put a password in place that allows only the boss access to the file where pay rates are changed and personnel are added or deleted from the payroll.

2. Lake Theater has a computerized order taking system for its tickets. The system is active all week and backed up every Friday night.

3. X2U Company has two employees handling acquisitions of inventory. One employee places purchase orders and pays vendors. The second employee receives the merchandise.

4. The owner of Super Aid Pharmacy uses a check protector to perforate checks, making it difficult for anyone to alter the amount of the check. The check protector is on the owner’s desk in an office that contains company checks and is normally unlocked.

5. LeAnn Company is a small business that has separated the duties of cash receipts and cash disbursements. The employee responsible for cash disbursements reconciles the bank account monthly.

the following transactions involving the petty cash fund occurred in january the las 646407

Pepco Co. establishes a petty cash fund for payments of small amounts. The following transactions involving the petty cash fund occurred in January (the last month of the company’s fiscal year).

Jan. 3 A company check for $150 is written and made payable to the petty cashier to establish the petty cash fund.

14 A company check is written to replenish the fund for the following expenditures made since

January 3.

a. Purchased office supplies for $16.29 that are immediately used up.

b. Paid $17.60 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point. Pepco uses the perpetual system to account for inventory.

c. Paid $36.57 to All Tech for minor repairs to a computer.

d. Paid $14.82 for items classified as miscellaneous expenses.

e. Counted $62.28 remaining in the petty cash box.

15 Prepared a company check for $25 to increase the fund to $175.

31 The petty cashier reports that $17.35 remains in the fund. A company check is written to replenish the fund for the following expenditures made since January 14.

f. Paid $40 to The Smart Shopper for an advertisement in January’s newsletter.

g. Paid $38.19 for postage expenses.

h. Paid $58 to Take You There for delivery of merchandise, terms FOB destination.

31 The company decides that the January 15 increase in the fund was too little. It increases the fund by another $75, leaving a total of $250.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to establish the fund on January 3, to replenish it on January 14 and January 31, and to reflect any increase or decrease in the fund balance on January 15 and 31.

2. Explain how the company’s financial statements are affected if the petty cash fund is not replenished and no entry is made on January 31.

rpm music center had the following petty cash transactions in march of the current y 646408

RPM Music Center had the following petty cash transactions in March of the current year.

March 5 Wrote a $200 check, cashed it, and gave the proceeds and the petty cashbox to Liz Buck, the petty cashier.

6 Paid $14.50 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point. RPM uses the perpetual system to account for merchandise inventory.

11 Paid $8.75 delivery charges on merchandise sold to a customer, terms FOB destination.

12 Purchased file folders for $12.13 that are immediately used.

14 Reimbursed Will Nelson, the manager, $9.65 for office supplies purchased and used.

18 Purchased printer paper for $22.54 that is immediately used.

27 Paid $47.10 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point.

28 Paid postage expenses of $16.

30 Reimbursed Nelson $58.80 for business car mileage.

31 Cash of $11.53 remained in the fund. Sorted the petty cash receipts by accounts affected and exchanged them for a check to reimburse the fund for expenditures.

31 The petty cash fund amount is increased by $50 to a total of $250.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to establish the petty cash fund.

2. Prepare a petty cash payments report for March with these categories: delivery expense, mileage expense, postage expense, merchandise inventory (for transportation in), and office supplies expense.

Sort the payments into the appropriate categories and total the expenses in each category.

3. Prepare the journal entries for part 2 to both (a) reimburse and (b) increase the fund amount.

safe systems most recently reconciled its bank balance on april 30 and reported two 646410

Safe Systems most recently reconciled its bank balance on April 30 and reported two checks outstanding at that time, No. 1771 for $781 and No. 1780 for $1,325.90. The following information is available for its May 31, 2011, reconciliation.

From the May 31 Bank Statement

PREVIOUS BALANCE

TOTAL CHECKS AND DEBITS

TOTAL DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

CURRENT BALANCE

18,290.70

12,898.90

16,416.80

21,808.60

 

CHECKS AND DEBITS

DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

DAILY BALANCE

Date

No.

Amount

4 May

Amount

30 Apr

Amount

1 May

1771

781

Date

2,438.00

Date

18,290.70

2 May

1783

195.3

14 May

2,898.00

1 May

17,509.70

4 May

1782

1,285.50

22 May

1,801.80

2 May

17,314.40

18 May

1784

431.80 NSF

26 May

2,079.00

11 May

17,017.30

11 May

 

8,032.50

25 May

7,200.00 CM

4 May

18,466.90

25 May

1787

157.2

   

14 May

19,915.30

26 May

1785

554

   

18 May

19,483.50

29 May

1788

12.00 SC

   

22 May

21,285.30

31 May

 

1,449.60

   

26 May

20,452.80

         

29 May

21,820.60

         

31 May

22,374.60

         

25 May

21,808.60

From Safe Systems’ Accounting Records

Cash Receipts Deposited

Date

 

Cash
Debit

May

4

 

2,438.00

 

14

 

2,898.00

 

22

 

1,801.80

 

26

 

2,079.00

 

31

 

2,526.30

     

11,743.10

 

Cash Disbursements

Check

 

 

Cash

No.

 

 

Debit

1782

 

 

1,285.50

1783

 

 

195.30

1784

 

 

1,449.60

1785

   

157.20

1786

 

 

353.10

1787

 

 

8,032.50

1788

 

 

544.00

1789

 

 

639.50

1782

 

 

12,656.70

 

 

 

Cash

 

Acct. No. 101

Date

 

Explanation

PR

Debit

Credit

Balance

Apr.

30

Balance

 

 

 

16,183.80

May

31

Total receipts

R7

11,743.10

 

27,926.90

 

31

Total disbursements

D8

 

12,656.70

15,270.20

Additional Information

Check No. 1788 is correctly drawn for $554 to pay for May utilities; however, the recordkeeper misread the amount and entered it in the accounting records with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash for $544. The bank paid and deducted the correct amount. The NSF check shown in the statement was originally received from a customer, S. Bax, in payment of her account. The company has not yet recorded its return. The credit memorandum is from a $7,300 note that the bank collected for the company. The bank deducted a $100 collection fee and deposited the remainder in the company’s account. The collection and fee have not yet been recorded.

Required

1. Prepare the May 31, 2011, bank reconciliation for Safe Systems.

2. Prepare the journal entries to adjust the book balance of cash to the reconciled balance.

3. The bank statement reveals that some of the prenumbered checks in the sequence are missing. Describe three possible situations to explain this.

a comparison of the bank statement with the general ledger cash account no 101 revea 646411

Santana Rey receives the March bank statement for Business Solutions on April 11, 2012. The

March 31 bank statement shows an ending cash balance of $67,566. A comparison of the bank statement with the general ledger Cash account, No. 101, reveals the following.

a. S. Rey notices that the bank erroneously cleared a $500 check against her account in March that she did not issue. The check documentation included with the bank statement shows that this check was actually issued by a company named Business Systems.

b. On March 25, the bank issued a $50 debit memorandum for the safety deposit box that Business Solutions agreed to rent from the bank beginning March 25.

c. On March 26, the bank issued a $102 debit memorandum for printed checks that Business Solutions ordered from the bank.

d. On March 31, the bank issued a credit memorandum for $33 interest earned on Business Solutions’ checking account for the month of March.

e. S. Rey notices that the check she issued for $128 on March 31, 2012, has not yet cleared the bank.

f. S. Rey verifies that all deposits made in March do appear on the March bank statement.

g. The general ledger Cash account, No. 101, shows an ending cash balance per books of $68,057 as of March 31 (prior to any reconciliation).

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Business Solutions for the month ended March 31, 2012.

2. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries. Use Miscellaneous Expenses, No. 677, for any bank charges.

Use Interest Revenue, No. 404, for any interest earned on the checking account for the month of March.

compute days sales uncollected for these companies for each of the two years shown c 646413

Key comparative figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow.

 

Research In Motion

Apple

($ millions)

Current
Year

Prior
Year

Current
Year

Prior
Year

Accounts receivable

$2,594

$2,112

$3,361

$2,422

Net sales

14,953

11,065

42,905

37,491

Required

Compute days’ sales uncollected for these companies for each of the two years shown. Comment on any trends for the companies. Which company has the largest percent change in days’ sales uncollected?

who is the best person in dr conrad s office to reconcile the bank statement 646414

Carol Benton, Sue Knox, and Marcia Diamond work for a family physician, Dr. Gwen Conrad, who is in private practice. Dr. Conrad is knowledgeable about office management practices and has segregated the cash receipt duties as follows. Benton opens the mail and prepares a triplicate list of money received. She sends one copy of the list to Knox, the cashier, who deposits the receipts daily in the bank. Diamond, the record keeper, receives a copy of the list and posts payments to patients’ accounts. About once a month the office clerks have an expensive lunch they pay for as follows. First, Knox endorses a patient’s check in Dr. Conrad’s name and cashes it at the bank. Benton then destroys the remittance advice accompanying the check. Finally, Diamond posts payment to the customer’s account as a miscellaneous credit. The three justify their actions by their relatively low pay and knowledge that Dr. Conrad will likely never miss the money.

Required

1. Who is the best person in Dr. Conrad’s office to reconcile the bank statement?

2. Would a bank reconciliation uncover this office fraud?

3. What are some procedures to detect this type of fraud?

4. Suggest additional internal controls that Dr. Conrad could implement.

visit the association of certified fraud examiners find and open the file 2008 repor 646416

Visit the Association of Certified Fraud Examiners. Find and open the file “2008 Report to the Nation.” Read the two page Executive Summary and fill in the following blanks.

(The report is under its Fraud Resources tab or under its About the ACFE tab [under Press Room]; we can also use the Search tab.)

1. The median loss caused by occupational frauds was $________.

2. More than ___________ of fraud cases caused at least $1 million in losses.

3. Companies lose ___% of their annual revenues to fraud; this figure translates to $______ billion in fraud losses.

4. The typical length of fraud schemes was _____ years from the time the fraud began until it was detected.

5. Companies that conducted surprise audits suffered a median loss of $________, whereas those without surprise audits had a median loss of $________.

6. The median loss suffered by companies with fewer than 100 employees was $ per scheme.

7. ______________ and _____________ were the most common small business fraud schemes.

8. ___% of respondents cited inadequate internal controls as the primary contributing factor in the frauds investigated.

9. Only ___% of the perpetrators had convictions prior to committing their frauds.

compute the days sales uncollected at the end of both the current year and the prior 646418

1. Visit an area of your college that serves the student community with either products or services. Some examples are food services, libraries, and bookstores. Identify and describe between four and eight internal controls being implemented.

2. The following information is from Nokia, which is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services.

EUR millions

Current Year

Prior Year

Cash

1,142

1,706

Accounts receivable

7,981

9,444

Current assets

23,613

24,470

Total assets

35,738

39,582

Current liabilities

15,188

20,355

Shareholders’ equity

14,749

16,510

Net sales

40,984

50,710

Required

a. For each year, compute the percentage that cash represents of current assets, total assets, current liabilities, and shareholders’ equity. Comment on any trends in these percentages.

b. Determine the percentage change between the current and prior year cash balances.

c. Compute the days’ sales uncollected at the end of both the current year and the prior year. Has the collection of receivables improved? Explain.

clayco company completes the following selected transactions during year 2011 646423

Clayco Company completes the following selected transactions during year 2011.

July 14 Writes off a $750 account receivable arising from a sale to Briggs Company that dates to 10 months ago. (Clayco Company uses the allowance method.)

30 Clayco Company receives a $1,000, 90 day, 10% note in exchange for merchandise sold to Sumrell Company (the merchandise cost $600).

Aug. 15 Receives $2,000 cash plus a $10,000 note from JT Co. in exchange for merchandise that sells for $12,000 (its cost is $8,000). The note is dated August 15, bears 12% interest, and matures in 120 days.

Nov. 1 Completed a $200 credit card sale with a 4% fee (the cost of sales is $150). The cash is received immediately from the credit card company.

3 Sumrell Company refuses to pay the note that was due to Clayco Company on October 28. Prepare the journal entry to charge the dishonored note plus accrued interest to Sumrell Company’s accounts receivable.

5 Completed a $500 credit card sale with a 5% fee (the cost of sales is $300). The payment from the credit card company is received on Nov. 9.

15 Received the full amount of $750 from Briggs Company that was previously written off on

July 14. Record the bad debts recovery.

Dec. 13 Received payment of principal plus interest from JT for the August 15 note.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions on Clayco Company’s books.

2. Prepare an adjusting journal entry as of December 31, 2011, assuming the following:

a. Bad debts are estimated to be $20,400 by aging accounts receivable. The unadjusted balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $1,000 debit.

b. Alternatively, assume that bad debts are estimated using the percent of sales method. The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a $1,000 debit balance before adjustment, and the company estimates bad debts to be 1% of its credit sales of $2,000,000.

explain in general terms how the accounting for valuation of receivables is differen 646435

1. The following data are taken from the comparative balance sheets of Fulton Company. Compute and interpret its accounts receivable turnover for year 2011 (competitors average a turnover of 7.5).

 

2011

2010

Accounts receivable, net 

$152,900

$133,700

Net sales 

754,200

810,600

2. Answer each of the following related to international accounting standards.

a. Explain (in general terms) how the accounting for recognition of receivables is different between IFRS and U.S. GAAP.

b. Explain (in general terms) how the accounting for valuation of receivables is different between IFRS and U.S. GAAP.

hecter company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at decemb 646441

Hecter Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.

 

 

Days Past Due

 

Total

0

1 to 30

31 to 60

61 to 90

Over 90

Accounts receivable

$190,000

$132,000

$30,000

$12,000

$6,000

$10,000

Percent uncollectible

 

1%

2%

4%

7%

12%

a. Estimate the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts using the aging of accounts receivable method.

b. Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $600 credit.

c. Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $400 debit.

prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expense using the estimate from part 646442

Hecter Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.

 

 

Days Past Due

 

Total

0

1 to 30

31 to 60

61 to 90

Over 90

Accounts receivable

$190,000

$132,000

$30,000

$12,000

$6,000

$10,000

Percent uncollectible

 

1%

2%

4%

7%

12%

Refer to the information in Exercise 9 6 to complete the following requirements.

a. Estimate the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts assuming the company uses 3.5% of total accounts receivable to estimate uncollectibles, instead of the aging of receivables method.

b. Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $300 credit.

c. Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $200 debit.

on february 1 of the next period the company determined that 1 900 in customer accou 646443

Hecter Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.

 

 

Days Past Due

 

Total

0

1 to 30

31 to 60

61 to 90

Over 90

Accounts receivable

$190,000

$132,000

$30,000

$12,000

$6,000

$10,000

Percent uncollectible

 

1%

2%

4%

7%

12%

Refer to the information in Exercise 9 6 to complete the following requirements.

a. On February 1 of the next period, the company determined that $1,900 in customer accounts is uncollectible; specifically, $400 for Oxford Co. and $1,500 for Brookes Co. Prepare the journal entry to write off those accounts.

b. On June 5 of that next period, the company unexpectedly received a $400 payment on a customer account, Oxford Company, that had previously been written off in part a. Prepare the entries necessary to reinstate the account and to record the cash received.

prepared an adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on the clark note 646449

Prepare journal entries for the following selected transactions of Deshawn Company for 2010.

2010

Dec. 13 Accepted a $10,000, 45 day, 8% note dated December 13 in granting Latisha Clark a time extension on her past due account receivable.

31 Prepared an adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on the Clark note.

Refer to the information in Exercise 9 13 and prepare the journal entries for the following selected transactions of Deshawn Company for 2011.

2011

Jan. 27 Received Clark’s payment for principal and interest on the note dated December 13.

Mar. 3 Accepted a $4,000, 10%, 90 day note dated March 3 in granting a time extension on the pastdue account receivable of Shandi Company.

17 Accepted a $2,000, 30 day, 9% note dated March 17 in granting Juan Torres a time extension on his past due account receivable.

Apr. 16 Torres dishonors his note when presented for payment.

May 1 Wrote off the Torres account against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

June 1 Received the Shandi payment for principal and interest on the note dated March 3.

the following information is from the annual financial statements of waseem company 646450

The following information is from the annual financial statements of Waseem Company. Compute its accounts receivable turnover for 2010 and 2011. Compare the two years results and give a possible explanation for any change (competitors average a turnover of 11).

 

2011

2010

2009

Net sales

$305,000

$236,000

$288,000

Accounts receivable, net (year end) 

22,900

20,700

17,400

prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events the company 646452

Atlas Co. allows select customers to make purchases on credit. Its other customers can use either of two credit cards: Zisa or Access. Zisa deducts a 3% service charge for sales on its credit card and credits the bank account of Atlas immediately when credit card receipts are deposited. Atlas deposits the Zisa credit card receipts each business day. When customers use Access credit cards, Atlas accumulates the receipts for several days before submitting them to Access for payment. Access deducts a 2% service charge and usually pays within one week of being billed. Atlas completes the following transactions in June. (The terms of all credit sales are 2/15, n/30, and all sales are recorded at the gross price.)

June 4 Sold $750 of merchandise (that had cost $500) on credit to Anne Cianci.

5 Sold $5,900 of merchandise (that had cost $3,200) to customers who used their Zisa cards.

6 Sold $4,800 of merchandise (that had cost $2,800) to customers who used their Access cards.

8 Sold $3,200 of merchandise (that had cost $1,900) to customers who used their Access cards.

10 Submitted Access card receipts accumulated since June 6 to the credit card company for payment.

13 Wrote off the account of Nakia Wells against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The $329 balance in Wells’s account stemmed from a credit sale in October of last year.

17 Received the amount due from Access.

18 Received Cianci’s check in full payment for the purchase of June 4.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events. (The company uses the perpetual inventory system. Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

during its first two years the company completed a number of transactions involving 646453

Lopez Company began operations on January 1, 2010. During its first two years, the company completed a number of transactions involving sales on credit, accounts receivable collections, and bad debts. These transactions are summarized as follows.

2010

a. Sold $1,803,750 of merchandise (that had cost $1,475,000) on credit, terms n/30.

b. Wrote off $20,300 of uncollectible accounts receivable.

c. Received $789,200 cash in payment of accounts receivable.

d. In adjusting the accounts on December 31, the company estimated that 1.5% of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

2011

e. Sold $1,825,700 of merchandise (that had cost $1,450,000) on credit, terms n/30.

f. Wrote off $28,800 of uncollectible accounts receivable.

g. Received $1,304,800 cash in payment of accounts receivable.

h. In adjusting the accounts on December 31, the company estimated that 1.5% of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record Lopez’s 2010 and 2011 summarized transactions and its year end adjustments to record bad debts expense. (The company uses the perpetual inventory system. Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

match each document in a voucher system in column one with its description in column 646399

Match each document in a voucher system in column one with its description in column two.

Document Description

1. Voucher

2. Invoice approval

3. Receiving report

4. Invoice

5. Purchase order

6. Purchase requisition

A. A document used to notify the appropriate persons that ordered goods have arrived, including a description of the quantities and condition of goods.

B. An internal file used to store documents and information to control cash disbursements and to ensure that a transaction is properly au thorized and recorded.

C. A document used to place an order with a vendor that authorizes the vendor to ship ordered merchandise at the stated price and terms.

D. A checklist of steps necessary for the approval of an invoice for recording and payment; also known as a check authorization.

E. A document used by department managers to inform the purchasing department to place an order with a vendor.

F. An itemized statement of goods prepared by the vendor listing the customer’s name, items sold, sales prices, and terms of sale.

usa imports uses the perpetual system in accounting for merchandise inventory and ha 646400

USA Imports uses the perpetual system in accounting for merchandise inventory and had the following transactions during the month of October. Prepare entries to record these transactions assuming that USA Imports records invoices (a) at gross amounts and (b) at net amounts.

Oct. 2 Purchased merchandise at a $4,000 price, invoice dated October 2, terms 2/10, n/30.

10 Received a $400 credit memorandum (at full invoice price) for the return of merchandise that it purchased on October 2.

17 Purchased merchandise at a $4,400 price, invoice dated October 16, terms 2/10, n/30.

26 Paid for the merchandise purchased on October 17, less the discount.

31 Paid for the merchandise purchased on October 2. Payment was delayed because the invoice was mistakenly filed for payment today. This error caused the discount to be lost.

for each of these five separate cases identify the principle s of internal control t 646401

For each of these five separate cases, identify the principle(s) of internal control that is violated.

Recommend what the business should do to ensure adherence to principles of internal control.

1. Heather Flat records all incoming customer cash receipts for her employer and posts the customer payments to their respective accounts.

2. At Netco Company, Jeff and Jose alternate lunch hours. Jeff is the petty cash custodian, but if someone needs petty cash when he is at lunch, Jose fills in as custodian.

3. Nadine Cox posts all patient charges and payments at the Dole Medical Clinic. Each night Nadine backs up the computerized accounting system to a tape and stores the tape in a locked file at her desk.

4. Barto Sayles prides himself on hiring quality workers who require little supervision. As office manager, Barto gives his employees full discretion over their tasks and for years has seen no reason to perform independent reviews of their work.

5. Desi West’s manager has told her to reduce costs. Desi decides to raise the deductible on the plant’s property insurance from $5,000 to $10,000. This cuts the property insurance premium in half. In a related move, she decides that bonding the plant’s employees is a waste of money since the company has not experienced any losses due to employee theft. Desi saves the entire amount of the bonding insurance premium by dropping the bonding insurance.

assume that alcorn uses the periodic inventory system 646357

Alcorn Industries completes these transactions during July of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

July 1 Purchased $6,300 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated June 30, terms 2/10, n/30.

3 Issued Check No. 300 to The Weekly for advertising expense, $575.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 918, for $18,400 (cost is $9,700).

6 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 919, for $7,500 (cost is $4,300).

7 Purchased $1,050 of store supplies on credit from Pryor, Inc., invoice dated July 7, terms n/10 EOM.

8 Received a $150 credit memorandum from Pryor, Inc., for the return of store supplies received on July 7.

9 Purchased $37,710 of store equipment on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 8, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Issued Check No. 301 to Tahoe Company in payment of its June 30 invoice, less the discount.

13 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 920, for $8,350 (cost is $5,030).

14 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 921, for $4,100 (cost is $2,800).

15 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 5 sale, less the discount.

15 Issued Check No. 302, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $30,620. Cashed the check and paid employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $121,370 (cost is $66,330). (Cash sales are recorded daily using data from the cash registers but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Received payment from Ruth Baker for the July 6 sale, less the discount.

17 Purchased $8,200 of merchandise on credit from Dixon Company, invoice dated July 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Purchased $750 of office supplies on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 19, terms n/10 EOM.

21 Borrowed $20,000 cash from College Bank by signing a long term note payable.

23 Received payment from Stephanie Meyer for the July 13 sale, less the discount.

24 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 14 sale, less the discount.

24 Received a $2,400 credit memorandum from Dixon Company for the return of defective merchandise received on July 17.

26 Purchased $9,770 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated July 26, terms 2/10, n/30.

27 Issued Check No. 303 to Dixon Company in payment of its July 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

29 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 922, for $28,090 (cost is $22,850).

30 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 923, for $15,750 (cost is $9,840).

31 Issued Check No. 304, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $30,620.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $79,020 (cost is $51,855).

Assume that Alcorn uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Prepare a general journal, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7A.3, and a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7A.4. Number all journal pages as page 3. Review the July transactions of Alcorn Company (Problem 7 1B) and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the general journal, the purchases journal, or the cash disbursements journal. Ignore any transaction that should be journalized in a sales journal or cash receipts journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Inventory, Office Supplies, Store Supplies, Store Equipment, Accounts Payable, Long Term Notes Payable, R. Alcorn, Capital, Purchases, Purchases Returns and Allowances, Purchases Discounts, Sales Salaries Expense, and Advertising Expense. Enter the June 30 balances of Cash ($100,000), Inventory ($200,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($200,000), and R. Alcorn, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts for Tahoe Company, Pryor, Inc., Caro’s Supply, and Dixon Company.

3. Complete parts 3 and 4 of Problem 7 3B using the results of parts 1 and 2 of this problem.

assume that suppan company uses the periodic inventory system 646359

Suppan Company completes these transactions during November of the current year (terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Nov. 1 Purchased $5,062 of office equipment on credit from Blix Supply, invoice dated November 1, terms n/10 EOM.

2 Borrowed $86,250 cash from Kansas Bank by signing a long term note payable.

4 Purchased $11,400 of merchandise from ATM Industries, invoice dated November 3, terms 2/10, n/30.

5 Purchased $1,020 of store supplies on credit from Globe Company, invoice dated November 5, terms n/10 EOM.

8 Sold merchandise on credit to Sid Ragan, Invoice No. 439, for $6,350 (cost is $3,710).

10 Sold merchandise on credit to Carlos Mane, Invoice No. 440, for $12,500 (cost is $7,500).

11 Purchased $2,887 of merchandise from Xu Company, invoice dated November 10, terms 2/10, n/30.

12 Sent ATM Industries Check No. 633 in payment of its November 3 invoice less the discount.

15 Issued Check No. 634, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $8,435. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $27,170 (cost is $17,000). (Cash sales are recorded daily but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

15 Sold merchandise on credit to Tony Timmons, Invoice No. 441, for $4,250 (cost is $1,450).

16 Purchased $559 of office supplies on credit from Globe Company, invoice dated November 16, terms n/10 EOM.

17 Received a $487 credit memorandum from Xu Company for the return of unsatisfactory merchandise purchased on November 11.

18 Received payment from Sid Ragan for the November 8 sale less the discount.

19 Received payment from Carlos Mane for the November 10 sale less the discount.

19 Issued Check No. 635 to Xu Company in payment of its invoice of November 10 less the return and the discount.

22 Sold merchandise on credit to Carlos Mane, Invoice No. 442, for $2,595 (cost is $1,060).

24 Sold merchandise on credit to Tony Timmons, Invoice No. 443, for $3,240 (cost is $1,090).

25 Received payment from Tony Timmons for the sale of November 15 less the discount.

26 Received a $922 credit memorandum from Blix Supply for the return of office equipment purchased on November 1.

30 Issued Check No. 636, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $8,435. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $35,703 (cost is $20,400).

30 Verify that amounts impacting customer and creditor accounts were posted and that any amounts that should have been posted as individual amounts to the general ledger accounts were posted. Foot and cross foot the journals and make the month end postings.

Assume that Suppan Company uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (November 1 beg. bal. is $40,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long Term Notes Payable; J. Suppan, Capital (Nov. 1 beg. bal. is $40,000); Sales; Sales Discounts; Purchases; Purchases Returns and Allowances; Purchases Discounts; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts: Carlos Mane, Tony Timmons, and Sid Ragan. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts: Globe Company, ATM Industries, Blix Supply, and Xu Company.

2. Enter the transactions from Problem 7 5B in a sales journal like that in Exhibit 7A.1, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7A.3, a cash receipts journal like that in Exhibit 7A.2, a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7A.4, or a general journal. Number journal pages as page 2.

3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.

assume that santana rey expands business solutions accounting system to include spec 646360

Assume that Santana Rey expands Business Solutions’ accounting system to include special journals.

Required

1. Locate the transactions related to January through March 2012 for Business Solutions in Chapter 5.

2. Enter the Business Solutions transactions for January through March in a sales journal like that in Exhibit 7.5 (insert “n/a” in the Invoice column), a cash receipts journal like that in Exhibit 7.7, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7.9 (use Computer Supplies heading instead of Office Supplies), and a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7.11 (insert “n/a” in the Check Number column), or a general journal. Number journal pages as page 2. If the transaction does not specify the name of the payee, state “not specified” in the Payee column of the cash disbursements journal.

3. The transactions on the following dates should be journalized in the general journal: January 5, 11, 20, 24, and 29 (no entry required) and March 24. Do not record and post the adjusting entries for the end of March.

key figures for research in motion and apple follow millions 646363

Key figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow ($ millions).

 

Current Year

One Year Prior

Two Years Prior

 

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

RIM Segment

Revenue

Assets

Revenue

Assets

Revenue

Assets

Domestic

$8,620

$4,059

$6,968

$2,647

$3,529

$1,739

International

6,333

6,145

4,097

5,454

2,480

3,772

 

 

Current Year

One Year Prior

Two Years Prior

 

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

Segment

Apple Segment

Revenue

Assets

Revenue

Assets

Revenue

Assets

Domestic

$22,325

$2,698

$20,893

$2,269

$14,683

$1,752

International

20,580

495

16,598

410

9,895

260

Required

1. Compute the ratio of segment revenue divided by segment assets for each of the segments of Research

In Motion and Apple for each of the two most recent years shown. (We do not compute the segment return on assets as these companies did not report their segment income.)

2. Interpret and comment on your results of part 1.

what do you believe auditing standards are mainly concerned with when they require i 646364

Erica Gray, CPA, is a sole practitioner. She has been practicing as an auditor for 10 years. Recently a long standing audit client asked Gray to design and implement an integrated computer based accounting information system. The fees associated with this additional engagement with the client are very attractive. However, Gray wonders if she can remain objective on subsequent audits in her evaluation of the client’s accounting system and its records if she was responsible for its design and implementation. Gray knows that professional auditing standards require her to remain independent in fact and appearance from her auditing clients.

Required

1. What do you believe auditing standards are mainly concerned with when they require independence in fact? In appearance?

2. Why is it important that auditors remain independent of their clients?

3. Do you think Gray can accept this engagement and remain independent? Justify your response.

your friend wendy geiger owns a small retail store that sells candies and nuts geige 646365

Your friend, Wendy Geiger, owns a small retail store that sells candies and nuts. Geiger acquires her goods from a few select vendors. She generally makes purchase orders by phone and on credit. Sales are primarily for cash. Geiger keeps her own manual accounting system using a general journal and a general ledger. At the end of each business day, she records one summary entry for cash sales. Geiger recently began offering items in creative gift packages. This has increased sales substantially, and she is now receiving orders from corporate and other clients who order large quantities and prefer to buy on credit. As a result of increased credit transactions in both purchases and sales, keeping the accounting records has become extremely time consuming. Geiger wants to continue to maintain her own manual system and calls you for advice. Write a memo to her advising how she might modify her current manual accounting system to accommodate the expanded business activities. Geiger is accustomed to checking her ledger by using a trial balance. Your memo should explain the advantages of what you propose and of any other verification techniques you recommend.

each member of the team is to assume responsibility for one of the following tasks 646367

Each member of the team is to assume responsibility for one of the following tasks:

a. Journalizing in the purchases journal.

b. Journalizing in the cash disbursements journal.

c. Maintaining and verifying the Accounts Payable ledger.

d. Journalizing in the sales journal and the general journal.

e. Journalizing in the cash receipts journal.

f. Maintaining and verifying the Accounts Receivable ledger.

The team should abide by the following procedures in carrying out responsibilities.

Required

1. After tasks a– f are assigned, each team member is to quickly read the list of transactions in Problem 7 5A, identifying with initials the journal in which each transaction is to be recorded. Upon completion, the team leader is to read transaction dates, and the appropriate team member is to vocalize responsibility. Any disagreement between teammates must be resolved.

2. Journalize and continually update subsidiary ledgers. Journal recorders should alert teammates assigned to subsidiary ledgers when an entry must be posted to their subsidiary.

3. Team members responsible for tasks a, b, d, and e are to summarize and prove journals; members responsible for tasks c and f are to prepare both payables and receivables schedules.

4. The team leader is to take charge of the general ledger, rotating team members to obtain amounts to be posted. The person responsible for a journal must complete posting references in that journal. Other team members should verify the accuracy of account balance computations. To avoid any abnormal account balances, post in the following order: P, S, G, R, D. (Note: Posting any necessary individual general ledger amounts is also done at this time.)

5. The team leader is to read out general ledger account balances while another team member fills in the trial balance form. Concurrently, one member should keep a running balance of debit account balance totals and another credit account balance totals. Verify the final total of the trial balance and the schedules. If necessary, the team must resolve any errors. Turn in the trial balance and schedules to the instructor.

if this pattern of sales growth holds will new belgium brewing achieve its goal of d 646368

Refer to the chapter’s opening feature about Kim Jordan and her company, New Belgium Brewing Company. Her manufacturing company deals with numerous suppliers and customers.

Required

1. Identify the special journals that New Belgium Brewing would be likely to use in its operations. Also identify any subsidiary ledgers that it would likely use.

2. New Belgium Brewing hopes to double yearly sales within five years hence from its current $100 million annual amount. Assume that its sales growth projections are as follows.

Year

One Year
Hence

Two Years
Hence

Three Years
Hence

Four Years
Hence

Five Years
Hence

Projected growth in sales

 

     

(from the preceding year)

0%

20%

15%

25%

20%

Estimate New Belgium Brewing’s projected sales for each year (round to the nearest dollar). If this pattern of sales growth holds, will New Belgium Brewing achieve its goal of doubling sales in five years?

the following information is available to reconcile jamboree enterprises book balanc 646372

Prepare a bank reconciliation for Jamboree Enterprises for the month ended November 30, 2011. The following information is available to reconcile Jamboree Enterprises’ book balance of cash with its bank statement balance as of November 30, 2011:

a. After all posting is complete on November 30, the company’s book balance of Cash has a $16,380 debit balance, but its bank statement shows a $38,520 balance.

b. Checks No. 2024 for $4,810 and No. 2026 for $5,000 are outstanding.

c. In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it is found that Check No. 2025 in payment of rent is correctly drawn for $1,000 but is erroneously entered in the accounting records as $880.

d. The November 30 deposit of $17,150 was placed in the night depository after banking hours on that date, and this amount does not appear on the bank statement.

e. In reviewing the bank statement, a check written by Jumbo Enterprises in the amount of $160 was erroneously drawn against Jamboree’s account.

f. A credit memorandum enclosed with the bank statement indicates that the bank collected a $30,000 note and $900 of related interest on Jamboree’s behalf. This transaction was not recorded by Jamboree prior to receiving the statement.

g. A debit memorandum for $1,100 lists a $1,100 NSF check received from a customer, Marilyn Welch. Jamboree had not recorded the return of this check before receiving the statement.

h. Bank service charges for November total $40. These charges were not recorded by Jamboree before receiving the statement.

bacardi company established a 150 petty cash fund with dean martin as the petty cash 646373

Bacardi Company established a $150 petty cash fund with Dean Martin as the petty cashier. When the fund balance reached $19 cash, Martin prepared a petty cash payment report, which follows.

Petty Cash Payments Report

Receipt No.

Account Charged

 

Approved by

Received by

12

Delivery Expense

$ 29

Martin

A. Smirnoff

13

Merchandise Inventory

18

Martin

J. Daniels

15

(Omitted)

32

Martin

C. Carlsberg

16

Miscellaneous Expense

41

(Omitted)

J. Walker

 

Total

$120

 

 

Required

1. Identify four internal control weaknesses from the payment report.

2. Prepare general journal entries to record:

a. Establishment of the petty cash fund.

b. Reimbursement of the fund. (Assume for this part only that petty cash receipt no. 15 was issued for miscellaneous expenses.)

3. What is the Petty Cash account balance immediately before reimbursement? Immediately after reimbursement?

using the information from question 2 what is the reconciled balance on hapley s nov 646374

1. A company needs to replenish its $500 petty cash fund. Its petty cash box has $75 cash and petty cash receipts of $420. The journal entry to replenish the fund includes

a. A debit to Cash for $75.

b. A credit to Cash for $75.

c. A credit to Petty Cash for $420.

d. A credit to Cash Over and Short for $5.

e. A debit to Cash Over and Short for $5.

2. The following information is available for Hapley Company:

• The November 30 bank statement shows a $1,895 balance.

• The general ledger shows a $1,742 balance at November 30.

• A $795 deposit placed in the bank’s night depository on November 30 does not appear on the November 30 bank statement.

• Outstanding checks amount to $638 at November 30.

• A customer’s $335 note was collected by the bank in November. A collection fee of $15 was deducted by the bank and the difference deposited in Hapley’s account.

• A bank service charge of $10 is deducted by the bank and appears on the November 30 bank statement. How will the customer’s note appear on Hapley’s November 30 bank reconciliation?

a. $320 appears as an addition to the book balance of cash.

b. $320 appears as a deduction from the book balance of cash.

c. $320 appears as an addition to the bank balance of cash.

d. $320 appears as a deduction from the bank balance of cash.

e. $335 appears as an addition to the bank balance of cash.

3. Using the information from question 2, what is the reconciled balance on Hapley’s November 30 bank reconciliation?

a. $2,052

b. $1,895

c. $1,742

d. $2,201

e. $1,184

4. A company had net sales of $84,000 and accounts receivable of $6,720. Its days’ sales uncollected is

a. 3.2 days

b. 18.4 days

c. 230.0 days

d. 29.2 days

e. 12.5 days

5.A company records its purchases using the net method. On August 1, it purchases merchandise on account for $6,000 with terms of 2/10, n/30. The August 1 journal entry to record this transaction includes a

a. Debit to Merchandise Inventory for $6,000.

b. Debit to Merchandise Inventory for $5,880.

c. Debit to Merchandise Inventory for $120.

d. Debit to Accounts Payable for $5,880.

e. Credit to Accounts Payable for $6,000.

cruz s june 30 bank statement shows 10 332 on deposit in the bank prepare a bank rec 646382

Cruz Company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows an $11,352 debit balance. Cruz’s June 30 bank statement shows $10,332 on deposit in the bank. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Cruz Company using the following information.

a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $1,713.

b. The June 30 bank statement included a $23 debit memorandum for bank services; Cruz has not yet recorded the cost of these services.

c. In reviewing the bank statement, a $90 check written by Cruz Company was mistakenly recorded in Cruz Company’s books at $99.

d. June 30 cash receipts of $2,724 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.

e. The bank statement included a $5 credit for interest earned on the cash in the bank.

the following annual account balances are taken from proteam sports at december 31 646383

The following annual account balances are taken from ProTeam Sports at December 31.

 

2011

2010

Accounts receivable

$ 75,692

$ 70,484

Net sales

2,591,933

2,296,673

What is the change in the number of days’ sales uncollected between years 2010 and 2011? According to this analysis, is the company’s collection of receivables improving? Explain.

prepare a table with the following headings for a monthly bank reconciliation dated 646393

Prepare a table with the following headings for a monthly bank reconciliation dated September 30.

Bank Balance

Book Balance

 

Not Shown
on the
Reconciliation

Add

Deduct

Add

Deduct

Adjust

 
           

For each item 1 through 12, place an x in the appropriate column to indicate whether the item should be added to or deducted from the book or bank balance, or whether it should not appear on the reconciliation. If the book balance is to be adjusted, place a Dr. or Cr. in the Adjust column to indicate whether the Cash balance should be debited or credited. At the left side of your table, number the items to correspond to the following list.

1. Bank service charge for September.

2. Checks written and mailed to payees on October 2.

3. Checks written by another depositor but charged against this company’s account.

4. Principal and interest on a note receivable to this company is collected by the bank but not yet recorded by the company.

5. Special bank charge for collection of note in part 4 on this company’s behalf.

6. Check written against the company’s account and cleared by the bank; erroneously not recorded by the company’s record keeper.

7. Interest earned on the September cash balance in the bank.

8. Night deposit made on September 30 after the bank closed.

9. Checks outstanding on August 31 that cleared the bank in September.

10. NSF check from customer is returned on September 25 but not yet recorded by this company.

11. Checks written by the company and mailed to payees on September 30.

12. Deposit made on September 5 and processed by the bank on September 6.

the june 30 cash receipts of 3 250 were placed in the bank s night depository after 646395

Frederick Clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows a $15,141 debit balance. Frederick Clinic’s June 30 bank statement shows $14,275 on deposit in the bank. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Frederick Clinic using the following information:

a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $2,500.

b. The June 30 bank statement included a $125 debit memorandum for bank services.

c. Check No. 919, listed with the canceled checks, was correctly drawn for $645 in payment of a utility bill on June 15. Frederick Clinic mistakenly recorded it with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash in the amount of $654.

d. The June 30 cash receipts of $3,250 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.

frederick clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it 646396

Frederick Clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows a $15,141 debit balance. Frederick Clinic’s June 30 bank statement shows $14,275 on deposit in the bank. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Frederick Clinic using the following information:

a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $2,500.

b. The June 30 bank statement included a $125 debit memorandum for bank services.

c. Check No. 919, listed with the canceled checks, was correctly drawn for $645 in payment of a utility bill on June 15. Frederick Clinic mistakenly recorded it with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash in the amount of $654.

d. The June 30 cash receipts of $3,250 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.

2. Prepare the adjusting journal entries that Frederick Clinic must record as a result of preparing the bank reconciliation.

chung company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it ma 646397

Chung Company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on May 31, 2011, its Cash account shows a $15,500 debit balance. Chung’s May 31 bank statement shows $13,800 on deposit in the bank. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Chung Company using the following information.

a. May 31 cash receipts of $2,200 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the May 31 bank statement.

b. Outstanding checks as of May 31 total $1,600.

c. The May 31 bank statement included a $100 debit memorandum for bank services; Chung has not yet recorded the cost of these services.

d. In reviewing the bank statement, a $400 check written by Wald Company was mistakenly drawn against Chung’s account.

e. A debit memorandum for $600 refers to a $600 NSF check from a customer; Chung has not yet recorded this NSF check.

the following transactions occur in the month of june 646331

Redmon Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of June.

June 1 Purchased $8,100 of merchandise on credit from Krause, Inc., terms ny30.

8 Sold merchandise costing $900 on credit to G. Seles for $1,500 subject to a $30 sales discount if paid by the end of the month.

14 Purchased $240 of store supplies from Chang Company on credit, terms ny30.

17 Purchased $260 of office supplies on credit from Monder Company, terms ny30.

24 Sold merchandise costing $400 to D. Lee for $630 cash.

28 Purchased store supplies from Porter’s for $90 cash.

29 Paid Krause, Inc., $8,100 cash for the merchandise purchased on June 1.

Prepare headings for a purchases journal like the one in Exhibit 7.9. Journalize the June transactions that should be recorded in the purchases journal.

For each of the June transactions identify the journal in which it would be recorded. Assume the company uses a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash disbursements journal, and general journal as illustrated in this chapter.

winslow company posts its sales invoices directly and then binds them into a sales j 646332

Winslow Company posts its sales invoices directly and then binds them into a Sales Journal. Winslow had the following credit sales to these customers during June.

June 2

Joe Mack

$ 3,600

8

Eric Horner

6,100

10

Tess Wilson

13,400

14

Hong Jiang

20,500

20

Tess Wilson

11,200

29

Joe Mack

7,300

 

Total credit sales

$62,100

Required

1. Open an accounts receivable subsidiary ledger having a T account for each customer. Post the invoices to the subsidiary ledger.

2. Open an Accounts Receivable controlling T account and a Sales T account to reflect general ledger accounts. Post the end of month total from the sales journal to these accounts.

3. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable and prove that its total equals the Accounts Receivable controlling account balance.

hutton company uses a sales journal a purchases journal a cash receipts journal a ca 646335

Hutton Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of March.

Mar. 2 Sold merchandise costing $300 to B. Fager for $450 cash, invoice no. 5703.

5 Purchased $2,300 of merchandise on credit from Marsh Corp.

7 Sold merchandise costing $800 to J. Dryer for $1,150, terms 2/10, n/30, invoice no. 5704.

8 Borrowed $8,000 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.

12 Sold merchandise costing $200 to R. Land for $320, terms n/30, invoice no. 5705.

16 Received $1,127 cash from J. Dryer to pay for the purchase of March 7.

19 Sold used store equipment for $900 cash to Malone, Inc.

25 Sold merchandise costing $350 to T. Burton for $550, terms n/30, invoice no. 5706.

Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7.5. Journalize the March transactions that should be recorded in this sales journal.

for each of the march transactions identify the journal in which it would be recorde 646336

Hutton Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of March.

Mar. 2 Sold merchandise costing $300 to B. Fager for $450 cash, invoice no. 5703.

5 Purchased $2,300 of merchandise on credit from Marsh Corp.

7 Sold merchandise costing $800 to J. Dryer for $1,150, terms 2/10, n/30, invoice no. 5704.

8 Borrowed $8,000 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.

12 Sold merchandise costing $200 to R. Land for $320, terms n/30, invoice no. 5705.

16 Received $1,127 cash from J. Dryer to pay for the purchase of March 7.

19 Sold used store equipment for $900 cash to Malone, Inc.

25 Sold merchandise costing $350 to T. Burton for $550, terms n/30, invoice no. 5706.

Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7.5. Journalize the March transactions that should be recorded in this sales journal.

For each of the March transactions identify the journal in which it would be recorded. Assume the company uses a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash disbursements journal, and general journal as illustrated in this chapter.

following is information from ryan company for its initial month of business 646339

Following is information from Ryan Company for its initial month of business.

(1) Identify the balances listed in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger.

(2) Identify the accounts payable balance listed in the general ledger at month’s end.

 

Credit Purchases

 

 

Cash Paid

 

Jan. 9

Boeder Company

$7,000

Jan. 19

Boeder Company

$5,100

18

Johnson Brothers

6,600

27

Johnson Brothers 

6,600

22

Padley Company

4,200

31

Padley Company

3,400

pebble brook supply uses a sales journal a purchases journal a cash receipts journal 646340

Pebble brook Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.

Apr. 3 Purchased merchandise for $2,750 on credit from Scott, Inc., terms 2y10, ny30.

9 Issued check no. 210 to Kidman Corp. to buy store supplies for $450.

12 Sold merchandise costing $400 on credit to C. Meyers for $670, terms ny30.

17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.

20 Purchased merchandise for $3,500 on credit from LeBron, terms 2y10, ny30.

28 Issued check no. 212 to LeBron to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount.

29 Paid salary of $1,700 to B. Decker by issuing check no. 213.

30 Issued check no. 214 to Scott, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.

Prepare headings for a cash disbursements journal like the one. Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal.

for each of the april transactions identify the journal in which it would be recorde 646341

Pebble brook Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.

Apr. 3 Purchased merchandise for $2,750 on credit from Scott, Inc., terms 2y10, ny30.

9 Issued check no. 210 to Kidman Corp. to buy store supplies for $450.

12 Sold merchandise costing $400 on credit to C. Meyers for $670, terms ny30.

17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.

20 Purchased merchandise for $3,500 on credit from LeBron, terms 2y10, ny30.

28 Issued check no. 212 to LeBron to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount.

29 Paid salary of $1,700 to B. Decker by issuing check no. 213.

30 Issued check no. 214 to Scott, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.

Prepare headings for a cash disbursements journal like the one. Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal.

For each of the April transactions identify the journal in which it would be recorded. Assume the company uses a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash disbursements journal, and general journal as illustrated in this chapter.

at the end of may the sales journal of clear view appears as follows 646343

At the end of May, the sales journal of Clear View appears as follows.

Date

Account
Debited

Invoice
Number

PR

Accounts Receivable Dr.
Sales Cr.

Cost of Goods Sold Dr.
Inventory Cr.

6 May

Aaron Reckers

190

 

2,880

2,200

10

Sara Reed

191

 

1,940

1,600

17

Anna Page

192

 

850

500

25

Sara Reed

193

 

340

200

31

Totals

   

6,010

4,500

Clear View also recorded the return of defective merchandise with the following entry.

May 20

Sales Returns and Allowances

250

 

 

Accounts Receivable—Anna Page

 

250

 

Customer returned (worthless) merchandise.

 

 

Required

1. Open an accounts receivable subsidiary ledger that has a T account for each customer listed in the sales journal. Post to the customer accounts the entries in the sales journal and any portion of the general journal entry that affects a customer’s account.

2. Open a general ledger that has T accounts for Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, and Cost of Goods Sold. Post the sales journal and any portion of the general journal entry that affects these accounts.

3. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable and prove that its total equals the balance in the Accounts Receivable controlling account.

a company that records credit purchases in a purchases journal and records purchases 646344

A company that records credit purchases in a purchases journal and records purchases returns in a general journal made the following errors. Indicate when each error should be discovered.

1. Posted a purchases return to the Accounts Payable account and to the creditor’s subsidiary account but did not post the purchases return to the Inventory account.

2. Posted a purchases return to the Inventory account and to the Accounts Payable account but did not post to the creditor’s subsidiary account.

3. Correctly recorded a $4,000 purchase in the purchases journal but posted it to the creditor’s subsidiary account as a $400 purchase.

4. Made an addition error in determining the balance of a creditor’s subsidiary account.

5. Made an addition error in totaling the Office Supplies column of the purchases journal.

analyze your findings and identify the segment with the highest and that with the lo 646345

Refer to Exhibit 7.13 and complete the segment return on assets table for Wolfe Company. Analyze your findings and identify the segment with the highest, and that with the lowest, segment return on assets.

 

Segment Operating

Income (in $ mil.)

Segment Assets

(in $ mil.)

Segment Return

On Assets

 

Segment

2011

2010

2011

2010

2011

Specialty

$62

32

$581

$440

 

 

Skiing Group

9

7

53

42

 

 

Skating Group

22

5

155

136

 

 

Specialty Footwear

11

44

37

24

 

 

Other Specialty

104

$148

826

642

 

 

Subtotal

       

 

 

General Merchandise

 

   

 

 

South America

32

36

305

274

 

 

United States

7

8

52

35

 

 

Europe

5

3

14

12

 

 

Subtotal

44

47

371

321

 

 

Total

$148

$134

$1,197

$963

 

 

assume that the total for the schedule of accounts receivable does not equal the bal 646346

Wise Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Apr. 2 Purchased $13,300 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd, Invoice No. 760, for $3,000 (cost is $2,000).

3 Purchased $1,380 of office supplies on credit from Madison, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

4 Issued Check No. 587 to U.S. View for advertising expense, $999.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 761, for $8,000 (cost is $6,500).

6 Received an $85 credit memorandum from Madison, Inc., for the return of some of the office supplies received on April 3.

9 Purchased $11,125 of store equipment on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 9, terms ny10 EOM.

11 Sold merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No 762, for $9,500 (cost is $7,000).

12 Issued Check No. 588 to Negi Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.

13 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 3 sale, less the discount.

13 Sold $4,100 of merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd (cost is $2,600), Invoice No. 763.

14 Received payment from Paul Kohr for the April 5 sale, less the discount.

16 Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $9,750. Cashed the check and paid employees.

16 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $50,840 (cost is $33,880). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register data but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

17 Purchased $12,750 of merchandise on credit from Price Company, invoice dated April 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Borrowed $50,000 cash from First State Bank by signing a long term note payable.

20 Received payment from Amy Nilson for the April 11 sale, less the discount.

20 Purchased $730 of store supplies on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 19, terms /y10 EOM.

23 Received a $400 credit memorandum from Price Company for the return of defective merchandise received on April 17.

23 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

25 Purchased $10,375 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

26 Issued Check No. 590 to Price Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

27 Sold $3,070 of merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,420).

27 Sold $5,700 of merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $3,305).

30 Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $9,750.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $70,975 (cost is $55,900).

Required

1. Prepare a sales journal like that in Exhibit 7.5 and a cash receipts journal like that in Exhibit 7.7. Number both journal pages as page 3. Then review the transactions of Wise Company and enter those that should be journalized in the sales journal and those that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a purchases journal, a cash disbursements journal, or a general journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Long Term Notes Payable, B. Wise, Capital, Sales, Sales Discounts, and Cost of Goods Sold. Enter the March 31 balances for Cash ($85,000), Inventory ($125,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($110,000), and B. Wise, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Paul Kohr, Brooke Sledd, and Amy Nilson.

3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and cross foot the journals and make the month end postings.

4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledger by preparing a schedule of accounts receivable.

5. Assume that the total for the schedule of Accounts Receivable does not equal the balance of the controlling account in the general ledger. Describe steps you would take to discover the error(s).

assume that wise co in problem 7 1a uses the periodic inventory system 646347

Assume that Wise Co. in Problem 7 1A uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.1. Prepare headings for a cash receipts journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.2. Journalize the April transactions shown in Problem 7 1A that should be recorded in the sales journal and the cash receipts journal assuming the periodic inventory system is used.

2. Open the general ledger accounts with balances as shown in Problem 7 1A (do not open a Cost of Goods Sold ledger account). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Brooke Sledd, Paul Kohr, and Amy Nilson. Under the periodic system, an Inventory account exists but is inactive until its balance is updated to the correct inventory balance at year end. In this problem, the Inventory account remains inactive but must be included to correctly complete the trial balance.

3. Complete parts 3, 4, and 5 of Problem 7 1A using the results of parts 1 and 2 of this problem.

the april transactions of wise company are described in problem 7 1a 646348

The April transactions of Wise Company are described in Problem 7 1A.

Required

1. Prepare a general journal, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7.9, and a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7.11. Number all journal pages as page 3. Review the April transactions of Wise Company and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the general journal, the purchases journal, or the cash disbursements journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a sales journal or cash receipts journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Inventory, Office Supplies, Store Supplies, Store Equipment, Accounts Payable, Long Term Notes Payable, B. Wise, Capital, Sales Salaries Expense, and Advertising Expense. Enter the March 31 balances of Cash ($85,000), Inventory ($125,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($110,000), and B. Wise, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts for Ned’s Supply, Negi Company, Price Company, and Madison, Inc.

3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month end postings.

4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and a schedule of accounts payable.

open the following general ledger accounts cash inventory office supplies store supp 646349

Wise Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Apr. 2 Purchased $13,300 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd, Invoice No. 760, for $3,000 (cost is $2,000).

3 Purchased $1,380 of office supplies on credit from Madison, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

4 Issued Check No. 587 to U.S. View for advertising expense, $999.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 761, for $8,000 (cost is $6,500).

6 Received an $85 credit memorandum from Madison, Inc., for the return of some of the office supplies received on April 3.

9 Purchased $11,125 of store equipment on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 9, terms ny10 EOM.

11 Sold merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No 762, for $9,500 (cost is $7,000).

12 Issued Check No. 588 to Negi Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.

13 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 3 sale, less the discount.

13 Sold $4,100 of merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd (cost is $2,600), Invoice No. 763.

14 Received payment from Paul Kohr for the April 5 sale, less the discount.

16 Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $9,750. Cashed the check and paid employees.

16 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $50,840 (cost is $33,880). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register data but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

17 Purchased $12,750 of merchandise on credit from Price Company, invoice dated April 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Borrowed $50,000 cash from First State Bank by signing a long term note payable.

20 Received payment from Amy Nilson for the April 11 sale, less the discount.

20 Purchased $730 of store supplies on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 19, terms /y10 EOM.

23 Received a $400 credit memorandum from Price Company for the return of defective merchandise received on April 17.

23 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

25 Purchased $10,375 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

26 Issued Check No. 590 to Price Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

27 Sold $3,070 of merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,420).

27 Sold $5,700 of merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $3,305).

30 Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $9,750.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $70,975 (cost is $55,900).

Assume that Wise Co. in Problem 7 1A uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.1. Prepare headings for a cash receipts journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.2. Journalize the April transactions shown in Problem 7 1A that should be recorded in the sales journal and the cash receipts journal assuming the periodic inventory system is used.

2. Open the general ledger accounts with balances as shown in Problem 7 1A (do not open a Cost of Goods Sold ledger account). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Brooke Sledd, Paul Kohr, and Amy Nilson. Under the periodic system, an Inventory account exists but is inactive until its balance is updated to the correct inventory balance at year end. In this problem, the Inventory account remains inactive but must be included to correctly complete the trial balance.

3. Complete parts 3, 4, and 5 of Problem 7 1A using the results of parts 1 and 2 of this problem.

the april transactions of wise company are describe 646350

Wise Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Apr. 2 Purchased $13,300 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd, Invoice No. 760, for $3,000 (cost is $2,000).

3 Purchased $1,380 of office supplies on credit from Madison, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

4 Issued Check No. 587 to U.S. View for advertising expense, $999.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 761, for $8,000 (cost is $6,500).

6 Received an $85 credit memorandum from Madison, Inc., for the return of some of the office supplies received on April 3.

9 Purchased $11,125 of store equipment on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 9, terms ny10 EOM.

11 Sold merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No 762, for $9,500 (cost is $7,000).

12 Issued Check No. 588 to Negi Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.

13 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 3 sale, less the discount.

13 Sold $4,100 of merchandise on credit to Brooke Sledd (cost is $2,600), Invoice No. 763.

14 Received payment from Paul Kohr for the April 5 sale, less the discount.

16 Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $9,750. Cashed the check and paid employees.

16 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $50,840 (cost is $33,880). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register data but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

17 Purchased $12,750 of merchandise on credit from Price Company, invoice dated April 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Borrowed $50,000 cash from First State Bank by signing a long term note payable.

20 Received payment from Amy Nilson for the April 11 sale, less the discount.

20 Purchased $730 of store supplies on credit from Ned’s Supply, invoice dated April 19, terms /y10 EOM.

23 Received a $400 credit memorandum from Price Company for the return of defective merchandise received on April 17.

23 Received payment from Brooke Sledd for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

25 Purchased $10,375 of merchandise on credit from Negi Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

26 Issued Check No. 590 to Price Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

27 Sold $3,070 of merchandise on credit to Paul Kohr, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,420).

27 Sold $5,700 of merchandise on credit to Amy Nilson, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $3,305).

30 Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $9,750.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $70,975 (cost is $55,900).

The April transactions of Wise Company are describe.

Required

1. Prepare a general journal, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7.9, and a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7.11. Number all journal pages as page 3. Review the April transactions of Wise Company and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the general journal, the purchases journal, or the cash disbursements journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a sales journal or cash receipts journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Inventory, Office Supplies, Store Supplies, Store Equipment, Accounts Payable, Long Term Notes Payable, B. Wise, Capital, Sales Salaries Expense, and Advertising Expense. Enter the March 31 balances of Cash ($85,000), Inventory ($125,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($110,000), and B. Wise, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts for Ned’s Supply, Negi Company, Price Company, and Madison, Inc.

3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month end postings.

4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and a schedule of accounts payable.

bishop company completes these transactions and events during march of the current y 646352

(terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Mar. 1 Purchased $42,600 of merchandise from Soy Industries, invoice dated March 1, terms 2/15, n/30.

2 Sold merchandise on credit to Min Cho, Invoice No. 854, for $15,800 (cost is $7,900).

3 Purchased $1,120 of office supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March 3, terms n/10 EOM.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 855, for $9,200 (cost is $4,600).

6 Borrowed $72,000 cash from Federal Bank by signing a long term note payable.

9 Purchased $20,850 of office equipment on credit from Tells Supply, invoice dated March 9, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 856, for $4,600 (cost is $2,300).

12 Received payment from Min Cho for the March 2 sale less the discount.

13 Sent Soy Industries Check No. 416 in payment of the March 1 invoice less the discount.

13 Received payment from Lance Snow for the March 3 sale less the discount.

14 Purchased $31,625 of merchandise from the JW Company, invoice dated March 13, terms 2/10, n/30.

15 Issued Check No. 417, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $164,680 (cost is $138,000). (Cash sales are recorded daily, but are recorded only twice here to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Purchased $1,670 of store supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March 16, terms n/10 EOM.

17 Received a $2,425 credit memorandum from JW Company for the return of unsatisfactory merchandise purchased on March 14.

19 Received a $630 credit memorandum from Tells Supply for office equipment received on March 9 and returned for credit.

20 Received payment from Taylor Few for the sale of March 10 less the discount.

23 Issued Check No. 418 to JW Company in payment of the invoice of March 13 less the March 17 return and the discount.

27 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 857, for $13,910 (cost is $6,220).

28 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 858, for $5,315 (cost is $2,280).

31 Issued Check No. 419, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $174,590 (cost is $143,000).

31 Verify that amounts impacting customer and creditor accounts were posted and that any amounts that should have been posted as individual amounts to the general ledger accounts were posted.

Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month end postings.

Required

1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long Term Notes Payable; M. Bishop, Capital (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Sales; Sales Discounts; Cost of Goods Sold; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts: Taylor Few, Min Cho, and Lance Snow. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts: Stacy Company, Soy Industries, Tells Supply, and JW Company.

2. Enter these transactions in a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5, a purchases journal like Exhibit 7.9, a cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7, a cash disbursements journal like Exhibit 7.11, or a general journal. Number all journal pages as page 2.

3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.

assume that bishop company uses the periodic inventory system 646353

Bishop Company completes these transactions and events during March of the current year (terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Mar. 1 Purchased $42,600 of merchandise from Soy Industries, invoice dated March 1, terms 2/15, n/30.

2 Sold merchandise on credit to Min Cho, Invoice No. 854, for $15,800 (cost is $7,900).

3 Purchased $1,120 of office supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March 3, terms n/10 EOM.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 855, for $9,200 (cost is $4,600).

6 Borrowed $72,000 cash from Federal Bank by signing a long term note payable.

9 Purchased $20,850 of office equipment on credit from Tells Supply, invoice dated March 9, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 856, for $4,600 (cost is $2,300).

12 Received payment from Min Cho for the March 2 sale less the discount.

13 Sent Soy Industries Check No. 416 in payment of the March 1 invoice less the discount.

13 Received payment from Lance Snow for the March 3 sale less the discount.

14 Purchased $31,625 of merchandise from the JW Company, invoice dated March 13, terms 2/10, n/30.

15 Issued Check No. 417, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $164,680 (cost is $138,000). (Cash sales are recorded daily, but are recorded only twice here to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Purchased $1,670 of store supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March 16, terms n/10 EOM.

17 Received a $2,425 credit memorandum from JW Company for the return of unsatisfactory merchandise purchased on March 14.

19 Received a $630 credit memorandum from Tells Supply for office equipment received on March 9 and returned for credit.

20 Received payment from Taylor Few for the sale of March 10 less the discount.

23 Issued Check No. 418 to JW Company in payment of the invoice of March 13 less the March 17 return and the discount.

27 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 857, for $13,910 (cost is $6,220).

28 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 858, for $5,315 (cost is $2,280).

31 Issued Check No. 419, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $174,590 (cost is $143,000).

31 Verify that amounts impacting customer and creditor accounts were posted and that any amounts that should have been posted as individual amounts to the general ledger accounts were posted.

Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month end postings.

Assume that Bishop Company  uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long Term Notes Payable; M. Bishop, Capital (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Sales; Sales Discounts; Purchases; Purchases Returns and Allowances; Purchases Discounts; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts: Taylor Few, Min Cho, and Lance Snow. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts: Stacy Company, Soy Industries, Tells Supply, and JW Company.

2. Enter the transactions from Problem 7 5A in a sales journal like that in Exhibit 7A.1, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7A.3, a cash receipts journal like that in Exhibit 7A.2, a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7A.4, or a general journal. Number journal pages as page 2.

3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.

alcorn industries completes these transactions during july of the current year 646354

Alcorn Industries completes these transactions during July of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

July 1 Purchased $6,300 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated June 30, terms 2/10, n/30.

3 Issued Check No. 300 to The Weekly for advertising expense, $575.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 918, for $18,400 (cost is $9,700).

6 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 919, for $7,500 (cost is $4,300).

7 Purchased $1,050 of store supplies on credit from Pryor, Inc., invoice dated July 7, terms n/10 EOM.

8 Received a $150 credit memorandum from Pryor, Inc., for the return of store supplies received on July 7.

9 Purchased $37,710 of store equipment on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 8, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Issued Check No. 301 to Tahoe Company in payment of its June 30 invoice, less the discount.

13 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 920, for $8,350 (cost is $5,030).

14 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 921, for $4,100 (cost is $2,800).

15 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 5 sale, less the discount.

15 Issued Check No. 302, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $30,620. Cashed the check and paid employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $121,370 (cost is $66,330). (Cash sales are recorded daily using data from the cash registers but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Received payment from Ruth Baker for the July 6 sale, less the discount.

17 Purchased $8,200 of merchandise on credit from Dixon Company, invoice dated July 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Purchased $750 of office supplies on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 19, terms n/10 EOM.

21 Borrowed $20,000 cash from College Bank by signing a long term note payable.

23 Received payment from Stephanie Meyer for the July 13 sale, less the discount.

24 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 14 sale, less the discount.

24 Received a $2,400 credit memorandum from Dixon Company for the return of defective merchandise received on July 17.

26 Purchased $9,770 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated July 26, terms 2/10, n/30.

27 Issued Check No. 303 to Dixon Company in payment of its July 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

29 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 922, for $28,090 (cost is $22,850).

30 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 923, for $15,750 (cost is $9,840).

31 Issued Check No. 304, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $30,620.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $79,020 (cost is $51,855).

Required

1. Prepare a sales journal like that in Exhibit 7.5 and a cash receipts journal like that in Exhibit 7.7. Number both journals as page 3. Then review the transactions of Alcorn Industries and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the sales journal and those that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a purchases journal, a cash disbursements journal, or a general journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Long Term Notes Payable, R. Alcorn, Capital, Sales, Sales Discounts, and Cost of Goods Sold. Enter the June 30 balances for Cash ($100,000), Inventory ($200,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($200,000), and R. Alcorn, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Kim Newsom, Stephanie Meyer, and Ruth Baker.

3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and cross foot the journals and make the month end postings.

4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledger by preparing a schedule of accounts receivable.

5. Assume that the total for the schedule of Accounts Receivable does not equal the balance of the controlling account in the general ledger. Describe steps you would take to discover the error(s).

assume that alcorn industries uses the periodic inventory system 646355

Alcorn Industries completes these transactions during July of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

July 1 Purchased $6,300 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated June 30, terms 2/10, n/30.

3 Issued Check No. 300 to The Weekly for advertising expense, $575.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 918, for $18,400 (cost is $9,700).

6 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 919, for $7,500 (cost is $4,300).

7 Purchased $1,050 of store supplies on credit from Pryor, Inc., invoice dated July 7, terms n/10 EOM.

8 Received a $150 credit memorandum from Pryor, Inc., for the return of store supplies received on July 7.

9 Purchased $37,710 of store equipment on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 8, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Issued Check No. 301 to Tahoe Company in payment of its June 30 invoice, less the discount.

13 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 920, for $8,350 (cost is $5,030).

14 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 921, for $4,100 (cost is $2,800).

15 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 5 sale, less the discount.

15 Issued Check No. 302, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $30,620. Cashed the check and paid employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $121,370 (cost is $66,330). (Cash sales are recorded daily using data from the cash registers but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Received payment from Ruth Baker for the July 6 sale, less the discount.

17 Purchased $8,200 of merchandise on credit from Dixon Company, invoice dated July 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Purchased $750 of office supplies on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 19, terms n/10 EOM.

21 Borrowed $20,000 cash from College Bank by signing a long term note payable.

23 Received payment from Stephanie Meyer for the July 13 sale, less the discount.

24 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 14 sale, less the discount.

24 Received a $2,400 credit memorandum from Dixon Company for the return of defective merchandise received on July 17.

26 Purchased $9,770 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated July 26, terms 2/10, n/30.

27 Issued Check No. 303 to Dixon Company in payment of its July 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

29 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 922, for $28,090 (cost is $22,850).

30 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 923, for $15,750 (cost is $9,840).

31 Issued Check No. 304, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $30,620.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $79,020 (cost is $51,855).

Assume that Alcorn Industries uses the periodic inventory system.

Required

1. Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.1. Prepare headings for a cash receipts journal like the one in Exhibit 7A.2. Journalize the July transactions shown in Problem 7 1B that should be recorded in the sales journal and the cash receipts journal assuming the periodic inventory system is used.

2. Open the general ledger accounts with balances as shown in Problem 7 1B (do not open a Cost of Goods Sold ledger account). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Ruth Baker, Stephanie Meyer, and Kim Newsom. Under the periodic system, an Inventory account exists but is inactive until its balance is updated to the correct inventory balance at year end. In this problem, the Inventory account remains inactive but must be included to correctly complete the trial balance.

3. Complete parts 3, 4, and 5 of Problem 7 1B using the results of parts 1 and 2 of this problem.

the july transactions of alcorn industries are describe 646356

Alcorn Industries completes these transactions during July of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

July 1 Purchased $6,300 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated June 30, terms 2/10, n/30.

3 Issued Check No. 300 to The Weekly for advertising expense, $575.

5 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 918, for $18,400 (cost is $9,700).

6 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 919, for $7,500 (cost is $4,300).

7 Purchased $1,050 of store supplies on credit from Pryor, Inc., invoice dated July 7, terms n/10 EOM.

8 Received a $150 credit memorandum from Pryor, Inc., for the return of store supplies received on July 7.

9 Purchased $37,710 of store equipment on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 8, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Issued Check No. 301 to Tahoe Company in payment of its June 30 invoice, less the discount.

13 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 920, for $8,350 (cost is $5,030).

14 Sold merchandise on credit to Kim Newsom, Invoice No. 921, for $4,100 (cost is $2,800).

15 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 5 sale, less the discount.

15 Issued Check No. 302, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $30,620. Cashed the check and paid employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $121,370 (cost is $66,330). (Cash sales are recorded daily using data from the cash registers but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Received payment from Ruth Baker for the July 6 sale, less the discount.

17 Purchased $8,200 of merchandise on credit from Dixon Company, invoice dated July 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Purchased $750 of office supplies on credit from Caro’s Supply, invoice dated July 19, terms n/10 EOM.

21 Borrowed $20,000 cash from College Bank by signing a long term note payable.

23 Received payment from Stephanie Meyer for the July 13 sale, less the discount.

24 Received payment from Kim Newsom for the July 14 sale, less the discount.

24 Received a $2,400 credit memorandum from Dixon Company for the return of defective merchandise received on July 17.

26 Purchased $9,770 of merchandise on credit from Tahoe Company, invoice dated July 26, terms 2/10, n/30.

27 Issued Check No. 303 to Dixon Company in payment of its July 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

29 Sold merchandise on credit to Ruth Baker, Invoice No. 922, for $28,090 (cost is $22,850).

30 Sold merchandise on credit to Stephanie Meyer, Invoice No. 923, for $15,750 (cost is $9,840).

31 Issued Check No. 304, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $30,620.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $79,020 (cost is $51,855).

The July transactions of Alcorn Industries are describe.

Required

1. Prepare a general journal, a purchases journal like that in Exhibit 7.9, and a cash disbursements journal like that in Exhibit 7.11. Number all journal pages as page 3. Review the July transactions of Alcorn Industries and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the general journal, the purchases journal, or the cash disbursements journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a sales journal or cash receipts journal.

2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Inventory, Office Supplies, Store Supplies, Store Equipment, Accounts Payable, Long Term Notes Payable, R. Alcorn, Capital, Sales Salaries Expense, and Advertising Expense. Enter the June 30 balances of Cash ($100,000), Inventory ($200,000), Long Term Notes Payable ($200,000), and R. Alcorn, Capital ($100,000). Also open accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts for Caro’s Supply, Tahoe Company, Dixon Company, and Pryor, Inc.

3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and cross foot the journals and make the month end postings.

4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and a schedule of accounts payable.

assume that delbert desires a safety stock cushion of seven days rsquo usage calcula 646276

(Appendix: EOQ) Diane Delbert operates a health food bakery that uses a special type of ground flour in one of its high margin products. The bakery operates 365 days a year. Delbert finds that she seems to order either too much or too little special flour and asks for your help. After some discussion, you find that she has no idea of when or how much to order. An examination of her records and answers to further questions reveal the following information:

Annual usage of special flour

7,000 pounds

Average number of days delay between initiating and receiving an order

12

Estimated cost per order

$32.00

Estimated annual cost of carrying a pound of special flour in inventory

$0.50

a. Calculate the economic order quantity for flour.

b. Assume that Delbert desires a safety stock cushion of seven days’ usage. Calculate the appropriate order point.

how many production runs will gale rsquo s garden make for onions annually 646277

(Appendix: EPR) Gale’s Garden grows and sells a variety of indoor and outdoor plants and garden vegetables. One of the firm’s more popular vegetables is a red onion, which has an annual sales quantity of approximately 30,000 pounds. Two of the major inputs in the growing of onions are seeds and fertilizer. Due to the poor germination rate, two seeds must be purchased for each onion plant grown (a mature onion plant provides 0.5 pound of onion). Also, 0.25 pound of fertilizer is required for each pound of onion produced. The following information summarizes costs for onions, seeds, and fertilizer. Carrying costs for onions are expressed per pound of onion; carrying costs for seeds are expressed per seed; and for fertilizer, carrying costs are expressed per pound of fertilizer. To plant onions, the company incurs a cost of $50 to set up the planter and the fertilizing equipment.

Onions

Seeds

Fertilizer

Carrying cost

$ 0.25

$0.01

$0.05

Ordering cost

$4.25

$8.80

Setup cost

$50.00

a. What is the economic production run for onions?

b. How many production runs will Gale’s Garden make for onions annually?

c. What are the economic order quantities for seeds and fertilizer?

d. How many orders will be placed for seeds? For fertilizer?

e. What is the total annual cost of ordering, carrying, and setting up for onion production?

f. How is the planting of onions similar to and different from a typical factory production run?

g. Are there any inconsistencies in your answers to (a)–(c) that need to be addressed? Explain.

what are the three generic approaches that firms can take in controlling environment 646278

  1. How do business process reengineering initiatives cause radical changes in the way firms execute processes?
  2. How are competitive forces driving decisions to downsize and restructure operations?
  3. In what ways, and why, are operations of many firms becoming more diverse? How does the increasing diversity affect the roles of the firms’ accounting systems?
  4. Why are firms adopting enterprise resource planning systems, and how are such systems used?
  5. What are strategic alliances, what forms do they take, and why do firms participate in them?
  6. What are the characteristics of open book management, and why does its adoption require changes in accounting methods and practices?
  7. What are the three generic approaches that firms can take in controlling environmental costs?

what is an enterprise resource planning erp system how do erp systems improve on pri 646283

  1. What is an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system? How do ERP systems improve on prior generations of information systems?
  2. New strategic alliances are formed every day. What are they, and why are they increasingly being used by businesses?
  3. Open book management is a relatively new philosophy about the use of information in organizations. Describe open book management and how it differs philosophically from the traditional view of the management of financial information in an organization.
  4. How does the implementation of open book management require an organization’s accountants to change their traditional practices?
  5. Describe the three generic strategies for dealing with the environmental effects of operations. Is one of the strategies always preferred to the others? Discuss. Exercises

how can the financial function of a business improve the internal process of technol 646284

(Technology acquisition; writing) Acquisition of new technology is often a perilous event for firms. The successful acquisition and implementation of new systems require much more than merely purchasing hardware and software. For example, costs are likely to be incurred for the following:

  • research and consulting to select software and hardware vendor
  • software training
  • upgrading IT infrastructure to operate new hardware and software
  • continuing hardware and software support
  • implementation of the new system

a. Why should training be included as a cost of technology acquisition?

b. How can the financial function of a business improve the internal process of technology acquisition?

determines to what extent it provides ldquo value rdquo to the customer those activi 646287

(Business process reengineering; writing) Process mapping and value analysis are tools often used in business process reengineering. As discussed in Chapter 4,a process map is a flowchart of the set of activities that compose a process. Value (or activity) analysis examines each of the activities identified in the flowchart and determines to what extent it provides “value” to the customer. Those activities that add no value are targets to be designed out of the process.

Select a process at your college or university such as admissions or enrollment. Prepare a process map, and conduct a value analysis of the process map. Then develop a plan (using Exhibit 19–2 as a guide) to eliminate the process activities that add no value to the student customer.

how workers would be trained to understand the information and how incentives would 646298

(Open book management) You have been hired as a consultant by a company that manufactures plastic and resin toys. Company management is presently discussing ways to improve product quality. Evidence of quality problems is everywhere: high rates of product defects, many product returns from customers, poor rate of customer retention, and high warranty costs. Top management has traced virtually all quality related problems to the production department.

Production workers in the company are paid a flat hourly rate. No bonuses are paid based on corporate profits or departmental performance measures. As the outside consultant, prepare an oral report to present to your client’s top management discussing how open book management could be applied to address the quality problems. At a minimum, include in your report how quality information would be conveyed to workers, how workers would be trained to understand the information, and how incentives would be established for improved quality performance.

why would the application of discounted cash flow methods be appropriate for evaluat 646300

(Environmental costs) Dayton Industrial produces a variety of chemicals that are used in an array of commercial applications. One popular product, a chemical solvent, contains two very caustic acids, A and B, each of which can present a very serious environmental hazard if not disposed of properly. For every ton of chemical produced,500 pounds of Acid A and 300 pounds of Acid B are required. Inefficiencies in the current production process allow 40 pounds of Acid A and 20 pounds of Acid B to remain as waste from each ton of chemical manufactured. Because of impurities the waste acids cannot be used in the production of future batches of product. The company incurs a cost of $2 per pound to dispose of the waste acid produced.

Recently, the company has become aware of new technology that reduces the amount of waste acids produced. This technology would generate only 1 pound of Acid A and 5 pounds of Acid B as waste from each ton of chemical manufactured. Corporate management has estimated that the new technology could be acquired and installed at a cost of $1,300,000.The technology would have a life expectancy of nine years. The new technology would not otherwise affect the cost of producing the chemical solvent.

a. Which environmental cost management strategy is Dayton Industrial considering in this example?

b. Why would the application of discounted cash flow methods be appropriate for evaluating the new technology?

conduct research to follow the changes nardelli implemented at chrysler and whether 646302

(Business process reengineering; research) In 2007, Cerberus Capital Management hired the former boss of Home Depot, Bob Nardelli, to run Chrysler. Earlier in the year Cerberus Capital Management had purchased a majority stake in Chrysler from DaimlerChrysler. Nardelli, while CEO of Home Depot, implemented the six sigma philosophy. The essence of this philosophy is to identify causes of variability in processes and reduce the variability—thereby increasing the quality of the process. Critics of Nardelli suggest that the implementation of six sigma at Home Depot proved that six sigma methodologies are inapplicable to widely distributed retail stores and that the attempted implementation was a flop.

Conduct research to follow the changes Nardelli implemented at Chrysler and whether six sigma was implemented as a driver of the changes.

what ethical responsibility does gm bear to the union in seeking to restructure and 646305

(Restructuring and outsourcing; ethics; writing) Automakers provide an interesting study in cost management strategies. General Motors often provides a contrast to other U.S. manufacturers. For example, Chrysler and Ford opted to outsource many product components, but GM continues to manufacture a much higher percentage of the parts needed to produce its cars. One of the variables driving GM’s strategy is its high level of unionization. The unions have resisted attempts made by GM to restructure operations and outsource more components.

a. From the perspective of price based competition, why would GM want the flexibility to outsource more of its parts and components?

b. From the perspective of managing quality, how could outsourcing positively or negatively affect GM’s ability to manage quality relative to its competitors?

c. What ethical responsibility does GM bear to the union in seeking to restructure and outsource more of its parts manufacturing?

d. In restructuring its operations following its 2009 bankruptcy, how did GM’s unions influence the restructuring?

assume that you work for a financial services firm that specializes in erp installat 646307

(Enterprise resource management; research; writing) Borders and Amazon .com are competitors in vending books and other consumer items. The two are differentiated to an extent by their marketing strategies. Although Amazon.com relies exclusively on Internet marketing, Borders operates both retail stores and an Internet outlet.

Assume that you work for a financial services firm that specializes in ERP installations. Your personal specialty involves ERP solutions that link the marketing function to the “back end” of businesses. Write a report in which you discuss the benefits that could be realized by Borders and Amazon.com from purchasing ERP software from you. In your report, discuss how the ERP solution that you would design for Borders would differ from the solution you design for Amazon.com.

discuss how open book management implementation would be affected by including on cr 646309

(Open book management; writing) In many large business organizations today, it is common that the financial experts are physically located separately from operational personnel. One effect of this isolation is that the people with financial expertise often lack understanding of important facets of operations. At SCJohnson, financial experts intermingle in teams with production experts and much decision authority is delegated to cross functional teams. Individuals with responsibilities for cost management, quality, safety, and so on rotate duties to learn about staffing, quality management, production processing, and production scheduling Top management takes the view that every employee is essential to the success of the company—and the company has 12,000 employees in 70 countries and has never had a layoff!

a. How could a financial specialist who is charged with designing an open book management system benefit from serving a rotation in production, quality management, and other functional areas?

b. Discuss how open book management implementation would be affected by including, on cross functional teams, a specialist in cost management.

laura johnson technical instruments division manager of worldwide electronics attend 646311

(Open book management; writing) Laura Johnson, Technical Instruments Division manager of Worldwide Electronics, attended a 30 minute seminar on open book management recently. As a result of the seminar, she decided to implement some open book management practices in her division. She began the process today when she received the latest quarterly results for her division.

Joey Thompson, the production supervisor of the finishing department in Johnson’s division, was surprised to receive the following note in his afternoon mail.

FINISHING DEPARTMENT COST ANALYSIS

This Quarter

This Quarter Last Year

Last Quarter

Direct material

$ 95,000

$ 75,000

$ 90,000

Direct labor

925,000

840,000

940,000

Material based overhead

27,000

22,000

23,000

Labor based overhead

413,000

382,700

396,500

Machine based overhead

657,000

589,000

617,000

As corporate controller of Worldwide Electronics, you are surprised when Joey Thompson calls your office and asks to meet with your staff to discuss the financial report and to discuss the meaning of “overhead.” As you consider how to deal with him, you begin to contemplate the memo that you are going to write to Laura Johnson. Before any decisions are implemented, you realize that she can use your expertise to design and implement open book management practices. As you write the memo, you know that your suggestions must be specific, positive, and informative. Write the memo to Johnson.

prepare a report discussing your recommendations for horizon 646312

(Environmental cost management; writing) Horizon Resins has experienced serious problems as a result of attempts to manage its impacts on the environment. To illustrate the problems, consider the following events, which occurred during the past five years:

  • Horizon was assessed $75 million in fines and penalties for toxic emissions. These amounts related to several separate regulatory investigations.
  • Horizon received reprimands from several regulatory bodies for failing to maintain required records regarding hazardous waste.
  • Horizon is currently facing a class action lawsuit filed by former employees of a subsidiary in Mexico alleging that management failed to disclose information to employees about the toxicity of certain materials. As a consequence, the health of the former employees has been permanently harmed.
  • Horizon must submit bids to obtain most of its business. Managers have casually observed that the company is successful more frequently when it bids on jobs that require handling the most toxic chemicals.
  • Horizon has a very basic accounting system that tracks costs on a job order basis but is not sensitive to quality or environmental costs.

Assume that you are an employee of the consulting firm that Horizon has hired to improve the management of all environmental effects. As the financial expert on the consulting team, you are expected to make recommendations as to how the information systems should be modified to reduce environmental costs. Prepare a report discussing your recommendations for Horizon.

pepper company completed the following selected transactions and events during march 646318

Pepper Company completed the following selected transactions and events during March of this year.

(Terms of all credit sales for the company are 2/10, n/30.)

Mar. 4 Sold merchandise on credit to Jennifer Nelson, Invoice No. 954, for $16,800 (cost is $12,200).

6 Purchased $1,220 of office supplies on credit from Mack Company. Invoice dated March 3, terms ny30.

6 Sold merchandise on credit to Dennie Hoskins, Invoice No. 955, for $10,200 (cost is $8,100).

11 Purchased $52,600 of merchandise, invoice dated March 6, terms 2/10, n/30, from Defore Industries.

12 Borrowed $26,000 cash by giving Commerce Bank a long term promissory note payable.

14 Received cash payment from Jennifer Nelson for the March 4 sale less the discount (Invoice No. 954).

16 Received a $200 credit memorandum from Defore Industries for unsatisfactory merchandise Pepper purchased on March 11 and later returned.

16 Received cash payment from Dennie Hoskins for the March 6 sale less the discount (Invoice No. 955).

18 Purchased $22,850 of store equipment on credit from Schmidt Supply, invoice dated March 15, terms n/30.

20 Sold merchandise on credit to Marjorie Allen, Invoice No. 956, for $5,600 (cost is $3,800).

21 Sent Defore Industries Check No. 516 in payment of its March 6 dated invoice less the return and the discount.

22 Purchased $41,625 of merchandise, invoice dated March 18, terms 2/10, n/30, from Welch Company.

26 Issued a $600 credit memorandum to Marjorie Allen for defective merchandise Pepper sold on March 20 and Allen later returned.

31 Issued Check No. 517, payable to Payroll, in payment of $15,900 sales salaries for the month.

Cashed the check and paid the employees.

31 Cash sales for the month are $134,680 (cost is $67,340). (Cash sales are recorded daily but are recorded only once here to reduce repetitive entries.)

Required

1. Open the following selected general ledger accounts: Cash (101), Accounts Receivable (106) Inventory

(119), Office Supplies (124), Store Equipment (165), Accounts Payable (201), Long Term Notes Payable (251), Sales (413), Sales Returns and Allowances (414), Sales Discounts (415), Cost of Goods Sold (502), and Sales Salaries Expense (621). Open the following accounts receivable ledger accounts: Marjorie Allen, Dennie Hoskins, and Jennifer Nelson. Open the following accounts payable ledger accounts: Defore Industries, Mack Company, Schmidt Supply, and Welch Company.

2. Enter the transactions using a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal similar to the ones illustrated in the chapter. Regularly post to the individual customer and creditor accounts. Also, post any amounts that should be posted as individual amounts to general ledger accounts. Foot and cross foot the journals and make the month end postings. Pepper Co. uses the perpetual inventory system.

3. Prepare a trial balance for the selected general ledger accounts in part 1 and prove the accuracy of subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of accounts receivable and accounts payable.

the sales journal is used to record 646320

1. The sales journal is used to record

a. Credit sales

b. Cash sales

c. Cash receipts

d. Cash purchases

e. Credit purchases

2. The purchases journal is used to record

a. Credit sales

b. Cash sales

c. Cash receipts

d. Cash purchases

e. Credit purchases

3. The ledger that contains the financial statement accounts of a company is the

a. General journal

b. Column balance journal

c. Special ledger

d. General ledger

e. Special journal

4. A subsidiary ledger that contains a separate account for each supplier (creditor) to the company is the

a. Controlling account

b. Accounts payable ledger

c. Accounts receivable ledger

d. General ledger

e. Special journal

5. Enterprise resource planning software

a. Refers to programs that help manage company operations.

b. Is another name for spreadsheet programs.

c. Uses batch processing of business information.

d. Is substantially declining in use.

e. Is another name for database programs.

enter the letter of each system principle in the blank next to its best description 646325

Enter the letter of each system principle in the blank next to its best description.

A. Control principle

B. Relevance principle

C. Compatibility principle

D. Flexibility principle

E. Cost benefit principle

1. The principle prescribes the accounting information system to change in response to technological advances and competitive pressures.

2. The principle prescribes the accounting information system to help monitor activities.

3. The principle prescribes the accounting information system to provide timely information for effective decision making.

4. The principle prescribes the accounting information system to adapt to the unique characteristics of the company.

5. The principle that affects all other accounting information system principles.

for those not recorded in the general journal identify the special journal where eac 646328

Lue Gifts uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal as illustrated in this chapter. Journalize its March transactions that should be recorded in the general journal. For those not recorded in the general journal, identify the special journal where each should be recorded.

Mar. 2 The company purchased $2,900 of merchandise on credit from the Elko Co., terms 2y10, ny30.

12 The owner, T. Lue, contributed an automobile worth $15,000 to the company.

16 The company sold $1,100 of merchandise (cost is $700) on credit to K. Gould, terms ny30.

19 K. Gould returned $150 of (worthless) merchandise to the company originally purchased on March 16 (assume the cost of this merchandise is left in cost of goods sold).

following is information from thompson company for its initial month of business 646329

Following is information from Thompson Company for its initial month of business.

(1) Identify the balances listed in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger.

(2) Identify the accounts receivable balance listed in the general ledger at month’s end.

 

Credit Sales

 

 

 

Cash Collections

 

 

Jan. 10

Boerman Company

 

$3,000

Jan. 20

Boerman Company

 

$2,000

19

Lehman Brothers

 

1,600

28

Lehman Brothers

 

1,600

23

Finger Company

 

2,200

31

Finger Company

 

1,300

redmon company uses a sales journal a purchases journal a cash receipts journal a ca 646330

Redmon Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of June.

June 1 Purchased $8,100 of merchandise on credit from Krause, Inc., terms ny30.

8 Sold merchandise costing $900 on credit to G. Seles for $1,500 subject to a $30 sales discount if paid by the end of the month.

14 Purchased $240 of store supplies from Chang Company on credit, terms ny30.

17 Purchased $260 of office supplies on credit from Monder Company, terms ny30.

24 Sold merchandise costing $400 to D. Lee for $630 cash.

28 Purchased store supplies from Porter’s for $90 cash.

29 Paid Krause, Inc., $8,100 cash for the merchandise purchased on June 1.

Prepare headings for a purchases journal like the one in Exhibit 7.9. Journalize the June transactions that should be recorded in the purchases journal.

joe giles is a product engineer for a firm that makes various home and office electr 646248

(Product life cycle; writing) Joe Giles is a product engineer for a firm that makes various home and office electronic gadgets. Some of this company’s products have long product life cycles and others have life cycles that are as short as 9 months. Giles’s company uses both target costing and kaizen techniques to manage costs relative to the product life cycle of the firm’s products. As an intern with the company, you recall a conversation in which Giles stated that the use of kaizen cost management strategies was much more effective for products with longer life cycles than products with shorter life cycles, and that target costing techniques including value engineering were much more critical to products with short life cycles than to products with long life cycles. Do you agree with Giles? Why or why not?

if the firm desires to net 3 50 per unit in profit over the life of the product and 646249

(Target costing) Utah Utensil has developed a new kitchen utensil. The firm has conducted significant market research and estimated the following pattern for sales of the new product:

Year

Expected Volume

Expected Price per Unit

1

48,000 units

$19

2

48,000 units

20

3

90,000 units

16

4

40,000 units

12

If the firm desires to net $3.50 per unit in profit over the life of the product, and selling and administrative expenses are expected to average $50,000 per year, what is the target cost to produce the new utensil?

compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product 646250

(Target costing) The marketing department at Cleveland Furniture Mfg. Has an idea for a new product that is expected to have a 6 year life cycle. After conducting market research, the company found that the product could sell for $800 per unit in the first 4 years of life and for $650 per unit for the last 2 years. Unit sales are expected to be as follows:

Year 1

4,000

Year 2

3,600

Year 3

4,700

Year 4

5,000

Year 5

1,500

Year 6

1,000

Per unit variable selling costs are estimated at $140 throughout the product’s life; total fixed selling and administrative costs over the 6 years are expected to be $3,700,000.Cleveland Furniture Mfg. desires a profit margin of 15 percent of selling price per unit.

a. Compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product. (Round to the nearest cent.)

b. If the company expects the product to cost $430 to manufacture in the first year, what is the upper bound for manufacturing cost in the following five years? (Round to the nearest cent.)

c. Refer to the original information. Assume that Cleveland Furniture Mfg. engineers indicate that the expected manufacturing cost per unit is $340. What actions might the company take to reduce this cost?

prepare journal entries using backflush costing with a minimum number of entries 646253

(Backflush costing) Durham Denim uses backflush costing to account for production costs of its clothing line. During August 2010, the firm produced 150,000 garments and sold 149,000. The standard cost for each garment is:

Direct material

$2

Conversion costs

4

Total cost

$6

The firm had no inventory on August 1. The following events took place in August:

  • Purchased $302,000 of direct material
  • Incurred $608,000 of conversion costs
  • Applied $600,000 of conversion costs to Raw and In Process Inventory
  • Finished 150,000 garments
  • Sold 149,000 garments for $10 each

a. Prepare journal entries using backflush costing with a minimum number of entries.

b. Post the amounts in (a) to T accounts.

c. Explain any inventory account balances.

calculate the material variance and the eco material variance 646254

(JIT variances) Oklahoma Pneumatic uses a JIT system. The following standards are related to materials A and B, which are used to make one unit of the company’s final product:

Annual Material Standards

3 pounds of Material A × $2.50

$7.50

4 pounds of Material B × $3.40

13.6

$21.10

Current Material Standards

2 pounds of Material A × $2.50

$5.00

5 pounds of Material B × $3.40

17

$22.00

Current material standards differ from the original because of an engineering change order made near the end of June. During July, the company produced 3,000 units of its final product and used 11,000 pounds of Material A and 10,000 pounds of Material B. All material is acquired at the standard cost per pound.

a. Calculate the material variance and the ECO material variance.

b. Explain the effect of the ECO on product cost.

calculate the material quantity variance 646255

(JIT variances) Natural Gardens makes recylcable pots for plants and uses JIT to manage inventories and production. The following are standards for a typical 1 gallon pot:

Annual Material Standards

32 ounces of Component X × $0.02

$0.64

2 ounces of Component Y × $0.05

0.10

$0.74

Current Material Standards

27 ounces of Component X × $0.02

$0.54

4 ounces of Component Y × $0.05

0.20

$0.74

In house experiments indicated that changing the material standard would make the pots stronger, so the company issued an engineering change order for the product in February; this ECO established the current material standards. March production was 8,000 pots. Usage of raw material (all purchased at standard price) in March was 220,000 ounces of Component X and 31,000 ounces of Component Y.

a. Calculate the material quantity variance.

b. Calculate the ECO variance.

c. Summarize the company’s effectiveness in managing March production costs.

d. Comment on the circumstances in which a company would institute an ECO that results in the expected product cost being unchanged.

how would the adoption of an fms likely affect the inventory levels 646257

(Flexible manufacturing systems; research; writing) Research the topic of manufacturing cells on the Internet, and write a brief report on company experiences using those cells.

(Flexible manufacturing systems; writing) The installation of a flexible manufacturing system allows firms to produce a variety of products in small batches. Assume Johnson Steel, a metal fabricating company, is considering switching from a traditional assembly line production process to an FMS. Provide answers to the following questions.

a. How would the adoption of an FMS likely affect the inventory levels?

b. How would the adoption of an FMS likely affect the level of employment for production employees?

c. Would the adoption of an FMS require employees to be retrained? Explain.

each unit moves directly from department 1 to department 2 with no lag time did prom 646259

(Production constraints) Promotional Products produces commercial calendars in a two department operation: Department 1 is labor intensive and Department 2 is automated. The average output of Department 1 is 45 units per hour. Units from Department 1 are transferred to Department 2 to be completed by a robot. The robot can finish a maximum of 45 units per hour. The company needs to complete 180 units this afternoon for an order that has been backlogged for 4 months. The production manager has informed the people in Department 1 that they are to work on nothing else except this order from 1:00 p.m. until 5:00 p.m. The supervisor in Department 2 has scheduled the same times for the robot to work on the order. Department 1’s activity for each hour of the afternoon is as follows:

Time

1:00–2:00 P.M.

2:00–3:00 P.M.

3:00–4:00 P.M.

4:00–4:58 P.M.

Production

40 units

44 units

50 units

46 units

Each unit moves directly from Department 1 to Department 2 with no lag time. Did Promotional Products complete the 180 units by 5:00 p.m.? If not, explain and provide detailed computations.

a retail cosmetics chain carries three types of skin products face cream lotion and 646261

(Appendix: multiproduct EOQs) A retail cosmetics chain carries three types of skin products: face cream, lotion, and powder. Determine the economic order quantity for each, given the following information:

Product

Order Cost

Carrying Cost

Demand

Face cream

$12

$2.00

2,000 units

Lotion

40

1.45

1,000 units

Powder

15

1.25

900 units

discuss how the change in burger king rsquo s pork and egg supplier policy is likely 646264

(Inventory cost management; ethics; writing) In early 2007, Burger King, under pressure from animal rights activists including People for Ethical Treatment of Animals (PETA), announced it would start purchasing pork and eggs from suppliers that use cage free animal management methods. In its announcement, Burger King stated it would also give purchasing preference to poultry suppliers that use or switch to “controlled atmosphere stunning,” which is regarded by some to be a more humane method of slaughtering poultry.

a. Discuss how the change in Burger King’s pork and egg supplier policy is likely to affect the prices Burger King pays for pork and eggs.

b. Evaluate the ethics of the new supplier policy from the point of view of a Burger King patron, assuming that the new supplier policy will likely increase prices charged for pork and egg food products.

c. Evaluate the ethics of the new policy from the point of view of a supplier who will now face higher costs in providing Burger King with pork or egg products.

how would the threat of immediate product obsolescence affect imeg rsquo s practices 646265

(Inventory cost management; writing) IMeg manufactures various electronic assemblies that are sold primarily to computer manufacturers. IMeg’s reputation has been built on quality, timely delivery, and products that are consistently on the cutting edge of technology. IMeg’s typical product has a short life; products are in development for about a year and in the growth stage, with sometimes spectacular growth, for about a year. Each product then experiences a rapid decline in sales as new products become available.

IMeg’s competitive strategy requires a reliable stream of new products to be developed each year, which is the only way that the company can overcome the threat of product obsolescence. IMeg’s products go through the first half of the product life cycle similar to products in other industries; however, differences occur in the second half of the products’ life cycles. IMeg’s products never reach the mature product or declining product stage. Near the end of the growth stage, products just “die” as new ones are introduced.

a. In the competitive market facing IMeg, what would be key considerations in production and inventory control?

b. How would the threat of immediate product obsolescence affect IMeg’s practices in purchasing product components and materials?

c. How would the threat of product obsolescence affect the inventory carrying costs for a typical product produced by IMeg?

which of the ordering costs should tyler tubing rsquo s controller consider in perfo 646266

(Identification of inventory costs) Tyler Tubing’s management has been evaluating company policies with respect to control of costs of corrugated metal, one of the firm’s major component materials. The firm’s controller has gathered the following financial data, which may be pertinent to controlling costs associated with the metal tubing:

Ordering Costs

Annual salary of purchasing department manager

$61,500.00

Depreciation of equipment in purchasing department

$42,300.00

Cost per order for purchasing department supplies

$0.90

Typical phone expense per order placed

$6.06

Monthly expense for heat and light in purchasing department

$700.00

Carrying Costs

Annual depreciation on materials storage building

$30,000.00

Annual inventory insurance premium (per dollar of inventory value)

$0.15

Annual property tax on materials storage building

$7,500.00

Obsolescence cost per dollar of average annual inventory

$0.16

Annual salary of security officer assigned to the materials storage building

$38,000.00

a. Which of the ordering costs should Tyler Tubing’s controller consider in performing short run decision analysis? Explain.

b. Which of the carrying costs should Tyler Tubing’s controller consider in performing short run decision analysis? Explain.

consider the following circumstances and discuss whether you would recommend a push 646267

(Push vs. pull systems; writing) Assume that you are a management consultant who advises manufacturing firms regarding production technologies. One of the hot issues you often discuss with management is whether a pull system or a push system is superior in a particular situation. Consider the following circumstances and discuss whether you would recommend a push system or a pull system in each particular case:

a. The firm manufactures two consumer products; 75 percent of annual sales are made during the year end holiday sales cycle.

b. The firm manufactures a variety of goods for the petroleum industry; most products are sold in low volumes and have a high unit cost.

c. The firm manufactures products subject to rapid obsolescence and that have relatively short product life cycles.

d. The firm manufactures products that have a limited shelf life.

e. The firm manufactures a limited line of products for which there is predictable, but seasonal, demand and the products have long life cycles.

why does globalization of a firm rsquo s production operations increase the challeng 646268

(Push vs. pull systems; writing) Koss Corp. makes high quality head phones for a variety of applications. Koss is a Milwaukee based company but has significant manufacturing operations in China. When manufacturing operations were moved to China, CEO Michael Koss was a strong proponent of just in time inventory management. Although the company maintained significant orders of component parts, finished goods were produced only to satisfy customer orders. Accordingly, work in process and finished goods inventories were small. However, moving production off shore significantly increased the complexity of the firm’s logistics. Unexpected changes in product mix and fluctuating demand for products caused the firm’s backlog of orders to rise significantly. Koss responded by scrapping the JIT production and stacking finished goods on the factory floor pending receipt of customer orders.

a. Why does globalization of a firm’s production operations increase the challenges in controlling inventories using the JIT philosophy (pull system)?

b. After scrapping JIT, Koss reported that the total investment in inventories dropped from $15 million to $8 million. How could this occur?

c. From the perspective of managing the risk of a stock outage, is Koss better off holding mostly finished goods inventory, or mostly component parts inventories? Explain.

compare the estimated production cost to the target cost discuss this comparison and 646270

(Product life cycles; writing) Sony Corp. launched its PlayStation 3 in late 2006. It was introduced at a price point of $599 for the top model. At the time of introduction, a California technology firm performed a tear down of the PlayStation and estimated its cost of production to be $839. Based on this cost estimate, the California tech firm estimated Sony was losing as much as $240 per unit sold.

a. Assume that Sony generates more profit on royalties from the games played on PlayStation than on the sales of PlayStation itself. In light of this explanation, is it rational for Sony to sell the PlayStation at a $240 loss? Explain.

b. How would setting the price of the PlayStation at $599, rather than the break even price of $839, likely affect (1) early life cycle sales and (2) total life cycle sales of PlayStation 3?

c. Is Sony’s pricing strategy (i.e., introductory price below production cost) more beneficial if the product’s life cycle is long or short? Explain.

47.

(Target costing) Gourmet Grade has just completed its work on a new microwave entrée. After consumer research was conducted, the marketing group has estimated the following quantities of the product can be sold at the following prices over its life cycle:

Year

Quantity

Selling Price

1

100,000

$2.50

2

250,000

2.4

3

350,000

2.3

4

500,000

2.1

5

600,000

$2.00

6

450,000

2

7

200,000

1.9

8

130,000

1.9

Initial engineering estimates of direct material and direct labor costs are $1.70 and $0.40, respectively, per unit. Variable overhead per unit is expected to be $0.50, and fixed overhead is expected to be $200,000 per year. Gourmet Grade’s management strives to earn a 25 percent gross margin on products of this type.

a. Estimate the target cost for the new entrée.

b. Compare the estimated production cost to the target cost. Discuss this comparison and how management might use the comparison to manage costs.

c. Based on your answer in (b), should Gourmet Grade begin production of the new entrée? Explain.

use the concept of target costing to integrate the marketing and engineering informa 646271

(Target costing) StatPro has just been presented the following market and production estimates on Product X27, which has been under development in the company.

Projected market price of X27

$215 (based on 180,000 life cycle unit sales over5 year life)

Projected gross margin per unit

35

Estimated selling and administrative costs per unit

40

Estimated production costs Direct material

$70

Direct labor

40

Variable overhead

15

Fixed overhead

$360,000 annually

Use the concept of target costing to integrate the marketing and engineering information and interpret the results for StatPro.

indicate by letter which of the three categories apply to the following features of 646272

(JIT features) Indicate by letter which of the three categories apply to the following features of just in time systems. Use as many letters as appropriate.

D = desired intermediate result of using JIT

U = ultimate goal of JIT

T = technique associated with JIT

a. Reducing setup time

b. Reducing total cost of producing and carrying inventory

c. Using focused factory arrangements

d. Designing products to minimize design changes after production starts

e. Monitoring quality on a continuous basis

f. Using manufacturing cells

g. Minimizing inventory stored

h. Measuring variances caused by an engineering change order

i. Using autonomation processes

j. Pulling purchases and production through the system based on sales demand

cosmo industries recorded the following transactions for its first month of operatio 646273

(JIT journal entries) Cosmo Industries recorded the following transactions for its first month of operations:

(1)

Direct Material Inventory

24,000

Accounts Payable

24,000

To record purchase of direct material

(2)

Work in Process Inventory

24,000

Direct Material Inventory

24,000

To record distribution of material to production

(3)

Conversion Cost Control

40,000

Various accounts

40,000

To record incurrence of conversion costs

(4)

Work in Process Inventory

40,000

Conversion Cost Control

40,000

To assign conversion cost to WIP

(5)

Finished Goods Inventory

64,000

Work in Process Inventory

64,000

To record completion of products

(6)

Accounts Receivable

116,000

Sales

116,000

To record sale of products

Cost of Goods Sold

62,000

Finished Goods Inventory

62,000

To record cost of goods sold

Because Cosmo employs JIT, the company’s CEO has asked how the accounting system could be simplified.

a. Prepare the journal entries, assuming that no transactions are recognized until goods are completed.

b. Prepare the journal entries, assuming that goods are shipped to customers as soon as they are completed and that no journal entries are recorded until goods are completed.

c. Prepare the journal entries, assuming that sale of product is the trigger point for journal entries.

d. Prepare the journal entries, assuming that sale of product is the trigger point for journal entries and that the firm uses backflush costing.

determine the increase in material cost due to the eco related to direct material 646274

(JIT journal entries; advanced) Wisconsin Wire (WW) has implemented a just in time inventory system for the production of its insulated wire. Inventories of raw material and work in process are so small that WW uses a Raw and In Process account. In addition, almost all labor operations are automated, and WW has chosen to cost products using standards for direct material and conversion costs. The following production standards are applicable at the beginning of 2010 for one roll of insulated wire:

Direct material (100 yards × $2.00)

$200

Conversion (4 machine hours × $35)

140

Total cost

$340

The conversion cost of $35 per machine hour was estimated on the basis of 500,000 machine hours for the year and $17,500,000 of conversion costs. The following activities took place during 2010:

1. Raw material purchased and placed into production totaled 12,452,000 yards. All except 8,000 yards were purchased at the standard price of $2.00 per yard. The other 8,000 yards were purchased at a cost of $2.06 per yard; the higher price was due to the placement of a rush order. The order was approved in advance by management. All purchases are on account.

2. From January 1 to February 28, WW manufactured 20,800 rolls of insulated wire. Conversion costs incurred to date totaled $3,000,000. Of this amount, $600,000 was for depreciation, $2,200,000 was paid in cash, and $200,000 was on account.

3. Conversion costs are applied to the Raw and In Process account from January 1 to February 28 on the basis of the annual standard.

4. The Engineering Department issued a change order (ECO) to the operations flow document effective March 1, 2010. The change decreased the machine time to manufacture one roll of wire by 5 minutes per roll. However, the standard raised the amount of direct material to 100.4 yards per roll. The Accounting Department requires that the annual standard be continued for costing the Raw and In Process Inventory for the remainder of 2010. The effects of ECOs shouldbe shown in two accounts: Material Quantity ECO Variance and Machine HoursECO Variance.

5. Total production for the remainder of 2010 was 103,200 rolls of wire. Total conversion costs for the remaining 10 months of 2010 were $14,442,000. Of this amount,$4,000,000 was depreciation, $9,325,000 was paid in cash, and $1,117,000 was on account.

6. The standard amount of conversion cost is applied to the Raw and In Process Inventory for the remainder of the year.

a. Prepare entries for items 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6.

b. Determine the increase in material cost due to the ECO related to direct material.

c. Prepare a journal entry to adjust the Raw and In Process Inventory account for the ECO cost found in (b).

d. Determine the reduction in conversion cost due to the ECO related to machine time.

e. Prepare a journal entry to reclassify the actual conversion costs by the savings found in (d).

f. Making the entry in (e) raises conversion costs to what they would have been if the ECO related to machine time had not been made. Are conversion costs under or overapplied and by what amount?

g. Assume that the reduction in machine time could not have been made without the corresponding increase in material usage. Is the net effect of these ECOs cost beneficial? Why?

how could application of the theory of constraints help alleviate the effects of mat 646275

(Lean manufacturing; TOC; ethics; writing) Recent years have been characterized by high, and volatile, energy prices. Some critics of the energy industry suggest that the oil companies’ use of JIT inventory management has contributed to the volatility in prices and the supply constraints. Further, oil and natural gas products are crucial inputs to other industrial products such as chemicals and plastics. These industries also have been rocked by both the volatility in energy prices and the availability of the oil and gas derived inputs to their products. To illustrate one of the negative outcomes of the supply volatility, Citigroup cut its stock rating of Lear Corp. in late 2005 because of fears of adverse effects on profits from shortages of materials and higher prices of materials derived from inputs produced by the oil and gas industry.

a. Is JIT management of inventories an ethical practice by the oil industry if it is true that JIT practices increase the volatility in energy prices for energy consumers?

b. How could application of the theory of constraints help alleviate the effects of material shortages experienced by firms that consume products derived from the oil and gas industry?

c. What actions could firms that are dependent on inputs from the oil and gas industry take to reduce supply chain risks?

d. In the United States, both federal and state governments increase the price of energy (particularly automotive fuels) to the consumer by assessing taxes on energy sold at the consumer level. Do governments have an ethical responsibility to reduce taxes on energy when prices spike upward? Discuss.

what is tqm what are the four important tenets of tqm and why are they important 646195

  1. What is TQM? What are the four important tenets of TQM, and why are they important?
  2. What is the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award? Why would an organization apply for that award?
  3. In the production–sales cycle, what are the four points at which quality costs are incurred? How are these costs interrelated through these points?
  4. How can Pareto analysis help focus managerial efforts on reducing the costs of quality related problems?
  5. How does strategic cost management link information to corporate strategies?
  6. Why might a common set of global quality standards be needed or desirable?
  7. What is a quality audit?
  8. Compare and contrast the EFQM Excellence Model with the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award criteria.

what was wobegon electric rsquo s total labor cost and labor cost per call at the ca 646198

(Benchmarking) The call center of Wobegon Electric Company handles 1.2 million calls per year. The average call requires six minutes of operator time and 40 percent of the calls require a supervisor to be involved for at least half of the call time. Operators are paid $9 per hour and supervisors are paid $15 per hour. After Wobegon Electric engaged in process benchmarking, call times were reduced by one minute and the number of supervisor involved calls were reduced by 15 percent. The benchmarking study cost Wobegon Electric Company $200,000.

a. What was Wobegon Electric’s total labor cost and labor cost per call at the call center prior to benchmarking?

b. What was Wobegon Electric’s total labor cost and labor cost per call at the call center after benchmarking? (Round up to the nearest penny.)

c. If the new results are expected to continue for three years, was engaging in the benchmarking study profitable to Wobegon Electric Company? Show calculations.

what information does the chart provide to natore 646201

(Control chart) Rocky Natore, owner of Rocky’s Pizza, has a policy to put 36 slices of pepperoni on a large pizza. Natore recently hired two college students to work part time making pizzas and decided to observe them at their jobs for a few days. Natore gathered the following data on number of pepperoni slices being used on the pizzas:

11:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.

13 pizzas were made containing the following number of pepperoni slices: 35, 37, 41, 33, 36, 36, 35, 39, 44, 37, 36, 36, 35

5:00 P.M. to 11:00 P.M.

25 pizzas were made containing the following number of pepperoni slices: 35, 37, 41, 42, 36, 39, 44, 43, 44, 37, 48, 36, 35, 40, 39, 41, 29, 36, 36, 42, 45, 44, 37, 36, 36

a. Prepare a control chart for pepperoni slices.

b. What information does the chart provide to Natore?

what vehicle characteristics are important to each type of buyer which vehicle chara 646202

(Quality characteristics; writing) Choose one product and one service with which you are well acquainted. Indicate how the product and service each meet (or do not meet) the eight overall quality characteristics. For the service, indicate how it meets (or does not meet) the three additional characteristics for service quality.

(Definition of quality; quality characteristics; writing) In a three person team, role play the following individuals who are visiting a local car dealership: (1) a 19 year old college student, (2) one half of a young married couple with two children, and (3) a retired person. Each individual is interested in purchasing a new automobile.

a. How does each customer define quality in an automobile? Explain the reasons for the differences.

b. What vehicle characteristics are important to each type of buyer? Which vehicle characteristics are unique to each buyer?

what might cause the differences between the ratings for the automobiles selected an 646203

(Benchmarks; research; writing) In 2002, a green engineering case study about automobile emissions and saving energy was performed. The study generated designs for both gasoline and diesel powered automobiles with the following characteristics: a mid size sedan that would get 52 miles per gallon when equipped with a gasoline engine and 68 miles per gallon when equipped with a diesel engine. The automobiles were also designed to be capable of achieving a “Five Star” crash safety rating based on the anticipated 2004 safety standards, and would cost no more to build than tradition ally engineered mid size sedans.

a. Use the Internet to obtain miles per gallon and crash test ratings for five new automobiles (either gasoline or diesel). How do these automobiles compare to the benchmarks of the 2002 case study?

b. What might cause the differences between the ratings for the automobiles selected and the benchmarks?

which spending categories are most susceptible to control by managers why 646209

(Quality costs; writing) Seymour Inc. has prepared the following summary quality cost report for 2010:

Prevention costs

$1,560,000

Appraisal costs

1,800,000

Internal failure costs

2,280,000

External failure costs

1,680,000

Total quality costs

$7,320,000

The company is actively striving to reduce total quality costs. Its current strategy is to increase spending in one or more quality cost categories in the hope of achieving greater spending cuts in other quality cost categories. Prepare a presentation that answers the following questions.

a. Which spending categories are most susceptible to control by managers? Why?

b. Why is it more logical for the company to increase spending in the prevention cost and appraisal cost categories than in the failure cost categories?

c. Which cost category is the most likely target for spending reductions? Explain.

d. How would the adoption of a TQM philosophy affect the focus in reducing quality costs?

which of these are costs of compliance and which are costs of noncompliance 646210

(Quality costs) The accounting system for Amaldi Co. reflected the following quality costs for 2009 and 2010:

2009

2010

Customer refunds for poor product quality

$24,000

$18,000

Fitting machines for mistake proof operations

9,400

13,800

Supply chain management activities

8,000

10,000

Waste disposal

44,000

36,000

Quality training

28,000

30,000

Litigation claims for product defects

72,000

56,000

a. Which of these are costs of compliance, and which are costs of noncompliance?

b. Calculate the percentage change in each cost and for each category.

c. Discuss the pattern of the changes in the two categories.

write a brief explanation for the pattern of change in the two categories 646211

(Quality costs) Forsythe Furniture has gathered the following data on its quality costs for 2009 and 2010:

Defect Prevention Costs

2009

2010

Quality training

$4,500

$5,250

Quality technology

3,750

5,000

Quality production design

2,000

4,500

External Failure Costs

2009

2010

Warranty handling

$7,500

$5,000

Customer reimbursements

5,500

3,600

Customer returns handling

3,500

2,000

a. Compute the percentage change in the two quality cost categories from 2009 to 2010.

b. Write a brief explanation for the pattern of change in the two categories.

managers at schubert corp want to determine the company rsquo s cost of quality the 646214

(Cost of quality) Managers at Schubert Corp. want to determine the company’s cost of quality. The following information has been gathered from the records for August 2010:

Defective units

6,000

Units reworked

1,200

Defective units returned

400

Appraisal costs

$13,600

Cost per unit for rework

$20

Prevention costs

$85,000

Profit per good unit produced and sold

$75

Profit per defective unit sold

$45

Cost per unit for customer returns

$15

Cost of warranty work

$9,000

Compute the following:

a. Lost profits from selling defective work

b. Total costs of failure

c. Total quality cost

the following production information about quality costs has been gathered for june 646215

(Cost of quality) The following production information about quality costs has been gathered for June 2010:

Total defective units

580

Number of units reworked

380

Number of units returned

100

Total prevention cost

$24,000

Total appraisal cost

$8,500

Per unit profit for defective units

$20

Per unit profit for good units

$56

Cost to rework defective units

$16

Cost to handle returned units

$10

Using these data, calculate the following:

a. Total cost to rework

b. Profit lost from not reworking all defective units

c. Cost of processing customer returns

d. Total failure costs

e. Total quality cost

what conditions in china might have contributed to the quality problems 646218

(Quality problems; research; ethics; writing) In mid 2007, numerous findings of unsafe products produced in China were disclosed, including pet food, fish, toothpaste, toys, and fireworks. In early 2008, the FDA pointed to Chinese companies as the source of contaminated heparin, a widely used blood thinner. Reports of at least 81 deaths linked to contaminated heparin in the United States set off withdrawals of the product in 11 countries. “The key ingredient in heparin is made from slaughtered pig intestines, much of which comes from China, often from small family workshops.” In early 2009, it was found that “two Chinese based companies shipped contaminated heparin to the U.S. between 2007 and 2008 and one company lied to federal health regulators about [its] role in the matter.”

a. Research problems with Chinese products and write a short summary that identifies what prior or current products were or are involved and the problems experienced with those products.

b. What conditions in China might have contributed to the quality problems?

c. Do you think that all Chinese products of a similar type should be banned if significant quality problems are found in several like products? Explain the rationale for your answer.

compare genentech rsquo s 2008 profits with those of other firms in the industry 646219

(Quality problems; benchmarking; research; ethics; writing) In 2008, pharmaceutical company Genentech withdrew its psoriasis drug Raptiva from the market because it was linked to a rare but often fatal brain disorder (progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy) in patients who used the medication. There were about 2,000 patients in the United States taking the drug. Genentech expected to record an approximate $125 million cost of sales increase for the first half of 2009 for the withdrawal. Genentech was acquired in March 2009 by Roche Holding AG.

a. Find information on the Web about problems in the pharmaceutical industry. Be certain to review Genentech’s annual report information related to Raptiva. Discuss your findings.

b. Compare Genentech’s 2008 profits with those of other firms in the industry.

c. Discuss why a total quality management system would be more important in pharmaceutical companies than in most other companies.

devise a plan for altazar electronics to address the prioritization of preventive me 646224

(Quality costs; Pareto analysis) Altazar Electronics has identified the following 2010 warranty costs for one of the company products. The information has been categorized according to the type of product failure.

Model

Electrical

Motor

Structural

Mechanical

Total Dollars

Chic

$ 45,360

$ 50,000

$26,760

$11,200

$133,320

Elegant

57,640

64,000

52,200

12,000

185,840

Others

17,660

33,180

12,360

21,640

84,840

Total

$120,660

$147,180

$91,320

$44,840

$404,000

a. Rearrange the rows in descending order of magnitude based on the Total Dollars column, and prepare a table using Pareto analysis with the following headings:

Model

Dollars

% of Total

Cumulative % of Total

b. Which model(s) account for the vast proportion of all failure costs? Discuss.

c. Devise a plan for Altazar Electronics to address the prioritization of preventive measures based on the findings in the Pareto analysis.

what implications would the introduction of nanotechnology and molecular manufacturi 646225

(Quality costs; research; writing) Nanotechnology may be the future of manufacturing. The term refers to any area of research that deals with objects one tenth the size of an atom. According to the Center for Responsible Nanotechnology and given the current rate of development, general purpose molecular manufacturing might become a reality by 2010, is likely by 2015, and almost certainly will be achieved by 2020. The last stage of nano engineering is the ability to create “assemblers” (a device with a submicroscopic arm that is controlled by a computer) that can build consumer goods. For the new technology to become a reality, the assemblers need to be able to self replicate.

a. What implications would the introduction of nanotechnology and molecular manufacturing have on the four types of quality costs within the manufacturing process? Outside the manufacturing process?

b. What implications would the introduction of nanotechnology and molecular manufacturing have on nonquality costs?

develop a balanced scorecard for physicians social service agency that incorporates 646231

(Balanced scorecard; writing; ethics) Assume that you are in charge of Physicians Social Service Agency, which provides counseling services to low income families. The agency’s costs have been increasing with no corresponding increase in funding. In an effort to implement some cost reductions, you took the following actions:

  • Empowered counselors to make their own decisions about the legitimacy of all low income claims.
  • Told counselors not to review processed claims a second time to emphasize the concept of “do it right the first time.”
  • Set an upper and lower control limit of 5 minutes on a standard 15 minute time for consultations to discourage “out of control” conditions.

a. Discuss the ethics as well as the positive and negative effects of each of the ideas listed.

b. Develop a balanced scorecard for Physicians Social Service Agency that incorporates the three changes listed.

compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product round to the nearest c 646238

NewMaid has designed a new consumer product, a floor cleaner and wax, that is expected to have a 5 year life cycle. Based on its market research, NewMaid’s management has deter mined that the new product should be packaged in 32 ounce containers, with a selling price of $6 in the first three years and $4 during the last two years. Unit sales are expected to be as follows:

Year 1

300,000

Year 2

400,000

Year 3

600,000

Year 4

400,000

Year 5

250,000

Total

1,950,000

Variable selling costs are expected to be $1 per container throughout the product’s life. Annual fixed selling and administrative costs are estimated to be $500,000. NewMaid management desires a 25 percent profit margin on selling price.

Required:

a. Compute the life cycle target cost to manufacture the product. (Round to the nearest cent.)

b. If NewMaid anticipates the new product will cost $3 per unit to manufacture in the first year, what is the maximum that manufacturing cost can be in the following 4 years? (Round to the nearest cent.)

c. Suppose that NewMaid engineers determine that expected manufacturing cost per unit over the product life cycle is $2.25. What actions might the company take to reduce this cost?

calculate the material variance and the eco material variance 646239

CAN DO Inc. manufactures home improvement products in a JIT environment. The annual and current material standards for one of the company’s products follow.

Annual Material Standards

4 pounds of Material 1 × $3.75

$15.00

12 pounds of Material 2 × $2.25

27

$42.00

Current Material Standards

8 pounds of Material 1 × $3.75

$30.00

8 pounds of Material 2 × $2.25

18

$48.00

The current material standards differ from the original because an engineering change order was made near the end of August. During September, the company manufactured 1,000 units of product and used 7,500 pounds of Material 1 and 8,200 pounds of Material 2. All material is acquired at the standard cost per pound.

Required:

a. Calculate the material variance and the ECO material variance.

b. Explain the effect of the ECO on product cost.

calculate the following for each firm and the average for the 10 firms 646242

(Inventory cost management; research) Randomly select annual reports for 10 publicly traded manufacturing companies. On the balance sheet, or in the related footnotes, for each firm, find the amounts for the three inventory accounts: raw material, work in process, and finished goods. Then, calculate the following for each firm, and the average for the 10 firms:

Ratio of Raw Material Inventory to total assets

Ratio of Work in Process Inventory to total assets

Ratio of Finished Goods Inventory to total assets

Ratio of total inventory to total assets

a. On average, how large is total inventory as a percentage of total assets for your 10 firms?

b. On average, which inventory component comprises the largest percentage of total inventory?

c. Do your answers to (a) and (b) suggest that effective inventory management is crucial to the success of these 10 firms? Discuss.

indicate whether each of the following costs would be considered an ordering cost o 646243

(Inventory cost management) Indicate whether each of the following costs would be considered an ordering cost (O), a carrying cost (C), or a cost of not carrying (N) inventory. For any costs that do not fit these categories, indicate N/A for “not applicable.”

a. Telephone call to supplier

b. Stationery and purchase order forms

c. Purchasing agent’s salary

d. Purchase price of product

e. Goodwill of customer lost due to unavailability of product

f. Postage on purchase order

g. Freight in cost on product

h. Insurance for products in inventory

i. Wages of receiving clerks

j. Preparing and issuing checks to suppliers

k. Contribution margin lost due to unavailability of product

l. Storage costs for products on hand

m. Quantity discounts on products ordered

n. Opportunity cost of funds invested in inventory

o. Property taxes on warehouses

p. Handling costs for products on hand

q. Excess ordering and shipping charges for rush orders of standard product lines

r. Spoilage of products awaiting use

prepare such a report 646247

(Push vs. pull systems; writing) Everyone in your company seems excited about the suggestion that the firm implement a JIT system. Being a cautious person, however, your company president has asked you to write a report describing situations in which JIT will not work. Prepare such a report.

(Product life cycle; writing) Recently you read an article regarding a new product introduced late last year by 3G Inc., a consumer products company. The article’s author, although praising 3G Inc. for providing the marketplace with this innovative product, simultaneously criticized the company because the product had generated a $50 million loss for the year due to low unit sales. The author concluded the article suggesting that company management had “missed the boat” with this product and should “dump it” as soon as possible. After reading this article you recall the concept of product life cycle and after contemplating how sales volume behaves over the product life cycle, you believe you can rebut the author of the 3G Inc. story. Write the rebuttal.

emerald golf inc reported a net cash flow from operating activities of 86 700 on its 646140

Emerald Golf Inc. reported a net cash flow from operating activities of $86,700 on its statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008. The following information was reported in the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method:

Decrease in income taxes payable

$2,000

Decrease in inventories

5,600

Depreciation

8,500

Gain on sale of investments

3,400

Increase in accounts payable

1,200

Increase in prepaid expenses

700

Increase in accounts receivable

4,300

Determine the net income reported by Emerald Golf Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2008.

selected data derived from the income statement and balance sheet of jones soda co f 646141

Selected data derived from the income statement and balance sheet of Jones Soda Co. for a recent year are as follows:

Income statement data (in thousands):

 

Net earnings

$1,330

Depreciation expense

193

Stock based compensation expense (noncash)

20

Balance sheet data (in thousands):

 

Increase in accounts receivable

$1,328

Increase in inventory

1,550

Increase in prepaid expenses

124

Increase in accounts payable

686

a. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method for Jones Soda Co. for the year.

b. Interpret your results in part (a).

the comparative balance sheet of alliance structures inc for december 31 2008 and 20 646142

The comparative balance sheet of Alliance Structures Inc. for December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

Cash

$ 90

$ 23

Accounts receivable (net)

30

27

Inventories

24

21

Land

35

55

Equipment

32

22

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(9)

(5)

 

$202

$143

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 17

$ 10

Dividends payable

1

Common stock, $1 par

6

3

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

30

10

Retained earnings

148

120

Total

$202

$143

The following additional information is taken from the records:

a. Land was sold for $15.

b. Equipment was acquired for cash.

c. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $40 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.

f. There was a $12 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the cost of merchandise sold for kohl s corporation for a recent year was 8 639 mill 646145

The cost of merchandise sold for Kohl’s Corporation for a recent year was $8,639 million. The balance sheet showed the following current account balances (in millions):

 

Balance,

Balance,

 

End of Year

Beginning of Year

Merchandise inventories

$2,238

$1,947

Accounts payable

830

705

Determine the amount of cash payments for merchand

selected data taken from the accounting records of extravaganza inc for the current 646146

Selected data taken from the accounting records of Extravaganza Inc. for the current year ended December 31 are as follows:

 

Balance,

Balance,

 

December 31

January 1

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

$ 4,300

$ 4,700

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

32,100

35,400

Inventories

59,500

64,700

Prepaid expenses

2,500

3,000

During the current year, the cost of merchandise sold was $345,000, and the operating expenses other than depreciation were $60,000. The direct method is used for presenting the cash flows from operating activities on the statement of cash flows.

Determine the amount reported on the statement of cash flows for (a) cash payments for merchandise and (b) cash payments for operating expenses.

the income statement of country kitchen bakeries inc for the current year ended june 646147

The income statement of Country Kitchen Bakeries Inc. for the current year ended June 30 is as follows:

Sales

 

$456,000

Cost of merchandise sold

 

259,000

Gross profit

 

$197,000

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$35,000

 

Other operating expenses

92,400

 

Total operating expenses

 

127,400

Income before income tax

 

$ 69,600

Income tax expense

 

19,300

Net income

 

$ 50,300

Changes in the balances of selected accounts from the beginning to the end of the current year are as follows:

 

Increase

 

Decrease*

Accounts receivable (net)

$10,500*

Inventories

3,500

Prepaid expenses

3,400*

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

7,200*

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

1,100

Income tax payable

2,400*

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows, using the direct method.

the income statement for wholly bagel company for the current year ended june 30 and 646148

The income statement for Wholly Bagel Company for the current year ended June 30 and balances of selected accounts at the beginning and the end of the year are as follows:

Sales

 

$184,000

Cost of merchandise sold

 

67,000

Gross profit

 

$117,000

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$14,500

 

Other operating expenses

49,000

 

Total operating expenses

 

63,500

Income before income tax

 

$ 53,500

Income tax expense

 

15,400

Net income

 

$ 38,100

 

 

 

Beginning of

End of Year

 

Year

Accounts receivable (net)

$14,800

$12,900

Inventories

38,100

33,100

Prepaid expenses

6,000

6,600

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

27,900

25,900

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

7,900

8,600

Income tax payable

1,500

1,500

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows, using the direct method.

the comparative balance sheet of oak and tile flooring co for june 30 2008 and 2007 646151

The comparative balance sheet of Oak and Tile Flooring Co. for June 30, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

 

June 30, 2008

June 30, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 34,700

$ 23,500

Accounts receivable (net)

101,600

92,300

Inventories

146,300

142,100

Investments

0

50,000

Land

145,000

0

Equipment

215,000

175,500

Accumulated depreciation

(48,600)

(41,300)

 

$594,000

$442,100

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$100,900

$ 95,200

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

15,000

13,200

Dividends payable

12,500

10,000

Common stock, $1 par

56,000

50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

220,000

100,000

Retained earnings

189,600

173,700

 

$594,000

$442,100

The following additional information was taken from the records of Oak and Tile Flooring Co.:

a. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

b. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

c. The investments were sold for $45,000 cash.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $65,900 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.

f. There was a $50,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of portable luggage company at december 31 2008 and 20 646152

The comparative balance sheet of Portable Luggage Company at December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2008

Dec. 31, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 175,900

$ 143,200

Accounts receivable (net)

264,100

235,000

Inventories

352,300

405,800

Prepaid expenses

12,500

10,000

Land

120,000

120,000

Buildings

680,000

450,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

(185,000)

(164,500)

Machinery and equipment

310,000

310,000

Accumulated depreciation—machinery & equipment

(85,000)

(76,000)

Patents

42,500

48,000

 

$1,687,300

$1,481,500

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 332,300

$ 367,900

Dividends payable

13,000

10,000

Salaries payable

30,200

34,600

Mortgage note payable, due 2015

90,000

Bonds payable

154,000

Common stock, $1 par

24,000

20,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

200,000

50,000

Retained earnings

997,800

845,000

 

$1,687,300

$1,481,500

An examination of the income statement and the accounting records revealed the following additional information applicable to 2008:

a. Net income, $204,800.

b. Depreciation expense reported on the income statement: buildings, $20,500; machinery and equipment, $9,000.

c. Patent amortization reported on the income statement, $5,500.

d. A building was constructed for $230,000.

e. A mortgage note for $90,000 was issued for cash.

f. 4,000 shares of common stock were issued at $38.50 in exchange for the bonds payable.

g. Cash dividends declared, $52,000.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of reston supply co at december 31 2008 and 2007 is as 646153

The comparative balance sheet of Reston Supply Co. at December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2008

Dec. 31, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 45,500

$ 51,200

Accounts receivable (net)

106,700

92,400

Inventories

139,200

131,200

Prepaid expenses

2,800

4,000

Land

150,000

210,000

Buildings

300,000

150,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

(60,200)

(55,500)

Equipment

100,100

80,300

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(20,200)

(24,500)

 

$763,900

$639,100

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 90,000

$ 95,600

Income tax payable

4,000

3,200

Bonds payable

50,000

0

Common stock, $1 par

33,000

30,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

180,000

120,000

Retained earnings

406,900

390,300

 

$763,900

$639,100

The noncurrent asset, noncurrent liability, and stockholders’ equity accounts for 2008 are as follows:

ACCOUNT Land

ACCOUNT NO.

Date

Item

 

Debit

Credit

Balance

Debit

Credit

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

210,000

 

Apr.

20

Realized $69,000 cash

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

from sale

 

 

60,000

150,000

 

 

ACCOUNT Buildings

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

150,000

 

Apr.

20

Acquired for cash

 

150,000

 

300,000

 

 

ACCOUNT Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

55,500

Dec.

31

Depreciation for year

 

 

4,700

 

60,200

 

ACCOUNT Equipment

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

80,300

 

 

26

Discarded, no salvage

 

 

10,000

70,300

 

Aug.

11

Purchased for cash

 

29,800

 

100,100

 

 

ACCOUNT Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

24,500

 

26

Equipment discarded

10,000

 

 

 

14,500

Dec.

31

Depreciation for year

 

 

5,700

 

20,200

                 

 

ACCOUNT Bonds Payable ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

May

1

Issued 20 year bonds

 

50,000

 

50,000

 

ACCOUNT Common Stock, $1 par

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

30,000

Dec.

7

Issued 3,000 shares of common

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

stock for $21 per share

 

 

3,000

 

33,000

 

ACCOUNT Paid In Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

120,000

Dec.

7

Issued 3,000 shares of common

 

 

 

 

 

 

stock for $21 per share

 

60,000

 

180,000

               

 

ACCOUNT Retained Earnings

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

390,300

Dec.

31

Net income

 

28,600

 

418,900

 

31

Cash dividends

12,000

 

 

406,900

               

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of green earth lawn and garden inc for december 31 200 646154

The comparative balance sheet of Green Earth Lawn and Garden Inc. for December 31, 2008 and 2009, is as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2009

Dec. 31, 2008

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 137,900

$142,300

Accounts receivable (net)

206,800

190,500

Inventories

290,500

284,100

Investments

0

90,000

Land

200,000

0

Equipment

255,000

205,000

Accumulated depreciation

(100,300)

(76,700)

 

$ 989,900

$835,200

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 224,900

$201,400

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

14,100

16,500

Dividends payable

21,000

19,000

Common stock, $1 par

10,000

8,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

200,000

100,000

Retained earnings

519,900

490,300

 

$ 989,900

$835,200

The income statement for the year ended December 31, 2009, is as follows:

Sales

 

$940,000

Cost of merchandise sold

 

489,300

Gross profit

 

$450,700

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$ 23,600

 

Other operating expenses

278,900

 

Total operating expenses

 

302,500

Operating income

 

$148,200

Other income:

 

 

Gain on sale of investments

 

32,000

Income before income tax

 

$180,200

Income tax expense

 

62,300

Net income

 

$117,900

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

b. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

c. The investments were sold for $122,000 cash.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $88,300 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the direct method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of oak and tile flooring co for june 30 2008 and 2007 646155

The comparative balance sheet of Oak and Tile Flooring Co. for June 30, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

 

June 30, 2008

June 30, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 34,700

$ 23,500

Accounts receivable (net)

101,600

92,300

Inventories

146,300

142,100

Investments

0

50,000

Land

145,000

0

Equipment

215,000

175,500

Accumulated depreciation

(48,600)

(41,300)

 

$594,000

$442,100

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$100,900

$ 95,200

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

15,000

13,200

Dividends payable

12,500

10,000

Common stock, $1 par

56,000

50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

220,000

100,000

Retained earnings

189,600

173,700

 

$594,000

$442,100

The income statement for the year ended June 30, 2008, is as follows:

Sales

 

$963,400

Cost of merchandise sold

 

662,100

Gross profit

 

$301,300

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$ 7,300

 

Other operating expenses

195,000

 

Total operating expenses

 

202,300

Operating income

 

$ 99,000

Other expenses:

 

 

Loss on sale of investments

 

(5,000)

Income before income tax

 

$ 94,000

Income tax expense

 

28,100

Net income

 

$ 65,900

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

b. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

c. The investments were sold for $45,000 cash.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $50,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the direct method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of gold medal sporting goods inc for december 31 2008 646156

The comparative balance sheet of Gold Medal Sporting Goods Inc. for December 31, 2008 and 2007, is shown as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2008

Dec. 31, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 391,100

$ 366,200

Accounts receivable (net)

142,400

130,600

Inventories

401,100

385,700

Investments

0

150,000

Land

205,000

0

Equipment

440,700

345,700

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(104,000)

(92,500)

 

$1,476,300

$1,285,700

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 267,800

$ 253,100

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

26,400

32,900

Dividends payable

15,000

12,000

Common stock, $10 par

80,000

60,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

300,000

175,000

Retained earnings

787,100

752,700

 

$1,476,300

$1,285,700

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. The investments were sold for $175,000 cash.

b. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

c. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $94,400 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.

f. There was a $60,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of rise n shine juice co at december 31 2008 and 2007 646158

The comparative balance sheet of Rise N’ Shine Juice Co. at December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2008

Dec. 31, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 392,300

$ 412,300

Accounts receivable (net)

354,200

325,600

Inventories

542,100

497,000

Prepaid expenses

12,500

15,000

Land

135,000

205,000

Buildings

625,000

385,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

(174,600)

(163,400)

Equipment

218,900

194,300

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(60,400)

(67,800)

 

$2,045,000

$1,803,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 394,200

$ 409,500

Bonds payable

115,000

0

Common stock, $1 par

58,000

50,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

400,000

240,000

Retained earnings

1,077,800

1,103,500

 

$2,045,000

$1,803,000

The noncurrent asset, noncurrent liability, and stockholders’ equity accounts for 2008 are as follows:

ACCOUNT Land

ACCOUNT NO.

Date

Item

 

Debit

Credit

Balance

Debit

Credit

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

205,000

 

Apr.

20

Realized $64,000 cash

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

from sale

 

 

70,000

135,000

 

 

ACCOUNT Buildings

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

385,000

 

Apr.

20

Acquired for cash

 

240,000

 

625,000

 

 

ACCOUNT Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

163,400

Dec.

31

Depreciation for year

 

 

11,200

 

174,600

 

ACCOUNT Equipment

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

194,300

 

 

26

Discarded, no salvage

 

 

20,000

174,300

 

Aug.

11

Purchased for cash

 

44,600

 

218,900

 

 

ACCOUNT Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

67,800

 

26

Equipment discarded

20,000

 

 

 

47,800

Dec.

31

Depreciation for year

 

 

12,600

 

60,400

                 

 

ACCOUNT Bonds Payable ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

May

1

Issued 20 year bonds

 

115,000

 

115,000

 

ACCOUNT Common Stock, $1 Par

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

 

50,000

Dec.

7

Issued 8,000 shares of common

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

stock for $21 per share

 

 

8,000

 

58,000

 

ACCOUNT Paid In Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

ACCOUNT NO.

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

240,000

Dec.

7

Issued 8,000 shares of common

 

 

 

 

 

 

stock for $21 per share

 

160,000

 

400,000

               

 

ACCOUNT Retained Earnings

ACCOUNT NO.

Date

Item

 

Debit

Credit

Balance

Debit

Credit

2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan.

1

Balance

 

 

 

1,103,500

Dec.

31

Net loss

11,700

 

 

1,091,800

 

31

Cash dividends

14,000

 

 

1,077,800

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of home and hearth inc for december 31 2009 and 2008 i 646159

The comparative balance sheet of Home and Hearth Inc. for December 31, 2009 and 2008, is as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2009

Dec. 31, 2008

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 402,100

$ 424,600

Accounts receivable (net)

354,200

342,100

Inventories

631,900

614,200

Investments

0

150,000

Land

325,000

0

Equipment

550,000

425,000

Accumulated depreciation

(152,700)

(125,300)

 

$2,110,500

$1,830,600

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 482,400

$ 467,800

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

39,600

44,200

Dividends payable

5,500

4,000

Common stock, $1 par

24,000

20,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

260,000

120,000

Retained earnings

1,299,000

1,174,600

 

$2,110,500

$1,830,600

The income statement for the year ended December 31, 2009, is as follows:

Sales

 

$3,745,700

Cost of merchandise sold

 

1,532,500

Gross profit

 

$2,213,200

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$ 27,400

 

Other operating expenses

1,936,800

 

Total operating expenses

 

1,964,200

Operating income

 

$ 249,000

Other expense:

 

 

Loss on sale of investments

 

(40,000)

Income before income tax

 

$ 209,000

Income tax expense

 

63,000

Net income

 

$ 146,000

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

b. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

c. The investments were sold for $110,000 cash.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $21,600 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the direct method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of gold medal sporting goods inc for december 31 2008 646160

The comparative balance sheet of Gold Medal Sporting Goods Inc. for December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

Dec. 31, 2008

 

Dec. 31, 2007

Assets

 

 

Cash

$ 391,100

$ 366,200

Accounts receivable (net)

142,400

130,600

Inventories

401,100

385,700

Investments

0

150,000

Land

205,000

0

Equipment

440,700

345,700

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(104,000)

(92,500)

 

$1,476,300

$1,285,700

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 267,800

$ 253,100

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

26,400

32,900

Dividends payable

15,000

12,000

Common stock, $10 par

80,000

60,000

Paid in capital in excess of par—common stock

300,000

175,000

Retained earnings

787,100

752,700

 

$1,476,300

$1,285,700

The income statement for the year ended December 31, 2008, is as follows:

Sales

 

$1,632,500

Cost of merchandise sold

 

908,300

Gross profit

 

$ 724,200

Operating expenses:

 

 

Depreciation expense

$ 11,500

 

Other operating expenses

609,000

 

Total operating expenses

 

620,500

Operating income

 

$ 103,700

Other income:

 

 

Gain on sale of investments

 

25,000

Income before income tax

 

$ 128,700

Income tax expense

 

34,300

Net income

 

$ 94,400

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. The investments were sold for $175,000 cash.

b. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

c. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

d. The common stock was issued for cash.

e. There was a $60,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the direct method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

the retailing division of bargain buyer inc provided the following information on it 646163

The Retailing Division of Bargain Buyer Inc. provided the following information on its cash flow from operations:

Net income

$ 450,000

Increase in accounts receivable

(540,000)

Increase in inventory

(600,000)

Decrease in accounts payable

(90,000)

Depreciation

100,000

Cash flow from operating activities

$(680,000)

The manager of the Retailing Division provided the accompanying memo with this report:

From: Senior Vice President, Retailing Division I am pleased to report that we had earnings of $450,000 over the last period. This resulted in a return on invested capital of 10%, which is near our targets for this division. I have been aggressive in building the revenue volume in the division. As a result, I am happy to report that we have increased the number of new credit card customers as a result of an aggressive marketing campaign. In addition, we have found some excellent merchandise opportunities. Some of our suppliers have made some of their apparel merchandise available at a deep discount. We have purchased as much of these goods as possible in order to improve profitability. I’m also happy to report that our vendor payment problems have improved. We are nearly caught up on our overdue payables balances.

Comment on the senior vice president’s memo in light of the cash flow information.

jabari daniels is the president and majority shareholder of cabinet craft inc a smal 646164

Jabari Daniels is the president and majority shareholder of Cabinet Craft Inc., a small retail store chain. Recently, Daniels submitted a loan application for Cabinet Craft Inc. to Montvale National Bank. It called for a $200,000, 9%, 10 year loan to help finance the construction of a building and the purchase of store equipment, costing a total of $250,000, to enable Cabinet Craft Inc. to open a store in Montvale. Land for this purpose was acquired last year. The bank’s loan officer requested a statement of cash flows in addition to the most recent income statement, balance sheet, and retained earnings statement that Daniels had submitted with the loan application. As a close family friend, Daniels asked you to prepare a statement of cash flows. From the records provided, you prepared the following statement.

Cabinet Craft Inc.

 

 

Statement of Cash Flows

 

 

For the Year Ended December 31, 2008

 

 

Cash flows from operating activities:

 

 

Net income

$ 94,500

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash flow from operating

 

 

activities:

 

 

Depreciation

26,000

 

Gain on sale of investments

(8,000)

 

Changes in current operating assets and liabilities:

 

 

Decrease in accounts receivable

5,000

 

Increase in inventories

(12,000)

 

Increase in accounts payable

8,500

 

Decrease in accrued expenses

(1,200)

 

Net cash flow from operating activities

 

$112,800

Cash flows from investing activities:

 

 

Cash received from investments sold

$ 50,000

 

Less cash paid for purchase of store equipment

(30,000)

 

Net cash flow provided by investing activities

 

20,000

Cash flows from financing activities:

 

 

Cash paid for dividends

$ 35,000

 

Net cash flow used for financing activities

 

(35,000)

Increase in cash

 

$ 97,800

Cash at the beginning of the year

 

34,800

Cash at the end of the year

 

$132,600

Schedule of Noncash Financing and Investing Activities:

 

 

Issued common stock for land

 

$ 75,000

After reviewing the statement, Daniels telephoned you and commented, “Are you sure this statement is right?” Daniels then raised the following questions:

1. “How can depreciation be a cash flow?”

2. “Issuing common stock for the land is listed in a separate schedule. This transaction has nothing to do with cash! Shouldn’t this transaction be eliminated from the statement?”

3. “How can the gain on sale of investments be a deduction from net income in determining the cash flow from operating activities?”

4. “Why does the bank need this statement anyway? They can compute the increase in cash from the balance sheets for the last two years.”

After jotting down Daniels’ questions, you assured him that this statement was “right.” However, to alleviate Daniels’ concern, you arranged a meeting for the following day.

a. How would you respond to each of Daniels’ questions?

b. Do you think that the statement of cash flows enhances the chances of Cabinet Craft Inc. receiving the loan? Discuss.

burrow corp rsquo s quality report for october 2010 showed the following information 646193

Burrow Corp.’s quality report for October 2010 showed the following information:

Profit for a good unit

$76

Profit for a defective unit

$44

Cost to rework a defective unit

$14

Cost to process a returned unit

$20

Total prevention cost

$54,000

Total appraisal cost

$32,000

Litigation related to product failure

$140,000

Opportunity cost of lost customers while litigation is being settled

$100,000

Total defective units

4,000

Number of units reworked

2,800

Number of customer units returned

1,300

Required:

Compute the following:

a. Profit lost by selling unreworked defects

b. Total rework cost

c. Cost of processing customer returns

d. Total failure cost

e. Total quality cost

what is meant by the term quality in defining quality from what two perspectives can 646194

  1. What is meant by the term quality? In defining quality, from what two perspectives can a definition be formulated? Why are both important?
  2. In conducting activity analyses, the presence of certain activities indicates low production process quality. List five of these activities.
  3. Compare and contrast the eight characteristics that constitute overall quality from the customer’s perspective with the three additional characteristics that constitute service quality from the customer’s perspective.
  4. Locate a well described product on the Internet. Discuss how that product exemplifies the eight overall quality characteristics. Prepare a balanced scorecard for this product assuming that its manufacturer has a total quality management strategy.
  5. Describe four types of benchmarking. Use the Internet to find a company that has engaged in benchmarking. Describe the type of benchmarking used and the benefits and costs of the company’s experience.

great fender allocates manufacturing overhead to production based on standard direct 646098

Consider the following additional information:

Static budget variable overhead

$ 5,500

Static budget fixed overhead

$22,000

Static budget direct labor hours

550 hours

Static budget number of units

22,000

Great Fender allocates manufacturing overhead to production based on standard direct labor hours. Great Fender reported the following actual results for 2012: actual variable overhead, $4,950; actual fixed overhead, $23,000.

Requirements

1. Compute the variable and fixed overhead variances as guides.

2. Explain why the variances are favorable or unfavorable.

premium allocates manufacturing overhead to production based on standard direct labo 646099

Consider the following additional information:

Static budget variable overhead

$1,600

Static budget fixed overhead

$3,200

Static budget direct labor hours

1,600 hours

Static budget number of units

800

Premium allocates manufacturing overhead to production based on standard direct labor hours. Premium reported the following actual results for 2012: actual variable overhead, $1,900; actual fixed overhead, $3,300.

Requirements

1. Compute the variable and fixed overhead variances.

2. Explain why the variances are favorable or unfavorable.

prepare a standard cost income statement for management through gross profit report 646100

Preparing a standard cost income statement The May 2012 revenue and cost information for Houston Outfitters, Inc., follows:

Sales revenue

$ 540,000

Cost of goods sold (standard)

341,000

Direct materials price variance

1,100 F

Direct materials efficiency variance

6,100 f

Direct labor price variance

4,200U

Direct labor efficiency variance

2,400 F

Variable overhead spending variance

3,300

Fixed overhead volume variance

8,100 F

Fixed overhead spending variance

1,400 U

Variable overhead efficiency variance

1,400U

Requirement

1. Prepare a standard cost income statement for management through gross profit. Report all standard cost variances for management’s use. Has management done a good or poor job of controlling costs? Explain.

compute the price variance and the efficiency variance for direct materials and for 646101

Preparing a flexible budget and computing standard cost variances Preston Recliners manufactures leather recliners and uses flexible budgeting and a standard cost system. Preston allocates overhead based on yards of direct materials. The company’s performance report includes the following selected data:

 

Static Budget
(1,000 recliners)

Actual Results
(980 recliners)

Sales (1,000 recliners X $ 495)

$          495,000

          $465,500

(980 recliners X $ 475)

 

Variable manufacturing costs:

 

 

Direct materials         (6,000 yds @ $8.80/yard)

52,800

 

(6,150 yds @ $8.60/yard)

 

52,890

Direct labor   (10,000 hrs @ $9.20/hour)

92,000

 

(9,600 hrs @ $9.30/hour)

 

89,280

Variable overhead     (6,000 yds @ $5.00/yard)

30,000

 

(6,150 yds @ $6.40/yard)

 

39,360

Fixed manufacturing costs:

 

 

Fixed overhead

60,000

62,000

Total cost of goods sold

          $234,800

          $243,530

Gross profit

            $260,200

             $221,97

Requirements

1. Prepare a flexible budget based on the actual number of recliners sold.

2. Compute the price variance and the efficiency variance for direct materials and for direct labor. For manufacturing overhead, compute the variable overhead spending, variable overhead efficiency, fixed overhead spending, and fixed overhead volume variances.

3. Have Preston’s managers done a good job or a poor job controlling materials, labor, and overhead costs? Why?

4. Describe how Preston’s managers can benefit from the standard costing system.

java intentionally hired more skilled workers during july how did this decision affe 646103

Computing and journalizing standard cost variances Java manufactures coffee mugs that it sells to other companies for customizing with their own logos. Java prepares flexible budgets and uses a standard cost system to control manufacturing costs. The standard unit cost of a coffee mug is based on static budget volume of 60,200 coffee mugs per month:

Direct materials (0.2 lbs @ $0.25 per lb)

 

$ 0.05

Direct labor (3 minutes @ $0.12 per minute)

 

0.36

Manufacturing overhead:

 

 

Variable (3 minutes @ $0.05 per minute)

$ 0.15

 

Fixed (3 minutes @ $0.14 per minute)

0.42

0.57

Total cost per coffee mug

 

$ 0.98

Actual cost and production information for July 2012 follow:

  1. Actual production and sales were 62,900 coffee mugs.
  2. Actual direct materials usage was 10,000 lbs., at an actual price of $0.17 per lb.
  3. Actual direct labor usage was 202,000 minutes at a total cost of $30,300.
  4. Actual overhead cost was $10,000 variable and $30,500 fixed.
  5. Marketing and administrative costs were $115,000.

Requirements

1. Compute the price and efficiency variances for direct materials and direct labor.

2. Journalize the usage of direct materials and the assignment of direct labor, including the related variances.

3. For manufacturing overhead, compute the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances and the fixed overhead spending and volume variances.

4. Journalize the actual manufacturing overhead and the applied manufacturing overhead. Journalize the movement of all production from WIP. Journalize the closing of the manufacturing overhead account.

5. Java intentionally hired more skilled workers during July. How did this decision affect the cost variances? Overall, was the decision wise?

compute the price variance and the efficiency variance for direct materials and for 646105

Preparing a flexible budget and computing standard cost variances Relaxing Recliners manufactures leather recliners and uses flexible budgeting and a standard cost system. Relaxing allocates overhead based on yards of direct materials. The company’s performance report includes the following selected data:

 

Static Budget
(975 recliners)

Actual Results
(955 recliners)

Sales (975 recliners x $505)

$         492,375

 

(955 recliners x $485)

 

$          463,175

Variable manufacturing costs:

 

 

Direct materials       (5,850 yds @ $8.90/yard)

52,065

 

(6,000 yds @ $8.70/yard)

 

52,200

Direct labor         (9,750 hrs @ $9.00/hour)

87,750

 

(9,350 hrs @ $9.10/hour)

 

85,085

Variable overhead (5,850 yds @ $5.30/yard)

31,005

 

(6,000 yds @ $6.70/yard)

 

40,200

Fixed manufacturing costs:

 

 

Fixed overhead

60,255

62,255

Total cost of goods sold

$          231,075

$          239,740

Gross profit

$          261,300

$          223,435

Requirements

1. Prepare a flexible budget based on the actual number of recliners sold.

2. Compute the price variance and the efficiency variance for direct materials and for direct labor. For manufacturing overhead, compute the variable overhead spending, variable overhead efficiency, fixed overhead spending, and fixed overhead volume variances.

3. Have Relaxing’s managers done a good job or a poor job controlling materials, labor, and overhead costs? Why?

4. Describe how Relaxing’s managers can benefit from the standard costing system.

what is network rsquo s static budget variance explain why the income statement perf 646106

Preparing an income statement performance report Network Technologies manufactures capacitors for cellular base stations and other communication applications. The company’s July 2012 flexible budget income statement shows output levels of 7,000, 8,500, and 10,500 units. The static budget was based on expected sales of 8,500 units.

NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES
Flexible Budget Income Statement
Month Ended July 31, 2012

 

Per Unit

By Units (Capacitors)

 

 

7,000

8,500

10,500

Sales revenue

$25

$   175,000

$    212,500

$    262,500

Variable expenses

$13

91,000

110,500

136,500

Contribution margin

 

 

$     84,000

$    102,000

$    126,000

Fixed expenses

 

56,000

56,000

56,000

Operating income

 

$     28,000

$      46,000

$      70,000

The company sold 10,500 units during July, and its actual operating income was as follows:

NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES

Income Statement

Month Ended July 31, 2012

Sales revenue

$269,500

Variable expenses

141,500

Contribution margin

$128,000

Fixed expenses

57,000

Operating income

$71,000

Requirements

1. Prepare an income statement performance report for July 2012.

2. What was the effect on Network’s operating income of selling 2,000 units more than the static budget level of sales?

3. What is Network’s static budget variance? Explain why the income statement performance report provides more useful information to Network’s managers than the simple static budget variance. What insights can Network’s managers draw from this performance report?

victor corporation s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities wa 646109

Victor Corporation’s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities was as follows:

 

Dec. 31, 2009

Dec. 31, 2008

Accounts receivable

$ 6,500

$ 4,900

Inventory

12,300

15,000

Accounts payable

4,800

5,200

Dividends payable

5,000

4,000

Adjust net income of $70,000 for changes in operating assets and liabilities to arrive at cash flows from operating activities.

the comparative balance sheet of dowling company for december 31 2008 and 2007 is as 646112

The comparative balance sheet of Dowling Company for December 31, 2008 and 2007, is as follows:

Assets

2008

2007

Cash

$140,350

$95,900

Accounts receivable (net)

95,300

102,300

Inventories

165,200

157,900

Prepaid expenses

6,240

5,860

Investments (long term)

35,700

84,700

Land

75,000

90,000

Buildings

375,000

260,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

71,300

58,300

Machinery and equipment

428,300

428,300

Accumulated depreciation—machinery and equipment

148,500

138,000

Patents

58,000

65,000

Total assets

$1,159,290

$1,093,660

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

 

 

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$43,500

$46,700

Accrued expenses (operating expenses)

14,000

12,500

Income taxes payable

7,900

8,400

Dividends payable

14,000

10,000

Mortgage note payable, due 2019

40,000

0

Bonds payable

150,000

250,000

Common stock, $30 par

450,000

375,000

Excess of issue price over par—common stock

66,250

41,250

Retained earnings

373,640

349,810

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$1,159,290

$1,093,660

The income statement for Dowling Company is shown here:

Sales

 

1,100,000

Cost of merchandise sold

 

710,000

Gross profit

 

390,000

Operating expenses:

   

Depreciation expense

23,500

 

Patent amortization

7,000

 

Other operating expenses

196,000

 

Total operating expenses

 

226,500

Income from operations

 

163,500

Other income:

   

Gain on sale of investments

$11,000

 

Other expense:

   

Interest expense

$26,000

$15,000

Income before income tax

 

148,500

Income tax expense

 

50,000

Net income

 

98,500

An examination of the accounting records revealed the following additional information applicable to 2008:

a. Land costing $15,000 was sold for $15,000.

b. A mortgage note was issued for $40,000.

c. A building costing $115,000 was constructed.

d. 2,500 shares of common stock were issued at 40 in exchange for the bonds payable.

e. Cash dividends declared were $74,670.

Instructions

1. Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities.

2. Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities.

the total amount reported for cash flows from operating activities in the statement 646113

The net income reported on the income statement for the year was $55,000, and depreciation of fixed assets for the year was $22,000. The balances of the current asset and current liability accounts at the beginning and end of the year are shown at the top of the following page.

 

End

Beginning

Cash

$ 65,000

$ 70,000

Accounts receivable

100,000

90,000

Inventories

145,000

150,000

Prepaid expenses

7,500

8,000

Accounts payable

 

 

(merchandise creditors)

51,000

58,000

The total amount reported for cash flows from operating activities in the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method, is:

A. $33,000.

B. $55,000.

C. $65,500.

D. $77,000.

if salaries payable was 75 000 at the beginning of the year and 60 000 at the end of 646115

  • A retail business, using the accrual method of accounting, owed merchandise creditors (accounts payable) $290,000 at the beginning of the year and $315,000 at the end of the year. How would the $25,000 increase be used to adjust net income in determining the amount of cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method? Explain.
  • If salaries payable was $75,000 at the beginning of the year and $60,000 at the end of the year, should $15,000 be added to or deducted from income to determine the amount of cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method? Explain.
  • In a recent annual report, eBay Inc. reported that during the year it issued stock of $128 million for acquisitions. How would this be reported on the statement of cash flows?
  • sage corporation s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities was 646122

    Sage Corporation’s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities was as follows:

     

    Dec. 31, 2008

    Dec. 31, 2007

    Accounts receivable

    $12,000

    $14,000

    Inventory

    9,000

    6,500

    Accounts payable

    8,500

    7,200

    Dividends payable

    24,000

    26,000

    Adjust net income of $110,000 for changes in operating assets and liabilities to arrive at cash flows from operating activities.

    lanier corporation s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities wa 646123

    Lanier Corporation’s comparative balance sheet for current assets and liabilities was as follows:

     

    Dec. 31, 2008

    Dec. 31, 2007

    Accounts receivable

    $32,500

    $25,000

    Inventory

    69,000

    48,000

    Accounts payable

    51,500

    32,000

    Dividends payable

    15,000

    16,400

    Adjust net income of $290,000 for changes in operating assets and liabilities to arrive at cash flows from operating activities.

    state the effect cash receipt or payment and amount of each of the following transac 646129

    State the effect (cash receipt or payment and amount) of each of the following transactions, considered individually, on cash flows:

    a. Sold 5,000 shares of $30 par common stock for $90 per share.

    b. Sold equipment with a book value of $42,500 for $36,000.

    c. Purchased land for $250,000 cash.

    d. Purchased 5,000 shares of $30 par common stock as treasury stock at $60 per share.

    e. Sold a new issue of $100,000 of bonds at 98.

    f. Paid dividends of $1.50 per share. There were 40,000 shares issued and 5,000 shares of treasury stock.

    g. Retired $500,000 of bonds, on which there was $2,500 of unamortized discount, for $500,500.

    h. Purchased a building by paying $40,000 cash and issuing a $90,000 mortgage note payable.

    identify the type of cash flow activity for each of the following events operating i 646130

    Identify the type of cash flow activity for each of the following events (operating, investing, or financing):

    a. Issued preferred stock.

    g. Issued bonds.

    b. Net income.

    h. Issued common stock.

    c. Sold equipment.

    i. Sold long term investments.

    d. Purchased treasury stock.

    j. Paid cash dividends.

    e. Purchased buildings.

    k. Redeemed bonds.

    f. Purchased patents.

     

    indicate whether each of the following would be added to or deducted from net income 646131

    Indicate whether each of the following would be added to or deducted from net income in determining net cash flow from operating activities by the indirect method:

    a. Gain on retirement of long term debt

    h. Increase in notes receivable due in

    b. Increase in merchandise inventory

    90 days from customers

    c. Amortization of patent

    i. Decrease in accounts payable

    d. Decrease in accounts receivable

    j. Loss on disposal of fixed assets

    e. Depreciation of fixed assets

    k. Increase in notes payable due in

    f. Decrease in prepaid expenses

    90 days to vendors

    g. Decrease in salaries payable

     

    the net income reported on the income statement for the current year was 92 000 depr 646132

    The net income reported on the income statement for the current year was $92,000. Depreciation recorded on store equipment for the year amounted to $18,600. Balances of the current asset and current liability accounts at the beginning and end of the year are as follows:

     

    End of Year

    Beginning of Year

    Cash

    $46,700

    $44,200

    Accounts receivable (net)

    32,300

    31,100

    Merchandise inventory

    54,800

    56,700

    Prepaid expenses

    4,000

    3,500

    Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

    46,000

    42,900

    Wages payable

    21,400

    23,600

    Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method.

    prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash fl 646133

    The net income reported on the income statement for the current year was $165,300. Depreciation recorded on equipment and a building amounted to $46,700 for the year. Balances of the current asset and current liability accounts at the beginning and end of the year are as follows:

     

    End of Year

    Beginning of Year

    Cash

    $ 42,000

    $ 43,500

    Accounts receivable (net)

    65,400

    69,200

    Inventories

    125,900

    115,100

    Prepaid expenses

    5,800

    6,400

    Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

    61,400

    64,200

    Salaries payable

    8,300

    8,000

    a. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method.

    b. If the direct method had been used, would the net cash flow from operating activities have been the same? Explain.

    on the basis of the details of the following fixed asset account indicate the items 646138

    On the basis of the details of the following fixed asset account, indicate the items to be reported on the statement of cash flows:

    ACCOUNT Land

     

     

     

     

    ACCOUNT NO.

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Balance

     

    Date

     

    Item

    Debit

    Credit

    Debit

    Credit

    2008

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Jan.

    1

    Balance

     

     

    900,000

     

    Feb.

    5

    Purchased for cash

    400,000

     

    1,300,000

     

    Oct.

    30

    Sold for $365,000

     

    250,000

    1,050,000

     

    which company has the lowest breakeven point in sales dollars 645953

    Calculating cost volume profit elements The budgets of four companies yield the following information:

     

    Company

         
     

    Blue

    Red

    Green

    Yellow

    Sales revenue

    $ 960,000

    $ (4)

    $ 770,000

    $ (10)

    Variable costs

    (1)

    132,000

    462,000

    162,000

    Fixed costs

    (2)

    145,000

    220,000

    (11)

    Operating income (loss)

    $ 32,000

    $ (5)

    $ (7)

    $ 93,000

    Units sold

    160,000

    11,000

    (8)

    (12)

    Contribution margin per unit

    $ 2.70

    $ (6)

    $ 77.00

    $ 16.00

    Contribution margin ratio

    (3)

    0.70

    (9)

    0.40

    Requirements

    1. Fill in the blanks for each missing value. (Round the contribution margin per unit to the nearest cent.)

    2. Z

    3. What causes the low breakeven point?

    prepare england productions rsquo contribution margin income statement for 150 shows 645954

    Break even sales; sales to earn a target operating income; contribution margin income statement  England Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 1,300 tickets at $60 per ticket. There are 150 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 65, each earning a net average of $340 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is a program printing cost of $8 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $728,000.

    Requirements

    1. Compute revenue and variable costs for each show.

    2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of shows England Productions must perform each year to break even.

    3. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $5,687,500. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning.

    4. Prepare England Productions’ contribution margin income statement for 150 shows performed in 2012.

    Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

    suppose that the average revenue national earns increases to 1 200 per trade compute 645956

    Computing breakeven sales and sales needed to earn a target operating income; graphing CVP relationships; sensitivity analysis  National Investor Group is opening an office in Portland. Fixed monthly costs are office rent ($8,500), depreciation on office furniture ($2,000), utilities ($2,100), special telephone lines ($1,100), a connection with an online brokerage service ($2,800), and the salary of a financial planner ($4,500). Variable costs include payments to the financial planner (8% of revenue), advertising (13% of revenue), supplies and postage (3% of revenue), and usage fees for the telephone lines and computerized brokerage service (6% of revenue).

    Requirements

    1. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute National’s breakeven revenue in dollars. If the average trade leads to $1,000 in revenue for National, how many trades must be made to break even?

    2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the dollar revenues needed to earn a target monthly operating income of $12,600.

    3. Graph National’s CVP relationships. Assume that an average trade leads to $1,000 in revenue for National. Show the breakeven point, the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, the total cost line, the operating loss area, the operating income area, and the sales in units (trades) and dollars when monthly operating income of $12,600 is earned.

    4. Suppose that the average revenue National earns increases to $1,200 per trade. Compute the new breakeven point in trades. How does this affect the breakeven point?

    determine delectable rsquo s monthly breakeven point in dozens of plain donuts and c 645957

    Calculating breakeven point for two products; margin of safety The contribution margin income statement of Delectable Donuts for August 2012 follows:

    DELECTABLE DONUTS
    Contribution Margin Income Statement
    For the Month of August 2012

    Sales revenue

     

    $ 150,000

    Variable costs:

     

     

     

     

     

    Cost of goods sold

    15,000

     

    Marketing costs

    4,000

    $ 90,000

    Contribution margin

    $ 41,000

    60,000

    Marketing costs

    12,600

    $ 39,600

    Operating income

    37,800

    50,400

    Delectable sells four dozen plain donuts for every dozen custard filled donuts. A dozen plain donuts sells for $4, with total variable cost of $1.60 per dozen. A dozen custard filled donuts sells for $5, with total variable cost of $2 per dozen.

    Requirements

    1. Calculate the weighted average contribution margin.

    2. Determine Delectable’s monthly breakeven point in dozens of plain donuts and custard filled donuts. Prove your answer by preparing a summary contribution margin income statement at the breakeven level of sales. Show only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

    3. Compute Delectable’s margin of safety in dollars for August 2012.

    4. If Delectable can increase monthly sales revenue from August’s level by 20%, what will operating income be? (The sales mix remains unchanged.)

    use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year 645959

    Breakeven sales; sales to earn a target operating income; contribution margin income statement British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500.

    Requirements

    1. Compute revenue and variable costs for each show.

    2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of shows British Productions must perform each year to break even.

    3. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $4,128,000. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning.

    4. Prepare British Productions’ contribution margin income statement for 155 shows performed in 2012. Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

    use the contribution margin ratio cvp formula to compute diversified rsquo s breakev 645961

    Computing breakeven sales and sales needed to earn a target operating income; graphing CVP relationships; sensitivity analysis Diversified Investor Group is opening an office in Boise. Fixed monthly costs are office rent ($8,100), depreciation on office furniture ($1,600), utilities ($2,500), special telephone lines ($1,200), a connection with an online brokerage service ($2,700), and the salary of a financial planner ($4,900). Variable costs include payments to the financial planner (8% of revenue), advertising (14% of revenue), supplies and postage (1% of revenue), and usage fees for the telephone lines and computerized brokerage service (7% of revenue).

    Requirements

    1. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute Diversified’s breakeven revenue in dollars. If the average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified, how many trades must be made to break even?

    2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the dollar revenues needed to earn a target monthly operating income of $10,500.

    3. Graph Diversified’s CVP relationships. Assume that an average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified. Show the breakeven point, the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, the total cost line, the operating loss area, the operating income area, and the sales in units (trades) and dollars when monthly operating income of $10,500 is earned.

    4. Suppose that the average revenue Diversified earns increases to $1,000 per trade. Compute the new breakeven point in trades. How does this affect the breakeven point?

    calculating breakeven point for two products margin of safety the contribution margi 645962

    Calculating breakeven point for two products; margin of safety The contribution margin income statement of Dandy Donuts for May 2012 follows:

    DANDY DONUTS
    Contribution Margin Income Statement
    For the Month of May 2012

    Sales revenue

     

    $ 190,000

    Variable costs:

     

     

    Cost of goods sold

    $ 56,000

     

    Marketing costs

    20,000

     

    General and administrative costs

    19,000

    95,000

    Contribution margin

     

    $ 95,000

    Fixed costs:

     

     

    Marketing costs

    27,300

     

    General and administrative costs

    50,700

    78,000

    Operating income

     

    $ 17,000

    Dandy sells three dozen plain donuts for every dozen custard filled donuts. A dozen plain donuts sells for $6, with a variable cost of $3 per dozen. A dozen custard filled donuts sells for $8, with a variable cost of $4 per dozen.

    Requirements

    1. Calculate the weighted average contribution margin.

    2. Determine Dandy’s monthly breakeven point in dozens of plain donuts and custard filled donuts. Prove your answer by preparing a summary contribution margin income statement at the breakeven level of sales. Show only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

    3. Compute Dandy’s margin of safety in dollars for May 2012.

    4. If Dandy can increase the monthly sales revenue from May’s level by 25%, what will operating income be? (The sales mix remains unchanged.)

    what factors should the homs consider before they make their decision as to whether 645965

    Steve and Linda Hom live in Bartlesville, Oklahoma. Two years ago, they visited Thailand. Linda, a professional chef, was impressed with the cooking methods and the spices used in the Thai food. Bartlesville does not have a Thai restaurant, and the Homs are contemplating opening one. Linda would supervise the cooking, and Steve would leave his current job to be the maitre d’. The restaurant would serve dinner Tuesday–Saturday. Steve has noticed a restaurant for lease. The restaurant has seven tables, each of which can seat four. Tables can be moved together for a large party. Linda is planning two seatings per evening, and the restaurant will be open 50 weeks per year.The Homs have drawn up the following estimates:

    Average revenue, including beverages and dessert

    $ 45 per meal

    Average cost of food

    $ 15 per meal

    Chef’s and dishwasher’s salaries

    $ 5,100 per month

    Rent (premises, equipment)

    $ 4,000 per month

    Cleaning (linen and premises)

    $ 800 per month

    Replacement of dishes, cutlery, glasses

    $ 300 per month

    Utilities, advertising, telephone

    $ 2,300 per month

    Requirements

    1. Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant.

    2. Also compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year.

    3. How many meals must the Homs serve each night to earn their target income of $75,600?

    4. What factors should the Homs consider before they make their decision as to whether to open the restaurant or not?

    why might the consequences not be as bad as you fear should barnhill take any respon 645966

    You have just begun your summer internship at Omni Instruments. The company supplies sterilized surgical instruments for physicians. To expand sales, Omni is considering paying a commission to its sales force. The controller, Matthew Barnhill, asks you to compute: (1) the new breakeven sales figure, and (2) the operating profit if sales increase 15% under the new sales commission plan. He thinks you can handle this task because you learned CVP analysis in your accounting class.

    You spend the next day collecting information from the accounting records, performing the analysis, and writing a memo to explain the results. The company president is pleased with your memo. You report that the new sales commission plan will lead to a significant increase in operating income and only a small increase in breakeven sales. The following week, you realize that you made an error in the CVP analysis. You overlooked the sales personnel’s $2,800 monthly salaries and you did not include this fixed marketing cost in your computations. You are not sure what to do. If you tell Matthew Barnhill of your mistake, he will have to tell the president. In this case, you are afraid Omni might not offer you permanent employment after your internship.

    Requirements

    1. How would your error affect breakeven sales and operating income under the proposed sales commission plan? Could this cause the president to reject the sales commission proposal?

    2. Consider your ethical responsibilities. Is there a difference between: (a) initially making an error, and (b) subsequently failing to inform the controller?3. Suppose you tell Matthew Barnhill of the error in your analysis. Why might the consequences not be as bad as you fear? Should Barnhill take any responsibility for your error? What could Barnhill have done differently?

    4. After considering all the factors, should you inform Barnhill or simply keep quiet?

    although this fraud pertains to individuals how do businesses make sure they do not 645967

    Amanda Jackson loved reading obituaries. She was retired, but she had worked many bookkeeping jobs in her day and had made herself an expert in creating false invoices and opening bank accounts for fake companies. The scam was easy. When someone dies, the whole family is in grief, and one of the family members must clean up the deceased person’s paperwork, close The Homs have drawn up the following estimates: out accounts, pay the last bills, etc. If the now deceased person had ordered a pricey box set of classical music CDs, or had his ventilation system cleaned out, or even gotten therapeutic massages, ho would bother questioning the bill? Sometimes the families of the deceased person paid Amanda’s fake bills, and sometimes they didn’t, but nobody ever looked any further. Yes, Amanda Jackson loved reading obituaries.

    Requirements

    1. Although this fraud pertains to individuals, how do businesses make sure they do not pay fake invoices?

    2. If a person dies, is anyone liable for paying the remaining bills of the deceased?

    fastpack manufacturing produces filament packaging tape in 2014 fastpack produced an 645968

    FASTPACK Manufacturing produces filament packaging tape. In 2014, FASTPACK produced and sold 15,000,000 rolls of tape. The company has recently expanded its capacity, so it now can produce up to 30,000,000 rolls per year. FASTPACK’s accounting records show the following results from 2014:

    Sale price per roll

    $ 3.00

    Variable manufacturing costs per roll

    $ 2.00

    Variable marketing and administrative costs per roll

    $ 0.50

    Total fixed manufacturing overhead costs

    $8,400,000

    Total fixed marketing and administrative costs

    $1,100,000

    Sales

    15,000,000 rolls

    Production

    15,000,000 rolls

    There were no beginning or ending inventories in 2014.

    In January 2015, FASTPACK hired a new president, Kevin McDaniel. McDaniel has a one year contract that specifies he will be paid 10% of FASTPACK’s 2015 absorption costing operating income, instead of a salary. In 2015, McDaniel must make two major decisions:

    ?Should FASTPACK undertake a major advertising campaign? This campaign would raise sales to 24,000,000 rolls. This is the maximum level of sales FASTPACK can expect to make in the near future. The ad campaign would add an additional $2,300,000 in fixed marketing and administrative costs. Without the campaign, sales will be 15,000,000 rolls.

    ?How many rolls of tape will FASTPACK produce? At the end of the year, FASTPACK’s Board of Directors will evaluate McDaniel’s performance and decide whether to offer him a contract for the following year.

    Requirements

    Within your group, form two subgroups. The first subgroup assumes the role of Kevin McDaniel, FASTPACK’s new president. The second subgroup assumes the role of FASTPACK’s Board of Directors. McDaniel will meet with the Board of Directors shortly after the end of 2014 to decide whether he will remain at FASTPACK. Most of your effort should be devoted to advance preparation for this meeting. Each subgroup should meet separately to prepare for the meeting between the Board and McDaniel.

    Kevin McDaniel should

    1. compute FASTPACK’s 2014 operating income.

    2. decide whether to adopt the advertising campaign. Prepare a memo to the Board of Directors explaining this decision. Give this memo to the Board of Directors as soon as possible (before the joint meeting).

    3. assume FASTPACK adopts the advertising campaign. Decide how many rolls of tape to produce in 2015.

    4. (given the response to Requirement 3) prepare an absorption costing income statement for the year ended December 31, 2015, ending with operating income before bonus. Then compute the bonus separately. The variable cost per unit and the total fixed costs (with the exception of the advertising campaign) remain the same as in 2014. Give this income statement and bonus computation to the Board of Directors as soon as possible (before the meeting with the Board).

    5. decide whether he wishes to remain at FASTPACK for another year. He currently has an offer from another company. The contract with the other company is identical to the one he currently has with FASTPACK—he will be paid 10% of absorption costing operating income instead of a salary.

    The Board of Directors should

    1. compute FASTPACK’s 2014 operating income.

    2. determine whether FASTPACK should adopt the advertising campaign.

    3. determine how many rolls of tape FASTPACK should produce in 2015.

    4. evaluate McDaniel’s performance, based on his decisions and the information he provided the Board. (Hint: You may want to prepare a variable costing income statement.)

    5. evaluate the contract’s bonus provision. Is the Board satisfied with this provision? If so, explain why. If not, recommend how it should be changed. After McDaniel has given the Board his memo and income statement, and after the Board has had a chance to evaluate McDaniel’s performance, McDaniel and the Board should meet. The purpose of the meeting is to decide whether it is in their mutual interest for McDaniel to remain with FASTPACK, and if so, the terms of the contract FASTPACK will offer McDaniel.

    compute price and efficiency variances for direct materials direct labor and variabl 646080

    Smart Touch sold 10,000 DVDs in June. Suppose Smart Touch had sold 7,000 DVDs instead of 10,000 and that actual costs were as follows:

    Direct materials (vinyl)

    7,400 square feet @ $2.00 per square foot

    Direct labor

    2,740 hours @ $10.00 per hour

    Variable overhead

    $5,400

    Fixed overhead

    $11,900

    Requirements

    1. Given these new data, prepare an exhibit similar to. Ignore marketing and administrative expense.

    2. Compute price and efficiency variances for direct materials, direct labor, and variable overhead. Compute the spending and volume variances for fixed overhead.

    majornet rsquo s static budget predicted production and sales of 100 connectors in a 646081

    MajorNet Systems is a start up company that makes connectors for high speed Internet connections. The company has budgeted variable costs of $145 for each connector and fixed costs of $7,500 per month. MajorNet’s static budget predicted production and sales of 100 connectors in August, but the company actually produced and sold only 84 connectors at a total cost of $21,000.

    1. MajorNet’s total flexible budget cost for 84 connectors per month is

    a. $14,500.

    b. $12,180.

    c. $19,680.

    d. $21,000.

    2. MajorNet’s sales volume variance for total costs is

    a. $1,320 U.

    b. $1,320 F.

    c. $2,320 U.

    d. $2,320 F.

    3. MajorNet’s flexible budget variance for total costs is

    a. $1,320 U.

    b. $1,320 F.

    c. $2,320 U.

    d. $2,320 F.

    4. MajorNet Systems’ managers could set direct labor standards based on

    a. time and motion studies.

    b. continuous improvement.

    c. benchmarking.

    d. past actual performance.

    e. Items a, b, c, and d are all correct.

    the journal entry to record majornet rsquo s use of direct labor in august is which 646083

    The journal entry to record MajorNet’s use of direct labor in August is which of the following?

    a.

    Manufacturing wages

     

    Direct labor efficiency variance

     

    Work in process inventory

    b.

    Work in process inventory

     

    Direct labor efficiency variance

     

    Manufacturing wages

    c.

    Work in process inventory

     

    Direct labor efficiency variance

     

    Manufacturing wages

    d.

    Manufacturing wages

     

    Direct labor efficiency variance

     

    Work in process inventory

    calculate the variable overhead spending variance for frontgrade 646084

    FrontGrade Systems allocates manufacturing overhead based on machine hours. Each connector should require 11 machine hours. According to the static budget, FrontGrade expected to incur the following:

    1,100 machine hours per month (100 connectors * 11 machine hours per connector)

    $5,500 in variable manufacturing overhead costs

    $8,250 in fixed manufacturing overhead costs

    During August, FrontGrade actually used 1,000 machine hours to make 110 connectors and spent $5,600 in variable manufacturing costs and $8,300 in fixed manufacturing overhead costs.

    1. FrontGrade’s predetermined standard variable manufacturing overhead rate is

    a. $5.00 per machine hour.

    b. $5.50 per machine hour.

    c. $7.50 per machine hour.

    d. $12.50 per machine hour.

    2. Calculate the variable overhead spending variance for FrontGrade.

    a. $450 F

    b. $600 U

    c. $1,050 F

    d. $1,650 F

    3. Calculate the variable overhead efficiency variance for FrontGrade.

    a. $450 F

    b. $600 U

    c. $1,050 F

    d. $1,650 F

    the difference arising only because the number of units actually sold differs from t 646085

    Matching terms Consider the following terms: Consider the following definitions:

    1. Flexible Budget
    2. Flexible Budget Variance
    3. Sales Volume Variance
    4. Static Budget
    5. Variance

    1. A summarized budget for several levels of volume that separates variable costs from fixed costs.

    2. The budget prepared for only one level of sales volume.

    3. The difference between an actual amount and the budget.

    4. The difference arising because the company actually earned more or less revenue, or incurred more or less cost, than expected for the actual level of output.

    5. The difference arising only because the number of units actually sold differs from the static budget units.

    Requirement

    1. Match each term to the correct definition.

    measures whether the quantity of materials or labor used to make the actual number o 646086

    Consider the following terms:

    Requirement

    1. Match each term to the correct definition.

    Consider the following definitions:

    1. Benchmarking
    2. Efficiency Variance
    3. Fixed Overhead Spending Variance
    4. Price Variance
    5. Fixed Overhead Volume Variance
    6. Standard Cost

    1. Measures whether the quantity of materials or labor used to make the actual number of outputs is within the standard allowed for that number of outputs.

    2. Using standards based on “best practice.”

    3. Measures how well the business keeps unit prices of material and labor inputs within standards.

    4. A budget for a single unit.

    5. Compares actual overhead spent to budgeted overhead costs.

    6. Arises when budgeted overhead differs from applied overhead.

    complete the flexible budget variance analysis by filling in the blanks in the parti 646088

    Flexible budget variance Consider the following partially completed income statement performance report for Gaje, Inc.

    GAJE, INC.

    Income Statement Performance Report (partial)

    Month Ended April 30, 2012

     

    Actual Results at

    Actual Prices

    Flexible Budget

    Variance

    Flexible Budget for Actual Number of

    Units Sold

    Output units

    6,000

     

    6,000

    Sales revenue

    $90,000

     

    $78,000

    Variable expenses

    52,200

     

    49,500

    Contribution margin

    $37,800

     

    $28,500

    Fixed expenses

    16,200

     

    15,300

    Operating income

    $21,600

     

    $13,200

    Requirement

    1. Complete the flexible budget variance analysis by filling in the blanks in the partial income statement performance report for 6,000 travel locks.

    use the above information to prepare a standard cost income statement for whitmer as 646092

    Standard cost income statement Consider the following information:

    Cost of goods sold

    $367,000

    Direct labor efficiency variance

    $18,000 F

    Sales revenue

    $550,000

    Variable overhead efficiency variance

    $ 3,400 U

    Direct materials price variance

    $ 8,000 U

    Fixed overhead volume variance

    $12,000 F

    Direct materials efficiency variance

    $ 2,800 U

    Marketing and administrative costs

    $77,000

    Direct labor price variance

    $ 42,000 U

    Variable overhead spending variance

    $ 700 F

    Fixed overhead spending variance

    $ 1,900 F

     

     

    Requirement

    1. Use the above information to prepare a standard cost income statement for Whitmer, as a guide. Remember that unfavorable variances increase cost of goods sold.

    complete the performance report identify the employee group that may deserve praise 646094

    Preparing an income statement performance report Stenback Pro Company managers received the following incomplete performance report:

    STENBACK PRO COMPANY
    Income Statement Performance Report
    Year Ended July 31, 2012

     

    Actual Results at
    Actual Prices

    Flexible Budget
    Variance

    Flexible Budget for
    Actual Number of
    Units Sold

    Sales Volume
    Variance

    Static (Master)
    Budget

    Output units

    39000

    39000

    3,000F

    Sales revenue

    218000

    $218000

    $ 27,000F

    Variable expenses

    84,000

    81,000

    10,000 U

    Contribution margin

    $ 134,000

    $ 137,000

    $ 17,000 F

    Fixed expenses

    108,000

    101,000

    0

    Operating income

    $ 26,000

    $ 36,000

    $ 17,000 F

    Requirement

    1. Complete the performance report. Identify the employee group that may deserve praise and the group that may be subject to criticism. Give your reasoning.

    is it permissible to capitalize interest into the cost of assets provide authoritati 645912

    BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION

    Professional Research: FASB Codification

    Your client is in the planning phase for a major plant expansion, which will involve the construction of a new warehouse. The assistant controller does not believe that interest cost can be included in the cost of the warehouse, because it is a financing expense. Others on the planning team believe that some interest cost can be included in the cost of the warehouse, but no one could identify the specific authoritative guidance for this issue. Your supervisor asks you to research this issue.

    Instructions

    (a) Is it permissible to capitalize interest into the cost of assets? Provide authoritative support for your answer.

    (b) What are the objectives for capitalizing interest?

    (c) Discuss which assets qualify for interest capitalization.

    (d) Is there a limit to the amount of interest that may be capitalized in a period?

    (e) If interest capitalization is allowed, what disclosures are required?

    at what amount will the machine be reported in norwel rsquo s balance sheet at decem 645913

    Professional Simulation

    In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding the accounting for property, plant, and equipment. Prepare responses to all parts.

    Situation

    Norwel Company manufactures miniature circuit boards used in wireless phones and personal organizers. On January 2, 2012, Norwel purchased a circuit board stamping machine at a retail price of $12,000. Norwel paid 5% sales tax on this purchase. Norwel paid a contractor $1,400 for a specially wired platform for the machine, to ensure non interrupted power to the machine. Norwel estimates the machine will have a 4 year useful life, with a residual value of $2,000 at the end of 4 years. Norwel uses straight line depreciation and employs the half year convention in accounting for partial year depreciation (that is, it takes a half year of depreciation in the first year of an asset’s useful life). Norwel’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

    Measurement

    At what amount should Norwel record the acquisition cost of the machine?

    Journal Entries

    What journal entry should Norwel record in 2012?

    Financial Statement

    At what amount will the machine be reported in Norwel’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012?

    Analysis

    On July 1, 2013, Norwel decides to outsource its circuit board operations to Boards R Us Inc. As part of this plan, Norwel sells the machine (and the platform) to Boards R Us for $7,000. What is the impact of this disposal on Norwel’s 2013 income before taxes?

    explain how estimation of service lives can result in unrealistically high carrying 645918

    1. Distinguish among depreciation, depletion, and amortization.

    2. Identify the factors that are relevant in determining the annual depreciation charge, and explain whether these factors are determined objectively or whether they are based on judgment.

    3. Some believe that accounting depreciation measures the decline in the value of fixed assets. Do you agree? Explain.

    4. Explain how estimation of service lives can result in unrealistically high carrying values for fixed assets.

    5. The plant manager of a manufacturing firm suggested in a conference of the company’s executives that accountants should speed up depreciation on the machinery in the finishing department because improvements were rapidly making those machines obsolete, and a depreciation fund big enough to cover their replacement is needed. Discuss the accounting concept of depreciation and the effect on a business concern of the depreciation recorded for plant assets, paying particular attention to the issues raised by the plant manager.

    charlie parker president of spinners company has recently noted that depreciation in 645920

    1. Under what conditions is it appropriate for a business to use the composite method of depreciation for its plant assets? What are the advantages and disadvantages of this method?

    2. If Remmers, Inc. uses the composite method and its composite rate is 7.5% per year, what entry should it make when plant assets that originally cost $50,000 and have been used for 10 years are sold for $14,000?

    3. A building that was purchased December 31, 1988, for $2,500,000 was originally estimated to have a life of 50 years with no salvage value at the end of that time. Depreciation has been recorded through 2012. During 2013, an examination of the building by an engineering firm discloses that its estimated useful life is 15 years after 2012. What should be the amount of depreciation for 2013?

    4. Charlie Parker, president of Spinners Company, has recently noted that depreciation increases cash provided by operations and therefore depreciation is a good source of funds. Do you agree? Discuss.

    5. Andrea Torbert purchased a computer for $8,000 on July 1, 2012. She intends to depreciate it over 4 years using the double declining balance method. Salvage value is $1,000. Compute depreciation for 2013.

    briefly present the accounting treatment that might be used to assist in the mainten 645921

    1. Walkin Inc. is considering the write down of its long term plant because of a lack of profitability. Explain to the management of Walkin how to determine whether a write down is permitted.

    2. Last year, Wyeth Company recorded an impairment on an asset held for use. Recent appraisals indicate that the asset has increased in value. Should Wyeth record this recovery in value?

    3. Toro Co. has equipment with a carrying amount of $700,000. The expected future net cash flows from the equipment are $705,000, and its fair value is $590,000. The equipment is expected to be used in operations in the future. What amount (if any) should Toro report as an impairment to its equipment?

    4. Explain how gains or losses on impaired assets should be reported in income.

    5. It has been suggested that plant and equipment could be replaced more quickly if depreciation rates for income tax and accounting purposes were substantially increased. As a result, business operations would receive the benefit of more modern and more efficient plant facilities. Discuss the merits of this proposition.

    5. Neither depreciation on replacement cost nor depreciation adjusted for changes in the purchasing power of the dollar has been recognized as generally accepted accounting principles for inclusion in the primary financial statements. Briefly present the accounting treatment that might be used to assist in the maintenance of the ability of a company to replace its productive capacity.

    major accounting firms agree rdquo what is rra why might oil companies believe that 645922

    1. List (a) the similarities and (b) the differences in the accounting treatments of depreciation and cost depletion.

    2. Describe cost depletion and percentage depletion. Why is the percentage depletion method permitted?

    3. In what way may the use of percentage depletion violate sound accounting theory?

    4. In the extractive industries, businesses may pay dividends in excess of net income. What is the maximum permissible? How can this practice be justified?

    5. The following statement appeared in a financial magazine:

    “RRA—or Rah Rah, as it’s sometimes dubbed—has kicked up quite a storm. Oil companies, for example, are convinced that the approach is misleading. Major accounting firms agree.” What is RRA? Why might oil companies believe that this approach is misleading?

    determine the depreciation base of cominsky rsquo s new machine cominsky uses straig 645924

    1. Fernandez Corporation purchased a truck at the beginning of 2012 for $50,000. The truck is estimated to have a salvage value of $2,000 and a useful life of 160,000 miles. It was driven 23,000 miles in 2012 and 31,000 miles in 2013. Compute depreciation expense for 2012 and 2013.

    2. Lockard Company purchased machinery on January 1, 2012, for $80,000. The machinery is estimated to have a salvage value of $8,000 after a useful life of 8 years. (a) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the straight line method. (b) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the straight line method assuming the machinery was purchased on September 1, 2012.

    3. Use the information for Lockard Company given in BE11 2. (a) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the sum of the years’ digits method. (b) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the sum of the years’ digits method assuming the machinery was purchased on April 1, 2012.

    4. Use the information for Lockard Company given in BE11 2. (a) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the double declining balance method. (b) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the double declining balance method assuming the machinery was purchased on October 1, 2012.

    5. Cominsky Company purchased a machine on July 1, 2013, for $28,000. Cominsky paid $200 in title fees and county property tax of $125 on the machine. In addition, Cominsky paid $500 shipping charges for delivery, and $475 was paid to a local contractor to build and wire a platform for the machine on the plant floor. The machine has an estimated useful life of 6 years with a salvage value of $3,000. Determine the depreciation base of Cominsky’s new machine. Cominsky uses straight line depreciation.

    compute campbell rsquo s rate of return on assets 645927

    1. Everly Corporation acquires a coal mine at a cost of $400,000. Intangible development costs total $100,000. After extraction has occurred, Everly must restore the property (estimated fair value of the obligation is $80,000), after which it can be sold for $160,000. Everly estimates that 4,000 tons of coal can be extracted. If 700 tons are extracted the first year, prepare the journal entry to record depletion.

    2. In its 2009 annual report, Campbell Soup Company reports beginning of the year total assets of $6,474 million, end of the year total assets of $6,056 million, total sales of $7,586 million, and net income of $736 million.

    (a) Compute Campbell’s asset turnover ratio.

    (b) Compute Campbell’s profit margin on sales.

    (c) Compute Campbell’s rate of return on assets

    (1) using asset turnover and profit margin and

    (2) using net income.

    what are some of the other options that anu might have considered 645928

    Anu Ghai was a new production analyst at RHI, Inc., a large furniture factory in North Carolina. One of her first jobs was to update the activity rates for factory production costs. This was normally done once a year, by analyzing the previous year’s actual data, factoring in projected changes, and calculating a new rate for the coming year. What Anu found was strange. The activity rate for “maintenance” had more than doubled in one year, and she was puzzled how that could have happened. When she spoke with Larry McAfee, the factory manager, she was told to spread the increases out over the other activity costs to “smooth out” the trends. She was a bit intimidated by Larry, an imposing and aggressive man, but she knew something wasn’t quite right. Then one night she was at a restaurant and overheard a few employees who worked at RHI talking. They were joking about the work they had done fixing up Larry’s home at the lake last year. Suddenly everything made sense. Larry had been using factory labor, tools, and supplies to have his lake house renovated on the weekends. Anu had a distinct feeling that if she went up against Larry on this issue, she would come out the loser. She decided to look for work elsewhere.

    Requirements

    1. Besides spotting irregularities, like the case above, what are some other ways that ABC cost data are useful for manufacturing companies?

    2. What are some of the other options that Anu might have considered?

    happy feet buys hiking socks for 6 a pair and sells them for 10 management budgets m 645930

    Happy Feet buys hiking socks for $6 a pair and sells them for $10. Management budgets monthly fixed costs of $10,000 for sales volumes between 0 and 12,000 pairs.

    Requirements

    1. Use both the income statement approach and the shortcut contribution margin approach to compute the company’s monthly breakeven sales in units.

    2. Use the contribution margin ratio approach to compute the breakeven point in sales dollars.

    3. Compute the monthly sales level (in units) required to earn a target operating income of $6,000. Use either the income statement approach or the shortcut contribution margin approach.

    4. Prepare a graph of Happy Feet’s CVP relationships, similar to Exhibit 19 5. Draw the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, and the total cost line. Label the axes, the breakeven point, the operating income area, and the operating loss area.

    happy feet buys hiking socks for 6 a pair and sells them for 10 management budgets m 645931

    Happy Feet buys hiking socks for $6 a pair and sells them for $10. Management budgets monthly fixed costs of $12,000 for sales volumes between 0 and 12,000 pairs.

    Requirements

    Consider each of the following questions separately by using the foregoing information each time.

    1. Calculate the breakeven point in units.

    2. Happy Feet reduces its selling price from $10 a pair to $8 a pair. Calculate the new breakeven point in units.

    3. Happy Feet finds a new supplier for the socks. Variable costs will decrease by $1 a pair. Calculate the new breakeven point in units.

    4. Happy Feet plans to advertise in hiking magazines. The advertising campaign will increase total fixed costs by $2,000 per month. Calculate the new breakeven point in units.

    5. In addition to selling hiking socks, Happy Feet would like to start selling sports socks. Happy Feet expects to sell one pair of hiking socks for every three pairs of sports socks. Happy Feet will buy the sports socks for $4 a pair and sell them for $8 a pair. Total fixed costs will stay at $12,000 per month. Calculate the breakeven point in units for both hiking socks and sports socks.

    assume intervale railway is considering hiring a reservations agency to handle passe 645932

    1. For Frank’s Funky Sounds, units of production depreciation on the trucks is a

    a. variable cost.

    b. fixed cost.

    c. mixed cost.

    d. high low cost.

    2. Assume Intervale Railway is considering hiring a reservations agency to handle passenger reservations. The agency would charge a flat fee of $13,000 per month, plus $3 per passenger reservation. What is the total reservation cost if 200,000 passengers take the trip next month?

    a. $613,000

    b. $3.07

    c. $600,000

    d. $13,000

    3. If Intervale Railway’s fixed costs total $90,000 per month, the variable cost per passenger is $45, and tickets sell for $75, what is the breakeven point in units?

    a. 1,200 passengers

    b. 2,000 passengers

    c. 225,000 passengers

    d. 3,000 passengers

    what is the best rsquo s predicted margin of safety for 2012 645935

    The Best Appliances had the following revenue over the past five years:

    2007

    $ 600,000

    2008

    700,000

    2009

    900,000

    2010

    800,000

    2011

    1,000,000

    To predict revenues for 2012, The Best uses the average for the past five years. The company’s breakeven revenue is $800,000 per year. What is The Best’s predicted margin of safety for 2012?

    a. $800,000

    b. $0

    c. $200,000

    d. $100,000

    variable fixed and mixed costs holly rsquo s daycare has been in operation for sever 645938

    Variable, fixed, and mixed costs Holly’s DayCare has been in operation for several years. Consider the following costs:

    1. Building rent.

    6. Holly’s salary.

    2. Toys.

    7. Wages of afterschool employees.

    3. Salary of office manager, who also

    8. Drawing paper for student art work.

    receives a bonus based on number of

    9. Straight line depreciation of tables,

    students enrolled.

    chairs, and playground equipment.

    4. Afternoon snacks.

    10. Fee paid to security company for

    5. Lawn service contract at $200 a month;

    monthly service (contract includes up to

    any extra work needed is billed at an

    four responses in a month; responses

    hourly rate based on the time needed to

    over four in a month incur an additional

    complete the job.

    fee per response).

    Requirement

    1. Identify the costs as variable (V), fixed (F), or mixed (M).

    if martin rsquo s anticipates using 1 200 machine hours in january predict his total 645939

    Mixed costs—high low method Martin owns a machine shop. In reviewing his utility bill for the last 12 months, he found that his highest bill of $2,800 occurred in August when his machines worked 1,400 machine hours. His lowest utility bill of $2,600 occurred in December when his machines worked 900 machine hours.

    Requirements

    1. Calculate (a) the variable rate per machine hour and (b) Martin’s total fixed utility cost.

    2. Show the equation for determining the total utility cost for Martin’s.

    3. If Martin’s anticipates using 1,200 machine hours in January, predict his total utility bill using the equation from Requirement 2.

    4. Draw a graph illustrating your total cost under this plan. Label the axes, and show your costs at 900, 1,200, and 1,400 machine hours.

    computing contribution margin breakeven point and units to achieve operating income 645941

    Computing contribution margin, breakeven point, and units to achieve operating income Consider the following facts:

     

    A

    B

    C

    Number of units

    1,300

    3,600

    7,500

    Sale price per unit

    $ 100

    $ 40

    $ 125

    Variable costs per unit

    40

    10

    100

    Total fixed costs

    72,000

    60,000

    40,000

    Target operating income

    180,000

    75,000

    100,000

    Calculate:

     

       

    Contribution margin per unit

     

     

     

    Contribution margin ratio

     

     

     

    Breakeven points in units

         

    Breakeven point in sales dollars

     

     

     

    Units to achieve target operating income

     

     

     

    Requirement

    1. Compute the missing information.

    calculate the number of individual tickets and the number of family tickets the comp 645942

    Calculating weighted average contribution margin  Wet Weekend Swim Park sells individual and family tickets, which include a meal, three beverages, and unlimited use of the swimming pools. Wet Weekend has the following ticket prices and variable costs for 2012:

     

    Individual

    Family

    Sale price per ticket

    $ 30

    $ 90

    Variable cost per ticket

    15

    60

    Wet Weekend expects to sell two individual tickets for every four family tickets. Wet Weekend’s total fixed costs are $75,000.

    Requirements

    1. Compute the weighted average contribution margin per ticket.

    2. Calculate the total number of tickets Wet Weekend must sell to break even.

    3. Calculate the number of individual tickets and the number of family tickets the company must sell to break even.

    cvp definitions consider the following terms and definitions 645944

    CVP definitions Consider the following terms and definitions.

    1. Costs that do not change in total despite wide changes in volume.

    a. Breakeven

    2. The sales level at which operating income is zero: Total revenues equal total costs.

    b. Contribution margin

    3. Drop in sales a company can absorb without incurring an operating loss.

    c. Cost behavior

    4. Combination of products that make up total sales.

    d. Margin of safety

    5. Sales revenue minus variable costs.

    e. Relevant range

    6. Describes how costs change as volume changes.

     f. Sales mix

    7. Costs that change in total in direct proportion to changes in volume.

    g. Fixed costs

    8. The band of volume where total fixed costs remain constant and the variable

    h. Variable costs

    Requirement

    1. Match the terms with the correct definitions.

    prepare two contribution margin income statements one at the 245 000 level and one a 645946

    Preparing contribution margin income statements and calculating breakeven sales  For its top managers, Worldwide Travel formats its income statement as follows:

    WORLDWIDE TRAVEL

    Contribution Margin Income Statement

    Three Months Ended March 31, 2012

    Sales revenue

    $ 317,500

    Variable costs

    95,250

    Contribution margin

    $222,250

    Fixed costs Operating income

    175,000

     

    $47,250

    Worldwide’s relevant range is between sales of $245,000 and $364,000.

    Requirements

    1. Calculate the contribution margin ratio.

    2. Prepare two contribution margin income statements: one at the $245,000 level and one at the $364,000 level. (Hint: The proportion of each sales dollar that goes toward variable costs is constant within the relevant range.)

    3. Compute breakeven sales in dollars.

    indicate how each of these transactions would be recorded in the accounting records 645887

    (Analysis of Subsequent Expenditures) Accardo Resources Group has been in its plant facility for 15 years. Although the plant is quite functional, numerous repair costs are incurred to maintain it in sound working order. The company’s plant asset book value is currently $800,000, as indicated below.

    Original cost

    $1,200,000  

    Accumulated depreciation

    400,000  

    Book value

    $   800,000

    During the current year, the following expenditures were made to the plant facility.

    (a) Because of increased demands for its product, the company increased its plant capacity by building a new addition at a cost of $270,000.

    (b) The entire plant was repainted at a cost of $23,000.

    (c) The roof was an asbestos cement slate. For safety purposes it was removed and replaced with a wood shingle roof at a cost of $61,000. Book value of the old roof was $41,000.

    (d) The electrical system was completely updated at a cost of $22,000. The cost of the old electrical system was not known. It is estimated that the useful life of the building will not change as a result of this updating.

    (e) A series of major repairs were made at a cost of $47,000, because parts of the wood structure were rotting. The cost of the old wood structure was not known. These extensive repairs are estimated to increase the useful life of the building.

    Instructions

    Indicate how each of these transactions would be recorded in the accounting records.

    prepare general journal entries for the transactions round to the nearest dollar 645888

    (Analysis of Subsequent Expenditures) The following transactions occurred during 2013.

    Assume that depreciation of 10% per year is charged on all machinery and 5% per year on buildings, on a straight line basis, with no estimated salvage value. Depreciation is charged for a full year on all fixed assets acquired during the year, and no depreciation is charged on fixed assets disposed of during the year.

    Jan. 30

    A   building that cost $112,000 in 1996 is torn down to make room for a new   building. The wrecking contractor was paid $5,100 and was permitted to keep   all materials salvaged.

    Mar. 10

    Machinery   that was purchased in 2006 for $16,000 is sold for $2,900 cash, f.o.b.   purchaser’s plant. Freight of $300 is paid on the sale of this machinery.

    Mar. 20

    A gear   breaks on a machine that cost $9,000 in 2008. The gear is replaced at a cost   of $3,000. The replacement does not extend the useful life of the machine.

    18 May

    A   special base installed for a machine in 2007 when the machine was purchased   has to be replaced at a cost of $5,500 because of defective workmanship on   the original base. The cost of the machinery was $14,200 in 2007. The cost of   the base was $4,000, and this amount was charged to the Machinery account in   2007.

    23 Jun

    One of   the buildings is repainted at a cost of $6,900. It had not been painted since   it was constructed in 2009.

    Instructions

    Prepare general journal entries for the transactions. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

    for each of the following items indicate whether the expenditure should be capitaliz 645889

    (Analysis of Subsequent Expenditures) Plant assets often require expenditures subsequent to acquisition. It is important that they be accounted for properly. Any errors will affect both the balance sheets and income statements for a number of years.

    Instructions

    For each of the following items, indicate whether the expenditure should be capitalized (C) or expensed (E) in the period incurred.

    (a)

    __________   Improvement.

    (b)

    __________   Replacement of a minor broken part on a machine.

    (c)

    __________   Expenditure that increases the useful life of an existing asset.

    (d)

    __________   Expenditure that increases the efficiency and effectiveness of a productive   asset but does not increase its salvage value.

    (e)

    __________   Expenditure that increases the efficiency and effectiveness of a productive   asset and increases the asset’s salvage value.

    (f)

    __________   Ordinary repairs.

    (g)

    __________   Improvement to a machine that increased its fair value and its production   capacity by 30% without extending the machine’s useful life.

    (h)

    __________   Expenditure that increases the quality of the output of the productive asset.

    presented below is a set of independent situations for each independent situation in 645890

    (Entries for Disposition of Assets) On December 31, 2012, Chrysler Inc. has a machine with a book value of $940,000. The original cost and related accumulated depreciation at this date are as follows.

    Machine

    $1,300,000  

    Accumulated depreciation

    360,000  

    Book value

    $   940,000

    Depreciation is computed at $72,000 per year on a straight line basis.

    Instructions

    Presented below is a set of independent situations. For each independent situation, indicate the journal entry to be made to record the transaction. Make sure that depreciation entries are made to update the book value of the machine prior to its disposal.

    (a) A fire completely destroys the machine on August 31, 2013. An insurance settlement of $630,000 was received for this casualty. Assume the settlement was received immediately.

    (b) On April 1, 2013, Chrysler sold the machine for $1,040,000 to Avanti Company.

    (c) On July 31, 2013, the company donated this machine to the Mountain King City Council. The fair value of the machine at the time of the donation was estimated to be $1,100,000.

    list the items in the situation that were not used to determine the answer to a abov 645892

    (Classification of Acquisition and Other Asset Costs) At December 31, 2011, certain accounts included in the property, plant, and equipment section of Reagan Company’s balance sheet had the following balances.

    Land

    $230,000  

    Buildings

    890,000  

    Leasehold improvements

    660,000  

    Equipment

    875,000  

    During 2012, the following transactions occurred.

    1. Land site number 621 was acquired for $850,000. In addition, to acquire the land Reagan paid a $51,000 commission to a real estate agent. Costs of $35,000 were incurred to clear the land. During the course of clearing the land, timber and gravel were recovered and sold for $13,000.

    2. A second tract of land (site number 622) with a building was acquired for $420,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $300,000 and the building value was $120,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was demolished at a cost of $41,000. A new building was constructed for $330,000 plus the following costs.

    Excavation   fees

    $38,000

    Architectural   design fees

    11,000

    Building   permit fee

    2,500

    Imputed   interest on funds used
      during construction (stock financing)

    8,500

    The building was completed and occupied on September 30, 2012.

    3. A third tract of land (site number 623) was acquired for $650,000 and was put on the market for resale.

    4. During December 2012, costs of $89,000 were incurred to improve leased office space. The related lease will terminate on December 31, 2014, and is not expected to be renewed. (Hint: Leasehold improvements should be handled in the same manner as land improvements.)

    5. A group of new machines was purchased under a royalty agreement that provides for payment of royalties based on units of production for the machines. The invoice price of the machines was $87,000, freight costs were $3,300, installation costs were $2,400, and royalty payments for 2012 were $17,500. Instructions

    (a) Prepare a detailed analysis of the changes in each of the following balance sheet accounts for 2012.

    Land

    Leasehold improvements

    Buildings

    Equipment

    Disregard the related accumulated depreciation accounts.

    (b) List the items in the situation that were not used to determine the answer to (a) above, and indicate where, or if, these items should be included in Reagan’s financial statements.

    prepare a detailed analysis of the changes in each of the following balance sheet ac 645893

    (Classification of Acquisition Costs) Selected accounts included in the property, plant, and equipment section of Lobo Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011, had the following balances.

    Land

    $   300,000

    Land improvements

    140,000  

    Buildings

    1,100,000  

    Equipment

    960,000  

    During 2012, the following transactions occurred.

    1. A tract of land was acquired for $150,000 as a potential future building site.

    2. A plant facility consisting of land and building was acquired from Mendota Company in exchange for 20,000 shares of Lobo’s common stock. On the acquisition date, Lobo’s stock had a closing market price of $37 per share on a national stock exchange. The plant facility was carried on Mendota’s books at $110,000 for land and $320,000 for the building at the exchange date. Current appraised values for the land and building, respectively, are $230,000 and $690,000.

    3. Items of machinery and equipment were purchased at a total cost of $400,000. Additional costs were incurred as follows.

    Freight and unloading

    $13,000  

    Sales taxes

    20,000  

    Installation

    26,000  

    4. Expenditures totaling $95,000 were made for new parking lots, streets, and sidewalks at the corporation’s various plant locations. These expenditures had an estimated useful life of 15 years.

    5. A machine costing $80,000 on January 1, 2004, was scrapped on June 30, 2012. Double decliningbalance depreciation has been recorded on the basis of a 10 year life.

    6. A machine was sold for $20,000 on July 1, 2012. Original cost of the machine was $44,000 on January 1, 2009, and it was depreciated on the straight line basis over an estimated useful life of 7 years and a salvage value of $2,000.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a detailed analysis of the changes in each of the following balance sheet accounts for 2012.

    Land

    Land improvements

    Buildings

    Equipment

    (b) List the items in the fact situation that were not used to determine the answer to (a), showing the pertinent amounts and supporting computations in good form for each item. In addition, indicate where, or if, these items should be included in Lobo’s financial statements.

    show the proper presentation of land building and depreciation on the balance sheet 645894

    (Classification of Land and Building Costs) Spitfire Company was incorporated on January 2, 2013, but was unable to begin manufacturing activities until July 1, 2013, because new factory facilities were not completed until that date.

    The Land and Building account reported the following items during 2013.

    January 31

    Land and building

    $160,000  

    February 28

    Cost of removal of building

    9,800  

    May 1

    Partial payment of new   construction

    60,000  

    May 1

    Legal fees paid

    3,770  

    June 1

    Second payment on new   construction

    40,000  

    June 1

    Insurance premium

    2,280  

    June 1

    Special tax assessment

    4,000  

    June 30

    General expenses

    36,300  

    July 1

    Final payment on new   construction

    30,000  

    December 31

    Asset write up

    53,800  

     

     

    399,950  

    December 31

    Depreciation—2013 at 1%

    4,000  

    December 31, 2013

    Account balance

    $395,950  

    The following additional information is to be considered.

    1. To acquire land and building, the company paid $80,000 cash and 800 shares of its 8% cumulative preferred stock, par value $100 per share. Fair value of the stock is $117 per share.

    2. Cost of removal of old buildings amounted to $9,800, and the demolition company retained all materials of the building.

    3. Legal fees covered the following.

    Cost of organization

    $ 610  

    Examination of title covering   purchase of land

    1,300  

    Legal work in connection with   construction contract

    1,860  

     

    $3,770  

    4. Insurance premium covered the building for a 2 year term beginning May 1, 2013.

    5. The special tax assessment covered street improvements that are permanent in nature.

    6. General expenses covered the following for the period from January 2, 2013, to June 30, 2013.

    President’s salary

    $32,100  

    Plant superintendent’s   salary—supervision of new building

    4,200

     

    $36,300  

    7. Because of a general increase in construction costs after entering into the building contract, the board of directors increased the value of the building $53,800, believing that such an increase was justified to reflect the current market at the time the building was completed. Retained earnings was credited for this amount.

    8. Estimated life of building—50 years.

    Depreciation for 2013—1% of asset value (1% of $400,000, or $4,000).

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare entries to reflect correct land, building, and depreciation accounts at December 31, 2013.

    (b) Show the proper presentation of land, building, and depreciation on the balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

    indicate how these items would be reported on the income statement of hollerith co 645895

    (Dispositions, Including Condemnation, Demolition, and Trade in) Presented below is a schedule of property dispositions for Hollerith Co.

    Schedule   of Property Dispositions

     

    Cost

    Accumulated  

    Depreciation  

    Cash

    Proceeds  

    Fair

    Value  

    Nature   of

    Disposition

    Land

    $40,000  

    $31,000  

    $31,000  

    Condemnation

    Building

    15,000  

    3,600  

    Demolition

    Warehouse

    70,000  

    $16,000  

    74,000  

    74,000  

    Destruction by fire

    Machine

    8,000  

    2,800  

    900

    7,200  

    Trade in

    Furniture

    10,000  

    7,850  

    3,100  

    Contribution

    Automobile

    9,000  

    3,460  

    2,960  

    2,960  

    Sale

    The following additional information is available.

    Land

    On February 15, a condemnation award was received as consideration for unimproved land held primarily as an investment, and on March 31, another parcel of unimproved land to be held as an investment was purchased at a cost of $35,000.

    Building

    On April 2, land and building were purchased at a total cost of $75,000, of which 20% was allocated to the building on the corporate books. The real estate was acquired with the intention of demolishing the building, and this was accomplished during the month of November. Cash proceeds received in November represent the net proceeds from demolition of the building.

    Warehouse

    On June 30, the warehouse was destroyed by fire. The warehouse was purchased January 2, 2009, and had depreciated $16,000. On December 27, the insurance proceeds and other funds were used to purchase a replacement warehouse at a cost of $90,000.

    Machine

    On December 26, the machine was exchanged for another machine having a fair value of $6,300 and cash of $900 was received. (The exchange lacks commercial substance.)

    Furniture

    On August 15, furniture was contributed to a qualified charitable organization. No other contributions were made or pledged during the year.

    Automobile

    On November 3, the automobile was sold to Jared Winger, a stockholder.

    Instructions

    Indicate how these items would be reported on the income statement of Hollerith Co.

    prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs that should be capitalized in 645896

    (Classification of Costs and Interest Capitalization) On January 1, 2012, Blair Corporation purchased for $500,000 a tract of land (site number 101) with a building. Blair paid a real estate broker’s commission of $36,000, legal fees of $6,000, and title guarantee insurance of $18,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $500,000 and the building value was $100,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was razed at a cost of $54,000. Blair entered into a $3,000,000 fixed price contract with Slatkin Builders, Inc. on March 1, 2012, for the construction of an office building on land site number 101. The building was completed and occupied on September 30, 2013. Additional construction costs were incurred as follows.

    Plans, specifications, and   blueprints

    $21,000  

    Architects’ fees for design and   supervision

    82,000  

    The building is estimated to have a 40 year life from date of completion and will be depreciated using the 150% declining balance method.

    To finance construction costs, Blair borrowed $3,000,000 on March 1, 2012. The loan is payable in 10 annual installments of $300,000 plus interest at the rate of 10%. Blair’s weighted average amounts of accumulated building construction expenditures were as follows.

    For the period March 1 to   December 31, 2012

    $1,300,000  

    For the period January 1 to   September 30, 2013

    1,900,000  

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs making up the balance in the land account in respect of land site number 101 as of September 30, 2013.

    (b) Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs that should be capitalized in the office building account as of September 30, 2013. Show supporting computations in good form.

    compute the balance in each of the following accounts at december 31 2012 and decemb 645897

    (Interest During Construction) Grieg Landscaping began construction of a new plant on December 1, 2012. On this date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition, it paid $2,000 in surveying costs and $4,000 for a title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000, with $1,000 being received from the sale of materials.

    Architectural plans were also formalized on December 1, 2012, when the architect was paid $30,000. The necessary building permits costing $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on December 1 as well. The excavation work began during the first week in December with payments made to the contractor as follows.

    Date of Payment

    Amount   of Payment

    March 1

    $240,000  

    May 1

    330,000  

    July 1

    60,000  

    The building was completed on July 1, 2013.

    To finance construction of this plant, Grieg borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2012.

    Grieg had no other borrowings. The $600,000 was a 10 year loan bearing interest at 8%.

    Instructions

    Compute the balance in each of the following accounts at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

    (a) Land.

    (b) Buildings.

    (c) Interest Expense.

    compute the weighted average accumulated expenditures on laser words rsquo new build 645898

    (Capitalization of Interest) Laser words Inc. is a book distributor that had been operating in its original facility since 1985. The increase in certification programs and continuing education requirements in several professions has contributed to an annual growth rate of 15% for Laser words since 2007. Laser words’ original facility became obsolete by early 2012 because of the increased sales volume and the fact that Laser words now carries CDs in addition to books.

    On June 1, 2012, Laser words contracted with Black Construction to have a new building constructed for $4,000,000 on land owned by Laser words. The payments made by Laser words to Black Construction are shown in the schedule below.

    Date

    Amount  

    July 30, 2012

    $   900,000

    January 30, 2013

    1,500,000  

    May 30, 2013

    1,600,000

    Total payments

    $4,000,000  

    Construction was completed and the building was ready for occupancy on May 27, 2013. Laser words had no new borrowings directly associated with the new building but had the following debt outstanding at May 31, 2013, the end of its fiscal year.

    10%, 5 year note payable of $2,000,000, dated April 1, 2009, with interest payable annually on April 1. 12%, 10 year bond issue of $3,000,000 sold at par on June 30, 2005, with interest payable annually on June 30.

    The new building qualifies for interest capitalization. The effect of capitalizing the interest on the new building, compared with the effect of expensing the interest, is material.

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the weighted average accumulated expenditures on Laser words’ new building during the capitalization period.

    (b) Compute the avoidable interest on Laser words’ new building.

    (c) Some interest cost of Laser words Inc. is capitalized for the year ended May 31, 2013.

    (1) Identify the items relating to interest costs that must be disclosed in Laser words’ financial statements.

    (2) Compute the amount of each of the items that must be disclosed.

    for each of the four independent situations prepare the journal entries to record th 645899

    (Nonmonetary Exchanges) Holyfield Corporation wishes to exchange a machine used in its operations. Holyfield has received the following offers from other companies in the industry.

    1. Dorsett Company offered to exchange a similar machine plus $23,000. (The exchange has commercial substance for both parties.)

    2. Winston Company offered to exchange a similar machine. (The exchange lacks commercial substance for both parties.)

    3. Liston Company offered to exchange a similar machine, but wanted $3,000 in addition to Holyfield’s machine. (The exchange has commercial substance for both parties.)

    In addition, Holyfield contacted Greeley Corporation, a dealer in machines. To obtain a new machine, Holyfield must pay $93,000 in addition to trading in its old machine.

     

    Holyfield  

    Dorsett  

    Winston  

    Liston  

    Greeley

    Machine cost

    $160,000  

    $120,000  

    $152,000  

    $160,000  

    $130,000

    Accumulated depreciation

    60,000  

    45,000  

    71,000  

    75,000  

    –0–

    Fair value

    92,000  

    69,000  

    92,000  

    95,000  

    185,000

    Instructions

    For each of the four independent situations, prepare the journal entries to record the exchange on the books of each company.

    assuming the same facts as those in b except that the fair value of the old crane is 645901

    (Nonmonetary Exchanges) During the current year, Marshall Construction trades an old crane that has a book value of $90,000 (original cost $140,000 less accumulated depreciation $50,000) for a new crane from Brigham Manufacturing Co. The new crane cost Brigham $165,000 to manufacture and is classified as inventory. The following information is also available.

     

    Marshall   Const.

    Brigham   Mfg. Co.

    Fair value of old crane

    $   82,000

    Fair value of new crane

     

    $200,000  

    Cash paid

    118,000  

     

    Cash received

     

    118,000  

    Instructions

    (a) Assuming that this exchange is considered to have commercial substance, prepare the journal entries on the books of (1) Marshall Construction and (2) Brigham Manufacturing.

    (b) Assuming that this exchange lacks commercial substance for Marshall, prepare the journal entries on the books of Marshall Construction.

    (c) Assuming the same facts as those in (a), except that the fair value of the old crane is $98,000 and the cash paid is $102,000, prepare the journal entries on the books of (1) Marshall Construction and

    (2) Brigham Manufacturing.

    (d) Assuming the same facts as those in (b), except that the fair value of the old crane is $97,000 and the cash paid $103,000, prepare the journal entries on the books of (1) Marshall Construction and

    (2) Brigham Manufacturing.

    purchase of the rights for the exclusive use of a process used in the manufacture of 645902

    (Purchases by Deferred Payment, Lump Sum, and Nonmonetary Exchanges) Klamath Company, a manufacturer of ballet shoes, is experiencing a period of sustained growth. In an effort to expand its production capacity to meet the increased demand for its product, the company recently made several acquisitions of plant and equipment. Rob Joffrey, newly hired in the position of fixed asset accountant, requested that Danny Nolte, Klamath’s controller, review the following transactions.

    Transaction 1

    On June 1, 2012, Klamath Company purchased equipment from Wyandot Corporation. Klamath issued a $28,000, 4 year, zero interest bearing note to Wyandot for the new equipment. Klamath will pay off the note in four equal installments due at the end of each of the next 4 years. At the date of the transaction, the prevailing market rate of interest for obligations of this nature was 10%. Freight costs of $425 and installation costs of $500 were incurred in completing this transaction. The appropriate factors for the time value of money at a 10% rate of interest are given below.

    Future value of $1 for 4   periods

    1.46

    Future value of an ordinary   annuity for 4 periods

    4.64

    Present value of $1 for 4   periods

    0.68

    Present value of an ordinary   annuity for 4 periods

    3.17

    Transaction 2

    On December 1, 2012, Klamath Company purchased several assets of Yakima Shoes Inc., a small shoe manufacturer whose owner was retiring. The purchase amounted to $220,000 and included the assets listed below. Klamath Company engaged the services of Tennyson Appraisal Inc., an independent appraiser, to determine the fair values of the assets which are also presented below.

     

    Yakima   Book Value

    Fair   Value

    Inventory

    $   60,000

    $   50,000

    Land

    40,000  

    80,000  

    Buildings

    70,000  

    120,000

     

    $170,000  

    $250,000  

    During its fiscal year ended May 31, 2013, Klamath incurred $8,000 for interest expense in connection with the financing of these assets.

    Transaction 3

    On March 1, 2013, Klamath Company exchanged a number of used trucks plus cash for vacant land adjacent to its plant site. (The exchange has commercial substance.) Klamath intends to use the land for a parking lot. The trucks had a combined book value of $35,000, as Klamath had recorded $20,000 of accumulated depreciation against these assets. Klamath’s purchasing agent, who has had previous dealings in the secondhand market, indicated that the trucks had a fair value of $46,000 at the time of the transaction. In addition to the trucks, Klamath Company paid $19,000 cash for the land.

    Instructions

    (a) Plant assets such as land, buildings, and equipment receive special accounting treatment. Describe the major characteristics of these assets that differentiate them from other types of assets.

    (b) For each of the three transactions described above, determine the value at which Klamath Company should record the acquired assets. Support your calculations with an explanation of the underlying rationale.

    (c) The books of Klamath Company show the following additional transactions for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2013.

    (1) Acquisition of a building for speculative purposes.

    (2) Purchase of a 2 year insurance policy covering plant equipment.

    (3) Purchase of the rights for the exclusive use of a process used in the manufacture of ballet shoes. For each of these transactions, indicate whether the asset should be classified as a plant asset. If it is a plant asset, explain why it is. If it is not a plant asset, explain why not, and identify the proper classification.

    give your recommendation concerning the proper accounting for interest during the co 645905

    (Capitalization of Interest) Langer Airline is converting from piston type planes to jets. Delivery time for the jets is 3 years, during which substantial progress payments must be made. The multimillion dollar cost of the planes cannot be financed from working capital; Langer must borrow funds for the payments.

    Because of high interest rates and the large sum to be borrowed, management estimates that interest costs in the second year of the period will be equal to one third of income before interest and taxes, and one half of such income in the third year.

    After conversion, Langer’s passenger carrying capacity will be doubled with no increase in the number of planes, although the investment in planes would be substantially increased. The jet planes have a 7 year service life.

    Instructions

    Give your recommendation concerning the proper accounting for interest during the conversion period. Support your recommendation with reasons and suggested accounting treatment. (Disregard income tax implications.) (AICPA adapted)

    attach a schedule supporting any computations that you use 645906

    (Capitalization of Interest) Vania Magazine Company started construction of a warehouse building for its own use at an estimated cost of $5,000,000 on January 1, 2011, and completed the building on December 31, 2011. During the construction period, Vania has the following debt obligations outstanding.

    Construction   loan—12% interest, payable semiannually, issued December 31, 2010

    $2,000,000

    Short term   loan—10% interest, payable monthly, and principal payable at maturity, on May   30, 2012

    1,400,000

    Long term   loan—11% interest, payable on January 1 of each year. Principal payable on   January 1, 2014

    1,000,000

    Total cost amounted to $5,200,000, and the weighted average of accumulated expenditures was $3,500,000. Jane Esplanade, the president of the company, has been shown the costs associated with this construction project and capitalized on the balance sheet. She is bothered by the “avoidable interest” included in the cost. She argues that, first, all the interest is unavoidable—no one lends money without expecting to be compensated for it. Second, why can’t the company use all the interest on all the loans when computing this avoidable interest? Finally, why can’t her company capitalize all the annual interest that accrued over the period of construction?

    Instructions

    You are the manager of accounting for the company. In a memo, explain what avoidable interest is, how you computed it (being especially careful to explain why you used the interest rates that you did), and why the company cannot capitalize all its interest for the year. Attach a schedule supporting any computations that you use.

    discuss each of the points raised by the owner of the business 645908

    (Costs of Acquisition) The invoice price of a machine is $50,000. Various other costs relating to the acquisition and installation of the machine including transportation, electrical wiring, special base, and so on amount to $7,500. The machine has an estimated life of 10 years, with no residual value at the end of that period.

    The owner of the business suggests that the incidental costs of $7,500 be charged to expense immediately for the following reasons.

    1. If the machine should be sold, these costs cannot be recovered in the sales price.

    2. The inclusion of the $7,500 in the machinery account on the books will not necessarily result in a closer approximation of the market price of this asset over the years, because of the possibility of changing demand and supply levels.

    3. Charging the $7,500 to expense immediately will reduce federal income taxes.

    Instructions

    Discuss each of the points raised by the owner of the business.

    what stakeholder interests are in conflict 645909

    (Cost of Land vs. Building—Ethics) Tones Company purchased a warehouse in a down town district where land values are rapidly increasing. Gerald Carter, controller, and Wilma Ankara, financial vice president, are trying to allocate the cost of the purchase between the land and the building. Noting that depreciation can be taken only on the building, Carter favors placing a very high proportion of the cost on the warehouse itself, thus reducing taxable income and income taxes. Ankara, his supervisor, argues that the allocation should recognize the increasing value of the land, regardless of the depreciation potential of the warehouse. Besides, she says, net income is negatively impacted by additional depreciation and will cause the company’s stock price to go down.

    Instructions

    Answer the following questions.

    (a) What stakeholder interests are in conflict?

    (b) What ethical issues does Carter face?

    (c) How should these costs be allocated?

    what is johnson johnson s free cash flow from the information provided comment on jo 645910

    FINANCIAL REPORTING

    Financial Statement Analysis Case

    Johnson & Johnson

    Johnson & Johnson, the world’s leading and most diversified health care corporation, serves its customers through specialized worldwide franchises. Each of its franchises consists of a number of companies throughout the world that focus on a particular health care market, such as surgical sutures, consumer pharmaceuticals, or contact lenses. Information related to its property, plant, and equipment in its 2009 annual report is shown in the notes to the financial statements below and on the next page.

    1. Property, Plant and Equipment and Depreciation

    Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost. The Company utilizes the straight line method of depreciation over the estimated useful lives of the assets:

    Building and building equipment  

    20–40   years

    Land and leasehold improvements  

    10–20   years

    Machinery and equipment

    2–13   years

    4. Property, Plant and Equipment

    At the end of 2009 and 2008, property, plant and equipment at cost and accumulated depreciation were:

    (dollars in millions)

    2009

    2008

    Land and land improvements

    $ 714  

    $ 886  

    Buildings and building   equipment

    8,863  

    7,720  

    Machinery and equipment

    17,153  

    15,234  

    Construction in progress

    2,521  

    3,552

     

    29,251  

    27,392  

    Less accumulated depreciation

    14,492  

    13,027

     

    $14,759  

    $14,365  

    The Company capitalizes interest expense as part of the cost of construction of facilities and equipment. Interest expense capitalized in 2009, 2008 and 2007 was $101 million, $147 million and $130 million, respectively.

    Depreciation expense, including the amortization of capitalized interest in 2009, 2008 and 2007 was $2.1 billion, $2.0 billion and $1.9 billion, respectively.

    Johnson & Johnson’s provided the following selected information in its 2009 cash flow statement.

    Johnson & Johnson
      2009 Annual Report

    Consolidated   Financial Statements (excerpts)

     

    Net cash   flows from operating activities

    $16,571

    Cash   flows from investing activities

     

    Additions   to property, plant and equipment

    2,365

    Proceeds   from the disposal of assets

    154

    Acquisitions,   net of cash acquired

    2,470

    Purchases   of investments

    10,040)

    Sales of   investments

    7,232

    Other   (primarily intangibles)

    109

    Net cash   used by investing activities

    7,598

    Cash   flows from financing activities

     

    Dividends   to shareholders

    5,327

    Repurchase   of common stock

    2,130

    Proceeds   from short term debt

    9,484

    Retirement   of short term debt

    6,791

    Proceeds   from long term debt

    9

    Retirement   of long term debt

    219

    Proceeds   from the exercise of stock options/excess tax benefits

    882

    Net cash   used by financing activities

    4,092

    Effect   of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

    161

    Increase   in cash and cash equivalents

    5,042

    Cash and   cash equivalents, beginning of year (Note 1)

    10,768

    Cash and   cash equivalents, end of year (Note 1)

    $15,810

    Supplemental   cash flow data

     

    Cash   paid during the year for:

     

    Interest

    $533

    Income   taxes

    2,363

    Instructions

    (a) What was the cost of buildings and building equipment at the end of 2009?

    (b) Does Johnson & Johnson use a conservative or liberal method to depreciate its property, plant, and equipment?

    (c) What was the actual interest expense incurred by the company in 2009?

    (d) What is Johnson & Johnson’s free cash flow? From the information provided, comment on Johnson & Johnson’s financial flexibility.

    how does the concept of commercial substance affect the accounting and analysis of t 645911

    Accounting, Analysis, and Principles

    Durler Company purchased equipment on January 2, 2008, for $112,000. The equipment had an estimated useful life of 5 years with an estimated salvage value of $12,000. Durler uses straight line depreciation on all assets. On January 2, 2012, Durler exchanged this equipment plus $12,000 in cash for newer equipment. The old equipment has a fair value of $50,000.

    Accounting

    Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange on the books of Durler Company. Assume that the exchange has commercial substance.

    Analysis

    How will this exchange affect comparisons of the return on asset ratio for Durler in the year of the exchange compared to prior years?

    Principles

    How does the concept of commercial substance affect the accounting and analysis of this exchange?

    prepare a brief memorandum to explain why expected selling prices are important in t 645839

    Professional Simulation

    In this simulation, you will address questions related to inventory valuation and measurement.

    Situation

    T.L. Wang Inc. manufactures and sells four products, the inventories of which are priced at cost or market, whichever is lower. A normal profit margin rate of 30% is usually maintained on each of the four products.

    The following information was compiled as of December 31, 2012.

    Product

    Original Cost

    Cost to Replace

    Estimated Cost to   Dispose

    Expected Selling   Price*

    A

    $17.50

    $14.00

    $ 6.00

    $ 30.00

    B

    48.00

    78.00

    26.00

    100.00

    C

    35.00

    42.00

    15.00

    80.00

    D

    47.50

    45.00

    20.50

    95.00

    *Normal profit margin is 30% of selling price.

    LCM

    Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a schedule containing unit values (including “floor” and “ceiling”) for determining the lower of cost or market (LCM) on an individual product basis. The last column of the schedule should contain, for each product, the unit value for the purpose of inventory valuation resulting from the application of the lower of cost or market rule to 1,000 units.

    Journal Entry

    Prepare the journal entry to record the lower of cost or market for T.L. Wang. Assume 1,000 units of each product and that T.L. Wang uses a perpetual inventory system.

    Explanation

    Prepare a brief memorandum to explain why expected selling prices are important in the application of the lower of cost or market rule to 1,000 units.

    starfish company a company using gaap and the lifo inventory method is considering c 645842

    Starfish Company (a company using GAAP and the LIFO inventory method) is considering changing to IFRS and the FIFO inventory method. How would a comparison of these methods affect Starfish’s financials?

    (a) During a period of inflation, working capital would decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.

    (b) During a period of inflation, the taxes will decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.

    (c) During a period of inflation, net income would be greater if IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.

    (d) During a period of inflation, the current ratio would decrease when IFRS and the FIFO inventory method are used as compared to GAAP and LIFO.

    under ifrs what is the inventory carrying value on december 31 2012 645843

    Assume that Darcy Industries had the following inventory values.

    Inventory cost (on December 31,   2012)

    $1,500  

    Inventory market (on December   31, 2012)

    $1,350  

    Inventory net realizable value   (on December 31, 2012)

    $1,320  

    Under IFRS, what is the inventory carrying value on December 31, 2012?

    (a) $1,500.

    (b) $1,570.

    (c) $1,560.

    (d) $1,320.

    briefly describe some of the similarities and differences between gaap and ifrs with 645844

    1. Briefly describe some of the similarities and differences between GAAP and IFRS with respect to the accounting for inventories.

    2. LaTour Inc. is based in France and prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. In 2012, it reported cost of goods sold of $578 million and average inventory of $154 million. Briefly discuss how analysis of LaTour’s inventory turnover ratio (and comparisons to a company using GAAP) might be affected by differences in inventory accounting between IFRS and GAAP.

    3. Reed Pentak, a finance major, has been following globalization and made the following observation concerning accounting convergence: “I do not see many obstacles concerning development of a single accounting standard for inventories.” Prepare a response to Reed to explain the main obstacle to achieving convergence in the area of inventory accounting.

    4. Briefly describe the valuation of (a) biological assets and (b) agricultural produce.

    which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year 645847

    Dover Company began operations in 2012 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at LCNRV at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. This information is presented below.

     

    Cost

    Net   Realizable Value

    12/31/12

    $346,000  

    $322,000  

    12/31/13

    410,000  

    390,000  

    (a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at LCNRV, and a perpetual inventory system using the cost of goods sold method.

    (b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at cost, and a perpetual system using the loss method.

    (c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?

    prepare the journal entry ies for keyser rsquo s biological asset shearing sheep for 645848

    Keyser’s Fleece Inc. holds a drove of sheep. Keyser shears the sheep on a semiannual basis and then sells the harvested wool into the specialty knitting market. Keyser has the following information related to the shearing sheep at January 1, 2012, and during the first six months of 2012.

     

    Shearing Sheep

    Carrying   value (equal to net realizable value), January 1, 2012

    $74,000

    Change   in fair value due to growth and price changes

    4,700

    Change   in fair value due to harvest

    575

    Wool   harvested during the first 6 months (at NRV)

    9,000

    Prepare the journal entry(ies) for Keyser’s biological asset (shearing sheep) for the first six months of 2012.

    explain when it is acceptable to state inventory above cost and which industries all 645849

    Jones Co. is in a technology intensive industry. Recently, one of its competitors introduced a new product with technology that might render obsolete some of Jones’s inventory. The accounting staff wants to follow the appropriate authoritative literature in determining the accounting for this significant market event.

    Instructions

    (a) Identify the authoritative literature addressing inventory pricing.

    (b) List three types of goods that are classified as inventory. What characteristic will automatically exclude an item from being classified as inventory?

    (c) Define “net realizable value” as used in the phrase “lower of cost or net realizable value.”

    (d) Explain when it is acceptable to state inventory above cost and which industries allow this practice.

    how should the amount of interest capitalized be disclosed in the notes to the finan 645858

    1. Burke Company has purchased two tracts of land. One tract will be the site of its new manufacturing plant, while the other is being purchased with the hope that it will be sold in the next year at a profit. How should these two tracts of land be reported in the balance sheet?

    2. One financial accounting issue encountered when a company constructs its own plant is whether the interest cost on funds borrowed to finance construction should be capitalized and then amortized over the life of the assets constructed. What is the justification for capitalizing such interest?

    3. Provide examples of assets that do not qualify for interest capitalization.

    4. What interest rates should be used in determining the amount of interest to be capitalized? How should the amount of interest to be capitalized be determined?

    5. How should the amount of interest capitalized be disclosed in the notes to the financial statements? How should interest revenue from temporarily invested excess funds borrowed to finance the construction of assets be accounted for?

    some of it was purchased under long term payment plans for which the interest charge 645860

    1. Magilke Industries acquired equipment this year to be used in its operations. The equipment was delivered by

    The suppliers, installed by Magilke, and placed into operation. Some of it was purchased for cash with discounts available for prompt payment. Some of it was purchased under long term payment plans for which the interest charges approximated prevailing rates. What costs should Magilke capitalize for the new equipment purchased this year? Explain.

    2. Schwartzkopf Co. purchased for $2,200,000 property that included both land and a building to be used in operations. The seller’s book value was $300,000 for the land and $900,000 for the building. By appraisal, the fair value was estimated to be $500,000 for the land and $2,000,000 for the building. At what amount should Schwarzkopf  report the land and the building at the end of the year?

    a comparison of expected cash flows for the trucks indicates the exchange lacks comm 645861

    1. Pueblo Co. acquires machinery by paying $10,000 cash and signing a $5,000, 2 year, zero interest bearing note payable. The note has a present value of $4,208, and Pueblo purchased a similar machine last month for $13,500. At what cost should the new equipment be recorded?

    2. Stan Ott is evaluating two recent transactions involving exchanges of equipment. In one case, the exchange has commercial substance. In the second situation, the exchange lacks commercial substance. Explain to Stan the differences in accounting for these two situations.

    3. Crowe Company purchased a heavy duty truck on July 1, 2009, for $30,000. It was estimated that it would have a useful life of 10 years and then would have a trade in value of $6,000. The company uses the straight line method. It was traded on August 1, 2013, for a similar truck costing $42,000; $16,000 was allowed as trade in value (also fair value) on the old truck and $26,000 was paid in cash. A comparison of expected cash flows for the trucks indicates the exchange lacks commercial substance. What is the entry to record the trade in?

    the estimated fair values of the assets are land 60 000 building 220 000 and equipme 645866

    1. Mohave Inc. purchased land, building, and equipment from Laguna Corporation for a cash payment of $315,000. The estimated fair values of the assets are land $60,000, building $220,000, and equipment $80,000. At what amounts should each of the three assets be recorded?

    2. Fielder Company obtained land by issuing 2,000 shares of its $10 par value common stock. The land was recently appraised at $85,000. The common stock is actively traded at $40 per share. Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition of the land.

    3. Navajo Corporation traded a used truck (cost $20,000, accumulated depreciation $18,000) for a small computer worth $3,300. Navajo also paid $500 in the transaction. Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange. (The exchange has commercial substance.)

    4. Use the information for Navajo Corporation from BE10 8. Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange, assuming the exchange lacks commercial substance.

    5. Mehta Company traded a used welding machine (cost $9,000, accumulated depreciation $3,000) for office equipment with an estimated fair value of $5,000. Mehta also paid $3,000 cash in the transaction. Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange. (The exchange has commercial substance.)

    indicate which of the following costs should be expensed when incurred 645867

    1. Cheng Company traded a used truck for a new truck. The used truck cost $30,000 and has accumulated depreciation of $27,000. The new truck is worth $37,000. Cheng also made a cash payment of $36,000. Prepare Cheng’s entry to record the exchange. (The exchange lacks commercial substance.)

    2. Slaton Corporation traded a used truck for a new truck. The used truck cost $20,000 and has accumulated depreciation of $17,000. The new truck is worth $35,000. Slaton also made a cash payment of $33,000. Prepare Slaton’s entry to record the exchange. (The exchange has commercial substance.)

    3. Indicate which of the following costs should be expensed when incurred.

    (a) $13,000 paid to rearrange and reinstall machinery.

    (b) $200,000 paid for addition to building.

    (c) $200 paid for tune up and oil change on delivery truck.

    (d) $7,000 paid to replace a wooden floor with a concrete floor.

    (e) $2,000 paid for a major overhaul on a truck, which extends the useful life.

    assume the benefits of capitalizing interest during construction exceed the cost of 645872

    (Treatment of Various Costs) Allegro Supply Company, a newly formed corporation, incurred the following expenditures related to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment.

         

    Abstract   company’s fee for title search

     

    $520

    Architect’s   fees

     

    3,170

    Cash   paid for land and dilapidated building thereon

     

    92,000

    Removal   of old building

    $20,000

     

    Less:   Salvage

    5,500

    14,500

    Interest   on short term loans during construction

     

    7,400

    Excavation   before construction for basement

     

    19,000

    Machinery   purchased (subject to 2% cash discount, which was not taken)

     

    65,000

    Freight   on machinery purchased

     

    1,340

    Storage   charges on machinery, necessitated by noncompletion of
      building when machinery was delivered

     

    2,180

    New   building constructed (building construction took 6 months from
      date of purchase of land and old building)

     

    485,000

    Assessment   by city for drainage project

     

    1,600

    Hauling   charges for delivery of machinery from storage to new building

     

    620

    Installation   of machinery

     

    2,000

    Trees,   shrubs, and other landscaping after completion of building
      (permanent in nature)

     

    5,400

    Instructions

    Determine the amounts that should be debited to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment. Assume the benefits of capitalizing interest during construction exceed the cost of implementation. Indicate how any costs not debited to these accounts should be recorded.

    prepare the entry that should have been made at the date of each acquisition 645873

    (Correction of Improper Cost Entries) Plant acquisitions for selected companies are presented below and on the next page.

    1. Natchez Industries Inc. acquired land, buildings, and equipment from a bankrupt company, Vivace Co., for a lump sum price of $680,000. At the time of purchase, Vivace’s assets had the following book and appraisal values.

     

    Book   Values

    Appraisal   Values

    Land

    $200,000  

    $150,000  

    Buildings

    230,000  

    350,000  

    Equipment

    300,000  

    300,000  

    To be conservative, the company decided to take the lower of the two values for each asset acquired. The following entry was made.

    Land

    150,000  

     

    Buildings

    230,000  

     

    Equipment

    300,000

     

    Cash

     

    680,000  

    2. Arawak Enterprises purchased store equipment by making a $2,000 cash down payment and signing a 1 year, $23,000, 10% note payable. The purchase was recorded as follows.

    Equipment

    27,300

     

    Cash

     

    2,000

    Notes Payable

     

    23,000

    Interest Payable

     

    2,300  

    3. Ace Company purchased office equipment for $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30. Because the company intended to take the discount, it made no entry until it paid for the acquisition. The entry was:

    Equipment

    20,000

     

    Cash

     

    19,600

    Purchase Discounts

     

    400

    4. Paunee Inc. recently received at zero cost land from the Village of Cardassia as an inducement to locate its business in the Village. The appraised value of the land is $27,000. The company made no entry to record the land because it had no cost basis.

    5. Mohegan Company built a warehouse for $600,000. It could have purchased the building for $740,000. The controller made the following entry.

    Buildings

    740,000

     

    Cash

     

    600,000  

    Profit on Construction

     

    140,000  

    Instructions

    Prepare the entry that should have been made at the date of each acquisition.

    prepare the journal entry to record the capitalization of interest and the recogniti 645875

    (Capitalization of Interest) On December 31, 2011, Hurston Inc. borrowed $3,000,000 at 12% payable annually to finance the construction of a new building. In 2012, the company made the following expenditures related to this building: March 1, $360,000; June 1, $600,000; July 1, $1,500,000; December 1, $1,200,000. Additional information is provided as follows.

    1

    Other   debt outstanding

     
     

    10 year,   11% bond, December 31, 2005, interest payable annually

    $4,000,000

     

    6 year,   10% note, dated December 31, 2009, interest payable annually

    $1,600,000

    2

    March 1,   2012, expenditure included land costs of $150,000

     

    3

    Interest   revenue earned in 2012

    $49,000

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the amount of interest to be capitalized in 2012 in relation to the construction of the building.

    (b) Prepare the journal entry to record the capitalization of interest and the recognition of interest expense, if any, at December 31, 2012.

    prepare the general journal entries required to record the acquisition and payment i 645878

    (Entries for Equipment Acquisitions) Chopin Engineering Corporation purchased conveyor equipment with a list price of $15,000. Presented below are three independent cases related to the equipment. (Round to nearest dollar.)

    (a) Chopin paid cash for the equipment 8 days after the purchase. The vendor’s credit terms are 2/10, n/30. Assume that equipment purchases are recorded gross.

    (b) Chopin traded in equipment with a book value of $2,000 (initial cost $8,000), and paid $14,200 in cash one month after the purchase. The old equipment could have been sold for $400 at the date of trade. (The exchange has commercial substance.)

    (c) Chopin gave the vendor a $16,200 zero interest bearing note for the equipment on the date of purchase. The note was due in one year and was paid on time. Assume that the effective interest rate in the market was 9%.

    Instructions

    Prepare the general journal entries required to record the acquisition and payment in each of the independent cases above. Round to the nearest dollar.

    prepare entries on the books of rommel company for these transactions 645879

    (Entries for Acquisition of Assets) Presented below is information related to Rommel Company.

    1. On July 6, Rommel Company acquired the plant assets of Studebaker Company, which had discontinued operations. The appraised value of the property is:

    Land

    $   400,000

    Buildings

    1,200,000  

    Equipment

    800,000

    Total

    $2,400,000  

    Rommel Company gave 12,500 shares of its $100 par value common stock in exchange. The stock had a fair value of $180 per share on the date of the purchase of the property.

    2. Rommel Company expended the following amounts in cash between July 6 and December 15, the date when it first occupied the building.

    Repairs to building

    $105,000  

    Construction of bases for   machinery to be installed later

    135,000  

    Driveways and parking lots

    122,000  

    Remodeling of office space in   building, including new partitions and walls

    161,000  

    Special assessment by city on   land

    18,000  

    3. On December 20, the company paid cash for machinery, $280,000, subject to a 2% cash discount, and freight on machinery of $10,500.

    Instructions

    Prepare entries on the books of Rommel Company for these transactions.

    record the acquisition of each of these assets 645882

    (Asset Acquisition) Logan Industries purchased the following assets and constructed a building as well. All this was done during the current year.

    Assets 1 and 2

    These assets were purchased as a lump sum for $104,000 cash. The following information was gathered.

    Description

    Initial   Cost on

    Seller’s   Books

    Depreciation   to

    Date   on Seller’s

    Books  

    Book   Value on

    Seller’s   Books

    Appraised   Value

    Machinery

    $100,000  

    $50,000  

    $50,000  

    $90,000  

    Equipment

    60,000  

    10,000  

    50,000  

    30,000  

    Asset 3

    This machine was acquired by making a $10,000 down payment and issuing a $30,000, 2 year, zerointerest bearing note. The note is to be paid off in two $15,000 installments made at the end of the first and second years. It was estimated that the asset could have been purchased outright for $35,900.

    Asset 4

    This machinery was acquired by trading in used machinery. (The exchange lacks commercial substance.) Facts concerning the trade in are as follows.

    Cost of machinery traded

    $100,000  

    Accumulated depreciation to   date of sale

    36,000  

    Fair value of machinery traded

    80,000  

    Cash received

    10,000  

    Fair value of machinery   acquired

    70,000  

    Asset 5

    Office equipment was acquired by issuing 100 shares of $8 par value common stock. The stock had a market price of $11 per share.

    Construction of Building

    A building was constructed on land purchased last year at a cost of $180,000. Construction began on February 1 and was completed on November 1. The payments to the contractor were as follows.

    Date

    Payment

    2/1

    $120,000

    6/1

    360,000

    9/1

    480,000

    11/1

    100,000  

    To finance construction of the building, a $600,000, 12% construction loan was taken out on February 1. The loan was repaid on November 1. The firm had $200,000 of other outstanding debt during the year at a borrowing rate of 8%.

    Instructions

    Record the acquisition of each of these assets.

    prepare the journal entry ies necessary to record this exchange assuming that the ex 645884

    (Nonmonetary Exchange) Montgomery Company purchased an electric wax melter on April 30, 2013, by trading in its old gas model and paying the balance in cash. The following data relate to the purchase.

    List price of new melter

    $15,800  

    Cash paid

    10,000  

    Cost of old melter (5 year   life, $700 residual value)

    12,700  

    Accumulated depreciation—old   melter (straight line)

    7,200  

    Secondhand fair value of old   melter

    5,200  

    Instructions

    Prepare the journal entry(ies) necessary to record this exchange, assuming that the exchange (a) has commercial substance, and (b) lacks commercial substance. Montgomery’s year ends on December 31, and depreciation has been recorded through December 31, 2012.

    assuming the same facts as in a except that fair value information for the assets ex 645886

    (Nonmonetary Exchange) McArthur Inc. has negotiated the purchase of a new piece of automatic equipment at a price of $7,000 plus trade in, f.o.b. factory. McArthur Inc. paid $7,000 cash and traded in used equipment. The used equipment had originally cost $62,000; it had a book value of $42,000 and a secondhand fair value of $45,800, as indicated by recent transactions involving similar equipment. Freight and installation charges for the new equipment required a cash payment of $1,100.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare the general journal entry to record this transaction, assuming that the exchange has commercial substance.

    (b) Assuming the same facts as in (a) except that fair value information for the assets exchanged is not determinable. Prepare the general journal entry to record this transaction.

    assume mander decided to adopt the conventional retail method compute the ending inv 645809

    (Conventional Retail and Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Mander Corporation began operations on January 1, 2012, with a beginning inventory of $34,300 at cost and $50,000 at retail. The following information relates to 2012.

     

    Retail

    Net   purchases ($108,500 at cost)

    $150,000

    Net   markups

    10,000

    Net   markdowns

    5,000

    Sales

    128,000

    Instructions

    (a) Assume Mander decided to adopt the conventional retail method. Compute the ending inventory to be reported in the balance sheet.

    (b) Assume instead that Mander decides to adopt the dollar value LIFO retail method. The appropriate price indexes are 100 at January 1 and 110 at December 31. Compute the ending inventory to be reported in the balance sheet.

    (c) On the basis of the information in part (b), compute cost of goods sold.

    compute the ending inventory at december 31 of the years 2011 ndash 2014 round to th 645810

    (Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Springsteen Corporation adopted the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method on January 1, 2011. At that time the inventory had a cost of $54,000 and a retail price of $100,000. The following information is available.

     

    Year End
      Inventory at Retail

    Current   Year
      Cost—Retail %

    Year End
      Price Index

    2011

    $121,900

    57%

    106

    2012

    138,750

    60%

    111

    2013

    126,500

    61%

    115

    2014

    162,500

    58%

    125

    The price index at January 1, 2011, is 100.

    Instructions

    Compute the ending inventory at December 31 of the years 2011–2014. Round to the nearest dollar.

    at what amount should each of the four desks appear in the company rsquo s december 645812

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Remmers Company manufactures desks. Most of the company’s desks are standard models and are sold on the basis of catalog prices. At December 31, 2012, the following finished desks appear in the company’s inventory.

    Finished Desks

    A

    B

    C

    D

    2012 catalog selling price

    $450

    $480

    $900

    $1,050  

    FIFO cost per inventory list   12/31/12

    470

    450

    830

    960

    Estimated current cost to   manufacture (at December 31,

    2012, and early 2013)

    460

    430

    610

    1,000  

    Sales commissions and estimated   other costs of disposal

    50

    60

    80

    130

    2013 catalog selling price

    500

    540

    900

    1,200  

    The 2012 catalog was in effect through November 2012, and the 2013 catalog is effective as of December 1, 2012. All catalog prices are net of the usual discounts. Generally, the company attempts to obtain a 20% gross profit on selling price and has usually been successful in doing so.

    Instructions

    At what amount should each of the four desks appear in the company’s December 31, 2012, inventory, assuming that the company has adopted a lower of FIFO cost or market approach for valuation of inventories on an individual item basis?

    explain the rationale for the use of the lower of cost or market rule as it applies 645813

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Garcia Home Improvement Company installs replacement siding, windows, and louvered glass doors for single family homes and condominium complexes in northern New Jersey and southern New York. The company is in the process of preparing its annual financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and Jim Alcide, controller for Garcia, has gathered the following data concerning inventory. At May 31, 2012, the balance in Garcia’s Raw Materials Inventory account was $408,000, and the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market had a credit balance of $27,500. Alcide summarized the relevant inventory cost and market data at May 31, 2012, in the schedule below.

    Alcide assigned Patricia Devereaux, an intern from a local college, the task of calculating the amount that should appear on Garcia’s May 31, 2012, financial statements for inventory under the lower of costor market rule as applied to each item in inventory. Devereaux expressed concern over departing from the cost principle.

     

    Cost

    Replacement  

    Cost

    Sales  

    Price  

    Net   Realizable

    Value  

    Normal  

    Profit  

    Aluminum siding

    $   70,000

    $   62,500

    $   64,000

    $   56,000

    $   5,100

    Cedar shake siding

    86,000  

    79,400  

    94,000  

    84,800  

    7,400  

    Louvered glass doors

    112,000  

    124,000  

    186,400  

    168,300  

    18,500  

    Thermal windows

    140,000  

    126,000  

    154,800  

    140,000  

    15,400

    Total

    $408,000  

    $391,900  

    $499,200  

    $449,100  

    $46,400  

    Instructions

    (a) (1) Determine the proper balance in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market at May 31, 2012.

    (2) For the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, determine the amount of the gain or loss that would be recorded due to the change in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market.

    (b) Explain the rationale for the use of the lower of cost or market rule as it applies to inventories.

    prepare the journal entries required at december 31 2012 and at december 31 2013 ass 645814

    (Entries for Lower of Cost or Market—Cost of Goods Sold and Loss) Malone Company determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower of cost or market at December 31, 2011, December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, as shown below.

     

    Cost

    Lower of Cost or Market  

    12/31/11

    $650,000  

    $650,000  

    12/31/12

    780,000  

    712,000  

    12/31/13

    905,000  

    830,000  

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and at December 31, 2013, assuming that a perpetual inventory system and the cost of goods sold method of adjusting to lower of cost or market is used.

    (b) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and at December 31, 2013, assuming that a perpetual inventory is recorded at cost and reduced to lower of cost or market using the loss method.

    prepare a formal labeled schedule computing the fire loss incurred do not use the re 645815

    (Gross Profit Method) Eastman Company lost most of its inventory in a fire in December just before the year end physical inventory was taken. Corporate records disclose the following.

    Inventory (beginning)

    $   80,000

    Sales

    $415,000  

    Purchases

    290,000  

    Sales returns

    21,000  

    Purchase returns

    28,000  

    Gross profit % based on

    net selling price

    35%

     

     

    Merchandise with a selling price of $30,000 remained undamaged after the fire, and damaged merchandise has a salvage value of $8,150. The company does not carry fire insurance on its inventory.

    Instructions

    Prepare a formal labeled schedule computing the fire loss incurred. (Do not use the retail inventory method.)

    compute the inventory for this department as of january 31 at retail prices 645817

    (Retail Inventory Method) The records for the Clothing Department of Sharapova’s Discount Store are summarized below for the month of January.

    Inventory, January 1: at retail $25,000; at cost $17,000

    Purchases in January: at retail $137,000; at cost $82,500

    Freight in: $7,000

    Purchase returns: at retail $3,000; at cost $2,300

    Transfers in from suburban branch: at retail $13,000; at cost $9,200

    Net markups: $8,000

    Net markdowns: $4,000

    Inventory losses due to normal breakage, etc.: at retail $400

    Sales at retail: $95,000

    Sales returns: $2,400

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the inventory for this department as of January 31, at retail prices.

    (b) Compute the ending inventory using lower of average cost or market.

    prepare the inventory section of maddox rsquo s balance sheet as of november 30 2012 645820

    (Statement and Note Disclosure, LCM, and Purchase Commitment) Maddox Specialty Company, a division of Lost World Inc., manufactures three models of gear shift components for bicycles that are sold to bicycle manufacturers, retailers, and catalog outlets. Since beginning operations in 1988, Maddox has used normal absorption costing and has assumed a first in, first out cost flow in its perpetual inventory system. The balances of the inventory accounts at the end of Maddox’s fiscal year, November 30, 2012, are shown below. The inventories are stated at cost before any year end adjustments.

    Finished goods

    $647,000  

    Work in process

    112,500  

    Raw materials

    264,000  

    Factory supplies

    69,000  

    The following information, shown on page 536, relates to Maddox’s inventory and operations.

    1. The finished goods inventory consists of the items analyzed below.

     

    Cost

    Market

    Down   tube shifter

       

    Standard   model

    $67,500

    $67,000

    Click   adjustment model

    94,500

    89,000

    Deluxe   model

    108,000

    110,000

    Total   down tube shifters

    270,000

    266,000

    Bar end   shifter

       

    Standard   model

    83,000

    90,050

    Click   adjustment model

    99,000

    97,550

    Total   bar end shifters

    182,000

    187,600

    Head   tube shifter

       

    Standard   model

    78,000

    77,650

    Click   adjustment model

    117,000

    119,300

    Total   head tube shifters

    195,000

    196,950

    Total finished   goods

    $647,000

    $650,550

    2. One half of the head tube shifter finished goods inventory is held by catalog outlets on consignment.

    3. Three quarters of the bar end shifter finished goods inventory has been pledged as collateral for a bank loan.

    4. One half of the raw materials balance represents derailleurs acquired at a contracted price 20 percent above the current market price. The market value of the rest of the raw materials is $127,400.

    5. The total market value of the work in process inventory is $108,700.

    6. Included in the cost of factory supplies are obsolete items with an historical cost of $4,200. The market value of the remaining factory supplies is $65,900.

    7. Maddox applies the lower of cost or market method to each of the three types of shifters in finished goods inventory. For each of the other three inventory accounts, Maddox applies the lower of costor market method to the total of each inventory account.

    8. Consider all amounts presented above to be material in relation to Maddox’s financial statements taken as a whole.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare the inventory section of Maddox’s balance sheet as of November 30, 2012, including any required note(s).

    (b) Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that the market value of Maddox’s inventories is less than cost. Explain how this decline would be presented in Maddox’s income statement for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

    (c) Assume that Maddox has a firm purchase commitment for the same type of derailleur included in the raw materials inventory as of November 30, 2012, and that the purchase commitment is at a contracted price 15% greater than the current market price. These derailleurs are to be delivered to Maddox after November 30, 2012. Discuss the impact, if any, that this purchase commitment would have on Maddox’s financial statements prepared for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

    then write a memo to greg explaining what designated market value is as well as how 645821

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Fiedler Co. follows the practice of valuing its inventory at the lower of cost or market. The following information is available from the company’s inventory records as of December 31, 2012.

    Item

    Quantity  

    Unit

    Cost

    Replacement  

    Cost/Unit  

    Estimated  

    Selling  

    Price/Unit  

    Completion  

    &   Disposal

    Cost/Unit  

    Normal  

    Profit  

    Margin/Unit  

    A

    1,100  

    $7.50  

    $8.40  

    $10.50  

    $1.50  

    $1.80  

    B

    800

    8.20

    7.90

    9.40

    0.90

    1.20

    C

    1,000  

    5.60

    5.40

    7.20

    1.15

    0.60

    D

    1,000  

    3.80

    4.20

    6.30

    0.80

    1.50

    E

    1,400  

    6.40

    6.30

    6.70

    0.70

    1.00

    Instructions

    Greg Forda is an accounting clerk in the accounting department of Fiedler Co., and he cannot understand why the market value keeps changing from replacement cost to net realizable value to something that he cannot even figure out. Greg is very confused, and he is the one who records inventory purchases and calculates ending inventory. You are the manager of the department and an accountant.

    (a) Calculate the lower of cost or market using the “individual item” approach.

    (b) Show the journal entry he will need to make in order to write down the ending inventory from cost to market.

    (c) Then write a memo to Greg explaining what designated market value is as well as how it is computed. Use your calculations to aid in your explanation.

    prepare a schedule to compute aristotle rsquo s june 30 2012 inventory under the con 645822

    (Conventional and Dollar Value LIFO Retail) As of January 1, 2012, Aristotle Inc. installed the retail method of accounting for its merchandise inventory.

    To prepare the store’s financial statements at June 30, 2012, you obtain the following data.

     

    Cost

    Selling Price

    Inventory,   January 1

    $30,000

    $43,000

    Markdowns

     

    10,500

    Markups

     

    9,200

    Markdown   cancellations

     

    6,500

    Markup   cancellations

     

    3,200

    Purchases

    104,800

    155,000

    Sales

     

    154,000

    Purchase   returns

    2,800

    4,000

    Sales   returns and allowances

     

    8,000

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a schedule to compute Aristotle’s June 30, 2012, inventory under the conventional retail method of accounting for inventories.

    (b) Without prejudice to your solution to part (a), assume that you computed the June 30, 2012, inventory to be $59,400 at retail and the ratio of cost to retail to be 70%. The general price level has increased from 100 at January 1, 2012, to 108 at June 30, 2012. Prepare a schedule to compute the June 30, 2012, inventory at the June 30 price level under the dollar value LIFO retail method.

    estimate the amount of shortage at retail that has occurred at becker department sto 645823

    (Retail, LIFO Retail, and Inventory Shortage) Late in 2009, Joan Seceda and four other investors took the chain of Becker Department Stores private, and the company has just completed its third year of operations under the ownership of the investment group. Andrea Selig, controller of Becker Department Stores, is in the process of preparing the year end financial statements. Based on the preliminary financial statements, Seceda has expressed concern over inventory shortages, and she has asked Selig to determine whether an abnormal amount of theft and breakage has occurred. The accounting records of Becker Department Stores contain the following amounts on November 30, 2012, the end of the fiscal year.

     

    Cost

    Retail

    Beginning   inventory

    $68,000

    $100,000

    Purchases

    255,000

    400,000

    Net   markups

     

    50,000

    Net   markdowns

     

    110,000

    Sales   revenue

     

    320,000

    According to the November 30, 2012, physical inventory, the actual inventory at retail is $115,000.

    Instructions

    (a) Describe the circumstances under which the retail inventory method would be applied and the advantages of using the retail inventory method.

    (b) Assuming that prices have been stable, calculate the value, at cost, of Becker Department Stores’ ending inventory using the last in, first out (LIFO) retail method. Be sure to furnish supporting calculations.

    (c) Estimate the amount of shortage, at retail, that has occurred at Becker Department Stores during the year ended November 30, 2012.

    (d) Complications in the retail method can be caused by such items as (1) freight in costs, (2) purchase returns and allowances, (3) sales returns and allowances, and (4) employee discounts. Explain how each of these four special items is handled in the retail inventory method.

    assume that the cost to retail percentage for 2011 was recomputed correctly in accor 645824

    (Change to LIFO Retail) Diderot Stores Inc., which uses the conventional retail inventory method, wishes to change to the LIFO retail method beginning with the accounting year ending December 31, 2012. Amounts as shown below appear on the store’s books before adjustment.

     

    At   Cost

    At   Retail

    Inventory, January 1, 2012

    $   15,800

    $   24,000

    Purchases in 2012

    116,200  

    184,000  

    Markups in 2012

     

    12,000  

    Markdowns in 2012

     

    5,500  

    Sales in 2012

     

    175,000  

    You are to assume that all markups and markdowns apply to 2012 purchases, and that it is appropriate to treat the entire inventory as a single department.

    Instructions

    Compute the inventory at December 31, 2012, under the following methods.

    (a) The conventional retail method.

    (b) The last in, first out retail method, effecting the change in method as of January 1, 2012. Assume that the cost to retail percentage for 2011 was recomputed correctly in accordance with procedures necessary to change to LIFO. This ratio was 59%.

    assume that the retail value of the december 31 2011 inventory was 60 000 645825

    (Change to LIFO Retail; Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Davenport Department Store converted from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method on January 1, 2012, and is now considering converting to the dollar value LIFO inventory method. During your examination of the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2013, management requested that you furnish a summary showing certain computations of inventory cost for the past 3 years. Here is the available information.

    1. The inventory at January 1, 2011, had a retail value of $56,000 and cost of $29,800 based on the conventional retail method.

    2. Transactions during 2011 were as follows.

     

    Cost

    Retail

    Gross   purchases

    $311,000

    $554,000

    Purchase   returns

    5,200

    10,000

    Purchase   discounts

    6,000

     

    Gross   sales (after employee discounts)

     

    551,000

    Sales   returns

     

    9,000

    Employee   discounts

     

    3,000

    Freight in

    17,600

     

    Net   markups

     

    20,000

    Net   markdowns

     

    12,000

    3. The retail value of the December 31, 2012, inventory was $75,600, the cost ratio for 2012 under the LIFO retail method was 61%, and the regional price index was 105% of the January 1, 2012, price level.

    4. The retail value of the December 31, 2013, inventory was $62,640, the cost ratio for 2013 under the LIFO retail method was 60%, and the regional price index was 108% of the January 1, 2012, price level.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a schedule showing the computation of the cost of inventory on hand at December 31, 2011, based on the conventional retail method.

    (b) Prepare a schedule showing the recomputation of the inventory to be reported on December 31, 2011, in accordance with procedures necessary to convert from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method beginning January 1, 2012. Assume that the retail value of the December 31, 2011, inventory was $60,000.

    (c) Without prejudice to your solution to part (b), assume that you computed the December 31, 2011, inventory (retail value $60,000) under the LIFO retail method at a cost of $33,300. Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the cost of the store’s 2012 and 2013 year end inventories under the dollar value LIFO method.

    what would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold had ogala 645828

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Ogala Corporation purchased a significant amount of raw materials inventory for a new product that it is manufacturing.

    Ogala uses the lower of cost or market rule for these raw materials. The replacement cost of the raw materials is above the net realizable value, and both are below the original cost. Ogala uses the average cost inventory method for these raw materials. In the last 2 years, each purchase has been at a lower price than the previous purchase, and the ending inventory quantity for each period has been higher than the beginning inventory quantity for that period.

    Instructions

    (a) (1) At which amount should Ogala’s raw materials inventory be reported on the balance sheet? Why?

    (2) In general, why is the lower of cost or market rule used to report inventory?

    (b) What would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold had Ogala used the LIFO inventory method instead of the average cost inventory method for the raw materials? Why?

    for each of the items listed above indicate whether this item would be considered in 645832

    (Retail Inventory Method and LIFO Retail) Presented below are a number of items that may be encountered in computing the cost to retail percentage when using the conventional retail method or the LIFO retail method.

    1. Markdowns.

    2. Markdown cancellations.

    3. Cost of items transferred in from other departments.

    4. Retail value of items transferred in from other departments.

    5. Sales discounts.

    6. Purchases discounts (purchases recorded gross).

    7. Estimated retail value of goods broken or stolen.

    8. Cost of beginning inventory.

    9. Retail value of beginning inventory.

    10. Cost of purchases.

    11. Retail value of purchases.

    12. Markups.

    13. Markup cancellations.

    14. Employee discounts (sales recorded net).

    Instructions

    For each of the items listed above, indicate whether this item would be considered in the cost to retail percentage under (a) conventional retail and (b) LIFO retail.

    what was p amp g rsquo s inventory turnover ratio in 2009 what is its gross profit p 645833

    FINANCIAL REPORTING

    Financial Reporting Problem

    The Procter & Gamble Company (P&G)

    Instructions

    Refer to P&G’s financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the following questions.

    (a) How does P&G value its inventories? Which inventory costing method does P&G use as a basis for reporting its inventories?

    (b) How does P&G report its inventories in the balance sheet? In the notes to its financial statements, what three descriptions are used to classify its inventories?

    (c) What costs does P&G include in Inventory and Cost of Products Sold?

    (d) What was P&G’s inventory turnover ratio in 2009? What is its gross profit percentage? Evaluate P&G’s inventory turnover ratio and its gross profit percentage.

    comment on whether prab would report more or less income if it had been on a fifo ba 645835

    Financial Statement Analysis Cases

    Case:  Prab Robots, Inc.

    Prab Robots, Inc., reported the following information regarding 2011–2012 inventory.

    Prab Robots, Inc.

     

    2012

    2011

    Current   assets

       

    Cash

    $153,010

    $538,489

    Accounts   receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $46,000 in 2012 and   $160,000 in 2011

    1,627,980

    2,596,291

    Inventories   (Note 2)

    1,340,494

    1,734,873

    Other   current assets

    123,388

    90,592

    Assets   of discontinued operations

    32,815

    Total   current assets

    3,244,872

    4,993,060

    Instructions

    (a) Why might Prab Robots, Inc., use two different methods for valuing inventory?

    (b) Comment on why Prab Robots, Inc., might disclose how its LIFO inventories would be valued under FIFO.

    (c) Why does the LIFO liquidation reduce operating costs?

    (d) Comment on whether Prab would report more or less income if it had been on a FIFO basis for all its inventory.

    why do you think that there are no finished goods inventories why do you think the r 645836

    Case: Barrick Gold Corporation

    Barrick Gold Corporation, with headquarters in Toronto, Canada, is the world’s most profitable and largest gold mining company outside South Africa. Part of the key to Barrick’s success has been due to its ability to maintain cash flow while improving production and increasing its reserves of gold containing property. In the most recent year, Barrick achieved record growth in cash flow, production, and reserves.

    The company maintains an aggressive policy of developing previously identified target areas that have the possibility of a large amount of gold ore, and that have not been previously developed. Barrick limits the riskiness of this development by choosing only properties that are located in politically stable regions, and by the company’s use of internally generated funds, rather than debt, to finance growth. Barrick’s inventories are as follows.

    Barrick   Gold Corporation

     

    Inventories   (in millions, US dollars)

     

    Current

     

    Gold in   process

    $133

    Mine   operating supplies

    82

     

    $215

    Non current   (included in Other assets)

     

    Ore in   stockpiles

    $65

    Instructions

    (a) Why do you think that there are no finished goods inventories? Why do you think the raw material, ore in stockpiles, is considered to be a non current asset?

    (b) Consider that Barrick has no finished goods inventories. What journal entries are made to record a sale?

    (c) Suppose that gold bullion that cost $1.8 million to produce was sold for $2.4 million. The journal entry was made to record the sale, but no entry was made to remove the gold from the gold in process inventory. How would this error affect the following?

    Balance   Sheet

     

    Income   Statement

     

    Inventory

    ?

    Cost of   goods sold

    ?

    Retained   earnings

    ?

    Net   income

    ?

    Accounts   payable

    ?

       

    Working   capital

    ?

       

    Current   ratio

    ?

       

    which of the two approaches above individual product level or major categories for a 645837

    Accounting, Analysis, and Principles

    Englehart Company sells two types of pumps. One is large and is for commercial use. The other is smaller and is used in residential swimming pools. The following inventory data is available for the month of March.

     

    Units  

    Price   per

    Unit

    Total  

    Residential   Pumps

     

     

     

    Inventory at Feb. 28:

    200

    $ 400  

    $   80,000

    Purchases:

     

     

     

    March 10

    500

    $ 450  

    $225,000  

    March 20

    400

    $ 475  

    $190,000  

    March 30

    300

    $ 500  

    $150,000  

    Sales:

     

     

     

    March 15

    500

    $ 540  

    $270,000  

    March 25

    400

    $ 570  

    $228,000  

    Inventory at March 31:

    500

     

     

    Commercial   Pumps

     

     

     

    Inventory at Feb. 28:

    600

    $ 800  

    $480,000  

    Purchases:

     

     

     

    March 3

    600

    $ 900  

    $540,000  

    March 12

    300

    $ 950  

    $285,000  

    March 21

    500

    $1,000  

    $500,000  

    Sales:

     

     

     

    March 18

    900

    $1,080  

    $972,000  

    March 29

    600

    $1,140  

    $684,000  

    Inventory at March 31:

    500

     

     

    In addition to the above information, due to a downturn in the economy that has hit Englehart’s commercial customers especially hard, Englehart expects commercial pump prices from March 31 onward to be considerably different (and lower) than at the beginning of and during March. Englehart has developed the following additional information.

     

    Commercial   Pumps

    Residential   Pumps

    Expected selling price (per   unit,

    net of costs to sell)

    $1,050  

    $580

    Replacement cost

    $ 900  

    $550

    The normal profit margin is 16.67 percent of cost. Englehart uses the FIFO accounting method.

    Accounting

    (a) Determine the dollar amount that Englehart should report on its March 31 balance sheet for inventory. Assume Englehart applies lower of cost or market at the individual product level.

    (b) Repeat part (a) but assume Englehart applies lower of cost or market at the major category level. Englehart places both commercial and residential pumps into the same (and only) category.

    Analysis

    Which of the two approaches above (individual product level or major categories) for applying LCM do you think gives the financial statement reader better information?

    Principles

    Assume that during April, the replacement cost of commercial pumps rebounds to $1,050 (assume this will be designated market value).

    (a) Briefly describe how Englehart will report in its April financial statements the inventory remaining from March 31.

    (b) Briefly describe the conceptual trade offs inherent in the accounting in part (a).

    identify the primary authoritative guidance for the accounting for inventories what 645838

    BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION

    Professional Research: FASB Codification

    Jones Co. is in a technology intensive industry. Recently, one of its competitors introduced a new product with technology that might render obsolete some of Jones’s inventory. The accounting staff wants to follow the appropriate authoritative literature in determining the accounting for this significant market event.

    Instructions

    (a) Identify the primary authoritative guidance for the accounting for inventories. What is the predecessor literature?

    (b) List three types of goods that are classified as inventory. What characteristic will automatically exclude an item from being classified as inventory?

    (c) Define “market” as used in the phrase “lower of cost or market.”

    (d) Explain when it is acceptable to state inventory above cost and which industries allow this practice.

    from the information above determine the amount of sedato company rsquo s inventory 645787

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Sedato Company follows the practice of pricing its inventory at the lower of cost or market, on an individual item basis.

    Item

    No.

    Quantity  

    Cost

    per   Unit

    Cost   to

    Replace  

    Estimated  

    Selling   Price

    Cost   of Completion

    and   Disposal

    Normal  

    Profit  

    1320

    1,200  

    $3.20  

    $3.00  

    $4.50  

    $0.35  

    $1.25  

    1333

    900

    2.70

    2.30

    3.40

    0.50

    0.50

    1426

    800

    4.50

    3.70

    5.00

    0.40

    1.00

    1437

    1,000  

    3.60

    3.10

    3.20

    0.45

    0.90

    1510

    700

    2.25

    2.00

    3.25

    0.80

    0.60

    1522

    500

    3.00

    2.70

    3.90

    0.40

    0.50

    1573

    3,000  

    1.80

    1.60

    2.50

    0.75

    0.50

    1626

    1,000  

    4.70

    5.20

    6.00

    0.50

    1.00

    Instructions

    From the information above, determine the amount of Sedato Company’s inventory.

    which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year 645788

    (Lower of Cost or Market—Journal Entries) Dover Company began operations in 2012 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower of cost or market at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. This information is presented below.

     

    Cost

    Lower of Cost or Market

    12/31/2012

    $346,000

    $322,000

    12/31/2013

    410,000

    390,000

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at lower of cost or market, and a perpetual inventory system. Assume the cost of goods sold method with no allowance used.

    (b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013, assuming that the inventory is recorded at lower of cost or market, and a perpetual inventory system. Assume the loss method with an allowance used.

    (c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?

    prepare the journal entry required to establish the valuation account at january 31 645789

    (Lower of Cost or Market—Valuation Account) Presented below is information related to Knight Enterprises.

     

    Jan.   31

    Feb.   28

    Mar.   31

    Apr.   30

    Inventory at cost

    $15,000  

    $15,100  

    $17,000  

    $14,000

    Inventory at the   lower of cost or market

    14,500  

    12,600  

    15,600  

    13,300  

    Purchases for the month

     

    17,000  

    24,000  

    26,500  

    Sales for the month

     

    29,000  

    35,000  

    40,000  

    Instructions

    (a) From the information, prepare (as far as the data permit) monthly income statements in columnar form for February, March, and April. The inventory is to be shown in the statement at cost, the gain or loss due to market fluctuations is to be shown separately, and a valuation account is to be set up for the difference between cost and the lower of cost or market.

    (b) Prepare the journal entry required to establish the valuation account at January 31 and entries to adjust it monthly thereafter.

    compute the effect of this error on net income for 2012 and the effect on net income 645790

    (Lower of Cost or Market—Error Effect) LaGreca Company uses the lower of cost or market method, on an individual item basis, in pricing its inventory items. The inventory at December 31, 2012, included product X. Relevant per unit data for product X appear below.

    Estimated selling price

    $50

    Cost

    40

    Replacement cost

    38

    Estimated selling expense

    14

    Normal profit

    9

    There were 1,000 units of product X on hand at December 31, 2012. Product X was incorrectly valued at $38 per unit for reporting purposes. All 1,000 units were sold in 2013.

    Instructions

    Compute the effect of this error on net income for 2012 and the effect on net income for 2013, and indicate the direction of the misstatement for each year.

    at the end of the fiscal year larsen realty corporation instructs you to arrive at t 645791

    (Relative Sales Value Method) Larsen Realty Corporation purchased a tract of unimproved land for $55,000. This land was improved and subdivided into building lots at an additional cost of $30,000. These building lots were all of the same size but owing to differences in location were offered for sale at different prices as follows.

    Group

    No.   of Lots

    Price   per Lot

    1

    9

    $3,000  

    2

    15

    4,000  

    3

    19

    2,000  

    Operating expenses for the year allocated to this project total $18,200. Lots unsold at the year end were as follows.

    Group 1

    5   lots

    Group 2

    7   lots

    Group 3

    2   lots

    Instructions

    At the end of the fiscal year Larsen Realty Corporation instructs you to arrive at the net income realized on this operation to date.

    what is the amount of gross profit realized during 2013 what is the amount of invent 645792

    (Relative Sales Value Method) During 2013, Crawford Furniture Company purchases a carload of wicker chairs. The manufacturer sells the chairs to Crawford for a lump sum of $60,000 because it is discontinuing manufacturing operations and wishes to dispose of its entire stock. Three types of chairs are included in the carload. The three types and the estimated selling price for each are listed below.

    Type

    No.   of Chairs

    Estimated   Selling Price Each

    Lounge chairs

    400

    $90

    Armchairs

    300

    80

    Straight chairs

    800

    50

    During 2013, Crawford sells 200 lounge chairs, 100 armchairs, and 120 straight chairs.

    Instructions

    What is the amount of gross profit realized during 2013? What is the amount of inventory of unsold straight chairs on December 31, 2013?

    assuming that the market price as of december 31 2013 is 2 70 instead of 3 30 how wo 645794

    (Purchase Commitments) At December 31, 2013, Volkan Company has outstanding noncancelable purchase commitments for 40,000 gallons, at $3.00 per gallon, of raw material to be used in its manufacturing process. The company prices its raw material inventory at cost or market, whichever is lower.

    Instructions

    (a) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2013, is $3.30, how would this matter be treated in the accounts and statements? Explain.

    (b) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2013, is $2.70, instead of $3.30, how would you treat this situation in the accounts and statements?

    (c) Give the entry in January 2014, when the 40,000 gallon shipment is received, assuming that the situation given in (b) above existed at December 31, 2013, and that the market price in January 2014 was $2.70 per gallon. Give an explanation of your treatment.

    compute the estimated inventory at may 31 assuming that the gross profit is 25 of sa 645795

    (Gross Profit Method) Astaire Company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly reporting purposes. Presented below is information for the month of May.

    Inventory, May 1

    $   160,000

    Purchases (gross)

    640,000  

    Freight in

    30,000  

    Sales

    1,000,000  

    Sales returns

    70,000  

    Purchase discounts

    12,000  

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of sales.

    (b) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of cost.

    compute the amount of the loss as a result of the fire assuming that the corporation 645797

    (Gross Profit Method) Castlevania Company lost most of its inventory in a fire in December just before the year end physical inventory was taken. The corporation’s books disclosed the following.

    Beginning inventory

    $170,000  

    Sales

    $650,000  

    Purchases for the year

    450,000  

    Sales returns

    24,000  

    Purchase returns

    30,000  

    Rate of gross profit on net   sales

    30%

    Merchandise with a selling price of $21,000 remained undamaged after the fire. Damaged merchandise with an original selling price of $15,000 had a net realizable value of $5,300.

    Instructions

    Compute the amount of the loss as a result of the fire, assuming that the corporation had no insurance coverage.

    compute the claim against the insurance company 645798

    (Gross Profit Method) You are called by Kevin Garnett of Celtic Co. on July 16 and asked to prepare a claim for insurance as a result of a theft that took place the night before. You suggest that an inventory be taken immediately. The following data are available.

    Inventory, July 1

    $   38,000

    Purchases—goods placed in stock   July 1–15

    90,000  

    Sales—goods delivered to   customers (gross)

    116,000  

    Sales returns—goods returned to   stock

    4,000  

    Your client reports that the goods on hand on July 16 cost $30,500, but you determine that this figure includes goods of $6,000 received on a consignment basis. Your past records show that sales are made at approximately 25% over cost. Garnett’s insurance covers only goods owned.

    Instructions

    Compute the claim against the insurance company.

    submit your estimate of the inventory amounts immediately preceding the fire 645799

    (Gross Profit Method) Sliver Lumber Company handles three principal lines of merchandise with these varying rates of gross profit on cost.

    Lumber

    25%

    Millwork

    30%

    Hardware

    40%

    On August 18, a fire destroyed the office, lumber shed, and a considerable portion of the lumber stacked in the yard. To file a report of loss for insurance purposes, the company must know what the inventories were immediately preceding the fire. No detail or perpetual inventory records of any kind were maintained. The only pertinent information you are able to obtain are the following facts from the general ledger, which was kept in a fireproof vault and thus escaped destruction.

     

    Lumber  

    Millwork  

    Hardware  

    Inventory, Jan. 1, 2013

    $   250,000

    $ 90,000  

    $   45,000

    Purchases to Aug. 18, 2013

    1,500,000  

    375,000  

    160,000  

    Sales to Aug. 18, 2013

    2,050,000  

    533,000  

    245,000  

    Instructions

    Submit your estimate of the inventory amounts immediately preceding the fire.

    compute the ending inventory assuming that a gross profit is 40 of sales b gross pro 645800

    (Gross Profit Method) Presented below is information related to Jerrold Corporation for the current year.

    Beginning   inventory

    $600,000

     

    Purchases

    1,500,000

     

    Total   goods available for sale

     

    $2,100,000

    Sales

     

    2,300,000

    Instructions

    Compute the ending inventory, assuming that (a) gross profit is 40% of sales; (b) gross profit is 60% of cost;

    (c) gross profit is 35% of sales; and (d) gross profit is 25% of cost.

    compute a cost to retail percentage round to two decimals under the following condit 645801

    (Retail Inventory Method) Presented below is information related to McKenna Company.

     

    Cost

    Retail

    Beginning   inventory

    $58,000

    $100,000

    Purchases   (net)

    122,000

    200,000

    Net   markups

     

    20,000

    Net   markdowns

     

    30,000

    Sales

     

    186,000

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the ending inventory at retail.

    (b) Compute a cost to retail percentage (round to two decimals) under the following conditions.

    (1) Excluding both markups and markdowns.

    (2) Excluding markups but including markdowns.

    (3) Excluding markdowns but including markups.

    (4) Including both markdowns and markups.

    (c) Which of the methods in (b) above (1, 2, 3, or 4) does the following?

    (1) Provides the most conservative estimate of ending inventory.

    (2) Provides an approximation of lower of cost or market.

    (3) Is used in the conventional retail method.

    (d) Compute ending inventory at lower of cost or market (round to nearest dollar).

    (e) Compute cost of goods sold based on (d).

    (f) Compute gross profit based on (d).

    compute the ending inventory by the conventional retail inventory method 645803

    (Retail Inventory Method) The records of Mandy’s Boutique report the following data for the month of April.

    Sales

    $95,000

    Purchases   (at cost)

    $55,000

    Sales   returns

    2,000

    Purchases   (at sales price)

    88,000

    Markups

    10,000

    Purchase   returns (at cost)

    2,000

    Markup   cancellations

    1,500

    Purchase   returns (at sales price)

    3,000

    Markdowns

    9,300

    Beginning   inventory (at cost)

    30,000

    Markdown   cancellations

    2,800

    Beginning   inventory (at sales price)

    46,500

    Freight   on purchases

    2,400

       

    Instructions

    Compute the ending inventory by the conventional retail inventory method.

    compute general mills rsquo s a inventory turnover and b the average days to sell in 645804

    (Analysis of Inventories) The financial statements of General Mills, Inc.’s 2010 annual report disclose the following information.

    (in   millions)

    30 May 10

    31 May 09

    25 May 08

    Inventories

    $1,344

    $1,347

    $1,367

       

    Fiscal Year

       

    2010

    2009

    Sales

     

    $14,797

    $14,691

    Cost of   goods sold

     

    8,923

    9,458

    Net   income

     

    1,535

    1,314

    Instructions

    Compute General Mills’s (a) inventory turnover and (b) the average days to sell inventory for 2010 and 2009.

    determine the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both a the conventional retail 645805

    (Retail Inventory Method—Conventional and LIFO) Brewster Company began operations on January 1, 2012, adopting the conventional retail inventory system. None of the company’s merchandise was marked down in 2012 and, because there was no beginning inventory, its ending inventory for 2012 of $41,100 would have been the same under either the conventional retail system or the LIFO retail system.

    On December 31, 2013, the store management considers adopting the LIFO retail system and desires to know how the December 31, 2013, inventory would appear under both systems. All pertinent data regarding purchases, sales, markups, and markdowns are shown on the next page. There has been no change in the price level.

     

    Cost

    Retail

    Inventory,   Jan. 1, 2013

    $41,100

    $60,000

    Markdowns   (net)

     

    13,000

    Markups   (net)

     

    22,000

    Purchases   (net)

    150,000

    191,000

    Sales   (net)

     

    167,000

    Instructions

    Determine the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both (a) the conventional retail method and (b) the LIFO retail method.

    compute the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both a the conventional retail m 645806

    (Retail Inventory Method—Conventional and LIFO) Robinson Company began operations late in 2012 and adopted the conventional retail inventory method. Because there was no beginning inventory for 2012 and no markdowns during 2012, the ending inventory for 2012 was $14,000 under both the conventional retail method and the LIFO retail method. At the end of 2013, management wants to compare the results of applying the conventional and LIFO retail methods. There was no change in the price level during 2013. The following data are available for computations.

     

    Cost

    Retail  

    Inventory, January 1, 2013

    $14,000  

    $20,000  

    Sales

     

    75,000  

    Net markups

     

    9,000  

    Net markdowns

     

    2,500  

    Purchases

    55,500  

    81,000  

    Freight in

    7,500  

     

    Estimated theft

     

    2,000  

    Instructions

    Compute the cost of the 2013 ending inventory under both (a) the conventional retail method and (b) the LIFO retail method.

    compute the cost of the inventory on december 31 2012 assuming that the inventory at 645807

    (Dollar Value LIFO Retail) You assemble the following information for Dillon Department Store, which computes its inventory under the dollar value LIFO method.

     

    Cost

    Retail  

    Inventory on January 1, 2012

    $222,000  

    $300,000  

    Purchases

    364,800  

    480,000  

    Increase in price level for   year

     

    9%

    Instructions

    Compute the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2012, assuming that the inventory at retail is (a) $294,300 and (b) $359,700.

    compute the ending inventory under the dollar value lifo method at december 31 2013 645808

    (Dollar Value LIFO Retail) Presented below is information related to Atrium Corporation.

     

    Price  

    Index  

    LIFO

    Cost

    Retail  

    Inventory on December 31, 2012,  

    when dollar value LIFO is   adopted

    100

    $36,000  

    $74,500  

    Inventory, December 31, 2013

    110

    ?

    95,150  

    Instructions

    Compute the ending inventory under the dollar value LIFO method at December 31, 2013. The cost toretail ratio for 2013 was 55%.

    using the lower of cost or market rule determine the proper unit value for balance s 645786

    (Lower of Cost or Market) Riegel Company uses the lower of cost or market method, on an individual item basis, in pricing its inventory items. The inventory at December 31, 2013, consists of products D, E, F, G, H, and I. Relevant per unit data for these products appear below.

     

    Item

    D

    Item

    E

    Item

    F

    Item

    G

    Item

    H

    Item

    I

    Estimated selling price

    $120

    $110

    $95

    $90

    $110

    $90

    Cost

    75

    80

    80

    80

    50

    36

    Replacement cost

    120

    72

    70

    30

    70

    30

    Estimated selling expense

    30

    30

    35

    35

    30

    30

    Normal profit

    20

    20

    20

    20

    20

    20

    Instructions

    Using the lower of cost or market rule, determine the proper unit value for balance sheet reporting purposes at December 31, 2013, for each of the inventory items above.

    a manufacturer of toothpaste has estimated the price at which the product will sell 645738

    A manufacturer of toothpaste has estimated the price at which the product will sell, making use of market surveys and consumer analysis. A profit margin has been set. Finally a target cost has been established by subtracting the expected profit from the estimated selling price. The plant manager and the research and development unit have been asked to design the product in such a way that it can be produced within the target cost.

    A rival manufacturer of toothpaste takes a different approach. Here the selling price is again estimated from market surveys and consumer analysis and a profit margin is set. However, the product design is then accepted on the recommendation of the research and development unit and the plant manager focuses on a programme of continuous improvement which will keep costs within acceptable limits. Is there a role for management accounting in either of these situations?

    compute the ending inventories under the dollar value lifo method for 2011 2012 and 645752

    (Internal Indexes—Dollar Value LIFO) Presented below is information related to Kaisson Corporation for the last 3 years.

     

    Quantities in Ending   Inventories

    Base Year   Cost

    Current Year   Cost

     

     

     

    Item

    Unit Cost

    Amount

    Unit Cost

    Amount

    December 31, 2011

     

     

    A

    9,000

     

    $2.00  

    $18,000  

    $2.20  

    $19,800  

    B

    6,000

     

    3.00

    18,000  

    3.55

    21,300  

    C

    4,000

     

    5.00

    20,000  

    5.40

    21,600  

     

    Totals  

    $56,000
     

     

    $62,700  

    December 31, 2012

     

    A

    9,000

    $2.00  

    $18,000  

    $2.60  

    $23,400  

    B

    6,800

    3.00

    20,400  

    3.75

    25,500  

    C

    6,000

    5.00

    30,000  

    6.40

    38,400  

     

    Totals  

    $68,400  

     

    $87,300  

    December 31, 2013

     

    A

    8,000

    $2.00  

    $16,000  

    $2.70  

    $21,600  

    B

    8,000

    3.00

    24,000  

    4.00

    32,000  

    C

    6,000

    5.00

    30,000  

    6.20

    37,200  

     

    Totals  

    $70,000  

     

    $90,800  

                       

    Instructions

    Compute the ending inventories under the dollar value LIFO method for 2011, 2012, and 2013. The base period is January 1, 2011, and the beginning inventory cost at that date was $45,000. Compute indexes to two decimal places.

    compute the ending inventory for richardson company for 2008 through 2013 using doll 645753

    (Dollar Value LIFO) Richardson Company cans a variety of vegetable type soups. Recently, the company decided to value its inventories using dollar value LIFO pools. The clerk who accounts for inventories does not understand how to value the inventory pools using this new method, so, as a private consultant, you have been asked to teach him how this new method works. He has provided you with the following information about purchases made over a 6 year period.

    Date

    Ending Inventory  (End of Year Prices)

    Price   Index

    Dec. 31, 2008

    $   80,000

    100

    Dec. 31, 2009

    111,300  

    105

    Dec. 31, 2010

    108,000  

    120

    Dec. 31, 2011

    128,700  

    130

    Dec. 31, 2012

    147,000  

    140

    Dec. 31, 2013

    174,000  

    145

    You have already explained to him how this inventory method is maintained, but he would feel better about it if you were to leave him detailed instructions explaining how these calculations are done and why he needs to put all inventories at a base year value.

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the ending inventory for Richardson Company for 2008 through 2013 using dollar value LIFO.

    (b) Using your computation schedules as your illustration, write a step by step set of instructions explaining how the calculations are done. Begin your explanation by briefly explaining the theory behind this inventory method, including the purpose of putting all amounts into base year price levels.

    for what possible reason s might your client wish to postpone recording the transact 645754

    (Inventoriable Costs) You are asked to travel to Milwaukee to observe and verify the inventory of the Milwaukee branch of one of your clients. You arrive on Thursday, December 30, and find that the inventory procedures have just been started. You spot a railway car on the sidetrack at the unloading door and ask the warehouse superintendent, Buck Rogers, how he plans to inventory the contents of the car. He responds, “We are not going to include the contents in the inventory.”

    Later in the day, you ask the bookkeeper for the invoice on the carload and the related freight bill. The invoice lists the various items, prices, and extensions of the goods in the car. You note that the carload was shipped December 24 from Albuquerque, f.o.b. Albuquerque, and that the total invoice price of the goods in the car was $35,300. The freight bill called for a payment of $1,500. Terms were net 30 days. The bookkeeper affirms the fact that this invoice is to be held for recording in January.

    Instructions

    (a) Does your client have a liability that should be recorded at December 31? Discuss.

    (b) Prepare a journal entry(ies), if required, to reflect any accounting adjustment required. Assume a perpetual inventory system is used by your client.

    (c) For what possible reason(s) might your client wish to postpone recording the transaction?

    the trust is able to finance the coal purchase and pay off the loan as it is paid by 645756

    (Inventoriable Costs) George Solti, the controller for Garrison Lumber Company, has recently hired you as assistant controller. He wishes to determine your expertise in the area of inventory accounting and therefore asks you to answer the following unrelated questions.

    (a) A company is involved in the wholesaling and retailing of automobile tires for foreign cars. Most of the inventory is imported, and it is valued on the company’s records at the actual inventory cost plus freight in. At year end, the warehousing costs are prorated over cost of goods sold and ending inventory. Are warehousing costs considered a product cost or a period cost?

    (b) A certain portion of a company’s “inventory” is composed of obsolete items. Should obsolete items that are not currently consumed in the production of “goods or services to be available for sale” be classified as part of inventory?

    (c) A company purchases airplanes for sale to others. However, until they are sold, the company charters and services the planes. What is the proper way to report these airplanes in the company’s financial statements?

    (d) A company wants to buy coal deposits but does not want the financing for the purchase to be reported on its financial statements. The company therefore establishes a trust to acquire the coal deposits. The company agrees to buy the coal over a certain period of time at specified prices. The trust is able to finance the coal purchase and pay off the loan as it is paid by the company for the minerals. How should this transaction be reported?

    discuss the ways and conditions under which the fifo and lifo inventory costing meth 645758

    (General Inventory Issues) In January 2012, Susquehanna Inc. requested and secured permission from the commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service to compute inventories under the last in, first out (LIFO) method and elected to determine inventory cost under the dollar value LIFO method. Susquehanna Inc. satisfied the commissioner that cost could be accurately determined by use of an index number computed from a representative sample selected from the company’s single inventory pool.

    Instructions

    (a) Why should inventories be included in (1) a balance sheet and (2) the computation of net income?

    (b) The Internal Revenue Code allows some accountable events to be considered differently for income tax reporting purposes and financial accounting purposes, while other accountable events must be reported the same for both purposes. Discuss why it might be desirable to report some accountable events differently for financial accounting purposes than for income tax reporting purposes.

    (c) Discuss the ways and conditions under which the FIFO and LIFO inventory costing methods produce different inventory valuations. Do not discuss procedures for computing inventory cost.

    discuss the specific advantages and disadvantages of using the dollar value lifo app 645761

    (LIFO Application and Advantages) Geddes Corporation is a medium sized manufacturing company with two divisions and three subsidiaries, all located in the United States. The Metallic Division manufactures metal castings for the automotive industry, and the Plastic Division produces small plastic items for electrical products and other uses. The three subsidiaries manufacture various products for other industrial users.

    Geddes Corporation plans to change from the lower of first in, first out (FIFO) cost or market method of inventory valuation to the last in, first out (LIFO) method of inventory valuation to obtain tax benefits. To make the method acceptable for tax purposes, the change also will be made for its annual financial statements.

    Instructions

    (a) Describe the establishment of and subsequent pricing procedures for each of the following LIFO inventory methods.

    (1) LIFO applied to units of product when the periodic inventory system is used.

    (2) Application of the dollar value method to LIFO units of product.

    (b) Discuss the specific advantages and disadvantages of using the dollar value LIFO application as compared to specific goods LIFO (unit LIFO). Ignore income tax considerations.

    (c) Discuss the general advantages and disadvantages claimed for LIFO methods.

    prepare a schedule that illustrates and compares the following data for harrisburg c 645763

    (FIFO and LIFO) Harrisburg Company is considering changing its inventory valuation method from FIFO to LIFO because of the potential tax savings. However, the management wishes to consider all of the effects on the company, including its reported performance, before making the final decision.

    The inventory account, currently valued on the FIFO basis, consists of 1,000,000 units at $8 per unit on January 1, 2012. There are 1,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of January 1, 2012, and the cash balance is $400,000.

    The company has made the following forecasts for the period 2012–2014.

     

    2012

    2013

    2014

    Unit   sales (in millions of units)

    1.1

    1

    1.3

    Sales   price per unit

    $10

    $12

    $12

    Unit   purchases (in millions of units)

    1

    1.1

    1.2

    Purchase   price per unit

    $8

    $9

    $10

    Annual   depreciation (in thousands of dollars)

    $300

    $300

    $300

    Cash   dividends per share

    $0.15

    $0.15

    $0.15

    Cash   payments for additions to and replacement of plant and equipment (in   thousands of dollars)

    $350

    $350

    $350

    Income   tax rate

    40%

    40%

    40%

    Operating   expenses (exclusive of depreciation) as a percent of sales

    15%

    15%

    15%

    Common   shares outstanding (in millions)

    1

    1

    1

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a schedule that illustrates and compares the following data for Harrisburg Company under the FIFO and the LIFO inventory method for 2012–2014. Assume the company would begin LIFO at the beginning of 2012.

    (1) Year end inventory balances.

    (2) Annual net income after taxes.

    (3) Earnings per share.

    (4) Cash balance.

    Assume all sales are collected in the year of sale and all purchases, operating expenses, and taxes are paid during the year incurred.

    (b) Using the data above, your answer to (a), and any additional issues you believe need to be considered, prepare a report that recommends whether or not Harrisburg Company should change to the LIFO inventory method. Support your conclusions with appropriate arguments.

    does the use of a different costing system for different types of inventory mean tha 645765

    FINANCIAL REPORTING

    Financial Statement Analysis Cases

    Case: T J International

    T J International was founded in 1969 as Trus Joist International. The firm, a manufacturer of specialty building products, has its headquarters in Boise, Idaho. The company, through its partnership in the Trus Joist MacMillan joint venture, develops and manufactures engineered lumber. This product is a high quality substitute for structural lumber, and uses lower grade wood and materials formerly considered waste. The company also is majority owner of the Outlook Window Partnership, which is a consortium of three wood and vinyl window manufacturers.

    Following is T J International’s adapted income statement and information concerning inventories from its annual report.

    T J International

    Sales

    $618,876,000

    Cost of   goods sold

    475,476,000

    Gross   profit

    143,400,000

    Selling   and administrative expenses

    102,112,000

    Income   from operations

    41,288,000

    Other   expense

    24,712,000

    Income   before income tax

    16,576,000

    Income   taxes

    7,728,000

    Net   income

    $8,848,000

    Inventories. Inventories are valued at the lower of cost or market and include material, labor, and production overhead costs. Inventories consisted of the following:

     

    Current Year

    Prior Year

    Finished   goods

    $27,512,000

    $23,830,000

    Raw   materials and
      work in progress

    34,363,000

    33,244,000

     

    61,875,000

    57,074,000

    Reduction   to LIFO cost

    5,263,000

    3,993,000

     

    $56,612,000

    $53,081,000

    The last in, first out (LIFO) method is used for determining the cost of lumber, veneer, Microllam lumber, TJI joists, and open web joists. Approximately 35 percent of total inventories at the end of the current year were valued using the LIFO method. The first in, first out (FIFO) method is used to determine the cost of all other inventories.

    Instructions

    (a) How much would income before taxes have been if FIFO costing had been used to value all inventories?

    (b) If the income tax rate is 46.6%, what would income tax have been if FIFO costing had been used to value all inventories? In your opinion, is this difference in net income between the two methods material? Explain.

    (c) Does the use of a different costing system for different types of inventory mean that there is a different physical flow of goods among the different types of inventory?

    why do you think that this amount is not shown in a separate inventory account in wh 645766

    Case: Noven Pharmaceuticals, Inc.

    Noven Pharmaceuticals, Inc., headquartered in Miami, Florida, describes itself in a recent annual report as follows.

    Noven Pharmaceuticals, Inc.

    Noven is a place of ideas—a company where scientific excellence and state of the art manufacturing combine to create new answers to human needs. Our transdermal delivery systems speed drugs painlessly and effortlessly into the bloodstream by means of a simple skin patch. This technology has proven applications in estrogen replacement, but at Noven we are developing a variety of systems incorporating bestselling drugs that fight everything from asthma, anxiety and dental pain to cancer, heart disease and neurological illness. Our research portfolio also includes new technologies, such as iontophoresis, in which drugs are delivered through the skin by means of electrical currents, as well as products that could satisfy broad consumer needs, such as our anti microbial mouthrinse.

    Noven also reported in its annual report that its activities to date have consisted of product development efforts, some of which have been independent and some of which have been completed in conjunction with Rhone Poulenc Rorer (RPR) and Ciba Geigy. The revenues so far have consisted of money received from licensing fees, “milestone” payments (payments made under licensing agreements when certain stages of the development of a certain product have been completed), and interest on its investments. The company expects that it will have significant revenue in the upcoming fiscal year from the launch of its first product, a transdermal estrogen delivery system.

    The current assets portion of Noven’s balance sheet follows.

    Cash and   cash equivalents

    $12,070,272

    Securities   held to maturity

    23,445,070

    Inventory   of supplies

    1,264,553

    Prepaid   and other current assets

    825,159

    Total current   assets

    $37,605,054

    Inventory of supplies is recorded at the lower of cost (first in, first out) or net realizable value and consists mainly of supplies for research and development.

    Instructions

    (a) What would you expect the physical flow of goods for a pharmaceutical manufacturer to be most like: FIFO, LIFO, or random (flow of goods does not follow a set pattern)? Explain.

    (b) What are some of the factors that Noven should consider as it selects an inventory measurement method?

    (c) Suppose that Noven had $49,000 in an inventory of transdermal estrogen delivery patches. These patches are from an initial production run, and will be sold during the coming year.

    Why do you think that this amount is not shown in a separate inventory account? In which of the accounts shown is the inventory likely to be? At what point will the inventory be transferred to a separate inventory account?

    state which method you would choose to evaluate supervalu rsquo s performance justif 645767

    Case: SUPER VALU

    SUPERVALU reported the following data in its annual report.

     

    Feb. 23,   2008

    Feb. 28,   2009

    Feb. 27,   2010

    Total   revenues

    $44,048

    $44,564

    $40,597

    Cost of   sales (using LIFO)

    33,943

    34,451

    31,444

    Year end   inventories using FIFO

    2,956

    2,967

    2,606

    Year end   inventories using LIFO

    2,776

    2,709

    2,342

    (a) Compute SUPERVALU’s inventory turnover ratios for 2009 and 2010, using:

    (1) Cost of sales and LIFO inventory.

    (2) Cost of sales and FIFO inventory.

    (b) Some firms calculate inventory turnover using sales rather than cost of goods sold in the numerator. Calculate SUPERVALU’s 2009 and 2010 turnover, using:

    (1) Sales and LIFO inventory.

    (2) Sales and FIFO inventory.

    (c) Describe the method that SUPERVALU’s appears to use.

    (d) State which method you would choose to evaluate SUPERVALU’s performance. Justify your choice.

    in what situations would a reasonable estimate of returns be difficult to make 645769

    BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION

    Professional Research: FASB Codification

    In conducting year end inventory counts, your audit team is debating the impact of the client’s right of return policy both on inventory valuation and revenue recognition. The assistant controller argues that there is no need to worry about the return policies since they have not changed in a while. The audit senior wants a more authoritative answer and has asked you to conduct some research of the authoritative literature, before she presses the point with the client.

    Instructions

    (a) What is the authoritative guidance for revenue recognition when right of return exists?

    (b) When is this guidance important for a company?

    (c) Sales with high rates of return can ultimately cause inventory to be misstated. Why are returns allowed? Should different industries be able to make different types of return policies?

    (d) In what situations would a reasonable estimate of returns be difficult to make?

    in some instances accounting principles require a departure from valuing inventories 645774

    In some instances, accounting principles require a departure from valuing inventories at cost alone. Determine the proper unit inventory price in the following cases.

     

    Cases

     

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    Cost

    $15.90

    $16.10

    $15.90

    $15.90

    $15.90

    Net   realizable value

    14.5

    19.2

    15.2

    10.4

    16.4

    Net   realizable value less normal profit

    12.8

    17.6

    13.75

    8.8

    14.8

    Market   (replacement cost)

    14.8

    17.2

    12.8

    9.7

    16.8

    under what circumstances is relative sales value an appropriate basis for determinin 645775

    1. What method(s) might be used in the accounts to record a loss due to a price decline in the inventories? Discuss.

    2. What factors might call for inventory valuation at sales prices (net realizable value or market price)?

    3. Under what circumstances is relative sales value an appropriate basis for determining the price assigned to inventory?

    4. At December 31, 2012, Ashley Co. has outstanding purchase commitments for 150,000 gallons, at $6.20 per gallon, of a raw material to be used in its manufacturing process. The company prices its raw material inventory at cost or market, whichever is lower. Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2012, is $5.90, how would you treat this situation in the accounts?

    5. What are the major uses of the gross profit method?

    what is the approximate inventory on february 10 2012 645777

    A fire destroys all of the merchandise of Assante Company on February 10, 2012. Presented below is information compiled up to the date of the fire.

    Inventory, January 1, 2012

    $   400,000

    Sales to February 10, 2012

    1,950,000  

    Purchases to February 10, 2012

    1,140,000  

    Freight in to February 10, 2012  

    60,000  

    Rate of gross profit on selling   price

    40%

    What is the approximate inventory on February 10, 2012?

    if the results of a physical inventory indicated an inventory at retail of 295 000 w 645778

    1. What conditions must exist for the retail inventory method to provide valid results?

    2. The conventional retail inventory method yields results that are essentially the same as those yielded by the lower of cost or market method. Explain. Prepare an illustration of how the retail inventory method reduces inventory to market.

    3. (a) Determine the ending inventory under the conventional retail method for the furniture department of Mayron Department Stores from the following data.

     

    Cost

    Retail

    Inventory,   Jan. 1

    $149,000

    $283,500

    Purchases

    1,400,000

    2,160,000

    Freight in

    70,000

     

    Markups,   net

     

    92,000

    Markdowns,   net

     

    48,000

    Sales

     

    2,175,000

    (b) If the results of a physical inventory indicated an inventory at retail of $295,000, what inferences would you draw?

    determine the following a the two limits to market value i e the ceiling and the flo 645780

    (per unit)

    Skis

    Boots  

    Parkas  

    Historical cost

    $190.00  

    $106.00  

    $53.00  

    Selling price

    212.00  

    145.00  

    73.75  

    Cost to distribute

    19.00  

    8.00

    2.50

    Current replacement cost

    203.00  

    105.00  

    51.00  

    Normal profit margin

    32.00  

    29.00  

    21.25  

    Determine the following: (a) the two limits to market value (i.e., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (b) the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; and (c) the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market.

    determine the cost per cd for each group using the relative sales value method 645782

    1. Kumar Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. At January 1, 2013, inventory was $214,000 at both cost and market value. At December 31, 2013, the inventory was $286,000 at cost and $265,000 at market value.

    Prepare the necessary December 31 entry under (a) the cost of goods sold method and (b) the loss method.

    2. Bell, Inc. buys 1,000 computer game CDs from a distributor who is discontinuing those games. The purchase price for the lot is $8,000. Bell will group the CDs into three price categories for resale, as indicated below.

    Group

    No.   of CDs

    Price   per CD

    1

    100

    $ 5

    2

    800

    10

    3

    100

    15

    Determine the cost per CD for each group, using the relative sales value method.

    compute wal mart rsquo s inventory turnover and the average days to sell inventory f 645783

    1. Kemper Company signed a long term noncancelable purchase commitment with a major supplier to purchase raw materials in 2013 at a cost of $1,000,000. At December 31, 2012, the raw materials to be purchased have a market value of $950,000. Prepare any necessary December 31, 2012, entry.

    2. Use the information for Kemper Company from BE9 5. In 2013, Kemper paid $1,000,000 to obtain the raw materials which were worth $950,000. Prepare the entry to record the purchase.

    3. Fosbre Corporation’s April 30 inventory was destroyed by fire. January 1 inventory was $150,000, and purchases for January through April totaled $500,000. Sales for the same period were $700,000. Fosbre’s normal gross profit percentage is 35% on sales. Using the gross profit method, estimate Fosbre’s April 30 inventory that was destroyed by fire.

    4. Boyne Inc. had beginning inventory of $12,000 at cost and $20,000 at retail. Net purchases were $120,000 at cost and $170,000 at retail. Net markups were $10,000; net markdowns were $7,000; and sales were $147,000. Compute ending inventory at cost using the conventional retail method.

    5. In its 2010 annual report, Wal Mart reported inventory of $33,160 million on January 31, 2010, and $34,511 million on January 31, 2009, cost of sales of $304,657 million for fiscal year 2010, and net sales of $405,046 million. Compute Wal Mart’s inventory turnover and the average days to sell inventory for the fiscal year 2010.

    determine the inventory by the lower of cost or market method applying the method to 645785

    (Lower of Cost or Market) The inventory of Oheto Company on December 31, 2013, consists of the following items.

    Part No.

    Quantity  

    Cost   per Unit

    Cost   to Replace per Unit

    110

    600

    $ 95

    $100

    111

    1,000  

    60

    52

    112

    500

    80

    76

    113

    200

    170

    180

    120

    400

    205

    208

    121a

    1,600  

    16

    14

    122

    300

    240

    235

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the inventory as of December 31, 2013, by the lower of cost or market method, applying this method directly to each item.

    (b) Determine the inventory by the lower of cost or market method, applying the method to the total of the inventory.

    anthony company uses a perpetual inventory system it entered into the following purc 645507

    Anthony Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for March.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Mar. 1

    Beginning inventory

    50 units @ $50/unit

     

    Mar. 5

    Purchase

    200 units @ $55/unit

     

    Mar. 9

    Sales

     

    210 units @ $85/unit

    Mar. 18

    Purchase

    60 units @ $60/unit

     

    Mar. 25

    Purchase

    100 units @ $62/unit

     

    Mar. 29

    Sales

     

    80 units @ $95/unit

     

    Totals

    410 units

    290 units

    Required

    1. Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale.

    2. Compute the number of units in ending inventory.

    3. Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using

    (a) FIFO,

    (b) LIFO,

    (c) weighted average and

    (d) specific identification. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 40 units from beginning inventory and 170 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 20 units from the March 18 purchase and 60 units from the March 25 purchase.

    4. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods in part 3.

    if the company s manager earns a bonus based on a percent of gross profit which meth 645508

    Marlow Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following calendar year 2011 purchases and sales transactions.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    600 units @ $44/unit

     

    Feb. 10

    Purchase

    200 units @ $40/unit

     

    Mar. 13

    Purchase

    100 units @ $20/unit

     

    Mar. 15

    Sales

     

    400 units @ $75/unit

    Aug. 21

    Purchase

       

    Sept. 5

    Purchase

       

    Sept. 10

    Sales

     

    200 units @ $75/unit

     

    Totals

     

    600 units

    Required

    1. Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale.

    2. Compute the number of units in ending inventory.

    3. Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using

    (a) FIFO,

    (b) LIFO,

    (c) specific identification—units sold consist of 500 units from beginning inventory and 100 units from the March 13 purchase and

    (d) weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    4. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods in part 3.

    5. If the company’s manager earns a bonus based on a percent of gross profit, which method of inventory costing will the manager likely prefer?

    doubletree company s financial statements show the following the company recently di 645510

    Doubletree Company’s financial statements show the following. The company recently discovered that in making physical counts of inventory, it had made the following errors: Inventory on December 31, 2010, is understated by $50,000, and inventory on December 31, 2011, is overstated by $20,000.

    For Year Ended December 31

    2010

    2011

    2012

    (a)

    Cost of goods sold 

    $ 725,000

    $ 955,000

    $ 790,000

    (b)

    Net income

    268,000

    275,000

    250,000

    (c)

    Total current assets 

    1,247,000

    1,360,000

    1,230,000

    (d)

    Total equity

    1,387,000

    1,580,000

    1,245,000

    Required

    1. For each key financial statement figure — (a), (b), (c), and (d) above — prepare a table similar to the following to show the adjustments necessary to correct the reported amounts.

    Figure:

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

     

     

     

    Adjustments for: 12/31/2010 error

     

     

     

    12/31/2011 error

     

     

     

    Corrected amount

     

     

     

     2. What is the error in total net income for the combined three year period resulting from the inventory errors? Explain.

    3. Explain why the understatement of inventory by $50,000 at the end of 2010 results in an understatement of equity by the same amount in that year.

    how would the financial results from using the three alternative inventory costing m 645512

    Botch Corp. sold 5,500 units of its product at $45 per unit in year 2011 and incurred operating expenses of $6 per unit in selling the units. It began the year with 600 units in inventory and made successive purchases of its product as follows.

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    600 units @ $18 per unit

    Feb. 20

    Purchase

    1,500 units @ $19 per unit

    May 16

    Purchase

    700 units @ $20 per unit

    Oct. 3

    Purchase

    400 units @ $21 per unit

    Dec. 11

    Purchase

    3,300 units @ $22 per unit

     

    Total

    6,500 units

    Required

    1. Prepare comparative income statements similar to Exhibit 6.8 for the three inventory costing methods of FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) Include a detailed cost of goods sold section as part of each statement. The company uses a periodic inventory system, and its income tax rate is 30%.

    2. How would the financial results from using the three alternative inventory costing methods change if Botch had been experiencing declining costs in its purchases of inventory?

    3. What advantages and disadvantages are offered by using (a) LIFO and (b) FIFO? Assume the continuing trend of increasing costs.

    the records of nilson company provide the following information for the year ended d 645513

    The records of Nilson Company provide the following information for the year ended December 31.

     

    At Cost

    At Retail

    January 1 beginning inventory 

    $ 471,350

    $ 927,150

    Cost of goods purchased

    3,276,030

    6,279,350

    Sales

     

    5,495,700

    Sales returns

     

    44,600

    Required

    1. Use the retail inventory method to estimate the company’s year end inventory at cost.

    2. A year end physical inventory at retail prices yields a total inventory of $1,675,800. Prepare a calculation showing the company’s loss from shrinkage at cost and at retail.

     

    cco company uses a perpetual inventory system it entered into the following purchase 645515

    CCO Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for April.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Apr. 1

    Beginning inventory 

    15 units @ $3,000/unit

     

    Apr. 6

    Purchase

    35 units @ $3,500/unit

     

    Apr. 9

    Sales 

     

    18 units @ $12,000/unit

    Apr. 17

    Purchase

    8 units @ $4,500/unit

     

    Apr. 25

    Purchase

    10 units @ $4,580/unit

     

    Apr. 30

    Sales

     

    30 units @ $14,000/unit

     

    Total

    68 units

    48 units

    Required

    1. Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale.

    2. Compute the number of units in ending inventory.

    3. Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using

    (a) FIFO,

    (b) LIFO,

    (c) weighted average,

    (d) specific identification. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    For specific identification, the April 9 sale consisted of 8 units from beginning inventory and 10 units from the April 6 purchase; the April 30 sale consisted of 20 units from the April 6 purchase and 10 units from the April 25 purchase.

    4. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods in part 3.

    if the company s manager earns a bonus based on a percent of gross profit which meth 645516

    Venus Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following calendar year 2011 purchases and sales transactions.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory 

    600 units @ $55/unit

     

    Jan. 10

    Purchase

    450 units @ $56/unit

     

    Feb. 13

    Purchase

    200 units @ $57/unit

     

    Feb. 15

    Sales

     

    430 units @ $90/unit

    July 21

    Purchase

    230 units @ $58/unit

     

    Aug. 5

    Purchase

    345 units @ $59/unit

     

    Aug. 10

    Sales

     

    335 units @ $90/unit

     

    Total

    1,825 units

    765 units

    Required

    1. Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale.

    2. Compute the number of units in ending inventory.

    3. Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using

    (a) FIFO,

    (b) LIFO,

    (c) specific identification— units sold consist of 600 units from beginning inventory and 165 units from the February 13 purchase,

    (d) weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    4. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods in part 3.

    5. If the company’s manager earns a bonus based on a percent of gross profit, which method of inventory costing will the manager likely prefer?

    a physical inventory of office deals taken at december 31 reveals the following 645517

    A physical inventory of Office Deals taken at December 31 reveals the following.

     

     

    Per Unit

    Item

    Units

    Cost

    Market

    Office furniture

     

     

     

    Desks

    436

    $261

    $305

    Credenzas

    295

    227

    256

    Chairs

    587

    49

    43

    Bookshelves

    321

    93

    82

    Filling cabinets

     

     

     

    Two drawer

    214

    81

    70

    Four drawer

    398

    135

    122

    Lateral

    398

    135

    122

    Office equipment

     

     

     

    Fax machines

    430

    168

    200

    Copiers

    545

    317

    288

    Telephones

    352

    125

    117

    Required

    1. Compute the lower of cost or market for the inventory applied separately to each item.

    2. If the market amount is less than the recorded cost of the inventory, then record the LCM adjustment to the Merchandise Inventory account.

    what is the error in total net income for the combined three year period resulting f 645518

    Watson Company’s financial statements show the following. The company recently discovered that in making physical counts of inventory, it had made the following errors: Inventory on December 31, 2010, is overstated by $70,000, and inventory on December 31, 2011, is understated by $55,000.

     

    For Year Ended December 31

    2010

    2011

    2012

    (a)

    Cost of goods sold

    $ 655,000

    $ 957,000

    $ 799,000

    (b)

    Net income

    225,000

    277,000

    244,000

    (c)

    Total current assets

    1,251,000

    1,360,000

    1,200,000

    (d)

    Total equity

    1,387,000

    1,520,000

    1,250,000

    Required

    1. For each key financial statement figure — (a), (b), (c), and (d) above — prepare a table similar to the following to show the adjustments necessary to correct the reported amounts.

    Figure:

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

     

       

    Adjustments for: 12/31/2010 error

     

     

     

    12/31/2011 error

     

       

    Corrected amount

     

       

    2. What is the error in total net income for the combined three year period resulting from the inventory errors? Explain.

    3. Explain why the overstatement of inventory by $70,000 at the end of 2010 results in an overstatement of equity by the same amount in that year.

    what advantages and disadvantages are offered by using a lifo and b fifo assume the 645520

    Rikkers Company sold 2,500 units of its product at $98 per unit in year 2011 and incurred operating expenses of $14 per unit in selling the units. It began the year with 740 units in inventory and made successive purchases of its product as follows.

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    740 units @ $58 per unit

    April 2

    Purchase

    700 units @ $59 per unit

    June 14

    Purchase

    600 units @ $61 per unit

    Aug. 29

    Purchase

    500 units @ $64 per unit

    Nov. 18

    Purchase

    800 units @ $65 per unit

     

    Total

    3,340 units

    Required

    1. Prepare comparative income statements similar to Exhibit 6.8 for the three inventory costing methods of FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) Include a detailed cost of goods sold section as part of each statement. The company uses a periodic inventory system, and its income tax rate is 25%.

    2. How would the financial results from using the three alternative inventory costing methods change if the company had been experiencing decreasing prices in its purchases of inventory?

    3. What advantages and disadvantages are offered by using (a) LIFO and (b) FIFO? Assume the continuing trend of increasing costs.

    use the retail inventory method to estimate the company s year end inventory 645521

    The records of Saturn Co. provide the following information for the year ended December 31.

     

    At Cost

    At Retail

    January 1 beginning inventory

    $ 81,670

    $114,610

    Cost of goods purchased

    492,250

    751,730

    Sales  

     

    786,120

    Sales returns

     

    4,480

    Required

    1. Use the retail inventory method to estimate the company’s year end inventory.

    2. A year end physical inventory at retail prices yields a total inventory of $78,550. Prepare a calculation  showing the company’s loss from shrinkage at cost and at retail.

    the following information for the first quarter is available from its records 645522

    Ernst Equipment Co. wants to prepare interim financial statements for the first quarter. The company wishes to avoid making a physical count of inventory. Ernst’s gross profit rate averages 30%. The following information for the first quarter is available from its records.

    January 1 beginning inventory

    $ 752,880

    Cost of goods purchased

    2,159,630

    Sales

    3,710,250

    Sales returns

    74,200

    Required

    Use the gross profit method to estimate the company’s first quarter ending inventory.

     

    compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory assuming rey applies the lo 645523

    Santana Rey of Business Solutions is evaluating her inventory to determine whether it must be adjusted based on lower of cost or market rules. Business Solutions has three different types of software in its inventory and the following information is available for each.

     

     

    Per Unit

    Inventory Items

    Units

    Cost

    Market

    Office productivity

    3

    $ 76

    $ 74

    Desktop publishing

    2

    103

    100

    Accounting

    3

    90

    96

    Required

    1. Compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory assuming Rey applies the lower of cost or market rule to inventory as a whole. Must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.

    2. Assume that Rey had instead applied the lower of cost or market rule to each product in inventory. Under this assumption, must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.

    what amount of inventories did research in motion report as a current asset on febru 645525

    Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.

    Required

    1. What amount of inventories did Research In Motion report as a current asset on February 27, 2010? On February 28, 2009?

    2. Inventories represent what percent of total assets on February 27, 2010? On February 28, 2009?

    3. Comment on the relative size of Research In Motion’s inventories compared to its other types of assets.

    4. What accounting method did Research In Motion use to compute inventory amounts on its balance sheet?

    5. Compute inventory turnover for fiscal year ended February 27, 2010, and days’ sales in inventory as of February 27, 2010.

    6. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for fiscal years ended after February 27, 2010, from the SEC’s EDGAR database. Answer questions 1 through 5 using the current RIM information and compare results to those prior years.

    compute inventory turnover for each company for the most recent two years shown 645526

    Comparative figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow.

     

    Research In Motion

    Apple

     

     

    Current

    One Year

    Two Years

    Current

     One Year

    Two Years

    ($ millions)

    Year

    Prior

    Prior

    Year

    Prior

    Prior

    Inventory

    $ 622

    $ 682

    $ 396

    $ 455

    $ 509

    $ 346

    Cost of sales

    8,369

    5,968

    2,929

    25,683

    24,294

    16,426

    Required

    1. Compute inventory turnover for each company for the most recent two years shown.

    2. Compute days’ sales in inventory for each company for the three years shown.

    3. Comment on and interpret your findings from parts 1 and 2. Assume an industry average for inventory turnover of 10.

    how does golf mart s use of fifo improve its net profit margin and current ratio 645527

    Golf Mart is a retail sports store carrying golf apparel and equipment. The store is at the end of its second year of operation and is struggling. A major problem is that its cost of inventory has continually increased in the past two years. In the first year of operations, the store assigned inventory costs using LIFO. A loan agreement the store has with its bank, its prime source of financing, requires the store to maintain a certain profit margin and current ratio. The store’s owner is currently looking over Golf Mart’s preliminary financial statements for its second year. The numbers are not favorable. The only way the store can meet the required financial ratios agreed on with the bank is to change from LIFO to FIFO. The store originally decided on LIFO because of its tax advantages. The owner recalculates ending inventory using FIFO and submits those numbers and statements to the loan officer at the bank for the required bank review. The owner thankfully reflects on the available latitude in choosing the inventory costing method.

    Required

    1. How does Golf Mart’s use of FIFO improve its net profit margin and current ratio?

    2. Is the action by Golf Mart’s owner ethical? Explain.

    each team member has the responsibility to become an expert on an inventory method t 645530

    Each team member has the responsibility to become an expert on an inventory method. This expertise will be used to facilitate teammates’ understanding of the concepts relevant to that method.

    1. Each learning team member should select an area for expertise by choosing one of the following inventory methods: specific identification, LIFO, FIFO, or weighted average.

    2. Form expert teams made up of students who have selected the same area of expertise. The instructor will identify where each expert team will meet.

    3. Using the following data, each expert team must collaborate to develop a presentation that illustrates the relevant concepts and procedures for its inventory method. Each team member must write the presentation in a format that can be shown to the learning team.

    Data

    The company uses a perpetual inventory system. It had the following beginning inventory and current year purchases of its product.

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory.

    50 units @ $10 = $ 500

    Jan. 14

    Purchase

    150 units @ $12 = 1,800

    Apr. 30

    Purchase

    200 units @ $15 = 3,000

    Sept. 26

    Purchase

    300 units @ $20 = 6,000

    The company transacted sales on the following dates at a $35 per unit sales price.

    Jan. 10

    30 units

    (specific cost: 30 @ $10)

    Feb. 15

    100 units

    (specific cost: 100 @ $12)

    Oct. 5

    350 units

    (specific cost: 100 @ $15 and 250 @ $20)

    Concepts and Procedures to Illustrate in Expert Presentation

    a. Identify and compute the costs to assign to the units sold. (Round per unit costs to three decimals.)

    b. Identify and compute the costs to assign to the units in ending inventory. (Round inventory balances to the dollar.)

    c. How likely is it that this inventory costing method will reflect the actual physical flow of goods? How relevant is that factor in determining whether this is an acceptable method to use?

    d. What is the impact of this method versus others in determining net income and income taxes?

    e. How closely does the ending inventory amount reflect replacement cost?

    4. Re form learning teams. In rotation, each expert is to present to the team the presentation developed in part 3. Experts are to encourage and respond to questions.

    key figures eur millions for nokia which is a leading global manufacturer of mobile 645533

    Key figures (EUR millions) for Nokia , which is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services, follow.

    EUR millions

    Current Year

    One Year Prior

    Two Year Prior

    Inventory

    1,865

    2,533

    2,876

    Cost of sales  

    27,720

    33,337

    33,781

    Required

    1. Use these data and those from BTN 6 2 to compute (a) inventory turnover and (b) days’ sales in inventory for the most recent two years shown for Nokia, Research In Motion, and Apple.

    2. Comment on and interpret your findings from part 1.

    explain e business and e commerce and outline ways in which management accounting ma 645727

    1. Explain how strategic management accounting is a feature of business strategy.
    2. Explain the methods of managing costs with an aim of gaining competitive advantage.
    3. Explain value chain analysis and the role of management accounting.
    4. Explain the nature of activity based management.
    5. Explain total quality management and the cost of quality.
    6. Explain business process re engineering.
    7. Explain e business and e commerce and outline ways in which management accounting may help in developing business strategies that use e business methods in general and e commerce in particular.
    8. Should we make the proposed investment in hardware, software and staff training for information systems to support e commerce?
    9. Which of our existing business operations will give the highest return if converted to e commerce methods?

    explains why net present value is superior to the three other investment appraisal t 645737

    This question has 18 minutes available for writing the answer. The Required sections have marks indicated for each sub section, which is helpful in deciding how much to write and how much time to spend on each part.

    You are the Management Accountant of a small engineering company, which is a member of a large engineering group. The Managing Director has recently joined the company and has little experience of the engineering sector. He has recently returned from the group’s annual management conference. The Managing Director found the seminars very useful but he is a little confused about two topics.

    One of the presentations discussed the use of Target Costing within the group. The Managing Director had previously thought that Target Costing would not be appropriate for an engineering group, because he thought it could only be used in an organisation that manufactured similar products. He now realises that he may be confusing Target Costing and Standard Costing. He seeks your help in explaining Target Costing and how it differs from Standard Costing. Another presentation discussed alternative investment appraisal techniques. The presenter used an example that compared three investments that were evaluated using incremental profit, accounting rate of return, payback and net present value. The presenter argued that net present value is theoretically superior to the other methods. The Managing Director seeks your help in understanding why the net present value technique is superior to the alternative investment appraisal techniques.

    Required:

    Prepare a report to the Managing Director that:

    (a) explains Target Costing and how it differs from Standard Costing;

    (b) explains why net present value is superior to the three other investment appraisal techniques stated above.

    assume the perpetual inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645476

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the perpetual inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the perpetual inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645477

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs  to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the perpetual inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on specific identification. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    tailspin trading co has the following products in its ending inventory compute lower 645480

    1. A car dealer acquires a used car for $3,000, terms FOB shipping point. Additional costs in obtaining and offering the car for sale include $150 for transportation in, $200 for import duties, $50 for insurance during shipment, $25 for advertising, and $250 for sales staff salaries. For computing inventory, what cost is assigned to the used car?

    2. Tailspin Trading Co. has the following products in its ending inventory. Compute lower of cost or market for inventory applied separately to each product.

    Product

    Quantity

    Cost per Unit

    Market per Unit

    Mountain bikes

    9

    $360

    $330

    Skateboards 

    12

    210

    270

    Gliders

    25

    480

    420

    assume the periodic inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to the end 645482

    1. Market Company begins the year with $200,000 of goods in inventory. At year end, the amount in inventory has increased to $230,000. Cost of goods sold for the year is $1,600,000. Compute Market’s inventory turnover and days’ sales in inventory. Assume that there are 365 days in the year.

    2. A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to the ending inventory when costs are assigned based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    what is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at january 31 assu 645483

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the periodic inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645484

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the periodic inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to the dec 645485

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory when costs are assigned based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    determine the costs assigned to the december 31 ending inventory based on fifo 645487

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the periodic inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645488

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the periodic inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on specific identification. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    dooling store s inventory is destroyed by a fire on september 5 2011 the following d 645489

    Dooling Store’s inventory is destroyed by a fire on September 5, 2011. The following data for year 2011 are available from the accounting records. Estimate the cost of the inventory destroyed.

    Jan. 1 inventory

    $180,000

    Jan. 1 through Sept. 5 purchases (net)

    $342,000

    Jan. 1 through Sept. 5 sales (net)

    $675,000

    Year 2011 estimated gross profit rate

    42%

    if costs were rising instead of falling which method would yield the highest net inc 645494

    Park Company reported the following March purchases and sales data for its only product.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Mar. 1

    Beginning inventory

    150 units @ $7.00 = $1,050

     

    Mar. 10

    Sales

     

    90 units @ $15

    Mar. 20

    Purchase

    220 units @ $6.00 = 1,320

     

    Mar. 25

    Sales

     

    145 units @ $15

    Mar. 30

    Purchase

    90 units @ $5.00 = 450

     

     

    Totals 

    460 units $2,820

    235 units

    Park uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using (a) specific identification, (b) weighted average, (c) FIFO, and (d) LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 225 units, where 90 are from the March 30 purchase, 80 are from the March 20 purchase, and 55 are from beginning inventory.

    Prepare comparative income statements for the month of January for Park Company similar to those shown for the four inventory methods. Assume expenses are $1,600, and that the applicable income tax rate is 30%.

    1. Which method yields the highest net income?

    2. Does net income using weighted average fall between that using FIFO and LIFO?

    3. If costs were rising instead of falling, which method would yield the highest net income?

    harold co reported the following current year purchases and sales data for its only 645495

    Harold Co. reported the following current year purchases and sales data for its only product.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

     

    Units Sold at Retail

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    100 units @ $10 =

    $ 1,000

     

    Jan. 10

    Sales

     

     

    90 units @ $40

    Mar. 14

    Purchase

    250 units @ $15 =

    3,750

     

    Mar. 15

    Sales.

     

     

    140 units @ $40

    July 30

    Purchase

    400 units @ $20 =

    8,000

     

    Oct. 5

    Sales

     

     

    300 units @ $40

    Oct. 26

    Purchase 

    600 units @ $25 =

    15,000

     

     

    Totals

     

    1,350 units

     

    $27,750

     

    530 units

     

    Harold uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using (a) FIFO and (b) LIFO. Compute the gross margin for each method.

    assume that ending inventory is made up of 100 units from the march 14 purchase 120 645496

    Harold Co. reported the following current year purchases and sales data for its only product.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

     

    Units Sold at Retail

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    100 units @ $10 =

    $ 1,000

     

    Jan. 10

    Sales

     

     

    90 units @ $40

    Mar. 14

    Purchase

    250 units @ $15 =

    3,750

     

    Mar. 15

    Sales.

     

     

    140 units @ $40

    July 30

    Purchase

    400 units @ $20 =

    8,000

     

    Oct. 5

    Sales

     

     

    300 units @ $40

    Oct. 26

    Purchase 

    600 units @ $25 =

    15,000

     

     

    Totals

     

    1,350 units

     

    $27,750

     

    530 units

     

    Harold uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using (a) FIFO and (b) LIFO. Compute the gross margin for each method.

    Assume that ending inventory is made up of 100 units from the March 14 purchase, 120 units from the July 30 purchase, and all 600 units from the October 26 purchase. Using the specific identification method, calculate (a) the cost of goods sold and (b) the gross profit.

    prepare comparative income statements show the effect of this error on the company s 645497

    1. Ripken Company’s ending inventory includes the following items. Compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory applied separately to each product.

     

     

    Per Unit

    Product

    Units

    Cost

    Market

    Helmets

    22

    $50

    $54

    Bats

    15

    78

    72

    Shoes

    36

    95

    91

    Uniforms 

    40

    36

    36

    2. Ringo Company had $900,000 of sales in each of three consecutive years 2010 – 2012, and it purchased merchandise costing $500,000 in each of those years. It also maintained a $200,000 physical inventory from the beginning to the end of that three year period. In accounting for inventory, it made an error at the end of year 2010 that caused its year end 2010 inventory to appear on its statements as $180,000 rather than the correct $200,000.

    a. Determine the correct amount of the company’s gross profit in each of the years 2010 – 2012.

    b. Prepare comparative income statements show the effect of this error on the company’s cost of goods sold and gross profit for each of the years 2010 – 2012.

    compute its current ratio inventory turnover and days sales in inventory for 2011 us 645498

    Chess Company uses LIFO for inventory costing and reports the following financial data. It also recomputed inventory and cost of goods sold using FIFO for comparison purposes.

     

    2011

    2010

    LIFO inventory

    $150

    $100

    LIFO cost of goods sold

    730

    670

    FIFO inventory

    220

    125

    FIFO cost of goods sold

    685

    Current assets (using LIFO)

    210

    180

    Current liabilities

    190

    170

    1. Compute its current ratio, inventory turnover, and days’ sales in inventory for 2011 using (a) LIFO numbers and (b) FIFO numbers. (Round answers to one decimal.)

    2. Comment on and interpret the results of part 1.

    use the following information for ryder co to compute inventory turnover for 2011 an 645499

    Use the following information for Ryder Co. to compute inventory turnover for 2011 and 2010, and its days’ sales in inventory at December 31, 2011 and 2010. (Round answers to one decimal.) Comment on Ryder’s efficiency in using its assets to increase sales from 2010 to 2011.

     

    2011

    2010

    2009

    Cost of goods sold

    $643,825

    $426,650

    $391,300

    Ending inventory

    96,400

    86,750

    91,500

    park uses a perpetual inventory system determine the cost assigned to ending invento 645500

    Park Company reported the following March purchases and sales data for its only product.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Mar. 1

    Beginning inventory

    150 units @ $7.00 = $1,050

     

    Mar. 10

    Sales

     

    90 units @ $15

    Mar. 20

    Purchase

    220 units @ $6.00 = 1,320

     

    Mar. 25

    Sales

     

    145 units @ $15

    Mar. 30

    Purchase

    90 units @ $5.00 = 450

     

     

    Totals 

    460 units $2,820

    235 units

    Park uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using

    (a) specific identification,

    (b) weighted average,

    (c) FIFO,

    (d) LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 225 units, where 90 are from the March 30 purchase, 80 are from the March 20 purchase, and 55 are from beginning inventory.

    Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using

    (a) specific identification,

    (b) weighted average,

    (c) FIFO,

    (d) LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    lifo round per unit costs to three decimals but inventory balances to the dollar whi 645502

    Lopez Co. reported the following current year data for its only product. The company uses a periodic inventory system, and its ending inventory consists of 300 units—100 from each of the last three purchases. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using

    (a) specific identification,

    (b) weighted average,

    (c) FIFO,

    (d ) LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) Which method yields the highest net income?

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    200 units @ $2.00 =

    $400

    Mar. 7

    Purchase

    440 units @ $2.25 =

    990

    28 Jul

    Purchase

    1080 units @ $2.50 =

    2,700

    Oct. 3

    Purchase

    960 units @ $2.80 =

    2,688

    Dec. 19

    Purchase

    320 units @ $2.90 =

    928

     

    Totals

    3,000 units

    $7,706

    the company uses a periodic inventory system and its ending inventory consists of 30 645503

    Candis Gifts reported the following current year data for its only product. The company uses a periodic inventory system, and its ending inventory consists of 300 units—100 from each of the last three purchases. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using

    (a) specific identification,

    (b) weighted average,

    (c) FIFO and

    (d) LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.) Which method yields the lowest net income?

    Jan. 1

    Beginning inventory

    280 units @ $3.00 5

    $840

    Mar. 7

    Purchase

    600 units @ $2.80 5

    1,680

    28 Jul

    Purchase

    800 units @ $2.50 5

    2,000

    Oct. 3

    Purchase

    1,100 units @ $2.30 5

    2,530

    Dec. 19

    Purchase

    250 units @ $2.00 5

    500

     

    Totals

    3,030 units

    $7,550

    use the retail inventory method to estimate wichita s 2011 ending inventory at cost 645504

    In 2011, Wichita Company had net sales (at retail) of $130,000. The following additional information is available from its records at the end of 2011. Use the retail inventory method to estimate Wichita’s 2011 ending inventory at cost.

     

    AT Cost

    At Retail

    Beginning inventory

    $ 31,900

    $64,200

    Cost of goods purchased

    57,810

    98,400

    prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of stone 645439

    Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Stone Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system.

    Aug. 1 Purchased merchandise from Abilene Company for $6,000 under credit terms of 1y10, ny30,

    FOB destination, invoice dated August 1.

    4 At Abilene’s request, Stone paid $100 cash for freight charges on the August 1 purchase, reducing the amount owed to Abilene.

    5 Sold merchandise to Lux Corp. for $4,200 under credit terms of 2y10, ny60, FOB destination, invoice dated August 5. The merchandise had cost $3,000.

    8 Purchased merchandise from Welch Corporation for $5,300 under credit terms of 1y10, ny45,

    FOB shipping point, invoice dated August 8. The invoice showed that at Stone’s request, Welch paid the $240 shipping charges and added that amount to the bill. (Hint: Discounts are not applied to freight and shipping charges.)

    9 Paid $120 cash for shipping charges related to the August 5 sale to Lux Corp.

    10 Lux returned merchandise from the August 5 sale that had cost Stone $500 and been sold for $700. The merchandise was restored to inventory.

    12 After negotiations with Welch Corporation concerning problems with the merchandise purchased on August 8, Stone received a credit memorandum from Welch granting a price reduction of $800.

    15 Received balance due from Lux Corp. for the August 5 sale less the return on August 10.

    18 Paid the amount due Welch Corporation for the August 8 purchase less the price reduction granted.

    19 Sold merchandise to Trax Co. for $3,600 under credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated August 19. The merchandise had cost $2,500.

    22 Trax requested a price reduction on the August 19 sale because the merchandise did not meet specifications. Stone sent Trax a $600 credit memorandum to resolve the issue.

    29 Received Trax’s cash payment for the amount due from the August 19 sale.

    30 Paid Abilene Company the amount due from the August 1 purchase.

    sold merchandise to coke co for 800 under credit terms of 2 10 n 60 fob shipping poi 645440

    Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Bask Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system.

    July 1 Purchased merchandise from Black Company for $6,000 under credit terms of 1/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 1.

    2 Sold merchandise to Coke Co. for $800 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 2. The merchandise had cost $500.

    3 Paid $100 cash for freight charges on the purchase of July 1.

    8 Sold merchandise that had cost $1,200 for $1,600 cash.

    9 Purchased merchandise from Lane Co. for $2,300 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB destination, invoice dated July 9.

    11 Received a $200 credit memorandum from Lane Co. for the return of part of the merchandise purchased on July 9.

    12 Received the balance due from Coke Co. for the invoice dated July 2, net of the discount.

    16 Paid the balance due to Black Company within the discount period.

    19 Sold merchandise that cost $900 to AKP Co. for $1,250 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 19.

    21 Issued a $150 credit memorandum to AKP Co. for an allowance on goods sold on July 19.

    24 Paid Lane Co. the balance due after deducting the discount.

    30 Received the balance due from AKP Co. for the invoice dated July 19, net of discount.

    31 Sold merchandise that cost $3,200 to Coke Co. for $5,000 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60,

    FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 31.

    the following unadjusted trial balance is prepared at fiscal year end for rex compan 645441

    The following unadjusted trial balance is prepared at fiscal year end for Rex Company.

    REX COMPNAY

    Unadjusted Trial Balance

    January 31, 2011

     

    Debit

    Credit

    Cash 

    $2,200

     

     Merchandise inventory 

    11,500

     

     Store supplies 

    4,800

     

     Prepaid insurance 

    2,300

     

     Store equipment 

    41,900

     

     Accumulated depreciation—Store equipment 

     

    $15,000

     Accounts payable 

     

    9,000

     T. Rex, Capital 

     

    32,000

     T. Rex, Withdrawals 

    2,000

     

     Sales 

     

    104,000

     Sales discounts 

    1,000

     

     Sales returns and allowances 

    2,000

     

     Cost of goods sold 

    37,400

     

     Depreciation expense—Store equipment 

    0

     

     Salaries expense 

    31,000

     

     Insurance expense 

    0

     

     Rent expense 

    14,000

     

     Store supplies expense 

    0

     

     Advertising expense 

    9,900

     

     Totals 

    $160,000

    $160,000

    Rent expense and salaries expense are equally divided between selling activities and the general and administrative activities. Rex Company uses a perpetual inventory system.

    Required

    1. Prepare adjusting journal entries to reflect each of the following:

    a. Store supplies still available at fiscal year end amount to $1,650.

    b. Expired insurance, an administrative expense, for the fiscal year is $1,500.

    c. Depreciation expense on store equipment, a selling expense, is $1,400 for the fiscal year.

    d. To estimate shrinkage, a physical count of ending merchandise inventory is taken. It shows $11,100 of inventory is still available at fiscal year end.

    2. Prepare a multiple step income statement for fiscal year 2011.

    3. Prepare a single step income statement for fiscal year 2011.

    4. Compute the current ratio, acid test ratio, and gross margin ratio as of January 31, 2011.

    prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of wave c 645444

    Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Wave Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system.

    July 3 Purchased merchandise from CAP Corp. for $15,000 under credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated July 3.

    4 At CAP’s request, Wave paid $250 cash for freight charges on the July 3 purchase, reducing the amount owed to CAP.

    7 Sold merchandise to Morris Co. for $10,500 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB destination, invoice dated July 7. The merchandise had cost $7,500.

    10 Purchased merchandise from Murdock Corporation for $14,200 under credit terms of 1/10, n/45, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 10. The invoice showed that at Wave’s request, Murdock paid the $600 shipping charges and added that amount to the bill. (Hint: Discounts are not applied to freight and shipping charges.)

    11 Paid $300 cash for shipping charges related to the July 7 sale to Morris Co.

    12 Morris returned merchandise from the July 7 sale that had cost Wave $1,250 and been sold for $1,750. The merchandise was restored to inventory.

    14 After negotiations with Murdock Corporation concerning problems with the merchandise purchased on July 10, Wave received a credit memorandum from Murdock granting a price reduction of $2,000.

    17 Received balance due from Morris Co. for the July 7 sale less the return on July 12.

    20 Paid the amount due Murdock Corporation for the July 10 purchase less the price reduction granted.

    21 Sold merchandise to Ulsh for $9,000 under credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 21. The merchandise had cost $6,250.

    24 Ulsh requested a price reduction on the July 21 sale because the merchandise did not meet specifications. Wave sent Ulsh a credit memorandum for $1,500 to resolve the issue.

    30 Received Ulsh’s cash payment for the amount due from the July 21 sale.

    31 Paid CAP Corp. the amount due from the July 3 purchase.

     

    sold merchandise that cost 4 800 to chase co for 7 500 under credit terms of 2 10 n 645445

    Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Yang Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system. 

    May 2 Purchased merchandise from Bots Co. for $9,000 under credit terms of 1/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated May 2.

    4 Sold merchandise to Chase Co. for $1,200 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated May 4. The merchandise had cost $750.

    5 Paid $150 cash for freight charges on the purchase of May 2.

    9 Sold merchandise that had cost $1,800 for $2,400 cash.

    10 Purchased merchandise from Snyder Co. for $3,450 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB destination, invoice dated May 10.

    12 Received a $300 credit memorandum from Snyder Co. for the return of part of the merchandise purchased on May 10.

    14 Received the balance due from Chase Co. for the invoice dated May 4, net of the discount.

    17 Paid the balance due to Bots Co. within the discount period.

    20 Sold merchandise that cost $1,450 to Tex Co. for $2,800 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated May 20.

    22 Issued a $400 credit memorandum to Tex Co. for an allowance on goods sold from May 20.

    25 Paid Snyder Co. the balance due after deducting the discount.

    30 Received the balance due from Tex Co. for the invoice dated May 20, net of discount and allowance.

    31 Sold merchandise that cost $4,800 to Chase Co. for $7,500 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated May 31.

    the following unadjusted trial balance is prepared at fiscal year end for fab produc 645446

    The following unadjusted trial balance is prepared at fiscal year end for FAB Products Company.

    FAB PRODUCTS COMPANY

    Unadjusted Trial Balance

    October 31, 2011

     

    Debit

    Credit

    Cash

    $4,400

     

    Merchandise inventory

    23,000

     

    Store supplies

    9,600

     

    Prepaid insurance

    4,600

     

    Store equipment

    83,800

     

    Accumulated depreciation—Store equipment

     

    $30,000

    Accounts payable

     

    16,000

    A. Fab, Capital

     

    64,000

    A. Fab, Withdrawals

    2,000

     

    Sales

     

    208,000

    Sales discounts

    2,000

     

    Sales returns and allowances

    4,000

     

    Cost of goods sold

    74,800

     

    Depreciation expense—Store equipment

    0

     

    Salaries expense

    62,000

     

    Insurance expense

    0

     

    Rent expense

    28,000

     

    Store supplies expense

    0

     

    Advertising expense

    19,800

     

    Totals

    $318,000

    $318,000

    Rent expense and salaries expense are equally divided between selling activities and the general and administrative activities. FAB Products Company uses a perpetual inventory system.

    Required

    1. Prepare adjusting journal entries to reflect each of the following.

    a. Store supplies still available at fiscal year end amount to $3,300.

    b. Expired insurance, an administrative expense, for the fiscal year is $3,000.

    c. Depreciation expense on store equipment, a selling expense, is $2,800 for the fiscal year.

    d. To estimate shrinkage, a physical count of ending merchandise inventory is taken. It shows $22,200 of inventory is still available at fiscal year end.

    2. Prepare a multiple step income statement for fiscal year 2011.

    3. Prepare a single step income statement for fiscal year 2011.

    4. Compute the current ratio, acid test ratio, and gross margin ratio as of October 31, 2011.

    albin company s adjusted trial balance on march 31 2011 its fiscal year end follows 645447

    Albin Company’s adjusted trial balance on March 31, 2011, its fiscal year end, follows.

    Merchandise inventory

    $ 46,500

     

    Other (noninventory) assets

    190,600

     

    Total liabilities

     

    $ 52,500

    R. Albin, Capital

     

    152,475

    R. Albin, Withdrawals

    2,000

     

    Sales

     

    318,000

    Sales discounts

    4,875

     

    Sales returns and allowances

    21,000

     

    Cost of goods sold

    123,900

     

    Sales salaries expense

    43,500

     

    Rent expense — Selling space

    15,000

     

    Store supplies expense

    3,750

     

    Advertising expense

    27,000

     

    Office salaries expense

    39,750

     

    Rent expense — Office space

    3,900

     

    Office supplies expense

    1,200

     

    Totals

    $522,975

    $522,975

    On March 31, 2010, merchandise inventory was $37,500. Supplementary records of merchandising activities for the year ended March 31, 2011, reveal the following itemized costs.

    Invoice cost of merchandise purchases

    $136,500

    Purchase discounts received

    2,850

    Purchase returns and allowances

    6,600

    Costs of transportation in

    5,850

    Required

    1. Calculate the company’s net sales for the year.

    2. Calculate the company’s total cost of merchandise purchased for the year.

    3. Prepare a multiple step income statement that includes separate categories for selling expenses and for general and administrative expenses.

    4. Prepare a single step income statement that includes these expense categories: cost of goods sold, selling expenses, and general and administrative expenses.

    use the data for albin company in problem 5 4b to complete the following requirement 645448

    1. Use the data for Albin Company in Problem 5 4B to complete the following requirements.

    Required

    a. Prepare closing entries as of March 31, 2011 (the perpetual inventory system is used).

     

    b. The company makes all purchases on credit, and its suppliers uniformly offer a 3% sales discount.

    Does it appear that the company’s cash management system is accomplishing the goal of taking all available discounts? Explain.

    c. In prior years, the company experienced a 5% returns and allowance rate on its sales, which means approximately 5% of its gross sales were eventually returned outright or caused the company to grant allowances to customers. How do this year’s results compare to prior years’ results?

    2. Refer to the data and information in Problem 5 3B.

    Required

    Prepare and complete the entire 10 column work sheet for FAB Products Company.

    compute the dollar amount of gross margin and the gross margin ratio for the two yea 645451

    Key comparative figures for both Research In Motion and Apple COMPARATIVE follow.

     

    Research In Motion

    Apple

    ($ millions)

    Current

    Year

    Prior

    Year

    Current

    Year

    Prior

    Year

    Revenues (net sales) 

    $14,953

    $11,065

    $42,905

    $37,491

    Cost of sales

    8,369

    5,968

    25,683

    24,294

    Required

    1. Compute the dollar amount of gross margin and the gross margin ratio for the two years shown for each of these companies.

    2. Which company earns more in gross margin for each dollar of net sales? How do they compare to the industry average of 40.0%?

    3. Did the gross margin ratio improve or decline for these companies?

     

    best brands general ledger and supplementary records at the end of its current perio 645455

    Best Brands’ general ledger and supplementary records at the end of its current period reveal the following.

    Sales

    $430,000

    Merchandise inventory (beginning of period)

    $ 49,000

    Sales returns

    18,000

    Invoice cost of merchandise purchases

    180,000

    Sales discounts

    6,600

    Purchase discounts received

    4,500

    Cost of transportation in

    11,000

    Purchase returns and allowances

    5,500

    Operating expenses

    20,000

    Merchandise inventory (end of period)

    42,000

    Required

    1. Each member of the team is to assume responsibility for computing one of the following items. You are not to duplicate your teammates’ work. Get any necessary amounts to compute your item from the appropriate teammate. Each member is to explain his or her computation to the team in preparation for reporting to the class.

    a. Net sales

    b. Total cost of merchandise purchases

    c. Cost of goods sold

    d. Gross profit

    e. Net income

    2. Check your net income with the instructor. If correct, proceed to step 3.

    3. Assume that a physical inventory count finds that actual ending inventory is $38,000. Discuss how this affects previously computed amounts in step 1.

    based on the forecasted income statement alone from your part 1 solution do you reco 645456

    Refer to the opening feature about Heritage Link Brands. Assume that Selena and Khary Cuffe report current annual sales at approximately $10 million and disclose the following income statement.

    Heritage Link Brands

    Income Statement

    For Year Ended January 31,2010

    Net sales

    $10,000,000

    Cost of sales

    6,100,000

    Expenses (other than cost of sales)

    2,000,000

    Net income

    $ 1,900,000

    Selena and Khary Cuffe sell to various individuals and retailers, ranging from small shops to large chains.

    Assume that they currently offer credit terms of 1y15, ny60, and ship FOB destination. To improve their cash flow, they are considering changing credit terms to 3y10, ny30. In addition, they propose to change shipping terms to FOB shipping point. They expect that the increase in discount rate will increase net sales by 9%, but the gross margin ratio (and ratio of cost of sales divided by net sales) is expected to remain unchanged. They also expect that delivery expenses will be zero under this proposal; thus, expenses other than cost of sales are expected to increase only 6%.

    Required

    1. Prepare a forecasted income statement for the year ended January 31, 2011, based on the proposal.

    2. Based on the forecasted income statement alone (from your part 1 solution), do you recommend that Selena and Khary implement the new sales policies? Explain.

    3. What else should Selena and Khary consider before deciding whether or not to implement the new policies? Explain.

    which of the companies uses a multiple step income statement format 645458

    Nokia, Research In Motion, and Apple are competitors in the global marketplace. Key comparative figures for each company follow.

     

    Net Sales

    Cost of Sales

    Nokia*

    40,984

    27,720

    Research In Motion

    $14,953

    $ 8,369

    Apple

    $42,905

    $25,683

    Required

    1. Rank the three companies (highest to lowest) based on the gross margin ratio.

    2. Which of the companies uses a multiple step income statement format?

     

    assess inventory management using both inventory turnover and days sales in inventor 645459

    1. Identify the items making up merchandise inventory.

    2. Identify the costs of merchandise inventory.

    3. Analyze the effects of inventory methods for both financial and tax reporting.

    4. Analyze the effects of inventory errors on current and future financial statements.

    5. Assess inventory management using both inventory turnover and days’ sales in inventory.

    6. Compute inventory in a perpetual system using the methods of specific identification, FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average.

    7. Compute the lower of cost or market amount of inventory.

    8. Compute inventory in a periodic system using the methods of specific identification, FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average.

    9.Apply both the retail inventory and gross profit methods to estimate inventory.

     

    a company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases and it ends the pe 645462

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases, and it ends the period with 30 units in inventory.

    Beginning inventory 

    100 units at $10 cost per unit

    Purchase 1

    40 units at $12 cost per unit

    Purchase 2

    20 units at $14 cost per unit

    a. Compute ending inventory using the FIFO periodic system.

    b. Compute cost of goods sold using the LIFO periodic system.

    craig company uses a perpetual inventory system for its one product its beginning in 645464

    Craig Company uses a perpetual inventory system for its one product. Its beginning inventory, purchases, and sales during calendar year 2011 follow.

    Date

    Activity

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    Unit Inventory

    Jan. 1

    Beg. Inventory

    400 units @ $14 5 $ 5,600

     

    400 units

    Jan. 15

    Sale

     

    200 units @ $30

    200 units

    10 Mar

    Purchase

    200 units @ $15 5 $ 3,000

     

    400 units

    1 Apr

    Sale

     

    200 units @ $30

    200 units

    9 May

    Purchase

    300 units @ $16 5 $ 4,800

     

    500 units

    Sept. 22

    Purchase

    250 units @ $20 5 $ 5,000

     

    750 units

    Nov. 1

    Sale

     

    300 units @ $35

    450 units

    Nov. 28

    Purchase

    100 units @ $21 5 $ 2,100

     

    550 units

     

    Totals

    1,250 units $20,500

    700 units

     

    Additional tracking data for specific identification:

    (1) January 15 sale — 200 units @ $14,

    (2) April 1 sale — 200 units @ $15,

    (3) November 1 sale — 200 units @ $14 and 100 units @ $20.

    Required

    1. Calculate the cost of goods available for sale.

    2. Apply the four different methods of inventory costing (FIFO, LIFO, weighted average, and specific identification) to calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold under each method.

    3. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods in part 2. Also, report the inventory amount reported on the balance sheet for each of the four methods.

    4. In preparing financial statements for year 2011, the financial officer was instructed to use FIFO but failed to do so and instead computed cost of goods sold according to LIFO. Determine the impact on year 2011’s income from the error. Also determine the effect of this error on year 2012’s income. Assume no income taxes.

    5. Management wants a report that shows how changing from FIFO to another method would change net income. Prepare a table showing (1) the cost of goods sold amount under each of the four methods, (2) the amount by which each cost of goods sold total is different from the FIFO cost of goods sold, and (3) the effect on net income if another method is used instead of FIFO.

    what is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at january 31 assu 645470

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on li 645471

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the perpetual inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645472

    A company reports the following beginning inventory and purchases for the month of January. On January 26, the company sells 360 units. What is the cost of the 155 units that remain in ending inventory at January 31, assuming costs are assigned based on a perpetual inventory system and use of FIFO? (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

     

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Beginning inventory on January 1

    320

    $6.00

    Purchase on January 9

    85

    6.40

    Purchase on January 25 

    110

    6.60

    Assume the perpetual inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on weighted average. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    assume the perpetual inventory system is used determine the costs assigned to ending 645475

    Mercedes Brown starts a merchandising business on December 1 and enters into three inventory purchases:

    December 7

    10 units @ $ 9 cost

    December 14

    20 units @ $10 cost

    December 21

    15 units @ $12 cost

    Brown sells 18 units for $35 each on December 15. Seven of the sold units are from the December 7 purchase and eleven are from the December 14 purchase. Brown uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the costs assigned to the December 31 ending inventory based on FIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    Assume the perpetual inventory system is used. Determine the costs assigned to ending inventory when costs are assigned based on LIFO. (Round per unit costs to three decimals, but inventory balances to the dollar.)

    wilson ceramics manufactures holiday ornaments in its sole plant located in wisconsi 645400

    (Coping with uncertainty; writing) Wilson Ceramics manufactures holiday ornaments in its sole plant located in Wisconsin. Because the demand for the company’s products is very seasonal, the company builds inventory throughout the first nine months of the year and draws down inventory the last three months of the year as demand in those months greatly exceeds production capacity. The company recently designated a member of management to be Chief Risk Officer (CRO). This individual has been charged with developing strategies to manage the effects of uncertainty on the business. The CRO has identified the following major sources of uncertainty:

    1. Financing costs of inventory.

    2. The cost of resin, which is the main material used in production.

    3. “Acts of Nature” that could harm or destroy the production facility.

    4. The price to be realized for products.

    5. The level of demand for the company’s products.

    As a risk consultant, you have been retained by the CRO to develop strategies to deal with each of these major sources of uncertainty. In a report, outline your recommendations for each of the five major sources of uncertainty.

    use the following adjusted trial balance and additional information to complete the 645401

    Use the following adjusted trial balance and additional information to complete the requirements.

    KC ANTIQUES

    Adjusted Trial Balance

    December 31,2011

     

    Debit

    Credit

    Cash

    $ 7,000

     

    Accounts receivable

    13,000

     

    Merchandise inventory

    60,000

     

    Store supplies 

    1,500

     

    Equipment

    45,600

     

    Accumulated depreciation—Equipment

     

    $ 16,600

    Accounts payable

     

    9,000

    Salaries payable

     

    2,000

    K. Carter, Capital

     

    79,000

    K. Carter,

    10,000

     

    Sales

     

    343,250

    Sales discounts

    5,000

     

    Sales returns and allowances

    6,000

     

    Cost of goods sold

    159,900

     

    Depreciation expense—Store equipment

    4,100

     

    Depreciation expense—Office equipment 

    1,600

     

    Sales salaries expense

    30,000

     

    Office salaries expense

    34,000

     

    Insurance expense

    11,000

     

    Rent expense (70% is store, 30% is office)

    24,000

     

    Store supplies expense

    5,750

     

    Advertising expense

    31,400

     

    Totals

    $449,850

    $449,850

    KC Antiques’ supplementary records for 2011 reveal the following itemized costs for merchandising activities:

    Invoice cost of merchandise purchases

    $150,000

    Purchase discounts received

    2,500

    Purchase returns and allowances

    2,700

    Cost of transportation in

    5,000

    Required

    1. Use the supplementary records to compute the total cost of merchandise purchases for 2011.

    2. Prepare a 2011 multiple step income statement. (Inventory at December 31, 2010, is $70,100.)

    3. Prepare a single step income statement for 2011.

    4. Prepare closing entries for KC Antiques at December 31, 2011.

    5. Compute the acid test ratio and the gross margin ratio. Explain the meaning of each ratio and interpret them for KC Antiques.

     

    prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions for both 645402

    Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions for both the seller (BMX) and buyer (Sanuk).

    May 4 BMX sold $1,500 of merchandise on account to Sanuk, terms FOB shipping point, ny45, invoice dated May 4. The cost of the merchandise was $900.

    May 6 Sanuk paid transportation charges of $30 on the May 4 purchase from BMX.

    May 8 BMX sold $1,000 of merchandise on account to Sanuk, terms FOB destination, ny30, invoice dated May 8. The cost of the merchandise was $700.

    May 10 BMX paid transportation costs of $50 for delivery of merchandise sold to Sanuk on May 8.

    May 16 BMX issued Sanuk a $200 credit memorandum for merchandise returned. The merchandise was purchased by Sanuk on account on May 8. The cost of the merchandise returned was $140.

    May 18 BMX received payment from Sanuk for purchase of May 8.

    May 21 BMX sold $2,400 of merchandise on account to Sanuk, terms FOB shipping point, 2/10, n/EOM. BMX prepaid transportation costs of $100, which were added to the invoice. The cost of the merchandise was $1,440.

    May 31 BMX received payment from Sanuk for purchase of May 21, less discount (2% 3 $2,400).

    a company has 550 000 in net sales and 193 000 in gross profit this means its cost o 645403

    1. A company has $550,000 in net sales and $193,000 in gross profit. This means its cost of goods sold equals

    a. $743,000

    b. $550,000

    c. $357,000

    d. $193,000

    e. $(193,000)

    2. A company purchased $4,500 of merchandise on May 1 with terms of 2/10, n/30. On May 6, it returned $250 of that merchandise. On May 8, it paid the balance owed for merchandise, taking any discount it is entitled to. The cash paid on May 8 is

    a. $4,500

    b. $4,250

    c. $4,160

    d. $4,165

    e. $4,410

    3. A company has cash sales of $75,000, credit sales of $320,000, sales returns and allowances of $13,700, and sales discounts of $6,000. Its net sales equal

    a. $395,000

    b. $375,300

    c. $300,300

    d. $339,700

    e. $414,700

    4. A company’s quick assets are $37,500, its current assets are $80,000, and its current liabilities are $50,000. Its acid test ratio equals

    a. 1.600

    b. 0.750

    c. 0.625

    d. 1.333

    e. 0.469

    5. A company’s net sales are $675,000, its costs of goods sold are $459,000, and its net income is $74,250. Its gross margin ratio equals

    a. 32%

    b. 68%

    c. 47%

    d. 11%

    e. 34%

    enter the letter for each term in the blank space beside the definition that it most 645407

    Enter the letter for each term in the blank space beside the definition that it most closely matches.

    A. Cash discount

    B. Credit period

    C. Discount period

    D. FOB destination

    E. FOB shipping point

    F. Gross profit

    G. Merchandise inventory

    H. Purchase discount

    I. Sales discount

    J. Trade discount

    1. Ownership of goods is transferred when delivered to the buyer’s place of business.

    2. Time period in which a cash discount is available.

    3. Difference between net sales and the cost of goods sold.

    4. Reduction in a receivable or payable if it is paid within the discount period.

    5. Purchaser’s description of a cash discount received from a supplier of goods.

    6. Ownership of goods is transferred when the seller delivers goods to the carrier.

    7. Reduction below list or catalog price that is negotiated in setting the price of goods.

    8. Seller’s description of a cash discount granted to buyers in return for early payment.

    9. Time period that can pass before a customer’s payment is due.

    10. Goods a company owns and expects to sell to its customers.

    prepare journal entries to record each of the following purchases transactions of a 645408

    1. The cost of merchandise inventory includes which of the following:

    a. Costs incurred to buy the goods.

    b. Costs incurred to ship the goods to the store(s).

    c. Costs incurred to make the goods ready for sale.

    d. Both a and b.

    e. a, b, and c.

    2. Prepare journal entries to record each of the following purchases transactions of a merchandising company.

    Show supporting calculations and assume a perpetual inventory system.

    Mar. 5 Purchased 500 units of product at a cost of $5 per unit. Terms of the sale are 2/10, n/60; the invoice is dated March 5.

    Mar. 7 Returned 50 defective units from the March 5 purchase and received full credit.

    Mar. 15 Paid the amount due from the March 5 purchase, less the return on March 7.

    a physical count of its july 31 year end inventory discloses that the cost of the me 645411

    Nix’It Company’s ledger on July 31, its fiscal year end, includes the following selected accounts that have normal balances (Nix’It uses the perpetual inventory system).

    Merchandise inventory

    $ 34,800

    Sales returns and allowances

    $ 3,500

    T. Nix, Capital 

    115,300

    Cost of goods sold

    102,000

    T. Nix, Withdrawals

    7,000

    Depreciation expense

    7,300

    Sales 

    157,200

    Salaries expense

    29,500

    Sales discounts

    1,700

    Miscellaneous expenses

    2,000

    A physical count of its July 31 year end inventory discloses that the cost of the merchandise inventory still available is $32,900. Prepare the entry to record any inventory shrinkage.

    use the following information on current assets and current liabilities to compute a 645413

    1. Use the following information on current assets and current liabilities to compute and interpret the acid test ratio. Explain what the acid test ratio of a company measures.

    Cash 

    $1,200

    Prepaid expenses

    $ 600

    Accounts receivable

    2,700

    Accounts payable

    4,750

    Inventory

    5,000

    Other current liabilities

    950

    2. Identify similarities and differences between the acid test ratio and the current ratio. Compare and describe how the two ratios reflect a company’s ability to meet its current obligations.

     

    prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for a retail store assu 645420

    Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for a retail store. Assume a perpetual inventory system.

    Apr. 2 Purchased merchandise from Blue Company under the following terms: $3,600 price, invoice dated April 2, credit terms of 2/15, n/60, and FOB shipping point.

    3 Paid $200 for shipping charges on the April 2 purchase.

    4 Returned to Blue Company unacceptable merchandise that had an invoice price of $600.

    17 Sent a check to Blue Company for the April 2 purchase, net of the discount and the returned merchandise.

    18 Purchased merchandise from Fox Corp. under the following terms: $7,500 price, invoice dated April 18, credit terms of 2/10, n/30, and FOB destination.

    21 After negotiations, received from Fox a $2,100 allowance on the April 18 purchase.

    28 Sent check to Fox paying for the April 18 purchase, net of the discount and allowance.

    prepare entries for spare parts to record the may 5 sale and each of the following s 645423

    Spare Parts was organized on May 1, 2011, and made its first purchase of merchandise on May 3. The purchase was for 1,000 units at a price of $10 per unit. On May 5, Spare Parts sold 600 of the units for $14 per unit to De Soto Co. Terms of the sale were 2/10, n/60. Prepare entries for Spare Parts to record the May 5 sale and each of the following separate transactions a through c using a perpetual inventory system.

    a. On May 7, De Soto returns 200 units because they did not fit the customer’s needs. Spare Parts restores the units to its inventory.

    b. On May 8, De Soto discovers that 50 units are damaged but are still of some use and, therefore, keeps the units. Spare Parts sends De Soto a credit memorandum for $300 to compensate for the damage.

    c. On May 15, De Soto discovers that 72 units are the wrong color. De Soto keeps 43 of these units because Spare Parts sends a $92 credit memorandum to compensate. De Soto returns the remaining 29 units to Spare Parts. Spare Parts restores the 29 returned units to its inventory.

    on may 7 de soto returns 200 units because they did not fit the customer s needs spa 645424

    Spare Parts was organized on May 1, 2011, and made its first purchase of merchandise on May 3. The purchase was for 1,000 units at a price of $10 per unit. On May 5, Spare Parts sold 600 of the units for $14 per unit to De Soto Co. Terms of the sale were 2/10, n/60. Prepare entries for Spare Parts to record the May 5 sale and each of the following separate transactions a through c using a perpetual inventory system.

    a. On May 7, De Soto returns 200 units because they did not fit the customer’s needs. Spare Parts restores the units to its inventory.

    b. On May 8, De Soto discovers that 50 units are damaged but are still of some use and, therefore, keeps the units. Spare Parts sends De Soto a credit memorandum for $300 to compensate for the damage.

    c. On May 15, De Soto discovers that 72 units are the wrong color. De Soto keeps 43 of these units because Spare Parts sends a $92 credit memorandum to compensate. De Soto returns the remaining 29 units to Spare Parts. Spare Parts restores the 29 returned units to its inventory.

    Prepare the appropriate journal entries for De Soto Co. to record the May 5 purchase and each of the three separate transactions a through c. De Soto is a retailer that uses a perpetual inventory system and purchases these units for resale.

    prepare journal entries that hope corporation records for these transactions 645425

    On May 11, Smythe Co. accepts delivery of $30,000 of merchandise it purchases for resale from Hope Corporation. With the merchandise is an invoice dated May 11, with terms of 3/10, n/90, FOB shipping point. The goods cost Hope $20,000. When the goods are delivered, Smythe pays $335 to Express Shipping for delivery charges on the merchandise. On May 12, Smythe returns $1,200 of goods to Hope, who receives them one day later and restores them to inventory. The returned goods had cost Hope $800. On May 20, Smythe mails a check to Hope Corporation for the amount owed. Hope receives it the following day. (Both Smythe and Hope use a perpetual inventory system.)

    1. Prepare journal entries that Smythe Co. records for these transactions.

    2. Prepare journal entries that Hope Corporation records for these transactions.

     

    accrued sales salaries amount to 1 600 prepaid selling expenses of 2 000 have expire 645429

    The following list includes selected permanent accounts and all of the temporary accounts from the December 31, 2011, unadjusted trial balance of Deacon Co., a business owned by Julie Deacon. Use these account balances along with the additional information to journalize (a) adjusting entries and (b) closing entries. Deacon Co. uses a perpetual inventory system.

     

    Debit

    Credit

    Merchandise inventory

    $ 28,000

     

    Prepaid selling expenses

    5,000

     

    J. Deacon,Withdrawals

    2,200

     

    Sales

     

    $429,000

    Sales returns and allowances

    16,500

     

    Sales discounts

    4,000

     

    Cost of goods sold 

    211,000

     

    Sales salaries expense

    47,000

     

    Utilities expense 

    14,000

     

    Selling expenses

    35,000

     

    Administrative expenses

    95,000

     

    Additional Information

    Accrued sales salaries amount to $1,600. Prepaid selling expenses of $2,000 have expired. A physical count of year end merchandise inventory shows $27,450 of goods still available.

    explain how the error in the physical count affects the company s gross margin ratio 645431

    A retail company recently completed a physical count of ending merchandise inventory to use in preparing adjusting entries. In determining the cost of the counted inventory, company employees failed to consider that $2,000 of incoming goods had been shipped by a supplier on December 31 under an FOB shipping point agreement. These goods had been recorded in Merchandise Inventory as a purchase, but they were not included in the physical count because they were in transit. Explain how this overlooked fact affects the company’s financial statements and the following ratios: return on assets, debt ratio, current ratio, and acid test ratio.

    Explain how the error in the physical count affects the company’s gross margin ratio and its profit margin ratio.

    journalize the following merchandising transactions for csi systems assuming it uses 645433

    Journalize the following merchandising transactions for CSI Systems assuming it uses a perpetual inventory system.

    1. On November 1, CSI Systems purchases merchandise for $1,400 on credit with terms of 2/5, n/30, FOB shipping point; invoice dated November 1.

    2. On November 5, CSI Systems pays cash for the November 1 purchase.

    3. On November 7, CSI Systems discovers and returns $100 of defective merchandise purchased on November 1 for a cash refund.

    4. On November 10, CSI Systems pays $80 cash for transportation costs with the November 1 purchase.

    5. On November 13, CSI Systems sells merchandise for $1,500 on credit. The cost of the merchandise is $750.

    6. On November 16, the customer returns merchandise from the November 13 transaction. The returned items sell for $200 and cost $100.

    prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming th 645434

    1. A company reports the following sales related information: Sales (gross) of $100,000; Sales discounts of $2,000; Sales returns and allowances of $8,000; Sales salaries expense of $5,000. Prepare the net sales portion only of this company’s multiple step income statement.

    2. Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for a retail store. Assume a perpetual inventory system.

    Apr. 2 Purchased merchandise from Blue Company under the following terms: $3,600 price, invoice dated April 2, credit terms of 2/15, n/60, and FOB shipping point.

    3 Paid $200 for shipping charges on the April 2 purchase.

    4 Returned to Blue Company unacceptable merchandise that had an invoice price of $600.

    17 Sent a check to Blue Company for the April 2 purchase, net of the discount and the returned merchandise.

    18 Purchased merchandise from Fox Corp. under the following terms: $7,500 price, invoice dated April 18, credit terms of 2/10, n/30, and FOB destination.

    21 After negotiations, received from Fox a $2,100 allowance on the April 18 purchase.

    28 Sent check to Fox paying for the April 18 purchase, net of the discount and allowance.

    Prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming that the periodic inventory system is used.

     

    prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming th 645435

    Taos Company purchased merchandise for resale from Tuscon Company with an invoice price of $22,000 and credit terms of 3/10, n/60. The merchandise had cost Tuscon $15,000. Taos paid within the discount period. Assume that both buyer and seller use a perpetual inventory system.

    1. Prepare entries that the buyer should record for (a) the purchase and (b) the cash payment.

    2. Prepare entries that the seller should record for (a) the sale and (b) the cash collection.

    3. Assume that the buyer borrowed enough cash to pay the balance on the last day of the discount period at an annual interest rate of 11% and paid it back on the last day of the credit period. Compute how much the buyer saved by following this strategy. (Assume a 365 day year and round dollar amounts to the nearest cent, including computation of interest per day.)

    Prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming that the periodic inventory system is used by both the buyer and the seller. (Skip the part 3 requirement.)

    prepare journal entries that hope corporation records for these transactions 645436

    On May 11, Smythe Co. accepts delivery of $30,000 of merchandise it purchases for resale from Hope Corporation. With the merchandise is an invoice dated May 11, with terms of 3/10, n/90, FOB shipping point. The goods cost Hope $20,000. When the goods are delivered, Smythe pays $335 to Express Shipping for delivery charges on the merchandise. On May 12, Smythe returns $1,200 of goods to Hope, who receives them one day later and restores them to inventory. The returned goods had cost Hope $800. On May 20, Smythe mails a check to Hope Corporation for the amount owed. Hope receives it the following day. (Both Smythe and Hope use a perpetual inventory system.)

    1. Prepare journal entries that Smythe Co. records for these transactions.

    2. Prepare journal entries that Hope Corporation records for these transactions.

    prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming that the periodic inventory system is used by both the buyer and the seller.

    journalize the following merchandising transactions for csi systems assuming it uses 645437

    Journalize the following merchandising transactions for CSI Systems assuming it uses a perpetual inventory system.

    1. On November 1, CSI Systems purchases merchandise for $1,400 on credit with terms of 2/5, n/30, FOB shipping point; invoice dated November 1.

    2. On November 5, CSI Systems pays cash for the November 1 purchase.

    3. On November 7, CSI Systems discovers and returns $100 of defective merchandise purchased on November 1 for a cash refund.

    4. On November 10, CSI Systems pays $80 cash for transportation costs with the November 1 purchase.

    5. On November 13, CSI Systems sells merchandise for $1,500 on credit. The cost of the merchandise is $750.

    6. On November 16, the customer returns merchandise from the November 13 transaction. The returned items sell for $200 and cost $100.

    Prepare journal entries to record each of the merchandising transactions assuming that the periodic inventory system is used.

    what factors create uncertainty when estimating future costs and revenues 645369

    1. Define the terms efficiency and effectiveness and distinguish one from the other. Why is measuring the efficiency of discretionary costs often difficult? Explain how the effectiveness of discretionary cost activities can be measured.
    2. What types of discretionary costs are subject to control as engineered costs? Provide several examples.
    3. Why do firms hold cash balances? Why do some firms hold larger cash balances than other firms?
    4. How is technology affecting supply chain purchasing practices and transaction costs?
    5. What are the four generic approaches to reducing uncertainty? Describe the context in which each approach is typically used.
    6. What factors create uncertainty when estimating future costs and revenues?

    discuss how such a maintenance work order system would aid in cost control 645371

    (Cost control; financial records; writing) Idaho Industrial is a medium size manufacturing corporation in a capital intensive industry. Currently, actual profits are not meeting expectations. As a result, investment funds are limited and hiring is restricted. These consequences of the corporation’s problems have placed a strain on the plant’s repair and maintenance program. The result has been a reduction in work efficiency and cost control effectiveness in the repair and maintenance area.

    The assistant controller proposes the installation of a maintenance work order system to overcome these problems. This system would require a work order to be prepared for each repair request and for each regular maintenance activity. The maintenance superintendent would record the estimated time to complete a job and send one copy of the work order to the department in which the work would be performed. The work order would also serve as a job cost sheet. Actual cost of parts and supplies used on the job as well as actual labor costs incurred in completing the job would be recorded directly on the work order. A copy of the completed work order would be the basis for the charge to the department in which the repair or maintenance activity occurred.

    The maintenance superintendent opposes the program because the added paper work will be costly and nonproductive. The superintendent states that the departmental clerk who now schedules repairs and maintenance activities is doing a good job without all the extra forms the new system would require. The real problem, in the superintendent’s opinion, is that the department is understaffed.

    a. Discuss how such a maintenance work order system would aid in cost control.

    b. Explain how a maintenance work order system might assist the maintenance superintendent in getting authorization to hire more staff.

    brenda barnes has just been appointed the new director of youth hot line a not for p 645374

    (Cost control activities; writing) Brenda Barnes has just been appointed the new director of Youth Hot Line, a not for profit organization that operates a phone bank for teen age individuals experiencing emotional difficulties. The phones are staffed by qualified social workers and psychologists who are paid on an hourly basis. Barnes took the following actions in the first week on her new job. Indicate whether the actions represent cost understanding (CU), cost containment (CC), cost avoidance (CA), or cost reduction (CR). Some actions may have more than one implication; if they do, indicate the reason.

    a. Increased the advertising budget appropriation for the hotline.

    b. Exchanged the more expensive push button, cream colored, designer telephones for regular push button desk telephones.

    c. Eliminated the call forwarding feature installed on all telephones because Youth Hot Line will now be staffed 24 hours a day.

    d. Eliminated two paid clerical positions and replaced these individuals with volunteers.

    e. Ordered blank notepads for the counselors to keep by their phones; the old note pads (stock now depleted) had the Youth Hot Line logo and address printed on them.

    f. Negotiated a new contract with the telephone company. Youth Hot Line will now pay a flat rate of $100 per month regardless of the number of telephones installed. The previous contract charged the organization $10 for every telephone. At the time that contract was signed, Youth Hot Line had only 10 telephones. With the increased staff, Barnes plans to install at least five additional telephones.

    identify in the following scenarios whether the cost change is attributable to effec 645375

    (Causes of cost changes; writing) Identify in the following scenarios whether the cost change is attributable to effects of cost behavior (CB), inflation/deflation (I/D), supplier cost adjustment (CA), or quantity purchased (QP). Defend your answer.

    a. Allison Mfg. experienced an increase in fuel costs following an increase in crude oil prices by members of OPEC.

    b. Foremost Plastics experienced an increase in the cost of plastic resins when its main supplier merged with one of its competitors.

    c. The amount Kimball Co. spent on raw materials declined when its sales volume dropped by 20 percent because of diminished overseas demand for its products.

    d. Minerva Industrial reduced the price it paid for fasteners when it consolidated the purchases made from five vendors to just one vendor.

    e. The price of corn syrup purchased by California Confectionary increased when the demand for corn based ethanol jumped dramatically.

    f. The amount Madison Beef Processing expended for direct labor jumped 25 percent when demand for the company’s products jumped following the EU’s removal of its U.S. beef import restrictions.

    g. The price Villanova Steel paid for its metal products increased when it adopted JIT manufacturing practices and began purchasing steel in small lot sizes.

    h. The cost of executive travel at Hudson Financial Services dropped by 20 percent when two new airlines began providing services at the airport nearest the firm’s headquarters.

    classify each of these costs as normally being either committed c or discretionary d 645376

    (Committed vs. discretionary costs; writing) A list of committed and discretionary costs follows.

    Annual audit fees

    Internal audit salaries

    Annual report preparation and printing

    Marketing research

    Building flood insurance

    Preventive maintenance

    Charitable contributions

    Property taxes

    Corporate advertising

    Quality control inspection

    Employee continuing education

    Research and development salaries

    Equipment depreciation

    Research and development supplies

    Interest on bonds payable

    Secretarial pool salaries

    a. Classify each of these costs as normally being either committed (C) or discretionary (D).

    b. Which of these costs can be either committed or discretionary based on management philosophy?

    c. For the expenses marked discretionary in (a), provide a monetary or nonmonetary surrogate output measure. For each output measure, briefly discuss any objections that could be raised to it.

    indicate the type of each of the following described costs explain the rationale for 645377

    (Committed vs. discretionary costs; writing) Choose letter C (for committed cost) or D (for discretionary cost) to indicate the type of each of the following described costs. Explain the rationale for your choice.

    a. Control is first provided during the capital budgeting process.

    b. Typical examples include advertising, research and development, and employee training.

    c. This type of cost cannot be easily reduced even during temporary slowdowns in activity.

    d. There is usually no “correct” amount at which to set funding levels.

    e. Typical examples include depreciation, lease rentals, and property taxes.

    f. This type of cost often provides benefits that are not monetarily measurable.

    g. Temporary reductions can usually be made without impairing the firm’s long range capacity or profitability.

    h. This cost is primarily affected by long run decisions regarding desired capacity levels.

    i. It often is difficult to ascribe outcomes as being closely correlated with this type of cost.

    j. This cost usually relates to service type activities.

    perform a variance analysis for management on the quality control labor cost 645381

    (Engineered cost variances) Management at Robo Weld Inc. has estimated that each quality control inspector should be able to make an average of 24 inspections per hour. Retired factory supervisors are excellent quality control inspectors because of their familiarity with the products and processes in the plant. Robo Weld management has decided to staff the quality control program with these individuals and has set $20 as the standard hourly rate. During the first month of the new program, 50,040 inspections were made, and the total pay to the inspectors was $38,950 for 2,050 hours of work.

    a. Perform a variance analysis for management on the quality control labor cost.

    b. Assume that management could hire eight full time inspectors for a monthly salary of $4,500 each and hire part timers for the overflow. Each full time inspector would work 170 hours per month. How would the total cost of this alternative compare to the cost of a 2,050 hour month at the standard rate of $20 per hour?

    does this method of evaluation encourage the human resources office managers to hire 645382

    (Variance analysis; ethics; writing) Cost control in the Human Resources Office of Eastern Wholesale is evaluated based on engineered cost concepts. The office incurs both variable and fixed costs. The variable costs are largely driven by the amount of employee turnover. For 2010, budgeted costs in the Human Resources Office were:

    Fixed

    $400,000

    Variable

    800,000 (based on projected turnover of 2,000 employees)

    For 2010, actual costs in the Human Resources Office were:

    Fixed

    $440,000

    Variable

    900,000 (actual turnover of 2,100 employees)

    Using traditional variance analysis, evaluate the control of fixed and variable costs in the Human Resources Office. Does this method of evaluation encourage the Human Resources Office managers to hire low quality workers? Explain.

    discuss how you would use the coefficient of determination to select the best predic 645385

    (Coping with uncertainty; writing) You have been assigned the task of projecting the cost of 2011 employee fringe benefits for your firm and have identified number of employees, total labor hours, and total labor cost as candidate independent variables for use in the estimation equation. Using historical data and ordinary least squares regression, you calculate the coefficient of determination for each of the candidate variables. You get the following results:

    Coefficient of

    Variable

    Determination

    Number of employees

    0.87

    Total labor hours

    0.95

    Total labor cost

    0.81

    a. Discuss how you would use the coefficient of determination to select the best predictor variable.

    b. What are the highest and lowest possible values for the coefficient of determination? Explain.

    in light of the survey results did the company effectively control costs of assembly 645388

    (Cost control; writing) Slydell Industries produces a variety of consumer goods including lamps, home office desks, and storage cabinets. Many products sold by the company are purchased disassembled, and then assembled by the customer. To assist the customer with assembly, Slydell provides a free hotline staffed 24 hours daily and provides an assembly manual with each item sold. The firm produces the assembly manuals in house and maintains very tight control over the production costs of the manuals. For the latest year, the company spent $9,000,000 writing, publishing, and packaging assembly manuals for its products. The manager tasked with managing the production of assembly manuals was speaking with the CEO and noted that “our actual production cost of $9,000,000 for assembly manuals was $700,000 under budget. I am very proud of my employees and their efforts to control costs for the company.”

    The CEO pondered the statement for a moment and then responded, “According to survey results that reached my desk only this morning, 65 percent of our customers use the hotline for assistance with product assembly; only 7 percent ever open their manual.”

    a. In light of the survey results, did the company effectively control costs of assembly manuals? Explain.

    b. In the long term, why must cost control efforts be viewed through the eyes of the customer rather than through the accounting system only?

    indicate the potential advantages and disadvantages of the use of temporaries in eac 645389

    (Cost control; writing) Temporary or part time employees may be used rather than full time employees in each of the following situations:

    a. To teach undergraduate accounting courses at a university.

    b. To serve as security guards.

    c. To staff a health clinic in a rural area.

    d. To write articles for a monthly technical magazine.

    e. To clean the house when the regular maid is ill.

    f. To answer questions on a tax help line during tax season.

    g. To work in department stores during the Christmas rush.

    h. To do legal research in a law firm.

    i. To perform quality control work in a car manufacturing plant.

    j. To do seamstress work in a custom dress shop.

    k. To work as a clerk/cashier in a small retail store. The store is a mom and pop operation, and the clerk is the only employee in the store when he or she works.

    Indicate the potential advantages and disadvantages of the use of temporaries in each of these situations. These advantages and disadvantages can be viewed from the stand point of the employer or the user of the employer’s products or services.

    the following list describes the budgetary changes from november to december that ar 645390

    (Cost consciousness) Sue and Jim Hansen are preparing their household financial budget for December. They have started with their November budget and are adjusting it to reflect the difference between November and December in planned activities. The Johnsons are expecting out of town guests for two weeks over the holiday season. The following list describes the budgetary changes from November to December that are contemplated by the Hansen family:

    a. Increase the grocery budget by $165.

    b. Decrease the commuter transportation budget by $70 to reflect the days off from work.

    c. Change food budget to reflect serving pizza rather than steak and lobster each weekend.

    d. Budget an extra $80 for utilities.

    e. Reduce household maintenance budget by $90 to reflect the fact that outside maid services will not be used over the holiday period.

    f. Buy generic breakfast cereal rather than name brand due to the quantity the guests will consume.

    g. Use paper plates to avoid using the dishwasher as often.

    h. Buy the institutional size packages of paper plates rather than smaller size packages.

    i. Budget the long distance phone bill at $40 less because there will be no need to call the relatives who will be visiting.

    j. Budget movie costs at $2 per DVD rather than $12 per person to go to the movies.

    k. Postpone purchasing of needed work clothes until the January sales.

    l. Budget funds to repair the car. Sue plans to use part of her vacation time to make the repairs herself rather than take the car to a garage in January.

    Indicate whether each of these items indicates cost understanding (CU), cost containment (CC), cost avoidance (CA), or cost reduction (CR). Some items may have more than one answer.

    calculate the achieved efficiency for the first month and briefly comment on it 645391

    (Efficiency standards) Lucy Liu has been asked to monitor the efficiency and effectiveness of a newly installed machine. The specialized machine has been guaranteed by the manufacturer to package 2,000 engine gaskets per kilowatt hour (kWh).The rate of defects on production is estimated at 2 percent. The machine is equipped with a device to measure the number of kWhs used. During the first month of use, the machine packaged 350,000 gaskets, of which 5,000 were flawed, and it used 180 kWh.

    a. What is the efficiency standard for flawless output?

    b. Calculate the achieved efficiency for the first month and briefly comment on it.

    c. Determine the achieved effectiveness and briefly comment on it.

    d. Assume that the company was charged $4.50 per kWh during the first month this machine was in service. Estimate the company’s savings or loss in power costs because of the machine’s efficiency level in the first month of operations.

    e. If you were a customer buying this company’s gaskets for use in automobile production, what level of quality control would you want the company to have and why?

    discuss whether it would be ethical to evaluate the edp department manager based onl 645392

    (Effectiveness/efficiency; ethics; writing) Top management of Capital Services observed that the budget for the EDP department had been growing far beyond what was anticipated for the past several years. Each year, the EDP manager would demonstrate that increased usage by the company’s non EDP departments would justify a larger appropriation. The administrative vice president commented that she was not surprised because user departments were not charged for the EDP department services and EDP department personnel were creative and eager to continue expanding services. A review of the current year’s statistics of the EDP department revealed the following:

    Budgetary appropriation

    $2,000,000, based on 4,000 hours of run time;

    $1,600,000 of this appropriation is related to fixed costs

    Actual department expenses

    Variable, $370,500 (incurred for 3,900 hours of run time)

    Fixed, $1,630,000

    a. Did the EDP manager stay within his appropriation? Show calculations.

    b. Was the EDP department effective? Show calculations. Comment.

    c. Was the EDP department efficient? Show calculations. (Hint: Treat variable and fixed expenses separately.)

    d. Using the formulas for analyzing variable and fixed costs, calculate the variances incurred by the EDP department.

    e. Propose a rate per hour to charge user departments for EDP services. Do you think charging users will affect the demand for services by user departments? Why or why not?

    f. Discuss whether it would be ethical to evaluate the EDP department manager based only on comparing budgeted versus actual costs and ignoring differences between budgeted and actual volume.

    birmingham chemical evaluates performance in part through the use of flexible budget 645393

    (Budget to actual comparison) Birmingham Chemical evaluates performance in part through the use of flexible budgets. The selling expense budgets at three activity levels within the relevant range follow.

    Activity Measures

    Unit sales volume

    15,000

    17,500

    20,000

    Dollar sales volume

    $15,000,000

    $17,500,000

    $20,000,000

    Number of orders processed

    1,500

    1,750

    2,000

    Number of salespersons

    100

    100

    100

    Monthly Selling and Administrative Expenses

    Advertising and promotion

    $1,600,000

    $1,600,000

    $1,600,000

    Administrative salaries

    80,000

    80,000

    80,000

    Sales salaries

    100,000

    100,000

    100,000

    Sales commissions

    600,000

    700,000

    800,000

    Salesperson travel

    200,000

    225,000

    250,000

    Sales office expense

    445,000

    452,500

    460,000

    Shipping expense

    650,000

    675,000

    700,000

    Total

    $ 3,675,000

    $3,832,500

    $3,999,000

    The following assumptions were used to develop the selling expense flexible budgets:

    • The average size of the company’s sales force during the year was planned to be 100 people.
    • Salespersons are paid a monthly salary plus commission on gross dollar sales.
    • The travel costs have both a fixed and a variable element. The fixed portion is related to the number of salespersons, and the variable portion tends to fluctuate with gross dollars of sales.
    • Sales office expense is a mixed cost, with the variable portion related to the number of orders processed.
    • Shipping expense is a mixed cost, with the variable portion related to the number of units sold. (An order consists of 10 units.)

    A sales force of 90 persons generated a total of 1,600 orders, resulting in a sales volume of 16,000 units during November. The gross dollar sales amounted to$14.9 million. The selling expenses incurred for November were as follows:

    Advertising and promotion

    $1,550,000

    Administrative salaries

    80,000

    Sales salaries

    101,000

    Sales commissions

    609,000

    Salesperson travel

    185,000

    Sales office expense

    500,000

    Shipping expense

    640,000

    Total

    $3,665,000

    a. Explain why the selling expense flexible budget would not be appropriate for evaluating the company’s November selling expense, and indicate how the flexible budget would have to be revised.

    b. Determine the budgeted variable cost per salesperson and variable cost per sales order for the company.

    c. Prepare a selling expense report for November that the company can use to evaluate its control over selling expenses. The report should have a line for each selling expense item showing the appropriate budgeted amount, the actual selling expense, and the monthly dollar variation.

    d. Determine the actual variable cost per salesperson and variable cost per sales order processed for the company.

    e. Comment on the effectiveness and efficiency of the salespersons during November.

    what was the incentive included in the act to induce firms to bring cash earned abro 645394

    (Cash management; research) Multinational firms domiciled in the United States do not have to pay U.S. income taxes on foreign earnings, unless those earnings are returned to the United States. Accordingly, the U.S. income tax system acts as a deterrent to firms to bring cash earned abroad back to the United States. In 2004, the U.S. Congress passed the American Jobs Creation Act. One of the stated objectives of this act was to induce U.S. multinational firms to bring cash back to the United States to support growth of the domestic economy. Research the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 and answer the following questions:

    a. What was the incentive included in the Act to induce firms to bring cash earned abroad back to the United States?

    b. Approximately how much cash was repatriated during the incentive period of the act?

    discuss how the high rate of growth has created the cash crunch martin rsquo s firm 645396

    (Cash management; writing) Jose Martin founded a firm that manufactures innovative toys. Since its founding in 2000, the firm has experienced steady growth. However, in the past six months, the firm’s products were featured on two major network television shows. As a result of that exposure, the demand for the firm’s products jumped dramatically. To meet demand, the firm ramped up production by adding a second shift of workers. With the added production capacity, the firm has been producing at 80 percent above levels of the prior year. One of the surprising side effects of this growth has been a severe cash crunch. Just this morning, Martin obtained the following balance sheet information from his CFO:

    Current assets

    Cash

    $ 200,000

    Accounts receivable

    950,000

    Inventory

    3,900,000

    Current liabilities

    Accounts payable

    $2,900,000

    Wages payable

    900,000

    Taxes payable

    300,000

    a. Discuss how the high rate of growth has created the cash crunch Martin’s firm is currently experiencing.

    b. What strategies would you propose to Martin to deal with the cash shortage?

    the financial results for the business education department of omega educational ser 645397

    (Comprehensive; analyzing cost control) The financial results for the Business Education Department of Omega Educational Services Corporation for November 2010 are presented in the schedule at the end of this problem. Caroline Roper, president of Omega Educational Services, is pleased with the final results but has observed that the revenue and most of the costs and expenses of this department exceeded the budgeted amounts. Bret Shulman, vice president of the Business Education Department, has been requested to provide an explanation for any amount that exceeded the budget by 5 percent or more.

    Shulman has accumulated the following facts to assist in his analysis of the November results:

    • The budget for calendar year 2010 was finalized in December 2009, and at that time, a full program of business education courses was scheduled to be held in St. Louis during the first week of November 2010. The schedule allowed eight courses to be run on each of the five days during the week. The budget assumed that there would be 425 participants in the program and 1,000 participant days for the week.
    • Omega Educational Services charges a flat fee of $150 per day of course instruction, so the fee for a three day course is $450. Omega grants a 10 percent discount to persons who subscribe to its publications. The 10 percent discount is also granted to second and subsequent registrants for the same course from the same organization. However, only one discount per registration is allowed.

    Historically, 70 percent of the participant day registrations are at the full fee of $150 per day, and 30 percent of the participant day registrations receive the discounted fee of $135 per day. These percentages were used in developing the November 2010 budgeted revenue.

    • The following estimates were used to develop the budgeted figures for course related expenses:

    Food charges per participant day (lunch/coffee breaks)

    $ 27

    Course materials per participant

    8

    Instructor fee per day

    1,000

    • A total of 530 individuals participated in the St. Louis courses in November 2010, accounting for 1,280 participant days. This number included 20 persons who took a new, two day course on pension accounting that was not on the original schedule; thus, on two of the days, nine courses were offered, and an additional instructor was hired to cover the new course. The breakdown of the course registrations follows.

    Full fee registrations

    704

    Discounted fees

    Current periodical subscribers

    128

    New periodical subscribers

    128

    Second registration from the same organization

    320

    Total participant day registrations

    1,280

    A combined promotional mailing was used to advertise the St. Louis pro gram and a program in Boston that was scheduled for December 2010. The incremental costs of the combined promotion were $5,000, but none of the promotional expenses ($20,000) budgeted for the Boston program in December will have to be incurred. This earlier than normal promotion for the Boston program has resulted in early registration fees collected in November as follows(in terms of participant days):

    Full fee registrations

    140

    Discounted registrations

    60

    Total participant day registrations

    200

    • Omega Educational Services includes $2,000 in each monthly budget for the • purpose of updating courses or adding new ones. The additional amount spent on course development during November was for an unscheduled course that will be offered in February for the first time.

    Shulman has prepared the following quantitative analysis of the November 2010 variances:

    Omega Educational Services Corporation

    Statement of Operations Business Education Department

    For the Month Ended November 30, 2010

    Favorable

    Favorable

    (Unfavorable)

    (Unfavorable)

    Budget

    Actual

    Dollars

    Percent

    Revenue: Course fees

    $145,500

    $212,460

    $ 66,960

    46.0

    Expenses

    Food charges

    $ 27,000

    $ 32,000

    $ (5,000)

    (18.5)

    Course materials

    3,400

    4,770

    (1,370)

    (40.3)

    Instructor fees

    40,000

    42,000

    (2,000)

    (5.0)

    Instructor travel

    9,600

    9,885

    (285)

    (3.0)

    Staff salaries and benefits

    12,000

    12,250

    (250)

    (2.1)

    Staff travel

    2,500

    2,400

    100

    4.0

    Promotion

    20,000

    25,000

    (5,000)

    (25.0)

    Course development

    2,000

    5,000

    (3,000)

    (150.0)

    Total expenses

    $116,500

    $133,305

    $(16,805)

    (14.4)

    Revenue over expenses

    $ 29,000

    $ 79,155

    $ 50,155

    172.9

    Omega Educational Services Corporation

    Analysis of November 2010 Variances

    Budgeted revenue

    $145,500

    Variances

    Quantity variance [(1,280 − 1,000) X $145.50]

    $40,740 F

    Mix variance [($143.25 − $145.50) X 1,280]

    2,880 U

    Timing difference ($145.50 X 200)

    29,100 F

    66,960 F

    Actual revenue

    $212,460

    Budgeted expenses

    $116,500

    Quantity variances

    Food charges [(1,000 − 1,280) X $27]

    $ 7,560 U

    Course materials [(425 − 530) X $8]

    840 U

    Instructor fees (2 − $1,000)

    2,000 U

    10,400 U

    Price variances

    Food charges [($27 − $25) X 1,280]

    $ 2,560 F

    Course materials [($8 − $9) X 530]Timing differences

    530 U

    2,030 F

    Promotion

    $ 5,000 U

    Course development

    3,000 U

    8,000 U

    Variances not analyzed (5% or less)

    Instructor travel

    $ 285 U

    Staff salaries and benefits

    250 U

    Staff travel

    100 F

    435 U

    Actual expenses

    $133,305

    After reviewing Shulman’s quantitative analysis of the November variances, pre pare a memorandum addressed to Roper explaining the following:

    a. The cause of the revenue mix variance.

    b. The implication of the revenue mix variance.

    c. The cause of the revenue timing difference.

    d. The significance of the revenue timing difference.

    e. The primary cause of the unfavorable total expense variance.

    f. How the favorable food price variance was determined.

    g. The impact of the promotion timing difference on future revenues and expenses.

    h. Whether or not the course development variance has an unfavorable impact on the company.

    assume that you are the firm rsquo s controller would you support the use of the e p 645398

    (Supply chain management; writing) Your employer, Lawson Brake Systems, implemented an e procurement system last year for purchasing nonoperating inputs. The installation has been such a success that the firm is now considering using the same system to acquire operating inputs (e.g., direct material and product components).

    However, some executives in the firm are reluctant to implement such a system for operating inputs because it does not support the rich collaboration that is necessary for effective supply chain cost management. Current systems support exchange of only basic transactional information: price, product availability, shipping terms and dates, and routine transaction processing including electronic ordering and electronic payments.

    a. Assume that you are the firm’s controller. Would you support the use of the e procurement system for purchasing operating inputs? Why or why not?

    b. Assume that you are vice president of product development. Would you support installation of the e procurement system? Why or why not?

    what advice would you offer the proponents of the police academy to minimize losses 645399

    (Coping with uncertainty) As an accounting intern working for your local police department, you learn that the department is considering starting a citizen’s police academy. In recent years, there have been events that have created friction between the police department and the citizens. The police academy is intended to create goodwill within the community and increase communication between the department and the community. You have been invited to advise the departmental management about man aging the financial risk associated with the academy. You have learned that there is a federal program that provides grants to fund citizen police academies and that the program provides a reimbursement of costs up to $600 per participant. Following are estimated costs of the academy as determined by the departmental sponsors of the academy:

    Variable costs

    Supplies

    $200

    Meals

    $80

    Equipment

    $150

    Fixed costs

    Rental for training facilities

    $25,000

    Although the chief of police is very supportive of the police academy proposal, he is adamant that there is no slack in the department’s budget to cover unreimbursed costs; thus, he has asked for assurance that the costs of the police academy will be covered by the federal grant program.

    a. How many citizens must participate in the program to reach the break even point?

    b. Is there financial risk in the proposed police academy for the police department? Explain.

    c. What advice would you offer the proponents of the police academy to minimize losses the department could incur in offering the police academy?

    what is the division rsquo s manufacturing cycle efficiency 645292

    (Throughput) Management at Southeast Crafts has decided to begin using throughput as a divisional performance measure. The Durham Division is a job shop that carefully crafts furniture to customer specifications. The following first quarter information is available for the division:

    Good units started, completed, and sold

    98,400

    Total units completed

    104,448

    Total value added hours of processing time

    15,360

    Total hours of divisional time

    24,000

    a. What is the division’s manufacturing cycle efficiency?

    b. What is the division’s process productivity?

    c. What is the division’s process quality yield?

    d. What is the total hourly throughput?

    e. Discuss whether throughput is as useful a performance measurement in a job shop as in an automated plant. Why would you expect process quality yield to be high in a job shop? Why might a job shop such as Durham Division have a low manufacturing cycle efficiency?

    determine the effect of the new project on south rsquo s compensation for each of th 645293

    (Pay plan and sub optimization) Jeannie South is a division manager of Montana Manufacturing Inc. She is in the process of evaluating a $4,000,000 investment. The following net annual increases, before depreciation, in divisional income are expected during the investment’s five year life:

    Year 1

    $ 400,000

    Year 2

    600,000

    Year 3

    760,000

    Year 4

    3,200,000

    Year 5

    3,200,000

    All company assets are depreciated using the straight line method. South receives an annual salary of $300,000 plus a bonus of 2 percent of divisional pre tax profits. Before consideration of the potential investment project, she anticipates that her division will generate $4,000,000 annually in pre tax profit.

    a. Compute the effect of the new investment on the level of divisional pre tax profits for years 1 through 5.

    b. Determine the effect of the new project on South’s compensation for each of the five years.

    c. Based on your computations in (b), will South want to invest in the new project? Explain.

    d. Would upper management likely view the new investment favorably? Explain.

    san francisco sea salt rsquo s controller prepared the following cash flow statement 645296

    (Statement of cash flows) San Francisco Sea Salt’s controller prepared the following cash flow statements (in thousands of dollars) for the past two years, the current year (2010), and the upcoming year (2011):

    Budget

    2008

    2009

    2010

    2011

    Net cash flows from operating activities

    Net income

    $ 41,700

    $ 39,200

    $ 43,700

    $ 45,100

    Add net reconciling items

    2,200

    4,300

    3,000

    4,000

    Total

    $ 43,900

    $ 43,500

    $ 46,700

    $ 49,100

    Net cash flows from investing activities

    Purchase of plant and equipment

    $(18,700)

    $(12,200)

    $ (4,600)

    Sale (purchase) of investments

    8,700

    $ (3,600)

    (12,600)

    (15,800)

    Other investing inflows

    1,200

    800

    600

    2,400

    Total

    $ (8,800)

    $ (2,800)

    $(24,200)

    $(18,000)

    Net cash flows from financing activities

    Payment of notes payable

    $(12,000)

    $(24,000)

    $(15,000)

    $ (7,000)

    Payment of dividends

    (20,000)

    (7,000)

    (13,300)

    (20,000)

    Total

    $(32,000)

    $(31,000)

    $(28,300)

    $(27,000)

    Net change in cash

    $ 3,100

    $ 9,700

    $ (5,800)

    $ 4,100

    After preparation of the budgeted cash flow statement for 2011, Lana Kaslowski, the company president, asked you to recompile it based on a separate set of facts. She is evaluating a proposal to purchase a local area network (LAN) computer system for the company at a total cost of $50,000. The proposal has been deemed to provide a satisfactory rate of return. However, she does not want to issue additional stock and would prefer not to borrow any more money to finance the project.

    Projecting the market value of the accumulated investments for the previous two years ($3,600 and $12,600) reveals an estimate that these investments could be liquidated for $18,400. Kaslowski said the investments scheduled for 2011 could be delayed indefinitely and that dividends could be reduced to 40 percent of the budgeted amount. These are the only changes that can be made to the original forecast.

    a. Evaluate the cash trends for the company during the 2008–2011 period.

    b. Giving effect to the preceding changes, prepare a revised 2011 budgeted statement of cash flows and present the original and revised versions in a comparative format.

    c. Based on the revised budgeted SCF, can the LAN computer system be purchased if Kaslowski desires an increase in cash of at least $1,000?

    d. Comment on the usefulness of the report prepared in (b) to Kaslowski.

    explain whether the proposed cash flow measure would be less subject to manipulation 645297

    (Cash flow; ethics) Wayne Coyle, the controller of PEI Potato Co., is disillusioned with the company’s system of evaluating the performance of divisional profit centers and their managers. The present system focuses on a comparison of budgeted to actual income from operations. Coyle’s major concern with the current system is the ease with which profit center managers can manipulate the measure “Income from operations.” Most corporate sales are made on credit and most purchases are made on account. The profit centers are organized according to product line. Following is the second quarter 2010 income statement for one of the company’s profit centers:

    Sales

    $31,500,000

    Cost of goods sold

    (25,500,000)

    Gross profit

    $ 6,000,000

    Selling and administrative expenses

    (4,500,000)

    Income from operations

    $ 1,500,000

    Coyle has suggested that company management replace the accrual based income from operations evaluation measure with a cash flow from operations measure. He believes this measure will be less susceptible to manipulation by profit center managers. To defend his position, he compiles a cash flow income statement for the same profit center:

    Cash receipts from customers

    $26,400,000

    Cash payments for production labor, materials, and overhead

    (21,600,000)

    Cash payments for selling and administrative activities

    (4,200,000)

    Cash flow from operations

    $ 600,000

    a. If Coyle is correct that profit center managers are manipulating the income measure, where are manipulations likely taking place?

    b. Explain whether the proposed cash flow measure would be less subject to manipulation than the income measure.

    c. Explain whether manipulation would be reduced if both the cash flow and income measures were utilized.

    d. Do the cash and income measures reveal different information about profit center performance? Explain.

    e. How could the existing income statement be used more effectively in evaluating performance?

    which as indicated by the performance measures are the most likely areas to improve 645298

    (ROI) Evergreen Industries operates a chain of lumber stores. In 2010, corporate management examined industry level data and determined the following performance targets for lumber retail stores:

    Asset turnover

    1.9

    Profit margin

    7.0%

    The actual 2010 results for the company’s lumber retail stores are as follows:

    Total assets at beginning of year

    $10,200,000

    Total assets at end of year

    12,300,000

    Sales

    28,250,000

    Operating expenses

    25,885,000

    a. For 2010, how did the lumber retail stores perform relative to their industry norms?

    b. Which, as indicated by the performance measures, are the most likely areas to improve performance in the retail lumber stores?

    c. What are the advantages and disadvantages of setting a performance target at the start of the year compared with one that is determined at the end of the year based on actual industry performance?

    which as indicated by the performance measures are the most likely areas to improve 645299

    (ROI; RI) Fashion Fabrics sells sewing and craft materials to specialty retail and department stores. For 2010, the company’s New York Division had the following performance targets:

    Asset turnover

    3.0

    Profit margin

    5.5%

    Actual information concerning the performance of the New York Division in 2010follows.

    Total assets at beginning of year

    $ 7,400,000

    Total assets at end of year

    9,900,000

    Sales

    24,000,000

    Operating expenses

    23,160,000

    a. For 2010, did the New York Division achieve its target objectives for ROI, asset turnover, and profit margin?

    b. Which, as indicated by the performance measures, are the most likely areas to improve performance?

    c. If the company has an overall target return of 13 percent, what was the New York Division’s residual income for 2010?

    what future difficulties might arise if sanchez acts in a manner that will make gree 645300

    (Adjusting income for ROI purposes; ethics) Imelda Sanchez, manager of the Arias Division of Poncé Chemical, is evaluated based on the division’s return on investment and residual income. Near the end of November 2010, she was reviewing the division’s financial information as well as some activities projected for the remainder of the year. The information she was reviewing follows.

    1. Annual sales were projected at 100,000 units, each with a selling price of $30.Sanchez has received a purchase order from a new customer for 5,000 units. The purchase order states that the units should be shipped on January 3, 2011, for arrival on January 5.

    2. The division’s 2010 beginning inventory was 500 units, each with a cost of $11.Purchases of 99,500 units have been made steadily throughout the year, and the per unit cost has been constant at $10. Sanchez intends to make a purchase of 5,200 units before year end, providing a 200 unit balance in inventory after making the shipment to the new customer. Carrying costs for the units are quite high, but ordering costs are extremely low. The division uses a last in, first out (LIFO) cost flow assumption for inventory.

    3. Shipping expenses are $0.50 per unit sold.

    4. Sanchez has just received a notice from her primary supplier that he is going out of business and is selling his remaining stock of 15,000 units for $9 each. She makes a note to herself to place her final order for the year from this supplier.

    5. Division advertising is $5,000 per month for newspaper inserts and television spots. No advertising has yet been purchased for December, but Sanchez intends to have her sales manager call the paper and TV station early next week.

    6. Salaries through the end of the year are projected at $700,000.This amount assumes that the position to be vacated by the division’s personnel manager will be filled on December 1. The personnel manager’s job pays $66,000 per year. Sanchez has an interview on Monday with an individual who appears to be a good candidate for the position.

    7. Other general and administrative costs for the full year are estimated to total $590,000.

    8. As Sanchez was reviewing the divisional information, she received a phone call from the division’s maintenance supervisor. He informed her that $10,000 of electrical repairs to the office heating system are necessary. When asked if the repairs were essential, the supervisor replied, “No, the office won’t burn down if you don’t make them, but they are advisable for energy efficiency and long term operation of the system.” Sanchez tells the supervisor to see her on Monday at8:00 a.m.

    Using her information, Sanchez prepared a budgeted income statement and was fairly pleased with the division’s results. Although providing the 13 percent rate of return on investment desired by corporate management, the results did not reach the 16 percent rate needed for Sanchez to receive a bonus for the year.

    a. Prepare a 2010 budgeted income statement for the Arias Division. Determine the division’s residual income, assuming that the division has an asset investment base of $4,500,000.

    b. Sanchez’s less than scrupulous friend, John Greer, walked into the house at this time. When he heard that she was not going to receive a bonus, Greer said, “Here, let me take care of this for you.” He proceeded to recompute the budgeted income statement and showed Sanchez that, based on his computation of $723,000 in income, she would receive her bonus. Prepare Greer’s budgeted income statement.

    c. What future difficulties might arise if Sanchez acts in a manner that will make Greer’s pro forma income statement figures a reality?

    identify several items that lancaster should control if it is to be evaluated fairly 645301

    (ROI; RI) Morton Industrial produces stamping machinery for manufacturers. In 2009, the company expanded vertically by acquiring a supplier, Lancaster Company. Lancaster is now operated as a divisional investment center.

    Morton monitors its divisions on the basis of both unit contribution and return on investment (ROI), with investment defined as average operating assets employed. Management bonuses are determined based on ROI. All investments in operating assets are expected to earn a minimum return of 10 percent before income taxes.

    Lancaster’s cost of goods sold is entirely variable, whereas the division’s administrative expenses are totally fixed. Selling expenses are a mixed cost with 40 percent attributed to sales volume. Last year, Lancaster’s ROI was 13.6 percent. During the fiscal year ended November 30, 2010, Lancaster contemplated a capital acquisition with an estimated ROI of 11.5 percent; however, division management decided that the investment would decrease Lancaster’s overall ROI.

    The division’s operating assets employed were $15,750,000 at November 30, 2010,a 5 percent increase over the 2009 year end balance. The division’s 2010 income statement follows.

    LANCASTER DIVISION

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended November 30, 2010

    ($000 omitted)

    Sales revenue

    $ 25,000

    Less expenses

    Cost of goods sold

    $16,500

    Administrative expenses

    3,955

    Selling expenses

    2,700

    (23,155)

    Income from operations before income taxes

    $ 1,845

    a. Calculate the segment margin for the Lancaster Division, assuming that 1,484,000 units were produced and sold during the year ended November 30, 2010.

    b. Calculate the following performance measures for 2010 for the Lancaster Division:

    1. pre tax ROI, and

    2. residual income calculated on the basis of average operating assets employed.

    c. Explain why the management of the Lancaster Division would have been more likely to accept the contemplated capital acquisition if residual income rather than ROI were used as a performance measure.

    d. Identify several items that Lancaster should control if it is to be evaluated fairly by either the ROI or residual income performance measures.

    compute the projected roi for each division disregarding the contemplated new invest 645302

    (Decisions based on ROI and RI) Miami Marine uses ROI to evaluate the performance of both its Powerboat and Sailboat Division managers. The following estimates of relevant measures have been made for the upcoming year:

    Powerboats

    Sailboats

    Total Company

    Sales

    $18,000,000

    $48,000,000

    $66,000,000

    Expenses

    16,200,000

    42,000,000

    58,200,000

    Divisional assets

    15,000,000

    30,000,000

    45,000,000

    Both division managers have the autonomy to make decisions regarding new investments. The Powerboats manager is considering investing in a new asset that would generate a 14 percent ROI; the Sailboats manager is considering an investment that would generate an 18 percent ROI.

    a. Compute the projected ROI for each division, disregarding the contemplated new investments.

    b. Based on your answer in (a), which manager is likely to actually invest in the additional assets under consideration?

    c. Are the outcomes of the investment decisions in (b) likely to be consistent with overall corporate goals? Explain.

    d. If the company evaluated the division managers’ performances using a residual income measure with a target return of 15 percent, would the outcomes of the investment decisions be different from those described in (b)? Explain.

    if only 560 000 of the units produced in april had been sold would your answers to a 645304

    (Throughput) Jill Haas is a divisional manager within Tulsa GPS Guidance Systems. Haas is concerned about the amount of the division’s production. The following production data are available for April 2010:

    Total units completed

    846,720

    Total good units completed and sold

    719,712

    Total value added hours of processing time

    15,680

    Total hours of processing time

    56,000

    Determine each of the following for this division for April.

    a. What is the manufacturing cycle efficiency?

    b. What is the process productivity?

    c. What is the process quality yield?

    d. What is the total throughput per hour?

    e. If only 560,000 of the units produced in April had been sold, would your answers to any of the preceding questions differ? If so, how? If not, why not?

    f. If Haas can eliminate 20 percent of the NVA time, how would throughput per hour for these data differ?

    g. If Haas can increase quality output to a yield of 90 percent and eliminate 20 percent of the NVA time, how would throughput per hour for these data differ?

    h. How would Haas determine how the NVA time was being spent in the division? What suggestions do you have for decreasing NVA time and increasing yield?

    when performance reporting systems have been properly implemented both employees and 645305

    (Providing feedback on performance; writing) Terry Travers is the manufacturing supervisor of the Aurora Manufacturing Company, which produces a variety of plastic products. Some of these products are standard items that are listed in the company’s catalog, whereas others are made to customer specifications. Each month, Travers receives a performance report displaying the budget for the month, the actual activity for the period, and the variance between budget and actual. Part of Travers’ annual performance evaluation is based on his department’s performance against budget. Aurora’s purchasing manager, Bob Christensen, also receives monthly performance reports and is evaluated in part on the basis of these reports.

    The most recent monthly reports were just distributed when Travers met Christensen in the hallway outside their offices. Scowling, Travers began the conversation, “I see we have another set of monthly performance reports hand delivered by that not very nice junior employee in the budget office. He seemed pleased to tell me that I was in trouble with my performance again.”

    Christensen: “I got the same treatment. All I ever hear about are the things I haven’t done right. Now, I’ll have to spend a lot of time reviewing the report and preparing explanations. The worst part is that the information is almost a month old, and we spend all this time on history.”

    Travers: “My biggest gripe is that our production activity varies a lot from month to month, but we’re given an annual budget that’s written in stone. Last month, we were shut down for three days when a strike delayed delivery of the basic material used in our plastic formulation, and we had already exhausted our inventory. You know that, of course, since we had asked you to call all over the country to find an alternate source of supply. When we got what we needed on a rush basis, we had to pay more than we normally do.”

    Christensen: “I expect problems like that to pop up from time to time—that’s part of my job—but now we’ll both have to take a careful look at the report to see where charges are reflected for that rush order. Every month, I spend more time making sure I should be charged for each item reported than I do making plans for my department’s daily work. It’s really frustrating to see charges for things I have no control over.”

    Travers: “The way we get information doesn’t help, either. I don’t get copies of the reports you get, yet a lot of what I do is affected by your department, and by most of the other departments we have. Why do the budget and accounting people assume that I should be told only about my operations even though the president regularly gives us pep talks about how we all need to work together as a team?”

    Christensen: “I seem to get more reports than I need, and I am never getting asked to comment until top management calls me on the carpet about my department’s shortcomings. Do you ever hear comments when your department shines?”

    Travers: “I guess they don’t have time to review the good news. One of my problems is that all the reports are in dollars and cents. I work with people, machines, and materials. I need information to help me solve this month’s problems—not another report of the dollars expended last month or the month before.”

    a. Based on the conversation between Travers and Christensen, describe the likely motivation and behavior of these two employees resulting from Aurora Manufacturing Company’s performance reporting system.

    b. 1. When performance reporting systems have been properly implemented, both employees and companies should benefit from them. Describe the benefits that can be realized from using a performance reporting system.

    2. Based on the situation presented here, recommend ways for Aurora Manufacturing Company to improve its performance system to increase employee motivation.

    indicate two performance measurements that could be obtained from a cost management 645306

    (Performance measurement; BSC) For each of the following items, indicate two performance measurements that could be obtained from a cost management system. Classify each item into one of the four balanced scorecard perspectives.

    a. Quality

    b. Cost

    c. Production line flexibility

    d. People productivity and development

    e. Inventory management

    f. Lead time

    g. Responsive after sales service

    h. Customer satisfaction and retention

    i. Product and process design

    j. Manufacturing planning process

    k. Procurement process

    l. Manufacturing process

    m. Management accomplishments

    n. Marketing/sales and customer service

    o. Delivery performance

    p. Financial accounting services

    one of the fundamental performance measurements in an organization rsquo s balanced 645308

    (Balanced scorecard; research; writing) One of the fundamental performance measurements in an organization’s balanced scorecard learning and growth perspective is number of patents obtained. The following information from the U.S. Patent & Trademark Office indicates the total U.S. patents issued for 2008.

    Company

    Total Patents

    1. IBM

    4,186

    2. Samsung Electronics

    3,515

    3. Canon

    2,114

    4. Microsoft

    2,030

    5. Intel

    1,776

    6. Matsushita Electric Industrial

    1,745

    7. Toshiba

    1,609

    8. Fujitsu

    1,494

    9. Sony

    1,485

    10. Hewlett Packard

    1,424

    In a team of three or four people, research these companies on the Web and prepare a written report on their financial performance, customers’ perceptions of their service and product quality, and manufacturing operations (such as level of automation in plants).

    why would the use of eva discourage a high growth strategy 645309

    (Balanced scorecard; EVA; writing) Chesterville Manufacturing makes a variety of glass products having both commercial and household applications. One of its newest divisions, ColOptics, manufactures fiber optic cable and other high tech products. Recent annual operating results (in millions) for ColOptics and two older divisions follow.

    ColOptics

    Industrial Glass

    Kitchenware

    Sales

    $500

    $1,800

    $1,500

    Segment income

    50

    184

    170

    Chesterville Manufacturing uses economic value added (EVA) as its only segment performance measure. Clare Cole, CEO of Chesterville, posed some serious questions in a memo to the controller, Doug Larsen, after studying the operating results.

    After pondering the memo and studying the operating results, Larsen passed the memo and operating results to you, his newest employee in the controller’s office, and asked you to respond to the following questions:

    a. Why would the use of EVA discourage a high growth strategy?

    b. Could the concept of the balanced scorecard be used to encourage a higher rate of growth in ColOptics? Explain.

    what effects are the performance evaluation measures of the president likely to have 645311

    (Performance evaluation; ethics; writing) In September 2010,Lyon Precision Corporation (LPC) decided to launch an expansion plan for some product lines. To finance this expansion, the firm has decided to issue $400,000,000 of new common stock in November 2010.

    Historically, the firm’s innovative cell phone was a significant contributor to corporate profits. However, a competitor has recently introduced a multifunctional cell phone that has rendered LPC’s cell phone obsolete. The controller has informed LPC’s president that the inventory value of the cell phones needs to be reduced to its net realizable value. Because LPC has a large inventory of the cell phones in stock, the write down will have a very detrimental effect on both the balance sheet and income statement.

    The president, whose compensation is determined in part by corporate profits and in part by stock price, has suggested that the write downs be deferred until January 2011. He argues that, by deferring the write down, existing shareholders will realize more value from the shares to be sold in November because the stock market will not be informed of the pending write downs.

    a. What effects are the performance evaluation measures of the president likely to have on his decision to defer the write down of the obsolete inventory?

    b. Is the president’s decision to defer the write down of the inventory an ethical treatment of existing shareholders? Of potential new shareholders?

    c. If you were the controller of Lyon Precision Corporation, how would you respond to the president’s decision to defer the write down until after issuance of the new stock?

    compute the amount of compensation paid to the new coach in each of his first three 645312

    (Compensation; writing) Relative to worker compensation, no topic is more hotly debated than the minimum wage law. Using concepts from this chapter, prepare a report in which you explain why increases in the minimum wage are not desirable and how alternative mechanisms could be used to increase the compensation of low paid workers.

    (Pay plans and goal congruence) In 2010, the lead story in your college newspaper reports the details of the hiring of the current football coach. The previous football coach was fired for failing to win games and attract fans. In his last season, his record was 1 win and 11 losses. The news story states that the new coach’s contract provides for a base salary of $600,000 per year plus an annual bonus computed as follows:

    Win less than 5 games

    $ 0

    Win 5 to 7 games

    75,000

    Win 8 games or more

    150,000

    Win 8 games and conference championship

    250,000

    Win 8 games, win conference, and get a bowl bid

    350,000

    The coach’s contract has essentially no other features or clauses.

    The first year after the new coach is hired, the football team wins three games and loses eight. In the second year, the team wins six games and loses five. In the third year, the team wins nine games, wins the conference championship, and is invited to a prestigious bowl. Shortly after the bowl game, articles appear on the front page of several national sports publications announcing that your college’s football program has been cited by the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA) for nine major rule violations including cash payoffs to players, playing academically ineligible players, illegal recruiting tactics, illegal involvement of alumni in recruiting, and so on. The national news publications agree that the NCAA will disband your college’s football program. One article also mentions that during the past three years, only 13 percent of senior football players managed to graduate on time. Additional speculation suggests that the responsible parties, including the coaching staff, athletic director, and college president, will be dismissed by the board of trustees.

    a. Compute the amount of compensation paid to the new coach in each of his first three years.

    b. Did the performance measures in the coach’s contract foster goal congruence? Explain.

    c. Would the coach’s actions have been different if other performance measures had been added to the compensation contract? Explain.

    d. What performance measures should be considered for the next coach’s contract, assuming the football program is allowed to continue?

    what are jensen rsquo s options which should he choose and why 645315

    (Performance evaluation; compensation; ethics; writing) Anthem Manufacturing has just initiated a formula bonus plan that rewards plant managers for various achievements. One of the current criteria for bonuses is the improvement of asset turnover. The plant manager of the Eastern Plant asked Sam Jensen, his assistant, to meet him Saturday when the plant is closed. Without explanation, the plant manager specified that certain raw materials were to be loaded on one of the plant’s dump trucks. When the truck was loaded, the plant manager and Jensen drove to a secluded mountain road where, to Jensen’s astonishment, the plant manager flipped a switch and the truck dumped the raw materials down a steep ravine. The plant manager grinned and said that these raw materials were obsolete and the company would run more smoothly without them. For the next several weekends, Jensen observed the plant manager do the same thing. The following month, the plant manager was officially congratulated for improving asset turnover.

    a. How did the dumping improve asset turnover?

    b. What are the ethical problems in this case?

    c. What are Jensen’s options? Which should he choose and why?

    under the present bonus system how would the acquisition of ggi affect peach rsquo s 645316

    (Performance and compensation) Family Fun Vehicle Co.(FFV), a subsidiary of Drummondville Automotive, manufactures go carts and other recreational vehicles. Family recreational centers that feature go cart tracks, miniature golf, batting cages, paint ball wars, and arcade games have increased in popularity. As a result, FFV has been receiving some pressure from Drummondville Automotive top management to diversify into some of these other recreational areas. Great Games Inc.(GGI), one of the largest firms that leases arcade games to family recreation centers, is looking for a friendly buyer. Drummondville Automotive management believes that GGI’s assets could be acquired for an investment of $6.4 million and has strongly urged Sam Peach, division manager of FFV, to consider acquiring GGI.

    Peach has reviewed GGI’s financial statements with his controller, Molly Howe, and they believe that the acquisition may not be in FFV’s best interests. “If we decide not to do this, the Drummondville Automotive people are not going to be happy,” said Peach. “If we could convince them to base our bonuses on something other than return on investment, maybe this acquisition would look more attractive. How would we do if the bonuses were based on residual income using the company’s 15 percent cost of capital?”

    Drummondville Automotive has traditionally evaluated all of its divisions on the basis of return on investment, which is defined as the ratio of operating income to total assets; the desired rate of return for each division is 20 percent. The management team of any division reporting an annual increase in the return on investment is automatically eligible for a bonus. The management of divisions reporting a decline in the return on investment must provide convincing explanations for the decline to be eligible for a bonus, and this bonus is limited to 50 percent of the bonus paid to divisions reporting an increase. Presented below are condensed financial statements for both FFV and GGI for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2010.

    FFV

    GGI

    Sales revenue

    $ 21,000,000

    Leasing revenue

    $ 5,600,000

    Variable expenses

    (14,000,000)

    (2,000,000)

    Fixed expenses

    (3,000,000)

    (2,400,000)

    Operating income

    $ 4,000,000

    $ 1,200,000

    Current assets

    $ 4,600,000

    $ 3,800,000

    Long term assets

    11,400,000

    2,600,000

    Total assets

    $ 16,000,000

    $ 6,400,000

    FFV

    GGI

    Current liabilities

    $ 2,800,000

    $ 1,900,000

    Long term liabilities

    7,600,000

    2,600,000

    Shareholders’ equity

    5,600,000

    1,900,000

    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

    $ 16,000,000

    $ 6,400,000

    a. Under the present bonus system how would the acquisition of GGI affect Peach’s bonus expectations?

    b. If Peach’s suggestion to use residual income as the evaluation criterion is accepted, how would acquisition of GGI affect Peach’s bonus expectations?

    c. Given the present bonus arrangement, is it fair for Drummondville Automotive management to expect Peach to acquire GGI?

    d. Is the present bonus system consistent with Drummondville Automotive’s goal of expansion of FFV into new recreational products?

    calculate the degree of effectiveness of the training relative to number of employee 645367

    BigBiz, Inc., a firm with global operations, has developed a training program for compliance with company policy and international laws regarding hiring practices. The company believes it can treat the cost of this training as an engineered cost. The following data were extracted from documents addressing the training plan and from records regarding actual performance:

    Planned volume of training

    21,600 employees

    Total budgeted trainer days

    120

    Actual volume of training

    24,800 employees

    Actual trainer days

    130

    Required:

    a. Calculate the degree of effectiveness of the training relative to number of employees trained.

    b. Calculate planned efficiency for the trainers.

    c. Calculate the actual efficiency of the trainers.

    d. Comment on the performance of the trainers.

    why does the general control model begin with planning activities 645368

    1. How does the cost control system interact with the overall cost management system?
    2. Why does the general control model begin with planning activities?
    3. At what points in time is cost control for any specific organizational activity exercised? Why are these points of cost control important?
    4. What factors can cause costs to change? Which of these factors are subject to cost containment and which are not? What creates the difference in controllability?
    5. Differentiate between committed and discretionary costs. Could a cost be considered discretionary by one firm and committed by another? If so, discuss and give an example. If not, discuss why not.
    6. Why is it often difficult to measure the output of activities funded by discretionary costs?

    why might managers favor this abc system instead of august rsquo s older system whic 645257

    Product costing in an ABC system The August Manufacturing Company in Rochester, Minnesota, assembles and tests electronic components used in handheld video phones. Consider the following data regarding component T24:

    Direct materials cost

    $82.00

    Direct labor cost

    $23.00

    Activity costs allocated

    ?

    Manufacturing product cost

    $?

    The activities required to build the component follow:

     

     

    Cost Allocated

    Activity

    Allocation Base

    to Each Unit

    Start station

    Number of raw component chasis

    6 * $ 1.60

    =

    $9.60

    Dip insertion

    Number of dip insertions

    ? * $ 0.20

    =

    5.20

    Manual insertion

    Number of manual insertions

    10 * $ 0.40

    =

    ?

    Wave solder

    Number of components soldered

    6 * $ 1.70

    =

    10.20

    Backload

    Number of backload insertions

    8 * $ ?

    =

    6.40

    Test

    Testing hours

    0.43 * $ 60.00

    =

    ?

    Defect analysis

    Defect analysis hours

    0.13* $ ?

    =

    $5.20

    Total indirect activity costs

     

     

     

    $?

    Requirements

    1. Complete the missing items for the two tables.

    2. Why might managers favor this ABC system instead of August’s older system, which allocated all conversion costs on the basis of direct labor?

    which product costs are reported in the external financial statements which costs ar 645258

    Product costing in an ABC system  Prescott, Inc., manufactures bookcases and uses an activity based costing system. Prescott’s activity areas and related data follow:

     

    Budgeted Cost

     

    Cost

    Activity

    of Activity

    Allocation Base

    Allocation Rate

    Materials handling

    $230,000

    Number of parts

    $0.50

    Assembly

    3,200,000

    Direct labor hours

    16.00

    Finishing

    180,000

    Number of finished units

    4.50

    Prescott produced two styles of bookcases in October: the standard bookcase and an unfinished bookcase, which has fewer parts and requires no finishing. The totals for quantities, direct materials costs, and other data follow:

     

    Total

    Total Direct

    Total Direct

    Total

    Total Assembling

     

    Units

    Materials

    Labor

    Number

    Direct Labor

    Product

    Produced

    Costs

    Costs

    of Parts

    Hours

    Standard bookcase

    3,000

    $36,000

    $45,000

    9,000

    4,500

    Unfinished bookcase

    3,500

    35,000

    35,000

    7,000

    3,500

    Requirements

    1. Compute the manufacturing product cost per unit of each type of bookcase.

    2. Suppose that pre manufacturing activities, such as product design, were assigned to the standard bookcases at $7 each, and to the unfinished bookcases at $2 each. Similar analyses were conducted of post manufacturing activities such as distribution, marketing, and customer service. The post manufacturing costs were $22 per standard bookcase and $14 per unfinished bookcase. Compute the full product costs per unit.

    3. Which product costs are reported in the external financial statements? Which costs are used for management decision making? Explain the difference.

    4. What price should Prescott’s managers set for unfinished bookcases to earn $15 per bookcase?

    compare the indirect activity based costs per unit to the indirect costs per unit fr 645259

    Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems  Corbertt Pharmaceuticals manufactures an over the counter allergy medication. The company sells both large commercial containers of 1,000 capsules to health care facilities and travel packs of 20 capsules to shops in airports, train stations, and hotels. The following information has been developed to determine if an activity based costing system would be beneficial: 

     

    Estimated

     

    Estimated

     

    Indirect

    Allocation

    Quantity of

    Activity

    Activity Costs

    Base

    Allocation Base

    Materials handling

    $95,000

    Kilos

    19,000 kilos

    Packaging

    219,000

    Machine hours

    5,475 hours

    Quality assurance

    124,500

    Samples

    2,075 samples

    Total indirect costs

    $438,500

     

     

    Other production information includes the following:

     

    Commercial Containers

    Travel Packs

    Units produced

    3,500 containers

    57,000 packs

    Weight in kilos

    14,000

    5,700

    Machine hours

    2,625

    570

    Number of samples

    700

    855

    Requirements

    1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

    2. Use the activity based cost allocation rates to compute the activity costs per unit of the commercial containers and the travel packs. (Hint: First compute the total activity costs allocated to each product line, and then compute the cost per unit.)

    3. Corbertt’s original single allocation base costing system allocated indirect costs to products at $157 per machine hour. Compute the total indirect costs allocated to the commercial containers and to the travel packs under the original system. Then compute the indirect cost per unit for each product.

    4. Compare the indirect activity based costs per unit to the indirect costs per unit from the single allocation base system. How have the unit costs changed? Explain why the costs changed.

    prepare summary journal entries for february under or over allocated conversion cost 645260

    Recording manufacturing costs for a JIT costing system High Point produces fleece jackets. The company uses JIT costing for its JIT production system. High Point has two inventory accounts: Raw and in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. On February 1, 2012, the account balances were Raw and in process inventory, $7,000; Finished goods inventory, $2,200.

    The standard cost of a jacket is $37, comprised of $13 direct materials plus $24 conversion costs. Data for February’s activities follow:

    Number of jackets completed

    20,000

    Direct materials purchased

    $ 257,500

    Number of jackets sold

    19,600

    Conversion costs incurred

    $ 580,000

    Requirements

    1. What are the major features of a JIT production system such as that of High Point?

    2. Prepare summary journal entries for February. Under or over allocated conversion costs are closed to Cost of goods sold monthly.

    3. Use a T account to determine the February 29, 2012, balance of Raw and in process inventory.

    what major difficulty would christi rsquo s managers have in implementing this costs 645261

    Analyzing costs of quality Christi, Inc., is using a costs of quality approach to evaluate design engineering efforts for a new skateboard. Christi’s senior managers expect the engineering work to reduce appraisal, internal failure, and external failure activities. The predicted reductions in activities over the 2 year life of the skateboards follow. Also shown are the cost allocation rates for each activity.

    Activity

    Predicted Reduction in Activity Units

    Activity Cost Allocation Rate Per Unit

    Inspection of incoming materials

    420

    $37

    Inspection of finished goods

    420

    26

    Number of defective units

     

     

    discovered in house

    1,400

    56

    Number of defective units

     

     

    discovered by customers

    325

    75

    Lost sales to dissatisfied customers

    150

    103

    Requirements

    1. Calculate the predicted quality cost savings from the design engineering work.

    2. Christi spent $103,000 on design engineering for the new skateboard. What is the net benefit of this “preventive” quality activity?

    3. What major difficulty would Christi’s managers have in implementing this costs of quality approach? What alternative approach could they use to measure quality improvement?

    why might managers favor this abc system instead of abram rsquo s older system which 645262

    Product costing in an ABC system The Abram Manufacturing Company in Rochester, Minnesota, assembles and tests electronic components used in handheld video phones. Consider the following data regarding component T24:

    Direct materials cost

    $81.00

    Direct labor cost

    $21.00

    Activity costs allocated

    ?

    Manufacturing product cost

    $?

    The activities required to build the component follow:

     

     

    Cost Allocated

    Activity

    Allocation Base

    to Each Unit

    Start station

    Number of raw component chasis

    1 *

    $ 1.20

    =

    $ 1.20

    Dip insertion

    Number of dip insertions

    ? *

    $ 0.35

    =

    11.20

    Manual insertion

    Number of manual insertions

    11 *

    $ 0.20

    =

    ?

    Wave solder

    Number of components soldered

    1 *

    $ 1.60

    =

    1.60

    Backload

    Number of backload insertions

    4 *

    ?

    =

    2.80

    Test

    Testing hours

    0.38 *

    $ 50.00

    =

    ?

    Defect analysis

    Defect analysis hours

    0.14 *

    ?

    =

    5.60

    Total indirect activity costs

     

     

     

     

    $ ?

    Requirements

    1. Complete the missing items for the two tables.

    2. Why might managers favor this ABC system instead of Abram’s older system, which allocated all conversion costs on the basis of direct labor?

    sawyer rsquo s original single allocation base costing system allocated indirect cos 645264

    Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems Sawyer Pharmaceuticals manufactures an over the counter allergy medication. The company sells both large commercial containers of 1,000 capsules to health care facilities and travel packs of 20 capsules to shops in airports, train stations, and hotels. The following information has been developed to determine if an activity based costing system would be beneficial:

    Activity

    Estimated

    Indirect

    Activity Costs

    Allocation Base

    Estimated

    Quantity of

    Allocation Base

    Materials handling

    $115,000

    Kilos

    23,000 kilos

    Packaging

    204,000

    Machine hours

    4,160 hours

    Quality assurance

    114,000

    Samples

    1,900 samples

    Total indirect costs

    $433,000

     

     

    Other production information includes the following:

     

    Commercial Containers

    Travel Packs

    Units produced

    3,400 containers

    55,000 packs

    Weight in kilos

    17,000

    16,500

    Machine hours

    2,720

    550

    Number of samples

    340

    825

    Requirements

    1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

    2. Use the activity based cost allocation rates to compute the activity costs per unit of the commercial containers and the travel packs. (Hint: First compute the total activity costs allocated to each product line, and then compute the cost per unit.)

    3. Sawyer’s original single allocation base costing system allocated indirect costs to products at $150 per machine hour. Compute the total indirect costs allocated to the commercial containers and to the travel packs under the original system. Then compute the indirect cost per unit for each product.

    4. Compare the indirect activity based costs per unit to the indirect costs per unit from the single allocation base system. How have the unit costs changed? Explain why the costs changed as they did.

    prepare summary journal entries for february under or over allocated conversion cost 645265

    Recording manufacturing costs for a JIT costing system Deep Freeze produces fleece jackets. The company uses JIT costing for its JIT production system. Deep Freeze has two inventory accounts: Raw and in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. On February 1, 2012, the account balances were Raw and in process inventory, $10,000; Finished goods inventory, $1,600. The standard cost of a jacket is $39, comprised of $16 direct materials plus $23 conversion costs. Data for February’s activities follow:

    Number of jackets completed

    19,000

    Direct materials purchased

    $ 301,500

    Number of jackets sold

    18,600

    Conversion costs incurred

    $ 538,000

    Requirements

    1. What are the major features of a JIT production system such as that of Deep Freeze?

    2. Prepare summary journal entries for February. Under or over allocated conversion costs are closed to Cost of goods sold monthly.

    3. Use a T account to determine the February 29, 2012, balance of Raw and in process inventory.

    what major difficulty would roxi rsquo s managers have in implementing this costsof 645266

    Analyzing costs of quality Roxi, Inc., is using a costs of quality approach to evaluate design engineering efforts for a new skateboard. Roxi’s senior managers expect the engineering work to reduce appraisal, internal failure, and external failure activities. The predicted reductions in activities over the 2 year life of the skateboards follow. Also shown are the cost allocation rates for each activity.

    Activity

    Predicted Reduction in Activity Units

    Activity Cost Allocation Rate Per Unit

    Inspection of incoming materials

    385

    $39

    Inspection of finished goods

    385

    22

    Number of defective units

     

     

    discovered in house

    1,200

    55

    Number of defective units

     

     

    discovered by customers

    300

    73

    Lost sales to dissatisfied customers

    100

    97

    Requirements

    1. Calculate the predicted quality cost savings from the design engineering work.

    2. Roxi spent $109,000 on design engineering for the new skateboard. What is the net benefit of this “preventive” quality activity?

    3. What major difficulty would Roxi’s managers have in implementing this costsof quality approach? What alternative approach could they use to measure quality improvement?

    lawlor uses one setup for the sheldon job and installs 35 plants what is the total c 645267

    Product costing in an ABC system This exercise continues the Lawlor Lawn Service, Inc., situation Recall that Lawlor completed a special landscaping job for Sheldon’s Ideal Designs. If Lawlor had used activity based costing, Lawlor’s data about the job, including ABC information, would be as follows:

    Sheldon Job details:

     

    Direct materials

    $700

    Direct labor

    $1,200

    ABC Costing Rates:

     

    $275 per setup

     

    $15 per plant

     

    Requirements

    1. Lawlor uses one setup for the Sheldon job and installs 35 plants. What is the total cost of the Sheldon job?

    2. If Sheldon paid $3,900 for the job, what is the profit or loss under ABC?

    if draper wants to earn gross profit equal to 25 of cost how much what fee should it 645268

    Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., Recall that Draper allocated indirect costs to jobs based on a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs. Because Draper provides a service, there are no direct materials costs. Draper is now considering using an ABC system. Information about ABC costs follows:

    Activity

    Budgeted Cost of Activity

    Allocation Base

    Cost Allocation Rate

    Design

    $350,000

    Number of designs

    $7,000

    Programming

    550,000

    Direct labor hours

    110

    Testing

    288,000

    Number of tests

    3,500

    Records for two clients appear here:

    Job

    Total

    Direct Labor

    Costs

    Total

    Number

    of Designs

    Total Programming

    Direct Labor

    Hours

    Number

    of Tests

    Tommy’s Trains

    $

    13,600

    3

    730

    6

    Marcia’s Cookies

     

    600

    5

    300

    8

    Requirements

    1. Compute the total cost of each job.

    2. Is the job cost greater or less than that computed in Problem 17 35 for each job? Why?

    3. If Draper wants to earn gross profit equal to 25% of cost, how much (what fee) should it charge each of these two clients?

    use the ima rsquo s ethical standards see chapter 16 to consider manning rsquo s res 645270

    Cassidy Manning is assistant controller at LeMar Packaging, Inc., a manufacturer of cardboard boxes and other packaging materials. Manning has just returned from a packaging industry conference on activity based costing. She realizes that ABC may help LeMar meet its goal of reducing costs by 5% over each of the next three years. LeMar Packaging’s Order Department is a likely candidate for ABC. While orders are entered into a computer that updates the accounting records, clerks manually check customers’ credit history and hand deliver orders to shipping. This process occurs whether the sales order is for a dozen specialty boxes worth $80, or 10,000 basic boxes worth $8,000. Manning believes that identifying the cost of processing a sales order would justify (1) further computerization of the order process and (2) changing the way the company processes small orders. However, the significant cost savings would arise from elimination of two positions in the Order Department. The company’s sales order clerks have been with the company many years. Manning is uncomfortable with the prospect of proposing a change that will likely result in terminating these employees.

    Requirement

    1. Use the IMA’s ethical standards (see Chapter 16) to consider Manning’s responsibility when cost savings come at the expense of employees’ jobs.

    compute the 2010 segment margin and average assets for household products 645273

    Household Products is a division of Delaware Electronics. The division had the following performance targets for 2010:

    Asset turnover

    3.1

    Profit margin

    6%

    Target rate of return on investments for RI

    15%

    Cost of capital

    9%

    Income tax rate

    35%

    At the end of 2010, the following actual information concerning the company’s performance is available:

    Total assets at beginning of year

    $24,800,000

    Total assets at end of year

    29,600,000

    Average fair market value of invested capital for year

    36,000,000

    Sales

    68,000,000

    Variable operating costs

    34,800,000

    Direct fixed costs

    27,440,000

    Allocated fixed costs

    2,700,000

    Required:

    a. Compute the 2010 segment margin and average assets for Household Products.

    b. Based on segment margin and average assets, compute the profit margin, asset turnover, and ROI.

    c. Evaluate the ROI performance of Household Products.

    d. Using your answers from (b), compute the residual income for Household Products.

    e. Compute the EVA for Household Products using after tax segment margin. What causes EVA and RI to differ?

    f. Based on the data given in the problem, discuss why ROI, EVA, and RI could be inappropriate measures of performance for Household Products.

    calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency mce 645274

    Birmingham Hardwood Frames makes picture frames. During November 2010, manager compiled the following data:

    Total frames manufactured

    1,850,000

    Good frames produced and sold

    1,731,000

    Total processing time (minutes)

    21,120

    Value added processing time (minutes)

    6,920

    Required:

    a. Calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency (MCE).

    b. Calculate the process productivity (PP).

    c. Calculate the process quality yield (PQY).

    d. Calculate throughput using one ratio.

    e. Confirm your answer to (d) using the results of (a), (b), and (c).

    what are the benefits of organizational mission and values statements how are organi 645275

    1. What are the benefits of organizational mission and values statements? How are organizational missions and strategies related to performance measures?
    2. Why is performance measurement important to the success of businesses? Should performance measures be qualitative, quantitative, or both? Justify your answer. For performance measurements to be meaningful, why is it necessary to establish benchmarks?
    3. What benefits can be gained by allowing a manager to participate in developing the performance measures that will be used to assess that manager’s performance?
    4. On what basis should the performance of a responsibility center be measured? What are the traditional financial performance measures for each type of responsibility center? Why can the same quantitative measures of performance not be used for all types of responsibility centers?
    5. How can cash flow be used as a performance measure? In what ways is cash flow a relatively stronger or weaker performance measure than accrual measures such as segment income?
    6. The president of Toys for Boys evaluates the performance of Annie and Andy, the divisional managers, on the basis of a variety of net income measures. Drew, the controller, informs the president that such measures could be misleading. What are the major concerns in defining the “income” measures? Are internal or external measures more susceptible to manipulation? Explain.
    7. What is residual income, and how is it used to measure divisional performance? How is it similar to, and different from, the return on investment measure? How is residual income similar to, and different from, economic value added? How is economic value added superior to residual income as a performance measure?
    8. In designing a performance measurement system, why should managerial rewards be linked to performance measures? Why would an effective compensation strategy treat top managers, middle managers, and other workers differently?

    why is the trend in u s business away from automatic pay increases and toward increa 645276

    1. What is the balanced scorecard? What perspectives are considered in selecting performance measures for the balanced scorecard, and why is each of these perspectives important?
    2. Why is the trend in U.S. business away from automatic pay increases and toward increased use of incentive compensation plans?
    3. If worker performance measures used in a pay for performance plan are not highly correlated with corporate goals, what is the likely result for the organization? For the workers?
    4. How does the time perspective of a performance based plan affect the selection of performance measures?
    5. Why should different missions for two subunits result in different performance reward structures for the managers of those subunits? How does the mission of an organizational subunit affect the mix of financial and nonfinancial, and short term and long term, rewards?
    6. How can feedback, both positive and negative, be used to improve managerial performance? How is feedback used in a performance based reward system?
    7. Many pay structures involve compensation combining both cash and stock. Why do firms want employees to be holders of the firm’s common stock? What additional performance measurement and reward issues are created when managers are not share holders in the firms they manage?
    8. What are some of the important equity issues in designing reward structures? Why is the achievement of equity in the reward structure important?

    compute the return on investment for each division 645282

    (ROI) Data for the three autonomous divisions of Arizona Mining, Inc. for fiscal year 2010 follow.

    Division 1

    Division 2

    Division 3

    Segment income

    $ 220,000

    $ 350,000

    $ 4,500,000

    Asset investment

    2,500,000

    2,000,000

    30,000,000

    Compute the return on investment for each division.

    why were the percentage changes in residual income determined in b so different for 645286

    (RI) London Ltd. operates its two divisions as investment centers. Information about these divisions follows.

    Division 1

    Division 2

    Sales

    $4,200,000

    $1,200,000

    Total variable costs

    2,520,000

    300,000

    Total fixed costs

    500,000

    700,000

    Average assets invested

    6,100,000

    1,100,000

    a. What is the residual income of each division if the “charge” on invested assets is 13 percent? Which division is doing a better job?

    b. If the only change expected for next year is a sales increase of 20 percent, what will be the residual income of each division? Which division will be doing a better job financially?

    c. Why were the percentage changes in residual income determined in (b) so different for Divisions 1 and 2?

    calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency 645290

    (Throughput) Just Nuts, a macadamia nut cannery, is analyzing its throughput for September. The following statistics are obtained for the month:

    Cans packed and sold

    700,000

    Total cans packed

    742,040

    Value added processing time

    650 hours

    Total processing time

    2,450 hours

    a. Calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency.

    b. Calculate the process productivity.

    c. Calculate the process quality yield.

    d. Calculate the throughput using only good units and total time.

    e. Verify your answer to (d) by using your answers to (a), (b), and (c).

    what can company management do to raise hourly throughput 645291

    (Throughput) La Maya Corp. wants to compute its throughput for August 2010.The following production data are available:

    Good units produced and sold

    2,923,200

    Total units produced

    3,360,000

    Total processing time

    144,000 hours

    Value added time

    50,400 hours

    a. Determine the manufacturing cycle efficiency.

    b. Determine the process productivity.

    c. Determine the process quality yield.

    d. Determine the throughput.

    e. What can company management do to raise hourly throughput?

    assume this saves 2 000 000 of the kitting cost and reduces the total number of part 645232

    1. Which statement is false?

    a. Information technology makes it feasible for most companies to adopt ABC.

    b. An ABC system is more refined than one that uses a company wide overhead rate.

    c. ABC focuses on indirect costs.

    d. ABC is used ONLY for manufacturing companies.

    2. Compute It contracts with its suppliers to pre kit certain component parts before delivering them to Compute It. Assume this saves $2,000,000 of the kitting cost and reduces the total number of parts by 200,000,000 (because Compute It considers each pre kit as one part). If a desktop now uses 90 parts, what is the new kitting cost assigned to one desktop?

    a. $4.50

    b. $1.00

    c. $2.70

    d. $3.75

    3. Which of the following would be true for a computer manufacturing company?

    a. ABC helps the company make more informed decisions about products.

    b. Manufacturing computers use only a few activities, so a companywide overhead allocation rate would work well.

    c. Most of the company’s costs are for direct materials and direct labor. Indirect costs are

    a small proportion of total costs.

    d. All the above are true.

    the cost of lost future sales after a customer finds a defect in a product is which 645233

    1. Companies enjoy many benefits from using JIT. Which is not a benefit of adopting JIT?

    a. Ability to respond quickly to changes in customer demand

    b. Lower inventory carrying costs

    c. Ability to continue production despite disruptions in deliveries of raw materials

    d. More space available for production

    2. Which account is not used in JIT costing?

    a. Finished goods inventory

    b. Raw and in process inventory

    c. Work in process inventory

    d. Conversion costs

    3. The cost of lost future sales after a customer finds a defect in a product is which type of quality cost?

    a. Prevention cost

    b. Appraisal cost

    c. Internal failure cost

    d. External failure cost

    4. Spending on testing a product before shipment to customers is which type of quality cost?

    a. External failure cost

    b. Prevention cost

    c. Appraisal cost

    d. None of the above

    gary does not like the idea because he plans to stay in the room rather than ski gar 645235

    Calculating costs using traditional and ABC  Brian and Gary are college friends planning a skiing trip to Killington before the New Year. They estimated the following costs for the trip:

    Estimated

     

    Activity Allocation

    Costs

    Cost Driver

    Brian Gary

    Food

    $550

    Pounds of food eaten

    24

    26

    Skiing

    240

    # of lift tickets

    3

    0

    Lodging

    320

    # of nights

    4

    4

     

    $1,110

     

     

     

    Requirements

    1. Brian suggests that the costs be shared equally. Calculate the amount each person would pay.

    2. Gary does not like the idea because he plans to stay in the room rather than ski. Gary suggests that each type of cost be allocated to each person based on the above listed cost driver. Using the activity allocation for each person, calculate the amount that each person would pay based on his own consumption of the activity.

    compute the abc indirect manufacturing cost per unit for each product 645236

    Computing indirect manufacturing costs per unit Day, Corp., is considering the use of activity based costing. The following information is provided for the production of two product lines:

    Activity

    Cost

    Cost Driver

    Setup

    $106,000

    Number of setups

    Machine maintenance

    55,000

    Machine hours

    Total indirect manufacturing costs

    $161,000

     

     

     

    Product A

    Product B

    Total

    Direct labor hours

    6,500

    5,500

    12,000

    Number of setups

    20

    180

    200

    Number of machine hours

    1,600

    2,400

    4,000

    Day plans to produce 400 units of Product A and 375 units of Product B.

    Requirement

    1. Compute the ABC indirect manufacturing cost per unit for each product.

    calculate the product cost per unit for products c and d using activity based costin 645238

    Using ABC to compute product costs per unit  Accel, Corp., makes two products: C and D. The following data have been summarized:

     

    Product C

    Product D

    Direct materials cost per unit

    $700

    $2,000

    Direct labor cost per unit

    300

    100

    Indirect manufacturing cost per unit

    ?

    ?

    Indirect manufacturing cost information includes the following:

    Setup

    Allocation Rate

    Product C

    Product D

    Machine maintenance

    $1,500/per setup

    38 setups

    75 setups

    Activity

    $ 12/per hour

    1,400 hours

    4,000 hours

    The company plans to manufacture 150 units of each product.

    Requirement

    1. Calculate the product cost per unit for Products C and D using activity based costing.

    calculate the product cost per unit for both products using activity based costing 645239

    Using ABC to compute product costs per unit Jaunkas, Corp., manufactures mid fi and hi fi stereo receivers. The following data have been summarized:

     

    Mid Fi

    Hi Fi

    Direct materials cost per unit

    $400

    $1,300

    Direct labor cost per unit

    400

    300

    Indirect manufacturing cost per unit

    ?

    ?

    Indirect manufacturing cost information includes the following:

    Activity

    Allocation Rate

    Mid–Fi

    Hi–Fi

    Setup

    $1,700/per setup

    39 setups

    39 setups

    Inspections

    $ 400/per hour

    45 hours

    15 hours

    Machine maintenance

    $ 10/per machine hour

    1,900 machine hours

    1,200 machine hours

    The company plans to manufacture 200 units of the mid fi receivers and 250 units of the hi fi receivers.

    Requirement

    1. Calculate the product cost per unit for both products using activity based costing.

    compute pacific rsquo s indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour 645240

    Allocating indirect costs and computing income  Pacific, Inc., is a technology consulting firm focused on Web site development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $775,000 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 5,000 direct labor hours. Pacific’s systems consultants provide direct labor at a rate of $310 per hour. Clients are billed at 160% of direct labor cost. Last month Pacific’s consultants spent 150 hours on Crockett’s engagement.

    Requirements

    1. Compute Pacific’s indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.

    2. Compute the total cost assigned to the Crockett engagement.

    3. Compute the operating income from the Crockett engagement.

    computing abc allocation rates the president of pacific suspects that her allocation 645241

    Computing ABC allocation rates The president of Pacific suspects that her allocation of indirect costs could be giving misleading results, so she decides to develop an ABC system. She identifies three activities: documentation preparation, information technology support, and training. She figures that documentation costs are driven by the number of pages, information technology support costs are driven by the number of software applications used, and training costs are driven by the number of direct labor hours worked. Estimates of the costs and quantities of the allocation bases follow:

    Activity

    Estimated
    Cost

    Allocation Base

    Estimated
    Quantity of
    Allocation Base

    Documentation preparation

    $ 102,000

    Pages

    3,000pages

    Information technology support

    156,000

    Applications used

    780 application

    Training

    517,000

    Direct labor hours

    4,700hours

    Total indirect costs

    $ 775,000

       

    Requirement

    1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.